Skip to main content

Full text of "The annals and magazine of natural history : zoology, botany, and geology"

See other formats 


seh Nic 
ae ht pend 
ase MUAS9 39 it 


Hh 


hi =, Hepes 4 

SRSTeL ae ERS 

Dye} syed 
ints s 


phic 


a 


. 
. hy: 
tees Dea Mae 
Sh 


PSS 
ersasy | 
SNS T 

Mates 


Mili 
se atte 
7 


tA 

Ee Pot eae, 

Fh, OL ia! ote 
tet 


ie t 
wr 285) Me it 
igh ie) 4 


*£ 
Ce AL peat 
a ea 


+ ok 


aS 
THE ANNALS 


AND 


MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY, 


INCLUDING 
ZOOLOGY, BOTANY, ann GEOLOGY. 


(BEING A CONTINUATION OF THE ‘ANNALS’ COMBINED WITH LOUDON AND 
CHARLESWORTH’S ‘MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY, ) 


CONDUCTED BY 


CHARLES C. BABINGTON, Esq., M.A., F.B.S., F.LS., F.G.8., 
JOHN EDWARD GRAY, Ph.D., F.R.S., F.LS., F.Z.8. &e., 
WILLIAM -S. DALLAS, F.LS., 

AND 


WILLIAM FRANCIS, Ph.D., F.L:S. 


Se44 i Ge aes 
Oe ae 


VOL. XIII.—FOURTH SERIES. 


7 ae aaa 


LONDON: 
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS. 


SOLD BY LONGMANS, GREEN, READER, AND DYER; SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, 
AND CO,; KENT AND CO.; WHITTAKER AND CO.: BAILLIERE, PARIS: 
MACLACHLAN AND STEWART, EDINBURGH : 

HODGES, FOSTER, AND CO., DUBLIN: AND ASHER, BERLIN. 


1874. 


«Omnes res creates sunt divine sapientis et potenti testes, divitis felicitatis 
humane :—ex harum usu Jonitas Creatoris; ex pulchritudine sapzentia Domini; 
ex ceconomia in conservatione, proportione, renoyatione, potentia majestatis 
elucet. Earum itaque indagatio ab hominibus sibi relictis semper exstimata ; 
a veré eruditis et sapientibus semper exculta; malé doctis et barbaris semper 
inimica fuit.””—Linnavs. 


“Quel que soit le principe de la vie animale, il ne faut qu’ouvrir les yeux pour 
voir qu’elle est le chef-d’ceuvre de la Toute-puissance, et le but auquel se rappor- 
tent toutes ses opérations.”—Brucsner, Théorie du Systéme Animal, Leyden, 


1767. 


Sildetos creat OLE a Oy Omi The sylvan powers 
Obey our summons; from their deepest dells 
The Dryads come, and throw their garlands wild 
And odorous branches at our feet; the Nymphs 
That press with nimble step the mountain-thyme 
And purple heath-flower come not empty-handed, 
But scatter round ten thousand forms minute 
Of velvet moss or lichen, torn from rock 
Or rifted oak or cavern deep: the Naiads too 
Quit their loved native stream, from whose smooth face 
They crop the lily, and each sedge and rush 
That drinks the rippling tide: the frozen poles, 
Where peril waits the bold adventurer’s tread, 
The burning sands of Borneo and Cayenne, 
All, all to us unlock their secret stores 
And pay their cheerful tribute. 

J. Taytor, Norwich, 1818. 


CONTENTS OF VOL. XIII. 


(FOURTH SERIES. ] 


NUMBER LXXIII. 


P 
I. Notice of a new Species of Deer from the Norfolk Forest-Bed. 


By BAQUALT, JOHNSON, Hag. (Plate TF) inci eee e rr eet os 

Il. On the Affinities of the Genus Stromatopora, with Descrip- 
tions of two new Species. By H. AttEyNE NicHoxson, M.D., 
D.Se., M.A., F.R.S.E., Professor of Natural History in University 
allege gE stOHtO 21) sie fer ase eapal sieve SeRE aed sterasds Umosle «Ma 

II. On a New Parascyllium from Hobson’s Bay. By FrepERIcK 
M‘Coy, Professor of Natural Science in the Melbourne University, 
and Director of the Melbourne National Museum. (Plate II.) .... 


lic yo BSE cored pai MiBert cto atten nia rine iSong Oa pecan 
V. Descriptions of New Genera and Species of Heteromera, chiefly 
from New Zealand and New Caledonia, together with a Revision of 
the Genus Hypaulax and a Description of an allied New Genus from 
Colomina. By FREDERICK BATES), . fois!) 0 c.8 Ps ool veiciets Oe Wolsles 
VI. The Geographical Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. By 
Sapien H.W. ETON, (COM.Z590 fo ods, Jo ow de? ahs oe od 
VII. On the Development of the Polypes and of their Polypary. 
By M. H. de LacazE-DUTHIERS......... CM estelesGalanstavine ett « «g 
VIII. On the Structure of the Skeleton of Euplectella aspergillum. 
By THomas Hieern, Member of the Liverpool Microscopical 
Roe Mee es reac Or, ola a Meh ie, Suan ad «2.0 to\ a2 SNM 
IX. Notes on Pardalina Warwichii, Gray, Felis guigna, Molina, 
and Felis Geoffroyt, D’Orbigny. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. . 
X. Notes on the Smaller Spotted Cats of Asia and its Islands. 
ame ati Es, AA ILAN AS ERE OCC cn he siege: ced sie asp. s'v cinta, Cian wi nse uepe oi vay 


XI. On the Bladebones of Balena Hectori and Megaptera nove- 
Remuera, RY Tits d. Bin GAYS By Ee Sri Qo) aci'. siapdle nine «ovens Sei ears 


New Books :—Mammalia, Recent and Extinct ; an Elementary Trea- 
tise for the use of the Public Schools of New South Wales, by 


age 


15 


7b. 


52 


56 


iv CONTENTS. 


A. W. Scott, M.A.—Ostéographie des Cétacés, vivants et fossiles, 


Page 


par MM. van Beneden et Paul Gervais; livraisons 9 & 10.. 58—60 


Proceedings of the Royal Society. p< in. a.tcaaemens petge ys ie al 


On the Sterile Eggs of Bees, by C. Claus and C. von Siebold ; Note 
on the Habitat of Psetalia globulosa and Labaria hemispherica, 
Gray, by Dr. A. B. Meyer; Gigantic Cuttlefishes in Newfound- 
land ; New Species of Shells, by F. P. Marrat ; The Number of 
Classes of Vertebrates, and their Mutual Relations, by Prof. 
Theodore Gill; The Parasitic Mites of Birds, a Contribution to 
the Knowledge of the Sarcoptide, by E. Ehlers ; Contributions 


60 


to the Knowledge of the Laboulbeniea, by Dr. J. Peyritsch.. 65—76 


NUMBER LXXIV. 


XII. Descriptions of two new Genera and Species of Polyzoa 
from the Devonian Rocks. By H. ALtLEynE Nicuotson, M.D., 
D.Se., M.A., F.R.S.E., Professor of Natural History in University 
College, Toronto 


@) B).0,'0 © <0 \6)/8)\0. 0-v\:efe- b. iisl.ct eo! a) 6! 0: 0) 6a. n) 0) o ee) 0) at ale/'s [els fe whole is tee 


XIII. The Geographical Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna, 
By Captain-H, W..Eorron CMAs. 2% 0s arta sees omits ebay Bim ate 


XIV. Descriptions of New Genera and Species of Heteromera, 
chiefly from New Zealand and New Caledonia, together with a Re- 
vision of the Genus Hypaulax, and a Description of an allied new 
Genus from Colombia. By FrepERICK BATES ..............6: 


XV. Contributions to the Study of the Entomostraca. By 
GEORGE STEWARDSON Brapy, C.M.Z.S., and Davin RoBEeRTson, 
F.G.S.—No. IX. On Ostracoda taken amongst the Scilly Islands, 
and on the Anatomy of Darwinella Stevensoni. (Plates IV. & V.).. 

XVI. On the Generic Affinities of the New-England Chitons. By 
Pair P. CARPENTER, Of Moritreal. .2.059). grat same feuataaiy aes 5 


XVII. Descriptions of two new Species of Birds. By Arruur, 
Viscount WALDEN, P.ZiS4 ERS 3 Rest Oe% a eet pees Ae ee ees 


XVIII. Notes on Norwegian Hydroida from Deep Water. By 
the Rev. THomas. Hincks, B.A.; F.RiS2) te. ee ee 


XIX. On a new Species of Fruit-Pigeon from Northern Queens- 
land, . .By Joan Gounp, FURS. te. ici tnscs ts eaee oes tales ee 


XX. Notes on some Fishes obtained at considerable Depths in the 
North Atlantic. By Dr. AtsERT GUNTHER, F.RS. ............ 


XXI. On the Invertebrate Marine Fauna and Fishes of St. 
Andtews. . By WiC: MIntOsn, MUD Gc iat tne feet ae 


XXII. On Deep-water Hydroida from Iceland. By the Rey. 
Tuomas Hincxs, B.A., F.R.S. (Plates VI., VIL, & VIL) ..... ‘ 


XXIII. Third Notice of a Collection of Fishes made by Mr. 
Swinhoe in China. By Dr. ALBERT GtnTuER, F.R.S. .......... 


XXIV. On the Dwarf Buffalo of Pennant. By Sir VicTor 
Brookes, Bart., F.Z.S. 


XXYV. Description of a new Szbia from the Naga Hills, North- 


ee) Bie, :0, a 0) ee, @ 16) 040\0) ol sung e Oe 0/6 @ eeueln S98 (pLetalwele) 9's 6 


~I 
“I 


85 


102 


114 


119 


123 


125 


137 


138 


140 


146 


154 


159 


CONTENTS. 


east Frontier, Bengal. By Major H. H. Gopwin-AvsTEn, F.R.G.S., 
F.Z.S., &c., Deputy Superintendent, Topographical Survey of India 


XXVI. On the Theory of the Process of Fermentation. By Dr. 
H. Karsten 


oon rien wie ote, eleva f Ws» a6 © a) af eo wile) wine) oe a Ase ake wile eo ae 8 ale 


Procapdimswor te oyal Society... 65 on. sink. oe gol on uy vm ain soaye 

Observations on the Existence of certain Relations between the Mode 
of Coloration of Birds and their Geographical Distribution, b 
M. A. Milne-Edwards; On the Genus Callignathus and on Kogia 
Flowert of Dr. Gill, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; On the 
Development of the Phragmostracum of the Cephalopoda, and 
on the Zoological Relations of the Ammonites to the Spirule, 
by M. Munier-Chalmas ; On the Endomycici, by the Rey. H.S. 
Gorham; On the Bermuda Humpbacked Whale of Dudley, by 
Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; On some recent Remarks by Mr. 
Meldola upon Iphiclides Ajax (Papilio Ajax auct.), by Mr. 8. H. 
Scudder; The Habitat of Labaria hemispherica, by Dr. J. E. 
Gray, F.R.S. &c.; On the Steppe-Cat of Bokhara (Chaus cau- 


1 
Page 


160 


161 


Harta), DY OP. Js Ei. GTAY, BOBS. SC. oes ois, vince ee Paces 180—188 


NUMBER LXXV. 


XXVII. On the Structure called Lozoon canadense in the Lauren- 
tian Limestone of Canada. By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S. &e. (A letter 
to Professor W. Kina, Se.D., Galway.) 2. 6 vice vessels caae ence ns 


XXVIII. Observations on Chetetes tumidus, Phillips. By R. 
ETHERIDGE, Jun., F.G.S. (Plate XI. figs. 1-3.) ............600- 


XXIX. Mollusca, Vermes, and Coelenterata of the Second German 
North-Polar Voyage. By Cari Mozivs, (Plate XI. figs. 4-14.) 


XXX. On the Invertebrate Marine Fauna and Fishes of St. 
Andrews. By W. C. M‘Inrosu 


XXXI. On a true Carboniferous Nummulite. By Henry B. 
Brapy, F.L.S., F.G.S. (Plate XII.) 


XXXII. Notice of some new Species of Fishes from Morocco. 
By Dr. ALBERT GUNTHER, F.R.S., Foreign Member of the Sencken- 
berg Society of Frankfort. (Plates XIII. & XIV.) .............. 


XXXIII. On the Geodephagous Coleoptera of New Zealand. By 
H. W. Barss, F.L.S. 


S10 )8 eee er/e\ era al 6 bes) Cim. Ole. @ es 6 6 shee sar eles 


a4) a) 0 Oy 0) 0) oye le 6m; 6p) 6),0) 92) p10. e619, 0 


New Book :—The Naturalist in Nicaragua, by Thomas Belt, F.G.S. 
Proceedings of the Royal Society. ......0..sseeecseeeccsseenves 


Occurrence of Gigantic Cuttlefishes on the Coast of Newfoundland, 
by A. E. Verrill; Umbellula from Greenland, by Joshua Lindahl ; 
On the Bos pumilus of Sir Victor Brooke, by Dr. J. E. Gray, 
F.R.S. &c.; On Felis colocolo, Hamilton Smith, F. Cuvier, and 
Geoffroy, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; On some Remarkable 
Egg-sacs on an Annelid from the North Sea, by Prof. Karl 
Mobius 


189 


194 


GAH SAAAAG UGE DEAN CS 3S TGS hh De ee 255—260 


al CONTENTS.- 


Page 
NUMBER LXXVI. 


XXXIV. On the Annelida of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, Canada. 


By W. C. MInrosu. (Plates IX. & X) ..ce eevee eee een 261 
XXXV. On the Geodephagous Coleoptera of New Zealand. By 
BLOW Bares; UECS.4 | fy tn aiee cee cena pic isto race eee ie er 270 


XXXVI. Remarks on Mr. H. J. Carter’s Letter to Prof. King on 
the Structure of the so-called Hozoon canadense. By Witi1am B. 
Carpenter, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., Corresponding Member of the 


Tnstitute,of Mrance sie agia cetsaa olen oi bode rahi ee epi ee 277 
XXXVII. On the Arrangement of Sponges. By Dr, J. E. Gray, 

FR Siieees ee Deer eaters Aa eae 284. 
XXXVIII. On a new Species of Arcturus (A. damnoniensis). By 

the Rev. Toomas R. R. StEBBING, M.A. (Plate XV.).......... 291 
XXXIX, Annulata nova vel minus cognita in Expeditione ‘ Por- 

cupine’ capta. Recensuit E. Enters, M.D..............-.-056. 292 


XL. Descriptions of new Species of Scincide in the Collection of 
the British Museum. By A. W. E. O’SHauGunessy, Assistant in 


the Zoological Department............sseeeee reece ccc eeenenes 298 
XLI. On the Invertebrate Marine Fauna and Fishes of St. Andrews. 

By W. C. Milnrosm 7.26% .<..- aya edehsias sess iotnte. os coupe aie evetetetare 302 
XLII. On the Spongozoa of Halisarca Dujardini. By H. J. 

CARTER, HRS: Qos 05) a5 ia siors oie hay 8 Ste Nays) ietenaue pea een olin Iaetiede he 315 
XLIII. On a New-Zealand Whale (Physalus antarcticus, Hutton), 

with Notes. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c. (Plate XVI-A.)...... 316 


XLIV. A Revision of the Genera Epicharis, Centris, Eulema, and 
Euglossa, belonging to the Family Apide, Section Scopulipedes. By 
Freperick Smiru, Assistant in the Zoological Department of the 
British: MuUgemin 2 )2 cc = -sevatese ote vielots joie leo Parle fele a)onas neta kehetsl aie 318 


New Book :—Synopsis of the Acridide of North America, by Cyrus 
AW iyayaits fel 2d) OTS Bear es eer pocimiernan GICs car eh 2 Be 322 


Eozoon canadense, by Prof. Max Schultze ; Notes on the Skulls of two 
undescribed Species of Sea-lions (Oftaria), by Dr. J. E. Gray, 
F.R.S. &c.; The Succession of Life in North America, by 
Edward D. Cope; On Xenelaphus, Furcifer, and Coassus peruvi- 
anus of the Peruvian Alps, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.. .824—331 


NUMBER LXXVII. 


XLV. On Duncanella, a new Genus of Paleozoic Corals. By 
H. ALLEYNE Nicuoxson, M.D., D.Sc., F.R.S.E., &c., Professor of 
Natural History in University College, Toronto .............4-- 333 
XLVL. On anew Genus of Carboniferous Polyzoa. By Professor 
Joun YounG, M.D., and Mr. Jonn Youne, Hunterian Museum, 
University of Glasgow. (Plate XVI. B. figs. 1-6.) .............. 335 


XLVI. A Concise Notice of Observations on certain Peculiarities 
in the Structure and Functions of the Araneidea. By JoHN BLAcK- 
WALLS BLS, : Fie cinta ele sy 6h MOR vets statins Talal o Cebiva seein tl mne me 340 


CONTENTS. vil 


Page 
XLVIII. On the Invertebrate Marine Fauna and Fishes of St. 
HERDS ESV NV pO. Mr TBP ROSH, ss. o'eiain aie ae sloviprels Wc alae «a's wince» 342 


XLIX,. A Revision of the Genera Epicharis, Centris, Eulema, and 
Euglossa, belonging to the Family Apidae, Section Scopulipedes. By 
FREDERICK SmiTH, Assistant in the Zoological Department of the 


Peds ne MCE 04, APL I.. Sree oe soils DAT. Ms BIEN oaks Wek ar late 307 
L. Notes on the Small Spotted Eagle of Northern Germany, Aquila 
maculata (Gm.). By H. E. DREsser, F.Z.8........ 0000s e ee ceeee 373 


LI. Description of an apparently new Species of Humming-bird 
of the Genus Eriocnemis. By D. G. Extiot, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &e. .. 375 


LI. On the Structure called Zozoon canadense in the Laurentian 
Limestone of Canada. By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S. &c 576 


LIII. Latest Observations on Hozoon canadense by Prof. Max 
PGEUMEAEOL Mrs ght AIO Gare ale Wee ae Os wage a abe te 379 


LIV. A List of Butterflies taken on the March to Coomassie by 
Lieutenant Alwin 8. Bell, of the 2nd West-India Regiment, between 
Mansu and the River Prah, with Descriptions of new Species. By 
ER CaaS WET BON Pics: areas oi cecterenctr aia oe Coats x a 6% 5. 0.2, ore eqs aus 380 


LY. Additions to the Australian Curculionide. Part VI. By 
[ET APETISEL Ea EG To (0 od C8) Des 2 cv a a 383 


LVI. Remarks on the Subject of “ Hozoon.” By Prof. King, D.Sc., 

HRIADECEPT MEOW NEW WU Denes iON stalascvchetas ose 8 ole «ete eaoele aa eae 
Notice of new Equine Mammals from the Tertiary Formation, by 
Professor O. C. Marsh; The young Asiatic Tapir (Rhinocherus 
sumatranus), by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; The Habitat of 
Pelargopsis gigantea, by Dr. Adolf Bernhard Meyer; Contribu- 
tions towards the Natural History of the Termites, by Dr. Fritz 
Miller; On Carcinus menas, Pennant; Cetacea of the North 
Sea and the Baltic; On some Extinct Types of Horned Perisso- 
dactyles, by Edward D. Cope, of Philadelphia, Penn. ; On new 
Parasitic Crustacea from the N.W. Coast of America, by W. H. 

EIEN 5 COASUSUTVOY:, 25 7515) 440, oteiito ix Sf s\sasls ayahace Hg bev ws ceece 397—407 


NUMBER LXXVIUI. 


LVII. On a Land-Nemertean found in the Bermudas. By R. v. 
WILLEMOoEs-SuuM, Ph.D., Naturalist to the ‘Challenger’ Expedition. 
RE aap ere RO LES atin. «ci Rane MSS ANS take IK) atid Cage <eelad oiaraths LAes 409 


LVIII. Additions to the Australian Curculionide. Part VIL. 
oye AM CTS oe ASCOR: E Nis. OoCre u.5 bole ls: 97258 AV cia, ar a. ojos sxaee eo 412 


LIX. On the Invertebrate Marine Fauna and Fishes of St. Andrews. 
155/00 3ok PMG Ml r/o: ae ee a 420 


LX. On Halisarca lobularis, Schmidt, off the South Coast of Devon, 
with Observations on the Relationship of the SponGEs to the Asct- 
p14ns, and Hints for Microscopy. By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S. &c... 483 


LXI. A Reyision of the Genera Epicharis, Centris, Eulema, and 
Euglossa, belonging to the Family Apide, Section Scopulipedes. By 


FREDERICK SmirH, Assistant in the Zoological Department of the 
British Museum 440 


Pe Cece Sayer ea oer eave o 6 6 av oles) 6 0 Poe ee ois © Bb @ oles ps wie 


vill CONTENTS. 
Page 
LXII. On two apparently new Species of Gobeus from Norway. 
By ROBERT COLLETT, Of CDTISHADIA ec gn siaae tei ee ete «en 
LXIII. On anew Species of Megapode. By R. BowpLEr SHarpr, 
F.L.S., F.Z.S., &c., Senior Assistant, Zoological Department, British 
i113 | ah Oe RRA ARIAS a mt ticity SAD St rls pees 


LXIV. On the Skeleton of the New-Zealand Pike Whale, Bale- 
noptera Huttoni (Physalus antareticus, Hutton). By Dr. J. E. Gray, 


BLRS: ee, “(CP late Via lee ete Se ee coins SCE orate ab. 
LXV. Descriptions of new Lizards from Persia and Baluchistan. 

By WT IBULANRQRD sa 200.8 ha oes ae poe een cheer ae 453 
LXVI. New Observations on Eozoon canadense. By Wiiut1aM B. 

CaRPENTER, MDS Ich Dh ies. (elato RNa)! on losin, «ccs 456 


Observations on the Spermatophores of the Decapod Crustacea, b 
M. Brocchi; On the Felis euptilura from Shanghai, in the Britis 
Museum, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; On the Amount of 
Pressure in the Sap of Plants, by Prof. W. 8. Clarke, of Amherst; 
The Bogota Cat (Felis pardinoides, Gray), by Dr. J. E. Gray, 
F.R.S. &c.; Habitat of Pelargopsis gigantea, by Dr. A. B. 
Myer ne Ne pre cs cgitcn ae reine ie Rien: Petcare eet tene 471—475 


PLATES IN VOL. XIII. 


Puatel. Cervus latifrons. 
H. Parascyllium nuchalis. 
IlI. Structure of the Skeleton of Euplectella aspergillum. 
"Y | New British Ostracoda, 


VI. 
VII.} New Hydroida from Iceland. 
Vill. 


ea Annelida from the Gulf of St.. Lawrence. 


XI. Chetetes tumidus.—Leipoceras uviferum. 
XU. Nummulina pristina. 
XII. 
XIV. 
XV. Arcturus damnoniensis. 
XVI. Physalus antarcticus.—Rhabdomeson gracile. 
XVII. Tetrastemma agricola. 
XVIII. Bones of Baleenoptera Huttoni (Physalus antarctieus, Hudson). 
XIX. Structure of Eozoon canadense. 


New Fishes from Morocco. 


THE ANNALS 


AND 


MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. 


[FOURTH SERIES. ] 


Seta saweeecoeeeaser per litora spargite muscum, 
Naiades, et circtim vitreos considite fontes: 
Pollice virgineo teneros hic carpite flores: 
Floribus et pictum, dive, replete canistrum. 
At vos, o Nymphe Craterides, ite sub undas; 
Ite, recurvato variata corallia trunco 
Vellite muscosis e rupibus, et mihi conchas 
Ferte, Des pelagi, et pingui conchylia succo.” 

NV. Parthenii Giannettasii Eel. 1, 


No. 73. JANUARY 1874. 


1.—Notice of a new Species of Deer from the Norfolk 
Forest-Bed. By RANDALL JOHNSON, Esq. 


[Plate I.] 


Ir is well known that the Forest-bed which runs along the 
Norfolk coast abounds in mammalian remains of various 
species. Amongst these the remains of Cervide are largely 
represented; but they have not until lately received from 
paleontologists the attention so deservedly due to them. It 
would not, however, be right to omit to mention the labours 
of Dr. Falconer, who turned his attention to the Forest-bed 
fauna during the later years of his life, of the Rev. John Gunn, 
of Irstead, Norfolk, and, more recently, of Mr. Boyd Dawkins, 
all of whom have contributed to extend our knowledge on 
this subject. Among the many remarkable species found in 
this deposit there is one which is certainly new to Britain, and, 
so far as I am able to ascertain, one that has not been found in 
any deposit of corresponding age with the Forest-bed on the 
continent. This new form is represented by the left antler 
and a portion of the left frontal bone, which I had the good 
fortune to obtain myself from the Forest-bed at Hasbro, a 
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 1 


2 Mr. R. Johnson on a new Species 


small village on the Norfolk coast between Cromer and Yar- 
mouth, after a very low tide, during the month of March 
last. Mr. Gunn informs me that it is the upper portion of the 
Forest-bed which is exposed at the above-mentioned place, 
and consequently we may consider it of later date than that 
portion found near Cromer. 

The species in question belongs to the large subgenus 
of palmated deer of which Cervus megaceros, the so-called 
Irish Elk, is a well-known example; and as it is charac- 
terized by the great breadth of the frontal bone, I propose 
to name it Cervus latifrons. In addition to this, the chief 
characteristics which this remarkable form presents are 
as follows:—the extreme shortness of the pedicle, if a 
pedicle can really be said to exist at all; the absence of a 
brow-antler, the beam of the antler being given off from the 
frontal bone nearly at right angles, with a slight curvature 
downwards, while at about the distance of twelve inches from 
the burr palmation commences and a huge tine is given off 
from the anterior surface of the beam, which curves round so 
as to form almost a semicircle. This tine, when compared 
with the size of the beam, will be found to be very largely 
developed. 

If we compare this antler, possessing the above-named cha- 
racteristics, with that of Cervus megaceros, to which the species 
in many respects is nearly allied (notably m its palmation and 
size), we shall find that there are considerable differences. 
Cervus megaceros always possesses a brow-antler, although 
sometimes but faintly indicated ; in the new species we have 


y] x 

seen that it is entirely absent. Again, in Cervus megaceros 
there is a great curvature of the beam outwards and in a certain 
degree upwards, whereas in Cervus latifrons the beam is ex- 
tremely straight and with only the slightest trace of a down- 
ward curvature. Besides the differences which exist between 
the antlers of the two species, one would naturally expect to 
find differences in other portions of the skeleton; and that 
there are such is shown by the only portion I possess, viz. 
the left frontal bone before mentioned. In Cervus megaceros, 
if we look at the anterior part of the frontal bone we 
immediately notice that it is very narrow and rather con- 
vex, while in Cervus latifrons it is very broad and nearly 
flat. 

The annexed drawing (PI. I.), one fourth the natural size, 
will give an approximate idea of the specimen, the measure- 
ments of which I give together with those of another larger 
(but more imperfect) specimen of the same species, which is 
preserved in the Norwich Museum. 


of Deer from the Norfolk Forest-Bed. 3 


Specimen . Specimen 
fieured. in Norwich 
Museum. 
inches. inches. 
DREN MORE UNG A wie fis. Soak cate a ck ae 193 21 
Circumference in centre of beam .......... 3 82 
Length from burr to commencement of palma- 
HUGH) A MTN Se ee a 12 16 


Length from midfrontal suture along curve to 
end of first tine 


Associated in the Forest-bed with Cervus latifrons there are 
found several other species of Cervide, which it may be 
interesting to mention. Of these some are peculiar to the 
Forest-bed, while others are common to the Forest-bed and 
other deposits of Pleistocene and Pliocene age both in England 
and on the continent. The following is a list of the species 
that have as yet been clearly determined :— 


Cervus elaphus. Cervus Sedgwickir. 

capreolus. latifrons, n. sp. 
—— megaceros. Carnutorum. 
—— martialis. —— Polignacus. 
——_ verticornis. 


Of the nine species enumerated above two only have lived 
down to our own times, viz. the Stag (Cervus elaphus) and the 
Roebuck (Cervus capreolus). These two, together with Cervus 
megaceros, have not been found in strata of Pliocene age, and 
therefore, as Mr. Boyd Dawkins justly observes (Quart. Journ. 
Geol. Soe. Nov. 1, 1872, p. 410), “ point rather forwards than 
backwards in time.” Cervus martialis—a species with sub- 
compressed ramified antlers, hitherto unmentioned in lists of 
Forest-bed Cervide, and closely allied to the Reindeer (Cervus 
tarandus)—leads us to draw the same conclusion, as it has 
been found in the Postpliocene sands of Riége, near Pezenas 
(cf. Gervais, ‘ Zoologie et Paléontologie Francaise,’ p. 144). 
Of the remaining species, Cervus verticornis (rivalling C. 
megaceros in size and characterized by the downward and out- 
ward curvature of the brow-antler), Cervus Sedqwickit (a re- 
markable form with compressed antlers, described by Dr. 
Falconer, ‘ Paleontographical Memoirs,’ vol. ii. p. 471), and 
Cervus latifrons have as yet been found only in the Forest- 
bed. Cervus Carnutorum and C. Polignacus are Pliocene 
forms, the former having been found in the Phocene deposit 
of St. Prest, near Chartres, by M. Laugel, and the latter also 
in a Phocene deposit at Mont Perrier, near Issoire, and figured 
by Croizet and Joubert. 

1* 


4 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the Genus Stromatopora. 


The Forest-bed Cervide taken as a whole, although com- 
posed of a remarkable and peculiar assemblage of forms, show 
us, as has been pointed out by Mr. Boyd Dawkins in the 
valuable paper above mentioned, that the Forest-bed itself is 
rather of Pleistocene than Pliocene age; and as we know 
that Elephas primigenius, E. antiquus, and Bison priscus, all 
Pleistocene forms, are numbered amongst its fauna, we are 
justly entitled to consider that the data are such as warrant 
the above conclusion. 


Il.— On the Affinities of the Genus Stromatopora, with Descrip- 
tions of two new Species. By H. ALLEYNE NICHOLSON, 
M.D., D.Sc., M.A., F.R.S.E., Professor of Natural History 


in University College, Toronto. 


In the ‘ Annals’ for August 1873 I described four species of 
Stromatopora (one from the Upper Silurian, and three from the 
Devonian rocks of Canada), all of which exhibited certain re- 
lationships with the Spongida. As regards two of the species 
described in the paper alluded to, I have now obtained some 
further material, by which certain interesting points of struc- 
ture are brought out, and the reference of these fossils to the 
Spongida is still more clearly established. I have also to de- 
scribe for the first time two new and exceedingly interesting 
species of the genus—one from the Corniferous Limestone 
(Devonian), and the other from the Niagara Limestone (Upper 
Silurian). In the first place, however, it may be as well 
to discuss briefly the systematic position of the genus Stro- 
matopora. 

The genus Stromatopora of De Blainville includes a number 
of fossils of doubtful affinities, which have the common cha- 
racter of forming amorphous masses or irregular expansions, 
composed of delicate calcareous laminz, arranged in successive 
strata one above the other, and separated from one another by 
minute vertical props, pillars, or dissepiments. Very often the 
successive lamine are disposed round an imaginary centre or 
centres in a concentric manner, giving rise to spherical, hemi- 
spherical, or irregularly massive forms. In other cases the 

mass * is extended so as to form an expanded cup or irregular 


* T would suggest that the term “sarcodeme” (Gr. sara, flesh; demos, 
people) might advantageously be employed to designate the entire or- 
vanism or colony amongst the compound Foraminifera and the Sponges. 
Some such term is certainly needed in treating of such problematical 
organisms as Stromatopora, of which the exact systematic position is 
doubtful. 


Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the Genus Stromatopora. 5 


sheet, made up, like the preceding, of successively superim- 
posed laminee. 

The main element, therefore, in the structure of Stromato- 
pora, and the only one about which all observers are tolerably 
agreed, is a system of parallel calcareous laminz, generally of 
great tenuity, not in actual contact, but separated from one 
another by narrow interspaces. The successive lamin are 
kept apart by a vertical system of calcareous pillars, which 
divide the interspaces between the laminz into minute, usually 
quadrangular compartments, and thus render the whole mass 
more or less minutely vesicular. 

So far, the structure of Stromatopora would be compatible 
with a reference of the genus either to the Foraminifera or the 
Spongida; but there are unfortunately many differences of 
opinion as to the further structure of these fossils, and these 
have led to equally wide differences of opinion as to the aftini- 
ties and systematic position of the genus. 

According to M‘Coy (Pal. Foss. p. 12) the vesicular tissue 
of Stromatopora is composed of “ minute, curved, calcareous 
plates,” which he compares to the ccenenchyma of Palwopora 
and Fistulipora. He also states that the upper surface is oc- 
casionally marked “ with extremely obscure, distant, quincun- 
cially arranged, small pits,” which he appears to think may 
represent the corallites in the above-mentioned or other allied 

enera. 

Prof. Hall agrees with M‘Coy in referring Stromatopora to 
the Coelenterata, and in placing it in the neighbourhood of 
Tubipora (Pal. N. Y. vol. i. p. 135). He considers that the 
fossils of this genus are composed of ‘¢ minute cylindrical tubes 
with considerable space between, and that the laminated struc- 
ture arises from thin layers of calcareous matter, deposited and 
filling the spaces between, and enclosing the tubes.” 

My own investigations of a very extensive series of speci- 
mens from the Lower and Upper Silurian rocks and from the 
Devonian Formation have led me to the conclusion that the 
genus Stromatopora is clearly referable to the Spongida, and 
that it should be placed amongst the Calcispongiw, a group 
represented by many and varied forms both in past time and 
at the present day. The reasons for this belief may be shortly 
summed up as follows :— 

a. The fundamental structure of Stromatopora is by no 
means inconsistent with the belief that it belongs to the calea- 
reous sponges. It does not consist of reticulated calcareous 
spicula, as in the more typical members of the group; but 
neither does it consist of a vesicular tissue composed of “ minute 
curved calcareous plates” (M‘Coy), which could be in any way 


6 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the Genus Stromatopora. 


compared to the vesicular ccenenchyma of many tabulate 
corals. On the contrary, it consists of successive calcareous 
layers which may be regarded as composed of an amalgamated 
system of horizontal spicules, separated by interspaces, and 
kept apart by a vertical system of delicate calcareous rods, 
giving rise to a system of more or less quadrangular cells. 
The horizontal laminz are upon the whole continuous; but 
they sometimes subdivide and inosculate; and the vertical 
pillars are decidedly irregular, beimg sometimes inclined at 
various angles, and not being placed at uniform distances 
apart even in all portions of a single specimen. Some of the 
vertical rods appear to pass continuously through several 
laminee and across the interspaces between them; but the 
greater number are confined entirely to the interval between 
two successive lamine, not being continuous or corresponding 
with those in the interspace immediately above or below. 
There is no ground, so far as I am aware, for believing that 
these vertical pillars or rods are perforated, or could possibly 
be of the nature of tubes inhabited by the separate zooids of a 
colony; on the contrary, in all the forms which have come 
under my notice, there is the strongest possible proof that 
they are solid and imperforate. There is thus nothing in the 
fundamental tissue or groundwork of Stromatopora, as above 
described, which would necessarily preclude us from referring 
the genus to the Spongida; nor can any stress be laid upon 
Prof. M‘Coy’s argument that these organisms cannot be 
sponges on account of their possessing a rigid and inflexible 
skeleton, since similar reasoning would compel us to remove 
from the Spongida a vast number of forms the zoological 
position of which is beyond doubt. At the same time, if 
Stromatopora consisted wholly of the laminated and reticulated 
tissue above described, and possessed none of those openings 
which are so characteristic of the Sponges, then indeed the 
genus might be more properly referred to the Foraminifera, 
the near allies of the Sponges in some respects, but destitute 
of the canal-system which is present in the latter. 

b. Such openings, however, can be shown to exist in certain 
forms of Stromatopora; and there is strong reason for believing 
that they will ultimately be found to be present in all. ‘Thus 
in S. striatella, D’Orb., and S. concentrica, Goldf., both 
typical examples of the genus, Prof. M‘Coy long since de- 
scribed the existence of vermicular tubes opening on the sur- 
face by small apertures, and passing more or less vertically 
through the component layers of the mass (Pal. Foss. pp. 14 
& 15). There is some ambiguity in the language used by 
this eminent paleontologist in describing these tubes and their 


Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the Genus Stromatopora. i 


openings in S. concentrica; and the evidence is not at present 
sufficient to warrant any positive statement of opinion as to 
whether they may correspond with the “ pores” or the “ os- 
cula’’ of an ordinary sponge. It is probable, however, that 
they should be regarded as representing the “ pores,”’ and that 
the “ oscula”’ will yet be discovered by a more extended and 
complete examination. Again, in S. ostiolata, Nich., a species 
from the Guelph formation ot Canada, the upper surface of the 
mass exhibits small but regularly arranged openings, which, 
from their remoteness and general form, can hardly be regarded 
as other than “oscula”’ (‘ Annals,’ Aug. 1873, pl. iv. fig. 1). 
In S. tuberculata, Nich., again, I have now discovered a sys- 
tem of comparatively large and remote openings, which com- 
municate with canals traversing the organism, and which 
appear to fulfil beyond all question the function of exhalant 
apertures. In S. granulata, Nich., no openings are ordinarily 
to be detected, probably on account of the manner in which 
specimens are generally preserved; but I have one example 
showing both small and large openings, which must be con- 
sidered as being inhalant and exhalant. In S. perforata, 
Nich., now described for the first time, the entire mass, or 
“‘ sarcodeme,” is traversed by numerous and close-set canals 
of considerable size, which open at the surface in rounded 
apertures generally placed on conical or chimney-like emi- 
nences. These must represent exhalant canals and apertures. 
Lastly, in S. Hindet, also now described for the first time, 
there is a series of small close-set apertures which must repre- 
sent ‘‘ pores,” and another series of larger, more remote, and 
more irregularly disposed openings which can only be regarded 
as oscula. With the exception, however, of the last-named 
species and of the single specimen of S. granulata above 
alluded to, I am acquainted with no species of Stromatopora 
which has hitherto been shown with certainty to possess two 
sets of openings—one small and inhalant, the other large and 
exhalant. It must be remembered in this connexion that the 
difficulties in the way of observation are in this case extremely 
great, since the condition of mineralization in which these 
fossils occur is generally such that the cavities of the mass 
are filled up with foreign material, whilst the reticulated tissue 
itself is often silicified. Hence it would be easy for such 
minute surface-apertures as the “ pores” of a sponge to be 
irrecognizably filled up and obliterated or to escape detection. 
c. The shape of the various species of Stromatopora is such 
as would accord perfectly well with the belief that the genus 
is referable to the Spongida. Some species are in the form of 
rounded or irregularly hemispheric or conical masses. Others 


8 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the Genus Stromatopora. 


are somewhat cup-shaped; and others, again, have the form 
of irregular and extended crusts, apparently attached at one 
point to some solid body, from which they spread laterally in 
every direction, or seem to form incrusting sheets. 

Upon the whole, I think the evidence is very decidedly in 
favour of the view that the genus Stromatopora is referable to 
the Calcispongize. In accordance with this view, I retain in 
this genus the forms which I have named S. tuberculata, S. gra- 
nulata, S. perforata, and S. Hindei, since these are undoubted 
sponges, and would upon any other view of the affinities of 
Stromatopora require to have a new genus formed for their 
reception. 


1. Stromatopora tuberculata, Nicholson. 


Stromatopora tuberculata, Nicholson, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., Aug. 
1873, pl. iv. figs. 2, 2a. 


Having now obtained a considerable number of additional 
specimens of this species, I have to add two observations of 
importance to my original description. In the first place, I 
have now obtained specimens showing that the under surface 
of the expansions of S. twberculata is covered by a thin calea- 
reous basement-layer, which is thrown into very numerous 
concentrically arranged undulating wrinkles. This surface 
thus presents somewhat the appearance of the epitheca of a 
Favosites ; but it is much thinner and rougher, and is pierced 
by apertures. In the second place, both the upper and the lower 
surface exhibit at irregular intervals rounded apertures which 
are placed at distances apart of from two lines to half an inch, 
and have a diameter of from half a line to two-thirds of a line. 
These apertures are wanting in some specimens, which, how- 
ever, are but fragmentary, whilst they can readily be detected 
in others. They are the openings of canals which penetrate 
the mass in a more or less vertical direction; and I noticed 
their occurrence in my original description of the species, 
though I did not at that time fully recognize their nature. 
The case was thus stated by me :—‘‘ Many examples exhibit 
rounded openings or tubes, from half a line to a line in dia- 
meter, descending at right angles to the mass, and placed at 
varying intervals. ‘These openings are not elevated above the 
general surface. They are not constant in their occurrence, 
though very generally present; and I have not been able to 
satisfy myself that they are not truly extraneous to the fossil. 
They may, perhaps, be annelidous in their nature; or they 
may be due to the fact that the organism has enveloped a 
colony of Syringopora, which has subsequently been dis- 


Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the Genus Stromatopora. 9 


solved away”? (loc. cit. p. 93). The materials now in my 
hands, however, are quite sufficient to prove conclusively that 


Fig. 1. 


a, part of the under surface of a large example of Stromatopora tuberculata, 
showing the concentrically wrinkled basement-layer and the openings 
of the oscula, natural size. 6, a portion of the upper surface, natural 
size; ¢, a vertical section of a fragment of the same, magnified to show 
the internal structure. 


these canals and apertures are truly parts of the fossil. They 
are mostly to be detected upon the upper surface of the mass ; 
but in one large specimen, which seems to have grown from a 
broad base of attachment and then to have spread out laterally 
in an irregularly cup-shaped form, they are plentifully deve- 
loped on the lower surface. It can hardly be that they can be 
any thing else than openings corresponding to the “oscula”’ 
of sponges. ‘The “pores” I have not yet made out with ab- 
solute certainty ; but I believe that the surface-tubercles are 
truly of this nature, some of them showing almost conclusive 
proofs of having been perforated by minute openings at their 
apices. 

There would thus appear to be every reason for concluding 
that S. tuberculata is truly a calcareous sponge ; and the chief 
question remaining is whether it can with propriety be re- 


10 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the Genus Stromatopora. 


tained in the genus Stromatopora. My own opinion is de- 
cidedly against forming a new genus for its reception, since 
it has the essential structure of Stromatopora ; and the difficulty 
which I experienced at first in detecting the oscula, even in 
the examination of a large series of specimens, has convinced 
me that the occurrence of similar openings may well have been 
overlooked, even in the type species of the genus. 


2. Stromatopora granulata, Nicholson. 


Stromatopora granulata, Nicholson, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., Aug. 1873, 

pl. iv. figs. 8, 3a. 

The specimens upon which my original description of. this 
species (loc. cit. p. 94) was founded were all from the Corni- 
ferous Limestone ; and I failed to detect in them any traces 
of apertures which could be regarded as either pores or oscula. 
Recently, however, I have obtained an example of S. granu- 
lata from the Hamilton group of the township of Bosanquet, 
showing both these sets of apertures ; and I have also obtained 
additional specimens from the Corniferous Limestone showing 
the under surface and the mode of growth. 

The first of the above-mentioned specimens is only a frag- 
ment; and its greater portion exhibits all the appearances 
which characterize the Corniferous examples of the species. 
The upper surface of the fossil exhibits several rounded or 
conical elevations, one of which is perforated by a large sub- 
circular aperture leading down into the interior, and evidently 
of the nature of an osculum. Whether the other elevations 
were similarly perforated or not does not clearly appear. The 
pores are only shown over a small portion of the fossil, and 
have the form of minute close-set perforations in a delicate 
calcareous membrane or surface-layer. Beneath this layer, and 
over all parts of the specimen whence it has been denuded, is 
seen the ordinary granulated surface from which the name of 
the species was originally derived. There is thus a probability 
established that all the specimens from the Corniferous Lime- 
stone which exhibit simply this granulated surface are imper- 
fect, and that there has been removed from them an exterior 
and very delicate membrane in which the pores were pierced. 
The granulated layer which appears to form the surface in so 
many specimens would seem on this view to have served the 
purpose of distributing the water received through the external 
poriferous layer, the granules with which it is studded being 
more or less confluent, and giving rise to a complicated system 
of sinuous or vermicular horizontal channels. 

The under surface of S. granulata is covered by a thin, con- 


Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the Genus Stromatopora. 11 


centrically wr:nkled calcareous membrane, precisely similar to 
the epitheca of a Favosites or Fistulipora. Usually the species 
forms extensive crusts of no great thickness; but I have one 
specimen in which the organism is attached by a broad base 
to a large Heliophyllum, from which it spreads out laterally in 
all directions as a horizontal expansion, the under surface 
being covered with a wrinkled “ epitheca,” and having been 
obviously free. 


3. Stromatopora perforata, Nicholson. 

Spec. char. Fossil composed of crusts of varying thickness, 
made up of thin concentrically arranged calcareous lamine, 
the interspaces between which are rendered vesicular by ver- 
tically disposed calcareous rods or dissepiments. From four 
to five laminz with their intervening interspaces occupy the 
space of one line. Upper surface undulating, and covered 
with very numerous rounded apertures, which vary in width 
from two thirds of a line to one line, and are situated at dis- 
tances apart of a line, more or less. These apertures are 
usually placed at the summit or on one side of conical emi- 
nences ; or they are elevated above the general surface, the mar- 
gin of the opening on one side being in general higher than 
on the other. ‘These apertures are the orifices of vertical or 
somewhat oblique canals, which penetrate the vesicular tissue 
of the fossil, and are lined with a delicate calcareous mem- 
brane, marked with faint encircling strie. For a certain dis- 
tance (two or three limes) each canal descends in a straight 
line, and then is curved so as to become nearly parallel to the 
lower surface of the mass, at the same time contracting in its 
diameter (fig. 2,c). Between the oscula, as just described, 
the surface is covered with a fine miliary granulation, com- 
posed of minute pustules placed close together and arranged 
in irregular vermicular or sinuous lines. 

Stromatopora perforata is perhaps the most remarkable 
species of the genus which has been yet described ; and it can- 
not be doubted that it is a genuine member of the Calcispongiz, 
though in some respects an abnormal one. In its internal 
structure it agrees altogether with S. twberculata, S. granulata, 
and S. mammillata ; and with the two former of these it agrees 
further in the possession of a series of apertures which cannot 
be any thing but “oscula.” No “‘ pores,” however, have been 
detected, unless some of the surface-tubercles should in reality 
be perforated, which is likely enough. 

S. perforata is readily distinguished from S. tuberculata b 
the much greater number and closer arrangement of the oscula, 


o 
by the elevation of these apertures above the general surface, 


12 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the Genus Stromatopora. 


and by the finer and more minute character of the surface- 
granulation. The number and closeness of the oscula also 


Stromatopora perforata: a, a fragment, showing the osculiferous upper 
surface, natural size; b, a fragment magnified, to show the internal 
structure; c, vertical section of a fragment, showing the form and 
course of the canals, natural size. 


separate this form from S. granulata, in which the oscula are 
remote, and often cannot be detected at all, though in other 
respects the surface-characters of the two are very similar or 
even identical. The under surface of S. perforata is still un- 
known; but the fossil forms thinner or thicker crusts, often 
covering pretty extensive surfaces, the thicker expansions 
being composed of a succession of crusts superimposed one 
upon the other. 

Locality and Formation.—Rare in the Corniferous Lime- 
stone of Port Colborne. Collected by the author. 


4, Stromatopora [Hindet, Nicholson. 


Fossil forming thin crusts or subhemispheric masses com- 
posed of successive concentrically disposed strata, each stratum 
made up of parallel calcareous laminze separated by interspaces, 
Sometimes the component laminz of each stratum are parallel 
with the upper and lower surfaces of the stratum or nearly so ; 
but more commonly they are oblique to these surfaces. The 
result of this is that the interspaces between the laminz open 
on the surfaces of each stratum as so many elongated and 
oblique apertures, which have usually the form of fissure-like 
sinuous slits, but sometimes present the appearance seen in 
weathered specimens of Alveotites. The lamin of each stra- 


Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the Genus Stromatopora. 13 


tum are sometimes connected by transverse pillars, but more 
commonly they are so bent and curved as to inosculate with 
one another at points closely approximated, thus giving the 
whole mass a vesicular structure. Well preserved specimens 
show about eight laminz in the space of one line. The upper 
surface of the fossil exhibits not only the linear and vermicular 
openings above spoken of as produced by the interlaminar 
spaces, but also a series of large rounded or oval openings, 
which are more or less irregularly disposed, and which are 
the orifices of so many canals which penetrate the mass verti- 
cally or obliquely. ‘The size of these oscular apertures varies ; 
but most of them have a diameter of from a line to a line 
and a half. They also vary greatly in their number in a given 
space, some fragments exhibiting many of them placed close 
together, whilst others only show a few, and these remote. 
The walls of the canals leading away from these openings are 
not lined by a continuous calcareous membrane (as in S. per- 
forata), but are perforated like a sieve by the elongated slits 


Fig. 3. 


Stromatopora Hindei, Nich.: a, upper surface of a fragment, natural size, 
showing the pores and oscula; 4, vertical section of a fragment, enlarged, 
showing the obliquely arranged laming and interlaminar spaces; ¢, 
upper surface of a fragment, enlarged. 


14 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the Genus Stromatopora. 


produced by their intersection with the interlaminar spaces. 
Lastly, the general surface is undulating, and the oscula are 
not elevated upon eminences or papillee. 

This remarkable species departs in some important respects 
from the structure of the typical species of Stromatopora; but 
it presents at the same time such a close resemblance to forms 
like S. tuberculata that it does not seem necessary to form a 
new genus for its reception. The chief peculiarity of the pre- 
sent form depends upon the fact that the component laminze 
of the mass are not arranged concentrically as regards the 
entire mass; but the fossil is composed of concentric layers, 
each of which is composed of parallel or subparallel laminee 
disposed obliquely to the surfaces of the stratum. Hence the 
interlaminar spaces, instead of being parallel with the surface 
of the mass (as in S. tuberculata and S. granulata), open upon 
the surface in the form of oblique, sinuous, or vermicular open- 
ings, sometimes rounded or subtriangular, but more commonly 
linear and having a transverse diameter of about one hundredth 
of an inch. It can hardly be doubted that these minute open- 
ings, which cover the greater part of the entire surface, are of 
the nature of inhalant apertures or “ pores;” and they com- 
municate to fragments of this fossil very much the aspect of 
worn and weathered examples of certain forms of Alveolites 
and Canites. All those portions of the surface which are not 
occupied by the pores are taken up by very much larger open- 
ings, which are certainly exhalant apertures or “ oscula.” 
Very often the lamine are arranged in any given stratum in 
a subspiral manner round certain points of the mass, and the 
pores on the surface have a corresponding arrangement. 

Upon the whole, little doubt can be entertained as to the 
propriety of referring this species to the Calcispongie ; and 
its structure would strongly corroborate the view that the 
surface-tubercles in S. tuberculata are truly perforated, and are 
of the nature of pores, though examples of this species as 
ordinarily preserved do not exhibit this feature clearly. I 
have named the present species after its discoverer, Mr. George 
Jennings Hinde, who has kindly furnished me with specimens 
for examination. 

Locality and Formation.—Common in a magnesian lime- 
stone of the age of the Niagara Limestone (Upper Silurian), 


at Owen Sound, Ontario. Collected by Mr. G. J. Hinde. 


Dr. T. Gill on the Genera Tremarctos and #Elurina. 15 


Iil.—On a New Parascyllium from Hobson’s Bay. By 
FREDERICK M‘Coy, Professor of Natural Science in the 
Melbourne University, and Director of the Melbourne 
National Museum. 

(Plate II.] 


To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 


GENTLEMEN, 

As only one species of Parascyllium is noted in Dr. 
Giinther’s Catalogue, I beg to give you a brief description of 
a different one, not very uncommon near Melbourne. 


Parascyllium nuchalis, M‘Coy. 


Spec. char. Body and fins clouded with two shades of 
chocolate-brown, with a broad blackish-brown nuchal collar 
extending from the base of the pectorals to halfway between 
the eye and the first gill-opening, and two or three very con- 
spicuous large spots of the same dark colour on each of the fins ; 
the whole of the sides and back covered with white spots, 
smaller and more crowded on the dark nuchal collar; under- 
side of throat and abdomen pale whitish brown. Mouth nearer 
the extremity of the snout than to the eye. 

Length 2 feet 9 inches; snout to anterior edge of orbit 
1 inch, to base of pectoral 3$ inches, to origin of ventrals 114 
inches, to origin of first dorsal 143 inches, of second dorsal 
204 inches, of anal 20 inches, to caudal 25 inches; girth 7 
inches. 


This beautiful species is adult at the above size, and is 
easily recognized by its brown-clouded body, dark, wide half 
collar, and conspicuous round white spots. 


IV.—On the Genera Tremarctos, Gervais (Nearctos, Gray), 
and Mlurina, Gervais (Ailurogale, Fitz.). By THeopore 
Git, M.D., Ph.D. 


In the ‘Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ for August 
1873 (vol. xi. p. 183) Dr. Gray has differentiated from the 
genus to which he had formerly referred it (//elarctos) the 
Ursus ornatus of Frederick Cuvier, giving to that species the 
new generic name “ Nearctos.” A distinct subgenus had, 
however, been long previously proposed for that species by 
Gervais (‘ Hist. Nat. des Mammiféres,’ tome ii. 1855, p. 20), 
and named by him 7remarctos. The name evidently refers 
to one of the characters mentioned as peculiar—the supra- 


16 Mr. F. Bates on New Genera 


condyloid foramen of the humerus, in which it was said to 
differ from all the other Urside. This group has been adopted 
as a distinct genus by the author in his ‘Arrangement of the 
Families of Mammals.’ 

In reference to the statement that the supracondyloid foramen 
is absent in all other Urside (“qui manque a tous autres 
Ursidés’’), it may be well to recall that it is developed in the 
humerus of a fossil bear preserved in the paleeontological col- 
lection of the Museum at Paris, and figured by Cuvier and 
Blainville (see ‘Ostéographie des Mammitéres,’ Ursus, pl. xvii. 
dese. p. 93); but, as remarked by De Christol and Blainville, 
that specimen is doubtless exceptional or “ monstrous,”’ it 
being the only one known among hundreds examined ex- 
hibiting such a peculiarity. The same bone has been re- 
ferred to by Dr. John Struthers, in the ‘Lancet’ (1873, vol. 1. 
pp. 231, 232), in comments upon the hereditary occurrence of 
a supracondyloid process in Man. Judging by the figure of 
the humerus of Tremarctos ornatus given by Blainville, the 
supracondyloid foramen appears, however, to be a normal 
characteristic of that species ; but it would be desirable that 
such supposition should be proved or disproved by the examina- 
tion of other specimens, and my chief object in this communi- 
cation is the hope that it may elicit such information. 

I venture also to add another reference that has been over- 
looked by Dr. Gray as well as Dr. Fitzinger. In the ‘ Pro- 
ceedings of the Zoological Society of London’ for 1867, p. 268, 
Dr. Gray has proposed a genus Viverriceps for several Felide, 
and among them the Fe/’s planiceps of Vigors and Horsfield ; 
and in the ‘ Sitzungsberichte der Akademie der Wissenschaften 
zu Wien’ for 1869 Dr. Fitzinger has based another genus 
(Ailurogale) on the same species. A subgeneric group had, 
however, long previously been proposed by Prof. Gervais (op. 
cit. p. 87, 1855) for that species, designated “ Ailurin ” (Latin, 
Alurina), and distinguished by the double-rooted false molars 
of the upper jaw. In my ‘Arrangement of the Families of 
Mammals’ I have retained both Mlurina and Viverriceps 
(restricted) as genera. 


V.—Descriptions of New Genera and Species of Ueteromera, 
chiefly from New Zealand and New Caledonia, together with 
a Revision of the Genus Hypaulax and a Description of an 
allied New Genus from Colombia. By FREDERICK BATES. 


[Continued from vol. xii. p. 485. ] 
HypavLax, mihi, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond. 1868, p. 259. 
Since the time I established this genus I have assiduously 


and Species of Heteromera. 17 


collected all the species possible, and have especially endea- 
voured to obtain as large a series as I could of each species. 
I propose now to give some remarks on the species described by 
me at that time, as well as to describe others that are new. 


Hypaulax marginata and sinuaticollis, mihi, 1. c. p. 261. 


These two species appear to be very rare, as I have been 
able to add but one other example of marginata, and not one 
of sinuaticollis, to the solitary example of each on which their 
descriptions were founded. The two species are extremely 
close to each other, but are, at present, well distinguished by 
the characters given. By some strange error, I have given 
the prothorax of sinuwaticollis as longer than wide ; it 1s, as 
well as the entire insect, relatively much narrower in propor- 
tion to its length than in marginata; the labium is more 
narrowly and deeply emarginate in front; the space between 
the palpi narrower and more convex on the face; the 
mentum is densely hirsute. In both species the mandibles are 
strongly notched at the apex; the gular furrow is very strong 
and close to the base of the submentum; the cheek-furrow is 
deep and curved, extends nearly to the gular furrow, and termi- 
nates in a large, subpyriform pit or excavation. 

My second example of marginata is from Western Australia. 
It is considerably smaller than the typical example (length 8 
lines) ; the chin is strongly bearded; the two impressions on 
the prothorax are placed further from the base ; and the 3rd and 
4th ventral segments are distinctly sinuate behind : these differ- 
ences are possibly sexual, although I can see no difference in 
the form of the anterior tibie ; at any rate they are not of suffi- 
cient value to warrant me in holding it as a distinct species. 


Hypaulax tarda, mihi, !. c. p. 262. 


This species also appears to be very rare, as I have been able 
to add but a second example. It is at once to be distinguished 
from the two preceding by its strongly transverse prothorax, 
with the hind angles more acutely produced and more outwardly 
directed, and by its somewhat “ squat” figure ; the mandibles 
are notched at the apex; the labium is broadly emarginate in 
front, the space between the palpi narrow, its face but little con- 
vex; the gular furrow is broad but less deep than in those pre- 
ceding ; the cheek-furrow is slightly arched, and does not ter- 
minate near the gular furrow in an expanded subpyriform 
excavation; the 4th ventral segment is convex and strongly and 
somewhat sinuously emarginate behind ; and the sides of the 
prothorax are more finely margined ; the intervals between the 
rows of punctures on the elytra are flat, even at the sides and 

Ann. & Mag. N. H. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 2 


18 Mr. F. Bates on New Genera 


apex; the 9th row of punctures is joined behind (apically) to 
the Ist, the 8th to the 7th, the 6th to the 3rd, and the 5th to 
the 4th; these differences, added to those given in the original 
description, will readily enable any one to separate the species. 

My second example is from Wide Bay: it differs from the 
typical one only in the head having a rounded depression on the 
crown, the impressions &c. on the prothorax less strongly 
marked (almost obsolete), the elytra more convex and con- 
sequently more abruptly declivous behind, the striz a little 


fainter, the punctures larger, and the intervals a little less 
flat. 


Hypaulax opacula, n. sp. 


Oblong, or oblong-ovate, sometimes elongate-ovate : black, 
subopaque. Labium broadly emarginate and densely ciliate in 
front, the space between the palpi wide and scarcely convex 
on the disk; mandibles strongly notched at apex; mentum 
strongly transverse, strongly angulate at the sides, front margin 
notched in the middle, a large round fovea on the disk, and, in 
six out of the seven examples before me, densely hirsute (in the 
seventh it is entirely naked) ; gular furrow strong, placed di- 
stinctly further from the base of the submentum than in the 
species preceding ; cheek-furrow as in H. tarda, but not exten- 
ding nearly so close to the gular furrow ; the submentum, and 
that portion of the gula before the furrow, more convex or 
bulging than in any of the preceding: head formed as in //. 
tarda, very minutely and distantly punctulate, the punctures 
more numerous on the epistoma ; epistomal suture well marked, 
angulate at the sides ; vertex convex: prothorax opaque, more 
or less transverse, regularly but not strongly convex, feebly 
emarginate in front; base bisinuate, and a little wider than the 
apex, sides more or less strongly and regularly rounded, and 
more or less distinctly sinuous in front of the hind angles, 
which are ordinarily subacute and directed backwards (in some 
examples they are a little outwardly directed) ; median dorsal 
line very faintly marked ; the entire surface minutely punctu- 
late (in some examples almost imperceptibly so), and there are 
ordinarily several more or less distinct oblong impressions at 
each side of the disk and nearest to the base ; the lateral edges 
though thickened are not, except sometimes at the hind angles, 
at all channelled or lined within this thickened edge or margin, 
and have not the appearance of a recurved plait or fold having 
a fine groove or channel within, as is the case with all the other 
species of the genus ; scutellum convex, almost equilaterally 
triangular, pointed behind : elytra subovate, a little less opaque 
than the prothorax, distinctly wider at base than base of pro- 


and Species of Heteromera. 19 


thorax, faintly striated, obsoletely so, or not at all, on the disk ; 
the punctures large, irregular, ordinarily oblong ; frequently 
two or three run together; apically the arrangement of the 
rows of punctures is the same as in H. tarda; intervals more or 
less (but never at all strongly) convex, impunctate: prosternal 
process wide, transversely rugose, broadly rounded behind, 
strongly tricarinate, the central carina enclosed by the two 
outer ; third and fourth ventral segments sinuously emarginate 
behind: legs and underside shining black ; tarsi, palpi, and 
antenne piceous; anterior tibiz elongate, more curved near 
the apex in the g. 

Length 6 to 73 lines. 

Hab. Rockhampton. Seven examples. 


A very distinct species, and at once to be distinguished from 
all the others by the form &c. of the prothorax, especially by 
the character of its lateral edges, as indicated above. 


Hypaulax ampliata, n. sp. 
Oblong, broad, black, slightly shining. Labium broadly and 


sinuously rounded and ciliate in front, the space between the 
palpi rather wide, its face very convex and longitudinally chan- 
nelled down the centre; mentum naked, plane, transversely 
cordiform, with the usual small wing-like expansion on each 
side the apex at back ; mandibles broadly and squarely trun- 
cated at apex; gular furrow deep but not wide, very distant 
from base of submentum ; cheek-furrow very short (almost 
obsolete), scarcely extending beyond the upper corner of the 
eye beneath: head and prothorax more or less distinctly but 
very finely punctulate, most strongly so on the epistoma ; 
epistomal suture distinct, arched, a little sinuous in the middle: 
prothorax ample, transverse, subopaque, but little convex, di- 
stinctly widest in front, apex very feebly emarginate, front 
angle almost obsolete ; sides strongly rounded anteriorly, then 
subparallel to behind the middle, thence rapidly contracted to 
the hind angles, which are small, scarcely prominent, and 
slightly outwardly directed ; base very broadly lobed in the 
middle, and extending further backwards than the hind angles ; 
lateral edges strongly thickened, except in front of the hind 
angles, abruptly interrupted or notched immediately behind 
the middle; scutellum convex, strongly transversely triangular : 
elytra a little shining, broadly oval, moderately convex, di- 
stinetly wider at base than base of prothorax; base strongly 
emarginate ; basal ridge very thick and prominent, and clearly 
continuous with the sutural interval, the ordinary short scutellar 
row of punctures either altogether absent or represented by a 


single faint oblong impression; more or less faintly striated 
ox 


20 Mr. F. Bates on New Genera 


(obsoletely on the disk), the punctures moderate but deep, 
rounded or oblong; intervals nearly flat, more or less visibly 
but always minutely punctulate ; apically the Ist stria is joined 
to the 9th (the 8th being joined to 9th at some distance from 
the apex), the 7th to the 2nd, the 6th to the 3rd, and the 5th 
to the 4th, or 3 and4, 5 and 6, and 7 and 8 are joined together 
behind in pairs: prosternal process very wide, strongly tri- 
carinate, the middle carina much the widest and not enclosed 
by the two outer; end broadly truncated or trilobed behind, 
in the latter case the middle lobe is the most prominent ; 
flanks of prothorax smooth: legs rather slender, and, together 
with the underside, antenne, &c., shining black. 

Length 124 to 134 lines; width of prothorax across the 
middle 44 to 5 lines; width of elytra behind the middle 54 to 
6 lines. 

Hab. Champion and Nicol Bay, West Australia. Two 


examples. 
Var. Parryt. 


Smaller (104 to 114 lines) than the type, more convex, espe- 
cially the prothorax, the punctuation on the intervals of the 
elytra obsolete or altogether absent, and the striz at the apex 
confusedly united to each other. 

Two examples obtained from the collection of Major Parry, 
labelled ‘‘ Voyage of the ‘ Beagle.’ ” 


Hypaulax orcus, Pascoe (Nyctobates), Journ. Ent. 11. p. 453. 


This very variable species is nearly related to the preceding, 
but may be distinguished by its more oblong parallel form ; 
the prothorax is less strongly transverse, the apex decidedly 
arcuate emarginate, the front angles consequently appear more 
prominent, and are subacute or narrowly rounded; the sides 
anteriorly are much less strongly rounded, the hind angles 
longer, more acute, and obliquely outwardly directed, the apex 
is wider, equal to, or narrower than the base; the head and 
prothorax are almost smooth; the base of the elytra less di- 
stinctly wider than the base of the prothorax; the striz more 
distinct, the intervals, especially at the sides and apex, convex ; 
the legs are stouter ; the gular furrow situated a little nearer to 
the base of the submentum ; the flanks of the prothorax strongly 
wrinkled on the middle; the middle carina of the prosternal 
process much narrower, the two sulci are consequently much 
wider and are continued in front (at right angles) halfway across 
the sternum, in front of the cox, the prosternum thus appearing 
to have a strong transverse impression before the coxe ; this 


and Species of Heteromera. 21 


last character, and the rugosities on the flanks of the prothorax, 

will immediately serve to differentiate the two species. 
Length 11 to 12 lines; width of prothorax across the middle 

3+ to 44 lines ; width of elytra behind the middle 42 to 5 lines. 
Hab. Swan River and Champion Bay, West Australia. Six 


examples. 


Var. acutangulata. 


Two examples from New South Wales slightly differ in 
being a little smaller (10 lines), in having a distinct longitu- 
dinal impression on the cheek, starting from the lower corner 
of the eye beneath ; the striz on the elytra stronger than ordi- 
nary, the intervals more convex and, at the sides and apex, 
subnodulose. In one of the examples the prothorax is strongly 
transverse, and the lateral thickened margin is abruptly ex- 
panded (just below the ordinary notch behind the middle) into 
a broad rounded tooth, and the hind angles are very acute. 

Note. The mandibles in H. orcus and H. ampliata have the 
apex broadly and squarely truncated; in all the other species 
the apex is more or less strongly notched or bifid. 


Hypaulax tenuistriata, n. sp. 
Oblong, robust, black, shining. Labium deeply and widely 


emarginate in front, with a tuft of hairs at apex of central 
portion (between the palpi) ; mandibles strongly notched at 
apex; gular furrow strong, very near to the base of submentum, 
a short longitudinal groove extending from base of submentum 
to the gular furrow; cheek-furrow broadly and deeply im- 
pressed, extending obliquely from the upper edge of the eye 
beneath to close to the gular furrow: mentum more or less 
transversely subcordiform, more or less densely clothed with 
hairs (sometimes very sparsely so); the hairs shorter, finer, 
and less intermingled than in any of the preceding that have 
hirsute mentums: head and prothorax minutely (the former 
very sparsely) punctulate ; crown sometimes impressed by an 
irregular transverse line and by two small fovez, in others it 
is a little more convex and smooth; epistomal suture well 
marked, angulate at the sides: prothorax transverse, convex, 
feebly emarginate at apex, and always narrower than at base ; 
anterior angles not prominent; sides more or less strongly 
rounded to behind the middle, thence contracted in a curve 
to the hind angles, which are moderately prominent and acute 
and directed backwards ; base subsinuously truncated ; sides 
finely margined or thickened, more or less crenulated, and 
sometimes notched or interrupted at the middle, a little reflexed, 
distinctly (though not broadly) channelled within the thickened 


22 Mr. F. Bates on New Genera 


border ; ordinarily there are two more or less distinct and 
rounded fovex at each side of the median dorsal line, which is 
obsolete : scutellum transverse, broadly rounded behind: elytra 
oblong or oblong-ovate; base truncated, the thickened basal 
margin rather narrow, not clearly continuous with the sutural 
interval; finely but distinctly striated, the punctures in the 
strie small (especially on the disk), close-set, narrow, oblong ; 
ordinarily the strie 3 and 4, 5 and 6, and 7 and 8 are united 
behind in pairs; sometimes, however, it is 3 and 4, 5 and 8, 
and 6 and 7 that are united; the short scutellar row consists 
of from five to eight smali close-set punctures ; intervals flat 
on the disk, sometimes convex on the sides, indistinctly punctu- 
late : prosternal process tricarinate ; the middle carina enclosed 
by the two outer, which are ordinarily transversely corrugated : 
legs robust and, together with the underside, shining black ; 
tarsi, antenne, and palpi dark castaneous. 

Length 8-103 lines. 

Hab. Queensland (Rockhampton) and New South Wales. 


Nine examples. 


At once to be distinguished from all the preceding by the 
finely punctured strie of its elytra and its more glossy 
black surface. Like all the other species of which a series 
of examples has been obtained, the form of the prothorax 
(especially) and of the elytra is subject to considerable 
variation. 


Hypaulax oblonga and H. ovalis, mihi, l. c. p. 263. 


A careful examination of a series of nearly forty examples 
has convinced me that the specimens (one of oblonga and two 
of ovalis) on which I founded these two species are really the 
extreme forms of but one species. As the form ovalis has 
been figured (/. c. plate xi. fig. 1) it will be most convenient to 
take that name for the species: therefore oblonga = ovalis. 

This species is intensely variable in the form &c. of the 
prothorax *, especially in the amount of rounding of the sides 
anteriorly. ‘The elytra also are variable as to form; they may 
be subparallel (as in the form oblonga) or decidedly oval ; and 
there exists every variety of form between. 

This species may be at once distinguished from all the others 
by the deeply crenate-striate elytra and convex intervals, and 
by the labium, which has a deep rounded excision at each side 
in front, the middle portion between the palpi being prominent 
and rounded in front, and ordinarily without a tuft of hairs. 


* It was in error that I described the prothorax of oblonga as longer 
than wide. 


and Species of Heteromera. 23 


‘From H. tenuistriata, with which it is most closely allied, it 
may be separated by the above characters, and also by its 
more slender form, the gular furrow placed less close to the 
submentum, the absence of the short longitudinal groove from 
base of submentum, the cheek-furrow shorter and more or less 
recurved round the lower (narrow) edge of the eye beneath. 

Out of the whole of the examples of both sexes I possess of 
this species but one has the mentum clothed with hairs; this, 
coupled with what we have seen before in the other species, 
makes it quite evident that the bearded chin possesses neither 
specific nor even sexual value. 


Hypaulax gayndahensis and H. opacicollis, MacLeay, 
Trans. Ent. Soc. N. S. Wales, 11. pp. 284 & 285. 


As the descriptions of these two species extend to but little 
over two lines for each, I find it impossible to decide whether 
they belong to any of my species or not. In a difficult genus 
like the present, the species of which are subject to great indi- 
vidual variation, it is impossible intelligibly to characterize 
the species in such short descriptions. 


ASTATHMETUS, n. g. 


Mentum slightly pedunculate, winged ; the central portion 
large, prominent, not wider than long, hexagonal. Mazille 
with the inner lobe unarmed ; last joint of the palpi elongate- 
triangulate, the outer side longest. Labium strongly transverse, 
partly concealed by the mentum, broadly emarginate and ciliate 
in front; palpi distant, the last joint oval, with the apex 
broadly truncated. Gula strongly transversely sulcate. 
Submentum small, transversely triangular, a deep longitudinal 
sulcus extending from its base to the gular furrow. Cheeks 
beneath strongly sulcate, the furrow extending obliquely from 
the base of the antenna, skirting the upper edge of the eye, to 
close to the gular furrow. Mandibles broadly truncated, and 
slightly notched near the lower edge at apex. Head sub- 
prominent, subquadrate ; front a little depressed; front and 
epistoma together trapeziform : antennary orbits well rounded. 
Epistoma squarely truncated in front ; the suture well marked 
at each side. Labrum transverse, front angles well rounded, 
fore margin ciliate and slightly emarginate. Antenne feebly 
perfoliate ; joints 3-6 obconic and a little nodose at apex, 
3 longer than 4, 4-6 gradually a little shorter, 7-10 gradually 
larger and wider, depressed, 11 large, subovoid. Hyes moderate, 
rather prominent, narrow, transverse, obliquely contracted 


24 On New Genera and Species of Heteromera. 


below. Prothorax subquadrate, wider than long, but little 
convex ; apex slightly sinuously emarginate; front angles not 
prominent; sides very moderately rounded, a little incurved 
before the hind angles, which are small, subacute, and out- 
wardly directed; lateral edges a little sinuous, unequally 
thickened, and channelled within ; base feebly bisinuate, rather 
thickly margined. Scutellum rather large, curvilinearly tri- 
angular. lytra elongate-oval, widest behind the middle, 
and somewhat attenuate at apex, moderately convex, gradually 
declivous behind ; base emarginate, scarcely wider than base 
of prothorax, without trace of a thickened margin; shoulders 
a little oblique: epipleural fold entire (though narrow and 
becoming vertical) behind. Metasternum short: intercoxal 
process wide, rounded at apex: prosternal process broad, 
strongly tricarinate, the middle carina enclosed by the two 
outer; end broadly truncated. Mesosternum subhorizontal, 
broadly concave in front, deeply and obliquely impressed at 
each side above. Legs rather slender: tibia a little thickened 
outwardly, obsoletely spurred: tars? tomentose beneath ; first 
joint of the posterior of nearly equal length to the last. 


This is the third known genus of the Calometopides, having 
at the same time both cheek- and throat-furrows. From the 
other two (Hypaulax and Chileone) this may at once be 
distinguished by the elongate-ovate and less convex form, the 
square prothorax, and the total absence of a thickened margin 
to the base of the elytra. 


Astathmetus alienus, n. sp. 


Elongate-ovate, attenuate behind.  JBlack, subopaque. 
Throat-furrow a little arched: head (except the epistoma) and 
prothorax indistinetly punctulate: elytra less opaque than the 
prothorax ; on each elytron nine punctured striz, the strize very 
fine; the punctures narrow, oblong, well impressed, those on the 
sutural row smallest, and becoming gradually larger and 
stronger towards the sides; a short scutellar row of four or 
five punctures ; intervals smooth, impunctate, flat on the disk, 
a little undulate at the sides: legs and underside shining black, 
minutely punctulate ; flanks of prothorax smooth, impunctate ; 
antennee and palpi pitchy, outer joints of the former dusky. 

Length 11 lines ; width of elytra behind the middle 43 Imes. 

Hab. Colombia. One example. 


[To be continued. | 


On the Geographical Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 25 


VI.—The Geographical Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 
By Captain F. W. Hurron, C.M.Z.S.* 


I Know of no part of the world that presents such a promising 
field to the student of nature as New Zealand. Although 
small in size, it contains a fauna and flora so peculiar that 
several naturalists consider it a separate biological province 
apart from the rest of the world. Isolated from any large con- 
tinental area longer probably than any other portion of the 
earth, it contains the remnant of the population of a continent 
that existed before the Mammalia had overspread the world; 
and to that has at various times been added, principally from 
Australia, a colonist population which culminated not many 
hundreds of years ago in the advent of man. New Zealand, 
therefore, presents us with what I may call the elements of a 
continental fauna, or a continental fauna in its simplest state, 
and consequently in that state which is most advantageous for 
studying the mutual relations of the animals composing it. 
Both Mr. Darwin and Mr. Wallace call New Zealand an 
“oceanic island” from a zoological point of view, owing to 
the absence of terrestrial mammals and the meagreness of its 
fauna and flora; that is to say, they consider it an island 
that has never formed part of a continental area since its last 
emergence from the sea. But I think that the Struthious birds 
have certainly as much weight in determining this point as 
terrestrial mammals, for they have no superior means of dis- 
persion ; and New Zealand also possesses a frog, which is one 
of the great characteristics of a continental fauna. From a 
geological point of view, I do not see how any land, except 
volcanic and coral islands, could have originated except as part 
of a large continental upheaval. I think, therefore, that the 
New-Zealand fauna may be correctly called the remnants of a 
continental fauna, and that a close study of it will throw great 
light on many of the most important, but at the same time 
most obscure, problems in zoology. It will, however, be long 
before this can be accomplished. The describing and naming 
of the different animals, which is the foundation upon which 
all other researches must rest, is as yet far from being com- 
leted ; the determination of what species are the original in- 
ficbitacits’ or the descendants of the original inhabitants, of the 
former continent has hardly been attempted; but all this must 
be settled before any sound deductions can be drawn as to the 
reasons of extinction, variation, or permanency of type of the 
animals. 


* Communicated by the Author, from the ‘Transactions of the New 
Zealand Institute,’ vol. vy. 1872. 


26 Captain F. W. Hutton on the Geographical 


It is to this latter point that I wish to draw attention—not 
that I am in possession of information sufficient to prove any 
one perhaps of the points that I shall raise, but because I think 
that sufficient is known to establish with great probability the 
main features in the zoological history of these islands; and 
this sketch which I now presume to offer will, I hope, in- 
duce others to examine the subject more in detail, and will 
give a systematic direction to their observations. I propose to 
take first the zoological evidence—to point out the principal 
facts that have to be accounted for and the deductions that they 
lead to; I will then rapidly glance at the geological and 
paleontological evidence ; and, finally, I will draw up from the 
whole the hypothesis that appears best able to account for all 
the phenomena. 

MAMMALIA. 


Of our two bats, one (Scotophilus tuberculatus), although 
not found elsewhere, is closely allied to those of Australia, 
while the other (Mystacina velutina) forms the only species of 
a genus peculiar to New Zealand, but related to bats living in 
South America. 

Two species of seal frequent our shores—the sea-leopard 
(Stenorhynchus leptonyx), which is also found on ice-floes in 
the antarctic seas, and occasionally extends to Australia, and 
the fur-seal (Arctocephalus cinereus), which is supposed to 
occur also on the southern coasts of Australia, and is closel 
related to, if not identical with, a species found at the Falkland 
Islands, Cape Horn, South Shetland, and South Georgia. In 
the Otago Museum there is also a skull that appears to belong 
to the sea-elephant (Morunga proboscidea). Mr. Purdie in- 
formed me that it was picked up a long way inland. 

Of the Cetacea, some twelve or thirteen species are known, 
belonging to the six different families into which the marine 
members of this order have been divided; and it is remarkable 
that two thirds of them are endemic—that is, not found any- 
where else. Our two or three species of whalebone-whale 
have, up to the present, been found nowhere else. The sperm- 
whale of our northern coasts is probably the same species as 
that found in Australia and the South Pacific (Catodon aus- 
tralis) ; it is certainly distinct from the northern sperm-whale 
(C. macrocephalus), as the lower jaw is much narrower*. 

Our ziphioid whales, of which we have three or four species, 
are all endemic ; and two of them (Berardius Arnuxti and Me- 

* A lower jaw of the New-Zealand sperm-whale in the Auckland 
Museum is 17 ft. 7 in. in length and only 2 ft. 2 in. in width at the con- 


dyles ; there are twenty-three teeth on each side, four of which are rudi- 
mentary only; the length of the largest tooth is 7:4 in. 


Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 27 


soplodon Hector?) belong to genera not found elsewhere. None, 
however, of our Delphiniide are confined to New Zealand. 
Delphinus nove-zealandie inhabits the antarctic seas and 
perhaps Tasmania; Lagenorhynchus clanculus is found through- 
out the Pacific Ocean, but not in Australia; and Orca capen- 
sts, a lower jaw of which is in the Auckland Museum, ranges 
from the Cape of Good Hope through the Southern Ocean 
to Chili, and is also found in the North Pacific and Tas- 
mania. The blackfish (Globiocephalus macrorhynchus) is 
found in the South Pacific and Japan, but not in Australia. 
Our Cetacea, therefore, contrary to what might have been ex- 
pected, show a nearer relation to the Pacific and Antarctic 
oceans than they do to Australia; and it is remarkable that 
no species of porpoise has as yet been described as found in 
New Zealand, although two inhabit Tasmania. 

The absence of terrestrial Mammalia is one of the chief 
points of interest in New-Zealand zoology, as it proves that 
there has been no land communication between this country 
and Australia since the latter was inhabited by Marsupials ; 
for I consider that the so-called Maori rat and native dog 
were both introduced by human agency *. 

Sir George Grey informs me that he sent to the British 
Museum some grey “ Maori rats’? which had been caught 
in the interior of the South Island in 1847 by Mr. Torlesse, 
and that Dr. Gray had said that they were identical with a 
rat found in Polynesia, by which he must have meant the 
black rat (Mus rattus) ; for none of the islands in the Pacific 
possesses an indigenous rat. Dr. Buller also collected a con- 
siderable amount of evidence to show that the ‘‘ kiore-maori”’ 
was identical with a rat (now in the Colonial Museum) which 
he described (Trans. N.-Z. Inst. ii. p. 1) under the name of 
Mus nove-zealandie, but which is certainly Mus rattus. Mr. 
Colenso says (Proc. R. Soc. of Van Diemen’s Land, 1851, 
p- 301), in a letter to R. Gunn, Esq., dated 4th September, 
1850, that after considerable trouble he had procured two 
specimens of the native rat, which he describes as “ smaller 
than our English black rat (JZ. rattus), and not unlike it.” 
Against this we have the statement of Dr. Dieffenbach, who 
says (‘New Zealand,’ ii. p. 185) that it was the English 
and not the Norway rat that killed off the “ kiore-maori.”’ 
This, I think, must be a mistake, as all the Maoris attri- 


* Captain Cook remarks, in his first voyage, that rats were “so scarce 
that many of us never saw them” (Hawkesworth’s ‘Coll. of Voy.’ iii. 
p- 34). He makes no mention of their ever being used for food ; and I am 
not aware of any remains of rate having been as yet found in Maori cooking- 
places. 


28 Captain F. W. Hutton on the Geographical 


bute the destruction of the edible rat to the brown rat, and 
it could only have been from Maoris that Dr. Dieffenbach 
got his information. Mr. Murray also states (Distr. of Mam- 
mals, p. 277) that the Norway rat (M. decumanus) was not 
introduced into New Zealand in 1843; but he gives no evi- 
dence of the truth of this statement; and it is unquestionably 
erroneous *. The whole of the reliable evidence that we have, 
therefore, goes to prove that the Maori rat was no other than 
M. rattus. 

The so-called “native dog’ has been determined by Dr. 
Gray to be Canis familiaris (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1868, p. 508), 
and not the Australian species or variety called Canis dingo, 
which is the strongest possible evidence of its beg merely an 
escaped domestic breed; indeed I am not aware that any na- 
turalist believes in an indigenous native dog, except Dr. Haast, 
who has argued (Trans. N. Z. Inst. iv. p. 88) that a wild dog 
existed in New Zealand before the domesticated one, because 
in certain old Maori cooking-places he has found remains of 
the dog but no gnawed bones; while in others, which he 
considers of later date, he finds gnawed bones t. But I am 
not aware that he has any proof of the existence of a dog in 
New Zealand before the arrival of man ; the difference of 
date of these cooking-places for which Dr. Haast contends is 
denied by many observers, and his argument derived from 
the presence or absence of ground stone implements has, I 
think, been successfully controverted. I can therefore attach 
no weight to the absence of gnawed bones. On the other 
hand, there is the fact that no indigenous dog or rat has ever 
been found on an island that was not inhabited by other Mam- 
malia; and when we remember that Marsupials came into ex- 
istence long before rats and dogs, it is difficult to see how the 
latter conld possibly get to any country without the former 
coming also. It is evident that neither Banks, nor Solander, 
nor the Forsters considered the dog and rat that they found in 


* Since reading this paper Mr. Nichol has informed me that the brown 
rat was common in Nelson when he first arrived in the early part of 1842, 
and that he never saw any other kind there except a single specimen of a 
very large and slightly striped variety. 

+ The skulls of dogs found in old Maori cooking-places prove un- 
doubtedly that Canis familiaris existed in New Zealand long balers Euro- 
peans came here. Captain Cook says (21st October, 1769) that the dogs 
were “small and ugly ;” and Mr. Anderson (‘Cook’s Third Voyage,’ i. 
p. 153) calls it a “sort of fox-dog.” Captain Cook also says in his first 
voyage that the dog was used for no other purpose than toeat. The fact 
that the inhabitants of the Friendly Islands have the same name (kwri) for 
the dog as the New-Zealanders is strong evidence that the latter brought 
it with them ; for if not, they would have lost the name, as they have done 
that of the fowl. 


Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 29 


New Zealand a new species, or they would certainly have 
mentioned it; neither did Lesson in 1827, nor Quoy and 
Gaimard in 1831. Dr. Dieffenbach in 1842 was the first to 
state that a frugivorous rat, distinct from I. rattus, existed in 
New Zealand, he probably not being aware that J. rattus is 
entirely frugivorous. I am therefore of opinion that both the 
rat and the dog were brought by human agency; and it is 
worth remarking that the Maori traditions relate that they 
brought both with them (Travers, Trans. N. Z. Inst. iv. 
p- 58). The specimen of Mus Gouldiin the Auckland Museum 
(see Trans. N. Z. Inst. ii. p. 3) was caught, I believe, at the 
Thames in January 1853; and as a mission-station had been 
established there some years previously, this specimen was no 
doubt brought over from Australia in their vessel. 

The animal seen at Dusky Bay by some of Captain Cook’s 
sailors (Second Voyage, i. p. 98) was probably a dog, as none 
on board had at that time seen a dog in New Zealand. 

The evidence of a kind of otter inhabiting the South Island 
rests upon some footprints seen by Dr. Haast, and mentioned 
by him in his first presidential address to the Canterbury Phi- 
losophical Society (Nat. Hist. Rev. 1864, p. 30). In the 
same address he also mentions having seen tracks in great 
numbers of a small jumping mammal in the river-bed of the 
Hopkins; but as no further evidence of the existence of these 
creatures has been adduced, although eight or nine years have 
since elapsed, it is impossible for me to take any further 
notice of them in this paper. 


BirpDs. 


The first point that claims our attention here is the great 
development of the Struthious birds. This division can be 
subdivided into two families—one (Apterygide) containing 
only the kiwis, and the other (Struthionide) including all 
other living forms as well as the extinct moas. The kiwis in 
the structure of the egg-shell have an affinity with the Cari- 
nate division of birds. Their short legs, and the presence of 
a hind toe elevated above the level of the others, show an 
approach to the Gallinaceous order; while their long bill, with 
its slightly swollen tip, resembles in some measure that of the 
Scolopacide, which have also the same habit as the kiwi of 
feeling about on the ground with their bill. Gallinago pusilla, 
moreover, lives in holes, and only comes out at night (Travers, 
see Art. xxii.). 

Thus the Apterygide have a more generalized structure 
than the other Struthious birds; they therefore belong to an 
older type, and cannot with any degree of correctness be said 


30 Captain F. W. Hutton on the Geographical 


to represent the extinct race of moas. The relations between 
the second family, or the Struthiones proper, are very compli- 
cated ; but Dinornis, which alone concerns us here, appears 
to be intermediate between the rheas of South America and 
the emus and cassowaries of Australia and the adjacent islands. 
It approaches the rhea in the structure of its egg-shell, and in 
having only three pairs of sternal ribs; while the emu, the 
cassowary, and also the kiwi have four, and the ostrich five 
pairs. In the structure of its feathers and in the shape of its 
pelvis and skull the moa approaches the emu. The Stru- 
thious birds exhibit a type of structure intermediate in many 
respects between the Carimate birds and the extinct Dimosau- 
rians; and this leads naturalists to suppose that they are but 
the remnant of a race that once spread over the whole earth. 
About twelve species are known outside New Zealand ; while 
here, besides our four species of Apteryx, Professor Owen has 
determined fourteen species of Dinornis, three of Aptornis, 
and one of Cnemiornis, thus making a total of twenty-two 
species of Struthious birds, belonging to four different genera, 
living in New Zealand only a few hundred years ago—that is 
to say, nearly twice as many as are found in all other parts of 
the world put together. 

Probably, however, some of Professor Owen’s species of 
Dinornis are but the young of others; and it seems to me very 
doubtful whether Aptornis and Cnemiornis should be regarded 
as struthious birds at all. Itis evident that these two genera 
are closely related ; and if the wing-bones placed upon Cremi- 
ornis calcitrans really belong to the legs of the same bird, we 
must suppose that the sternum had a keel sufficiently developed 
to support muscles of a size proportionate to the wings; for 
although we can understand how the kakapo (Stringops), belong- 
ing to an order of deeply keeled birds, may have lost, by dis- 
use of the pectoral muscles, the keel on its sternum, we cannot 
possibly explain how a struthious bird could have had large 
wing-bones developed unless it had also sufficiently powerful 
muscles to use them. J also observe that Aptornis defossor 
now wears a skull similar to that of the late Dinornis casua- 
rinus, Which skull Mr. W. K. Parker says undoubtedly 
belonged originally to a Notornis. But, omitting these two 
genera and making a due allowance for doubtful species of 
Dinornis, the great number of species living on so small an 
island is very remarkable when contrasted with other parts of 
the world. The continent of Africa, including Arabia, con- 
tains but one (or, according to some naturalists, two) species of 
ostrich. South America, from Patagonia to Peru, has but 
three species of rhea, each inhabiting a separate district. 


Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 31 


Australia possesses two species of emu, one on the eastern and 
the other on the western side, and one species of cassowary 
on the northern, while five other species of cassowary inhabit 
other detached islands, from New Britain and New Guinea to 
the Molucca Islands. I believe that outside of New Zealand no 
two species of struthious birds are found living in the same 
district, while here we have now four species of kiwi, and not 
long ago had at least half a dozen species of moa as well. 
How can this be accounted for? The solution is readily found 
by examining the distribution of the cassowaries. Here we 
have six species inhabiting six isolated localities. If now this 
region of the earth were to be elevated, these six species might 
mingle; and if it were subsequently to sink again, all six 
species would undoubtedly be driven to the higher lands, and 
we should have in this supposed island a representation of 
New Zealand inhabited by six species of Struthious birds. 

In order, therefore, to account for the numerous species of 
Dinornis, we must suppose an ancient continent inhabited by 
one or two species to sink and the birds to take refuge on the 
different mountain-ranges left as islands above the water. We 
must suppose that they remained thus isolated from one another 
for a sufficiently long period to allow of specific changes being 
brought about, that then by an elevation of the land they 
once more mingled together, and that, on subsidence again 
taking place, New Zealand, as the central mountain-chain, 
formed a harbour of refuge for them all. 

Whether this isolation of species points to some cause as 
yet unrecognized, by which in the struggle for life no two 
species of struthious bird can live in close proximity, I will 
not venture to give an opinion; but it is a fair subject for 
inquiry, and one on which the careful study of the relative 
ages of moa-bones might throw considerable light, and enable 
us perhaps to understand the great mortality that must have 
taken place amongst the moas when confined to these small 
islands long before man set his foot here. 

The distribution, therefore, of the Struthious birds in the 
southern hemisphere points to a large antarctic continent 
stretching from Australia through New Zealand to South 
America, and perhaps on to South Africa. This continent 
must have sunk ; and Australia, New Zealand, South America, 
and South Africa must have remained isolated from one ano- 
ther long enough to allow of the great differences observable 
between the birds of each country being brought about. Sub- 
sequently New Zealand must have formed part of a smaller 
continent, not connected either with Australia or South Ame- 
rica, over which the moa roamed. ‘This must have been fol- 


32 Captain F. W. Hutton on the Geographical 


lowed by a long insular period ending in another continent 
still disconnected from Australia and South America, which 
continent again sank and New Zealand assumed somewhat of 
its present form. 

Passing now to the Carinate division of birds, the first thing 
that strikes us is the fragmentary nature of this- part of our 
avifauna (if we exclude the Gralle and web-tooted birds), 
thus strongly contrasting with the Struthious division. 

Of the first six orders we possess (excluding the Chatham 
and Auckland Islands) forty-five species, thirty of which are 
endemic. ‘These have been referred to thirty-one genera, ten 
of which are found nowhere else ; and these thirty-one genera 
belong to twenty families, one of which (Stringopide) is pecu- 
liar to New Zealand. ‘Two families only, the honey-eaters 
(Meliphagide) and the starlings (Stwrnide), contain more than 
two genera. The first shows affinity to Australia; but it 
must be remarked that out of the four species of this family, 
belonging to four different genera, one genus only (Zosterops) 
is found in Australia, and the little bird (the ‘‘ white-eye ’’) 
that belongs to this genus is known to be quite a recent arrival 
in this country. The Sturnide, on the other hand, show an 
affinity with Polynesia; for one species only (Calornis metal- 
licus) of this family is found in the north of Australia and in 
New Guinea. It should, however, be noticed that three other 
species are found in the latter island. In this family also our 
three species belong to three different genera, two of which 
(Creadion and Heteralocha) are found nowhere else, while the 
other (Aplonis) is very characteristic of Polynesia; and Aplonis 
caledonicus, which is said to have been found in New Zealand, 
occurs also in Norfolk Island and New Caledonia. 

It is remarkable that our two owls should both be peculiar 
to New Zealand, and that one of them (Sceloglaux albifactes) 
should belong to a genus not found elsewhere ; for the owls are 
usually widely spread birds, more so, indeed, than the hawks. 
Itis also worthy of notice that Strix delicatula, which extends 
its range over most of the Pacific islands and Australia, should 
be absent from New Zealand. 

Our parrots present several points of interest. The kakapo 
(Stringops habroptilus) is found nowhere else; the genus 
Nestor extends only to Norfolk Island, while our perroquets, 
although belonging to a genus (Platycercus) equally plentiful 
both in Australia and Polynesia, show a greater affinity to the 
latter, one species (P. nove-zealandie) ranging not only to 
Norfolk Island, but also to New Caledonia. It is remarkable 
that we have no representatives of the cockatoos and grass- 
perroquets so common in Australia and Tasmania; for our own 


Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. dd 


climate is quite suitable for them. The absence of Polynesian 
forms is not so remarkable, as they belong chiefly to more tro- 
pical genera, and the members of the genus Cor/philus are 
said to live only on bananas. 

That we should have two cuckoos which migrate regularly 
to other countries each more than a thousand miles distant, is 
a fact that deserves special attention ; for I know of no parallel 
case in any other part of the world, the distance across the 
Mediterranean being less than half that travelled over by our 
summer visitants. ‘Che phenomenon of a bird at a certain 
season of the year flying out to sea to an island more than a 
thousand miles distant is remarkable enough, but is rendered 
still more so in the case of the little shining cuckoo (Chryso- 
coccyx lucidus, which is supposed to come from Australia) by 
there being no apparent necessity for it; for this bird migrates 
east and west, and not from a warmer to a colder climate, and 
two other closely allied species which inhabit Australia never 
leave the country at all. Even in the case of the long-tailed 
cuckoo (Hudynamis taitiensis), which comes to us from the 
equable climate of the South-Sea Islands, we cannot suppose 
that its migrations are caused either by alteration of tempera- 
ture or by want of food; and the question forces itself upon 
us, How could this habit have arisen? The only reasonable 
hypothesis is, I think, that at one time the different lands to 
and from which these birds fly were connected, or nearly so, 
that the distance between them gradually increased, and that 
the habit so common amongst birds of resorting each year to 
the same place to breed was not lost, but gradually merged 
into a regular migration. From this point of view, the arrival 
of the shining cuckoo indicates a connexion with Australia or 
perhaps New Guinea, while that of the long-tailed cuckoo in- 
dicates one with Polynesia ; and it must be noticed that, while 
the latter bird is identical with specimens from Polynesia, the 
former shows such differences in the colouring of the tail- 
feathers from the birds inhabiting Australia, that it is consi- 
dered by many naturalists to be a distinct species. Another 
remarkable fact that has been quite lately brought to light is 
that the shining cuckoo of the Chatham Islands is not the 
same variety as that visiting New Zealand, but is almost, if 
not quite, identical with an Australian species (C. plagosus). 
This curious fact proves how strong must be the force of 
habit ; for these birds in their migration to and from the 
Chatham Islands must pass over, or at least in sight of, New 
Zealand ; but instead of stopping after a journey of 1400 miles, 
they continue on for 450 miles more, until they reach the little 
island that they have selected as their home. 

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 3 


34 Capt. F. W. Hutton on the Geographical 


A more difficult fact to account for is the presence of dif- 
ferent species of grass-bird (Sphenwacus) in both Australia and 
New Zealand ; for this bird has such feeble powers of flight that 
it could not cross a river, and must almost of necessity have 
travelled by land. It must, however, be noticed that this 
genus extends through the Indian archipelago into India, and 
I have not been able yet to compare our grass-birds with those 
of Australia and the archipelago, so that I am not able to say 
what amount of difference there 1s between them. The genus 
Keropia has most affinity with South-American birds, while 
Graucalus melanops, which is closely related to our G. con- 
cinnus, is said to extend from Australia into New Guinea. 

In the order Gralle, or Waders, we come to birds more 
widely spread than any others, some indeed being almost cos- 
mopolitan : but even amongst these the isolated character of 
our fauna is still marked; for out of twenty-eight species be- 
longing to seventeen genera eight species and two genera are 
found nowhere else. ‘The most noticeable feature in this order 
is the existence of a curious genus of rails (Ocydromus) quite 
unable to fly. Of this genus we possess four species, one in 
the North and three in the South Island, while a fifth species 
is found in Lord-Howe Island, and a sixth in New Caledonia. 
Notornis, although somewhat like the pukeko (Porphyrio me- 
lanotus) in the bill, has the feeble wings, thick legs, and short 
toes of Tribonyx Mortierti of Tasmania and Australia. Of 
our other rails, two (Rallus pectoralis and Ocydromus tabuensis) 
are spread over Australia and Polynesia, while another (O. affi- 
nis), although not found elsewhere, is closely related to a species 
from Australia (O. palustris). In the godwit (Limosa uropy- 
gialis) we have another migratory bird that probably comes 
from Polynesia; but as it is also found in Australia, we cannot 
feel any certainty about it. New Zealand also displays the 
peculiarity of bemg the only country in the world inhabited 
by two species of stilt-plover (Himantopus), one of which (Z. 
nove-zelandie) is found nowhere else. This is probably 
owing to the length of time that New Zealand has been 
isolated, and to its having had during the whole of the period 
a stilt-plover on it, which gradually changed until it attained 
that remarkable jet-black plumage which is so different from 
that of any other species ; while the later colonist from Australia 
(H. leucocephalus) displays the colour usual to the genus. 
‘This view is rendered the more probable by the fact that the 
young of the black stilt-plover have the same pied plumage 
that is exhibited by the adults of those species from one of 
which I suppose it to have been derived. 

In the crookbill (Anarhynchus jfrontalis) we have another 


Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 35 


curious anomaly which as yet has received no explanation ; 
and it must also be noticed that Cape Horn, the Cape of Good 
Hope, Australia, and New Zealand possess each a_ black 
oystercatcher (Hematopus) which are considered specifically 
distinct. 

Among the herons the only very remarkable fact is the 
occurrence of the little bittern (Ardea pusilla), a bird found 
only in Australia and Natal. Our snipe (Gallinago pusilla) 
very much resembles in plumage G. Stricklandi trom Tierra 
del Fuego, but it has a shorter bill. 

Among the web-footed birds the first thing that claims our 
attention is the oceanic family of the petrels (Procellariide), 
for although by no means peculiar to New Zealand*, the great 
number of species in the southern oceans in comparison with 
the small number in the northern is very noticeable. The 
northern and tropical species have all closely allied forms in 
the southern hemisphere, while many of the southern petrels 
(such as Ossifraga, Halodroma, Majaqueus, Pterodroma, Dap- 
tion, and Prion) have no representatives in the northern seas. 
This leads to the inference that the northern species have been 
derived from stray southern birds, and that the southern hemi- 
sphere has been the centre from which most oceanic birds have 
spread, while land birds, on the contrary, have spread chiefly 
from northern areas; and this leads to the further inference 
that the southern hemisphere has been for many ages more 
oceanic in character than the northern. The next most re- 
markable point is the great development of the cormorants, 
New Zealand possessing nine species, four of which are found 
nowhere else. No other country in the world possesses so 
many; and the phenomenon can only, I think, be accounted 
for in the same way as the numerous species of moa—that is, 
by the former existence of several small islands which have 
since been elevated to form the present New Zealand. The 
wide dispersion, however, of two of our cormorants is rather 
against this view, one (Graculus carunculatus) being found at 
the Crozet Islands and at Cape Horn, and the other (G. carbo) 
in Australia, China, and Europe. I| must, however, remark 
that the identity of the first has not yet been perfectly 
established, and that the second, although very closely re- 
sembling specimens from Europe, shows at the same time some 
difference. Jt may also be useful to remark here that our 
gannet (Dysporus serrator), although a far better-flying bird 
than the cormorants, is not found at the Chatham Islands ; and 
Dr. Finsch informs me that it is undoubtedly different from 


* Procellaria Parkinson is peculiar to New Zealand. 
OX 
el 


36 Capt. F. W. Hutton on the Geographical 


the species (D. capensis) that occurs at the Cape of Good 
Hope. The occurrence of G. brevirostris and G. melanoleucus 
in New Zealand presents a parallel case to the two species of 
stilt-plover, with, however, this difference—that, judging from 
the colours of the young bird, it is probable that G. melano- 
leucus has been derived from G. brevirostr’s owing to its having 
been isolated in Australia, and that its descendants have 
migrated back again to New Zealand. 

Of the gulls we possess a species (Larus pomare) which is 
found nowhere else—a peculiarity of which few countries can 
boast, but which can perhaps be accounted for by the fact that 
this gull only frequents freshwater lakes and seldom comes 
down tothe sea. Our other gulls are widely spread ; but it is a 
most remarkable fact, which at present appears to me to be 
quite inexplicable, that neither gulls nor cormorants occur in 
any of the Polynesian islands. 

Of ducks we possess nine species, four, or perhaps five, of 
which are endemic—one, the blue duck (Hymenolemus ma- 
lacorhynchus), belonging to a curious genus found only in New 
Zealand, but related to a genus (Malacorhynchus) in Australia. 
The others are all found in Australia—one (Pterocyanea gib- 
berifrons) ranging through New Caledonia and the Indian 
archipelago, and another, the common grey duck (Anas super- 
ciliosa), spreading over Polynesia as far north as the Sandwich 
Islands. The most remarkable circumstance connected with 
our ducks is the presence of a species of Fuligula, a genus 
found neither in Australia nor Africa, but belonging properly 
to the northern parts of America, Europe, and Asia, although 
one species is found in South America. The occurrence, how- 
ever, of a northern species (/. cristata) in the Pelew Islands 
points out to us perhaps the route along which the ancestors 
of our species travelled. 

The Chatham Islands possess thirty-two species of birds 
(omitting the gulls, penguins, and petrels), of which six are 
found nowhere else. All the others are found in New Zealand, 
except the shiing cuckoo (C. plagosus), which, as already 
stated, migrates to and from Australia. No genus, however, 
is peculiar to these islands, except perhaps a rail (adlus ? 
modestus) which is evidently incapable of flight, and which 
will probably have to be placed in a genus by itself. This 
curious form must not, however, be regarded as a change pro- 
duced by long isolation, but rather as an old form preserved 
from destruction by isolation. The most noticeable cir- 
cumstance in the Chatham-Island fauna is the absence of 
Raptores, with the exception of an occasional visit from 
the harrier (Céreus Gould’), which does not, however, appear 


= 


Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 37 


to inhabit the islands, or at any rate is exceedingly rare 
there. 

The Auckland Islands possess twelve birds, three or four 
ef which are endemic, the remainder all belonging to New 
Zealand. ‘The most remarkable facts are the occurrence of a 
species of merganser (Mergus australis), a genus found only 
in high northern latitudes, and of a duck (Nesonetta auck- 
landica) with very short wings, belonging to a genus found 
nowhere else. 

On Norfolk Island we know of twenty-six birds. Of these, 

two (Aplonis caledonicus and Platycercus nove-zelandie) are 
found in New Zealand and New Caledonia, five others are 
common to New Zealand and Australia, a species of Nestor 
(NV. productus) used to inhabit Philip Island close by, and 
the remainder show an affinity to Australia. 
_ Lord-Howe Island possesses only six land birds, two of 
which (Charadrius bicinctus and Ocydromus sylvestris) show 
a connexion with New Zealand, while the rest show an affinity 
to Australia. 

A review of the facts disclosed by a study of the distribution 
of the Carinate birds shows that, although the affinity is greater 
with Australia than with any other place, there is yet a decided 
leaning towards Polynesia; and when we remember that a 
large portion of Australia lies in the same latitude as New 
Zealand, while the whole of Polynesia is far away to the 
north, I think the difference is not so great as might have 
been expected*. The distribution of the genus Ocydromus 
proves that land communication must once have existed 
between New Zealand, Lord-Howe Island, and New Caledonia; 
but the absence of cockatoos, grass-perroquets, pigeons, night- 
jars, and finches indicates that this connexion did not extend 
to Australia. With the exception of Sphenwacus, which has 
very feeble powers of flight, all our Australian birds could 
have crossed over a strait of considerable width. The phe- 
nomena of the perroquets, starlings, and long-tailed cuckoo of 
Polynesia being associated in New Zealand with the honey- 
eaters, grass-bird, and gold cuckoo of Australia, indicate that 
New Zealand was connected with a tract of land intermediate 
to both, but perhaps not connected with either ; at the same 
time the absence of the more tropical Polynesian birds is no 
evidence that this tract of land did not extend into Polynesia ; 
and in Zosterops lateralis and Dendrocygna Eytoni, both ot 
which have appeared since Europeans came into the colony, 

* The distribution of the Megapodid shows that Polynesia, Australia, 


the Indian archipelago as far as the Strait of Lombok, North-west Borneo. 
and the Philippine Islands were united before the spread of the mammals, 


38 On the Geographical Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 


we have positive evidence that our islands can even now be 
colonized from Australia by many kinds of birds, although 
1400 miles distant. It would also appear that this transter 
of birds to New Zealand took place sufficiently long ago to 
allow of changes of generic value having taken place, while 
the Chatham and Auckland Islands have been isolated from 
New Zealand for a time sufficient only for changes of specific 
value. 
REPTILIA. 


The Reptiles of New Zealand are not numerous. We 
possess about eight species of lizards, four of which belong to 
widely spread genera of the family Scincide ; but the species 
are all endemic. Three others belong to the Geckotide, and 
form a genus (Naultinus) which is found nowhere else. Of 
these, one (N. pacificus) is said to be found in some of the 
Pacific islands ; but the other two are peculiar to New Zealand. 
Our eighth species, the curious tuatara (Sphenodon punctatum), 
which is now found only on a few rocky islets in the Bay of 
Plenty and near Tory Channel in Cook’s Strait, is placed by 
Dr. Giinther in a separate order from all other lizards on 
account of the affinity that it shows to the crocodiles. ‘This 
remarkable form has no copulatory organs, and has uncinate 
processes on its ribs like birds. It has also nearly twice as 
many abdominal as true ribs, which protect the abdomen when 
being dragged along the ground, for, as in the crocodile, the 
hind legs are too weak to support the hinder parts of the body ; 
Dr. Giinther also suggests that they may use these ribs for loco- 
motion as snakes do. It is also remarkable that this animal, 
which lives in holes and only comes out during warm weather, 
should have the dorsal crest that is so characteristic of tree- 
lizards. 

TI omit all reference to Norbea? ‘solata, supposed to come 
from White Island in the Bay of Plenty, because its true 
locality is not sufficiently well established; if, however, 
another specimen should be obtained, it would be most im- 
portant evidence in the present discussion. 

But one species of lizard is found on the Chatham Islands, 
which is very variable, but which I consider to belong to the 
species Mocoa zelandica; it is, however, larger, and shows 
some slight differences in the shape of its cephalic shields. _ 

A ringed sea-snake, probably Platurus scutatus of Australia 
and Polynesia, is sometimes washed alive on to our coasts as 
far south as the mouth of the river Waikato, but it is not yet 
ascertained whether it is an inhabitant of our seas. A peculiar 
variety of Pelamis bicolor, which as yet has not been found in 
any other locality, has also been taken on our shores. 


On the Development of Polypes and of their Polypary. 39 


AMPHIBIANS. 


The amphibious animals are worse represented even than 
the reptiles, one species of frog (Liopelma Hochstetter’) being 
the only member of the class. his frog has now been found 
in three distinct localities, all, however, in the province of 
Auckland: these are, the Cape Colville ranges from Coro- 
mandel to Puriri, the Huia on the north side of the Manukau 
harbour, and the mountains behind Opotiki in the Bay of 
Plenty. It belongs to a genus not found elsewhere; but its 
nearest ally is Telmatobius peruvianus from Peru, and it should 
be remembered that the frogs of Australia are also allied to 
South-American forms. It is evident that the absence of 
other Batrachians cannot be accounted for by the unsuitability 
of climate or want of food; for the common green frog of 
Australia (Litoria aurea), which has been introduced, has 
spread with great rapidity around both Auckland and Christ- 
church. 

The evidence of the reptiles, therefore, is that New Zealand 
has had land communication with some of the Pacific islands 
at a later date than with Australia; for in the first case there 
is no specific difference between forms found in both places, 
while in the latter the species are now quite distinct. Our frog 
proves a connexion with South America at a period so remote 
that changes have since taken place of generic value. 


[To be continued. ] 


VII.—On the Development of the Polypes and of their Polypary. 
By M. H. de Lacaze-Duruters.* 


Last summer the Academy requested the Minister of Marine 
to permit my embarkation on board the ‘Narval,’ which was 
then occupied in completing the hydrography of the Algerian 
coasts. My object in undertaking this voyage was to study 
again the coral banks, the richness of which I had previously 
ascertained in 1860, 1861, and 1862. 

During the voyage I have had the opportunity of collecting 
observations, the results of which, indicated in short notes, do 
not seem to have been accepted in France. I have been able 
to verify afresh the facts which I am now going to publish in 
detail, and I think that I ought first of all to communicate 
these results to the Academy. 

I refer now to the development of polyparies. 


* Translated by W. S. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘Comptes Rendus,’ 
November 24, 1873, pp. 1201-1207. 


40 M. H. de Lacaze-Duthiers on the Development 


Science does not possess any extensive and connected work 
on the embryogeny of the polyparian polypes. Nearly all 
authors whose object has been the investigation of the mode 
of growth of the polypary have taken on the one hand the 
calices or polyparites which appeared to be youngest, and on 
the other those which seemed to be most completely developed, 
and then, by seeking the terms intermediate between these 
extremes, have endeavoured to deduce, from the gradual 
passage from the former to the latter, the laws either of the 
multiplication of parts or of the general mode of growth of the 
calices. 

We do not find zoologists attempting to recognize the first 
traces of calcareous deposits in the bodies of the polypes while 
still in the state of embryos, and to follow these first morganic 
nodules up to the complete formation of the calice or polyparite 
with all its elements. Ina word, they have almost exclusively 
studied the isolated skeleton of the animal, or the polypary 
itself. 

Laws, which we find prevailing in science, have been deduced, 
not from the study of the framework during tts formation in the 
embryo, but from the observation of the formed polyparites of 
different dimensions. In other words, zoologists have thought 
that they could affirm what must have been from what was at 
the moment of observation. 

In a polyparite (that is to say, in one of the calices of the 
polypary of an Actiniarian of whatever species) it is well known 
that there are radiating lamine of various sizes. These 
lamin of the first, second, third, to nth size alternate regularly 
in a ccertainorder, The totality of those which are homologous 
or similar constitutes what is called a cycle. Seeing this, the 
same thought comes naturally to the mind of every observer ; 
and it may be said that, in everybody’s opinion, the equal 
lamine forming a cycle are produced at the same period—that 
they commenced and continued growing simultaneously, which 
would explain their equality—and, finally, that the lamine of 
different sizes are also of different ages, and that their extent 
is in direct proportion to the duration of their growth (that 
is to say, their age). 

It may certainly be affirmed that this idea, which occurs 
naturally to the mind, has been the starting-point of the 
numerous laws formulated from the examination of specimens 
in collections—laws which have furnished the principal foun- 
dation for the classifications and for the nomenclature of the 
parts of polyparies, proposed especially by French authors. 
Certain German naturalists, particularly MM. Schneider and 
Rotteken on the one hand and C. Semper on the other, taking 


of the Polypes and of their Polypary. 41 


up different points of view, have endeavoured to demonstrate 
the invalidity of these laws and the difficulty or impossibility 
of verifying or applying them which often exists. 

One of my wishes when I went to Africa this summer 
was to find embryos and very young individuals of polyparian 
polypes, and to revise, with the view of verifying them, the 
various theories put forward as to the origin and mode of 
growth of polyparies. I was fortunate enough to obtain both 
embryos and very young polypes ; and I have now the honour 
to present the results of my new observations to the Academy. 

It is well known that the polype which clothes and produces 
a polypary presents round its mouth circlets of tentacles or 
arms of different sizes, that these tentacles have also been 
grouped in cycles, and that the same series of laws has been 
applied to their development as to that of the lamine of the 
polypary. Now, by following the appearance of the tentacles 
upon the embryo, we cannot verify any of the laws which we 
find current; and this I proved in a memoir published last 
year* . 

This causes great perturbation of mind when we desire to 
pass from the study of the soft parts of the animal to the 
knowledge of the development of its hard parts. In fact, each 
tentacle corresponds to a chamber in the body of the polype; 
and at the bottom of each of these chambers there rises one of 
the calcareous lamine of the polypary. The question therefore 
arises at once, whether the chamber and the tentacle belonging 
to it, as also the calcareous septum which occupies it, follow 
the same or different laws in their formation. 

I have been able during my voyage to ascertain the perfect 
exactitude of the following facts. . 

Two questions presented themselves. It was necessary, in 
the first place, to didnt in what part and what elementary 
stratum of the organs the deposition of the calcareous particles 
of the calice commenced, and then what were the laws govern- 
ing the appearance and multiplication of the parts of the 
polypary. 

It was logically necessary, in order to trace the progress of 
the development of the calcareous parts, to know in the first 
place, just as in the case of the bones, where the first particles 
were deposited. 

French authors suppose that it is in the dermis of the body 
of the polypes that the principal deposit takes place, and there- 
fore they give the name of Sclerodermi to the group of corals 
here under consideration; but it must be remarked that it 


* Archives de Zoologie expérimentale et générale, vol. i, 1872. 


42 M. H. de Lacaze-Duthiers on the Development 


would be useful at starting to give a precise histological defini- 
tion of the dermis, which has never been done. Now-a-days 
two layers are distinguished in the body-walls of polypes, an 
inner and an outer one, called the ectoderm or ectothelium and 
the endoderm or endothelium. French authors have spoken of 
these two layers ; but they have subdivided them into numerous 
secondary layers separated by a plane of muscular fibres. It 
is therefore outside this muscular layer that the primitive de- 
position of the part which in their eyes is the most important 
takes place, namely that which forms the walls of the calice 
(theca). 

Now the embryogeny and histology of the embryo, studied 
in young living Astroides of all ages, and not in polyparies at 
some given moment of their existence deprived of their soft 
parts, show without any possibility of doubt that the first cal- 
careous nodules occur and appear in the inner layer or endo- 
thelium, the histological characters of which are absolutely dif- 
ferent from those of the outer layer, which does not allow us 
to confound them. | 

Thus, as regards the histological origin of the polypary, it 
is impossible to continue to accept the old opinion, and con- 
sequently also the denomination Sclerodermi. 

With regard to the law governing the mode of appearance 
of the septa of the polypary, the following appears to us to be 
no less certain. ‘The primitive calcareous nodules first de- 
posited, making their appearance in the thickness of the inner 
layer, clothe the bottom of the cavity of each chamber of the 
embryo while it is still without tentacles, and unite together 
to form usually a central band at the bottom of the chamber, 
this band being simple towards the middle of the body and 
bifureate towafds the circumference ; so that at one moment 
we find at the bottom of each chamber a sort of calcareous Y, 
the branches of which turned outwards may be either very 
short or very long. 

It is to be remarked that at this period there is no trace of 
any circumvallation or wall (theca), or exterior boundary of 
the calice. 

By following these first deposits we find that they rise more 
and more beneath the inner layer, and that filling up the fork 
of the Y they produce projecting simple lamin, one in each 
chamber of the embryo. These laminz (the origins of the 
septa) become soldered to foreign bodies underlying the em- 
bryos, and constitute the first rudiments of the polypary. 

Now, there are twelve chambers; there are consequently 
twelve primitive septa, and, I repeat, no wall. Nevertheless, 
by the examination only of the polyparies in collections, 


of the Polypes and of their Polypary. 43 


zoologists have been led to assume that the wall was first 
developed, and that from it there originated first of all six septa 
at the same time, that these six primary lamine, retaining 
the advance given to them by their age, were the largest septa 
in the adult, and so on for the septa of the second and third 
to the mth size. From this we have the admission of cycles 
the age of which was shown by the size of their elements. 
Nothing of this kind ever occurs in the embryo of Astrotdes or 
of the Balanophyllie ; and I have numerous examples of very 
young individuals all having twelve equal septa before possess- 
ing any wall, and in which the formation of cycle after cycle 
of six elements is not admissible. 

It is no longer possible to admit that the septa originate 
from the*wall, and to give the latter the preeminence over all 
other elements of the calice, since the septa are already well 
formed when there is no trace of a wall. 

Thus as regards the first two cycles the laws according to- 
which the absolute and relative moment of appearance of the 
septa and their origin as dependent on one of the elements of 
the calice were supposed to be governed have no foundation 
(raison @étre) ; and yet it was especially for these two cycles 
that these laws were accepted and most easily verifiable. 
With regard to histological origin it does not seem to us to be 
possible, at least in the embryo and the species investigated, 
to continue to attribute it to the dermic layer. 

We recognize, therefore, at the origin of the polypary, a 
rule which does not fail with regard to the mode of multipli- 
cation of the tentacles in the Actiniaria without polyparies ; and 
it is as follows :—The number of parts in accordance with a 
certain typical number is first formed ; afterwards, a greater 
growth being manifested in certain of these formed parts, there 
results from it a symmetry which nothing could lead us to 
foresee if the embryo had not been followed from moment to 
moment. 

It is thus that the tentacles of thé Actiniw, which we find 
sometimes arranged so regularly in successive cycles in ac- 
cordance with the type 6 (6 of the first, 6 of the second, 12 of 
the third, 24 of the fourth, and 48 of the fifth magnitude) are 
far from having been developed 6 at a first period, 6 at a 
second, 12 at a third, and so on. ‘The number 12 was first 
produced, passing successively through the inferior numbers 
2,4, 6, and8to12. After its production the sizes alternately 
remained stationary in 6, and increased in 6 others. Then, 
but only then, was manifested the radiate symmetry with two 
cycles apparently of different ages, as indicated by the relation 
(6,+6.,). 


44 Mr. IT. Higgin on the Structure of the 


It is the same with the septa of the polypary. The number 
12 is first of all produced, but with this difference, that the 12 
elements all begin to show themselves at the same moment ; 
and it is only later on that their unequal growth ranges them 
in two groups which appear to be of different age, whereas 
they are only of different sizes. 

The facts here brought forward appear to us to be of absolute 
certainty. ‘They have been repeatedly confirmed, sometimes 
upon polypes taken swimming in the sea in the form of the 
embryonic sphere without any divisions, and brought up until 
the complete formation of their polypary, which was aftixed to 
the walls of the microscopic cells in which they were kept for 
observation, which enabled us to follow under the microscope 
a single embryo, of which the origin of the parts and the forma- 
tion of the framework might thus be watched—and sometimes 
also upon very young individuals collected on the rocks of 
the localities inhabited by Astrotdes or Balanophyllic. 


VIII.—On the Structure of the Skeleton of Kuplectella asper- 
gillum. By Tuomas Hicaain, Member of the Liverpool 
Microscopical Society. (In a Letter to T. J. Moore, Curator 
of the Free Public Museum, Liverpool.) 


[ Plate ITI. } 


[Tue specimen referred to in the following paper is one of 
two examples purchased of Mr. Geale in November 1866. It 
is 12 inches in length measured along the outer curve, and of 
a very uniform diameter of 1 inch. The other specimen is 
somewhat longer and stouter. Both are in a more natural 
condition than is seen in the examples usually submitted for 
sale; and both are of a pale brown colour. ‘The smaller spe- 
cimen is somewhat compressed towards the top, perhaps owing 
to pressure while drying; and nearly half the lid-like top is 
torn away, leaving a jagged edge, marring the beauty of the 
specimen. The lower third of the sponge is rigid, the rest 
soft and yielding throughout, the rigidity extending some- 
what higher upon the inner than on the outer side of the curve. 
It is; as Mr. Higgin supposes, the specimen referred to b 
Prof. Wyville Thomson in his “ Letters from H.M.S. Chal- 
lenger,” published in ‘Good Words’ for July 1873, p. 510. 
On passing through Liverpool to Belfast in December 1868, 
he paid a hurried visit to the Museum, saw both examples, 
and I gave him a fragment from the smaller one for use 
under the microscope. Itis remarkable that all the specimens 


Pits 


Skeleton of Kuplectella aspergillum. 45 


of Euplectella dredged by him off Cape St. Vincent should be 
uniformly im the condition indicated by the soft part of our 
sponge. His remarks are as follows :— 

“Several samples of Huplectella, very closely allied to the 
Philippine species, if not identical with it, came up in the 
trawl off Cape St. Vincent, and gave us an opportunity for 
the first time of seeing this sponge alive. Dr. J. E. Gray 
writes to the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ that 
specimens have been received of Huplectella aspergillum in 
spirit, and that in these the glassy framework is entirely 
raasked by a soft, brown, corky coating of sarcode. Our fresh 
specimens entirely bear out Dr. Gray’s description. It would 
be difficult to imagine that the thick, somewhat clumsy brown 
tube, perforated with irregular openings, contained any ar- 
rangement of support so delicate and symmetrical. 

“Although the forms of all the spicules, down to the most mi- 
nute and complicated, are identical, the wall of the tube in the 
European specimens of Huplectella is not coherent as in most 
of the Philippine examples. The original spicules of the ske- 
leton remain separate from one another, and do not become 
soldered together. One would think that this would be at all 
events a perfect specific distinction; but one or two of the 
specimens of Huplectella aspergillum, particularly one in the 
Museum at Liverpool, are in this condition ; and I am not yet 
prepared to say whether all may not be thus soft at a parti- 
cular stage of growth.”’ 

Mr. Higgin is well known in Liverpool for his great success 
in micro-photography. He has for some months been earnestly 
engaged in the study of sponges, and has kindly given this 
museum the benefit of his assistance in working up the tole- 
rably numerous specimens already got together. It is a great 
pleasure and satisfaction to announce a new and zealous 
worker in a department of zoology so little cultivated, and in 
which there is so much work to be done.—T. J. Moore. | 


Huyton, November 15, 1873. 
My pear Mr. Moore, 

The ELuplectella which you have placed in my hands for 
examination is a very interesting and valuable specimen ; for 
it reveals the composition of the network of these beautiful 
sponges, which I believe has not hitherto been exactly known. 

Your sponge is rigid only to the extent of a few inches from 
the base, and is flexible throughout the rest of the tube. The 
cause of rigidity in Huplectella is the enclosure within a sili- 
cious coating of the spicules which form the fibres, which 
coating, for convenience’ sake, has been called vitreous. This 


46 Mr. T. Higgin on the Structure of the 


vitreous coating being of the same nature as the spicules them- 
selves, their outlines become lost to sight in it; it is impossible 
to distinguish them and trace their form and shape. Most, if 
not all, of the specimens which are brought to this country from 
the Philippine Islands are of this rigid character; and conse- 
quently the structure of the network remains undescribed. In 
your specimen, however, we have part of the network vitrified 
and part of it unvitrified; and in the unvitrified portion all 
the spicules are easily traceable and distinguishable, lying in 
the position they are destined to occupy in the rigid skeleton, 
ready for the silicious coating to be poured over them. 

- This, I understand, is the sponge to which Prof. Wyville 
Thomson alludes in his letter from the ‘ Challenger,’ which 
appeared in the number of ‘ Good Words’ for July last, where 
he speaks of the examples of Huplectella which were brought 
up in the trawl off Cape St. Vincent, the spicules of which 
were not soldered together, but were in the same condition 
throughout as those of a specimen of Huplectella in the Liver- 
pool Museum. I learn, too, from Mr. H. J. Carter, of Bud- 
leigh-Salterton, that “ Dr. Semper, of Wiirtzburg, had seen 
specimens of Huplectella aspergillum without any vitrified 
fibre, which he had viewed as young specimens in which 
the whole would have become vitrified if they had remained 
long enough in their natural place of growth—that, in fact, 
the flexible or unvitrified is the primary state of this species.” 

The groundwork of the square meshes is an arrangement of 
very large four-rayed spicules, the arms of which lie longitu- 
dinally and transversely ; and so large are these spicules that 
they do not require to be measured under the microscope by 
the 100th or 1000th of an inch, but may be measured with 
an ordinary pocket-rule; each transverse arm extends over 
three to four of the square areas, so that from the tip of the one 
to the right to the tip of the one to the left is three quarters of 
an inch to an inch, and the longitudinal arms are still longer. 
I may here remark that these are genuine four-rayed spicules, 
and that at the central spot there is no appearance of suppressed 
arms. As the square areas only measure about one eighth 
of an inch each, it will be evident that the long arms of these 
spicules must extend towards each other, meet, and lie along- 
side one another, the tapering end of one extending up to- 
wards the thickest part of another. Along these interlocking 
arms are placed long, straight, and very slender spicules, which 
are spined from the extremities for a considerable distance along 
the shaft (Pl. III. fig. 7). 

The diagonal lines and all the fine filaments are the long 
ams of four-rayed and six-rayed spicules, only three of 


Skeleton of Kuplectella aspergillum. 47 


which, however, are usually produced, the other arms being 
more or less suppressed or abortive; the tips of the arms 
terminate in a kind of spear-head form which is spined; 
these arms are all extremely long, and some exceedingly 
slender, and they are twisted and bent in a variety of ways 
to suit the pattern of the network. 

The open network of the mouth of the tube is composed 
of similar spicules interwoven together. 

The exterior “ ridges or frills” are also built up of spicules 
of the same form, the arrangement being that two or more 
long arms or rays lie along the network of the skeleton, 
whilst another arm, which is a short or dwarf one, stands up 
perpendicularly to the surface. ‘These short upright arms are 
so placed as to form the lines of the ridges ; and amongst them 
are interlaced the long slender rays of other spicules, in some 
of which all the transverse arms are suppressed. These ridges 
therefore contain the principle availed of in mechanical engi- 
neering in the { iron girder. 

Interspersed throughout the whole of the network are nume- 
rous smaller sexradiate spicules, chiefly of slender form; but 
there are some with short stout arms which are quite smooth ; 
the arms of the slender ones are all spined at the ends, and one 
of the longitudinal arms is usually produced to a great length. 

The flesh-spicules are the “ rosettes”’ of the two kinds de- 
scribed and figured by Mr. H. J. Carter in the November 
Number of ‘Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist.’ plate xii. figs. 4 
and 11, 1873. 

Exteriorly there are bundles of long straight spicules or 
rods running along the longitudinal lines of the skeleton 
for some distance from the base, some of which are smooth, and 
others barbed. 

It is a matter of great satisfaction to have met with a 
specimen of this species of sponge in which the vitrification 
isin progress: here it is actually so. In the lower part of the 
network to which the vitreous cement has been applied, it 
has been deposited in sufficient quantity to render the skeleton 
rigid, but not in such quantity or so completely as in the usual 
rigid examples. The examination of a portion, after boiling in 
nitric acid and subjecting to considerable heat, shows that the 
silicious coating has been deposited in layers, just as in the 
case of the spicules, the only difference, apparently, being 
that as cement it is amorphous, whilst in the spicules it 
assumes definite forms. ‘The spicules of this species are, 
as Mr. Carter remarks, imbedded in vitreous material, much 
in the same manner as in the horny-fibred sponges the spi- 
cules are imbedded in horny material. In the Chalinze, how- 


a 


48 On the Skeleton of Kuplectella aspergillum. 


ever, and sponges of that character, the enclosing material is 
added as the spicules are projected and placed in position, they 
being of a form not able to hold together without extraneous 
aid. But in the beautiful Huplectella we have what does 
not occur in sponges generally (if, indeed, it occurs at all 
in any other species)—that a structure is built up after a par- 
ticular design which, when finished, is not added to, and 
which with slight variations obtains in all specimens: the 
wonderful basketwork made up by the interlacing or inter- 
weaving of the unusually long fine arms or rays of the va- 
rious spicules is capable of holding together of itself by rea- 
son of its form; and the cementing material cannot advan- 
tageously be added until this is all complete ; but when the 
whole structure has been finished according to the pattern 
which is constant in the species, the vitreous coating may be 
applied and the entire skeleton rendered rigid. Perhaps this 
silicious cement is not added in some localities ; but in the ex- 
amples from the Philippine Islands the unvitrified state appears 
to be, as Dr. Semper suggests, the primary state. 
I am, dear Mr. Moore, 
Yours very truly, 
T. HIGain. 
EXPLANATION OF PLATE III. 


Fig. 1.1. Large spicules forming ground-plan of the “squarish areas ” or 
meshes, showing the position they occupy with respect to each 
other. Diameter of shaft at thickest point 5}, inch; length of 
each transverse arm about 2 inch; length of each longitudinal 
arm about ? inch. 


Fig. 2. One of the spicules of the diagonal lines, showing three arms only 
produced. 

Fig. 3. A spicule, showing a suppressed arm and an abortive arm. 

Fig. 4, A spicule, showing one of the various ways in which the arms are 
bent to suit the pattern. 

Fig. 5. One of the spicules of the ridges or frills. 

Fig. 6. A spicule, with all the transverse arms suppressed. ; 

Fig. 7. 7. One of the fine straight spicules which lie along the arms of — 
the large spicules, fig. 1.1. 

Fig. 8. One of the smooth stout sexradiate spicules interspersed amongst 
the network. 

Fig. 9. One of the attenuate sexradiate spicules, spined at the ends of the 


arms, found interspersed amongst the network and sarcode. 
Figs. 10 & 11. “ Flesh-spicules,” ‘ rosettes.” 
The spicules 8 and 9 are very frequently found with the short 
longitudinal arm suppressed. 
The figures represent the proportionate sizes of the spicules, 
with the exception of the smaller sexradiate forms, which are on 
a larger scale. 


Dr. J. E. Gray on certain Species of Felis. 49 


IX.—Notes on Pardalina Warwickii, Gray, Felis guigna, 
Molina, and Felis Geoffroyi, D’ Orbigny. By Dr. J. E. 
Gray, F.R.S. &e. 

Many years ago there was in the Surrey Zoological Gardens an 

animal shown as the “Himalaya Cat,” which is figured by 

Colonel Hamilton Smith in Jardine’s ‘ Naturalist’s Library,’ but 

not very characteristically, under the name of Felis himalayana, 

Warwick. When the animal died it was preserved in the 

British Museum, and recorded in the ‘ List of Mammalia in 

the British Museum,’ published in 1842, under the name of 

Leopardus himalayanus. Mr. Blyth, in the “ Species of the 

genus Felis” (P. Z. S. 1863, p. 184), puts F. himalayana of 

Warwick as a synonym of Felis viverrina, Bennett, and, not 

recollecting that Warwick’s cat and the one in the Museum 

were the same specimen, he puts in “ not of Gray ;”’ and in a 

note he says, “ #. himalayana is perhaps F. celidogaster of 

Temminck,” which he gives as a synonym of Felis viverrina, 

Bennett. In fact the synonyma are the regular confusion of a 

compiler, which is easily to be understood and apologized for 

in Mr. Blyth’s case, but should be a caution to compilers. 

When this cat was alive it was just the time that we began 
to receive fine skins of animals from the Himalayas ; and there 
was an inclination of the dealers to give Himalaya as the 
habitat of animals of which they did not know whence they 
came, as animals from that country were interesting and 
fetched a good price; but numerous collectors and sportsmen 
who bave searched that country assure me that the cat is not 
found there, or at least has not occurred to them; and it has 
been suggested by Mr. Blyth and others that it may be an 
inhabitant of South America; but I have not seen any speci- 
mens from there. 

In the ‘Proc. Zool. Soc.’ for 1867, on account of the length 
of the brain-case of the skull, and shortness of the face and 
convexity of the forehead, I formed for this cat a genus under 
the name of Pardalina, and gave it the specific name of 
Warwickii, because the name of himalayanus.might lead to 
misconception, and figured the skull (P. Z. 8. 1867, p. 267, 
fig. 4; and Cat. Carniv. p. 15, fig. 4) 

D’Orbigny and Gervais, in the ‘ Bull. Soc. Philomat. Paris,’ 
1844, p. 40, and in the ‘Voy. Amér. Mérid.’ p. 21, t. xiv. 
(animal), & t. xiii. fig. 1 (skull), figure a cat from Rio Negro, 
in the pampas of Buenos Ayres, under the name of Felis 
Geoffroyt, which they compare to the Ocelot Chati and Margay, 
and to the Felis guigna of Molina, which I had not thought of 
comparing with it when I wrote the paper in the ‘ Proceedings,’ 
not thinking it likely that a cat from India and one from 


Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. ft 


50 Dr. J. E. Gray on certain Species of Felis. 


South America were the same; but Dr. Sclater (P. Z. S. 1870, 
p- 796) observes :— The so-called Felis Warwickit being 
now dead, I have been able to examine it more carefully, and 
find it to belong to a well-known South-American species, 
Felis Geoffroyt of D’Orbigny and Gervais ;” and this theory 
is adopted by Mr. Elliot (P. Z. 8S. 1872, p. 203). 

The specimen of P. Warwickii and the figure of FP. Geoffroyt 
bear a general resemblance, but they appear to me very dif- 
ferent. The specimen in the Museum is much more spotted, 
and the spots of the back are smaller and more numerous ; the 
throat, chest, and belly are largely spotted. The throat is said 
to be whitish in M. d’Orbigny’s description; and the belly of 
of his figure is not spotted at all; but this might be a variation, 
though I should not think it probable. 

M. Gervais figures the skull of the South-American cat ; 
and when his figure and the figure of the skull of Pardalina 
Warwickii are compared, and his figure with the skull itself, 
though they agree in the length of the brain-case, they differ 
greatly in the form and outline of the face, and especially in 
the outline of the lower jaw; so that I have little doubt that 
they are distinct, though both may belong to the genus 
Pardalina. 

Molina, in his work on Chili, described a species under the 
name of Felis guigna. MM. dOrbigny and Gervais asked, 
“Mais qu’est-ce que c’est que le Felis guigna?” Dr. A. 
Philippi has described and figured this species and its skull 
in Wiegmann’s ‘Archiv f. Naturg.’ 1873, p. 8, t. 1. (animal), 
& t. i. figs. 2. & 3 (skull). The figure of the animal nearly 
agrees with the figure of Kelis Geoffroy?, and differs from the 
specimen of Pardalina Warwickii in the Museum in the few- 
ness of the spots on the neck, and in thechestand belly (according 
to both figure and description) being white and spotless. The 
skull figured is that of a young animal, and appears to differ 
only in age from that figured by D’Orbigny and Gervais ; and 
there can be no doubt that Melis Geoffroyt of D’Orbigny and 
Gervais is the same as /’, guégna of Molina and Philippi. 


Therefore the synonyma of the species will run thus :— 
Pardalina Warwickit. 


Belly closely spotted. 


Felis himalayanus, Warwick, Jardine’s Naturalist’s Library, t. xxiv. 

Pardalina Warwiekti, Gray, Proce. Zool. Soc. 1867, p. 257, fig. (skull) ; 
Cat. Carniv. p. 15, fig. (skull). 

Felis Geoffroyi, Sclater, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1870, p. 796; Elliot, Proe. 
Zool. Soc. 1872, p. 203. 


Hah. Unknown. 


Dr. J. E. Gray on certain Species of Felis. 51 


The British Museum has just received from Mendoza, in 
the Argentine Andes, a small female kitten of this species. 
The back has very numerous small brownish spots, and the 
belly is covered all over with many larger black spots like the 
adult. It is very different from D’Orbigny’s figure of Felis 
Geoffroy? from the Pampas and Philippi’s Felis guigna, which 
have a plain white belly. 


Pardalina? guigna. 


Belly white, spotless. 

Felis guigna, Molina, Chili; Philippi, Wiegm. Archiv f. Naturg. 1873, 
t. ii. figs. 1 (animal), 2, 3 (skull). 

Felis Geoffroy, D’Orbigny, Voy. Amér. Mérid. p. 21, t. xiii. (animal), 
t. xii. f. 1 (skull). 


Hab, Pampas, Buenos Ayres. 


Mr. Elliot, in ‘Proc. Zool. Soc.’ 1872, states that the typical 
specimen of Felis pardinoides, Gray (P. Z. S. 1867, p. 400, 
& Cat. Carniv. B. M. p. 27), is a young specimen of Felis 
Geoffroy?, which he identified witha young specimen marked 
Lf, Geoffroyi in the museum at Leyden, observing that “ the 
general colour of the animal, with its lengthened annulated 
tail, is precisely that of the typical /. Geoffroy?,” adopting 
Mr. Sclater’s opinion that “ the Pardalina Warwickii, Gray, 
is also 1. Geoffroy?,”’ and that “ the synonymy of this species 
will therefore be somewhat as follows,” in which he makes all 
these one species. 

The specimen of Felis pardinoides here referred to was re- 
ceived from the Zoological Society’s museum in 1855, marked 
as having been presented to the Society by Capt. Innes and 
as coming from India, as recorded in the ‘Proc. Zool. Soe.’ 
1867, p. 400, and ‘Catalogue of Carnivora in the British 
Museum,’ p. 27. I have named the animal Lelis pardinotdes, 
because the form of the spots with a light centre has a certain 
resemblance to those of the American ocelots. I will not 
undertake to vouch for the accuracy of the habitats we receive 
from the Zoological Society ; the Indian habitat has not been 
confirmed ; and the species has a very South-American aspect. 
The specimen has not the slightest resemblance in its general 
coloration to the specimen of Pardalina Warwickii in the 
Museum, or to the figure of Lelis Geoffroyi of D’Orbigny’s 
‘Voyage.’ I think it will be an astonishment to every one 
who has the slightest pretension to be a zoologist that 
they should have been regarded as belonging to the same 


species. 
p 48 


52 Dr. J E. Gray on the Smaller 


We received from the Zoological Society along with the 
specimen of Felis pardinoides the skull belonging to it, which 
is described in the ‘ Proceedings’ and ‘Catalogue.’ This skull 
has a sloping forehead and a well-developed face, quite different 
from the skull of Pardalina Warwickit, more like the skull 
of an ocelot, showing that it has no relation whatever to the 
genus Pardalina. It is true that it shows the animal is not 
aged; but the skull is perfectly developed, and is evidently 
that of a fully grown animal, and therefore does not justify 
Mr. Elhot’s assertion that the “ typical specimen is not an 
adult animal.” 

It is greatly to be regretted that Mr. Elliot did not take the 
trouble to compare the two skulls in the Museum before he 
made such a random assertion as that £. pardinoides is the 
same as FP’, Geoffroyt. 

Pardalina Warwickii and the figure of Felis guigna have 
an immense number of small, rather unequal-sized, moderately 
closely placed solid black spots on the upper part of the body ; 
those near the centre of the back are smaller, but not united 
into lines: and PB. Warwickit has larger spots on the under- 
side of the body, which are largest in the central line; these, 
according to the description and figures, are entirely wanting 
in Felis guigna. The tails are cylindrical and blunt at the 
end. 

Felis pardinoides, on the contrary, has large-sized spots 
of a squarish form, with a pale centre, placed in about four 
series, more or less interrupted or irregular, on each side of 
the body ; the vertebral line is marked with a narrow con- 
tinuous line, which is forked, and more or less continued 
in front between the shoulders, and with a series of spots on 
each side of it, which are much smaller than those on the sides: 
of the body ; the tail is rather thick, the hinder half tapering 
to a point. The spot with the pale centre sometimes shows a 
likeness to the “rose” (that is to say, the spot formed of a 
ring of small spots with a pale centre) found in the American 
cats ; hence the name of pardinoides. ‘There is nothing of this 
kind to be seen in P. Warwitckiz, where the small spots are all 
equally separated. 


X.—WNotes on the Smaller Spotted Cats of Asta and its 
Islands. By Dr. J. K. Gray, F.R.S. &e. 


Mr. Buyrn, in his paper on the Asiatic species of the genus 
Felis (P. Z. S. 1863, p. 184) regards Felis nipalensis and F. 


2 ee, a 


Bet Se: 


hat 


| 


. 


' 


; 


j 


Spotted Cats of Asia and its Islands. 3 


pardichrous of Hodgson, F. wagati of Elliot, &. nipalensis of 
Vigors and Horsfield, Leopardus Elliott, L. chinensis, L, 
Reevesti, and Chaus servalinus of Gray as ‘all varieties of one 
species, which he calls /. bengalensis, Desmarest, and /. 
minuta, 'Temminck ; and he considers Felis Jerdoni a distinct 
species. 1 may observe that Leopardus Ellioti, differing trom 
the other species by its skull (which has a complete orbit), 
belongs to the genus Viverriceps, and is therefore out of the 
question. 

Mr. Daniel Elliot is of opinion that Felis Jerdoni, Blyth, 
is only a variety of Felis rubiginosa (P. Z. S. 1871, p. 760). 
It has not the long head of a Viverriceps, to which £. rudbi- 
ginosa belongs, and is much more likely to be a variety of 
L. minuta, which I considered it in the ‘List of Mammalia,’ 
1842, p. 43. He also decides that Felis pardinoides, re- 
ceived from the Zoological Society as coming from India, 
is the young of /. Geoffroy from the pampas of South 
America (P. Z. S. 1872, p. 203); but we have the skull of 
this cat (which Mr. Elliot could not have observed, though it 
is mentioned in the Catalogue), which shows that it entirely 
differs from the skull of Pardalina Warwickii, which he 
considers the same as Felis Geoffroyz, or from D’Orbigny’s 
figure of the skull which appears to belong to the genus 
Pardalina. 

I will not vouch for the distinctness of all the species I have 
entered in the ‘Catalogue of Carnivora in the British Museum ;’ 
for the progress of science, aided by the collection of more 
specimens and the study of their changes, may prove some of 
them to be only varieties of others; but they appear, accord- 
ing to our present knowledge of the specimens and their 
distribution, to be worthy of being reckoned as distinct 


species. 
The specimens in the Museum may be arranged thus :— 


I. Tail cylindrical, shorter than the body, and marked with black 
spots. The body with subequal spots, sometimes united on the 
dorsal line. 


a. The body with a multitude of small spots—those on the shoulders 
and outside of the limbs being the largest, those on the middle 
of the back between the haunches and, especially, between the 
shoulders being united into four or six narrow lines. China 
and Siberia. 

Felis chinensis, Gray, Cat. Carniv. p. 27. no. 22. 
ab, China (Reeves). B.M. 


54 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Smaller 


Felis euptilura, D. Elliot, P. Z. 8. 1871, p. 761, t. Ixxvi. 
Felis undata, Radde, Reisen im Siiden von Ost-Sibirien, p. 106, t. iv. 


Hab. Siberia? B.M, 


This species is described from a skin in a very bad state in 
the British Museum, which Mr. Bartlett, from whom we re- 
ceived it, believed came from Siberia. Mr. Daniel Elliot 
(P. Z. S. 1871, p. 758), without giving any authority, calls 
it a species from ‘ North-western Siberia.” The markings 
of the skin are difficult to make out from its state; but I 
have no doubt Mr. Wolf studied it very particularly when 
he made the figure. The figure is very like that of Felis 
chinensis; but the spots on the back are not so numerous 
and small, and those on the underside are large and distinct. 
Otherwise I should have considered it a specimen of that 
species. 

Mr. D. Elliot considers this skin of a cat the same as 
the one that Radde collected in Amurland, in Lastern 
Siberia, and figured and described in his ‘ Reisen im Siiden 
von Ost-Sibirien’ under the name of Felis undata, Desmarest, 
and F. minuta, Temminck, from Java; and he considers Ff’, 
chinensis, from China, the same species. Radde’s figure is 
very unsatisfactory. It would be desirable to receive speci- 
mens from the Amurland to see if the Chinese and Siberian 
specimens are the same, or how they differ, and if the same as 
the skin in the British Museum that Mr. D. Elliot has named 
and figured. 


b. Body with five or six lines of oblong spots—those on the middle 
of the back being very narrow and elongate, with two stripes 
on each side above the shoulder, those on the sides being larger 
and oblong, and on the outside of the limbs roundish. Malay 
archipelago. 

+ Spots of body small and oblong. Fur short, rather harsh. 
Felis yavanensis, Cat. Carniv. p. 26. no. 20. 
Hab. Java (Dr. Horsfield). B.M. 


Felis Jerdoni, Cat. Carniv. p. 28. no, 26. 
Hab. Java? B.M. 


Felis Jerdoni was named by Blyth in the ‘Proc. Zool. Soe.’ 
1863, p. 185, from two specimens in the museum at Madras 
and an adult specimen in the British Museum. In the 
Catalogue I have adopted Blyth’s name for this specimen, 
which was received from the India House, and probably came 


Spotted Cats of Asia and its Islands. 55 


from Sumatra, Dr. Horsfield calling it Felis sumatrana; and 
I placed with it another specimen received from Jeude’s col- 
lection in Holland under the same name. The two specimens 
agree in having a short scarcely spotted tail, and may be a 
variety of that species. Mr. Elliot (P. Z. 8S. 1871, p. 760) 
observes that “ Blyth’s species [F. Jerdon7] is only a dark form 
of F. rubiginosa,” and says that Mr. Blyth agrees with him ! 

How any zoologist could believe that the short-tailed short- 
headed Felis Jerdoni, with distinct spots, could be the same as 
the long-tailed, long-headed, and striped Felis rubiginosa is a 
mystery tome. I believe that their skulls would show that 
they belong to different genera. The long-headed Felis rubi- 
ginosa has a long, very peculiar skull, with complete orbits, 
and belongs to the genus Viverriceps, to which Felis Jerdoni 
shows no relation. 


tt Spots of body elongate, larger. Fur soft. 


Felis minuta, Cat. Carniv. p. 26. no, 19. 
Felis sumatrana, Horsfield. 


Hab. Sumatra. B.M. 


Felis Herschelii, Cat. Carniv. p. 28. no. 27. 
Felis servalina, Gray, P. Z. S, 1867, p. 401. 


The spots asin /. mznuta, but smaller and further apart, and 
the ones on the shoulder larger and confluent, and on the 
hinder part of the dorsal line in broader lines. 


Hab, India? B.M. 


The spots are somewhat like those of the next section ; but 
the tail is short, like that of the Sumatran cat. 


Il. Tail cylindrical, blunt, as long as the body, with dark, more or 
less confluent spots. The body with irregular-shaped dark 
blotches. Continental India. 


a. The blotches of the body oblong, solid, or very nearly so. 


Felis wagati, Cat. Carniv. p. 29. no. 28. 
Hab. India. B.M. 


Felis pardochroa, Cat. Carniv. p. 28. no. 24. 
Hab. Nepal. B.M. 


Felis tenasserimensis, Cat. Carniy. p. 28. no. 25. 
Hab. India, Tenasserim. B.M. 


56 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Bladebones of 


b. Spots on the body larger, squarish, and pale in the centre. 


Felis nepalensis, Cat. Carniv. p. 27. no. 21. 
Hab. India. B.M. 


Perhaps a domesticated or semiwild hybrid between the 
Indian wild species and the common cat. 


Ill. Tail tapering at the end, nearly as long as the body, with distinct 
black rings and a black tip. 


Felis pardinoides, Cat. Carniv. p. 27. no. 23. B.M. 


If this species was brought from India by Capt. Innes, as it 
was stated, and the habitat which we received with the speci- 
men from the Zoological Society correct, it belongs to this 
section; but it has much more the appearance of a South- 
American cat; indeed it has a good deal of resemblance to 
Felis mitis. At any rate, it is distinct from any other Indian 
cat; and we must await the determination of its proper geo- 
graphical distribution until we have received other specimens 
with their proper habitat. Mr. Elliot has stated that he 
believes it to be a specimen of Felis Geoffroy? from the Pampas. 
I have given my opinion on this crude and extraordinary idea 
in a previous paper in this number of the ‘Annals’ (p. 49), 
with a description of the peculiarities of this species. 


XI.—On the Bladebones of Balena Hectori and Megaptera 
nove-zelandie. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. 


I HAVE received from Dr. Hector the drawings, one twelfth of 
the natural size, of the scapule of two whales, which he col- 
lected at Tory Channel, New Zealand. 

The smaller one (see ficur e, p. 97) is about two feet high and 
an inch or two wider at the upper edge. The whalers said it 
was the scapula of a humpback; but this must be a mistake ; for 
it certainly has nothing to do with the scapula of Megaptera 
nove-zelandie (the New-Zealand humpback). The scapule 
of the humpback or fin-whales are always much broader than 
high; this is the scapula of a true Balena, and has a distinct 
acromion process, which is bent towards the condyle, as in the 
scapula of Macleaytus australiensis figured by me from a spe- 
cimen in the British Museum sent by Dr. Haast from New 
Zealand (P. Z. S. 1873, p. 140). I should think it was pro- 
bably a specimen of this species ; but the upper margin is not 
quite so broad and expanded, and the figure appears to show 


Balena Hectori and Megaptera novee-zelandie. 57 


a short, thick, conical coracoid process near the glenoid cavity, 
which would lead to the idea that it is a distinct species not 
hitherto recorded as occurring in New Zealand. I propose to 
call it Balena Heetori. 


Bladebone of Balena Hectori. 


~ Teall this species Balena because I do not know any of the 
existing genera to which it can be referred, and think that 
when we know more of the skeleton to which it belongs it 
will most probably be the type of a new genus of Baleenide. 

This bladebone, from its small size, may be that of Neo- 
balena marginata, the pigmy New-Zealand whale, which was 
first known from three blades of whalebone, then from its ear- 
bone, and at last by the discovery of the whole skull; but the 
rest of the skeleton is still unknown; and the possession of an 
acromion process to the scapula, which is not found in any 
other true whale, would agree with the anomalous form of the 
bones of the head of that whale. 

Theother drawing represents a scapula about 24 feet high and 
4 feet wide at its upper edge, which the New-Zealand whalers 
said belonged to the black whale; and Dr. Hector says it 
agrees with the scapula that Dr. Knox gave to the museum 
of the New-Zealand Institute just before he died as that of the 
black whale. It doubtless belonged to the whale which he so 
called in his papers. 

This figure represents the scapula of a species of Megaptera ; 
for it agrees with it in its broad oblique outline, and in being 
destitute of any coracoid or acromion process, or any rudiments 
of them, like the rudimentary acromion process found in the 
Pescopia Lalandii of the Cape seas. It 1s most probably the 
scapula of the Megaptera nove-zelandie, Gray (Cat. Seals and 
Whales, p. 128, fig. 20), which I established on an ear-bone 


58 Bibliographical Notices. 

and os petrosum brought from New Zealand. This bladebone, 
although it agrees in general form with that of the European 
species, differs from it in the outline being more oblique, having 
the front edge of the scapula more erect, and the back edge 
lower and more directed backwards than in the bladebone of 
Megaptera longimana of the North Sea and North Atlantic 
Ocean. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. 


Mammalia, Recent and Extinct. An Elementary Treatise for the use 
of the Public Schools of New South Wales. By A. W. Scort, M.A. 
Sydney: Thomas Richards, Government Printer, 1873. 8vo, pp. 
141 and xix. Price 2s. 6d. 


Tue Preface informs us that ‘“‘ The following pages, briefly descrip- 
tive of the economy of Seals, Dugongs, and Whales, and of their 
principal fossil allies, form the second part or Section B of an ‘ Ele- 
mentary Treatise on the Mammalia,’ designed for the use of the 
more advanced pupils in the Public Schools of this country under the 
direction of the Council of Education. 

«« Whatever information we possess upon the natural history of the 
finned mammals, particularly in a popular yet scientific form, has 
been so scantily and unequally distributed, that in this direction a 
comparatively new field may be said to be open to the teacher as 
well as to the youthful inquirer. 

“Influenced also by the great commercial value of the Pinnata, I 
have felt anxiously desirous to direct without further delay the at- 
tention, and thus possibly secure the sympathy, of readers other than 
students to the necessity of prompt legislative interference in order 
to protect the oil- and fur-producing animals of our hemisphere, or 
at least some of them, against the wanton and unseasonable acts 
committed by the unrestrained trades—and thus not only to prevent 
the inevitable extermination of this valuable group, but to utilize 
their eminently beneficial qualities into a methodical and profitable 
industry. 

“‘ Keeping steadily in view these two objects, whose importance I 
trust will bear me out in deviating from my original intention in 
the order of the issue of publication, I have endeavoured :—first, 
to interest the youthful mind with selections of well authenticated 
anecdotes of the general habits of these peculiar animals, accom- 
panied, however, by those drier details of structural characters essen- 
tially requisite to assist the more advanced and thoughtful student 
to a better understanding of the generic distinctions, and to aid 
him as a work of reference or descriptive catalogue, should he be 
disposed in after-life to prosecute his researches in this difficult and 


Bibliographical Notices. 59 


imperfectly understood branch of zoology; and, secondly, by de- 
voting as much space as my limits would permit to the considera- 
tion of the animals whose products are of such commercial value to 
man, and whose extinction would so seriously affect his interests, 
and to point out the pressing necessity that exists for devising pro- 
tection for the fur-seals and the sperm and right whales of the 
Southern Ocean.” 

_ This work is far more than its title and cheap price would lead 
one to expect. It is a scientific and popular account of all known 
seals, whales, and dolphins, far more complete than any English or 
Continental work that I am acquainted with. 

The catalogues of the British Museum are the basis of the 
work, as far as regards the recent species; the observations on the 
history and habits of the animals are very well compiled; and we 
look forward to the continuation of the work with great pleasure. 
I will make two suggestions to the author. 

I think it is to be regretted that the author of this work, intended 
for the use of schools, should have occupied so much space with 
giving the synonyms of the species, a subject very interesting to 
scientific zoologists, but of no importance to even advanced pupils. 
Secondly, it would be much better if the author, who evidently has 
little practical means of judging for himself, placed more confidence 
in the descriptions from real specimens. 

In his account of the southern fur-seals, for example, which is a 
subject particularly interesting to the Australians, he has been 
misled by Mr. Allen’s observations, when describing some seals of the 
Northern Pacific, into believing that all the southern fur-seals 
belong to one species, while Mr. Allen admits that at the time he 
wrote he had not examined a single fur-seal from the southern 
hemisphere, but thought they were all one species; whereas I have 
come to a different conclusion, having under my care two stuffed 
skins, five unstuffed skins, and two skulls of Arctocephalus antarcticus 
from the Cape of Good Hope, four stuffed skins and four skulls of 
Arctocephalus nigrescens from the Falkland Islands, a skull of 
Arctocephalus cinereus from New Zealand, a stuffed specimen and 
a flat skin of Arctocephalus falklandicus from the Falkland Islands 
(which Mr. Scott has done me the honour to call A. Grayz), and two 
stuffed skins and two skulls of Gypsophoca tropicalis from North 
Australia ; and I believe that if Mr. Allen had had the opportunity 
of examining these specimens he would have changed his opinion. 
While the author puts all these seals under two names, he describes 
as new a “ top-knot seal” from Patagonia under the name of Arcto- 
cephalus eulophus, from the notes of a sealer! 

It is to be observed that not only do the species above mentioned 
differ in the form of their skulls, and in general size, proportion of 
parts, and colour, but also the skins from the Falkland Islands, Aus- 
tralia, and the Cape bear different prices in the market, and are at 
once known by the furmonger.—J. E. Gray. 


60 Royal Society -— 


Ostéographie des Cétacés, vivants et fossiles. Par MM. van BenzpEn 
et Paut Gervais. Livraisons9 & 10. Texte & Atlas. 


It is with great pleasure that I announce that I have received the 
ninth and tenth livraisons of this work, which I feared had been stopped 
by the French and German war ; and I hope that the work will now 
proceed regularly. The parts contain the completion of the text of 
the description of the plates of the Mysticetes, and is signed by P. J. 
van Beneden, and the commencement of the text of the Cétodontes, 
and the description of the genus Cachalot (Physeter). The plates all 
belong to the Cétodontes, and are marked as having been prepared 
under the superintendence of M. P. Gervais. In the previous notice 
of this work, entitled ‘‘ Observations on the Whales described in the 
‘ Ostéographie des Cetacés’ of MM. van Beneden and Gervais,” in 
the ‘Annals,’ Sept. 1870, vol. vi. p. 193, I gave the history of 
it, saying that the book was undertaken and published at the cost 
of my esteemed friend M. van Beneden, and the text written by 
M. Gervais, which I did on the authority of a conversation with M. 
Gervais. M. van Beneden, when he called upon me shortly after in 
London, informed me that the book was published at the expense of 
the publisher (was in fact a bookseller’s speculation), and the descrip- 
tion of the plates of the whales was written by him for the publisher. 
I offered to make the correction in the next number of the ‘ Annals ;’ 
but he begged me to let it remain as it was; and believing that he 
might have a private reason for his request, I obeyed his injunction. 
But very shortly after M. van Beneden’s return to Louvain he pub- 
lished a statement as if I had never made the offer. He now signs 
the end of the description of the Mysticetes, or Whalebone- Whales ; 
and if the part which each author took in the superintendence of 
the work had been stated in the prospectus, this mistake would not 
have occurred.—J. E. Gray. 


PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES. 
ROYAL SOCIETY. 


June 19, 1873.—William Spottiswoode, M.A, Treasurer and Vice- 
President, in the Chair. 


* On the Organization of the Fossil Plants of the Coal-measures. 
—Part V. Asterophyllites.” By W.C. Witt1amson, F.R.S., Pro- 
fessor of Natural History in Owens College, Manchester. 


On two occasions the author directed attention, in the Pro- 
ceedings of the Royal Society (vol. xx. pp. 95 & 435), to the 
structure of some stems which appeared to him to belong to the 
well-known genus Asterophyllites, briefly pointing out at the same 
time their apparent relations to a strobilus of which he had pre- 


a 


On the Fossil Plants of the Coal-measures. 61 


viously published figures and descriptions (Transactions of the 
Literary and Philosophical Society of Manchester, third series, 
vol. v. 1871) under the name of Volkmannia Dawsoni. In the 
present memoir he gives a detailed exposition of the various parts 
of the plant, including the roots, rootlets, stems, branches, leaves, 
and fruit, in different stages of their development. This is done 
chiefly in two modifications of the primary type—one from the 
Lower Coal-measures of Oldham in Lancashire, the other from 
those of Burntisland. In its youngest state, the Oldham form 
first appears as a mere twig, having a central fibro-vascular bundle 
enclosed in a double bark. The vascular bundle consists entirely 
of vessels which are chiefly, if not wholly, of the reticulated type. 
When divided transversely, it presents a triangular section, the 
triangle having long narrow arms and very concave sides. The 
bark is already differentiated into two layers, and has its exterior 
deeply indented by three lateral grooves—one opposite to each 
concave side of the vascular triangle. The outer layer is prosen- 
chymatous, with vertically elongated cells; the inner one consists 
of cylindrical parenchyma arranged in radial lines, the cells being 
also elongated vertically. As the plant grew, successive vascular 
layers were added exogenously to the exterior of the vascular axis. 
Each layer consisted of a single linear row of vessels, which were 
of large size opposite the concavities of the triangle, and small 
where they approached its several angles. The radial arrangement 
of those in the several growths was equally regular; they were 
disposed in single radiating series, new laminz being intercalated 
peripherally as the stem grew. These radiating laminz were sepa- 
rated by small medullary rays. Owing to the fact mentioned, that 
the lamin radiating from the concave sides of the central triangle 
consisted of much larger vessels than those radiating from its 
angles, three or four such growths sufficed to convert its concave 
sides into slightly convex ones, whilst a few more such additions 
converted the vascular axis into a solid cylindrical rod. At this 
stage its transverse sections appeared definitely divided into six 
radiating areas—three of large open vessels radiating from the 
sides of the primary triangle, and three of small ones proceeding 
from the sides and extremities of the angles. When these growths 
have thus given a cylindrical form to the vascular axis, a change 
takes place in its further development. Concentric growths again 
begin to form; but in them all the vessels are of almost equally 
small diameters ; hence the abrupt termination of the three areas 
of large vessels in the younger growths produces a distinct cir- 
cular boundary line, marking a special stage in the genesis of the 
stem. rom this point the additions go on uninterruptedly, the 
vessels of each radiating lamina or wedge increasing slowly in size 
from within outwards as the stem advances towards maturity. 
During these further developments the bark has continued to be 
separated into two well-defined forms. An inner layer consists of 
very delicate elongated cells with square ends (prismatic paren- 
chyma); these are seen in the transverse section arranged in ra- 


62 Royal Society :-— 


diating lines proceeding from within outwards. The outer bark 
consists of narrow, elongated, prosenchymatous cells, having very 
thick walls; at intervals, corresponding with the spaces between 
the successive verticils of leaves in the ordinary examples of Astero- 
phyllites, we find distinct nodes where the bark expands into lenti- 
cular disks. The vascular axis passes through these nodes without 
undergoing any visible change, either in the position of its vascular 
layers or in giving off vessels to the nodes or their appendages. The 
thin peripheral margin of each node sustains a verticil of the slender 
leaves of Asterophyllites, of which there are about twenty-six in 
each verticil. The aspect, dimensions, and arrangements of these 
leaves correspond exactly with what is seen in the ordinary speci- 
mens found in the coal-shales. Transverse sections of them exhibit 
a single thick central midrib, but no traces of vascular tissues have 
hitherto been found in them. 

The laminz of the vascular axis are separated by numerous 
medullary rays of small size; these rarely exhibit more than four 
or five cells in any vertical series, and usually but one or two. 
The exterior of the bark is deeply indented in each internode by 
three very deep superficial grooves, each one of which occupies the 
side of the stem corresponding with a concavity of the central 
triangle of the vascular axis. These grooves, which are sometimes 
double instead of single, extend from node to node, but do not 
indent the nodal disks. Owing to the great depth to which these 
penetrate the bark, they give a very characteristic tripartite aspect 
to each transverse section of these stems. 

The Burntisland type agrees with the Lancashire one in ail its 
leading features of structure and growth; but its vessels are all 
barred instead of being reticulated, and the author has not met 
with such beautiful examples of its nodal disks as he has done in 
the case of the other form ; neither has he seen its leaves attached. 
On the other hand, he has found specimens of much larger dia- 
meter than any that have hitherto been detected im Lancashire, 
exhibiting in an exquisitely beautiful manner the characteristic 
peculiarities already referred to. The author has also obtained one 
section from this locality in which a branch is given off. The 
vessels of this divergent organ are derived from the central por- 
tion of one of the segments of small vessels, seen in the trans- 
verse sections, which proceed from one of the angles of the central 
triangle. 

Having elucidated the details of the aérial stems, the author 
proceeds to examine such organs of fructification as appear to 
belong to these plants, commencing with the Volkmannia Dawsont 
which he described at length in the Transactions of the Philoso- 
phical Society of Manchester in 1871. This is a verticillate strobilus 
with a central vascular axis, of which latter transverse sections 
exhibit a close correspondence with the triangular bundle of Astero- 
phyllites, being also triangular, with concave sides and truncate 
angles. But in order to adapt this primary fibrovascular bundle 
to the requirements of the fruit, each of the truncate angles is 


| 


On the Fossil Plants of ths Coal-measures. 63 


enlarged, so as to make the entire section an almost hexagonal one. 
This axis is surrounded, as in Asterophyllites, by a double bark—an 
outer prosenchymatous one, and an inner one of more delicate 
cellular structure. At each node this bark expands into a lenti- 
cular disk fringed with stiff narrow bracts, which extend upwards 
and outwards beyond the sporangia. ‘The latter rest upon the 
bractiferous disks and the basal portions of the bracts, each verticil 
being fertile. The sporangia are closely packed in about three 
concentric circles, and attached by sporangiophores originating from 
each side of the base of each bract. The sporangia have cellular 
walls; they are full of large spores, each of which has its sur- 
face prolonged into a number of very long radiating spines. This 
fruit the author unhesitatingly identifies with the aérial stems 
previously described. 

He then examines various so-called Volkmannie found in the 
Lancashire Carboniferous shales, of which the internal structure 
is not preserved, but which, being found with leaves attached 
to them, admit of no doubt as to their belonging to Asterophyl- 
lites. These are regarded as being identical with Volkmannia 
Dawsoni ; hence the author accepts the latter fruit as giving the 
internal organization of the ordinary Asterophyllitean strobilus. The 
fruit (which has been previously described by Binney, Carruthers, and 
Schimper, under the names of Calamodendron commune, Volkmannia 
Binneyi, and Calamostachys Binneyana)is then investigated. The 
above authors had associated it with Calamites; but its internal 
structure is shown to have nothing mm common with that type. 
It consists of alternating verticils of barren and fertile appendages. 
The former are nodal disks bearing protective leaves ; the others 
are verticils of sporangiophores, usually six in each verticil, and 
which closely resemble those of the recent Equisetacee ; they 
project at right angles from the central axis, and expand at their 
outer extremities into shield-like disks, which sustain a circle of 
sporangia on the inner surface of each shield. The sporangia 
consist of a very peculiar modification of spiral cells; they are 
filled with spores which have been described as provided with 
elaters, like those of Hqgwisetum; but the author rejects this in- 
terpretation, regarding the so-called elaters as merely the torn 
fragments of the ruptured mother cells in which the true spores 
have been developed. The vascular axis is shown to be solid, and 
without any cellular elements, being wholly different from that of 
Calamites, in which the vascular axis is a hollow cylinder con- 
taining an immensely large cellular and fistular pith. In one fine 
example of Calamostachys Binneyana the author has found the cen- 
tral fibro-vascular bundle surrounded by an exogenous ring. This, 
too, exhibits no resemblance whatever to the corresponding growths 
of Calamites; on the other hand, it corresponds closely with 
conditions occurring in some parts of Asterophyllites, to which 
group the author believes the fruit to be related, notwithstanding 
the peculiarity of its sporangia and sporangiophores. The au- 
thor is confirmed in his conclusion that this fruit is not Cala- 


64 Royal Society. 


mitean by his having already described the structure of a true 
Calamitean strobilus from an example in which the central axis 
retains most accurately the arrangement of tissues characteristic 
of Calamitean stems (Manchester Transactions, 1870). A type 
of stem to which the author had previously assigned the provi- 
sional generic name of Amyelon is now shown to be the root or 
subterranean axis of Asterophyllites, specimens being described in 
which clusters of rootlets are given off, in irregular order, from 
various points of the exterior of the branching roots. The latter 
have no medulla; but in the centres of several of them the 
author finds the peculiar triangular fibro-vascular bundle so cha- 
racteristic of Asterophyllites ; and remains of the same trifid origin 
of the vascular layers may be traced in all, in the peculiar curva- 
tures assumed by the vascular laminz as they proceed from within 
outwards. The bark consists of two layers: the inner one is 
composed of ordinary parenchymatous cells, often of considerable 
size ; the outer one consists of irregular piles or columns of cells, 
disposed perpendicularly to the surface of the bark, and with 
their tangential septa in close contact and in parallel planes. The 
lateral or radial boundaries of these piles of cells are more strongly 
defined than the transverse septa. In tangential sections of this 
outer bark, each of these radially disposed columns of parallel-sided 
cells appears as a single thick-walled parenchymatous cell, whose 
aspect, in common with that of its neighbours, is that of ordinary 
coarse parenchyma. Such sections exhibit no indication of the 
radial elongation of these cells seen in radial and transverse ones. 
On reexamining the inner bark, we discover the explanation of 
these appearances. Many of the larger and more peripheral of 
the cells of the latter are seen to be undergoing division by the 
development within their walls of secondary cell-partitions, which 
are parallel with those of the radially disposed columns. It ap- 
pears obvious that each of the latter was primarily one of the cells 
of the inner bark, which has become elongated radially, and at the 
same time divided into a linear series of compressed cells by the 
growth of a succession of secondary divisions, all of which were 
more or less tangential to the periphery of the stem. 

The author directs special attention to the genetic activity of this 
inner bark ; the cells of its inner surface were obviously instru- 
mental in producing the successive circumferential additions to the 
primary vascular axis, whilst those of its outer surface increased 
the diameter of the outer bark in the way just described. 

After comparing these plants with living forms, the conclu- 
sion is arrived at that the nearest parallel to the structure of their 
stems is to be found in Psilotum triquetrum; whilst their general 
affinities are regarded by the author as Lycopodiaceous rather 
than Equisetaceous. The exogenous aspect of their successive 
vascular growths is, if possible, more conspicuous than in most of 
the other Carboniferous Cryptogams. 

The structure of the stems described is identical with that of 
those found at Autun by Prof. Renault, and assigned by him to 


Miscellaneous. 65 


Sphenophyllum ; thus the close affinity of this genus with Astero- 
phyllites appears to be finally established. The Calamites verti- 
cillatus of authors is probably the arborescent stem of one of these 
plants. 


“On a newly discovered extinet Mammal from Patagonia 
(Homalodotherium Cunninghami).” By Witi1am Henry Flower, 
F.RS. 


The author describes the complete adult dentition of a new 
genus of mammal, founded on remains discovered by Dr. Robert 
QO. Cunningham in deposits of uncertain age on the banks of the 
River Gallegos, South Patagonia. The animal appears to have 
possessed the complete typical number of teeth, 2. e. twenty-two 
above and below, arranged in an unbroken series, and of nearly 
even height, and presenting a remarkable gradual transition in 
characters, in both jaws, from the first incisor to the last molar. 
The molars more nearly resemble those of the genus Ihinoceros 
than of any other known mammal ; and, judging only by the general 
characters of the teeth, the animal would appear to have been a 
very generalized type of Perissodactyle Ungulate, allied through 
Hyracodon (a North-American Miocene form) to hinoceros, also 
more remotely to Macrauchenia, and, though still more remotely, 
to the aberrant Nesodon and Towodon. 'The generic name Homalo- 
dotherium was suggested for this form by Professor Huxley in his 
Presidential Address to the Geological Society in 1870. 


MISCELLANEOUS. 
On the Sterile Eggs of Bees. By C. Cavs and C. von Sresoxp. 


Tue existence of fecundated queen bees laying sterile eggs was 
ascertained incontestably some years ago ; but no certain explanation 
had been given of this abnormal fact. M. von Berlepsch indeed had 
suggested that cases of this kind must be ascribed to some patholo- 
gical state of the female; but no positive observations had been made 
on this subject. Some opponents of parthenogenesis, such as still 
exist in France, thought that the sterile eggs were laid by unfecun- 
dated queens. The observations of MM. Claus and yon Siebold 
finally settle the question, and will compel those bee-keepers who 
will not accept the facts of parthenogenesis to seek other arguments. 
The first case observed by M. Claus was that of an Italian queen 
born in the middle of May and beginning to lay in the middle of 
June. From this period she continued to deposit eggs until the 5th 
of October ; but none of the eggs gave birth to larve. If this queen 
had been constructed normally but had not been fecundated in May, 
she ought at least to have produced males by parthenogenesis. 
Dissection proved that the oviducts and copulatory orgaus were per- 
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xin. a) 


66 Miscellaneous. 


fectly normal, and that the seminal receptacle swarmed with sperma- 
tozoids. On the other hand the ovarian tubes, although scarcely 
reduced in size and number, showed a degenerescence of their 
contents. The eggs whose dimensions indicated that they were 
approaching the moment of deposition were but few; and their 
vitellus presented here and there the same phenomenon of fatty de- 
generation that was observed in the rest of the tubes, although the 
deposition of the membrane of the oyum by the epithelium had not 
ceased. 

The second queen observed by M. Claus had not always produced 
sterile eggs. Her owner, who had obtained her the preceding 
summer, had ascertained that she laid fertile eggs. Even in the 
spring he still obtained results from them, but subsequently he 
ascertained that her fertility had ceased. M. Claus found the re- 
productive apparatus normal in all its parts, and the seminal receptacle 
was full of active spermatozoids. The interior of the ovarian tubes 
presented the same conditions as in the preceding queen, but in a still 
more distinct fashion. The ova contained in the lower dilatations 
of the tubes had the vitellus shrivelled into a solid, caseous mass, 
although the epithelium seemed to have retained its faculty of 
secreting the shell. 

Lastly, M. von Siebold, having received from a Bohemian bee- 
keeper a queen which only laid sterile eggs, also ascertained that the 
organs had their ordinary structure, and that the receptacle swarmed 
with spermatozoids, but that the contents of the ovarian tubes pre- 
sented an abnormal appearance, Both in the compartment containing 
vitellus and in the ova themselves, every thing indicated the existence 
of substances in decomposition, The eggs already enclosed in their 
shell and ready to be laid were in a very altered state, denoting a 
dissociation of the elements. 

It is therefore an irregularity in the formation of the ovum, and 
especially of its vitellus, that causes this sterility. It is simply the 
result of a pathological state, and has nothing to do with partheno- 
genetic reproduction. 

As regards the cause of this degeneration, M. Claus thinks that 
we must seek it in the influence of bad weather, and in insufficient 
nourishment. M. von Siebold admits that these circumstances may 
have a certain injurious effect ; but, according to him, they are not 
the sole determining causes, since otherwise, as they are of frequent 
occurrence, queens with sterile eggs would not be so rare as they are 
in these countries.—Zeitschr. fiir wissenschaft. Zoologie, vol. xxiii., 
May 1873, pp. 198-210; Bibl. Univ. July 14, 1873, Bull, Sei. 
pp. 241-243, 


Note on the Habitat of Psetalia globulosa and Labaria hemispheerica, 
Gray. By Dr. A. B. Meyer, 


Dr. J. E. Gray deseribed, in the ‘Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.’ xi. 
p. 234, 1873, the two new above-named free sponges sent home by 
me from Singapore. Dr. Gray observes that he believes these 
sponges were obtained in the neighbourhood of Singapore ; and Mr. 


—. 


Miscellaneous. 67 


H. J. Carter, in his paper, “ Description of Labaria hemispherica, 
Gray, a new Species of Hexactinellid Sponge, with Observations on 
it and the Sarcohexactinellid Sponges generally,” Ann. & Mag. Nat. 
Hist. xi. p. 278, says “ Loc. unknown, from Singapore.” 

I beg to state that I obtained these sponges (as noticed in my 
letter to Dr. Gray from Singapore) from the reefs in the sea near 
the village Talisay, on the island of Cebu, Philippine Islands, in 
March 1872, on the same spot as the other new sponges obtained by 
me there and described by Dr. Gray in ‘ Annals,’ x. p. 110, 1872, 
viz. Meyerina claviformis, Crateromorpha Meyeri, and Rossella 
philippinensis, 

The sponges from these reefs, in the straits between the island of 
Cebu, some small islets near it, and the island of Bohol, are best to 
be got in the months March till August (the most favourable month 
is May) at full moon, when the current in the straits is very strong. 
The fishers drive with the current and draw behind them in their 
little boats long lines with small hooks constructed for the purpose. 
Therefore a little hole can be seen in nearly all specimens of Huplec- 
tella aspergillum and others, where the hook has destroyed the sub- 
stance of the sponge. Some species are only found in great depths, 
50 fathoms for instance ; and only a few fishermen are skilful enough 
for sponge-fishing. 

11 Wallfischgasse, Vienna, 

Noy. 14, 1873. 


Gigantic Cuttlefishes in Newfoundland, 


As the question of the existence of Cephalopoda of large size may 
still be regarded as to a certain extent open to doubt, the following 
letter from the Rev. M. Harvey of St. John’s, Newfoundland, to 
Principal Dawson possesses considerable interest. 


St. John’s, Newfoundland, 
Noy. 12, 1873. 
My prar Docror,—I take the liberty of bringing under your notice 
some account of a gigantic cuttlefish which was seen a few days 
ago in Conception Bay. The circumstances under which it was 
seen were as follows :—T wo fishermen were out in a small punt, on 
October 26, off Portugal Cove, Conception Bay, about 9 miles from 
St. John’s. Observing some object floating on the water at a short 
distance, they rowed towards it, supposing it to be a large sail or 
the débris of a wreck. On reaching it, one of the men struck it with 
his “ gaff,” when immediately it showed signs of life, reared a parrot- 
like beak, which they declare was “as big as a six-gallon keg,” 
with which it struck the bottom of the boat violently. It then shot 
out from about its head two huge livid arms and began to twine 
them round the boat. One of the men seized a small axe and 
severed both arms as they lay over the gunwale of the boat, where- 
upon the fish moved off and ejected an immense quantity of inky 
fluid, which darkened the water for two or three hundred yards. 


The men saw it for a short time afterwards, and observed its tail 
i 
os) 


68 


LES ie eee 


e————( 


(‘ozIs [vanyvuU YANO ou ynoqy) 


‘punjppunofnasr wow podojynydag oyunhrb v fo apamjuay, 


Miscellaneous. 69 


in the air, which they declare was 10 feet across. They estimate 
the body to have been 60 feet in length, 5 feet in diameter, of the 
same shape and colour as the common squid; and they observed 
that it moved in the same way as the squid, both backwards and 
forwards. 

One of the arms which they brought ashore was unfortunately 
destroyed, as they were ignorant of its importance ; but the clergy- 
man of the village assures me it was 10 inches in diameter and 6 feet 
in length. The other arm was brought to St. John’s, but not before 
6 feet of it were destroyed. Fortunately I heard of it, and took 
measures to have it preserved. Mr. Murray (of the Geological Sur- 
vey) and I afterwards examined it carefully, had it photographed, 
and immersed in alcohol; it is now in our Museum. It measured 
19 feet, is of a pale pink colour, entirely cartilaginous, tough and 
pliant as leather, and very strong. It is but 32 inches in circum- 
ference, except towards the extremity, where it broadens like an oar 
to 6 inches in circumference, and then tapers to a pretty fine point. 
The under surface of the extremity is covered with suckers to the 
very point. At the extreme end there is a cluster of small suckers, 
with fine sharp teeth round their edges, and having a membrane 
stretched across each. Of these there are about seventy. Then 
come two rows of very large suckers, the movable disk of each 1} 
inch in diameter, the cartilaginous ring not being denticulated. 
These are twenty-four in number. After these there is another 
group of suckers, with denticulated edges (similar to the first), and 
about fifty in number. Along the under surface about forty more 
small suckers are distributed at intervals, making in all about 180 
suckers on the arm. 

The men estimate that they left about 10 feet of the arm attached 
to the body of the fish, so that its original length must have been 
35 feet. 

A clergyman here assures me that when he resided at Lamaline, 
on the southern coast, in the winter of 1870, the bodies of two 
ceuttles were cast ashore, measuring 40 and 45 feet respectively. 

More than once we have had accounts of gigantic cuttles cast 
ashore in different localities; but not until now have any portions 
of them been preserved. 

By this mail I send you a photograph of the arm, it is one fourth 
the original in size. You will readily see the suckers at the extre- 
mity of the arm. ‘The disks of several of the larger ones have been 
torn off by carelessness on the part of the captors; a few of them, 
however, are perfect ; and the smaller ones are not injured. I shall 
send you also, by this mail, three or four of these suckers which I 
eut off, the smallest being from the very tip of the extremity and 
not much larger than a pin’s head. 

I shall be glad to hear your opinion of this fish at your earliest 
convenience. 

It is a great pity one arm was destroyed ; and it is still more to be 
regretted that we did not get the head of the monster. 

Yours very sincerely, 
M. Harvey. 


70 Miscellaneous. 


The ‘ Field’ of the 13th of December contains a notice of the oc- 
currence described by Mr. Harvey, communicated by Mr. T. G. B. 
Lloyd, who received his information from Mr. A. Murray, Provin- 
cial Geological Surveyor of Newfoundland. Mr. Lloyd very justly 
suggests that the statement of the width of the animal is more likely 
to be approximately correct than that of its length, which seems to 
be excessive ; and he is probably right in assuming that the length 
of the body of the animal was about 25 feet. The photograph 
sent by Mr. Murray represents one of the long tentacles of a decapod 
Cephalopod, probably a Calamary. A woodcut taken from it is 
given by Mr. Lloyd; and by the kindness of the Editor of the 
‘Field’ we are enabled to reproduce this figure. 


New Species of Shells. By F. P. Marrar. 


Nassa elongata, Marrat. 


N. testa elongato-conica, fulva, fascia pallida cincta, longitudinaliter 
costata transversimque sulcata ; anfractibus sulcis sequidistantibus, 
ultimo basi rugoso; sutura tuberculis moniliformibus ornata; aper- 
tura oyata; columella plicata; labio callo tenui expanso tecto, 
labro margine serrato, intus lirato. 

Hab. China seas. : 
Nassa lirata, Marrat. 

NV. testa ovata, fusca, fascia transversa albida cincta, longitudinaliter 
subcostata ; costis superne nodosis, transversim striata; anfractu 
ultimo transversim sulcato ; epidermide pallide fusca tecta; aper- 
tura parviuscula ; labio cum callo circumscripto tecto, basi granu- 
loso; canale subrecurvo; labro extus incrassato, intus valde 
lirato. 

Hab. Philippines. 


This shell has been long known in London among the dealers; and 
they all consider it to be new. 
Nassa lucida, Marrat. 


N. testa ovato-conica, albida, polita, longitudinaliter valde plicata, 
plicis subdistantibus ; apertura ovata; columella leyi, infra fere 
biplicata ; labro extus incrassato, intus dentato-lirato. 


Hab. Keelings Island. 
This is the most Scalaria-like species in the whole genus, the ribs 
being thick, white, and highly polished. 
The following species of Nassa may stand thus :— 
Nassa Kraussiana, Dkr. 
N. orbiculata, A. Ad. 
Nassa lurida, Gould. 
N. dispar, A. Ad. 


Miscellaneous. 71 


Nassa exilis, Powis. 
N. panamensis, C. B. Ad. 


Nassa complanata, Powis. 


N. gemma, Phil. 
N. cellaria, Brit. Mus. A small variety. 


Nassa concentrica, Marrat. 
N. concinna, Reeve, sp. 82; not the concinna, Powis, Reeve, sp. 91. 


Nassa gaudiosa, Hinds, is not the shell figured in Reeve under that 
name. 

Nassa Bronni, Phil., is a variety, with the outer lip muricated, of 
N. coronata, Lam. 

100 Edge Lane, Liverpool. 


The Number of Classes of Vertebrates, and their Mutual Relations. 
By Prof. THxopore Git. 


The mind, untrained in scientific logic, in its generalizations re- 
specting the animal kingdom, if we may judge by the vague ideas 
elicited by inquiry and by the history of science, instinctively asso- 
ciates its subjects into groups determined by the nature of their 
habitat ; and hence we have had the vertebrates differentiated into 
(1) those especially adapted for progression on land (Quadrupeds), 
(2) those especially fitted for progression through the air (Birds), 
and (3) those adapted for life in the water (Fishes); while the 
residue, not readily combinable with either of those classes, are 
tacitly overlooked, or, as the serpents, annexed as a kind of appendix 
to the Quadrupeds, because they most resemble certain of those 
animals—the lizards. It was therefore a great advance when 
Linneeus established a peculiar class (Mammalia) for the typical 
viviparous quadrupeds and the whales, and thus for the first time 
subordinated habitat and adaptation therefor to structure. While 
at the present day the ancient ideas have almost entirely disappeared 
from the system of nature so far as regards the terrestrial verte- 
brates, they are still to a great extent prevalent in the appreciation 
of the relations of the aquatic ones. For those vertebrates con- 
founded by most naturalists under the name of Fishes are very dis- 
similar among themselves, and so much so even that the differences 
are more marked and radical than those between any of the superior 
classes of the branch. If, indeed, considerations of differences of 
structure are to guide us in the appreciation of the relations and sub- 
ordination of animals, the current classification must be entirely 
changed, and the subordination of the highest groups, first sug- 
gested by Hiickel, should be adopted with some modifications, while, 
as respects the combination of the “higher” or more specialized 
classes into superior groups, other principles should guide. One of 
the chief points to be reconsidered is the association of the Batra- 
chians with Fishes rather than with the true reptiles. Although no 


ie Miscellaneous. 


distinction may be possible between the first two when the class of 
Fishes has the wide range generally allowed, there is no difficulty in 
their discrimination with the limits here to be assigned to them. 
We may then group the classes as follows :— 

On the one hand is Branchiostoma or Amphiovus, distinguished 
by the extension of the notochord (which is, of course, persistent) to 
the anterior end of the vertebral column, the attenuation of the 
spinal cord forward and its simple structure, the absence of auditory 
organs, the simple tubular structure of the heart, and the develop- 
ment of the liver simply as a diverticulum of the intestine.—This 
type is called by Hiickel the subphylum Leptocardia or Acrania. 

On the other hand are all the other vertebrates, which agree in 
the termination of the notochord behind the pituitary fossa, the en- 
largement of the spinal cord forward into a brain, the development 
of auditory organs, the division of the heart into (two to four) 
chambers, which in part (one or two) specially receive the blood, 
and in part (one or two) specially distribute it to the body again, 
and the differentiation of the liver as an independent and highly spe- 
cialized organ.—This group is named by Hickel the subphylum 
Pachycardia or Craniota. 

The numerous forms belonging to the last “ subphylum ” are also 
divisible into two great groups. 

In one the skull has no cincture girdling the mouth, and conse- 
quently no lower jaw, there are no pectoral members or scapular 
girdle, and there is but one nasal sac, which has a median external 
aperture.—To this section belong the lampreys and hags, the repre- 
sentatives of the class of Marsipobranchs. 

In the other, the skull has a cincture surrounding the mouth, its 
inferior portion being specialized as a lower jaw; they have (arche- 
typically at least) a pectoral member and a shoulder-girdle de- 
veloped; and there are two nasal sacs, each having an olfactory 
nerve distributed to an external aperture.—These vertebrates are 
again divisible into three groups or superclasses. 

1. In the first (Lyrifera) the shoulder-girdle forms a lyriform 
or furcula-shaped apparatus, the scapule and their adjuncts of 
both sides being connected together below along the median line, 
and an air-bladder (sometimes lung-like) is typically developed 
(sometimes, however, atrophied) and (1) either connects with the 
cesophagus by a single duct or (2) is entirely closed. To this 
superclass belong the classes of Fishes and Elasmobranchiates. 

2. In the second (Quadratifera) the shoulder-girdle is repre- 
sented by the scapule and their appendages, which are limited 
to the respective sides, a sternum is differentiated, and instead 
of an air-bladder are two lungs, each with a special canal, which 
communicate with the pharynx. The lower jaw is compound and 
is articulated with the skull by the intervention of a special bone— 
the os quadratum. ‘To this superclass belong the Batrachians, the 
Reptiles, and the Birds, the last two forming the group Sauropsida. 

3. In the third (Malleifera) the shoulder-girdle is represented 
by composite scapule, limited to the sides or back; a sternum is 


Miscellaneous. 73 


developed ; respiration is entirely effected by highly specialized 
lungs commumicating with a common trachea; and the lower jaw is 
composed of simple rami, and articulated directly with the skull, the 
os quadratum of the other vertebrates being converted into one of the 
auditory ossicles (the malleus). This superclass is represented by a 
single class—the Mammals. 

The more these groups are studied in all their relations, the more 
natural do they appear. 

As to other questions—that is, whether the true Fishes and 
Selachians are not separate classes, there is much to be said on both 
sides, and perhaps the arguments in favour of the class value of the 
Selachians may be even more weighty than those against them. If, 
indeed, the Birds and Reptiles are differentiated as distinct classes, 
similar rank can scarcely be consistently withheld from the Fishes 
and Elasmobranchiates. If I have heretofore hesitated, it is because 
of Dr. Giinther’s very adverse views. 

Without prejudice to the reconsideration of the question as to the 
systematic value of the group of Selachians or Elasmobranchiates, 
the classes of vertebrates may then be distributed, in a descending 
series, as follows :— 


Branch VERTEBRATA. 
A. Subbranch CRANIOTA. 
Superclass MaLLerrera. 
I. Class Mammalia. 
Superclass QuapRATIFERA. 
(Sauropsida.) 
II. Class Aves. 
IIL. Class Reptilia. 
( Batrachepsida. ) 
IV. Class Batrachia. 
Superelass LyxrrEra. 
VY. Class Pisces. 
VI. Class Elasmobranchiata. 
Superclass Monorruina. 
VII. Class Marsipobranchia. 
B. Subbranch ACRANTA. 
VILI. Class Leptocardia. 


The most nearly related pair of classes are those of Birds and 
Reptiles ; and preeminently the most homogeneous is that of Birds, 
all the living representatives of which seem to be members of a 
single order (which may be distinguished by the name Eurhipidura), 
and at most divisible into two suborders, the Carinate and the 
Ratitee. Other orders are represented by extinct types, viz. Saururve 
and (if the vertebre are peculiar to the group) Odontornithes.— 
Abstract of a communication to the National Academy of Sciences, 
made Oct. 29, 1873. Communicated by the Author. 


Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. xii. 6 


74 Miscellaneous. 


The Parasitic Mites of Birds, a Contribution to the Knowledge of the 
Sarcoptide. By E. Enuers. 


The observations of M. Ehlers, which relate to interesting questions 
of adaptation and heredity, are made upon an Acarian very nearly 
allied to that described by M. C. Robin under the name of Sarcoptes 
mutans. It is also a bird-parasite, and was discovered on a speci- - 
men of Munia maja, in which it produced excrescences at the base 
of the beak. For this species and M. Robin’s the author establishes 
the genus Dermatoryctes, Which is particularly characterized by the 
form of the feet in the two sexes. He calls his species Dermatoryctes 
Fossor. 

The female of D. fossor is much larger than the male, and also 
very different in form. It is incapable of moving outside the 
galleries which it inhabits, partly because it is encumbered by the 
large eges which it carries in its body, and partly because it cannot 
touch the ground with its feet. These (which are extremely short) 
present an epimeron, a coxa, and leg formed of three joints, the 
terminal joint being a sort of quadridentate clasper, probably homo- 
logous with the two joints which are distinct in D. mutans, and 
which M. Robin ealls tibia and tarsus. 

The males are smaller and much more active, and also less nume- 
rous, than the females. Their body is contracted in front and 
behind; their legs are much longer than those of the females, and 
differently constructed; in particular, they bear long hairs, and 
each of them has a sucker with a long pedicle on its terminal 
joint. 

M. Ehlers was unable to ascertain whether this Acarian is ovi- 
parous or viviparous. He supposes that the membrane of the egg 
becomes much attenuated at the close of the development, and that 
the embryo is born after having got free from it, or that this membrane 
is ruptured during the birth. 

In the first period of their hfe the young Acarians run easily by 
means of their three pairs of legs, which are long and very like those 
of the adult males; each of them bears at its extremity a sucker 
with a long pedicle, and five hairs, the longest of which exceeds the 
sucker. 

The transformations through which the animal afterwards passes 
are the results of a certain number of moults, which must be 
regarded as being more than mere changes of skin. During these 
moults the mite remains in a state of immobility and rigidity, which 
seems to indicate that we have to do with a true case of nymphosis, 
accompanied by new formations analogous to those observed by 
Weissman in the metamorphoses of insects. Kiichenmeister had 
previously witnessed phenomena of this kind in Sarcoptes scabiei, and 
Claparéde has described in detail the manner in which a new deye- 
lopment takes place in the interior of the old skin in Ataw and 
Hoplophora. Matters appear to go on in an analogous fashion 
in the species observed by M. Ehlers, although this naturalist 
ue unable to ascertain positively that complete histolysis takes 
place. 


Miscellaneous. is 


There are remarkable differences between the development of the 
male and of the female. The male undergoes no profound changes 
in passing from the larval to the adult state. In these two phases 
of its existence it presents the same peculiarities of structure. Its 
structure perfectly resembles that which we observe in the Sarcoptide 
in general, in which the legs bear long hairs, and some of them, if 
not all, have also pedunculated suckers. The characteristics of the 
family which exist in the young persist in the male until the adult 
State.- 

In the females it is otherwise. The changes which take place in 
the course of development give rise not only to differences which 
characterize the adult, but also to arrangements which are not met 
with in other Sarcoptidee. 

At the last moult but one the female appears with its eight legs, 
its genital aperture, and all its other principal characters. It is then 
only distinguished from the adult by its not yet having ova in its 
body, and by the dorsal shield only presenting pointed, conical pro- 
tuberances, instead of the flattened scales which this region exhibits 
in the adult. After increasing in bulk it undergoes another moult 
in order to attain its definitive condition, in which the dorsal surface 
is covered with flattened scales. These protuberances, which are in 
themselves of but little importance, are interesting because they also 
appear in the mites of the genus Sarcoptes, in which they are parti- 
cularly developed in the female sex. In the species of which the 
adult females do not present these projections, they are also wanting 
in the male; in Sarcoptes scabiei they are found not only in the 
adult female, but also, although much less developed, in the male. 
In Dermatoryctes fossor they are exclusively characteristic of the 
female. M. Ehlers thinks that this formation of the skin may have 
been originally a secondary sexual character of the females which has 
become a little attenuated in the species under consideration, whilst 
in other female Sarcoptide it has maintained itself and even been 
transmitted to the males by heredity. 

The legs of the females undergo remarkable transformations at the 
last moult ; they become short stumps which have lost a joint, and 
no longer possess hairs or suckers. The Sarcoptidse of the Mam- 
malia present a similar modification, although far less profound; for 
the females have their last two pairs of legs destitute of suckers, 
whilst the males possess them at least on the last pair but one. On 
the other hand, in Dermatophagus and Dermatokoptes (Fiirst.) the 
female has a sucker at least in one of the posterior pairs of feet, and 
in the male we find one on each foot; this fact is the more remark- 
able because in these genera the sucker does not exist in the larval 
state, and only appears at the last change of skin. The two genera 
in question differ from the true Sarcoptes in not piercing canals in 
the epidermis of their host, but living more on the surface, concealed 
by the hairs, the cells detached from the epidermis, &c. The disap- 
pearance of the suckers and the shortening of the legs consequently 
seems, in the Sarcoptes, to be in connexion with the mode of life, 
and especially with the nature of the habitat ; so that those which 


76 Miscellaneous. 


require to form galleries undergo the greatest abbreviation of the legs, 
which must have been influenced especially by the comparative dis- 
use of those organs. 

The female of D. fossor lives at the extremity of a straight gallery, 
which it completely fills. Under such conditions its short, strong 
legs are very useful to it in progressing after the fashion of a mole, 
by pressing obliquely against the walls of the gallery, so as to push 
the animal forward. Outside the gallery these legs could be of no 
use to it. The young females and the males, on the contrary, can 
move in galleries which are as it were too large for them. 

The rectilinear direction and the small size of the galleries is ex- 
plained by the hardness of the horny substance of the beak in which 
they are pierced, which causes the animals to confine themselves to 
a straight passage, having exactly the calibre of their bodies. In 
the Mammalia, the epidermis of which forms a less resistant tissue, 
the passages are tortuous, increase gradually in depth, and offer more 
space to the mites than is afforded to the parasite of the bird’s beak. 
—Zeitschr. fiir wissenschaftl. Zoologie, vol. xxii. pp. 228-253; 
Bibl. Univ. July 15, 1873, Bull. Sci. pp. 244-247. 


Contributions to the Knowledge of the Laboulbenie. 
By Dr. J. Pryritscx. 


The author describes the mode of occurrence and the development 
of these parasitic fungi. Hitherto only five species of Laboulbenie 
were known, three of which were observed on beetles. New species 
have been detected on Carabidae, Staphylinide, and Dytiscide. By 
their development, and especially the processeof fecundation, the 
Laboulbenie approach the other Ascomycetes; fecundation takes 
place by the contact of delicate, filiform organs, pollinodia and 
trichogyne. The pollinodia are developed at the terminal part of 
the young plant upon peculiar bearers, the form of which is charac- 
teristic of the species ; the trichogyne terminates the rudiment of 
the fruit. In some species the latter is a delicate filament of several 
joints; but in Laboulbenia musce it is unicellular ; in all species it is 
thrown off after fecundation. The fruit is only developed after 
fecundation ; it opens by an apical pore and allows the spores to 
escape. ‘The spores are produced in diverticula of one (or several ?) 
cell in a series of cells, the upper extremity of which previously 
formed the trichogyne. The form and insertion of the bearer of the 
pollinodia and its appendicular structures, and the form of the 
armature of the mouth of the fruit, furnish the most important 
characters for distinguishing the species of this small group of fungi. 
Dr. Peyritsch’s memoir contains descriptions of all the species, which 
are referred to five genera,—Anzerger der Akad, der Wiss. in Wien, 
October 23, 1873. 


THE ANNALS 


AND 


MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. 


[FOURTH SERIES. ] 


No. 74. FEBRUARY 1874. 


XII.—Deseriptions of two new Genera and Species of Polyzoa 
from the Devonian Rocks. By H. ALLEYNE NICHOLSON, 
M.D., D.Sc., M.A., F.R.S.E., Professor of Natural History 
in University College, Toronto. 


In the following communication I propose to desetibe two 
new genera of Polyzoa which I have been compelled to found 
for the reception of two remarkable fossils from the Devonian 
rocks of Western Ontario. Both of these belong to the family 
of the Fenestellide; but they differ in an extraordinary 
manner from all previously recorded genera, and present 
certain points of structure of a very anomalous nature. 


Genus Crypropora (Nicholson). 


Polyzoary forming a rigid, infundibuliform, calcareous ex- 
pansion, springing from a strong solid branching root-stalk or 
rhizome. Exterior of the ccencecium forming a continnous 
non-perforated calcareous layer, internal to which is a second 
or intermediate layer, the two being composed of the amal- 
gamated and coalescent branches (“interstices”). The inter- 
mediate layer is marked by shallow and bifurcating longitu- 
dinal sulci, corresponding with the lines between the branches ; 
and its surface exhibits reticulating lines which correspond 
with the bases or proximal ends of the cells beneath ; but no 
fenestrules are present. The internal surface of the inter- 
mediate layer carries the cells, which are flask-shaped, and 


Ann. & Mag. N. H. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. ( 


78 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on two new Genera and 


are arranged in double alternating rows forming regularly 
flexuous lines enclosing oval interspaces, exactly as in Letepora. 
The oval interspaces, however, instead of constituting so many 
“fenestrules,” are the bases of so many pillars, which proceed 
perpendicularly inwards, across a central space, to jon with 
an internal calcareous membrane which forms the innermost 
lining of the funnel-shaped frond. 

It follows from the above description that the mouths of 
the cells in Cryptopora neither open on the exterior of the 
frond, as is commonly the case in Fenestel/a, nor upon the 
interior of the frond, as is the case in the infundibuliform 
species of Retepora. On the contrary, we have im this extra- 
ordinary genus the unique arrangement that both the internal 


Fig. 1. 


Cryptopora mirabilis, Nich.: A, a partially decorticated specimen, natural 
size; B, a small portion of the same, showing the inner ends of the 
perpendicular columns, enlarged; €, another partially decorticated 
specimen, springing from a strong footstalk, natural size; D, part of 
the internal surface of the intermediate layer, showing the mouths of 
the cells and the broken perpendicular columns, enlarged; E, a small 
portion of the frond, enlarged and somewhat diagrammatically repre- 
sented ; F, transverse section of part of the frond, enlarged and also 
slightly diagrammatized (a, the external smooth membrane; 6, the 
intermediate suleated layer; c, the central space containing the cells 
and traversed by the perpendicular columns; d, the internal membrane). 


and the external aspects of the funnel-shaped polyzoary are 
to all appearance closed by a continuous calcareous membrane. 
The cells are not placed upon either of the free surfaces of the 
polyzoary, but occupy a central space, which has its internal 
wall formed by the innermost membrane, and its external wall 
by an intermediate layer composed of the laterally coalescent 
branches. ‘The cells are situated upon the internal face of the 
outer wall of this central space; and the two walls are kept 
apart by a system of pillars, which traverse the central space 
perpendicularly, and correspond in position with the fenestrules 


Species of Polyzoa from the Devonian Rocks. 79 


of a Retepora. It would thus appear that the water must have 
been admitted to this central space, and thus to the cells, by 
openings in the free edge or lip of the infundibuliform poly- 
zoary ; but none of my specimens exhibits this portion of the 
frond. 

In the genus Hemitrypa, Phillips, the fenestrules do not 
perforate the coencecium so as to reach the outer face of the 
frond, but are filled by a calcareous membrane. The cells, 
however, open upon the external surface, instead of into a 
central space; and the structure of the polyzoary is in other 
respects very different. 

The following is the only species of the genus that I have 
as yet met with, though additional forms will probably be 
afterwards detected. 


Cryptopora mirabilis (Nicholson). 

Polyzoary infundibuliform, apparently from one to three 
imches in height and three quarters of an inch or more in 
diameter distally. Hxternal layer thin, imperforate, smooth 
or obscurely striated. Intermediate layer formed of the coa~ 
lescent branches, and marked externally by vertical shallow 
grooves, which are placed about half a line apart and some- 
times bifurcate. Between these grooves the external surface 
is mapped out by inosculating lines into small oval or poly- 
gonal spaces corresponding with the cells. The imternal 
surface of the intermediate layer carries the cells, which are 
arranged biserially in flexuous lines, and enclose oval or 
rhomboidal interspaces. These interspaces are arranged in 
very regular diagonal lines, about four in the space of two 
lines ; and they give origin to a series of short rounded pillars, 
which extend inwards at right angles to meet the internal 
layer. ‘The central space, in which the cells are situated, is 
about half a line to two thirds of a line indepth. The internal 
layer is apparently thi and membranous. ‘The entire frond 
springs from an exceedingly strong, horizontal, branched 
stalk, the surface of which is marked by vermicular strie. 

The materials in my hands are not sufficient to permit of an 
entirely satisfactory elucidation of the characters and structure 
of this remarkable species. Different specimens, however, or 
different parts of the same specimen, show the following 
appearances :— 

1. The external membrane is thin, and is only preserved 
in parts of any specimen that I have seen; and as it corre- 
sponds with the reverse or non-poriferous face of an ordinary 
Retepora, it is to be regarded in reality as nothing more than 


the exterior portion of the intermediate layer. 
vi 
7 


80 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on two new Genera and 


2. The intermediate layer (together with the external layer, 
as just remarked) is clearly formed by the coalescent branches. 
When viewed from the outside, where the thin outer layer has 
been stripped off, it exhibits shallow vertical grooves, marking 
out the original branches, and it also shows in outline the 
proximal ends of the cells below (fig. 1, E, 6). 

3. Specimens which exhibit the hollow interior of the 
funnel, from which the innermost membrane has been removed 
in whole or in part (fig. 1, D), exhibit the mouths of the cells 
as rounded pores placed on the inner aspect of the amalgamated 
branches. The cells are arranged in double alternating rows 
forming regularly bent or undulated lines, each of which corre- 
sponds with the inner surface of a branch, and which, by their 
inosculation, enclose oval spaces corresponding to fenestrules, 
but occupied by short solid columns. 

4, Specimens which are broken across transversely (fig. 1, I’) 
show that, instead of fenestrules or perforations between the 
anastomosing branches, we have a series of stout pillars, which 
run perpendicularly inwards from the poriferous face, and have 
their internal ends connected together by a thin caleareous 
membrane, which forms the innermost lining of the funnel- 
shaped frond. There is thus formed a central space (c), which 
is lined outwardly by the cells, and to which water can ap- 
parently not have been admitted otherwise than by openings 
in the margin of the funnel. 

5. Specimens which are casts of the interior of the frond, 
to which the innermost membrane with the ends of the per- 
pendicular columns still remain adherent, are not uncommon 
(fig. 1, A&C). These show that the columns are so arranged 
as to form beautifully regular diagonal lines ; and their inner 
ends seem to have been convex, as they in many cases leave 
concave or cupped scars of an oval or rhomboidal shape upon 
the outside of the cast (fig. 1, B). 

6. One specimen exhibits a strong horizontal ‘footstalk, 
from which the ccencecium grew up vertically (fig. 1,C). This 
footstalk is branched at both ends; its surface is covered in 
parts with vermiculated strie ; and its structure seems to have 
been minutely tubular or cellular. 

7. Lastly, some specimens show the extraordinary character 
of a second frond, quite similar in structure to the first, in- 
vaginated within the outer one, so as to give rise to an internal 
cone closely applied to the external funnel. I am at present, 
with the comparatively imperfect materials in my possession, 
unable to offer any explanation of this remarkable feature. 

Locality and Formation—Not uncommon, though always 
more or less imperfect, in the Corniferous Limestone (Devo- 
nian), Port Colborne and Lot 6, Con. 1, Wainfleet. 


er 


Species of Polyzoa from the Devonian Rocks. 81 


Genus Carrnorora (Nicholson). 


Polyzoary infundibuliform, calcareous, and_ reticulated. 
The external layer of the cyathiform frond is composed of 
regularly undulated flexuous branches (“ interstices ’’), which 
anastomose with one another, after the manner of a Letepora, 
so as to form a series of oval fenestrules. Exteriorly the 
branches are angulated or carinate, and are smooth and non- 
celluliferous. Internally each branch gives origin to an 
enormously developed keel or vertical lamina, which corre- 
sponds in direction with the branch, and is directed inwards 
towards the centre of the funnel. The inner surface of the 
branches thus presents a series of parallel ridges of great 
height, separated by deep grooves, at the bottom of which, to 
all appearance, the cells open. The fenestrules also open at the 
bottom of these grooves. In parts of the frond, however, 


Fig. 2. 


Illustrations of the structure of Carinopora Hindei, Nich.: a, fragment 
of the exterior, natural size ; b, portion of the same, enlarged ; ¢, another 
portion of the exterior, still further enlarged ; d, a fragment from which 
the external non-celluliferous layer has been removed, showing the 
cells, enlarged ; e, a fragment more deeply decorticated, showing the 
mouths of the cells, enlarged ; f & g, transverse sections of the frond in 
different parts, enlarged ; h, a portion of the internal surface, enlarged ; 
i, transverse section of a single branch, enlarged. 


these grooves are apparently rendered vesicular by the deve- 
lopment of a series of delicate calcareous laminz, which connect 
together the sides of contiguous ridges. In some cases, also, 
the inner edges of the ridges are connected together by a con~ 
tinuous calcareous membrane, so that the inner surface of the 
frond is completely closed. The cells are carried in alternating 
double rows upon the inner and lateral aspects of each branch, 
their mouths appearing to be situated at the bottom of the 
grooves before mentioned and at the base of the great keel 
which springs from each branch internally. Obviously , how- 


82 Dr. i. A. Nicholson on two new Genera and 


ever, the row of cells on one side of any branch opens into 
one groove, whilst the row on the opposite side of the same 
branch opens into a contiguous groove, and not into the same 
one. No cells are carried upon the areas formed by the ana- 
stomosis of contiguous branches. 

I have only seen a single, very large and well-preserved 
example of this genus; and a careful examination of this has 
still left me unable to elucidate and explain some of the most 
extraordinary structural peculiarities which it presents. There 
can, however, be no doubt as to the complete distinctness of the 
genus from any previously described. A comprehension of the 
very remarkable characters presented by this genus will perhaps 
be best obtained from a detailed account of the different figures 
of the above illustration, all of which represent different 
portions of the only known specimen :— 

a. This figure exhibits a portion of the exterior of the frond, 
showing the fenestrules and the outer non-celluliferous aspect 
of the branches. In the portion here illustrated of the natural 
size, and partially shown at 6 on an enlarged scale, the fenes- 
trules are oval and arranged in diagonal lines, and the branches 
are strongly keeled—the general appearance closely resembling 
the non-celluliferous aspect of Retepora prisca, Goldfuss, and 
the fenestrules being similarly formed by the simple inoscu- 
lation of the branches without the development of distinct dis- 
sepiments. 

c. This represents another portion of the exterior of the 
frond, nearer to the base, where the fenestrules are polygonal 
or hexagonal and are not arranged in regular diagonal lines. 
Here also every fourth or fifth branch has a nearly straight 
direction, giving the network quite a peculiar appearance. 
In some eases, lastly, the fenestrules present the appearance of 
being closed by a delicate external membrane. 

d. his shows a small portion from which the outer non- 
celluliferous layer has been denuded, showing the proximal 
ends or bases of the cells, arranged in a double inosculating 
row on each branch, and lying in the same plane as the 
fenestrules. 

e. This figure exhibits, on an enlarged scale, a small portion 
of the exterior of the frond, from which the outer non-celluli- 
ferous layer has been stripped off together with the cells them- 

selves, leaving to view the circular mouths of the cells arranged 

in two alternating rows, which are still on the same plane as 
the fenestrules, and which do not encroach upon the spaces 
formed by the inosculation of the branches. 

f. This figure is a greatly magnified representation of a 
transverse section of the frond at a point considerably removed 


Species of Polyzoa from the Devonian Rocks. 83 


from the base, showing the branches cut across. Above, the 
branches are separated by the fenestrules; and immediately 
beneath this are seen the dark oval spaces which represent 
the cavities of the biserial cells, and two of which are contained 
within the cavity of each branch. Below this, again, each 
branch is seen to give off an immense keel or ridge, which is 
directed inwards towards the interior of the frond. These 
ridges are separated by deep intervening grooves; and there 
can be no doubt that the cells open at the bottom of these 
grooves, those of one side of the branch opening on one side 
of the base of the great keel, and those of the other opening 
upon the opposite side of the same. 

g. This exhibits a greatly magnified transverse section of 
the frond at a point a little above the base. As in the pre- 
ceding, we can recognize without difficulty the shallow fenes- 
trules, the divided branches carrying in their interior each a 
pair of cells, and the great internal keels. Here, however, 
we have two new features: first, the deep grooves between 
the keels are subdivided by delicate calcareous lamine, which 
connect the opposite sides of contiguous keels, and divide 
the intervening grooves into shallow transverse chambers ; 
secondly, the grooves between the keels are closed internally 
by a continuous calcareous membrane which has a minutely 
porous or vesicular structure. 

h. This represents a fragment taken from near the base of 
the funnel and exhibiting the internal surface of the polyzoary. 
We see here the inner faces of the great longitudinal keels ; 
but instead of these being separated by deep sulci as in the 
upper portion of the frond, they are here separated by shallow 
rounded grooves formed by a continuous calcareous membrane, 
which is not penetrated by either the fenestrules or the cells. 
No apertures, therefore, of any kind appear on the interior of 
the ccencecium near the base, the open interstitial grooves of 
the upper portion of the frond being here closed by a continuous 
connecting layer. At the right-hand corner of the figure the 
keels and their connecting membrane are broken away, so 
that we see the cavities of the rows of cells; whilst the ex- 
treme corner is still further broken away, so that the fenestrules 
come into view. 

z. This simply represents a single branch in transverse 
section, greatly enlarged, and shows the cells in the interior 
of the branch and the great triangular keel proceeding from 
its internal surface. 

From the above description it will be evident that the 
structure of Carinopora is quite anomalous, and wholly unlike 
any thing that has hitherto been observed in any member of 


84 On two new Genera and Spectes of Polyzoa. 


the Fenestellide. The most anomalous point is the position 
of the cells, or rather their mode of opening on the surface. 
The cells open towards the interior of the funnel-shaped frond, 
as in fetepora, and in the upper portion they seem to open 
simply at the bottom of the deep intercarinal grooves, into 
which the fenestrules also open; so that there is here no 
special difficulty, if, as seems tolerably certain, the keels are 
not here connected by an imperforate membrane, and the 
grooves thus remain open to the access of sea-water. Near 
the base, however, the keels are clearly connected by a con- 
tinuous imperforate membrane, and the deep intervening 
grooves are filled up by a vesicular calcareous tissue, so that 
the sea-water could not have gained access to the mouths of 
the cells. The only explanation that I can offer is that the 
basal portion of the polyzoary may perhaps have been gra- 
dually overgrown internally by this layer of vesicular tissue, 
and may thus have been practically killed, whilst the upper 
portion remained open to the sea and genuinely alive. If this 
was not the case, I cannot explain the undoubted facts. 

The enormous internal keels, whether free or connected 
together by membrane, give an extraordinary depth and 
thickness to the polyzoary ; and the fenestrules do not extend 
to more than about one fourth of this depth from the outside ; 
nor do the cells. In Hemitrypa, Phill., the fenestrules do 
not extend through the entire thickness of the polyzoary ; but 
in this genus the fenestrules are confined to the znner surface 
of the funnel-shaped frond, and the cells open externally. In 
Cryptopora, Nich., again, the outer and imner surfaces of the 
polyzoary are both imperforate, and the cells open into a 
central space, which is crossed by regularly placed pillars 
having a direction perpendicular to the plane of the frond. 

The following is the only species of the genus Carinopora 
which has come under my notice. 


Carinopora Hindet (Nicholson). 


This being the only species of the genus, it is not needful 
to recapitulate its structural characters, since these, so far as 
known, have been fully discussed above. It only remains to 
give the measurements by which the species is distinguished, 
along with one or two characters which are not of generic 
value. ‘The only known specimen exhibits a portion of a very 
large infundibuliform frond, which, though fragmentary, has 
a height of four inches, with a diameter at the top of clearly 
more than half afoot. The actual base is broken off. About 
six branches occupy the space of two lines. The fenestrules are 
sometimes oval, sometimes hexagonal or polygonal; and their 


On the Geographical Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 85 


arrangement differs in different parts of the frond. Sometimes 
they are disposed in regular diagonal lines; but even in this 
case there are often perceptible central longitudinal lines, on 
either side of which the diagonal rows of fenestrules diverge in 
opposite directions like the barbs of a feather, giving rise to 
a most peculiar appearance. At other times the fenestrules 
are rhomboidal, or hexagonal, or polygonal, and are not ar- 
ranged in distinct diagonal rows ; whilst two contiguous longi- 
tudinal rows are often separated by an unusually narrow and 
apparently quite straight branch (see fig. 2,c). The spaces 
along which the flexuous branches inosculate have a depth of 
about half a line, considerably exceeding the width of the 
branches; so that whilst seven fenestrules occupy a quarter of 
an inch measured diagonally, only four occupy the same space 
measured longitudinally. The thickness of the frond, measured 
at right angles to its plane of growth, is one line or a little 
more, nearly two thirds of this being accounted for by the 
great internal keels. Lastly, there are generally three cell- 
mouths to the length of a fenestrule, with two placed opposite 
the inosculation of each pair of contiguous branches. 

The only known example of this singular species was dis- 
covered by my friend Mr. George Jennings Hinde, by whom 
it was submitted to me for examination, and in whose honour 
I have named it. 

Locality and Formation.—Corniferous Limestone, Jarvis, 


county of Walpole. 


XIL.— The Geographical Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 
By Captain F. W. Hurron, C.M.Z.S. 


[Concluded from p. 39. } 


FIsuH. 


Up tothe present time about 134 species of marine fish are 
known to inhabit the shores of New Zealand. Of these, 
51 (or 37 per cent.) are found nowhere else; 38 extend to 
the Australian and Tasmanian seas, but no further; six 
range to the Pacific islands, five inhabit South America, four 
South Africa, and one Kerguelen Land and the Auckland 
Islands ; there are also four others that are common to both 
Australia and South America, five common to Australia 
and South Africa, two common to Australia and the Pacific 
islands, and one common to Australia and the Auckland 
Islands. Thus the total number of our sea-fishes found in 
Australia is fifty, in South America and the Cape of Good 


86 Capt. F. W. Hutton on the Geographical 


Hope nine each, three (Prosopodasys cottoides, Trygon Kuhlit, 
and Ostracion Fornasint) are not found nearer than the Indian 
archipelago (the identification, however, of the latter is doubt- 
ful), and one (Halargyreus Johnsoni) has been obtained. at 
Madeira only. The remaining thirteen are widely ranging 
species. ‘These 134 species have been distributed among 114 
different genera, eleven of which are not found elsewhere. 
The connexion with Australia is here, as might be expected, 
so well marked that I need not dwell upon it, but will proceed 
to examine the affinities of New Zealand to other countries. 
Our former connexion with South America is indicated by 
Mendosoma lineata, Notothenia cornucola, Merluccius Gay?, and 
Genypterus blacodes; with South Africa by Trigla kumu, 
Gonorhynchus Grey, and Bdellostoma cirrhatum; while the 
occurrence of Gonorhynchus Greyi and Congromurena habenata 
at St. Paul’s shows that that little volcanic island was also 
probably connected. The occurrence in New Zealand of species 
belonging to the southern genera Pseudorhombus, Bovichthys, 
Agriopus, Chilodactylus, and Scorpis points to the extension of 
a former antarctic continent of which these islands formed a 
part; while Acanthurus triostegus, Dascyllus aruanus, Chanos 
salmoneus, Peltorhamphus nove-zealandie, a species of sting- 
ray allied to Trygon thalassia, and species of the genera 
Labricthys and Trachelochismus show an affinity for the islands 
of the Pacific. 

‘[ have already remarked that three of our fishes are not 
found nearer than the Indian archipelago; and it is probable 
that our species of Torpedo and Doryichthys came from that 
direction also. But a still more curious affinity to Japan is 
shown by the presence of the genera Lotella and Ditrema, and 
of another little fish (Calloptilum punctatum) which is found at 
the mouth of the river Thames, and which has its nearest 
allies in the genus Bregmaceros from China and the Philippine 
Islands. Gonorhynchus Greyti and Clupea sagax are also both 
found in Japan, but they occur in Australia as well. Our 
species of Ditrema differs from D. deve of Japan in having 
teeth on ifs palate and a band of teeth in each jaw instead of 
a single row. Platystethus cultratum, from Norfolk Island, is 
also closely allied. This connexion with China and Japan is, 
I consider, the chief point of interest in the distribution of our 
marine fish. 

In the genus Tripterygium, which is found only in the 
Mediterranean, we have an anomaly which is parallel to the 
cases of Fuligula and Mergus among the birds; and as we 
proceed we shall find many other similar cases cropping up. 

The freshwater fish naturally supply more important evi- 


Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 87 


dence as to the former distribution of land than those inhabit- 
ing the sea. Of these, New Zealand possesses fifteen species 
belonging to seven genera, of which six species, or 40 per 
cent., and one genus are found nowhere else. That the per- 
centage of the endemic freshwater fish should be nearly the 
same as that of the marine fish is a remarkable and unex- 
pected result; for the number of species of marine fish inha- 
biting New Zealand and found also in other countries de- 
pends partly on permanency of specific characters since New 
Zealand was isolated, and partly on the power possessed by 
fishes of migrating to us from other countries, while among 
the freshwater fish the proportion depends entirely on perma- 
nency of specific characters ; consequently this permanency of 
specific characters must be greater in freshwater than in salt- 
water fish ; and this is the more remarkable as our freshwater 
fish are far more variable, especially Galaxias attenuatus and 
Eleotris gobiotdes, than the marine; and Galaxias attenuatus, 
being found both in South America and in Tasmania, must 
have had a longer specific existence than any of the others. 
It is therefore evident that a great amount of variability is not 
inconsistent with great specific longevity under certain con- 
ditions. The conditions in this case are, [ believe, the absence 
of any large rapacious fish preying on the smaller variable 
ones, and thus tending to fix those varieties which are best 
adapted to elude the observation of the enemy. These condi- 
tions will soon no longer exist in our rivers, on account of the 
introduction of the trout; and I should like to draw attention 
to the fact that descriptions and figures of all the varieties of 
fish occurring now in one or more of our rivers would be a 
most valuable contribution to science as material for future 
naturalists. 

Of our freshwater fish found beyond New Zealand, Retro- 
pinna Richardsoni is found in the Chatham Islands, Galaxias 
fasciatus in both the Chatham and Auckland Islands, Galaxias 
attenuatus in the Chatham Islands, Tasmania, Patagonia, and 
South America, Galaxias olidus in Australia, Anguilla auck- 
landii in the Auckland Islands, Anguilla australis in the 
Auckland Islands, Tasmania, and Timor, Anguilla latirostris 
in the Chatham Islands, Kurope, Egypt, China, and the West 
Indies, Geotria australis in Australia, and Geotria chilensis 
in Western Australia and Chile. Thus four of our freshwater 
fish are found in the Chatham Islands and three in the Auck- 
land Islands, which are all the freshwater fish known to in- 
habit those places ; three are found in Australia, two in T'asma- 
nia, two in South America, one in the island of Timor, and one is 
spread from China to Europe and the West Indies. The Aus- 


88 Capt. F. W. Hutton on the Geographical 


tralian grayling also (Prototroctes marena), although a distinct 
species, much resembles our own (P. oxyrhynchus); and another 
closely related genus (Haplochiton) is found in South America. 

The genus Lleotris is widely spread in tropical countries. 
Its head quarters are in the Indian archipelago; and it ranges 
west to Madagascar, east to Mexico and the West Indies, 
north to Japan, and south to New Zealand, but is not found 
in Africa. The nearest ally of our species (EZ. gobiotdes) is 
E. obscura from Japan and China. 

The evidence, therefore, to be derived from the freshwater 
fish goes to prove that a close connexion has existed between 
Australia, New Zealand, and South America. The fact of 
two. species of the same genus of grayling being found in 
Australia and New Zealand respectively, while South America 
is inhabited by a closely allied but distinct genus, indicates 
either that our connexion with Australia was later than with 
South America, or that in the old continent New Zealand and 
Australia were inhabited by one, and South America by ano- 
ther species of the same family. The freshwater fish also 
prove that our connexion with the Chatham and Auckland 
Islands was much later than with Australia. The distribution 
of Anguilla latirostris, which is not found nearer than China*, 
adds its testimony to that of Lotella and Ditrema of a former 
connexion with that part of the world not by way of Australia ; 
and we shall find that this remarkable connexion with China 
and the Indian archipelago thus dimly shadowed out by the 
fishes, gets stronger and stronger as we review the invertebrate 
anunals. 

MOoLuusca. 

Of the New-Zealand Mollusca about 460 species are now 
known, of which about one half are found nowhere else. 
They show, as might be expected, a marked affinity with Aus- 
tralia, but are still very distinct. We miss Olivella, Vanikoro, 
Eutropia, Perna, Trigonia, and others; while Mitra, Colum- 
bella, Marginella, Natica, Scala, Conus, Cyprea, and Cardium 
are very feebly represented with us. On the other hand, 
Australia does not possess Buccinum; and Husus, Imperator, 
Purpura, Turritella, and Pecten are much less developed than 
in New Zealand. As, however, the affinity is decided, I shall 
here limit myself to pointing out our connexion with other 
countries. 

Of Cephalopoda we possess eleven species, only two of which 
are peculiar to New Zealand. Onychoteuthis Bartlingii, Om- 
mastrephes Sloani, Nautilus pompilius, and Argonauta nodosa 


* Dr. Giinther has lately described A. obscura, a closely allied species, 
from the Fiji Islands. 


Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 89 


are all found in the Indian Ocean, and the last two in the 
Pacific also, but none of them in Australia. 

Of marine Gasteropods and Conchifera, omitting the marine 
air-breathers, we have 830 species, about 160 of which are 
endemic. Of these, Cyclina Kréyert, Mytilus magellanicus, 
and Anomia alecto are only found in South America, as also 
is the genus Solenella. Chione mesodesma is found at Valpa- 
raiso and the Philippine Islands, Barbatia pusilla in Peru and 
Australia, Myodora ovata in the Philippines and Australia, 
Mytilus smaragdinus and Anomia cyteum in China; while we 
also have a small Cyprea, which appears to me to differ from 
C. punctata (from the Philippines) only in the absence of red 
spots. Bankivia varians is found in South Africa and Tas- 
mania. Our common pipi (Chione Stutchbury?) is found in 
Kerguelen Land; while Ranella vexillum, which is also found 
in ‘Tasmania, is closely allied to &. argus from the Cape of 
Good Hope, and to R. proditor from St. Paul’s Island. The 
genera Phorus, Rotella, and Calyptrea are found in the Phi- 
lippine Islands and China, but not in Australia. The genus 
Lyonsia, of which we possess one species, extends from Europe 
and India to the Philippine Islands and Borneo, and is also 
found in Peru and the West Indies. A few of our shells are 
almost cosmopolitan, as Lucina divaricata, Saxicava arctica, 
Crypta unguiformis, and Lima squamosa; while Nucula mar- 
garitacea inhabits Europe, Dosinia subrosea is said to have 
been found in the Persian Gulf, and the genus Solemya is 
found only in Australia and the Mediterranean. While, there- 
fore, our marine shells show a decided affinity to Australia, 
they also show a slight connexion with South Africa, Ker- 
guelen Land, St. Paul’s, and South America, and point more 
decidedly to a connexion with the Philippine Islands and 
China. 

Of land and freshwater shells, including the marine air- 
breathers, we possess 114 species, of which 97 are not found 
elsewhere. ‘These show many striking and important facts in 
distribution. Three only (felix subrugata, H. sydneyensis, 
and H. rapida) are found in Australia; and of these the second 
is so like ZZ. cellaria of Europe that it has only lately been 
distinguished from it by Dr. Cox, and is also closely allied to 
H. glaberrima from the Solomon Islands. Helix rapida is 
also found at Erromanga, one of the New Hebrides. /elix 
coniformis* inhabits the Louisiade Islands, HW. radiaria the 


* Tam indebted to His Honour T. B. Gillies for the information that 
H. coniformis, HI. radiaria, HI. subrugata, and H. vitrea inhabit New 
Zealand. Mr. Gillies collected the specimens in the northern portion of 
the province of Auckland; and they were determined by Prof. Macalister, 
of Trinity College, Dublin. 


90 Capt. F. W. Hutton on the Geographical 


Solomon Islands, and 7. vitrea the Admiralty Islands. Cass?- 
dula mustelina is found at Singapore and Pulo-Penang, and 
Amphibola avellana in New Caledonia. But the distribution 
of some of the genera is more important even than that of the 
species. Nanina spreads from India to China, the Philippines, 
Indian archipelago, and Polynesia, and is also found in Mada- 
gascar and the Mauritius, but not in Australia. -Amphibola 
extends over Australia and Polynesia to Burmah. Lymnea 
extends from Europe to India, China, and Java, and is also 
found in North America, but not in Australia. Ass¢minea 
is found in England, India, Celebes, Molucca Islands, and the 
Navigator and Friendly Islands, but not in Australia. The : 
family Ancyline, or freshwater limpets, of which we possess 
two species, is found only in North and South America, 
Europe, and Madeira; and our common slug (Milax antipo- 
darum) belongs to a genus found only in Europe and the 
island of ‘Teneriffe. Testacella, of which we also possess a 
species, is only found in Europe and Teneriffe. 

Our former connexion with Australia, however, is shown 
in the family of bitentaculate slugs (Janellide), a family which 
is found only in Australia and New Zealand—and also in the 
marine air-breathing limpets (Stphonaria), three of our species 
being foundin Australia and ‘Tasmania. 

The land and freshwater univalves therefore show a stronger 
affinity to Polynesia and the Philippine Islands, by way of 
New Caledonia, the New Hebrides, Solomon Islands, and the 
Indian archipelago, than they do to Australia, although the 
distribution of the genusJanella shows that land communication 
once existed with Australia also. To South Africa and South 
America they exhibit no special affinity. Like the birds and 
fishes, they also show a slight anomalous affinity to Europe 
without any intermediate steps. 

From the Chatham Islands eighty-two species of mollusks 
are known, of which nine appear to be peculiar to those islands ; 
the rest are all found in New Zealand, including Janella bi- 
tentaculata and Stphonaria scutulata. 

I know of two shells only from the Auckland Islands 
(Patella tlluminata and Vitrina zebra), both of which are 
endemic. 


mi eae FN ; 


MOLLUSCOIDA. 


Of Brachiopods we possess eight or nine species, of which 
two only (Kraussta Lamarckiana and Magas Cuming?) are 
found in Australia, the latter being also reported to occur in 
China. The genus Phynchonella is only known living in the 
arctic portions of North America and Japan ; but this anomaly + 


Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 91 


is not surprising when we remember that this genus existed 
during the Lower Silurian period; but it is interesting as af- 
fording us the clue by which other similar anomalies may be 
explained. 

The New-Zealand Tunicata are as yet but little known. 
The genera Ascidia, Boltenia, and Botryllus are only found in 
Europe and North America. Doliolum denticulatum is found 
at the Molucca Islands. 

Of the Polyzoa I am acquainted with eighty-nine species, 
of which thirty-one have been found nowhere else as yet ; but 
it is probable that their range is very imperfectly known. 
Twenty-three of our species are found in European seas, while 
the intervening tropical seas appear to be almost destitute of 
this form of life. The chief point of interest in our Polyzoa 
is the great development of the massive species of Cellepora 
and of the coral-like family Idmoneide, which recall to mind 
the crag formation of England. Indeed one of our species, 
Hornera striata, is found fossil in the Crag; it is, however, 
also found fossil at Oraki, near Auckland, in beds of still older 
date. Considering how little attention has been paid to our 
Polyzoa, the number of known species indicates a rich fauna ; 
and, indeed, the entire class seems to be more abundant in the 
southern than in the opposite hemisphere, and, like the petrels, 
contains many forms quite unrepresented in the north. 


INSECTA. 


No New-Zealand naturalist who has collected insects on 
however small a scale in Europe can, I think, fail to be struck 
with the paucity in New Zealand, not only of species, but, in 
some orders, of individuals also. It is remarkable that in this 
country, whose indigenous warm-blooded animals are limited 
to birds and bats, on entering the bush, instead of finding the 
masses of decaying wood and leaves swarming with life, we 
find hardly a living creature*, while at the same time we are 
attacked by myriads of bloodthirsty mosquitos (Culea acer). 
It would certainly seem that abundance of food does not pro- 
duce abundance of individuals in some orders (e. g. Coleoptera) ; 
neither does an absolute dearth of food in the ¢mago state pre- 
vent the increase of individuals in others (e.g. Diptera). The 
swarms of sand-flies (Simulium cecutiens), also, that greet us 
on the coast from the North Cape to the Bluff, where could 
they possibly have found food before the advent of man ? 
Where, indeed, do they find it now in sufficient quantities ? 


* My experience in this respect in New Zealand is very different from 
that of Mr. Wallace in Singapore and Borneo, but similar to his in Celebes 
and Ceram. 


92 Capt. F. W. Hutton on the Geographical 


Of beetles about 200 species inhabiting the land are 
described, the whole of which, I believe, are found nowhere 
else. These species are distributed into about 110 genera, of 
which about 35 are peculiar to New Zealand. A remarkable 
contrast to this is shown in the water-beetles, of which four 
only are known, two (Cybister Hookert and Colymbetes rufi- 
manus) being, I believe, endemic, and the other two (Colymbetes 
notatus and Gyrinus natator) being found in Britain. The 
genera best represented are, Hlater with twelve, Keronia with 
eight, Mecodema with nine, Xylololes with seven, Cicindela 
with six, Anchomenus and Maoria with five each, and Coptoma 
with four species. Few beetles can be called abundant; the 
little green species (Pyronota festiva) so destructive to our 
fruit-trees, and a small brown species (Colaspis brunnea), 
common on the manuka (Leptospermum) in December and 
January, are perhaps the only two that deserve the epithet, 
although many can be called common. ‘The beetles as a whole 
are, according to Mr. Pascoe, most closely allied to those of 
Australia. 

The Hymenoptera are very poorly represented, about 
eighteen species only being as yet known. All are, I believe, 
endemic. Most of the genera are widely spread; but Orecto- 
gnathus and Dasycolletes are peculiar to New Zealand. ‘The 
poorness of our fauna in this order cannot be owing to un- 
suitableness of climate; for the honey-bee (Apis mellifica), 
which was introduced about thirty years ago, has spread over 
both islands *. 

The Diptera are more numerous than the Hymenoptera, 
sixty species being known. This is just opposite to what 
obtains in most countries, including Australia and South 
America. Of these, Z¢pula senex is found in Australia, Musca 
tattienstis in Polynesia, and Musca lemica in both Australia 
and Polynesia. Although most nearly allied to Australia, our 
dipterous fauna must have been derived from other localities 
as well; for the genus Diphysa occurs only in Mexico and 
Brazil, Actiéna in Europe, Cenosia and Sapromyza in Kurope 
and North America, and Opomyza in Europe and the Mauri- 
tius. No genus is endemic. Of the earwigs we possess one 
endemic species (orficula littorea), found only near the sea- 
shore. 

Of the Lepidoptera I know hardly any thing, and _ prefer 
waiting until Mr. Fereday has published his promised descrip- 
tions of the species before examining their bearing on the 
present subject. But one fact stands out prominently, viz. 


* Mr. W. T. L. Travers informs me that the honey-bee was introduced 
into Nelson in 1842, and that wild bees were common in 1850, 


s 
, 
4 
f 


Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. — 93 


that out of more than three hundred species only eight belong 
to the butterfly section (Fereday, Trans. N. Z. Inst. iv. p. 217), 
and several of these are world-wide stragglers. 

Of Neuroptera about fifteen species are known. Of these, 
Perla opposita is found in ‘Tasmania, and our representative 
of the white ants (Calotermes ‘nsularis) in Australia. This 
order appears to have more affinity with Tasmania than with 
Australia; and it is remarkable that the wide-spread genus 
Perla, which is found throughout North and South America, 
and from Europe through India to China and Japan, is also 
found in New Zealand aud Tasmania, but not in Australia. 
Leptocerus has also the same range, with the exception of not 
being known in China and Japan. Hermes extends from 
India to China and Java; it is also found in tropical Africa 
and South America, but not in Australia or Tasmania. 
Palingenia is found in Europe, India, North Africa, and 
North and South America, while Philanisus is peculiar to 
New Zealand. The Heteroptera are remarkable for their 
fragmentary character and wide distribution, The thirteen 
known species belong to thirteen different genera and nine 
families. Arma Schellenbergii is found in Australia and the 
Philippine Islands, Cermatulus nasalis in Australia and 
Tasmania, Platycoris immarginatus and Rhaphigaster Amyote 
in Australia, Lygeus pacificus in Australia, Tasmania, and 
India, and Nysius zelandicus in Tasmania—thus leaving not 
more than seven endemic species, three of which have not yet 
been properly examined, and may therefore be found to be 
identical with species inhabiting other countries. One of the 
endemic species (hopalimorpha obscura), however, belongs 
to a genus found nowhere else. 

In strong contrast to this stand the Homoptera, which in- 
clude nineteen species, all endemic and belonging to two 
genera only, Cicada having twelve and Cixius seven species. 

The number of species of Orthoptera I do not know ; but in 
comparison with other orders it is well represented by both 
winged and wingless members; and the genera, as a rule, con- 
tain several species. 

Whilst, therefore, the insect fauna as a whole shows its 
greatest affinity towards Australia, it also exhibits a connexion 
with other countries, more especially China and Europe. 
But the most remarkable fact is the great difference shown in 
this respect by the different orders. Whilst the Diptera, 
Neuroptera, Homoptera, and Orthoptera present the appear- 
ance, in part at least, of an old fauna, the Heteroptera are 
nearly all stragglers; and this strongly suggests the inference 
that at the time of the spreading of the former orders the 

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 8 


94 Capt. F. W. Hutton on the Geographical 


Heteroptera were not in existence. The same thing is seen 
in the difference between the moths and the butterflies, sug- 
gesting also that the latter were developed at a later period than 
the former; and there can be no doubt that when our insects 
are better known a careful comparison of them with similar 
faunas of other countries will afford a most instructive lesson. 

With the exception of the Indian (Blatta orientalis) and 
American (B. americana) cockroaches, neither of which are 
common, the flea (Pulex irritans), the bed-bug (Cimea lectu- 
larius), several Aphides, the slugworm (Zenthredo cerast), 
and the house-fly (Musca domestica), | am not aware of any 
insect that has been introduced unintentionally by man 
during the progress of colonization; for the ring-legged 
mosquito, which is supposed in Auckland to have been intro- 
duced by the troops from India, belongs to a species (Culea 
argyropus) not found elsewhere, and was sent home by Dr. 
Sinclair before the troops arrived. The only exceptions may 
perhaps be :—the black field-cricket, which, although inhabit- 
ing fields with us, and but rarely entering houses, appears to be 
identical with the house-cricket of Europe (Acheta domestica) 
and to have spread quite lately; and also a small dark-brown 
beetle belonging to the genus Hlater, which is abundant in 
Auckland, but, to the best of my knowledge, is not found 
more than twenty miles out of that town. 


MyYRIOPODA. 


Of Centipedes nine or ten species are now known, all of 
which are endemic. The genus Lithobius extends from North 
America, Europe, and North Africa to Singapore, but is not 
found in Australia ; Henicops is found only in Chili and Tas- 
mania, Cryptops only in North America and England; while 
Cermatia and Cormocephalus have wider ranges and are both 
found in Australia. 

ARACHNIDA. 


Of Spiders we have about 100 species; but my knowledge 
of them is very limited. Mr. Pickard Cambridge, in a letter 
to me, remarks, “all the spiders you now send [from the 
Auckland province], except one or two, are strikingly Euro- 
pean in appearance, nothing tropical-looking among them.” 
Perhaps the most remarkable fact is the occurrence in the 
Chatham Islands of a species of water-spider (Argyroneta), of 
which only one other species, inhabiting Europe, is known. 
Spiders are very numerous in New Zealand, owing no doubt 
to the abundance of Diptera, on which order they chiefly prey. 


CRUSTACEA. 
Of Crustaceans 106 species have been described as coming 


Oe “et ee 


a 


es Oe MS 


CPT Ce te dS tpl Me 


Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 95 


from New Zealand ; but my knowledge of this class also is at 
por very limited. Professor Dana has remarked that New 

ealand has a greater resemblance to Great Britain in its 
Crustacea than to any other part of the world ; but our common 
salt-water crayfish (Palinurus Lalandit) is found at the Cape 
of Good Hope and the Island of St. Paul. 


ANNELIDA. 


Our marine Annelids have up to the present been almost 
entirely neglected. Of terrestrial forms we have two species 
of earthworm (Luwmbricus) and a member of the peculiar genus 
Pertpatus, found only in South America, the bape of Good 
Hope, and the West Indies. 


SCOLECIDA. 


The most remarkable fact in this class is the occurrence of 
two or three species of land-Planarians, the so-called “ land- 
leeches,” one or two of which belong to the genus Bipaliwm, 
found only in India, China, and Japan. 


ECHINODERMATA. 


Of Echmoderms we have seventeen species of starfish, 
eight sea-urchins, and eight Holothurians. Of these, twelve 
starfish, six sea-urchins, and all the holothurians appear to be 
endemic. Of the others, Ophionereds fasciata is found at the 
Chatham Islands, Pentagonaster pulchellus at the Chatham 
Islands and in China, Othilia luzonica in the Philippine 
Islands and Vera Cruz; while we also possess species ap- 
parently identical with Astropecten armatus of South America 
and Henricia oculata of Europe. It is worthy of special 
remark that although Australia possesses several species of 
Pentagonaster, the Chinese species is not found there; so that 
it must have migrated to us direct, and not have come wd 
Australia. We also possess a species of Pteraster, a genus 
found only in South Africa and northern seas. Of the sea- 
urchins, Cidaris tubaria and Echinobrissus recens are both 
found in Australia ; but the latter appears to be very rare in 
New Zealand, as I have only seen one specimen, which is in 
the Colonial Museum. 


CaLENTERATA and PROTOZOA. 


Of these very little is known. Our seven species of corals 
are all peculiar, as also appear to be many species of Sertula- 
rians and sponges ; but I know of no facts among these lower 
animals that will help out the present investigation, except in 
the case of Cryptolaria, a genus belonging to the family Ser- 

Qk 


96 Capt. F. W. Hutton on the Geographical 


tulariide, and consisting of two species—one of which is found 
in New Zealand, and the other in Madeira. 


SUMMARY. 


If now we review the evidence adduced, and select the more 
important points, we find in the distribution of the Struthious 
birds, the frogs, freshwater fishes, several shells (such as 
Cyclina Kréyert, Mytilus magellanicus, Anomia alecto, Bar- 
batia pusilla, Chione Stutchburyt, and Ranella vewillum), in 
the genus Henicops among the Centipedes, and Peripatus 
among the Annelids, evidence of a former great extension of 
land in the southern hemisphere; for these cases cannot all 
be accounted for by drifting icebergs. With the exception of 
the shells and two freshwater fishes, no species, however, is 
common to New Zealand and South America on the one hand, 
nor to New Zealand and South Africa on the other; for I omit 
from consideration the species of marine fish, as they might 
perhaps have crossed at a later date. In the frogs the genera, 
and in the birds the families are different. This perhaps in- 
dicates a very long interval since the separation of these 
countries took place; but differentiation of form, even in 
closely allied species, is evidently a very fallacious guide in 
judging of lapse of time, and a surer one is afforded us in the 
absence of Mammalia from New Zealand ; for it is evident that 
if the marsupials that now inhabit Australia, or the placental 
mammals that inhabit South America, had been in existence 
at the time of the distribution of the Struthious birds, some 
members would have found their way to New Zealand, and 
would have remained upon it with the moas. This antarctic 
continental period must therefore have preceded the spread of 
the Mammalia into the southern hemisphere. Besides this 
continental period we have evidence in Hudynamis taitiensis, 
Naultinus pacificus, Amphibola avellana, Musca taitiensts, and 
in the genera Ocydromus and Nestor, of a Polynesian conti- 
nent quite unconnected with Australia, but including Lord- 
Howe Island, Norfolk Island, and New Caledonia; while by 
Helix coniformis, H. rapida, H. radiaria and H. vitrea we 
can prove a close connexion with the New Hebrides, Solomon 
Islands, Louisiade archipelago, and the Admiralty Islands, 
By Nanina among land-shells and Asstminea among fresh- 
water shells, we prove a connexion also with the Navigator 
and Friendly Islands ; and these genera take us north through 
the Molucca Islands, Celebes, Borneo, and the Philippines to 
China, where we again come across many New-Zealand species 
and genera. ‘he most important are :—Ditrema, Torpedo, 
and Anguilla latirostris among fishes; Mytilus smaragdinus, 
Phorus, Rotella, Calyptrea, Cassidula mustelina, Lymnea, and 


Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 97 


Lthynchonella among shells ; Perla and Hermes among insects ; 
Lithobius among centipedes ; Bipalium among the Scolecida ; 
and Pentagonaster pulchellus and Othilia luzonica among the 
starfish,—none of these, it must be remembered, being found 
in Australia. The absence of Mammalia, however, in New 
Zealand shows that this line of communication was never con- 
tinuous land; but the absence from Australia of the forms that 
I have mentioned shows that the connexion along the whole 
line was closer at every point than it was with that continent ; 
and this leads to the further conclusion that this line of com- 
munication existed at a later date than the connexion of New 
Zealand with Australia. 

The close relationship of the Chatham and Auckland 
Islands in all their natural productions to New Zealand, and 
the far greater difference between New Zealand and the islands 
more to the north, as well as the large number of species of 
moa lately inhabiting these islands, show that another and 
smaller continent, or perhaps a large island, existed at a still 
later period, but has since subsided ; and this must bring us 
nearly to the recent period, or the difference between New 
Zealand and the Chatham Islands would be greater. 

The geographical distribution, therefore, of the New-Zealand 
fauna points to the following conclusions :— 

1. A continental period, during which South America, New 
Zealand, Australia, and South Africa were all connected, al- 
though it is not necessary that all should have been connected at 
the same time ; but New Zealand must have been isolated from 
all before the spread of the mammals ; and from that time to the 
present it has never been completely submerged. This con- 
tinent was inhabited by Struthious birds and by Hymenolai- 
mus, Notornis, Hinulia, Mocoa, Galaxias, Prototroctes, Lio- 
pelma, Janella, Amphibola, Henicops, and Peripatus, and 
further to the north by Megapodius—and probably also by 
many forms peculiar to New Zealand, such as Strigops, 
Keropia, Xenicus, Heteralocha, Anarhynchus, Naultinus, &c. 
Of course in mentioning these names I do not mean that all 
the forms were the same then as now, but that the ancestors 
of these genera lived on the old antarctic continent. 

2. Subsidence followed; and the evidence then points to a 
second continent stretching from New Zealand to Lord-Howe 
Island and New Caledonia, and extending for an unknown 
distance into Polynesia, but certainly not so far as the Sand- 
wich Islands. ‘The fact of mammals being found in the New 
Hebrides, Solomon Islands, and New Ireland shows that be- 
tween New Caledonia and the New Hebrides a narrow strait 
must have existed cutting off land communication ; but these 
were connected with China, either directly or by a chain of 


98 Capt. F. W. Hutton on the Geographical 


islands. This second continent received from the north those 
forms already enumerated, together probably with Sphenwacus, 
the rails, and the starlings; at the same time it received from 
Australia the honey-eaters, Certhiparus, Gerygone, Petroica, 
Rhipidura, and others, and from that time to the present has 
been occasionally receiving additional birds. It will also be 
noticed that very few of the birds of the middle paleeotropical 
region came down this line of communication, no pheasants, 
woodpeckers, grackles, or finches; while Australia, in its 
wood-swallows (Artamus), pittas, quails, and numerous finches, 
shows now some affinity to this region. This can be best ex- 
plained by supposing that the New-Zealand line of communi- 
cation was broken up before these birds came into existence, 
and that further changes have since taken place in the lines of 
easiest communication ; indeed the fact of such forms as the 
elephant, tiger, and bear being found in Sumatra and Borneo, 
marsupials in Celebes, the Moluccas, Solomon Islands, and 
New Hebrides, and the presence of an emu in New Guinea, 
and a cassowary in Australia, prove that changes in the dis- 
tribution of land have since taken place ; but it is foreign to 
the object of this paper to speculate on these here. This 
second continent was also inhabited by most of the orders of 
insects, although perhaps not in great abundance; but He- 
teroptera and the butterfly section of the Lepidoptera were 
absent. 

3. Subsidence again followed, and New Zealand was re- 
duced for a long time to a number of islands, upon many of 
which the moa lived. This was followed by— 

4, Elevation: these islands were connected and a large 
island existed disconnected from Polynesia. This was once 
more followed by— 

5. Subsidence; and the geography of this part of the world 
assumed somewhat of its present form. 


GEOLOGICAL EVIDENCE. 


Such are, I think, the deductions that may be fairly drawn 
from a study of our fauna. It remains now to examine the 
geological and paleontological evidence, and see whether it 
agrees with that derived from zoology, and then to try to fix 
with as much accuracy as possible the dates of the principal 
movements of the earth’s surface which have gradually led to 
the present state of the New-Zealand fauna. 

Hardly any thing is yet known of the paleozoic rocks of 
New Zealand. ‘The earliest fossil shells described are almost 
identical with those living in Europe during the Triassic 
period; but the only known plant is Dammara australis 


» 
Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 99 


(Hochstetter’s ‘ New Zealand,’ p. 57), a genus still living in 
New Zealand, but also found in Australia, New Caledonia, 
New Hebrides, Fiji, and the Indian archipelago. 

An interval then occurs; and the next formation probably 
belongs to the Jurassic period. In this we find Belemnites 
aucklandicus, which can hardly be distinguished from B. ca- 
naliculatus, and Astarte wollumbillaensis. The ferns, too, 
found so plentifully near Port Waikato, in the Clent hills, at 
the Mataura, and at Waikawa harbour are considered by Pro- 
fessor M‘Coy to be identical with Australian ferns from the 
same formation. At the close of this period movements on an 
extensive scale commenced in New Zealand; the land was up- 
heaved, and an extensive mountain-chain formed. A long 
blank now occurs in our geological record (see Geol. Reports, 
1872, p. 105), the next formation belonging to quite the 
uppermost part of the Secondary epoch, later, I believe, than 
the white chalk of England. In it we find remains of dicoty- 
ledonous plants and large Saurians belonging to the genera 
Crocodilus? and Plestosaurus. Here, also, we tind three fossil 
shells (Dentalium majus, Lucina americana, and Cucullea 
alta) similar to those found in South America, one of which, 
Lucina americana, is found in the Lower Cretaceous rocks of 
Tierra del Fuego, and the other two in the Miocene formations 
of Patagonia and Chile—thus showing that during this blank 
in our geological record an intimate connexion had existed be- 
tween New Zealand and South America. The disposition, 
however, of these beds shows that the New-Zealand Alps were 
not submerged. A long interval now follows, during which 
New Zealand was again upheaved; and the next rocks that 
we find are of Upper Eocene date (Geol. Reports, 1872, 
p. 182). From that time until the close of the Miocene period 
New Zealand was greatly depressed and divided into several 
islands; but at the close of the Miocene period it was once 
more upheaved. During this period we find several South- 
American Miocene shells not met with in the older formation, 
as well as several Australian ones. During the Newer Plio- 
cene period it again subsided, and the Wanganui beds were 
deposited. From that time I can see no evidence of the land 
having ever stood at a higher level than it does at present ; 
but as the later changes in the physical geography of New 
Zealand have a most important bearing on the present condi- 
tion of its fauna, beyond the scope of my present inquiry, I pro- 
pose treating the subject in a separate paper*. The geological 
evidence is therefore that since the Jurassic period there have 

* Vide On the Date of the last Great Glacier Period in New Zealand” 
(Trans. New-Zealand Institute, vol. v.). 


* 
100 Capt. F. W. Hutton on the Geographical 


been three principal upheavals in New Zealand, in the Lower 
Cretaceous, Lower Eocene, and Older Pliocene periods respec- 
tively, and that these were divided by two insular periods, 
viz. during the Upper Secondary (Danian) and from the com- 
mencement of the Upper Eocene to the close of the Miocene, 
thus agreeing completely with the zoological evidence. 

The dates assigned by the geological evidence also agree 
well with those derived trom zoology. We have seen that it 
is necessary to suppose that the first great antarctic continental 
period was anterior to the date of the spread of the mammals 
southwards. Nowa few marsupials are known in the Triassic 
period; but it is quite possible either that they spread very 
slowly, or that barriers existed that prevented any southward 
migration. In the Eocene period, however, some placental 
mammals were in existence, although marsupials (not of Aus- 
tralian types however) still formed in Europe the principal 
mammalian life ; and if the supposed barriers to a southward 
migration were still in existence, we know, from what hap- 
pened in the northern hemisphere, that the whole, or nearly 
the whole, of the marsupials would be exterminated. The 
marsupials, therefore, must have migrated south not later 
than the Eocene period; and as we know that our connexion 
with Australia and South America must have been before that 
migration, it follows that the first, or Lower Cretaceous, period 
of upheaval must have been the time of the antarctic continent. 
This is rendered still more probable by the fact that our 
Jurassic fossils show a connexion with Australia only, while 
our Upper Secondary fossils show for the first time a relation 
to South America. The fact, too, of the Cretaceo-Oolitic 
rocks of Tierra del Fuego having been largely disturbed, 
metamorphosed, and broken through by dykes of greenstone, 
shows that extensive elevatory movements have taken place 
there also since they were deposited. It is therefore to the 
Lower Cretaceous period that we must probably look for the 
time of the dispersion of the Struthious birds. With regard 
to the date of the second or Polynesian continental period, the 
only zoological evidence we have is that it probably preceded 
the wide dispersion of the Hemiptera and the butterfly section 
of the Lepidoptera. This, therefore, could not have been later 
than the Eocene; for a fossil butterfly (Vanessa pluto) has 
been found in the Lower Miocene deposits of Radaboj in 
Croatia, and fossil Heteroptera in the Miocene beds of iningen 
in Switzerland. ‘The elevation during the Lower Eocene 
period was therefore probably the one which formed the con- 
tinent that I have described as including New Caledonia-and 
some of the Pacific islands. At this period probably Northern 


Relations of the New-Zealand Fauna. 101 


Australia was submerged, and the southern portions of Aus- 
tralia and Tasmania formed one large island; while New 
Guinea, including the Solomon Islands and New Hebrides on 
the south and the Molucca Islands on the north, formed an- 
other large island, divided from the New-Zealand island or 
continent by the straits between New Caledonia and the 
New Hebrides. 

This was the time of the migration from China southwards ; 
and it is worthy of notice that at the same time a large ocean 
existed from Southern Europe to China, in which the nummu- 
litic limestone was being deposited. Would it be too bold to 
speculate that it was along the shores of this ocean that those 
fish, crustaceans, and shells migrated which are now found in 
the North Atlantic or Mediterranean on the one hand, and in 
China or Japan on the other, but not on the southern shores 
of Asia, and that the anomalous distribution of European 
forms of fish, shells, &c. in New Zealand may be traced to the 
same route? This same period of sea communication between 
Europe and Japan will also probably have been the time of 
the land connexion that once existed between India, Madagas- 
ear, and Africa (the Lemuria of Dr. Sclater), as proved by the 
recent freshwater fish and birds, as well as by the Miocene 
mammalia*; and to this period we may also refer the origin 
of the curious affinity between some of the birds of Celebes and 
Africa. The long insular period during the Upper Eocene 
and Miocene times will therefore be the period of specific 
change in the moas, while the Older Pliocene upheaval will be 
the time of the mingling of the various species in New Zealand 
and the peopling of the Chatham and Auckland Islands. The 
Newer Pliocene was the time when the two islands of New 
Zealand were divided, and also the period when the Chatham 
and Auckland Islands were separated from them; but the 
latter occurrence probably preceded the former by a long 
interval. 

Such appears to me to be the hypothesis most capable of 
accounting for the present fauna of New Zealand. 

The objection, however, may be fairly raised that, if it is 
true, evidence of its truth ought to be also found in the flora 
of the country, which is not the case. I fully acknowledge 
the force of this argument, but think that some slight evidence 
can be found in the phenogamic flora. The distribution of 


* Professor Huxley thinks (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1870, Ann. Ad- 
dress, p. 56) that the land communication between India and South 
Africa was caused by the upheaval of the nummulitic sea; but it seems 
to me more probable that the land communication was by the shores of 
that sea. 


102 Mr. F. Bates on New Genera 


Eucalyptus, for instance, is somewhat parallel to that of the 
marsupials, and can be only explained in the same way. 
Stilbocarpa polaris has its nearest allies in China and the 
Himalaya Mountains; while the distribution of Metrosideros, 
Ligusticum, Angelica, and, perhaps, Veronica implies a con- 
nexion between New Zealand and Asia not by way of Aus- 
tralia. This connexion is obscured by the great preponder- 
ance of Australian and South-American forms, but still fur- 
nishes an indistinct copy of the bolder outline sketched out by 
the fauna. This is owing to the wider distribution of genera 
among plants than among animals; and to me it appears to 
prove that the flora of a country, as a whole, is of a more ancient 
date than its fauna. Among the cryptogamic plants no trace 
of this outline can be discerned, as also is the case with the 
lower classes of the animal kingdom, owing to the genera 
having been, so to say, universally spread before the last mi- 
gration from Asia took place. 

That the facies of a fauna and flora should date back from 
so long a period as I suppose, is certainly at variance with or- 
dinarily received opinion ; but from a study of the fauna and 
geology of New Zealand I do not see how we can escape from 
the conclusions that I have arrived at. I am well aware, 
however, that much more has to be done in the geology and 
natural history not only of our own islands, but also of the sur- 
rounding countries, before they can be considered satisfacto- 
rily proved; but I think that it will be easier afterwards to 
prove this hypothesis, or to disprove it and point out a more 
correct one, than it would be to detect it if the discussion had 
been postponed to a future period, when the more salient points 
will probably be obscured by the mass of facts which will then 
have accumulated. Such, at least, is my hope; but whether 
I am mistaken or not I leave others to judge. 


XIV.—Descriptions of New Genera and Species of Heteromera, 
chiefly from New Zealand and New Caledonia, together with 
a Revision of the Genus Hypaulax and a Description of an 
allied New Genus from Colombia. By FREDERICK BATES. 


[Concluded from p. 24, ] 
Tirana, Erichson. 


For the better understanding of the two new genera that 
follow it is necessary to add to the published descriptions of 
the genus 7itena as follows :—Prosternum narrow and very 


and Species of Heteromera. 103 


abruptly elevated between the coxe, a little concave in front 
of them, the extreme anterior portion always distinctly hori- 
zontal: prothorax very convex, slightly but distinctly rounded 
at the sides, lobed at the middle of the base, and very strongly 
and deeply punctured : lateral reflexed margins of the elytra 
distinctly continued along the basal margin up to the scutellum: 
the punctuation of the surface more or less irregular, with the 
interstices more or less strongly, transversely, and reticulately 
rugose ; and the body is ordinarily distinctly pilose. 


Titena columbina, Exichson. 


The colour in this species varies from purple to green, the 
front margin of prothorax and sutural edging of elytra being 
ordinarily of some shade of green ; sometimes, however, it is 
coppery, golden, greenish cyaneous, &c.; the reflexed lateral 
margins are generally (except at the apex) of the same colour 
as the sides of the elytra; the legs are of a more or less dark 
piceous, sometimes with a green tinge. The head and prothorax 
are more or less closely covered with deep punctures, the latter 
slightly but distinctly rounded at the sides; the elytra are 
rather strongly punctured, with a disposition to a seriate 
arrangement; the intervals distinctly transversely and some- 
what reticulately rugose ; and the body is distinctly pilose. 

Length 43-53 lines. 

Hab, Australia; generally distributed. Hight examples 
in my collection. 

Var. ? virida. 

Smaller (43 lines). Head and prothorax bronzed green: 
elytra dark green, without distinct sutural edging, except 
slightly towards the apex: underside and legs piceous: 
flanks and sides of abdomen covered with large, round, deep 
punctures: prothorax distinctly broadest in front; the angles 
very distinct, slightly produced; sides distinctly and slightly 
curvedly narrowed from before the middle to the hind angles ; 
median basal lobe more produced behind, and the punctuation 
more regular. 


Hab. Melbourne. One example. 


Titena pulchra, n. sp. 

Near 7. columbina. Very thinly pilose: head broadly 
rounded in front ; epistoma short, convex, and, together with 
the antennary orbits, pitchy red, the suture moderately im- 
pressed ; rest of the head and the prothorax bronzed green, 
the punctuation as in 7’. columbina : elytra dark bronzed green, 
the base and sides (partly) golden green; the suture with a 


104 Mr. F. Bates on New Genera 


stripe of dark bluish green, then a narrower stripe of purple, 
then a broad stripe of golden green gradually deepening into 
the dark bronzed green of the rest of the elytra; reflexed 
lateral margins metallic purple; punctuation more regular 
and less numerous than in 7. columbina; the punctures 
distinctly arranged in lines and somewhat close-set ; the in- 
tervals with a row of similar but more distant (about one to 
three) punctures; the intervals are also distinctly less rugose 
than in T. columbina: underside tinged with green; flanks 
and sides of abdomen moderately punctured ; legs castaneous ; 
palpi and antenne paler. 

Length 34 lines. 

Hab. New South Wales. One example. 


Titena alcyonea, Krichson. 


Easily to be distinguished from either of the preceding by the 
body not distinctly pilose. The head and prothorax black, with- 
out any metallic tinge, very closely and evenly punctured (almost 
cellulose-punctate) : the elytra more densely punctured; the 
larger punctures arranged in lines, with smaller but equally 
close-set punctures on the intervals; the intervals are more 
decidedly (especially near the base) rugose even than in T. 
columbina, and are at the apex united and distinctly costiform ; 
the colour is dark green, with dark purplish reflections, the 
suture towards the apex being golden green with purplish re- 
flections; the lateral reflexed margins are brilliant metallic 
purple: the epistoma is longer and the antennary orbits much 
more prominent than in 7. pulchra; in both they are pitchy 
ted: underside piceous; legs castaneous; antenne and palpi 
paler. 

Length 34-4} lines. 

Hab. Albany, West Australia. Three examples in my 
collection. 


Var. rujicollis. 


Prothorax dull red ; epipleural fold and underside yellowish. 
Hab, Albany. One example. 


ARTYSTONA, n. g. 


Differs from Tvtena in the prosternum less strongly and 
abruptly elevated between the coxee, not distinctly concave in 
front of them, the anterior horizontal portion longer; the head 
consequently is less deeply imbedded in the prothorax, and 
does not repose on the front cox. Prothorax squarer, less 
convex, truncated at base and apex, more or less finely 


and Species of Heteromera. 105 


punctured. Lateral reflexed margins of the elytra distinctly 
terminating at the humeral angle; the punctuation of the 
surface of the elytra is in rows of fine punctures, the intervals 
being convex, interrupted, and forming, especially at apex, 
series of oblong tubercles. Legs longer and (especially the 
tarsi) more slender. Body not pilose. 


Artystona Erichsoni, White (Titena). 


The Titena interrupta, Redtenb., must be referred to this 
species, the type specimens of which are in my collection. 

The head is remotely punctured ; the prothorax more closely 
punctured, with the interstices quite smooth. 

Hab. New Zealand. Three examples in my collection. 


Artystona Wakefieldi, n. sp. 


Readily to be distinguished from A. Hrichsont by the colour 
entirely of a dark shining brown; the head and prothorax 
much more closely and rugosely punctured; and, as a secondary 
character, the intervals on the elytra (especially at sides and 
apex) are more strongly interrupted and more distinctly tuber- 
culiform. 

Length 5 lines. 

Hab. New Zealand. Five examples. 


Examples of this species in Doué’s collection were labelled 
“ Strongylium volvulum, Klug.” . 


Artystona rugiceps, n. sp. 


Of the same colour as the preceding, but smaller; form 
decidedly less parallel; eyes narrower, appearing outwardly 
conical when viewed from above, a distinct space between 
their upper margin (which is entire) and the antennary orbits ; 
these latter very convex, subangulately rounded : head much 
more strongly rugosely punctured; the punctures larger, 
rounder, and deeper; punctures on prothorax not more 
numerous than in A. Wakefieldi, but larger, rounder, and 
deeper ; the interstices not at all rugulose: elytra sculptured 
as in the preceding, but the form is elongate-oval, 

Length 33-4} lines. 

Hab. New Zealand. Seven examples. 

This is the species dispensed by Dr. Schaufuss under the 
name of “‘HHelops ? porcatus.” 


CALLISMILAX, n. g. 
Differs from Titena in the prosternum being vertical and 


106 Mr. F. Bates on New Genera 


widely concave in front, direct from the anterior border, and 
much wider (and usually concave) between the coxe; the 
process wider, more or less horizontal, and frequently widely 
concave or excavated down its length, with the lateral margins 
upturned, the end more or less prominent and broadly rounded 
or truncated. The prothorax moderately convex, subquadrate, 
wider at base than at apex, broadly rounded or lobed at base, 
and always more or less finely punctured. The reflexed 
lateral margins of the elytra distinctly terminate at the humeral 
angle ; the punctuation of the surface of the elytra is ordinarily 
fine, distinctly seriate or not, the intervals more or less flat ; 
sometimes, however, the punctuation is more or less foveate, 
the intervals more or less convex and confluent. The body is 
not pilose; the form is varied, but never so cylindric as in 
Titena. The eyes above are sometimes rather narrow and 
oblique; the convexity of the elytra, the stoutness of the legs, 
the length of the tarsi, &c. are also subject to specific variation. 

The form of the prosternum and the totally different style 
of sculpture on the elytra will at once serve to distinguish this 
genus from Artystona. 


Callismilax enea, Montrouz. (Strongylium). 


Elliptic. Entirely of a brilliant brassy green above. Head 
and prothorax finely, clearly, and not very closely punctured ; 
the latter distinctly emargiate in front; the angles slightly 
prominent, distinctly broader at base than at apex; sides 
slightly incurved from the front to the hind angles: elytra 
finely and irregularly punctured, the larger punctures mani- 
festing a disposition to a seriate arrangement, especially at the 
sides and towards the apex; punctuation obsolete at apex; 
intervals shortly costiform at apex: underside bronzed green ; 
legs rather stout, steel-blue or violet; intercoxal process sparsely 
punctured : eyes above subrotundate: prosternal process sub- 
horizontal, feebly rugulosely punctured, broadly and obliquely 
concave or excavated; the sides upturned, and angulate 
between the coxee: mesosternum a little declivous and arcuately 
concave in front. 

Length 5 lines ; width of elytra across the middle 22 lines. 

Hab. New Caledonia. Two examples, obtained from 
Doué’s collection. 


Callismilax venusta, n. sp. 


A little smaller and more parallel than C. enea. Head and 
prothorax deep black, finely and closely punctured and rugu- 
lose ; the punctures distinctly more numerous and less strongly 


and Species of Heteromera. 107 


impressed than in C. e@nea, and the prothorax decidedly more 
convex: epistoma very short: head very strongly impressed 
across the base of the epistoma: prothorax subquadrate, less 
distinctly emarginate in front than in C. enea; sides sub- 
parallel, a little wider at base than at apex : elytra of a beautiful 
metallic purple, metallic green at the base and at the extreme 
apex, and with an irregular, outwardly curved, transverse me- 
tallic-green band behind the middle ; lateral reflexed margins 
metallic purple, except at the apex, where they are metallic 
green: punctuation nearly as in C. enea, but a little closer 
and shallower: underside and legs pitchy black, without any 
metallic tinge or colour; intercoxal process more closely 
punctured than in C. wnea; legs rather stout: eyes above 
rather narrow, oblique: prosternal process bent down behind 
the coxe, coarsely rugose-punctate, obliquely impressed at 
each side and along the base, which is broadly truncated ; 
mesosternum declivous, and but slightly concave in front. 
Length 5 lines; width of elytra across the middle 2 lines. 
Hab. New Caledonia. One example. 


Callismilax Mulsanti, Montrouzier (Strongylium). 


Very near the preceding, but distinctly narrower, more 
parallel or cylindric. The head and prothorax with a distinct 
bluish tinge ; the punctuation on the latter more open and 
distinct, not rugulose ; epistoma a little longer, the transverse 
impression at base of epistoma less strongly impressed : elytra 
metallic green, with the base and apex metallic purple, each 
with eight very distinct rows of punctures ; the intervals finely 
and not closely punctulate, and costiform at the apex: under- 
side of a bluish green; intercoxal process more strongly but 
not more closely punctured; legs rather stout, steel-blue; 
eyes broader and less oblique ; prosternal process subhorizontal, 
nearly smooth, strongly obliquely impressed at each side, the 
middle (convex) portion a little produced and rounded behind ; 
mesosternum a little declivous and deeply concave in front. 

Length 54 lines ; width of elytra across the middle 1+ line, 

Hab. New Caledonia. One example, obtained from Doué’s 
collection. 

Callismilax Méklini, n. sp. 

Elongate-elliptic, convex, shining. Head and prothorax 
purple, with green patches and reflections, rather strongly and 
closely punctured (especially at the sides of prothorax) : pro- 
thorax transversely subquadrate, shorter than in any of those 
preceding ; apex scarcely emarginate, and a little narrower 
than the base: elytra very dark bronzed green, each with 


108 Mr. F. Bates on New Genera 


eight rows, besides a short scutellar one, of foveate impressions, 
which, small and shallow at the base and by the suture, become 
gradually larger and deeper at the sides and apex ; intervals 
reticulately elevated, most strongly so at the sides and apex ; 
lateral reflexed margins dark bronzed green: underside and 
legs (more especially on the metasternum, abdomen, and 
femora) metallic green and purple; intercoxal process some- 
what coarsely punctured; prosternal process subhorizontal, 
sulcate at each side, the sulci and basal margin very coarsely 
punctured, the middle portion rugose-punctate ; mesosternum 
subvertical and deeply and broadly concave in front; eyes 
above subrotundate ; legs rather stout. 

Length 54 lines; width of elytra across the middle 2 lines. 

Hab. New Caledonia. One example. 


Instantly to be distinguished from all the preceding by the 
foveate-punctate elytra. 


Callismilax Deplanchet, un. sp. 


Somewhat broader and less convex than any of the pre- 
ceding. Head and prothorax black, the latter with green 
reflections: elytra dark green, the suture narrowly obscure 
purplish : head moderately punctured, the punctures shallow ; 
front slightly concave: prothorax very strongly transverse, 
the punctuation much larger and deeper than on the head, the 
interstices faintly rugulose; apex slightly emarginate, and 
but little narrower than the base: elytra obliquely expanded 
at the sides for a short distance from the humeral angle, thence 
very gradually narrowed to the apex; seriate-punctate, the 
punctures much larger (foveate) and rugged at the sides and 
apex ; intervals punctured, irregularly transversely, and at the 
sides and apex rather strongly rugose : underside pitchy black ; 
intercoxal process sparsely punctured : legs rather stout ; tarsi 
elongate; femora steel-blue; tibize purplish, with violet re- 
flections; prosternal process subhorizontal, almost smooth, 
concave, and the edges strongly upturned, between the coxe, 
obliquely impressed at each side, the middle portion produced 
and a little upturned behind ; mesosternum a little declivous 
and broadly concave in front: eyes above rotundate. . 

Length 52 lines; width of elytra across the middle 24 lines. 

Hab. New Caledonia. A single example, received from 
Paris, labelled “Olisthena Deplanchet, Fauvel.” I am not 
aware of any published species bearing that specific title that 
could by any possibility be the same as ours. 

Easily to be separated from C. Maklini by its broader form, 
strongly transverse prothorax, different colour, sculpture, &e. 


PSRs RIN ee en eee 


“ we 
Pe 


and Species of Heteromera. 109 


In the following two species the body is much less convex 
(subdepressed), the elytra more loosely embracing the sides of 
the abdomen, and much wider at base than base of prothorax, 
and the tarsi are more elongate. C. Deplanchei may be con- 
sidered the intermediate form. 


Callismilax ruficornis, 0. sp. 

Elongate, subparallel, subdepressed. Head and prothorax 
deep shining black, finely and closely punctured, the punctures 
very shallow, the transverse impression at base of epistoma 
very broad ; the front very convex: prothorax at apex slightly 
emarginate and a little narrower than the base: elytra green, 
with purple reflections; sides obliquely expanded for a 
short distance from the humeral angle, thence subparallel ; the 
apex very narrowly rounded ; on each elytron eight distinct, 
but shallow, rows of punctures, obsolete at the apex; the 
intervals faintly punctate and, except the marginal one, not 
costiform at the apex: underside shining black; legs rather 
slender, dark castaneous ; tarsi elongate; intercoxal process 
sparsely punctured and longitudinally wrinkled; antenne 
elongate, slender, and, together with the tarsi, ferruginous red: 
eyes above narrow, strongly oblique, their greatest convexity 
near the posterior (outer) border : prosternal process horizontal, 
lightly grooved at each side and along the base, prominent 
and subtruncate behind; mesosternum a little declivous, and 
broadly, but not deeply, concave in front. 

Length 5 lines; width of elytra across the middle 1+ line. 

Hab. New Caledonia. One example. 


Callismilax grandis, n. sp. 


The largest and most expanded form in the genus. Metallic 
green, with (especially on the elytra) a brassy tinge ; the hind 
margin of the prothorax obscure violet: head and prothorax 
finely punctured, the punctuation very clear, the interstices 
not at all rugulose; front distinctly less convex than in C. 
ruficornis: prothorax distinctly arcuate-emarginate in front, 
straight at the sides, wider at base than at apex: elytra at 
base more than half as wide again as the base of prothorax ; 
sides obliquely expanded for a short distance from the humeral 
angles, thence gradually contracted to the apex, which is 
somewhat acuminate ; seriate-punctate, confusedly so at the 
base, the punctures very fine, obsolete at the apex; the in- 
tervals very finely and not closely (but much more numerously 
and distinetly than in C. ruficornis) punctured, and distinctly 
costiform at the apex; reflexed lateral margins wide: under- 

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 9 


110 Mr. F. Bates on New Genera 


side a little darker and less metallic than the upper ; intercoxal 
process more closely punctured and rugose than in C. rufi- 
cornis: legs rather stout, steel-blue with purplish reflections ; 
tarsi elongate ; antenne rather long, slender, the outer joints 
rufescent; prosternal process horizontal, lightly wrinkled, 
broadly concave, the end broadly rounded; mesosternum 
declivous, and broadly and somewhat deeply concave in front : 
eyes above slightly oblique. é 
Length 7 lines ; width of elytra across the middle 3 lines. 
fab. New Caledonia. One example. 


The following species, at a first glance, appears to be foreign 
to the genus ; it possesses, however, all the essential characters, 
the difference being only one of facies. 


Callismilax sternalis, n. sp. 


Elongate-oval, very convex. Head and prothorax black; 
the former finely, the latter more strongly punctured; apex of 
prothorax emarginate, narrower than the base, front angles 
somewhat prominent, acute; a shallow fovea on each side of 
the middle, at the base: elytra subovate, very convex, of a 
somewhat purplish-violet (or plum) colour, appearing in some 
lights to have a slight castaneous tinge, the suture and base 
brownish; seriate-foveate, the fovex obsolete at the base, the first 
three or four rows from the suture shallow and linear for half 
their length from the base, the rest deep, large, very irregular, 
more or less angular, with costiform intervals ; intervals im- 
punctate, save at the base, where are a few small scattered 
punctures; a large indentation on each side at about the 
middle ; lateral margins narrow, and strongly reflexed at base 
and apex, flat, broad, and strongly sinuous in the middle: 
underside dark brown; intercoxal process very strongly and 
coarsely cellular-punctate: legs rather stout, violet; outer 
joints of antenne larger than ordinary ; prosternal process very 
wide, reddish testaceous, obliquely impressed at each side, the 
margins a little elevated and thickened, the end broadly trun- 
cated; mesosternum declivous, and broadly but shallowly 
concave in front: eyes above decidedly oblique. 

Length 34 lines ; width of elytra across the middle 1% line. 

Hab. New Caledonia. One example. 


Adelium zelandicum, n. sp. 


Oblong, subparallel, attenuate behind, depressed; bronzed 
brown, more or less metallic. Head short, immersed up to 
the eyes in the prothorax, somewhat rounded in front; epi- 


and Species of Heteromera. 111 


stoma very short, convex, distinctly emarginate in front, the 
suture more or less distinctly marked, arcuate ; one or more 
impressions between the eyes ; rather strongly and somewhat 
irregularly punctured and rugose: labrum prominent, trans- 
verse; angles strongly rounded, notched at apex: antenne 
moderate, a little longer in male than in female, perfoliate 
(distinctly so in male), gradually thicker, and a little com- 
pressed outwardly ; the joints obconic, all longer than wide, 
3 shorter than 4 and 5 united, the last largest of all, obliquely 
rounded at apex: prothorax subquadrate, wider than long; 
sides anteriorly moderately incurved, posteriorly subparallel, 
or very slightly sinuously contracted; apex arcuate-emargi- 
nate, and distinctly margined throughout; front angles a little 
depressed, obtuse ; base closely applied to and overlapping the 
base of the elytra, strongly emarginate at the middle, the hind 
angles obtuse; more or less finely, and somewhat irregularly, 
punctured, more or less distinctly wrinkled at the sides and at 
the hind angles, distinctly (especially at the sides) but very 
finely pubescent ; the whole surface more or less uneven by 
numerous irregular foveate impressions, the most constant 
being the rounded fovea at each side of the middle at the basal 
margin: scutellum rather large, convex, punctured, trans- 
versely curvilinearly triangular: elytra but little broader at 
base than the base of* prothorax, narrowed behind, finely 
pubescent, with numerous striw, these sometimes a. little 
irregular, more or less finely impressed, but very rarely (in 
but one out of the ten examples before me) distinctly punctured; 
the intervals (except at the apex) flat, very finely and closely 
muricate-punctate, here and there interrupted by irregular 
transverse impressions, which sometimes assume the form of 
rounded fovee: underside bronzed brown, finely pubescent : 
prosternum slightly compressed in front of the coxe, its pro- 
cess rather narrow, convex, finely margined at the sides, very 
obtuse and not produced behind ; intercoxal process wide, sub- 
truncate at apex: legs reddish brown; tarsi and antennz fer- 
ruginous; the four front tarsi distinctly more expanded in 
male than in female; inner edge of hind tibie fringed with 
longish hairs in the male. 

Length 34-44 lines. 

Hab. New Zealand. Ten examples. 

There are some points of resemblance, especially in the form 
of the head, between this species and the Cymbeba dissimilis 
of Pascoe; and, did I hold that genus unmistakably distinct 
from Adelium, I might be inclined to place this with it as a 
second species. It has not, however, the produced and pointed 
prosternal process, the distinctly marked-off epipleuns of the 


112 Mr. F. Bates on New Genera 


elytra, nor the apically rounded intercoxal process, as_ in 
Cymbeba dissimilis. I possess examples of this latter coming 
from Cape York, New Hebrides, and New Caledonia. 


Pheloneis harpaloides, White (Adelium). 


This genus was created by Mr. Pascoe (Journ. of Entom. 
ii. p. 488) to receive the Adeliwm harpaloides of White. The 
Amarosoma simulans of Redtenbacher I believe to be the same 
thing. According to my view it cannot be separated from 
Adelium, which is evidently a polymorphous genus. Should 
this view be correct, the name will require changing, there 
being already an Adelium harpaloides, Boisduval; I should 
suggest the name amarotdes for it. The male of this species 
has the lower edge of the four hind femora emarginate and 
fringed with long hairs. 

Messrs. Gemminger and Von Harold, in their great Cata- 
logue, have included the species in the genus Pseudhelops of 
Guérin. This is manifestly wrong, Pseudhelops having, 
amongst other differential characters, the penultimate joint of 
the tarsi simple, not subbilobed. The same authors have most 
unwarrantably sunk the genus Coripera of Pascoe under Pseud- 
helops; Coripera is evidently a good genus, very near to, but 
quite distinct from, Adelium. = 


Amarygmus zelandicus, nv. sp. 


Form and general aspect of A. hydrophiloides, Fairm. ; but 
differs from it, and from all the other species of the genus 
known to me, in having the four hind tibiz attenuate at the 
base, and then expanded, and strongly sinuous (almost broadly 
dentate in the hind pair) at the inner margin. 

Protherax green, with a slight bluish tinge, brassy at the 
sides: elytra green, with a brassy tinge, the sutural region a 
little coppery ; head and prothorax finely and, except on the 
epistoma, not very closely punctured: elytra punctate-striate, 
the strie distinctly deeper and the punctures a little larger than 
in A. hydrophiloides ; intervals finely and not closely punctu- 
late: underside and legs piceous ; tarsi and basal joints of 
antenne paler; lower margin of the four posterior femora 

-emarginate ; anterior tarsi strongly expanded, the intermediate 
thickened ; antenne elongate. 

Length 34 lines. 

Hab. New Zealand. One example. 


The peculiarities observable in the tibiz and tarsi of this 
species are either sexual or subgeneric. 


and Species 07 Heteromera. 113 


TECHMESSA, g. n. (demeride). 


Mentum transversely quadrangular. Last joint of maxillary 
palpi cultriform, acute at apex. Mandibles bifid at apex; 
labrum short, slightly sinuously truncated in front. Head 
short ; epistema broadly and squarely truncated in front. 
Lyes large, slightly transverse, entire, more (concolor) or less 
(telephorotdes) strongly prominent. Antenne inserted on slight 
prominences in front of, and quite distinct from, the eyes: 
joint 1 swollen, pyriform; 2 a little shorter than 3, and both 
obconic; 3 not more than half as long as 4; 4-10 sub- 
equal, cylindric (concolor) or elongate-obconic (telephoroides) ; 
11 a little longer than 10, subfusitorm. Prothorax scarcely 
wider than long and convex in concolor; distinctly wider than 
long, subdepressed, and somewhat unequal in telephoroides ; 
truncated at base and apex; sides rounded, abruptly incurved 
anteriorly, gradually contracted posteriorly, rather strongly 
grooved or margined along the base. H/ytra elongate, parallel, 
scarcely convex, somewhat broadly rounded at apex. Hemora 
sublinear ; ¢#b¢e armed with two distinct spurs at apex; the 
two penultimate joints of the tars? rather short, expanded, and 
spongy pubescent beneath. Abdomen of five free joints. 
Body more (telephoroides) or less (concolor) linear, shortly 
pilose. 

Of all the published genera of the Gidemeride the present 
seems to me to approach nearest to Cycloderus. It is, how- 
ever, at once to be distinguished from that genus, and from 
all the others of the family known to me, by the short third 
joint of the antennee. 


Techmessa concolor, n. sp. 


Black, a little shining ; everywhere rather densely clothed 
with a shortish, semierect, brownish pile. Head and prothorax 
coarsely punctured and rugose; the punctures more crowded 
on the front of the former and on the sides of the latter : elytra 
rather strongly and closely punctured, and transversely con- 
fluently rugose : underside and legs brownish black, pubescent, 
punctured ; antenne (save the three basal joimts) and palpi 
dusky brown. 

Length 3 lines. 

Hab. New Zealand. One example. 


Techmessa telephoroides, un. sp. 


Sublinear, depressed, slightly shining; somewhat thinly 
clothed with a short, subdecumbent, whitish pile: head and 


114 Messrs. Brady and Robertson on the 


prothorax brownish black; the front and hind margins of 
the latter reddish brown, rather coarsely and closely punctured 
and rugose; the punctures most crowded on the front and epi- 
stoma of the former, which are also unisulcate down the centre : 
prothorax distinctly wider than long, subcordiform, a little 
depressed and unequal by slight irregular depressions : elytra 
pale brown, with a yellowish tinge, closely punctured and 
rugose: underside reddish brown, pubescent, finely and not 
closely punctured; legs and palpi pale yellow; antenne 
brown. 

Length 33 lines. 

Hab. New Zealand. One example. 


XV.— Contributions to the Study of the Entomostraca. 
By Grorce Srewarpson Brapy, C.M.Z.S8., and Davip 
RosertTson, F.G.S8. 


No. IX. On Ostracoda taken amongst the Scilly Islands, and 
on the Anatomy of Darwinella Stevensoni. 


[Plates [V. & V.] 


In undertaking a dredging excursion to the Scilly Islands, 
concerning the marine fauna of which we were unable to ob- 
tain previously any very accurate information, we anticipated 
finding, at any rate in the more sheltered nooks of that archi- 
pelago, a field of exploration comparable in character and 
richness to many of the better-known hunting-grounds of the 
south and south-west of England. In this, however, we were 
disappointed. In no part did we find any great profusion of 
animal life, and on the whole the district impressed us as 
being the most barren and hopeless for the purpose of dredging 
of any which we have hitherto explored. Our stay at St. Mary’s 
was cut short by the sudden advent of stormy weather; but 
we nevertheless obtained dredgings from many of the most 
promising spots in the neighbourhood of the principal islands ; 
nor do we believe that a protracted visit would have materially 
altered the character of the.result. We propose in this place 
to record the marine Ostracoda which occurred in the various 
dredgings ; and we may also state that an examination of the 
fresh- and brackish-water ponds on the islands of St. Mary 
and Tresco did not afford any other than species commonly 
found in such localities in England. 

The number of species of marine Ostracoda is sixty-seven, 
of which three (or four?) are new to science; but the general 


Ostracoda of the Scilly Islands. 115 
aspect of the group is such as we should expect in any average 
British dredging. ‘There is a distinct absence of the charac- 
teristic northern forms, and an almost equal want of such 
species as Cythere emaciata, Bairdia acanthigera, &c., which 
find their greatest development on the south coast. Cythere 
lutea, a common species of both the littoral and laminarian 
zones in most (and more especially in the northern) districts of 
Britain, is also wanting. 

The following list embraces all the species found in our 
dredgings amongst the Scilly Islands, and in a littoral gather- 
ing of muddy sand from St. Mary’s. The localities dredged 
were as follows:—off Porcressa Bay, St. Mary’s, 20-30 
fathoms, hard sand; 8.W. off St. Agnes, 40 fathoms, hard 
sand, rock, and nullipore; inside St. Mary’s and St. Agnes, 
8-10 fathoms, hard sand; New Grimsby Harbour, 10-14 


fathoms, muddy sand. 


Pontocypris mytiloides (Norman). 


trigonella, G. O. Sars. 
Paracypris polita, G. O. Sars. 
Cythere viridis, Miiller. 

—— albomaculata, Baird. 
pellucida, Baird. 
castanea, G, O. Sars. 
porcellanea, Brady. 
— Macallana, B. & R. 
badia, Norman. 
crispata, Brady. 
Robertsoni, Brady. 
— villosa (G. O. Sars). 
—— convexa, Baird. 

—— oblonga, Brady. 

—— cuneiformis, Grady. 
—— laticarina, Brady. 
emaciata, Brady. 
antiquata (Baird). 
semipunctata, Brady. 
Cytheridea cornea, B. & 2. 
elongata, Brady. 
Eucythere Argus (G. O. Sars). 
declivis (Norman). 
Loxoconcha impressa (Baird). 
eranulata, G. O. Sars. 
—— multifora (Norman). 
tamarindus (Jones). 


Xestoleberis depressa, G. O. Sars. 


labiata, n. sp. 

aurantia (Baird). 
Cytherura nigrescens (Baird). 
— similis, G. O. Sars. 
Sarsii, Brady. 

—— fulva, n. sp. 


_ Cytherura flavescens, Brady. 

cornuta, Brady. 

—— gibba (Miiller). 

cuneata, Brady. 

—— striata, G. O. Sars. 

angulata, Brady. 

producta, Brady. 

acuticostata, G. O. Sars. 

cellulosa (Norman). 

Pseudocythere candata, G. O. Sars. 

Cytheropteron nodosum, Brady. 

subcircinatum, G, O. Sars. 

latissimum (Norman). 

—— 0. sp.! 

Bythocythere constricta, G. O. Sars. 

turgida, G. O. Sars. 

Cytherideis subulata, Brady (var. 
fasciata). 


| Sclerochilus contortus (Norman). 


Paradoxostoma abbreviatum, G. O. 
Sars. 
variabile (Baird). 
ensiforme, Brady. 
cuneatum, n. sp. 
—— hibernicum, Brady. 
—— Normani, Brady. 
—— Fischeri, G. O. Surs. 
— arcuatum, Brady. 
—— flexuosum, Brady. 
obliquum, G. O. Sars. 
Asterope Mariee (Baird). 
—— teres (Norman). 
Philomedes interpuncta (Baird). 
| Polycope compressa, B. d 2. 


116 On the Ostracoda of the Seilly Islands. 


Xestoleberis labiata, n. sp. Pl. IV. figs. 8-15. 


Carapace of the female, as seen from the side, oblong, subtri- 
angular, highest near the middle; height equal to rather more 
than half the length: anterior extremity narrow, sharply 
rounded off ; posterior wide, obtusely rounded : superior margin 
well arched ; inferior nearly straight, but produced downwards 
towards the posterior extremity into a bulging prominence. 
Seen from above the outline is broadly ovate, tapering rapidly 
in front to an acute point, and very broadly rounded behind ; 
greatest width equal to the height, and situated behind the 
middle. The shell of the male seen laterally is more slender, 
and less tumid behind ; seen from above it is much more com- 
pressed and widest near the middle, the posterior extremity 
being somewhat narrowly rounded. The surface of the shell 
is smooth, distantly studded with small elevated round papillee. 
The chief peculiarity of the species, however, is a remarkable 
labiate projection of the postero-inferior angle of the shell, - 
which is more distinctly visible on the right valve (fig. 15). 
Length 35 inch. 


Xestoleberis labiata was dredged in New Grimsby Harbour 
on a bottom of muddy sand, in a depth of about 14 fathoms. 


Cytherura fulva,n. sp. Pl. IV. figs. 1-5. 


Carapace of the female very tumid; seen laterally sub- 
quadrate, broadly rounded in front, produced behind into an 
obscure rounded subcentral beak: superior margin evenly and 
very slightly rounded, sloping steeply backwards towards the 
posterior extremity ; inferior nearly straight, simuated in front 
of the middle: greatest height situated in the middle and 
equal to rather more than half the length. Seen from below 
the outline is very broadly ovate, widest in the middle, the 
width being somewhat greater than the height; anterior 
extremity broadly rounded, with a distinct central mucro, 
posterior also broad, but tapering to a subacuminate central 
point. Shell of the male seen laterally much more elongated, 
with nearly straight dorsal and ventral margins, the height 
equal to scarcely half the length; the outlne as seen from 
below is also much more compressed. Surface of the shell 
obscurely reticulated and dotted, marked also, especially on 
the inferior surface, with faint longitudinal furrows. Length 
=! ich. 

C. fulva was dredged pretty abundantly on a bottom of hard 
granitic sand, ina depth of 10-40 fathoms, off St. Mary’s and 
St. Agnes. 


& 


On the Anatomy of Darwinella Stevensoni. 117 


Cytherura Sarsii, Brady. PI. IV. figs. 6, 7. 


We figure here what appears to be a local variety of this 
species, the outline being somewhat less angular than usual. 


Cytherideis subulata, var. fasciata, nobis. Pl. V. figs. 1-5. 


This differs from the typical form in having a conspicuous 
broad black band across the shell in front of the middle, and 
also in the reticulated structure of the shell, which is repre- 
sented in fig. 5. The anterior margins of the valves (fig. 4) 
are crenulated. 


Paradoxostoma cuneatum, n.sp. PI. V. figs. 6, 7. 


Carapace, seen laterally, oblong, subreniform, rather higher 
behind than in front; height equal to less than half the length ; 
anterior extremity evenly, posterior obliquely, rounded ; 
superior margin gently and evenly arched, inferior slightly 
sinuated inthe middle. Seen from above, the outline is com- 
pressed, cuneate, greatest width near the posterior extremity 
and equal to one third of the length, tapering gently toward 
the anterior and abruptly toward the posterior extremity, both 
of which are subacuminate. Surface of the shell smooth. 
Length =; inch. 


A few specimens of this species were dredged at New 
Grimsby Harbour and inside St. Mary’s in depths of from 
10-15 fathoms. 


Note on the Anatomy of Darwinella * Stevensoni. 


Our first descriptiont of this curious Kntomostracan being 
made from specimens which had been dried, and in which the 
contained animal could be very imperfectly seen, was incorrect 
in several important particulars. We propose now to rectity 
as far as we can our former errors, having, through the kind- 
ness of the Rev. J. Gunn of Norwich, been supplied with spe- 
cimens of Darwinella in the fresh state. To that gentleman 
we wish here to express our cordial thanks for the assistance 
which he has both now and on other occasions given to us. 

From the details of structure given below it will be seen 
that Darwinella occupies a position intermediate between the 
two families Cypride and Cytheride, though more nearly 
approaching the latter family. The points of divergence are 


* Our first generic name Polycheles having been previously appropriated, 
was withdrawn in favour of Darwinella (see Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 
ser. 4, vol. ix. p. 50, January 1872). 

+ Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. July 1870, p. 25. 


118 On the Anatomy of Darwinella Stevensoni. 


found chiefly in the mouth-apparatus ; but the lower antennz 
also are abnormal, being quite destitute of the poison-gland 
and urticating sete of the Cytherida. The mandible differs 
much in structure from any similar organ known to us in 
either family. The first pair of jaws presents no special pecu- 
liarity ; but in the second pair (which in the Cytheridz is 
converted, by the great development of the palp and atrophy 
of the jaw-apparatus, into a simple foot with a mere trace of 
its jaw origin in the form of a few bristles) we find a pediform 
palp extremely well developed, combined with a large jaw, 
which is armed with cutting-teeth and bears a fully developed 
branchial plate. ‘The palp of the second jaw we described in 
our former paper as the “ first foot;”’ the mandibles and first 
pair of jaws were also misunderstood, and indeed had not then 
been seen except very imperfectly. The following description 
gives, we believe, a true account of the structure of the 
animal :— 

Antenne very short and stout, strongly armed with curved 
claws and bristles: superior antenne six-jointed, having all 
the joints as broad as or broader than long, and beset with 
short curved sete ; inferior four-jointed, of nearly equal thick- 
ness throughout : apex armed with four or five strong, slightly 
curved, claws; entirely destitute of poison-gland or urticating 
sete, the place of which is occupied by a simple curved seta 
of moderate length. Mandible (PI. V. fig. 8) broad, truncate 
at the free extremity, which is provided with six or seven 
small, slender, spiniform teeth; palp three-jomted, its basal 
joint very wide, beset with a series of nine curved sete, and 
giving attachment to a small subcrescentic lamina which is 
fringed with about ten branchial filaments; second joint 
slender, nearly four times as long as broad, slightly curved and 
dilated at the distal extremity, where it bears one long and 
two small sete ; terminal joint more slender, about two thirds 
the length of the foregoing, and bearing at its truncate apex 
about six slender curved spines. Grasping portion of the first 
jaw (Pl. V. fig. 9) divided into four short setiferous segments, 
and bearing a very large oblong palp, which is fringed above 
with about twenty-four long branchial filaments, and has also 
four long deflexed sete attached near its base. Second jaw 
(Pl. V. fig. 10) simple, short and wide, truncate at the apex, 
and divided into several slender curved spines, bearing a large 
three-jointed pediform palp and an ovate branchial appendage 
of moderate size. Two pairs of feet of moderate length, five- 
jointed; the second pair much the longest, and having the last 
joint armed with one long and two small curved sete ; first 
three joints of nearly equal length, fourth and fifth respectively 


On the Generic Affiniiies of the New-England Chitons. 119 


about one half and one third as long as the preceding. Abdomen 
ending in a short conical process. Copulative organs? of the 
male of complex structure, the basal portion on each side con- 
sisting of a subrhomboidal acuminate lamina, the apical portion 
of an irregularly shaped plate produced laterally into an aliform 
process, and on the distal margin into a short strong hook. 
Female probably viviparous. 


EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. 
PLATE LY. 


1. Cytherura fulva, male, seen from right side. | 
2. The same, male, seen from above. | 
3. The same, male, seen from end. + x 84. 
4, The same, female, seen from right side. 

Fig. 5. The same, female, seen from below. 
6. Cytherura Sarsii, seen from right side. ) 84 
7. The same, seen from above. as 
8. Xestoleberis labiata, female, seen from left side. \ 
9. The same, female, seen from above. | 


Fig. 10. The same, female, seen from below. 

Fig. 11. The same, female, seen from end. 5() 
Fig. 12. The same, male, seen from left side. 7x50. 
Fig. 15. The same, male, seen from below. | 

Fig. 14. The same, left valve, seen from inside. 

Fig. 15, The same, right valve, seen from inside. 


PLATE V. 
Fig. 1. Cytherideis subulata, var., seen from right side. 
Fig. 2. The same, var., seen from aboye. x 50. 
Fig. 3. The same, var., seen from below. 
Fig. 4. The same, anterior margin of shell. x84. 
Fig. 5. The same, shell-structure. > 100. 
Fig. 6. Paradoxostoma cuneatum, seen from right side. 50 
Fig. 7. The same, seen from below. : 
Fig. 8. Darwinella Stevensoni, mandible and palp: a, mandible ; 


b, palp; ¢, branchial plate. 
Fig. 9. The same, first jaw : a, incisive lobes ; b, branchial plate. > x 220. 


Fig. 10. The same, second jaw: a, maxilla; b, pediform palp ; 
ce, branchial plate. 


XVI.—On the Generic Affinities of the New-England Chitons. 
By Pup P. Carpenter, of Montreal*. 


Ir has been common, with conchologists even of the “ ad- 
vanced” school, to call every mollusk with eight valves a 
Chiton, except the vermiform species, which Lamarck sepa- 


* Communicated by the Author, having been read at the Meeting of 
the American Association for the Advancement of Science, held at Port- 
land, August 1873. 


120 Mr. P. P. Carpenter on the Generic 


rated as Chitonellus. The consequence has been that very 
little is known of most Chitonide except the external cha- 
racters—the differentiation shown in the soft parts, and even 
in the shelly valves, having been overlooked. 

We have been fortunate, during the explorations of the U. 
S. Fish Commission, in observing four species alive ; another 
was taken alive at Eastport last year; a sixth has been cap- 
tured on the southern coast. These are all as yet known to 
inhabit the American Atlantic seas from Labrador to Florida. 
A seventh, called Chiton cinereus, is said to have been taken 
alive by Dr. Pickering, and to be in the collection of the 
Philadelphia Academy of Natural Sciences ; but it may prove 
to belong to one of the other species, or to be a ballast specimen. 

The six authentic species present well-marked characters, 
ranging under five genera. 

It may be premised that the Lamarckian genus Chiton was 
first divided by the Rey. L. Guilding according to the ex- 
ternal characters of the West-Indian species. About the same 
time the Rev. T. Lowe published the peculiarities in the in- 
sertion-plates of the British species. Both papers appeared 
in the ‘ Zoological Journal.’ Dr. Gray, however, was the first 
to present, in the ‘ Proc. Zool. Soc.,’ a full description of the 
forms of Chitonide, accurately arranged under genera and 
sections, partly according to the external, but principally 
according to the internal characters. Mr. Henry Adams, in 
compiling the ‘Genera’ from H. Cuming’s collection, was 
not allowed to examine the insertion-plates. He thought he 
saw, however, a correlation between the internal and external 
marks, and accordingly redescribed Gray’s genera, with lists 
of species, according to the surface-diagnosis. Gray, in his 
‘Guide,’ unfortunately copied from H. Adams’s lists without 
examination. Lastly, Chenu, as usual, reproduced the mis- 
takes of H. Adams, with fresh ones of his own. 

Having had unusual opportunities of dissecting out the 
valves of Chitons, I have felt compelled to rectify the pre- 
viously published lists, and also to propose various new genera. 
These I communicated to Mr. Binney while his edition of 
Dr. Gould’s ‘ Invertebrata’ was passing through the press ; but 
he did not think well to alter the position of every one of our 
species, as I feel compelled to do. 

1. The Chiton apiculatus does not appear in H. Adams or 
Gray. It is a true Chetopleura, distmguished by the thin 
hairy girdle, regular valves with sharp teeth, and long series 
of gills. Ihave not seen it alive. It ranges from Southern 
Massachusetts to Florida. The genus is for the most part 
tropical. 


a 


Affinities of the New-England Chitons. 121 


2. The Chiton ruber is Leptochiton ruber of H. Adams, and 
is probably Callochiton puniceus, Couth., of the same author. 
It is the Tonicia rubra of Gray’s ‘ Guide,’ to which he adds as 
synonyms, in P. Z. 8., marmorea and fulminata; and it also 
appears in Gray’s ‘Guide’ as Corephium? rubrum. It has 
not the characters of any one of these four genera, in which our 
two best authors have placed it. It belongs to Gray’s genus 
Ischnochiton (= Lepidopleurus, H. Ad., not Risso), section ft, 
“mantle-scales minute, granular ;” but as the gill-rows are 
short, instead of surrounding the foot as in the typical species, 
it is necessary to establish a fresh genus, Trachydermon. 
The insertion-plates are, as in [schnochiton and Chetopleura, 
regularly slit and sharp all round. Mr. Emerton first ob- 
served a great peculiarity in the animal, that there is a can- 
cellated space between the posterior gill and the caudal extre- 
mity. Prof. Verrill observed that in different specimens there 
were either one, two, or three rows of holes on each side. The 
caudal lobe is generally figured as an anal tube; but in Z. rubrum 
it is an imperforate muscle, working the posterior part of the 
girdle. The feces were distinctly seen to escape, sometimes 
on one side, sometimes on the other, as it appeared to me from 
a slit on each side. 

3. The Chiton albus is Leptochiton albus of H. Adams,= 
sagrinatus, Couth. Itwice captured a live specimen ; but each 
time it eluded the aftersearch. I do not doubt that this is 
also a Trachydermon, but cannot vouch for the peculiar cha- 
racters above quoted. The genus belongs to cold and tempe- 
rate seas. 

4, The British C. marginatus is also a Trachydermon, and 
not a Leptochiton. It is the C. cinereus of Lowe, Forbes, and 
Hanley, but not of many other writers. Of the unique 
American shell so called [ can say nothing. 

5. The C. marmoreus, common at Eastport and northwards 
to Greenland, is Tonicia of H. Adams and Gray, simply be- 
cause the girdle is smooth. ‘The true southern Tonicie, how- 
ever, have pectinated insertion-plates and ambient gills, like 
the typical Chitons; while the northern species so called 
have sharp plates and short gills. They differ, in fact, from 
Trachydermon simply in the girdle being destitute of the mi- 
nute scales. I distinguish the group as Tonicella. 

6. The C. mendicarius does not appear in the lists, and is 
probably unknown in Europe. Fortunately a very few speci- 
mens were dredged in the ‘ Bluelight,’ one of them smashed but 
very large. It is known outside by the minute bristles on the 
girdle; but within it presents the very abnormal characters 
which had before been observed only in the minute British 


122 On the Generic Affinities of the New-England Chitons. 


C. Hanleyi. This appeared as Leptochiton Hanleyi in Gray’s 
first paper, but as Acanthopleura Hanleyi in his ‘ Guide,’ 
p- 183. But in the same book, p. 186, the same species re- 
appears as HHanleya debilis, the genus (constituted for that 
species alone) being said to have lateral tufts of spines; in- 
sertion-plates entire, of terminal valves alike. H. Adams, 
following this diagnosis externally, described other species 
which really had these spine-tufts though not the internal 
characters. However, on examining every specimen of the 
species in the market, I could not discern a single spine-tuft, 
though announced by the accurate Lovén. I found, however, 
excellent internal characters. All the valves were destitute 
of insertion-plates except the anterior one, which really was 
‘entire,’ having one continuous plate, not slit. I did not 
know whether to believe my own eyes or the testimony of 
Lovén and Gray, till Prof. Verrill allowed me to open the 
large, smashed specimen of C. mendicarius. It proved to be 
a true Hanleva, according to my diagnosis, but not according 
to Lovén and Gray. I presume that the contraction of the 
skin in so minute a shell led to the appearance of tufts, and 
that Dr. Gray supposed that the posterior valve had an entire 
plate like the anterior. I should be glad of the opinion of the 
Section whether the genus Hanleia should follow the type 
against the diagnosis, as here given, or an unreal diagnosis 
against the type, as followed (in part only) by H. Adams. 
The animal of this species resembles Leptochiton in haying 
short posterior gills, and a central anal tube from which the 
feces were seen to exude. 

7. A similar confusion attends the last and most remarkable 
species, C. Hmersoniz. Several live specimens were dredged by 
the ‘ Bluelight,’ one of extraordinary size ; and still more have 
been dredged by Principal Dawson at Murray Bay. For the 
original species C. vestitus, from Alaska, a genus Amicula was 
constituted by Gray, characterized by covered valves and re- 
gular pore-tufts. The elder Sowerby figured the Hmersonii as 
vestitus in his ‘ Conch. Illustr.’; hence Dr. Gould naturally 
looked for the pore-tufts, and found them. Having received 
a fresh specimen from Dr. Stimpson, | could not find them. 
I wrote to Dr. Gould, who sent me his type specimens, with 
sketch of regular pore-tufts, as he saw them; but still I could 
not. He died without clearing the difficulty ; and I presumed 
there might be two species, one with and one without pores. 
But after examining both northern and southern suites of spe- 
cimens, I feel confidence in stating that there are no true pores, 
but simply a profusion of hair branches, generally very irre- 
gular, but sometimes, in early stages, more conspicuous at the 


Viscount Walden on two new Species of Birds. 123 


sutures. I propose, therefore, to keep the name Am7cula for 
the Alaskan pore-bearing species—and to name this (with the 
Alaskan Pallasiz) Stimpsoniella, in honour of one of the best 
naturalists born in New England. In this genus, as in Tra- 
chydermon, the feeces are expelled through slits close to the 
caudal lobe, one on each side. When at rest, the creature 
makes a posterior fold in the girdle, corresponding to the wave 
in the posterior valve. 

I should be extremely indebted to any gentlemen who would 
lend me unusual Chitons for examination, previously to the 
publication of my ‘ Contributions towards a Monograph of the 
Chitonide’ by the Smithsonian Institute. There is also a 
great field open for investigation to all those who can examine 
living Chitons or even dissect alcoholic specimens. It is 
known that the external characters are not coordinate with 
the internal ones; it remains to be found out whether either 
of them correlate with the anatomical characters of dentition, 
gills, vent, &c., which ought to furnish the best divisions in 
arranging this difficult group. 


XVII.—Descriptions of two new Species of Birds. 
By Arruur, Viscount WALDEN, P.Z.S., F.R.S., &e. 
Pelargopsis gigantea, n. sp. 

Head, nape, chin, cheeks, back and sides of the neck, flanks, 
under tail-coverts, and entire under surface white, washed more 
or less with dilute fulvous, the concealed parts of the feathers 
being pure white and their exposed parts being tinged with 
fulvous; this hue is deepest on the flanks, breast, and on the 
abdominal and ventral regions, and on the under tail-coverts ; 
crown nearly pure white ; middle and lower part of the back 
rich pale glistening turquoise-blue; outer edges of primaries 
and secondaries, and all the-tertiaries and scapulars, dingy 
bluish green; middle pair of rectrices above entirely, and 
lateral pairs on their outer webs, of a purer blue; under wing- 
coverts and axillaries fulvous, somewhat deeper than that of 
the flanks; bill coral-red ; feet red. 

Bill from forehead 3°25 inches, wing 6°62, tail 4°50, tarsus 
0°88, middle toe 1°50. 

Obtained at Salok, Sulu Islands, near Borneo, by Dr. 
Bernhard Meyer. 

Scops modestus, n. sp. 
Suiff loral bristles pure white at base, some tipped with 


124 Viscount Walden on two new Species of Birds. 


fulvous, some with dark brown or black; those of the chin 
pale fulvous, nearly white; over each eye a distinct broad 
whitish band, formed by pure white feathers narrowly tipped 
with yellowish brown, which again in most is narrowly fringed 
with black, some nearest the eyes also edged throughout their 
length with yellowish brown ; feathers of the head and nape 
pale yellowish rusty, each traversed by three or four narrow 
irregular light brown lines; interscapulars and feathers of the 
back and rump coloured and marked like the plumage of the 
head and nape, but the brown transverse bands are broader and 
fewer ; scapulars the same, but a few more or less pure white, 
mottled towards the tip with the prevailing tints; ear-coverts 
and cheeks principally white, with brown and ruddy fulvous 
markings ; throat-feathers albescent, with one or more narrow 
brown cross bands; a half-collar below the throat of feathers 
marked and coloured like those of the nape; breast-feathers 
tipped with brown, a subterminal band of pale fulvous, then a 
brown band followed by a much broader pure white band ; abdo- 
minal feathers white, tipped with an irregular ocellated mark 
centred with pale rusty fulvous and encircled with brown, then a 
broad white band with a basal and narrower brown band; in 
many of the abdominal feathers the ocellated markings are 
replaced by an irregular cross band of mixed fulvous and 
brown; under tail-coverts white, with faint subterminal fulvous- 
brown bands ; tarsus clothed with white feathers, faintly barred 
with pale brown ; ground-colour of the primaries and secon- 
daries brown, each quill traversed by three or more pale 
rufo-fulvous narrow bands more or less complete, the brown 
intervals towards the apices of the primaries and on their outer 
webs much freckled with rufo-fulvous ; on the outer web of 
the second, third, and fourth primaries the pale rufo-fulvous 
bands change to fulvous white or pure white; under wing- 
coverts greyish white; median rectrices marked and coloured 
like the apices of the primaries, lateral with clear rufo-fulvous 
bands running through, all tipped, like the median shoulder- 
edge, white. Tarsi feathered to within an eighth of an inch 
of the base of the toes; fourth and fifth quills equal, third 
slightly longer than sixth. 

Wing 4°75 inches, tail 2°37, tarsus 1:0, middle toe with 
nail 1°12, bill from nostril (in a straight line) 0°65. 

Two examples of this small plain-coloured Scops Owl 
were obtained near Port Blair, South Andaman, by Captain 


R. Wimberley. 


On Norwegian Hydroida from Deep Water. 125 


XVIII.—WNotes on Norwegian Hydroida from Deep Water. 
By the Rev. Tuomas Hicks, B.A., F.R.S. 


A PAPER of remarkable interest has just been published by 
G. Ossian Sars on the deep-water Hydroida of the Norwegian 
seas*. The investigations of this excellent observer, who 
worthily carries on the work of his distinguished father, have 
established the fact that a very varied Hydroid fauna exists 
in this region at depths varying from 50 fathoms to 300 
fathoms. It comprises no less than fifty-eight species, of 
which sixteen appear to be new to science. From the tables 
(showing the distribution of the Norwegian Hydroids both 
vertically and horizontally) which are appended to the descrip- 
tive portion of the paper it appears that the most productive 
region lies between 50 and 100 fathoms. In this zone about 
two thirds of the whole number of species recorded for Norway 
have occurred (fifty-four out of eighty-four). 

The littoral region, as might be expected, is barren, yielding 
only six forms—a striking contrast to the corresponding zone 
on our own shores, which teems with Hydroid life. The 
Laminarian is hardly more fruitful, giving eleven, of which 
two are common to it and the preceding. From 10 to 20 
fathoms thirteen species have been obtained, from 20 to 50 
(the ‘Coralline region’’) forty-two. Below 100 fathoms the 
numbers diminish with the increase of depth; from 300 fathoms 
only five species have been procured (Plumularia gracillima, 
n. sp., Lilellum serpens, Lafoéina tenuis, Campanularia ver- 
ticillata, and Perigonimus abyssi,n. sp.). The last of these 
alone passes the 300-fathom limit, and actually reaches 400. 

If we except the fragments of a supposed Hydroid, brought 
up by the dredge of the ‘Porcupine’ from a depth of 2435 
fathoms, of which nothing definite is known, the extreme 
vertical limit of Hydroid distribution would seem to lie between 
600 and 700 fathoms, so far as our present knowledge goes. 
And it must be remarked that below three hundred fathoms 
a very small number only of forms have been obtained, a few 
straggling outliers, several of which seem to be much more at 
home in more moderate depths. In no sense can the Hydroida 
be considered an abyssal tribe. 

In the chapter on “ Distribution in Space” in Allman’s 
‘Monograph of the Tubularian Hydroids’ he places the maxi- 
mum of development in the Coralline zone ; but on the Nor- 
wegian coast it must be assigned to the “‘ deep-water region ” 
immediately succeeding it, which yields fifty-four species 

* Bidrag til Kundskaben om Norges Hydroider. Af G. O. Sars. 
Med 4 autographiske Plancher. 1873. 

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 10 


] 


126 Rev. T. Hincks on Norwegian 


against forty-two in the former. And the character of this 
“deep-water ” fauna is as remarkable as its richness. It in- 
cludes no less than thirteen of the sixteen undescribed species 
obtained by Sars, and (probably) three new generic types. 

It is interesting to note the extended vertical range which 
these investigations have established for several well-known 
species. Thus Tubularia indivisa, which is common between 
tide-marks on the English coast, has been taken up at a depth 
of 200 fathoms ; Plumularia setacea, a common denizen of our 
rock-pools, occurs only between 50 and 100 fathoms in the Nor- 
wegian seas ; Myriothela, which is found near low-water mark, 
ranges to 100 fathoms ; Podocoryne carnea is obtained on the 
shore and from 200 fathoms, and Hydractinia echinata at low- 
water mark and from 100 fathoms. It is also worthy of 
remark that Sars has obtained from a depth of 400 fathoms a 
Hydroid which he refers to Perigonimus, an Athecate genus, 
producing free reproductive zooids. In all previous cases the 
species dredged from great depths have been such as are pro- 
pagated by means of fixed sporosacs and not by planoblasts *. 

Passing to the descriptive portion of the paper, the first 
point of special interest is the occurrence of a small group of 
Plumularian Hydroids belonging to the genus Aglaophenia. 
This form is specially characteristic of warmer latitudes. On 
our own coasts it is comparatively rare in the north and north- 
eastern districts; in Shetland it is represented by a single 
species, A. myriophyllum. Still further north it has only oc- 
curred in the deep-water region, to which dredging has recently 
been extended. Near Stavanger, off the island of Hvitingsé, 
Sars has obtained three supposed new species of this fine 
genus, in depths varying from 80 to 150 fathoms. An ex- 
amination of this group of southern strangers, thus encountered 
in the deep northern waters, discloses some points of interest. 
They were obtained on a muddy bottom at very considerable 
depths, and, we may therefore suppose, in one of the warm areas 
to which our attention has been drawn of late f. 

The first species described (Aglaophenia radicellata) is 


* Vide Allman’s ‘ Monogr. Tubularian Hydroids,’ part ii. p. 165. It is 
true that Sars did not actually observe the planoblast of his Perigonimus 
abyssi; but he had the opportunity of examining the gonophores, and had 
no doubt of the Medusan nature of their contents. 

+ This is a mere conjecture, as we have no precise account of the nature 
of the ground ; but the deep-water region off Hvitingsé appears to possess 
a rich and peculiar Hydroid fauna which suggests the inference that it 
enjoys a comparatively high temperature. Allman mentions a new Plu- 
mularian genus, which was obtained during the cruise of the ‘ Porcupine,’ 
at a depth of 682 fathoms, in water where the temperature ranged from 
30°°5 Fahr. to 29°°8 Fahr. (‘Tubularian Hydroids,’ pt. ii. p. 165). 


Hydroida from Deep Water. 127 


closely allied to the well-known A. myriophyllum of our own 
coasts, upon which, indeed, it is a very slight variation. In 
the shape of the calycles and in the minute structure generally 
the two are almost identical. The differences lie chiefly in 
size and habit, the points most readily affected by change of ex- 
ternal conditions. The northern form is dwarfish as compared 
with our own ; it looks stunted, and wants the elegant plumose 
appearance so characteristic of the latter. The stem, too, is 
simple and slender, instead of being composed, as in the normal 
A. myriophyllum, of several tubes bound together. One other 
difference between the two exists: in A. radicellata a large 
number of long and much-branched fibres are given off from 
the base of the stem, which form a spreading root-like appen- 
dage; by this the zoophyte fixes itself in the muddy ground, 
from which it was obtained. This, however, it must be 
remembered, is only an exaggerated condition of a structure 
which exists in A. myriophyllum. The latter zoophyte rises 
from a tuft of tangled fibres, a mere means of attachment 
when it grows on solid substances, but which, we can readily 
suppose, might be developed into a root-like organ under 
other conditions of life. The corbula of A. radicellata seems 
to resemble that of A. myriophyllum. The similarity of the 
two forms in minute structure * is really very striking, and the 
differences between them are just those which a change of 
locality might most readily produce. 

The second species described by Sars (A. bicuspis) exhibits 
more distinctive characteristics ; but its calycles are clearly of 
the myriophyllum type. It is somewhat larger than the pre- 
ceding, but does not exceed a couple of inches in height. The 
stem 1s compound towards the base ; and the pinnulated portion 
is much larger than in A. radicellata. The calycles in shape 
and arrangement resemble those of the last-named species 
and of A. myriophyllum ; but the minute crenulation of the 
rim is wanting, and the central tooth on the front margin, 
which in A. radicellata was truncate and slightly sinuated at 
the top, is here divided down the middle so as to form two 
acuminate processes, which have suggested the name of the 
species. But the most remarkable peculiarity of A. bicuspis 
is found in connexion with the gonosome. The reproductive 

* Sars seems to consider that the margin of the calycles is more 
distinctly crenulated in the Norwegian than in the British form; but the 
difference, if there is any, is of the slightest. Both are crenulated; and 
the crenations are of precisely the same character. A difference, however, 


does exist in the character of the anterior tooth, which in A. myriophyllum 
is pointed, in the northern form truncate and slightly sinuated at the 


apex. 
10* 


128 Rev. T. Hincks on Norwegian 


capsules, instead of being borne, as in A. radicellata, on a 
certain number of the pinnules which are modified in structure 
so as to constitute a protective case for them (the corbula), are 
ranged along one side of the main stem; the usual corbula is 
absent; but at the base of many of the pinnules a bifid or 
trifid process is developed, and these processes, ranged 
in a row on each side close to the stem, bend inwards 
towards one another and so form a kind of protective co- 
vering for the gonothece. This structure is unique amongst 
the known Plumulariide. The processes just described are 
furnished with many of the sarcothece (or nematophores) so 
characteristic of the Plumularian family, and closely resemble 
in structure the elements which compose the corbula. Indeed 
we may regard them as constituting a kind of corbula, which, 
however, is developed in the axis of the plume, corresponding 
with the altered position of the capsules, instead of laterally 
along the pinnule. A. bicuspis fixes itself upon sponges ; and 
its fibrous base is merely a flattened disk for attachment. 

In the third species (A. integra), which is of larger growth, 
of a graceful plumose shape, and occasionally branched, we 
have the very same type of calycle ; but the tooth-like processes 
on the margin have disappeared as well as the crenulation, and 
the rim is now perfectly plain. The sarcothece are much the 
same as in the two preceding forms; the capsules are borne 
on the central stem, as in the last, but all traces of protective 
appendages are wanting. The gonosome exhibits the character 
which we find in A. pennatula and kindred species. 

From this deep-water region, then, near Hvitingsé we have 
three species of Aglaophenia all referable to the myriophyllum 
type, which are distinguished by very slight differences in the 
minute structure of the trophosome, but exhibit three distinct 
modifications of the gonosome. In the one which comes nearest 
to A. myriophyllum we find the usual open corbula ; in another, 
a set of appendages developed near the base of the pinne, 
constituting a kind of axial corbula; in the third we have the 
gonothece wholly unprotected, as amongst the Sertulariide, 
and borne on the main stem. The first of these modifications 
of the gonosome is characteristic of Kirchenpauer’s subgenus 
Lytocarpia, and the second, I believe, of Allman’s genus 
Gonocladium (to be described in the report on the ‘ Porcupine’ 
dredgings). If the genus Aglaophenia is to be dismembered, 
and the species composing it are to be distributed into groups 
distinguished by the character of the gonosome, I should pro- 
pose the name GYMNANGIUM for those with unprotected 
gonothece. 

Sars has also added to the Norwegian list several species of 


Hydroida from Deep Water. 129 


the genus Plumularia, and a very beautiful new generic form 
(Polyplumaria) allied to the latter. 


Heteropyxis norvegica, i. sp. 


Amongst the new Plumulariide we find a form which is 
referred to the Heteropyxis of Heller. I have given reasons 
elsewhere * for merging this genus in Plumularia; but I now 
find that I have misapprehended the characters on which it is 
based. In his brief generic diagnosis Heller makes no mention 
of the only peculiarity to which I should be at all disposed to 
attach any importance; and as I was unacquainted at the time 
with Meneghini’s description of his Lowenva (which is identical 
with Heteropyxts), my decision was founded on an imperfect 
knowledge of the distinctive characters. The real peculiarity 
of the genus Heteropyxis is the subspiral arrangement of the 
pinne ; in this it differs from Plumularia and makes an ap- 
proach to Antennularia. The other characters are insignificant; 
but it may be convenient to retain the genus for those forms 
which, without being truly verticillate, have the pinne distri- 
buted round the stem. The curious point about H. norvegica 
is that it bears cornucopia-shaped capsules, exactly resembling 
those of Plumularia cornu-copie (mihi), a species from the 
Devonshire coast ; the form is remarkable, and it is, as far as 
I can judge, absolutely identical in both. In H. norvegica, 
however, the position of the gonothece is peculiar: they are 
developed in pairs from a distinct process on the lowest joint 
of the pinna, a little above its point of origin. 


Diphasia elegans, n. sp., and Sertularia tenera, n. sp. 


These two new Sertularians were obtained from a bottom 
of soft mud or ooze, in depths ranging from 150 to 200 fathoms, 
and, we may therefore presume, in a comparatively warm 
area. 

The Diphasia bears a strong general resemblance to D. at- 
tenuata (mihi). The chief points of difference seem to be the 
absence of joints on both stem and branches and of the tendril- 
like prolongations of the latter, the greater distance between 
the pairs of calycles, and the extraordinary development of the 
creeping stolon. The latter is the most marked character, and 
connects itself directly with the nature of the locality in which 
the species isfound. A luxuriantly developed, much ramified, 
and sinuous fibre spreads over the muddy sea-bottom, through 
a great part of its length perfectly free, and only attached 
here and there to the small fragments of stone or shell sparingly 


* “ Notes on Prof. Heller’s ‘Catalogue of the Hydroida of the Adriatic’ ’ 
(Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. ix. p. 119). 


130 Rey. T. Hincks on Norwegian 


scattered about in the neighbourhood. From this, at very con- 
siderable intervals, rise the slender plumose shoots. 

The Sertularta, which is of a dwarf and meagre habit, is 
also distinguished by the largely developed stolon, which 
creeps unattached over the mud. It is interesting to remark 
the modification of this portion of the structure in conformity 
with the nature of the base on which the zoophyte grows. 
One of the Aglaopheniw and two of the Sertularie obtained 
by Sars from great depths have thus adapted themselves to 
the peculiar conditions of ooze life. 


Ophiodes parasitica, G. O. Sars (a. sp.). 

Perhaps the most interesting of the many interesting forms 
for a knowledge of which we are indebted to the energetic 
researches of the Norwegian naturalist, is the remarkable 
Hydroid which he has named Ophiodes parasitica. In general 
appearance and structure it closely resembles a Plumularia, 
and might pass on a slight inspection for a stemless variety 
of one of the smaller kinds. But, instead of the ordinary sar- 
cothece characteristic of the Plumularian family, it is furnished 
with the curious snake-like appendages which distinguish the 
genus Ophiodes (mihi). Judging from Sars’s description and 
figures, there is no appreciable difference between these organs 
as they occur in the Norwegian species and on the British 
Ophiodes mirabilis. Yn each case they consist of a slender 
and highly extensile tentaculoid body, protected at the base 
by a small chitinous cup, and terminated at the free extremity 
by a globose capitulum filled with thread-cells. In O. para- 
sitica they are confined to the erect stems, and are not present, 
as in O. mirabilis, on the creeping stolon also; one of them 
is generally placed a short distance below the calycle; and 
sometimes there is another alittle above it. But though there 
is this remarkable point of agreement between the Norwegian 
Hydroid and the British, they are plainly not referable to the 
same genus. The affinities of O. parasitica are with the 
Plumulariide ; those of O. mirabilis are as clearly with the 
Haleciide. Probably the two families are closely related ; 
in the forms now under consideration they seem to make a 
near approach to one another. Ophiodes mirabilis differs in 
some important particulars from the ordinary type of Halecium ; 
and the points im which it thus differs approximate it to such 
a form as the O. parasitica of Sars. The large polypites, 
which cannot retract themselves within the calycle, are common 
to all the Haleciide and to the genus Plumularia; and we 


now know that organs akin to the sarcothecze are found in both 
the families. 


a 


Hydroida from Deep Water. 131 


As a new genus must be constituted for the Norwegian 
Hydroid, I propose for it the name Ophionema*. It may be 
defined as follows :— 


Suborder THECAPHORA. 
Family Plumulariide. 


OPHIONEMA, n. gen. 


Generic character.—Shoots small, simple or slightly branched, 
jointed, not regularly pinnate or plumose, attached by a 
creeping stolon; hydrothecz sessile, unilateral, cup-shaped ; 
tentaculoid organs distributed singly on the shoots, exten- 
sile, filiform, terminating above in a globular capitulum 
filled with thread-cells, and protected at the base by a 
chitinous cup; gonothece of large size, borne singly near 
the base of the shoots; polypites not retractile within the 
calycles T. 


Ophionema parasiticum, G. O. Sars (sp. unic.). 


Halecium gorgonoide, G. O,. Sars (n. sp.). 


This is another of the specially interesting forms brought to 
light by the exploration of the deeper regions of the sea- 
bottom. In most of its characters it bears a perfect re- 
emblance to the well-known Halectum; but it differs from 
Sn being furnished with a peculiar tentaculoid organ, some- 
what similar to that which occurs on Ophiodes and on the 
new genus Ophionema, which I have constituted in this 
paper. ‘These curious appendages are minute offshoots from 
the ccenosare, which pass outwards through a simple orifice in 
the polypary, and project beyond it as naked, extensile, 
tentaculoid processes of a somewhat clavate figure, terminating 
above in a rounded capitulum filled with thread-cells. They 
differ from the similar structure which occurs on Ophiodes in 
the total absence of the chitinous covering at the base, and in 
the less distinctly capitate form of the free extremity. These 
appendages are distributed in great numbers over the stem and 
branches; and one of them is almost always present in the 
immediate neighbourhood of the calycles. 
There can be no doubt, I think, that they constitute a cha- 
racter of generic value, and that the present species must be 
detached from Halecium. I propose to name the new genus 


* From équs, a snake, and v7jya, a tentacle. 
+ Lhave included in this diagnosis some family characters. 


132 Rey. T. Hincks on Norwegian 


that must be formed for its reception Hydrodendron ; it may 
be characterized as follows :— 


Suborder THECAPHORA. 
Family Haleciide. 
Hydrodendron, n. gen. 

Generic character.—Zoophyte plant-like, much branched, 
rooted by a creeping stolon; hydrothece biserial, tubular, 
jointed to a short lateral process from the stem; polypites 
very large, partially retractile; tentaculoid appendages 
minute, filiform, naked, terminating above in a subglobose 


capituluin filled with thread-cells, distributed over the stem 
and branches, one below each calycle ; gonothecee unknown. 


Hydrodendron gorgonoide, G. O. Sars (sp. unic.). 

The polypites of this interesting form are remarkably large, 
furnished with about twenty-four tentacles, and of a bright 
yellow colour. The compound stem is thick and rugged and 
nregularly branched, and when covered with its conspicuous 
coloured polypites, the species bears, as Sars has remarked, a 
striking resemblance to a Gorgonda. It is peculiarly tree-like 
in appearance, and fully entitled to the generic name which I 
have given it. It has many characteristic features; but of 
course its principal distinction is to be found in the curious 
appendages to which I have referred. 


Lafoéa fruticosa, M. Sars. 

Amongst the Lafoéide included in Sars’s catalogue of Nor- 
wegian species is the L. fruticosa, M. Sars, which was de- 
scribed many years since by his father in his ‘ Zoologisk Reise 
i Lofoten og Finmarken.’ This form I have identified with 
the L. gracillima, Alder*; and in doing so I had the concur- 
rence of Mr. Alder himself, who believed that his species was 
identical with the Norwegian, and that his name must yield 
to the earlier designation conferred by Sars. Mr. G. O. Sars, 
however, thinks that I have decided wrongly ; he figures what 
he supposes to be his father’s species, and holds that it is 
certainly distinct from ZL. gracillima. In this, I have no 
doubt, he is right; I have as little doubt that his figure does 
not represent L. fruticosa, but another and very different 
species. It is, in fact, referable to the form which I have else- 
where described as Lafoéa grandis. 

* ‘History of British Hydroid Zoophytes,’ i. p. 202. 

+ Vide a paper in the present Number of the ‘Annals’ on Icelandic 
Hydroida (infra, p. 148). 


Hydroida from Deep Water. 133 


A reference to M. Sars’s more detailed description of his 
L. fruticosa, in his paper “ Bemerkninger over fire Norske 
Hydroider”’ (1862), will show that it is very different from 
the form which his son has now figured. The latter has a 
regular, campanulate calycle of considerable breadth; the 
calycle of the former is described as bearing a general resem- 
blance to that of L. dumosa, and as being slightly bent, with 
the convex side of the curve turned upwards, or occasionally 
reversed. In short, it is represented as being tubular and bent, 
whereas the hydrotheca in G. O. Sars’s figure is campanulate 
and straight. 'The only differences which Prof. Sars could detect 
between his species and Alder’s were that in the latter the ca- 
lycle was rather more slender than in the northern form, and the 
pedicle “ loosely twisted” instead of being distinctly ringed. 
But Alder’s LZ. gracillima has a long, narrow, tubular calycle, 
totally unlike that which the younger Sars has figured in his 
paper. I have, however, other and very conclusive evidence 
that the L. fruticosa is not what the last-named naturalist 
supposes it to be. Prof. Sars and Mr. Alder corresponded 
about their species and exchanged specimens; and I have in 
my possession a bottle sent me by the latter, and labelled by 
him, containing Norwegian examples of L. fruticosa, which 
he had received from its discoverer. From these specimens 
the figures (Plate VI. figs. 8-10) accompanying my paper on 
Icelandic Hydroids in the present number were drawn (with the 
camera lucida) ; beside them [ have placed a pair of calycles 
(Plate VI. figs. 6, 7) from specimens of L. gracillima dredged 
at Oban. ‘The close similarity between the two is at once 
apparent; the form may be said to be identical in both; and 
the only difference between them to which I should be dis- 
posed to attach the slightest significance is found in the cha- 
racter of the pedicle. In the British form it is merely twisted 
into two or three imperfect whorls; in the northern it is com- 
posed of three or four rings. Sometimes they are almost 
obsolete (Plate VI. figs. 9, 10) ; but traces of them may always 
be detected. I confess I cannot regard this trifling variation 
as a specific distinction, and must therefore continue to rank 
the L. gracillima of Alder as a synonym of the older L. fru- 
ticosa of Sars. 

I may add that, in his account of the latter species, Prof. 
Sars has remarked on the thinness and delicacy of the mate- 
rial composing the calycles, and tells us that when dried they 
collapse and shrivel up. The same holds good of L. gracit- 
lima; but in the case of Lafoéa grandis (to which | refer 
G. U. Sars’s figures) the walls of the hydrothecz are of very 
stout material, and retain their form in dried specimens. 


134 Rey. T. Hincks on Norwegian 


Calycella producta, G. O. Sars (n. sp.). 


The species described under this name will probably prove 
to belong to the genus Lovénella (mihi). Its position cannot, 
of course, be absolutely determined until the history of 
its reproduction is known; but it closely resembles the L. 
clausa (Lovén), and is very unlike any known member of the 
genus Calycella. Its polypite too (so far as the figure affords the 
means of judging) is of a totally different type from that of 
Calycella; so that if the characters of its gonosome should 
separate it from Lovénella, it must still be referred to some 
other genus. Lovénella is propagated by means of medusiform 
planoblasts. 

The present species differs from the British LZ. clausa 
principally in the comparative shortness of the conical oper- 
culum, and the absence of all annulation or crenation on the 
stem, except at the very base. 


Lafoéina tenuis, M. Sars. 


This remarkable Hydroid was first described by Prof. M. 
Sars in 1868*; but we have now a further account of it and 
an excellent figure from his son. Bearing a curiously close 
resemblance in its general character to Cuspidella humilis 
(mihi), it is distinguished from the latter form by the extra- 
ordinary appendages, allied in structure and function to the 
sarcothece of the Plumularians, with which it is furnished. 
These are distributed in great numbers along the creeping stolon, 
amongst the calycles; they consist of a filiform offshoot from 
the ectoderm, somewhat enlarged at the upper extremity and 
invested by a thin chitinous covering. 

In the capitular portion are lodged a few large thread-cells ; 
and immediately above it there is a circular orifice in the 
chitinous envelope, through which the long barbed threads 
are discharged. These appendages not unfrequently almost 
equal the calycles in height, and largely exceed them in 
number. They remind us of the tubular sarcothece of the 
genus Aglaophenia, though it does not appear that the sar- 
costyle has the power of emitting amceboid processes. They 
may be regarded as an intermediate form between the Plumu- 
larian sarcotheca and the tentaculoid organ of Ophiodes and 
Ophionema. 

I have lately ascertained that specimens of a Hydroid from 
Shetland and from the Northumberland coast, which I formerly 
referred to Cuspidella humilis, really belong to the present 


* “ Fortsatte Bidr. til Kundskaben om Dyrelivets Udbredning i Hayets 
Dybder,” Vid. Selsk. Forh. f. 1868 (Christiania). 


Hydroida from Deep Water. 135 


species, so that Lafoéina tenuis must take its place in our 
fauna. At the time I noticed the transparent clavate processes 
associated with the calycles, but supposed them to be some 
parasitic growth. 

A question may arise whether Cuspidella humilis is a 
distinct form at all, or whether it has been founded on ex- 
amples of Lafoéina. I have been able to settle this point 
conclusively by a reference to specimens of the former; and 
Sars, who is intimately acquainted with the latter Hydroid, 
includes Cuspidella humilis also in his list of Norwegian 
species, and therefore recognizes them as distinct. 

I have carefully re-examined the other species of Cusp7- 
della (C. grandis and C. costata), and find them to be un- 
doubtedly destitute of the appendages. 


Gonothyrea hyalina, Hincks. 


This fine species I have referred provisionally to Gono- 
thyrea*, having only had the opportunity of examining im- 
mature gonophores on specimens preserved in spirit. Sars, 
however, has obtained it at Lofoten with fully developed 
gonophores exhibiting the characteristic structure of this 
genus, and has thus definitely settled its systematic position. 


Acaulis primarius, Stimpson. 

We have hitherto known this interesting Hydroid im- 
perfectly, through the description of it given by Stimpson in 
his ‘ Marine Invertebrata of Grand Manan.’ Sars, however, 
has obtained it in deep water (40-100 fathoms) off the Norwe- 
gian coast on muddy ground, and has thoroughly investigated 
its structure. 

The two most important points which he has determined are 
the mode of its attachment and the history of its reproduction. 
Stimpson found his specimen floating in the open sea, and 
describes Acaulis as permanently free. It appears, however (as 
Allman had conjectured) that this is an error ; the stalk-like por- 
tion of the body below the aboral wreath of tentacles is invested 
by an exceedingly thin hyaline skin, which passes far beyond 
its free conical extremity in the form of a perfectly transparent 
sheath, and towards the base is thickly covered with small 
grains of sand and fragments of mud. By means of this 
sheath the polypite no doubt roots itself in the sand or ooze, as 
Corymorpha seems to do by the help of a very similar 
structure. The reproductive bodies are simple fixed sporosacs, 
developed in great number immediately above the proximal 


* History of Brit. Hydr. Zooph. i. 184, pl. xxxv. figs. 2, 2a. 


136 On Norwegian Hydroida from Deep Water. 


tentacles and amongst the capitate arms which thickly cover 
the whole of the upper portion of the body. Acaulis is 
closely related to the Tubulariide (through Corymorpha) and 
the Pennariidx, but seems entitled to stand as the type of a 
separate family. Myriothela, on the contrary, I should connect 
more immediately with the Corynide ; and the present species, 
as Sars has suggested, may be regarded as an intermediate 
form between it and Corymorpha. 


Myriothela phrygia, Fabricius. 


The British species of the genus Myriothela has hitherto 
been identified with the MW. arctica, M. Sars, and the earlier 
Lucernarta phrygia of Fabricius ; and the specific name con- 
ferred by the latter author has taken its place in our nomen- 
clature. It appears, however, according to Mr. G. O. Sars, 
that two distinct forms exist, both of which occur in the 
Norwegian waters, and that the one which has been observed 
on our coasts differs from that which Fabricius first discovered 
and Prof. M. Sars afterwards so well described. It becomes 
necessary, therefore, to revert to the earliest name conferred 
on the British species, which we owe to Vigurs (1849). It 
will stand hereafter as MW. Cocksii, while the original species 
must retain the name of phrygia. 

It is to be regretted that Sars has not given us a fuller 
description of the northern form, and indicated more precisely 
the points in which it differs from the British. He tells us 
generally that it is distinguished from it by its different mode 
of attachment, and that its gonophores are borne on more or 
less branched processes furnished with capitate tentacles, 
resembling those which are scattered over the body. 


Syncoryne eximia, Allman. 


To this species, an inhabitant of the Laminarian zone on 
our English coasts, Sars refers a Syncoryne taken at Bodé in 
80-100 fathoms. Judging, however, from his brief account, 
his identification seems to me more -than doubtful. He de- 
scribes his species as having a peculiarly dark brown polypary, 
which is most obscurely ringed; the polypites have very few 
tentacles. S. exi’mia, on the contrary, has a transparent, 
light-coloured polypary, and its polypites are furnished with 
as many as from twenty to thirty tentacles. The annulation 
is very distinct so far as it goes, bemg confined, however, to 
the very base of the principal stems, and to certain portions 
of the branches. It will be found, I believe, that the Nor- 


Mr. J. Gould on a new Species of Fruit-Pigeon. 137 


wegian deep-water Syncoryne is a different and probably a 
new species. 


The following British Hydroids have their range of dis- 
tribution extended to Norway as the result of the investigations 
recorded in this paper :-— 


Plumularia setacea, Ellis. | Calycella syringa, Linn. 
Antennularia antennina, Linn. Cuspidella humilis, Hincks. 
Diphasia alata, Hincks. Gonothyrea hyalina, Hincks. 
tamarisca, Linn. Campanularia Hincksii, Alder. 
Sertularia Gayi, Lame. Tubularia simplex, Alder. 
Halecium Beanii, Johnst. Dicoryne conferta, Alder. 
sessile, Norman. Myriothela Cocks, Vigurs. 
Calycella fastigiata, Alder. Hydractinia echinata, Fleming. 


I cannot take leave of this important paper without con- 
gratulating its able author on his most interesting discoveries, 
and on the valuable contribution which he has made to the 
literature of the Hydroida. 


XIX.—On a new Species of Fruit-Pigeon from Northern 
Queensland. By Joun GOULD, F.R.S. &e. 


Tuts little pigeon, which I propose to call Lamprotreron porphy- 
rostictus, is totally distinct from its ally, the L. superbus, from 
the same part of Australia. ‘The most conspicuous character 
of this bird is the purplish-blue spot at the back of the head ; 
hence its specific appellation porphyrostictus. 

The throat is grey, and the abdomen crossed with two in- 
distinct bars of yellowish white ; this latter colour also pervades 
all the outer edges of the under tail-coverts ; with the excep- 
tion of the two middle ones, all the tail-feathers are obscurely 
tipped with greyish white; the secondaries and the larger 
wing-coverts are edged with yellow; feet bright orange ; tarsi 
thickly clothed with green feathers ; bill dark. 

The young of the year, having nearly attained its full 
size, differs from the adult in the total absence of the purple 
spot at the back of the head, and in having the lesser and 
greater wing-coverts fringed with yellow. 

Total length 7 inches, bill 2, wing 43, tail 22, tarsi 3. 

The two specimens of this species I possess were obtained 
at Cape York; and J need scarcely say that before describing 
this bird I have compared it with all the species in our national 
collections, brought home by Mr. Wallace from the Papuan 
group of islands, and I find it quite distinct from each of 
them. 


138 Dr. A. Giinther on Fishes obtained from 


XX.—WNotes on some Fishes obtained at considerable Depths 
in the North Atlantic. By Dr. ALBERT GUNTHER, F.R.S. 


ProressoR WYVILLE THOMSON, before his departure with 
the ‘Challenger’ expedition, kindly placed in my hands for 
examination some fishes which had been obtained at consider- 
able depths during the cruise of H.M.S. ‘ Porcupine’ in the 
year 1869. In the first imstance they had been sent for 
determination to the late Mr. Couch of Polperro, who affixed 
labels with names to the bottles; but no descriptions of the 
species were published by him; so that I should have omitted 
to allude to his nomenclature (which cannot be adopted), if I 
had not been informed that the fishes were enumerated under 
those names in one of the ‘ Porcupine’ reports. 

Small as the collection is, itis of interest in two respects :-— 

1. Inasmuch as it offers additional evidence that fishes 
hitherto known from more southern latitudes occur in the 
North Atlantic at a moderate depth (of between 80 and 200 
fathoms) *. 

2. Inasmuch as the fishes from the depth indicated do not 
yet show the well-known characteristics of deep-sea fishes 
developed in any degree. Therefore fishes like Plagyodus, 
Melanocetus, Saccopharynx, Regalecus, Chiasmodus, &c. must 
inhabit a much deeper horizontal zone (from 300 to 800 
fathoms), as, indeed, has been supposed and affirmed for many 

ears. 
‘ The jist bottle is marked “ No. 17. (18.6. 69). 54. 10 N. 
10.59 W. 183 fms., muddy sand.” Mr. Couch intended to 
describe the specimen contained in it as ‘“‘Macrourus linearis.” 

This fish, which is not in good condition, crabs having eaten 
holes into various parts of the body, proves to be Gadiculus ar- 
genteus, described by Guichenot in ‘Explor.Algér., Poiss.’ 1850, 
p- 101, pl. vi. fig. 2, from specimens obtained at Algiers. Iam 
not aware that the species has been noticed since ; and therefore 
it is a point of interest to meet with it again in the North 
Atlantic. There is nothing whatever to indicate an affinity 
to Macrourus; indeed Gadiculus proves to be a Gadus slightly 
modified for living at a greater depth. Even the vomerine 
teeth, by the alleged absence of which, according to Guichenot, 
the genus was technically distinguished from Gadus, are 
present ; but the scales, which are deciduous, and lost in our 
specimen, are larger than in the allied species of Gadus. 
The formula of the fin-rays is D. 9 or 10 | 13 | 18. A. 17 | 16. 


V.6. The specimen is 53 inches long. 
* See Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1867, xx. p. 289. 


considerable Depths in the North Atlantic. 139 


A second bottle (labelled ‘‘ H.M.S. ‘ Porcupine,’ between 
Shetland and Faroe, 200 faths. 1869,” and determined by 
Mr. Couch as “Macrourus, sp. n.”) contains an example, about 
10 inches long, of Coryphenoides norvegicus. It agrees very 
well with Sundevall’s excellent description published in 1840, 
which I can supplement by giving the number of dorsal rays 
as about 190, the tail of the specimen being perfect. There 
are eight or nine series of scales between the first dorsal and 
lateral line—and not four or five, as stated in the diagnosis of 
the ‘Catal. Fish.’ iv. p. 396, in accordance with Gaimard’s 
figure of this species. Another, smaller specimen of the same 
species was in the third bottle, and stated to be from a depth 
of 540 fathoms. 
The writing on the label originally placed on the third bottle 
has entirely faded and is illegible; but we are informed by a 
second label in Mr. Couch’s handwriting that the bottle con- 
tains a “‘Kurtus and Macrourus, both new. 1869. 540 fathoms.” 
The latter specimen has been noticed above. The former, of 
course, is widely different from the Indian genus to which 
Mr. Couch referred it, and is, in fact, Argyropelecus hemigymnus, 
a species common in the Mediterranean and neighbouring 
parts of the Atlantic. 
A small fourth bottle contains only one specimen; it is 
labelled, in Mr. Couch’s handwriting, ‘‘ Ophidium—eel-like, 
deep sea—1869. H.M.S. ‘Porcupine.’ 180 faths.” This spe- 
cimen is the young of Anguilla Kienert, a species hitherto 
known from the Mediterranean only. 
The fifth bottle (labelled “ H.M.S. ‘ Porcupine.’ Between 
Shetland and Faroe. 180 faths. 1869’’) contains four speci- 
mens, named by Mr. Couch 
Macrourus linearis, C., 
Blennius fasciatus, C., 
Gobius Jeffreysit, 
Callionymus sagitta, C., 

and which I have determined as 
Motella macrophthalma, Gthr., 
Blenniops Ascanii, Walbaum, 
Gobius Jeffreysti, Gthr., 
Liparis vulgaris, Elem. 

It was evidently by a slip of the pen that Mr. Couch applied 
the name ‘“‘Macrourus linearis” again to a very different fish, 
viz. Motella macrophthalma, a species which, together with 
Gobius Jeffreysti, was described and figured by me in this 
Journal, 1867, xx. p. 290. 


140 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the Invertebrate 


XXI1.—On the Invertebrate Marine Fauna and Fishes of St. 
Andrews. By W. C. M‘Intosu, M.D. &ec. 


INTRODUCTION. 


THE beach at St. Andrews combines smooth sandy flats 
with tide-worn ridges of rocks which freely communicate 
with the German Ocean ; and the proximity to rich coralline 
ground renders the products of its storms peculiarly varied. 
An unbroken surface of pure sand extends from the estuary 
of the Tay past that of the Eden to the north-western border 
of the city. From this point the rocks run eastward in 
parallel rows—narrow sandy flats intervening between some of 
the ridges, which, with one exception, are all covered at high 
water. Lines of rocks having a similar arrangement fringe 
the Castle and Pier to the east sands; then a coarse sandy 
and gravelly beach extends in a southerly direction about half 
a mile, after which the jagged rocky border passes round the 
eastern coast to the Frith of Forth. 

The greater part of the sandy bay has a depth of less than 10 
fathoms ; for at this point the 20-fathom line bends outwards 
to the Bell rock. The whole region is thus comparatively 
shallow, and in contrast with that to the north of Arbroath 
Road, or with the Frith of Forth and the neighbouring coast 
on the south. 

If the fine stretch of sand from the river Eden to the city 
(usually termed the West Sands in contradistinction to the Kast 
Sands) which extends to the harbour southward is only en- 
livened in summer by thousands of bleached heart urchins, 
broken shells, skeletons of plaice, frogfish, and haddock, or 
in autumn by the jellies of the medusz, the storms of winter 
and spring wholly alter the aspect. Immense banks of sea- 
weeds mingled with black fragments of wood, coal, and 
muddy matter cover the beach, which in many parts becomes 
brilliantly phosphorescent at night from the zoophytes and 
annelids on the blades of the tangles. Amidst this débris are 
vast numbers of sponges, zoophytes, shells, starfishes, annelids, 
crabs, and fishes which have been swept from their various 
habitats. All storms are not equally prolific; they also vary 
in regard to the abundance of the several groups—a feature 
probably due to the direction of the wind and the invasion of 
particular sites. The waste of marine life in such storms does 
not attract much notice; yet it is extraordinary and so constant 
that it may be regarded to some extent as a check upon its 
uninterrupted development. It is, however, to be remembered 
that even the autumnal ripple in the Outer Hebrides brings 


Marine Fauna and Fishes of St. Andrews. 141 


countless swarms of Salpe, Velelle, Meduse, and other forms 
to die on the beach. 

The tidal rocks, again, which are mostly covered by sea- 
weeds, present a varied and prolific site for many species. 
The rock-pools are both frequent and picturesque; and they 
possess many undisturbed stones, often of large size, the under 
surfaces of which are most favourable for the growth and 
shelter of numerous forms—though of course they cannot be 
compared in this respect with the littoral stones at Herm, which 
have a profusion of rare crabs, annelids, ormers and other 
mollusks, polyzoa, hydroids, and the yellow, red, purple, green, 
and white sponges. The soft sandstone and shale afford an 
ample field for the perforations of Pholas crispata, Saxicava 
rugosa, and Leucodore ciliata. ‘The fissures and chinks of 
the rocks, moreover, as on almost every part of the British 
shores, give shelter to a large number, especially the annelids, 
which find in the muddy or sandy crevices a safe retreat for their 
soft bodies, slender tubes, or muddy tunnels, and opportunities 
for capturing sufficient food at the free margin of the rock or 
from the ingoing currents. It is chiefly in such localities that 
Sipunculus Johnstoni and swarms of Leucodore and Nicomache 
occur, while Nereds cultrifera, Eulalia, Syllis, and the nemer- 
teans are also common. Occasionally an Jdotea is met with ; 
but the general absence of the isopods in these crevices dis- 
tinguishes them from those in the gneiss of the south and 
west, as in the Channel Islands and the Outer Hebrides— 
and especially from the former by the absence of Pilumnus 
hirtellus, Arca, the Sabellide, the Hunicide and their allies. 
To these fissures certain boring annelids and Saxicava chiefly 
retreat when the rocks do not afford a suitable medium for 
their perforations—though at St. Andrews there is free scope 
in this respect, from the sandstones and shales so soft as to be 
pitted deeply by the common limpet to those nearly as dense 
as granite. 

The sea-margin at St. Andrews, like other parts of the 
east coast of Scotland, presents decided differences when 
contrasted with the northern, southern, and western shores, 
though many forms are common to all. Thus the laminarian 
zone at St. Andrews is much less luxuriant than that of the 
Zetlandic waters with the fine forests of gigantic tangles, 
amidst which there is a galaxy of animal life. The vegetation 
of its littoral zone is surpassed by the rich Fuci of the tidal 
rocks and the trailing masses of Chorda filum on the surtace 
of the sea immediately beyond low-water mark in the Outer 
Hebrides. Its marine forms are placed under very different 
circumstances from those in the quiet voes of West Shetland, 

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 11 


142 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the Invertebrate 


as at Cliff Sound and between the Burras, where the still sea- 
water is bridged by a single arch of a few feet. ‘To represent 
the Zostera-fields of the west and south there are but a few 
Conferve, Ulve, and Porphyre attached to stones on the flat 
surfaces of the beach. The calcareous rocks of the south, and 
the multitudes of worm-eaten boulders scattered on many 
parts of the shore, as in the Isle of Wight, form likewise a 
boldly marked contrast. 

Within reach of the modern tide, also, it is interesting to 
find the remains of oceanic animals long since extinct—to see 
Actinia mesembryanthemum attached to a mass of encrinite 
stalks, Litorina rudis in groups on Lingula-shale, and the 
white coils of Sprrorbis incrusting a nodule containing a 
fossil fish. Yet these features do not appear much out of 
place near a city whose pier is to a considerable extent con- 
structed of the fine old stones and ancient oak which once 
formed part of the splendid pile of its cathedral. 

On the whole the zoological features of St. Andrews are 
northern. 


Subkingdom PROTOZOA. 
Class RHIZOPODA. 


Order Spongiade. 


The Sponges of St. Andrews are, perhaps, the least-inves- 
tigated group, partly because a collection carefully made many 
years ago has been lost. In looking over those obtained since, 
Dr. Bowerbank has most kindly given his experienced aid in 
doubtful cases ; and the description of the new species is solely 
his. The littoral forms are scattered in considerable profusion 
between tide-marks under ledges and stones, sometimes near 
high-water mark. Indeed, in the higher pools and tide-runs 
in the latter region they are often peculiarly luxuriant. The 
brightly coloured Halisarca, so abundant on the under surfaces 
ot stones in the Hebrides, and the rarer botryoidal Tethea are 
unknown at St. Andrews, as are likewise the cup and turnip 
sponges of the Zetlandic seas. The greater luxuriance of the 
ubiquitous Halichondria panicea on the stems of the Lami- 
narie further characterizes the coast of the extreme west ; 
and the decay of the seaweed often leaves tubes of sponge 
from a foot to eighteen inches in length. In like manner the 
greatly increased size of Grantia ciliata, the vast abundance of 
Hymeniacidon celata, its beautiful arborescent patterns in the 
tide-worn shells, and its perforations in the limestone rocks are 
diagnostic of the warmer waters of the southern coast. 


Marine Fauna and Fishes of St. Andrews. 143 


The classification of Dr. Bowerbank in his valuable work pub- 
lished by the Ray Society has been that followed in the list. 


Suborder I. CALCAREA. 


Grantia compressa, Fabr.; Bowerb. Brit. Spong. ii. p. 17. 

Abundant on Cynthia grossularia under shelving rocks be- 
tween tide-marks, and attached to the roots of Fuci and other 
seaweeds. It occasionally assumes an abnormal form, and 
has a broad attached surface under stones. Longest, 3 inches. 


Grantia ciliata, Fabry. ; Bowerb. vol. ii. p. 19. 


Not unfrequent on laminarian roots cast on the west sands 
after storms, and growing near low-water mark at the East 
Rocks. The species somewhat resembles a grain of oat re- 
moved from its husk, 


Leucosolenia botryoides, Ellis & Sol. ; Bowerb. vol. ii. p. 28. 


Abundant on the under surfaces of stones in tidal pools, 
especially if large and little-disturbed. It frequently accom- 
panies Grantia compressa. 


Leuconia nivea, Grant; Bowerb. vol. ii. p. 36. 


Found abundantly in the deeper tidal pools, under large 
stones which have been long untouched. It covers spaces 
several inches square ; and its margin is generally rounded and 
“finished” like the border of a lichen. Most of the speci- 
mens have their surfaces elevated into firm ruge, resembling 
miniature mountain-ranges, some of the crests rising into 
flattened lobes ? inch in height. There are at least two 
varieties of this sponge—the first of which, besides the equi- 
angular triradiate spicula of the skeleton, the minute acerate 
ones of the interstitial and dermal membranes, and the uni- 
eurvo-cruciform, has many spined acuate spicula of consider- 
able dimensions and others of the same size approaching the 
fusiformi-spinulate character. In the other variety the latter 
kinds are so little developed, if present, as not to be dis- 
tinguished from the ordinary minute acerate forms. In both, 
almost all the latter are distinctly spined. 


Suborder II. S1iicna. 


Hymeniacidon ficus, Esper ; Bowerb. vol. i. p. 206. 
Occasionally from deep water, attached to dead shells. Cla- 
vate specimens frequently grow from the smaller end of Den- 
talium entalis. "This species seems to frequent gi ground. 
1 


144 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the Invertebrate 


Hymeniacidon celata, Grant; Bowerb. vol. i. p. 212. 


Abundant in shells from deep water, between the layers of 
which it tunnels its devious tracks. ‘This is one of the main 
agents in causing the disintegration of dead shells. 


Halichondria panicea, Pallas; Bowerb. vol. 1. p. 229. 


Scarcely a stone can be lifted near low-water mark, amongst 
the rocks, but has a patch of this common sponge. Under 
the cavernous ledges overhanging rock-pools it spreads its 
structure over the dark red Cynthia, matting together sea- 
weeds and corallines, and hanging in pendulous nodules on 
interwoven stalks of Corallina officinalis and Fuci. Near the 
Maiden Rock splendid specimens are found incrusting a square 
foot or two of rock in some of the quiet pools. It also abounds 
on the backs of crabs, such as Hyas araneus and Inachus 
dorynchus, covering the former so completely that it can 
scarcely be recognized except by its legs ; and besides the pro- 
minent oscula of the sponge, on this complex back are gaps 
for Balani, shells, and seaweeds. On the carapace of the latter 
species it forms a thinner coating, but is likewise grouped in 
little nodules on the legs. A mass as large as a good-sized 
apple surrounds the stem of Chalina oculata; and it is a com- 
mon envelopment of various stones, mollusks, seaweeds, and 
tangle-roots. The usual colours of the sponge are yellow, 
brown, purple, green, and grey. In the interstices of the 
masses thrown on shore at the West Sands are to be found mul- 
titudes of marine animals, besides incorporated shells ; and the 
fine patches at the East Rocks are favourite feeding-grounds of 
Doris tuberculata. The forms of the spicula of this species 
are variable, some being much curved like a stretched bow, a 
few more or less ineequiacerate vermiculoid, besides, of course, 
the ordinary diagnostic spicula. The odour emitted on tearing 
it from the rock is characteristic, but causes no sneezing. 


Halichondria, n. s.* 


The following is Dr. Bowerbank’s description :—“ Sponge 
coating, thin. Surface smooth and even. Oscula more or 
less elevated, dispersed, margins thin. Pores inconspicuous. 
Dermal membrane aspiculous. Skeleton very irregular, rete 
mostly unispiculous, occasionally bi- or trispiculous ; spicula 
acerate, short and stout. Interstitial membranes aspiculous. 

“Colour in the dried state light nut-brown. Examined in 
the living and dried states. 

“The nearest alliance with the known species of the first 

* Dr. Bowerbank has courteously named this species H. M‘Intoshii, 
Bowerb. 


* 


Marine Fauna and Fishes of St. Andrews. 145 


section of our British Halichondrie is with H. regularis. The 
spicula of the two species are as nearly alike in size and pro- 
portions as possible; but this is their only approximation to 
each other. In their other characters they differ to a con- 
siderable extent. The colour of H. regularis in the dried 
state is milk-white ; that of H. M‘Intoshii is nut-brown. An- 
other important difference is, that while the skeleton of ZH. 
regularis is remarkable for its symmetry, that of H. M‘Intoshit 
is regular to a very considerable degree.” 

This form is not uncommon on the under surface of stones 
in tide-runs and somewhat muddy pools not far from high- 
water mark at the East Rocks. Its greyish brown colour, 
smooth surface, and prominent, well-defined oscula distinguish 
it at first sight from its allies. 


Halichondria incrustans, Esper; Bowerb. vol. i. p. 249. 


Occasionally found under stones near low-water mark, 
especially at the East Rocks. It forms a thickish crust; and 
the spicula very much resemble one of the knobbed walking- 
sticks which taper from above downwards. 


Suborder III. Krrarosa. 
Chalina oculata, Pallas; Bowerb. vol. ii. p. 361. 


Thrown in great profusion on the West Sands after storms ; 
and small specimens are also found under the ledges of rocks 
near low-water mark. ‘The shape of the specimens varies 
much: some are flattened and much divided into branches of 
various sizes, either narrow or broad; others have their 
branches much matted together so as to form a connected and 
somewhat coarse “ gorgonian”’ appearance, more or less sepa- 
rated at the tip. In some the branches arise mostly from one 
side of an unbroken prolongation of the sponge-tissue. One 
grows on a valve of Mytilus modiolus, and has a mass of 
Halichondria panicea round a branch at its base. Another 
envelops the stem and branches of Delesserta sanguinea, the 
leaves of which appear here and there from the centre of 
the sponge. Many are attached to small rolled stones. 
Those from the beach are loaded with sand, spines of the 
common and purple heart urchins, bristles of the sea-mouse ; 
and many starfishes seek refuge in their interstices. 


Chalina limbata, Bowerb.; vol. i. p. 373. 


Not uncommon on the under surfaces of stones in tidal pools, 
either coating the surface of the stone or attached to the stems 
of Corallina officinalis. 

(To be continued. | 


146 Rey. T. Hincks on Deep-water 


XXII.— On Deep-water Hydroida from Iceland. 
By the Rev. Tuomas Hrincxs, B.A., F.R.S. 


[Plates VI., VII., & VIII.] 


Some years have elapsed since Mr. Busk placed in my hands 
a bottle containing some northern Hydroida and Polyzoa 
which had been obtained by Dr. Wallich. The contents have 
been long since partially examined, and some of the results 
have been already published ; but no separate report upon them 
has appeared, and some new forms which they have yielded 
are still undescribed. JI propose therefore in the present 
paper to deal with the Hydroid portion. The gathering, 
though a very small one, is characteristic and interesting. It 
was taken up from a depth of 100 fathoms off Reikiavig, 
Iceland, ‘‘ amongst icebergs, grounded and drifting.” ‘The 
number of species observed is only seventeen; and of these a 
large proportion belong to the Campanularian group of the 
Lafoéide. The extreme north seems to be in a special manner 
the home of the minute forms composing this family. No less 
than twelve species have been obtained off the coast of Norway 
by Dr. M. Sars and his son G. Ossian Sars, whose name is 
so honourably connected with the early history of «deep-sea 
dredging. ‘To these must be added four more, which I have 
found amongst the Icelandic dredgings, raising the whole 
number of Lafoéidee known to inhabit the northern seas to 
sixteen. The British species number eleven. 

These Hydroids are mostly inhabitants of deep water; off 
the coasts of Norway many of them occur at depths of from 
50 to 100 fathoms, others at depths of 150, 200, and 300 
fathoms respectively. ‘The Icelandic specimens, as I have 
mentioned, were taken up in 100 fathoms*. A few of the Nor- 
weglan species occur in shallower water, ranging from 20 to 
50 fathoms ; but they constitute a very small proportion of the 
whole number. Some have a wide bathymetrical range: thus 
Lafoéa dumosa occurs in the littoral or Laminarian region, 
and has been dredged in 145 fathoms; and L. gracillima, 
which I have obtained in great luxuriance at Oban in 15-20 
fathoms, has occurred to G. O. Sars off the island of Hvitingsé 
in 150. F%lellum serpens, the common parasite of some of the 
larger Sertularians in the “Coralline zone,” ranges, according 


* During the ‘Porcupine’ expedition a Lafoéa was dredged up from a 
depth of 545 fathoms. It was obtained from the “cold area” between 
Shetland and the Faroe Islands, at a point where the temperature of the 
water varied from 30°°5 Fahy. to 29°°8 Fahr, (vide Allman’s ‘ Tubularian 
Hydroids,’ part ii. p. 165). 


Hydroida from Iceland. 147 


to the same excellent observer, to the great depth of 300 
fathoms. On the whole, the Lafoéide may be regarded as a 
deep-water group, and as most richly developed in the 
northern seas, so far as our present knowledge goes. 

In the Icelandic dredgings they occur in profusion, and most 
of them attain a remarkable size. In the present paper I shall 
describe a new species (Lafoéa grandis) which is a veritable 
giant amongst its pigmy kindred, its calycles being nearly 
three times as large as those of the well-known L. dumosa. 
The representatives of Calycella syringa are about twice as 
large as those which may be met with on our own coasts. 
Calycella pygmea * as found amongst the icebergs has almost 
ceased to deserve itsname. I may also mention that Labrador 
specimens of Lafoéa pocillum are about twice the size of others 
obtained at Oban. And the larger growth is not confined to 
the Lafoéide ; a gigantic variety of Sertularella polyzonias is 
also present, the calycles of which are very nearly three times 
as ample as those of the normal form, while the whole habit is 
singularly robust. Sertularella tricuspidata, a distinctly north- 
ern form and the principal element of the Icelandic dredgings, 
exhibits the greatest luxuriance and beauty, and bears in 
amazing profusion the reproductive capsules, which frequently 
line the branches throughout their whole extent. 

What may be the cause of this unusual development [ 
cannot pretend, with my present information, to decide ; but 

he fact is undoubted. 


The following is a list of the species ;— 


Subkingdom CQfLENTERATA. 
Class HY DROZOA. 


Order HyDROIDA. 
Suborder THECARHORA. 
Family Campanulariide. 
Campanularia volubilis, Linn. 
Abundant on Sertularia &c. With capsules. 
* In my ‘History of the British Hydroid Zoophytes’ I have ranked 
this species doubtfully amongst the unoperculated forms which constitute 


the genus Lafoéa. But 1 have ascertained that it is in fact provided with 
an operculum ; and it must therefore be transferred to the genus Calycella. 


148 Rev. T. Hineks on Deep-water 


Family Lafoéide. 


Lafoéa grandis, n. sp. Pl. VI. figs. 1, 2. 
Lafoéa fruticosa, G. O. Sars, Bid. till Kundskaben om Norges Hydroi- 
der, p. 26, pl. iv. figs. 16-18. 

Stem erect, compound, much and irregularly branched. 
Hydrothece large, campanulate, with a plain circular margin, 
borne on ringed pedicels (about three rings), and somewhat 
spirally disposed. Gonothece unknown. 


The calycles of this handsome species are distinguished 
from those of all the other members of the genus by their size 
and campanulate form. As I have already mentioned, they 
are about three times as large as those of L. dumosa, and are 
raised on a well-developed pedicel with three or four strongly 
marked annulations. Instead of being tubular, they are of a 
tall bell-shaped figure, expanding slightly towards the orifice. 
They occur in pairs, which spring alternately from different 
aspects of the stem, and assume therefore a somewhat spiral 
arrangement. 

Though very abundant, LZ. grandis only occurs in fragments 
amongst the Icelandic dredgings ; but Sars’s figure* shows that 
it attains a luxuriant shrubby growth, rising to a height of 
about an inch and a half. 


Lafoéa fruticosa,M.Sars. PI1.VI. figs.6-10, and Pl. VIT. fig.16. 
Campanularia gracilima, Alder. 


I have given my reasons elsewhere for identifying the 
L. fruticosa of Sars with Alder’s C.gracillima, notwithstanding 
the opposite decision of G. O. Sars}. In one of the plates 
which accompany this paper I have given figures, carefully 
drawn with the camera lucida, of the Norwegian and the 
British forms for comparison. Both the variety with a twisted 
pedicle, described by Alder as CO. gracillima, and the normal 
L. fruticosa occur amongst the Icelandic dredgings. 


Calycella syringa, Linn. 

Abundant on other zoophytes. 

The calycles about double the size they attain in British 
examples. The gonothece are borne plentifully on the Ice- 
landic specimens, and on others which I have received from 
Labrador. ‘They are comparatively rare on our coasts. 

Lofoten, from 60-80 fathoms, and more commonly from 

* Bidrag till Kundskaben om Norges Hydroider, pl. iv. fig. 16. 


+ Vide a paper on new Norwegian Hydroida from deep water in the 
present Number of the ‘Annals’ (supra, p. 182). 


Hydroida from Iceland. 149 


20-30 fathoms. ‘On the stems of Hudendrium capillare, 
Alder, which is often almost covered with its little transparent 
calycles and reproductive capsules, as with a fine down” 


(G. O. Sars). 


Calycella pygmea, Alder. Pl. VII. fig. 15. 
On other Hydroids. 


Calycella obliqua,n.sp. Pl. VI. figs. 4, 5. 


Stem erect, simple, rooted by a filiform stolon. Hydrothece 
alternate, elongate, tubular (height more than four times as 
great as the breadth), gracefully curved, the convex side upper- 
most, obliquely truncate above, furnished with an internal 
membranous operculum, and borne on short ringed pedicels. 
Gonothece unknown. 


This very distinct and elegant form is at once distinguish- 
able from all its kindred by its obliquely truncate hydrothece. 
The wall of the calycle on one side for a short distance below 
the margin seems to be simply membranous, and to fold 
inwards slantwise across the tube, so as to form a kind of 
internal operculum. 

Several specimens have occurred growing on other zoo- 
phytes. 


Calycella quadridentata, n.sp. Pl. VIII. figs. 17-20. 


Hydrothece cylindrical, usually slightly incurved on one 
side, the height about three times as great as the breadth, with 
a quadridentate margin and an operculum composed of four 
pieces, borne on ringed pedicels of variable length (3-7 rings), 
which rise at intervals from a creeping stem. Gonothece un- 
known. 


This species, which bears a general resemblance to C. sy- 
ringa, is at once known by the quadridentate rim of the 
calycles and the quadripartite operculum. The denticles on 
the margin are well marked; and the operculum is composed 
of four broad and short segments, corresponding with the 
spaces between them; whereas in C. syringa it is made up of 
as many as eight or nine rather narrow and elongate pieces, 
forming a somewhat elevated cone (PI. VIII. fig. 24). The 
calycles are of the same general shape in the two species ; but 
the outline is stiffer and less wavy in C. syringa than in the 
present form. The pedicel of C. guadridentata 1s rather thicker 
than that of its ally, and is usually, as far as I have observed, 
short (3 or 4 rings), though sometimes the number rises as 
high as seven. 


150 Rey. T. Hincks on Deep-water 


This elegant form is not uncommon amongst the Icelandic 
dredgings, creeping over other Hydroids. 


Cuspidella humilis, Hincks. 
Creeping over the stems of Halecium crenulatum. 


Lafoéina tenuis, M. Sars. 


This remarkable Hydroid, first described by the elder Sars, 
and figured by his son in his recent paper on Norwegian 
Hydroida, occurs amongst the Icelandic dredgings, creeping 
over other zoophytes. The species may readily be mistaken 
for the Cuspidella humilis (mihi), from which it is chiefly di- 
stinguished by the very remarkable sarcothecee with which it is 
furnished. In preserved specimens these may be easily over- 
looked. 


Filellum serpens, Hassall. 


Creeping over the stem of other zoophytes. It has a wide 
distribution on the Norwegian coasts, and occurs at great 
depths as well as in shallower water. 


Lofoten, from 300 fathoms (G. O. Sars). 


Family Haleciide. 
Halecium muricatum, Ellis and Solander. 


A few fragments with reproductive capsules. 
This species has been found off the coast of Labrador. 


Halecium crenulatum, n.sp. Pl. VIII. figs. 21-23. 


Stem compound, branched; branches straight, regularly 
crenulated above each joint. Hydrothece supported on very 
short lateral processes, single or in pairs, alternate, elongate, 
expanding gradually towards the margin, which is slightly 
everted, twisted at the base, bearmg a strongly annulated 
branchlet given off from the side. Gonothece ovate, shortly 
stalked, springing singly or in pairs from the lateral process 
beneath the calycle. 


» The above diagnosis is of necessity defective; for though 
many fragments of the species occur amongst the Icelandic 
dredgings, I have not met with a specimen in a perfect con- 
dition, nor even with a piece of any considerable size. From 
an examination of the fragments, | am able to say that in its 
mature state it possesses a compound stem; but of the habit I 
can give no account; the portions from which my description 
is ee are either detached branches or impertectly 


developec ots. The minute characters, however, are suffi- 


Hydroida from Iceland. 151 


ciently marked, and I have no doubt that the species is distinct 
from any hitherto described. It makes the nearest approach 
to H. labrosum, Alder; but its calycles are very different from 
those of the latter species. They are not annulated towards 
the base, nor have they the much everted rim so characteristic 
of H. labrosum. The lower portion, supporting the cup in 
which the base of the polypite is lodged*, is perfectly plain, 
or exhibits only a slight twist near the point of origin. The 
whole hydrotheca is trumpet-shaped, expanding gradually 
upwards towards the margin, which is but slightly everted. 
From the lower part, a little beneath the cup, a short, strongly 
annulated branchlet is given off. Frequently the primary 
ealycle supports a second, as is commonly the case in this 
genus, which rises from within it. 

The stem is very regularly and distinctly crenulated above 
each joint; and thisgs a marked character, giving a very ele- 
gant appearance to the species. On the portions which I have 
had the opportunity of examining there were sometimes short 
branchlets alternating with the calycles, and exhibiting the 
same structure as the larger stems. The lateral processes 
supporting the calycles are very short. The gonothece are 
ovate, membranous, borne on a short stalk which is not 
ringed, and are developed on the lateral process. The stems 
are of a dark horn-colour. 


Family Sertulariide. 
Sertularia tenera, G. O. Sars. 


One or two specimens occur of this interesting form, which 
has recently been obtained at great depths (150 fathoms) off 
the coast of Norway by G. O. Sars. 


Sertularella tricuspidata, Alder. 
Very abundant and fine. 


Sertularella polyzonias, Linn. PI. VII. figs. 11, 12. 


Abundant. 

The robust habit and gigantic calycles give a very marked 
character to the northern variety of this common species. So 
distinctive is its appearance that, while there are no differences 
entitling it to specific rank, it is worthy of being recorded as 
S. polyzonias, var. gigantea, Sars mentions a robust variety 


* The polypites of Halecium are only partially retractile; and little 
more than the base of the body is contained in the cup-like chamber 
which forms the upper portion of the hydrotheca. The lower sa is 
tubular, and in the present case almost eae throughout, whereas in 
H. labrosum it is strongly annulated near the base. 


152 Rey. T. Hincks on Deep-water 


of this species which he had obtained from Greenland and 
Massachusetts; it may very probably be identical with the 
Icelandic form. Packard also tells us that in the Straits of 
Belle Isle (Labrador), S. polyzonias is found “ very stout and 
large ” in the deeper water. 


Sertularella geniculata, n. sp. Pl. VII. figs. 13, 14. 


Stems slender, decidedly geniculate, simple or slightly 
branched, jointed and twisted above each calycle; the 
internodes long, attenuated below, and bent in opposite direc- 
tions. Hydrothece very distant, ribbed transversely, chiefly 
on the upper half, rather broad below, and narrowing gradually 
towards the aperture, which bears four very prominent teeth, 
is sinuated deeply between them, and is surmounted by a 
conical quadripartite operculum. Gronothecee unknown. 

Height (of the largest specimen met with) about 3 inch. 


This is a critical species. In general character it closely 
resembles S. tenella, Alder; but, after careful examination, I 
feel little doubt that it is a distinct form. The stem is zig- 
zagged ; the internodes, which bend in opposite directions, 
are so much attenuated below as to have the appearance of 
distinct pieces jointed together rather than of the segments of 
a continuous stem. They are longer than those of S. tenella, 
and rather less decidedly twisted or annulated at the base. 
The calycles are about half as large again as those of the 
allied species ; they want the regular barrel-shape of the latter, 
are not rounded off below, but broad and squarish, and do not 
taper off so decidedly towards the upper extremity. They 
want altogether the constriction immediately below the 
aperture, which, to a greater or less extent, is found in 8S, 
tenella. The teeth are very large, prominent, and acuminate, 
and the margin is deeply sinuated between them; while 
in the last-named species they are comparatively incon- 
spicuous, and the rim is very slightly depressed between them. 
The aperture is ‘ conspicuously squared’ in S, tenella, and 
the operculum rises but little above it; in S. geniculata the 
operculum is prominently conical. The transverse ribs are 
much less pronounced, not giving the sharply crenulated 
appearance to the sides which they do in S. tenella; and they 
extend generally over a smaller proportion of the calycle. The 
contour and ‘ set”’ of the hydrothece are very different in the 
two forms, though it is very difficult to give an exact idea of the 
difference in a description. ‘The sides are rounded or curved 
outwards in S. tenella, almost straight in S. geniculata. 

To sum up, the former species has neat, rounded, barrel- 


Hydroida from Iceland. 153 


shaped, strongly ribbed calycles, narrowed very decidedly 
towards the somewhat overhanging rim, which bears four 
short teeth, and is very little depressed between them ; the 
latter has large,straight-walled,somewhat broad-based calycles, 
not sharply carinated transversely, narrowing very gradually 
towards the margin, which bears four very prominent and 
pointed teeth, and is deeply sinuated between them. 

The ramification of G. geniculata is peculiar. Branches 
are given off rarely at right angles to the stem, springing 
from the base of a calycle; sometimes two branches are 
developed at opposite points on the same internode. Not un- 
frequently the internodes comprising a shoot do not all le in 
the same plane; on the lower portion the calycles face one 
way and a different way above. 

Notwithstanding the similarity in some points to S. tenella, 
I believe the present to be a well-established form, which.may 
properly be ranked as a species. 

Amongst the Icelandic dredgings S. geniculata is not un- 
common. 

Sertularella tenella, Alder. 


I have also met with a characteristic specimen of this 
species. 
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. 
PuaTteE VI. 
Fig. 1. Lafoéa grandis, Hincks, magnified. 
Fig. 2. The same, more highly magnified. 
Fig. 3. Lafoéa dumosa, Fleming, drawn to the same scale as the pre- 
ceding, to show the comparative size. 
Fig. 4. Calycella obliqua, Hincks, highly magnified. 
Fig. 5. The upper portion of a calycle, to show the structure of the 
orifice. 
Figs. 6, 7. Lafoéa fruticosa, M. Sars, var. gracillima, highly magnified. 
Drawn from Oban specimens. 
Figs. 8, 9, 10. Lafoéa fruticosa, M. Sars, highly magnified. Drawn from 
; Norwegian specimens communicated by Prof. Sars. 


Prave Vil. 


Fig. 11. Sertularella polyzonias, Linnzeus, var. gigantea, magnified. 

Fig. 12. The same, of the ordinary size. Drawn to the same scale for 
comparison, 

Figs. 13, 14. Sertularella geniculata, Hincks, magnified. 

Fig. 15. Calycella pygmea, Alder, highly magnified. 

Fig. 16. Lafoéa fruticosa, M. Sars, a slender variety from Shetland, highly 


magnified. 
Puate VIII. 
Figs. 17-20. Calycella quadridentata, Hincks, magnified in different 
degrees. 


Figs. 21-23. Halecium crenulatum, Hincks, magnified 
Fig. 24. Calycella syringa, Linn., highly magnified. 


154 Dr. A. Gunther on a Collection 


XXII.— Third Notice of a Collection of Fishes made by Mr. 
Swinhoe in China. By Dr. ALBert GUNTHER, F.R.S. 


In the two previous communications on Mr. Swinhoe’s collec- 
tions of Chinese fishes published in this Journal for 1873 (Sept. 
pp- 239 -250, and Nov. pp. 877-380) the majority of species 
enumerated were from Shanghai, and only eleven from the 
more northern Chefoo. A case just received from this inde- 
fatigable zoologist contained collections made exclusively in 
the latter locality, adding much to our knowledge of its 
fauna. The species of tishes collected by Mr. Swinhoe at 
Chefoo amount now to forty-seven. 


12. Mustelus manazo, Schleg. 


13. Triacis semtfasciata, Girard. 
c 14. Raja porosa, sp. n. 

Allied to Raja marginata. The anterior part of the snout 
is abruptly contracted into a narrow thin appendage ; the width 
of the interorbital space is more than one third of the distance 
of the eye from the end of the snout. Anterior profile un- 
dulated. Teeth in fifty-four or fifty-six series in the upper 
jaw, pointed in the male, flat in the female (as in the majority 
of the species of Raja). Superciliary margin with a series 
of spines; rostral process with small stellate asperities; a 
series of three or four spines in the median line of the back 
behind the head; tail with three series of spines in the male 
and with five in the female. The width of the disk is much 
more than the distance from the end of the snout to the hind 
margin of the ventral fin. Upper parts brown, with the snout 
white ; lower parts whitish, tmged with brown. The skin of 
the lower part of the snout and of the throat is perforated 
with numerous large pores, white in the centre and surrounded 
by a black ring. 

The male is provided with a band of hooks near the angle 
of the pectoral fin and again on each side of the head, and the 
anterior margin of the disk is covered with asperities on its 
upperside in its whole length. The female is smooth on the 
parts just mentioned, but provided with a broad band of small 
hooks along the upperside of the posterior margin. 

Two specimens, male and female, adult, 11 inches broad. 


15. Trygon, sp., young. 
16. Hapalogenys nigripinnis (Schleg.). 
17. Pagrus maor, Rich. 


of Fishes from North China. 155 


18. Chrysophrys Swinhonis, sp. n. 
Dy. A.2 L. lat. 55. L. transv. 64/15. 

The height of the body is contained twice and two fifths 
in the total length (without caudal), the length of the head 
thrice and one fifth. Eye rather small, one half of the length 
of the snout, more than one half of the width of the interorbital 
space (which is convex), and equal to the height of the sub- 
orbital. Suborbital not quite twice as long as high. Cheek 
with seven series of scales. A very slight protuberance above 
the upper anterior angle of the eye. Molar teeth in four series 
above, and in three below. Dorsal spines very strong; the 
fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh of nearly equal length, and 
half as long as the head. The second anal spine very strong, 
stronger, but not longer, than the dorsal spines. Caudal fin 
but slightly emarginate. Pectoral fin extending to the anal. 
Silvery ; a spot at the commencement of the lateral line, the 
operculum, a broad margin of the vertical fins, and the mem- 
brane of the ventral fins black. 

The largest of four specimens is 14 inches long. 


19. Pelor japonicum, C.& V. 


20. Seriola Lalandii, C. & V. 
21. Caranz atropus, Bl. Schn. 


22. Echeneis naucrates, L. 


23. Sciena Dussumieri, C. & V. 


24. Otolithus aureus, Richards. Ichth. Chin. p. 224. 
D.9|5 A. 2/7. L. lat. 86. 


The height of the body is contained four times and a half 
in the total length (without caudal), the length of the head 
thrice and three fourths. There are nine scales in a trans- 
verse row between the anterior dorsal spine and the lateral 
line. Snout obtusely conical, not much longer than the eye, 
with the upper jaw slightly overlapping the lower. Cleft of 
the mouth wide, the maxillary extending beyond the hind 
margin of the orbit. Eye large, its horizontal diameter being 
equal to one fifth of the length of the head and to the width 
ot the interorbital space, which is somewhat convex. Canine 
teeth of the upper jaw rather small. Dorsal spines rather 
strong, the fourth being the longest and two fifths of the length 
of the head. Anal spine very feeble. Silvery, with bronze- 


156 Dr. A. Giinther on a Collection 


colour tinges; hinder and upper part of the axil of the 
pectoral fins black. 
One specimen, 224 inches long. 


25. Platycephalus japonicus, ‘Tiles. 


26. Platycephalus cultellatus, Richardson, Ichth. Chin. p. 217. 
Dadi Wii13. AWB, alata Go: 


The length of the head is contained thrice and two fifths 
in the total length (without caudal) ; the distance between the 
eyes is more than one half of the length of the snout. The 
upper surface of the head is quite flat, the ridges being scarcely 
prominent. Preopercular spines strong, the upper shorter 
than the lower. Lateral line smooth. Grey; all the upper 
parts, paired fins, and dorsal rays densely dotted and punctu- 
lated with brown. Caudal fin with two oblique black bands 
above, with one below, and one straight band along the 
middle. 

One specimen, 15 inches long. A second, smaller specimen 
was obtained at Shanghai. 

This species is closely allied to P. instdiator, from which 
it will be readily distinguished by its much smaller scales. 
The figure on which Richardson founded this species is very 
rudely executed, and the ridges are represented in the form of 
thorns ; however, the coloration shows that the artist has had 
before him the same species from which my notes are taken. 


27. Trigla kumu, Less. 
28. Chirus hexagrammus, Pall. 
29. Agrammus Schlegelii, Gthr. 
30. Gobius hasta, Schleg. 


31. Triwnophorichthys trigonocephalus, Gill. 


This species has the chest scaly. A fresh specimen from 
Chefoo shows the following coloration: it is dark brown, with 
an indistinct black longitudinal band along the middle of the 
side; the lower part of the head, the dorsal fins, and the 
caudal are punctulated or finely marbled with blackish and 
white. 

32. Tricenophorichthys teniatus, sp. n. 


D6 42-13. A. 12.” lat. 60. 


About eighteen longitudinal series of scales between the 
second dorsal fin and the anal. The height of, the body is 


of Fishes from North China. 157 


two ninths of the total length (without caudal), the length of 
the head two sevenths. Head broader than high, flat above. 
The width between the orbits is less than the diameter of the 
eye, which is one fifth of the length of the head. Snout as 
long as the eye, obtuse, with the cleft of the mouth horizontal, 
the upper jaw being slightly longer than the lower; the 
maxillary extends slightly beyond the anterior margin of the 
orbit. The entire head and the chest before the ventrals naked. 
Scales ctenoid. Dorsal fins nearly equally high, lower than 
the body ; caudal obtusely rounded; the ventrals terminate at 
a great distance from the vent. Greyish yellow, with two 
brown longitudinal bands on each side—the upper starting 
from the superciliary margin and running along the base of 
the dorsal fins to the upper caudal rays, the lower from the 
lower part of the eye across the upper portion of the axil and 
along the middle of the side of the body. 
Two specimens, the larger of which is 3 inches long. 


33. Sphyrena pinguis, sp. 0. 
Did) |-4a As AO: Tin dat.95. 


The height of the body is contained seven times in the 
total length (without caudal), the length of the head thrice 
and one fourth. Eye large, its diameter being two elevenths 
of the length of the head and one half of the postorbital por- 
tion. Maxillary terminating at some distance in front of the 
orbit. Mandible without lobe in front, armed with seven 
larger teeth on each side, the smaller teeth not included. 
Interorbital space rather convex, narrower than the orbit. 
Preoperculum with the angle produced into a rounded lobe. 
The origin of the first dorsal fin corresponds to the extremity 
of the pectoral, and is behind the root of the ventral fin. 
The distance between the first and second dorsals is less than 
twice the length of the latter. Above greenish, beneath 
silvery. Fins light-coloured. 

This species has a remarkably round body. ‘Two specimens, 
14 inches long. 


34. Mugil sovuy, Basil. 

35. Ditrema Temminckii, Blky. 
36. Pleuronectes asperrimus, Schleg. 
37. Pleuronectes variegatus, Schleg. 

38. Synaptura zebra, Bi. 


39. Exocetus brachycephalus, Gthr. 
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 12 


158 On a Collection of Fishes from North China. 


40. Belone anastomella, C. & V. 
41. Saurida tumbil, Bl. 


42. Engraulis encrasicholus, L. 
The common anchovy of Europe. 


43. Hngraulis chefuensis, sp. n. 
Dalssk viAws leet Matt 35: 


Allied to Engraulis rhinorhynchus. 

The height of the body equals the length of the head, and 
is one fourth of the total (without caudal). Snout much 
pointed, and much projecting beyond the lower jaw. Teeth 
present in both jaws, minute. Maxillary somewhat dilated 
above the mandibulary joint, taperig behind, not reaching the 
gill-opening. Gill-rakers fine, closely set, as long as the eye. 
Origin of the dorsal fin rather nearer to the end of the snout 
than to the root of the caudal fin. Anal fin commencing at 
a short distance behind the last dorsal rays. Abdomen com- 
pressed, the spiny scutes extending forwards to the gill- 
opening. <A blackish spot across the neck. 

Several specimens, 5 inches long. 


44, Pellona elongata, Benn. 
45. Chatoéssus punctatus, Schleg. 


46. Mureenesox cinereus, Forsk. 


47. Monacanthus septentrionalis, sp. n. 
D. 38-39. A. 34-35. 


-Skin rough, velvety. The height of the body is one half 
of the total length (without caudal). Pectoral fin opposite to 
the hind margin of the orbit, immediately behind the base of 
the dorsal spine. Snout with the upper profile scarcely 
convex. Dorsal spine two thirds or three fourths as long as 
the head, compressed and armed with a single lateral series of 
small barbs; side of the tail without any armature. Dorsal 
and anal fins low. Ventral spine fixed. Uniform brownish 
grey. Caudal blackish, with the interradial membrane 
whitish, and without any cross bands. 

Two specimens, 11 inches long. 

There is a small specimen 43 inches long in the collection, 
which I believe to be the young of this species, but which 
differs in a remarkable manner by having the dorsal spine 
subtetrahedral, a row of barbs running along each edge. 


Sir V. Brooke on the Dwarf Buffalo of Pennant. 159 


The anterior barbs are much smaller and much closer 
together than the posterior. The upper half of the body 
shows two or three irregular longitudinal bands. 


I may add here that Mr. Swinhoe has quite recently obtained 
at Shanghai specimens of Carcharias lamia (Risso), a species 
hitherto believed to be limited to the Atlantic, and of a 
sturgeon which appears to be the 


Acipenser Dabryanus. 
Acipenser Dabryanus, Duméril, Nouv. Arch. Mus. iy. p. 98, pl. 22. fig. 1. 


One specimen, 31 inches long. The numbers of shields 
differ a little from those given by Duméril. Dorsal 12; 
lateral 34 or 37; ventral 11; D. 51. 


XXIV.—On the Dwarf Buffalo of Pennant. 
By Sir Victor Brooks, Bart., F.Z.S. 


To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 


GENTLEMEN, 


With reference to Dr. Gray’s remarks upon my paper on 
*‘ African Buffaloes” in the December number of your Journal 
(p. 499), I would merely ask any person interested in the 
matter to turn to Pennant’s ‘Synopsis of Quadrupeds ’ and to 
judge for himself as to the correctness of Dr. Gray’s state- 
ments. Pennant, in his description of the “ Dwarf” (p. 9), 
thus writes, ‘The horns of this animal are in the Museum of 
the Loyal Society, described by Grew, page 26,” and upon 
plate 8. figure 3 he figures these horns. 

Turton, having founded the name Bos pumilus upon Pen- 
nant’s “ Dwarf,” it follows that the horns spoken of and figured 
by Pennant are typical specimens of “Bos pumilus.” 

In the British Museum are a pair of horns, entered in the 
‘ Hand-list of Edentate, Thick-skinned, and Ruminant Mam- 
mals’ (1873, p. 82) as received from the Museum of the Royal 
Society, which exactly agree with Pennant’s description and 
figure. There can theretore, I think, be no reasonable doubt 
that they are the identical specimens figured and described by 
Pennant. 

These horns are likewise the type of Blyth’s Bubalus 
reclinis. 

12% 


~ 


160 Major H. H. Godwin-Austen on a new Sibia. 


It is therefore clear that if I am right in considering Bu- 
balus reclinis to be the male of Bos brachyceros, both these 
names must give way to the older name of pumilus. 

With regard to Dr. Gray’s general remarks on the character 
of my work and the accuracy of my synonyms, I do not care 
to reply to them, but leave future workers to judge between 
us. 

Your obedient Servant, 

Dec. 80, 1873. Vicror BROOKE. 


XXV.—Description of a new Sibia from the Ndgd Hills, North- 
east Frontier, Bengal. By Major H. H. Gopwin-AUSTEN, 
F.R.G.S., F.Z.8., &c., Deputy Supermtendent, Topogra- 
phical Survey of India. 


THE bird now described as new was obtained during the cold 
season of 1872-73, when I was employed on the Boundary 
Survey of the Naégd Hills and Muniptr. Other species col- 
lected at the same time, and those lately described in a paper 
read before the Zoological Society, form part of a collection of 
birds I have been bringing together on the north-east frontier 
of India. Lists of these have been given from time to time 
in the ‘Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal,’ vol, xxxix. 
part 2, 1870, and vol. xli. part 2, 1872. 


Sibia pulchella, nov. sp., Godwin-Austen. 


Above ashy grey, bluer on the head, the two centre tail- 
feathers’ umber-brown, terminating (each colour 2 inch) in 
rich black, followed sharply by dark grey. The outer tail- 
feathers are tipped in like manner with grey, but the black 
increases on each feather outwards, and on the last extends to 
its base. Shoulders of wing blue-grey, with a bar of pale 
chocolate-brown coming in at the base of the black primary 
and secondary coverts. Quills grey-black, the primaries 
edged pale hoary blue; the secondaries blue-grey, the last 
three are umber-brown, and the last two are.edged narrowly 
on outer web with black. A narrow frontal band and lores 
black, extending both over and below the eye to base of the 
ear-coverts. Beneath ashy blue, with a vinous brown tinge 
upon the lower breast and abdomen. Bill black; legs horny 
brown ; irides : 

Length 9'5 inches; wing 4°1, tail 4°85, tarsus 1°3, bill at 
front 0°75, 


On the Theory of the Process of Fermentation. 161 


I shot two specimens of this very beautifully but subdued- 
coloured Sibia in April last, when making the ascent of the 
peak of Khtinho, Eastern Burrail range, Négd Hills, at about 
8000 feet. The bird appeared pretty numerous, in companies 
of four to six or eight, haunting the tops of the rhododendron 
trees, then in full bloom, busily engaged searching for insects 
in the flowers, and their forehead, chin, and throat were 
covered thick with the pollen. 

In the general distribution of the coloration and form it 
resembles S. gracilis, extremely common in the same locality, 
but seldom seen there above 6000 feet. 


XXVI.—On the Theory of the Process of Fermentation. 
By Dr. H. KARsTen. 


CAGNIARD DE LATOUR in 1836 recognized aleoholic fermen- 
tation as a physiological process dependent upon living crea- 
tures ; and I subsequently (in the ‘ Bot. Zeitung’ for 1848 and 
1849) indicated the pathological nature of yeast, 7. e. that the 
yeast-cells were not true species of plants, as was supposed by 
Latour (and by Persoon, 1822), but pathological organizations. 
This view is now, after long discussion, making some way, 
in opposition to the opinion maintained by the majority of 
chemists (following Liebig) that fermentation is a purely che- 
mical process quite independent of any vital action. - 

Although in 1870 Liebig admitted that alcoholic fermenta- 
tion is dependent on the presence of living yeast-cells, he en- 
deavoured, nevertheless, to preserve his previous opinion to a 
certain extent, by assuming that it was the fluid contents of 
the yeast-cells which effected the decomposition of the sugar, &c. 

In accordance with the processes of decay in which the 
oxidation of the albuminous materials transfers itself to the 
neighbouring carbon compounds (a view, the incorrectness of 
which I demonstrated in ‘ Poggendorff’s Annalen,’ 1860), the 
process of fermentation is supposed to be dependent upon the 
decomposition of albuminous unorganized substances (outside 
the cell according to Liebig’s former opinion, but within it ac- 
cording to his present view), which then also seizes upon the 
surrounding molecules of complex carbon compounds. 

But that even this last conception does not accord with the 
true nature of the process, and that the products of fermentation 
were generated by the vegetating membrane of the yeast-cell and 
not by its fluid contents, had already been demonstrated by 
me in my memoir on the Chemistry of the Vegetable Cell 
in 1869, 


162 Dr. H. Karsten on the Theory 


Probably Liebig would not have taken all these circuitous 
ways towards the natural explanation of the process of fermen- 
tation had he known that the yeast-cells, even though they 
do not increase (nay, perhaps may diminish) in weight, are 
yet constantly vitally active and engaged in continual new 
formation, and that during the growth of their membranes 
these finally become changed into vegetable acids, lactic acid, 
succinic acid*, and, if we may judge by the analogy of other 
processes, into glycerine, alcohol, carbonic acid, fat, &e. 

Pasteur, who has so thoroughly studied the chemical pro- 
ducts of alcoholic fermentation, and so greatly increased our 
knowledge of them, and to whom we are indebted for finally 
setting free his confréres from the long persistent error that 
fermentation is a purely chemical act—even Pasteur, in his 
fresh attempt to establish a theory of the process of fermenta- 
tion (‘Comptes Rendus,’ 1872), struck upon the same rock, in 
thinking that the chemical processes of fermentation differ 
from a number of other phenomena, and especially from the 
actions of the other vital phenomena, by the circumstance that 
a much greater weight of the fermentescible substance is de- 
composed than the weight of the acting ferment amounts to. 
That this view is erroneous in every respect we see at once if 
we compare the quantity of nutriment of any animal with the 
weight of its body, and, on the other hand, consider the con- 
tinual regeneration of the yeast-cells, which was urged against 
Liebig in my ‘ Beitrag zur Geschichte der Botanik’ (1870). 

Pasteur also believes that this fact of the inferiority of weight 
of the organized ferment is connected with its nourishment in 
the absence of free oxygen ; and he finds in this the distinguish- 
ing characteristic of fermentation as compared with other vital 
processes. ‘‘ Fermentation,” says Pasteur, “is a special case 
of a very general phenomenon; nay, we might say that all 
creatures, under certain conditions, are ferments. If we kill 
any creature, or organ in any creature, or a group of cells in 
this organ, by suffocation, by cutting through nerves, &c., the 
physical and chemical life in them will not immediately cease, 
it will continue ; and when this takes place under such condi- 
tions that free oxygen (interior or exterior) is wanting, then 
the organism, the organ, or the cells will necessarily derive 
the heat which they require for their processes of nourishment 
and growth from the substances surrounding them; they will 
consequently decompose these, and we shall see the peculiar 
character of fermentations appear, when the amount of heat 
developed represents the decomposition of a quantity of fer- 


* ¢ Harz-, Alkohol- und Milchsiuregahrung,’ 1871, p. 70, from the ‘ Zeit- 
chr. des cesterreich. Apotheke-Vereines,’ 1870-71. 


of the Process of Fermentation. 165 


mentescible substances which is distinctly greater than the 
weight of the substance set in motion by the organism, the 
organ, or the cells.” 

Pasteur, who seems here to agree with my opinion (first ex- 
pressed in the ‘ Botanische Zeitung’ for 1848) as to the vitality 
and faculty of increase of cells (¢. g. secretion-cells or embryonal 
tissue-cells) which have become diseased by abnormal condi- 
tions of nutrition, nevertheless, led astray by correctly ob- 
served but erroneously interpreted facts, mistakes the nature 
of a whole group of these pathologico-necrobiotic vital pro- 
cesses. The observation that beer-yeast growing upon the 
surface of a solution of sugar absorbs atmospheric oxygen, 
and converts it into carbonic acid without producing alcohol, 
whilst the same yeast when carried beneath the surface of 
the fluid by shaking produces alcohol as well as carbonic acid, 
has misled Pasteur to the assumption that oxygen regularly 
suppresses alcoholic fermentation. 

Assuming that Pasteur’s statement is correct, and that yeast 
floating on the surface of a solution of sugar produces no 
alcohol, this does not prove that oxygen in such small quan- 
tities as the fluid dissolves prevents the formation of alcohol, 
and that the submerged yeast does not come into contact with 
oxygen. As fermentation is due to continuous regeneration 
and increase of the yeast-cells, and for the production of cells 
oxygen must necessarily lend its aid unless all our observa- 
tions are at fault, Pasteur’s proposition that oxygen uncondi- 
tionally prevents alcoholic fermentation must need modification 
as follows :—that the unobstructed action of the atmospheric 
oxygen upon yeast-cells prejudices their property of furnishing 
alcohol and carbonic acid as products of the assimilation of 
grape-sugar, inasmuch as it induces the cuticularization of 
the membrane of the yeast-cells (that is to say, its partial con- 
version into a resinous, fatty substance). It is well known 
that masses of yeast, after being dried in the air, furnish more 
alcohol on distillation than fresh undried yeast ; and all sorts 
of daily experiences with saccharine fruits and solutions seem 
to stand in opposition to Pasteur’s views. 

Recently Pasteur has been confirmed in his opinion formed 
upon the observation of vegetating yeast by the analogous in- 
Te ebaein of a second fact, likewise correctly recognized. 

ouverschel long ago (Poggend. Ann. xxii. 1831) ob- 
served that ripe saccharine fruits, when kept in carbonic acid, 
were apparently well preserved for a long time, but at last 
eae into alcoholic fermentation with indications of decay. 
asteur paler this experiment, and found that plums, 
grapes, melons, all acid fruits and many others, when kept in 


164 Dr. H. Karsten on the Theory 


carbonic acid for a time, passed into a state of alcoholic fer- 
mentation, whilst they still appeared externally to be perfectly 
sound and well-preserved. From twenty-four plums which 
had lain for a few days in carbonic acid, and had almost im- 
proved in apparent soundness and firmness of flesh, he obtained 
6:5 grms. of absolute alcohol. In this case also Pasteur de- 
rives the alcoholic fermentation from the absence of oxygen. 

I also obtained an alcoholic distillate from grapes and plums 
under similar circumstances, not only when they were pre- 
served in carbonic acid, but also in hydrogen or in an air-tight. 
vessel in atmospheric air (in the latter case the oxygen was 
probably soon converted into carbonic acid by the ripe fruits). 
Although no trace of mould or other signs of the commence- 
ment ot decay could be recognized, 36 cub. centim. of distillate 
contained 2°8 vol. per cent. of alcohol. 

Moreover plums which had been kept for an equal time in 
pure oxygen (prepared ky the ignition of chlorate of potash) 
with hydrate of potash also furnished an alcoholic distillate ; 
nay, ripe figs which had lain in ozonized air showed signs of 
alcoholic fermentation by their odour and the commencement 
of yeast-formation in their cells. Under these circumstances 
also, just as when they had lain in carbonic acid and in hydro- 
gen gas, the fruits retained their normal sound appearance for 
weeks, and were not attacked by mould, whilst other similar 
fruits lying in the air had long been decayed and mouldy. 
On those plums which, as described, had been preserved under 
pure oxygen gas, a partial production of mould had certainly 
commenced; but for the purpose of distillation twenty-four 
well-preserved fruits, of perfectly sound appearance, with no 
signs of mould, were selected. Some similar fruits were ex- 
amined microscopically, and proved to be free from Fungi in 
the interior also. 

Even in those experiments which furnished a distillate with 
a neutral reaction, alcohol was obtained, but 1 per cent. less 
than in those in which carbonic acid was employed. Other 
grapes and plums which were exposed to the atmosphere 
showed no trace of aleohol even when distilled over platinum- 
black. 

Consequently the fruits which in other respects appeared 
sound, were affected and passed into alcoholic fermentation by 
excessive action of oxygen just as by other gases injurious to 
the normal assimilative activity, although (to judge from the 
results of distillation) this occurs rather later in oxygen gas 
than in the gases employed in the other experiments. 

The exclusion of oxygen, therefore, is not the immediate 
cause of alcoholic fermentation and allied phenomena in the 


of the Process of Fermentation. 165 


organs and tissues fitted for them, but the abnormal processes 
of development of the embryonal cells contained in the tissue- 
cells, called forth by physico-chemical agencies, in the presence 
of sufficient quantities of grape-sugar or other bodies, cor- 
responding with other processes of fermentation and decom- 
position. Alcoholic fermentation, therefore, like the other 
processes of fermentation and decomposition, has its foundation 
in the necrobiosis of the organs and tissues in question. 

The fruits are suffocated in the oxygen gas, and in the other 
gases employed, just as they are killed in every pure gas, in 
water free trom air, by mechanical injuries, &c.; the normal 
process of maturation is interrupted, in consequence of which, 
and the presence of sugar in their cell-fluid, the cellules con- 
tained in the latter or their endogenous new formations 
acquire the nature of yeast-cells. In figs and grapes this may 
be recognized* very easily even from the form of the yeast- 
cells thus produced; whilst in plums, as in the gooseberries 
which I employed formerly (see ‘ Botanische Zeitung,’ 1848) 
in experiments on fermentation in hydrogen gas, the newly 
formed cells acquire a globular form. 

Even here it is proved that the kind of biological process 
of the cell-generations which develop themselves within dying 
tissue-cells is dependent upon the chemical nature of the cell- 
fluid and the matter and forces acting from without. The 
Vibrios and Bacteria do not originate putrefaction, nor does 
yeast originate fermentation, but rather the forms which the 
cells acquire are determined by the nature of the nutritive 
material. If the fluids are predominantly albuminous, putre- 
faction ensues with Bacteria and Vibrios; if they are saccha- 
rine, fermentation takes place with yeast, as I have demon- 
strated inmy ‘ Fiaulniss und Ansteckung’ (1872, p.2). Nay, 
according to the different chemical nature of the fluids, varia- 
tions of these processes will occur, presenting in their course 
the greatest similarity to the biological processes of normally 
assimilating secretion-cells, But in reality these morbidly 
developed cell-generations are completely different in their 
nature from the latter. 


* In figs we may most easily convince ourselves of the production of 
east-cells within the tissue-cells during the sojourn of the fruit in car- 
basic acid, if we add to the microscopic section of such a fruit a portion 
of a solution of cane-sugar or sugar of milk, and then observe it for some - 
time. This object may be cemented down like a ee prepara- 
tion ; and it then slowly but surely shows the growth of the yeast-cells. 
Figs which had lain for eight weeks in carbonic acid without showing any 
signs of mould or changing much in form and colour, but which had a 
vinous-acid odour, were especially fitted to exhibit this development of 
the grape-sugar yeast. 


: Y . 

166 Royal Society :-— He 

The secretion-cells are subjected to the creative activity of 
a composite organism, the preservation and regeneration of 
which they subserve; their task is synthesis. On the con- 
trary it is the office of these ferments to decompose dead and 
dying organic substances into their simpler compounds, and 
to prepare them for decay ; their task is analysis. ‘To regard 
these ferment-cells (Hysterophymata) as equivalent to perfect 
organisms shows a complete misconception of their true nature. 


Schaffhausen, November 1878. 


PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES. 


ROYAL SOCIETY. 
May 8, 1873.—Francis Sibson, M.D., Vice-President, in the Chair. 


“Contributions to the Study of the Errant Annelides of the 
Older Paleozoic Rocks.” By H. AtteyneE Nicnoxson, M.D., 
D.Se., M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S.E., Professor of Natural History in 
University College, Toronto. 


In this communication the author endeavours to elucidate the 
abundant and obscure organic remains which are found so com- 
monly in the Paleozoic rocks, and especially in the Silurian strata 
of Britain, and which are generally known by the vague and con- 
venient names of “ Fucoids,” ‘‘ Annelide-burrows,” and “ tracks.” 
After expressing his opinion that the first step towards the study 
of these obscure fossils lies in the provisional grouping and naming 
of the more marked forms which are already known to exist, the 
author proceeds to divide the remains under consideration into 
two great groups. In the first of these groups are those fossils 
which are truly the burrows of marine worms, as distinguished from 
mere trails and surface-tracks. Some of these burrows (Scolithus) 
are more or less nearly vertical in direction as regards the strata 
in which they are found; and they are to be looked upon as beng 
true burrows of habitation. In this section are placed the genera 
Scolithus, Arenicolites, and Histioderma. Other burrows are of a 
totally different nature from the preceding, and may reasonably be 
compared to the burrows of the recent lobworms. These burrows 
run more or less horizontally as compared with the laminz of depo- 
sition, or they penetrate the strata obliquely. They are not bur- 
rows of habitation, but are wandering tunnels excavated by the 
worm in its search after food. The fossils of this group, there- 
fore, as preserved to us, are not the actual burrows themselves, 
but the burrows filled up with the sand or mud which the worm 
has passed through its alimentary canal. The burrows of this 
kind (including many forms previously described under the names 


On the Errant Annelides of the Older Palwozoie Rocks. 167 


of Chondrites, Paleophycus, &c.), the author groups together under 
the name of Planolites. 

The second great group of Annelide-remains comprises genuine 
surface-trails or ‘“ tracks,” which of necessity never pass below the 
surface of the bed on which they occur. Some of these remains, 
such as Crossopodia, are, beyond doubt, due to the operation of 
marine Annelides ; but it may be a matter of question whether we 
have in these cases the actually petrified body of the worm, or 
merely the track produced by the passage of the animal over the 
surface of the mud or sand. The author, however, gives reasons 
for believing that the latter explanation is truly the correct one. 
Other fossils belonging to this group (such as Myrianites) are 
equally, beyond doubt, produced by the operations of marine 
animals ; but it remains quite uncertain whether they haye been 
formed by Annelides, Crustaceans, or Mollusks. Lastly, there are 
remains which appear to be really casts of the surface-trails of 
Annelides or other marine creatures, and which, therefore, are 
elevated above the surface of the bed on which they occur. Such 
remains may readily be confounded with those belonging to the 
genus Planolites, from which they are only distinguishable by the 
fact that they are strictly confined to a single surface of deposi- 
tion. To fossils of this nature the author proposes to restrict 
the generic title of Nemertites. . 

Finally, the author describes some singular tracks apparently 
produced by Crustaceans belonging to the genus Ceratiocaris, and 
for which he proposes the generic name of Caridolites. 

The following list comprises the species of fossils described in 
this communication :— 


A. Burrows. 


I. Genus ARENIcOLITES, Salter. 
1. Arenicolites sparsus, Salter. 
Di didymus, Salter. 
robustus, Nicholson. 


3. 


Il. Genus Scorrruvs, Haldeman. 
4. Scolithus canadensis, Billings. 
5: linearis, Hall. 
6. verticalis, Hall. 


. Genus His MA, Kinahan. 
Ler Gi HisrropeRMA, Kinahan 
7. Histioderma hibernicum, Ainahan. 


IV. Genus Pianorires, Nicholson. 
8. Planolites vulgaris, Nicholson. 
9. granosus, Nicholson. 
10. articulatus, Nicholson. 


B. TRAIs. 
V. Genus Crossopopia, M‘Coy. 
11. Crossopodia scotica, M‘Coy. 
12. lata, M‘Coy. 


168 Royal Society :-— 


VI. Genus Nemertires, M‘Leay. 
13. Nemertites Ollivantii, Murchison. 
14. (Paleochorda) major, M*‘Coy. 
15. (Paleochorda) minor, M‘Coy. 
VIL. Genus Myrianires, M‘Leay. 


16. Myrianites tenuis, M‘Coy. 
17. —— Murchisoni, Emmons. 


C.- APPENDIX. 


VILL. Genus Cartporitss, Nicholson. 
18. Caridolites Wilsoni, Nicholson. 


June 19, 1873.—William Spottiswoode, M.A., Treasurer and Vice- 
President, in the Chair. 


“‘ Experiments on the Development of Bacteria in Organic Infu- 
sion.” By C. C. Pope, M.B., Demonstrator to the Regius Professor 
of Medicine, and E. Ray LanxestEer, M.A., Fellow and Lecturer ~ 
of Exeter College. 


The following passage from Dr. Charlton Bastian’s ‘ Beginnings 
of Life’ (vol. i. p. 429% induced us to make experiments similar 
to those mentioned in it, with the view of testing the correctness 
of Dr. Bastian’s conclusion as to matter of fact :— 

“On the other hand, the labours of very many experimenters 
have now placed it beyond all question of doubt or cavil that living 
Bacteria, Torule, and other low forms of life will make their appear- 
ance and multiply within hermetically-sealed flasks (contaiming or- 
ganic infusions) which had been previously heated to 212° F., 
even for one or two hours. ‘This result is now so easily and 
surely obtainable, as to make it come within the domain of natural 
law.” And in a note is added, “In a very large number of 
trials I have never had a single failure when an infusion of 
turnip has been employed; and from what I have more recently 
seen of the effects produced by the addition of a very minute 
fragment of cheese to such an infusion (see Appendix C, 
pp- xxxiv—xxxvii), I fully believe that in 999 cases out of 1000, 
if not in every case, a positive result could be obtained.” Though 
this is one out of a great number of statements made by Dr. 
Bastian upon which he bases speculations as to the prevalence of 
spontaneous generation or archebiosis, we think it necessary to 
state that we have not considered that (which is a question of 
interpretation) as the point at issue, but merely the question of fact 
as to the appearance of Bacteria in what may be considered, accord- 
ing to our present lights, infusions duly guarded from inoculation. 
The point under discussion is one as to a fact in the natural 
history of Bacteria, in a further study of which we are occupied 
at the instance of the Radcliffe Trustees; and we believe that a 
more precise knowledge of the life-history, hfe-conditions, and 


On the Development of Bacteria in Organic Infusions. 169 


various forms of these organisms is necessary before the hypothesis 
of their spontaneous generation can serve as a safe guide in 
scientific investigation. 

The experiments recorded below were made with infusion of 
hay and with infusion of turnip, sometimes with the addition of a 
few fragments of pounded cheese. It is necessary at once to 
call attention to three precautions which we have taken, and which 
we think are indispensable:—1. Recognizing the fact that the 
presence of lumps is a possible source of error, we excluded these 
from our infusion, either by filtration or by decantation. 2. To 
ensure the satisfactory exposure of the whole contents of the tube to 
the boiling temperature, we, as a rule, completely submerged our 
experimental tubes in boiling water for a period varying from 
five minutes to half an hour. 3.*The substances used in pre- 
paring the infusions being necessarily of a very heterogeneous 
nature, we always examined samples of the infusions before and 
after boiling, at the time of closing the tubes, and were thus able 
.to determine whether any change had taken place in the visible 
particles contained in the fluid after a lapse of time. 

The microscopes used by us throughout, working side by side 
with samples from the same infusion, were a Hartnack’s Stative VIL. 
objective No. 10 4 immersion, ocular 4, belonging to the anatomical 
department of the University Museum, and a large Powell and 
Lealand belonging to the Radcliffe Trustees, which is provided 
with a ;, and a =, objective. The former of the two English 
glasses was more usually employed than the latter, on account of 
its greater convenience in manipulation. 

Appearances in freshly prepared infusions.—Since the objects 
seen in such infusions are remarkable, and have doubtless some- 
times led to error in subsequent examination of infusions, we may 
draw attention to them now. In such freshly prepared infusions 
we have not unfrequently seen appearances agreeing very closely 
with some of those figured by Dr. Bastian in his book as coming 
into existence after boiling, sealing, and preservation in a warm 
chamber. A freshly prepared and boiled strong infusion of hay 
may present shreds of vegetable fibre, a considerable number of 
dead Bacteriwm termo (some two or three to the field), minute, 
highly refringent spherules, varying from the size of a blood- 
corpuscle to the smallest size visible; and such spherules are 
often present in pairs, forming figure-of-8-shaped bodies, both 
smaller and larger than Bacterium and of different optical character. 
Further, dumb-bell-shaped bodies are not unfrequently to be ob- 
served of similar form and size to Bacteria, but coarser in outline ; 
they dissolve on addition of HCl, which Bacteria do not*. All 
these bodies exhibit constant oscillatory (Brownian) movements. 
The addition of new cheese to such an infusion (as shown by 

* In the most carefully guarded of the experiments published by Dr. Child 
a few years since in the ‘Proceedings of the Royal Society, a very small 


number of bodies similar to these were obtained ; and we suggest that they were 
of the same nature, 


170 Royal Society :— 


examination of a simple infusion of new cheese taken by itself) 
adds a considerable number of highly refringent spherules of various 
sizes (oil-globules) and finely granular flakes, also a few Bacteria 
and (if the cheese be not quite new, almost certainly) fungus-myce- 
lium and conidia in quantity. 

Fresh-boiled turnip-infusion alone may contain so very few 
dead Bacteria that none are detected with the microscope, or only 
one in a drop. It presents a great number of minute, highly re- 
fringent spherules, varying in size from =),, inch downwards, all 
in most active oscillatory movement. Shreds and filaments of 
various sizes and character also are found, and a few finely 
granular flakes about j,4;5 inch in diameter. The addition of 


T000 : 
cheese brings in, of course, the objects enumerated above as 


belonging to it. ‘ 

Visibility of Bacteria—It is perhaps necessary to say, before 
proceeding further, that we have satisfied ourselves that, in infu- 
sions of the optical character of those used, the multiplication of 
Bacteria makes itself obvious by a cloudiness. Hence, though we 
have not remained content with that evidence, the retention by” 
such a limpid infusion of its limpidity is.a proof of the absence of 
Bacteria. We also should mention, what is well known already, 
that in a closed tube or bottle, after such a cloud (of Bacteria) has 
developed, the Bacteria at a certain period cease to multiply and 
settle down as a fine powder, leaving the fluid again clear. Such 
precipitated Bacteria remain unchanged in the fluid for a long 
period (weeks certainly, perhaps years), and can be readily shaken 
up and at once recognized by microscopic examination ; they are, 
moreoyer, not destroyed by boiling: hence it is not possible to 
miss the detection of a development of Bacteria in a limpid turnip- 
infusion, examined daily for three weeks or more by the naked 
eye, and finally, after agitation, by means of the microscope. 

Series A. Noy. 23rd. Experiments with hay-infusion.—An in- 
fusion was prepared by pouring water of about 90° C. on to 
chopped hay. The infusion was of # dark sherry-colour ; reaction 
slightly acid. The glass tubes used in this and subsequent experi- 
ments were about five inches in length, of half inch bore, rounded 
at one end and drawn out to a capillary orifice at the other. 
The infusion in these and subsequent experiments was introduced 
by heating the tube and plunging its capillary beak beneath the 
surface of the experimental liquid during the cooling of the expanded 
air, until the tube was about one third or half filled. Tubes 1, 
2, 3 were half filled with the hay-imfusion previously filtered, the 
liquid was boiled in the tube, and the capillary beak fused, as nearly 
as possible, during ebullition *. 

* The tubes were sealed at the moment of removal from the flame over which 
they had been boiling. In every case a subsequent recurrence of ebullition 
was observed during the cooling of the upper part of the tube. Dr. Roberts, 
of Manchester, has suggested that the occurrence of Bacteria in tubes thus 
sealed may be explained by their in-draught, together with a certain amount 
of air, at the moment of closure; but the experiments of Sanderson, recently 
confirmed by Cohn, have shown that contamination of fluids by Bac/eria only 
takes place through the medium of impure surfaces or liquids. 


On the Development of Bacteria in Organic Infusions. 171 


Tubes 4, 5 were similarly treated, with the difference that a 
smal] quantity of cheese, in a very fine state of division, had been 
added to this portion of the hay-infusion before its introduction into 
the tubes. 

Tubes 6, 7. Quantity and character of the infusion as in 1, 2, 3, 
but the tubes sealed without previous ebullition. 

Tube 8. Quantity and character of the infusion as in 4 and 5, 
but the tube sealed without previous ebullition. 

Tubes 9, 10, 11. Quantity and character of the infusion as in 
1, 2, 3, but rendered slightly alkaline with KHO. Sealed approxi- 
mately during ebullition. 

All these tubes (1 to 11) were after closure completely sub- 
merged in boiling water for fifteen minutes, and were then pre- 
served in a hot-air bath, varying in temperature from 30° C. to 
35° C. 

Microscopic and naked-eye appearances of the hay-infusion at the 
time of sealing the tubes.—The infusion in tubes 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 was 
clear and pellucid, that in tubes 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 11 was hazy. 

Microscopic examination gave the result indicated above, as to 
the appearances of freshly prepared hay and hay-and-cheese in- 
fusion. 

Subsequent appearances of the infusion in Tubes 1-11.—The tubes 
with infusion which was pellucid at the first were found to retain 
this character for several weeks, being preserved in the air-bath 
and examined from day to day. The hazy infusions were opened 
after four days, and their contents found to be unchanged. 

A portion of the same hay-and-cheese infusion, boiled aud pur- 
posely contaminated by preservation in an uncleaned beaker, was 
found after four days to be teeming with Bacterium termo exhibiting 
vital movements. The pellucid infusions were subsequently ex- 
amined with the microscope at different times and found to be 
unchanged. 

Sertes B. Noy. 25th. Evperiments with turnip-and-cheese in- 
fusion.—An infusion was made with 700 grms. sliced white turnip 
and 1000 grms. water, to which about 1 grm. finely minced new 
cheese was added, the jug containing the mixture being maintained 
for four hours on a sand-bath at a temperature of 45°-55° C. 

The infusion was now filtered; sp. gr. of the infusion 1011-1. 
Reaction slightly acid. 

Tubes 12, 13, 14. Sealed cold. Submerged in boiling water for 
thirty minutes. 

Tubes 15, 16, 17, 18, 19. Sealed approximately during ebulli- 
tion. Submerged in boiling water for thirty minutes. 

The tubes were preserved in the air-bath as in Series A. 

Microscopic and naked-cye appearances of the infusion at the time 
of sealing the tubes.—The liquid in all the tubes was perfectly clear 
and limpid. A few shreds and flakes were obvious, which appeared 
to be derived from the filter-paper and from the slight precipita- 
tion of albuminous matter. The microscopic appearances were 
those above described as characterizing such infusions. 


172 Royal Society :-— 


Subsequent appearances of the infusion.—The infusion in all the 

tubes was found on examination from day to day to retain its lim- 
pidity. Subsequent microscopic examination of all the tubes at 
various periods subsequent to the closure of the tubes (from four 
days to three weeks) yielded no indication whatever of a deve- 
lopment of Bacteria or other organisms, nor of any change. A 
portion of the same infusion placed in an uncleansed beaker for 
comparison was milky and swarming with Bacteria after three 
days. 
Serres C. Nov. 28th. Experiments with turnip-and-cheese infu- 
sion.—The infusion similar in all respects to that in series B, but 
prepared with a somewhat larger proportion of turnips; there- 
fore of higher specific gravity, which was not numerically deter- 
mined. 

Tubes 20, 21, 22, 23. Boiled and sealed approximately during 
ebullition. Not subsequently submerged. 

Tubes 24, 25. Boiled and sealed approximately during ebullition. 
Subsequently submerged in boiling water during thirty minutes. 

The tubes were preserved in the air-bath as in Series A and B. 

Serres D. Noy. 30th.—An infusion prepared as in Series B and 
C, but brought to a sp. gr. 1031 by evaporation after filtration. 

Tubes 26, 27, 28, 29. Sealed cold. Subsequently submerged in 
boiling water for thirty minutes. 

Tubes 30,31. Boiled and sealed approximately during ebullition. 
Not subsequently immersed. 

Tubes 32, 33. Boiled and sealed approximately during ebullition. 
Subsequently submerged in boiling water for thirty minutes. 

Appearances in the infusions, Series C and D, at the time of sealing 
and submerging.—The appearances in the freshly prepared infusion 
were similar to those described above as characterizing such infu- 
sions. 

Subsequent naked-eye examination of the tubes did not reveal 
the slightest change ; they remained limpid. Specimens from each 
group were opened and examined with the microscope after four 
days, and the microscopic characters found to be unchanged: the 
liquid was perfectly sweet. The remaining tubes were examined 
at intervals before the end of December, being maintained during 
the whole time at a temperature of 35° to 40°C. in the air-bath ; 
they equally proved to have remained unchanged when opened and 
examined with the microscope, and were also free from unpleasant 
smell. 

Sertes E. Noy. 28th.—Six porcelain capsules were heated to 
redness, and nearly filled with the turnip-infusion used in Series C. 
They were placed on the air-bath under a glass shade. 

Capsules 1, 2. The infusion was unboiled. 

Capsule 3. The infusion was boiled in the capsule. 

Capsule 4. The infusion was introduced after it had been boiled 
for five minutes in a superheated test-tube. 

Capsules 5 and 6. The infusion was that used in capsule 4, but 
a drop of distilled water was added to each of these two capsules. 


On the Development of Bacteriain Organic Infusions. 173 


After four days the infusion in capsules 1, 2, 5, and 6 was found 
to be teeming with Bacterium termo and Bacterian filaments. 

Capsule 3 was found to be cracked, and hence was discarded 
(it swarmed with Bacteria). 

Capsule 4 was perfectly free from organisms, and remained so 
during a fortnight, when a fungus-mycelium made its appearance 
on the surface. 

Series F. Dec. 10th.—A strong infusion of turnip and cheese, 
prepared as in Series B (sp. gr. 1013), was boiled in an eight-ounce 
flask for five minutes. Three common test-tubes were superheated 
and placed in a beaker to support them. 

No. 1. The infusion was poured in, and with it one drop of 
distilled water. 

No. 2. The infusion was poured in and thus left. 

No. 3. The infusion was poured in and again boiled for two 
minutes. 

These and the flask containing the remaining infusion were left 
on a shelf for one day; on Dec. 11, there being no cloudiness in any 
of the four, they were placed on the top of the hot-air bath. On 
Dec. 13 No. 1 was found to be swarming with Leptothria-growths 
and free Bacteriwm termo. 

No. 2 also was cloudy and swarmed with what Cohn calls the 
rosary-chains. No. 3 was absolutely free from all development of 
life, and was perfectly sweet and limpid ; so also was the fluid in 
the original flask, a large one capable of holding eight ounces. 
How is the development of Bacteria in No. 2 to be explained? 
The original fluid remains pure; the fluid in No. 3, which was 
reboiled, remains so too; the tube itself, No 2, had been heated 
red-hot and could not be a source of contamination. One’s 
attention was therefore directed to the conditions of the passage 
of the fluid from the flask into the tubes ; and here an explana- 
tion at once offered itself. The large flask had not been super- 
heated ; its lip was still dirty, laden with Bacteria ready to con- 
taminate fluids as they poured from it ; hence the contamination of 
the fluid in test-tube No. 2. The validity of this explanation can- 
not be disputed, because it is known that such glass surfaces, 
unless specially cleansed, invariably contaminate infusions exposed 
to them. 

Serres G. Feb. 11th.—The publication of Dr. Burdon Sander- 
son’s letter, describing some experiments made by Dr. Bastian, 
induced us to make a further series of experiments with impor- 
tant modifications. We had expressly avoided the introduction of 
any thing like visible lumps of solid cheese or turnip into our 
infusions during their ebullition, believing that such lumps were 
a possible source of the exclusion of Bacteria or their germs from 
the killing influence of the boiling temperature. This precaution 
we had supposed (in the absence of any statement to the opposite 
effect) to have been taken by Dr. Bastian in the experiments 
adduced by him in the ‘ Beginnings of Life.’ The presence of such 
lumps was publicly suggested in discussion at the British-Asso- 

Ann. & Mag. N. H. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii, 13 


174 Royal Society :— 


ciation Meeting at Liverpool as a source of fallacy, and has been 
demonstrated to be so by Dr. Ferdinand Cohn in experiments 
made with peas and infusion of peas (‘ Beitriige zur Biologie der 
Pflanzen,’ Breslau, 1872). Further, we had limited the bulk of 
our infusions and the size of our experimental tubes, in view of 
the obvious consideration that the larger the mass and area to be 
guarded against contamination the greater the chance of failure 
in that respect. Thirdly, it had not occurred to us to make use of 
vessels in these experiments of a form so inconvenient and diffi- 
cult to thoroughly guard against effects of “ spluttering,” and to 
thoroughly heat by boiling, as the retort. Nor could we guess, 
in the absence of any directions on that poimt from Dr. Bastian, 
that it was desirable to exclude the rind of the turnip from the 
preparation of the infusion. The correspondence in ‘ Nature,’ 
however, indicated that “ pounded ” cheese (necessarily in a condi- 
tion of solid lumps) was added (in some cases) to his experimental 
vessels after the turnip-infusion, and was present during ebullition. 
It also appeared that retorts capable of holding two ounces were 
the vessels used; whilst, on grounds not given, it was considered 
advantageous by Dr. Bastian to peel the turnips before slicing 
them. 

The following experiments were accordingly made :— 

An infusion of turnip (minus the rind) was prepared and filtered ; 
it had sp. gr. 1012-7. In the experiments Nos. 34 to 47 two-ounce 
retorts were used, and the bulb half filled with the experimental 
infusion. 

No. 34. The infusion neutralized with KHO. About two grains 
of pounded cheese in pellets added to the retort. 

Nos. 35, 36. Infusion not neutralized. About two grains of 
pounded cheese in pellets added to the retort. 

Nos. 37, 38, 39. The simple infusion. 

No. 40. The simple infusion, to which were added a few drops 
of an emulsion of cheese prepared with some of the turnip-infu- 
sion and new cheese, the emulsion having been filtered. 

No. 41. The simple infusion. 

Nos. 34 to 40 were boiled for five minutes; they were then pre- 
served in the air-bath at a temperature of 35° C., and sealed approxi- 
mately during ebullition. Four of them, including No. 36, were 
subjected to a further boiling of fifteen minutes in a water-bath 
after sealing. 


No. 41 was boiled for five minutes and placed on a shelf with 
its mouth open. 


Subsequent appearances in Retorts Nos. 34-41. 


On Feb. 15th Nos. 34, 35, 37 were opened and found to be 
perfectly sweet and free from a development of Bacteria or other 
organisms. 

No. 41 was observed to be perfectly limpid, and is so siill 
(March 17th). 

On Feb. 27th Nos. 36, 38, 39, and 40 were opened. With the 


On the Development of Bacteria tn Organic Infusions. 175 


exception of No. 36, they were perfectly sweet and free from 
organisms. 

No. 36 had a slightly foetid odour and swarmed with rather 
long Bacteria—that is, Bacizria longer than the common B. termo, 
which develops in infusions open to atmospheric air, but not quite 
of the form of the Bacillus subtilis of the butyrie fermentation, 
which is stated to appear in some infusions, ¢. g. milk, to which 
the access of atmospheric air has been entirely prevented. It is 
to be noticed that in this series the only retort in which Bacteria 
made their appearance was one of those in which small Jumps of 
cheese were present during the subjection of the flask to the 
process of ebullition and subsequent immersion in boiling water. 

This result induced us to make a further series of differential 
experiments, bearing upon the influence of the state of aggre- 
gation of the cheese introduced into the turnip-infusion. 

Serres H. March 8th.—A turnip-infusion was prepared as in 
Series B ; found after filtration to have sp. gr. 1115-5. 

Tubes similar to those used in Series A—H, and half filled, were 
used. 

Tubes 42, 43, 44. The simple infusion was poured into the 
tube, so as to half fill it; a lump of cheese the size of a pea was 
then added. Sealed cold. 

Tubes 45, 46, 47. To the turnip-infusion, before introduction 
into the tubes, an emulsion of cheese prepared with turnip-infusion 
and strained through a piece of cambric was added. The tubes 
were then half filled with this mixture and sealed cold. 

Tubes 48, 49,50. The same as 42, 43, 44, but sealed approxi- 
mately during ebullition. 

Tubes 51, 52,53. The same as 45, 46, 47, but sealed approxi- 
mately during ebullition. 

All the tubes, 42 to 53, were completely submerged during five 
minutes in boiling water, and subsequently preserved in the air- 
bath at 35° C. temperature. 

On March 13th the contents of the twelve tubes were examined 
with the microscope. No. 45 had been broken in the boiling. The 
five remaining tubes which had been prepared with cheese in the 
finely divided condition were found to be entirely devoid of life, 
the infusion microscopically and otherwise unchanged. Of the six 
tubes prepared, each with a small lump of cheese, no organisms 
were detected in 42 and 44; but in 43 and 49 a few elongate 
Bacteria were observed (in the proportion of about two to the field 
of a Hartnack’s system 10). In 48 and 50 the fluid was swarming 
with elongate Bacteria and true Bacillus. The lumps of cheese in 
those tubes in which life appeared had softened and spread out to 
a certain extent on the side of the tube. The cheese-lumps in 
Nos. 42 and 44 retained their original form. 


From the result of these later experiments, made in consequence 


of the fuller information given by Dr. Sanderson as to Dr. Bas- 
ls* 


176 Royal Society :-— 


tian’s mode of treating turnip and cheese so as to obtain phenomena 
supposed to be in favour of the doctrine of Archebiosis, we consider 
that the importance of excluding visible lumps from the experi- 
mental infusions is clearly indicated, as also is the comparatively 
greater trustworthiness of the small tube as opposed to the larger 
retort for use as an experimental vessel. We moreover consider 
that we, in our earlier experiments (November and December), 
carefully following Dr. Bastian’s directions, as far as he had given 
any in the ‘ Beginnings of Life,’ but using at the same time proper 
care as to cleanliness and due boiling, obtained a series of results 
contradicting Dr. Bastian’s statements as to the spontaneous genera- 
tion of Bacteria in infusion of turnip to which a fragment of cheese 
had been added. 

Further, certain of the experiments above recorded, and others 
made at the same times with open vessels and simple turnip-infu- 
sion, compel us to dissent emphatically from the conclusion of the 
following statement contained in a recent paper by Dr. Bastian 
(‘Nature,’ Feb. 6th, p. 275):—‘“ Taking such a fluid, therefore, in 
the form of a strong filtered infusion of turnip, we may place it 
after ebullition in a superheated flask, with the assurance that it 
contains no living organisms. Having ascertained also, by our 
previous experiments with the boiled saline fluids, that there is no 
danger of infection by Bacteria from the atmosphere, we may leave 
the rather narrow mouth of the flask open, as we did in these 
experiments. But when this is done, the previously clear turnip- 
infusion invariably becomes turbid in one or two days (the tem- 
perature being about 70° F.), owing to the presence of myriads of 
Bacteria.” The italics are our own. 

We find not only that such an infusion remains free from 
Bacteria when thus treated (subject, of course, to certain failures in 
the precautions taken) for “ one or two days,” but if contamination 
by the admission of coarse atmospheric particles capable of carry- 
ing Bacteria be guarded against, it will remain so for weeks and 
probably for years. In consequence of this absence of develop- 
ment of Bacteria we have cultivated Torule in such a turnip- 
infusion, so as to obtain them entirely free from the former 
organisms*. 

Tn conclusion, we would point out that failure in manipulation, 
contamination in unsuspected ways, such as that due to the pre- 
servative influence of lumps, and, again, the mistaking of particles 
in an infusion which have been there from the first for organisms 
originated de novo, do not exhaust the list of conceivable explana- 
tions of phenomena which have been attributed to spontaneous 
generation. When the knowledge of the natural history of Bacteria 
has advanced somewhat further, there will be a possibility of such 
explanations presenting themselves in ways at this moment un- 
suspected. 


* At this moment, May 20th, the turnip-infusion in the open retort (No, 41) 
is free from all organisms, and is perfectly limpid and sweet. 


On High-Power Definition. 177 


Whilst awaiting Professor Huizinga’s fuller account of his experi- 
ments, we may point out that the hypothesis of an inhibitory influ- 
ence of increased density should be supported by experimental 
evidence, and that it cannot apply to tubes closed before boiling. 
The neck of the flask closed with asphalt may (so far as condi- 
tions are stated by him at present) harbour Bacteria, as in our 
Series F. But especially we would urge upon him and others that 
it is undesirable, as yet, to introduce into the discussion other 
organic mixtures. Turnips and cheese may be very bad material 
for experiment ; but it would be well, as far as possible, to settle 
the matter, or the way in which the matter is to be viewed with 
regard to them, before going off to other particular cases. 

It would be a very excellent thing if all further reference to 
this subject could be postponed for a year or two—that is, until 
further study of Bacteria, such as that inaugurated by Sanderson 
and Cohn, has given us surer ground to tread upon. 


** Note on High-Power Definition as illustrated by a compressed 
Podura-scale.” By E. B. Beaumont, F.R.S., and Dr. Roystor- 
Pieott, F.R.S. 


Nothing in microscopic matters has ever afforded us such com- 
plete satisfaction as the following result of a very fine defini- 
tion, accomplished by means of a Gundlach German +; immer- 
sion lens, corrected by a new method, which Dr. Pigott at present 
delays publishing in the hope of further improvement, but which 
he is willing to exhibit at his house. 

A Podura-slide*, fortunately strongly protected with a thick 


Podura-scale. 


glass cover, having accidentally been subjected to so considerable 
a pressure as to crush out the structure of a large scale, upon 
bringing it, by haphazard, into the field of view with a magnifying- 
power of about 2000 diameters, exhibited a structure indicated by 


* Podura Degeeria vel domestica. 


178 Royal Soctety -— 


the woodcuts here given, and drawn, in the presence of the writers, 
at Dr. Pigott’s house by the accurate artist Mr. Hollick, deaf and 
dumb and a rapid delineator without the camera. Mr. Beau- 
mont’s surprise and admiration equalled that of Dr. Pigott. This 
circumstance will excite no surprise when it is stated that for four 
years the spherules of the Podura have been generally denied 
and warmly disputed. In ordimary cases a crushed scale shows 
nothing ; and as glasses are usually corrected to show the illusory 
spines or markings, these spherules are concealed. 

The idea conveyed was, that two layers of spherules (first de- 
tected by Mr. Beaumont within the tubes), like two confined 
layers of small shot, had, by compression, been forced and largely 
spread out into broader layers. It was thought also that detached 
portions resembled Jong tubes or puckers filled with spherules 
exactly fitting them. ‘The spherules appeared perfectly spherical, 
but somewhat unequal in size. 

In the general flattened and extended surface of the compressed 
and disintegrated scale the spherules appeared dark blue or red, 
according to the slight change in the focal plane, and in a still 
lower plane white. 

In the adjoining uninjured scales long strings of beads were 
seen, like necklaces of coral, here and there sharply bordered 
with black lines, apparently denoting tubes of membrane or 
puckers enclosing them like a tube. Between these strings of 
spherules peeped forth others of a light orange-colour. 

The slide was an old one and well known. ‘The mass of the 
crushed scale occupied a much broader space than any of the 
scales. 


November 20, 1873.—Sir George Biddell Airy, K.C.B., President, 
in the Chair. 


“‘ Note on the Electrical Phenomena which accompany irritation 
of the leaf of Dionwa muscipula.” By J. Burpon SaNnDERSON, 
M.D., F.R.S., Professor of Practical Physiology in University 
College. 


1. When the opposite ends of a living leaf of Dionea are placed 
on non-polarizable electrodes in metallic connexion with each 
other, and a Thomson’s reflecting galvanometer of high re- 
sistance is introduced into the cireuit thus formed, a deflection is 
observed which indicates the existence of a current from the 
proximal to the distal end of the. leaf. This current I call the 
normal leaf-current. If, instead of the leaf, the leaf-stalk is placed 
on the electrodes (the leaf remaining united to it) in such a way 
that the extreme end of the stalk rests on one electrode and a part 
of the stalk at a certain distance from the leaf on the other, a 
current is indicated which is opposed to that in the leaf. This 1 
call the stalk-current. To demonstrate these two currents, it 1s not 
necessary to expose any cut surface to the electrodes. 


Electrical Phenomena in the leaf of Dioneea muscipula. 179 


2. In a leaf with the petiole attached, the strength of the 
current is determined by the length of the petiole cut off with 
the leaf, in such a way that the shorter the petiole the greater is 
the deflection. Thus in a leaf with a petiole an inch long, I ob- 
served a deflection of 40. I then cut off half, then half the 
remainder, and so on. After these successive amputations, the 
deflections were respectively 50, 65, 90, 120. If in this experi- 
ment, instead of completely severing the leaf at each time, it is 
_ merely all but divided witha sharp knife, the cut surfaces remain- 
ing in accurate apposition, the result is exactly the same as if the 
severance were complete; no further effect is obtained on separating 
the parts. 

3.. Effect of constant current directed through the petiole on the 
leaf-current.—If the leaf is placed on the galvanometer electrodes 
as before, and the petiole introduced into the circuit of a small 
Daniell, a commutator being interposed, it is found that on 
directing the battery-current down the petiole (i. e. from the leaf), 
the normal deflection is increased ; on directing the current towards 
the leaf, the deflection is diminished. 

4. Negative variation.—a. If, the leaf being so placed on the 
electrodes that the normal leaf-current is indicated by a deflection 
lefiwards, a fly is allowed to creep into it, it is observed that the 
moment the fly reaches the interior (so as to touch the sensi- 
tive hairs on the upper surface of the lamina), the needle swings 
to the right, the leaf at the same time closing on the fly. 

b. The fly having been caught does not remain quiet in the leaf ; 
each time it moves, the needle again swings to the right, always 
coming to rest in a position somewhat further to the left than 
before, and then slowly resuming its previous position. 

c. The same series of phenomena present themselves if the 
sensitive hairs of a still expanded leaf are touched with a camel- 
hair pencil. 

d. If the closed leaf is gently pinched with a pair of forceps 
with cork points, the effect is the same. 

e. If the leaf-stalk is placed on the electrodes, as before, with 
the leaf attached to it, the deflection of the needle due to the stalk- 
current is increased whenever the leaf is irritated in any of the 
ways above described. 

vé If half the lamina is cut off and the remainder placed on the 
electrodes, and that part of the concave surface at which the sen- 
sitive hairs are situated is touched with a camel-hair pencil, the 
needle swings to the right as before. 

g. If, the open leaf having been placed on the galvanometer 
electrodes as in a, one of the concave surfaces is pierced with a 
pair of pointed platinum electrodes in connexion with the opposite 
ends of the secondary coil of a Du Bois-Reymond’s induction 
apparatus, it is observed that each time that the secondary cir- 

cuit is closed the needle swings to the right, at once resuming 
its former position in the same manner as after mechanical 
irritation. No difference in the effect is observable when the 


186 Miscellaneous. 


direction of the induced currents is reversed. The observation 
may be repeated any number of times; but no effect is produced 
unless an interval of from ten to twenty seconds has elapsed since the 
preceding irritation. 

h. If the part of the concave surface of the leaf which is nearest 
the petiole is excited, whether electrically er mechanically, the 
swing to the right (negative variation) is always preceded by a 
momentary jerk of the needle to the left, i.e. in the direction 
of the deflection due to the normal leaf-current; if any other. 
part of the concave surface is irritated, this does not take place. 

1. Whether the leaf is excited mechanically or electrically, an 
interval of from a quarter to a third of a second intervenes 
between the act of irritation and the negative variation. 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


Observations on the Existence of certain Relations between the Mode 
of Coloration of Birds and their Geographical Distribution. By 
M. A. Mirne-Epwarps, 


In carrying on my researehes on the geographical distribution of 
animals in southern regions, I have been struck with certain relations 
which seem to exist between the parts of the globe inhabited by birds 
and the mode of coloration of those animals; and wishing to know the 
degree of importance that ought to be ascribed to this observation, 
J have tried to examine more carefully than had previously been 
done what may be called the geographical distribution of colours in 
birds. In fact this investigation seemed to me capable of throwing 
some light on the influence which local biological conditions may 
exert upon the secondary zoological characters of species and races. 
To furnish significant results it ought to bear principally upon the 
natural groups which have a very wide geographical distribution ; 
and in order that it may have the necessary degree of precision, it 
ought ta be founded upon the chromatic analysis of the plumage 
and the comparison of its colours with well-defined normals. With- 
out the aid furnished by the chromatic circles, for which science and 
the arts are indebted to M. Chevreul, it would have been difticult for 
me to appreciate thoroughly the tones and shades which I had to 
take into account, and still more difficult to formulate clearly the 
results furnished by observation; but by means of these circles this 
labour has been remarkably facilitated. 

_ Ina first series of investigations I attended specially to various 
degrees of melanism ; and in order to judge of the relative influence 
of black upon the plumage of birds inhabiting various geographical 
regions, I took into account not only the extent of the parts of the 
tegumentary system which are tinted in that manner, but also the 
degree in which the other colours may be dulled or modified in their 
tone by mixture with black in various proportions, 


Miscellaneous. 181 


Birds with black plumage are found in nearly all parts of the globe ; 
but in certain families, of which the geographical extension is very 
wide, the tendency to melanism is scarcely shown except in the 
southern hemisphere, and, more particularly in the oceanic region 
which includes New Zealand, Papuasia, Madagascar, and the inter- 
mediate countries. A remarkable example of this coincidence between 
the mode of coloration of birds and their distribution on the surface 
of the globe is furnished by the family of the swans. In the nor- 
thern hemisphere this family has numerous representatives whose 
plumage is entirely white ; in the southern hemisphere this is not 
the case, and a more or less considerable portion becomes intensely 
black. Thus the Australian swan is almost entirely black ; the cos- 
coroba, or Cygnus anatoides, which is confined to the Fuegian archi- 
pelago and neighbouring countries in South America, has some of the 
wing-feathers black, and if is by this character alone that it differs 
from the Chinese coscoroBa (C. Davidii); lastly, in the swan of 
Chili, the head and neck are jet-black, whilst the rest of the body is 
pure white. These are the only species of swans which live in the 
southern hemisphere. 

These peculiarities would have but little interest if they were 
isolated: but this is not the case ; and the examination of the geo- 
graphical distribution of the colours of the parrots furnishes us with 
still more manifest proofs of the tendency to melanism in the vast 
oceanic region which includes New Zealand, Papuasia, and the in- 
termediate lands. 

Black or nearly black parrots are not met with in America, Asia, 
or Africa (except on the borders of the Mozambique channel), but 
they are not uncommon in the southern region contained within the 
limits already mentioned ; and it is there especially that we find the 
species or local races in which the plumage only presents strongly 
toned-down tints. Thus, in New Zealand and the adjacent islands, 
these birds, instead of presenting bright colours, are more or less 
tinged with black. The Nestors, for example, Have dull brown plu- 
mage ; the larger feathers of the wings and tail, wherever they are 
exposed to the light, are almost uniformly of a brown tint, resem- 
bling that produced by a mixture of nine parts of black with one part 
of orange-red ; on the shoulders, the greater part of the back, the 
head, and the breast the feathers have a brown border of a still 
deeper tint ; and in the rest of their surface similar tints are miti- 
gated by white, so as to become more or less greyish ; and it is almost 
solely on the tail-coverts and the inner surface of the wings and on 
the corresponding portion of the flanks, which are not habitually 
exposed to the light, that an orange-red colour but slightly toned 
down shows itself here and there. 

The Strigops or night-parrots of New Zealand also in great part 
owe their peculiar aspect to another kind of melanism, affecting a 
greenish ground, and mixed with parts modified by albinism. This 
yellowish green, which belongs to Nos. 3 and 4 of the chromatic 
circles, is far from being pure ; it is toned down by about ;4; or +4, 
of black, and is interrupted above by spots and irregular bands of 


182 Miscellaneous. 


nearly pure black and also by whitish streaks, whilst below and on 
the sides of the head the spots are due almost entirely to albinism. 
These mixtures, in which black plays a great part, produce a dull 
and speckled plumage which, up to a certain point, resembles that 
of our owls. 

The tendency to melanism occurs also in the parroquets of New 
Zealand. These birds belong to the group of the Platycerci of which 
ornithologists have formed the genus Cyanorhamphus. Its plumage 
is of a dull green; a little pure red or yellow is still to be seen on 
the forehead or on some other very restricted parts; all the upper 
part of the body of the bird is of a yellowish-green colour much 
toned down with black, and below a similar but lighter tint spreads 
almost uniformly. In Cyanorhamphus alpinus the dominant colora- 
tion nearly corresponds to the yellowish green of the gamut No. 4, 
toned down by ;3; of black; in C. nove-zelandie, the yellowish 
green belongs to the gamut No. 2 and to that No. 3, but it is dulled 
by 35 of black; lastly,in C. auwriceps the general tint of the plumage 
agrees with the yellowish green No. 1, toned down by 5; of black 
over the whole upper surface of the body. 

The islands of the great Indo-Pacific Ocean which are near Africa 
resemble New Zealand as regards the coloration of the plumage of 
their parrots. Thus in Madagascar, in the Mauritius to the east, 
and in the Seychelles and Comoro islands towards the north, and 
even on some parts of the neighbouring shore of Africa, we find 
several black species of parrots belonging to the genus Coracopsis. 

In Australia the Calyptorhynchi abound ; and the whole of their 
plumage is of an intense black colour or softened with white. Many 
of the Australian parroquets have pure colours in the same degree 
as those of America; but in many of these birds the tendency to 
melanism makes its appearance in various parts of the body, some- 
times by the existence of a uniform tint very much toned down, 
and sometimes by the whole basal part of the feathers being invaded 
by black, which only bears near the margins a more or less narrow 
band of red, yellow, green, or blue. 

In the memoir, of which I could only give a short abstract here, I 
review several other ornithological families which have furnished 
analogous facts and show the same tendencies—for example, the 
families of the Kingfishers, Rallide,and Ducks. But I have no space 
to speak of them here ; and the facts which I have indicated suffice to 
show that in the southern Indo-Pacific region the ornithological types 
which elsewhere are clothed with brilliant colours, generally have 
tints toned down with black or weakened by a tendency to albinism. 
—Comptes Rendus. December 29, 1873, pp. 1551-1554. 


On the Genus Callignathus and on Kogia Floweri of Dr. Gill. 
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. 


‘ Dr. Theodore Gill, in a semipopular paper on “Sperm-whales 
giant and pigmy,” in the ‘American Naturalist,’ 1871, iv. p. 725, 
gives a general account of these animals, and proposes a new species, 


Miscellaneous. 183 


Kogia Flower, from Mazatlan, Lower California—described from a 
specimen consisting of the front of a lower jaw, and from the figure 
and notice of the animal, measuring nine feet in length, recently for- 
warded to him by Colonel Grayson. It is very interesting as proving 
that this genus is found in the North Pacific. The account and figure 
of Dr. Gill are so very like that of Kogi«a MacLeayi that I should not 
be at all surprised if Kogia breviceps from the Cape of Good Hope, 
Kogia MacLeayui from Australia (which has been proved not to be 
distinct from the. skull of Physeter simus from the east coast of 
India), and Koga Flowert from Mazatlan are all the same species, 
naturally inhabiting, like the sperm-whale, the tropical regions and 
wandering to the north and south, as the same species has been 
found on both sides of the equator. 

From the comparison of the photographs which Mr. Krefft sent 
me, with the skull from Madras (described by Professor Owen) in the 
British Museum, I could find no difference, as stated in the ‘Cata- 
logue of Seals and Whales in the British Museum,’ 1866, p. 392 ; 
and the comparison of the skulls since sent by Mr. Krefft has 
established the identity of the Australian specimens from the south 
and Indian from the north of the equator. Dr. Gill, having over- 
looked this observation (published in 1866), observes that a generic 
name will sooner or later be desired for Kogia stmus from Madras, 
and therefore proposes to call it Callignathus simus (p. 738)—and 
copies Owen’s figure of the young skull (p. 741, figs. 168-171), 
which is not to be confounded with the skeleton that Professor 
Owen copies from Krefft’s photograph of Zuphysetes Grayit, quite a 
distinct whale of the same group. 


On'the Development of the Phragmostracum of the Cephalopoda, and 
on the Zoological Relations of the Ammonites to the Spirule. By 
M. Munter-Cuarmas. 


I have the honour to submit to the Academy the results of the 
observations which I have made on the development of the phrag- 
mostracum of the Cephalopoda in the laboratory of paleontological 
research at the Sorbonne, under the guidance of M. Hébert. 

This comparative embryogenic investigation proves very clearly 
that the Ammonites are not tetrabranchiate Cephalopoda allied to 
the Nautili, as is generally supposed, but dibranchiate decapod 
Cephalopoda, having the greatest affinity to the Spirule. 

As early as 1867 M. J. Barrande had proved, in his great work 
on the Silurian system of Central Bohemia, the small resemblance 
that exists between the Goniatites and the Nautilide during the first 
period of their development. In fact, the initial chamber of the 
phragmostracum of the Cephalopoda of the Nautilide group, except 
as regards the external cicatrix, does not sensibly differ in its general 
organization from the other primary chambers which are developed 
a little later. In speaking of Cyrtoceras M. Barrande moreover 
expresses himself as follows.:—*: We shall also call attention to the 


184 Miscellaneous. 


fact that this form of the origin of the shell, which occurs also in 
Orthoceras, appears to be similar in all the types of Nautilide in 
which we have observed it hitherto. It contrasts, on the other hand, 
with the origin of the shell of the Goniatites, which appears in the 
form of an egg, isolated from the first air-chamber by a distinct con- 
striction.” 

This initial chamber (ovisac) of the Goniatites, so different from 
those which immediately succeed it, is met with at the origin of the 
phragmostracum of all the dibranchiate Cephalopoda that I have 
been able to study. 

The new and very interesting investigations carried on at 
Philadelphia by Mr. Hyatt, upon the embryogeny of the phragm- 
ostracum of Nautilus pompilius, Deroceras planicosta, and the 
Goniatites, come in support of these observations. It must be 
added, however, that Mr. Hyatt, preoccupied by his theoretical 
ideas upon the evolution of living creatures, in order to establish the 
filiation of the Ammonites and Nautzli, supposes that the latter lost 
their ovisac by truncation. ‘To support this supposition, he adduces 
the transverse external cicatrix which he observed on the initial 
chamber of Nautilus pompilius. 

The numerous observations which I have since been able to make 
upon the termination of the siphon in Aturia zigzag, in the Jurassic, 
Cretaceous, and Tertiary Nautilz, and in the three existing species, 
the microscopic examination of a transverse section of the initial 
chamber of Nautilus pompilius and WN. umbilicatus, and a 
careful comparison of those Silurian Cephalopoda which lose the 
extremity of their phragmostracum by truncation have led me to a 
result completely opposed to the theoretical views put forward by 
Mr. Hyatt, but conformable in all points with the facts observed by 
M. Barrande. 

The comparative examination which I have made of the ovisacs 
of Spirula Peronw and of Ammonites Parkinsoni, A. ooliticus, A. 
mamillaris, &c. has shown me the relations which exist between 
these two types during their embryonic evolution. In fact, in the 
Spirule and the Ammonites the siphon originates in the ovisac a 
little before the appearance of the first septum. It commences by a 
czcal inflation, which bears the prosiphon in its prolongation. The 
new organ to which I give the name of prosiphon must take the place 
of the siphon during the embryonic period. It originates in the ovisac, 
opposite the siphonal inflation, upon which it terminates, but without 
having any internal communication therewith. It is very variable 
in its general form, and may present a strongly marked example of 
dimorphism in the same species of Ammonite. It is formed by a 
membrane, which is sometimes simply spread out as in Spirula 
Peronii, or which may form a more or less circular tube. It also 
sometimes presents two, three, or four small subdivisions at its point 
of insertion upon the inner wall. 

I have ascertained the presence of an ovisac in the genera 
Belemmites, Belemnitella, Beloptera, Belopterina, Spirulirostra, Am- 
momtes, and Ceratites. In Deroceras, Clymenia, and Goniatites its 


Miscellaneous. 185 


general form and its relations with the siphon are the same as in 
all the Ammonites. It is generally spheroidal when the turns of 
the spire are free, and ovoid when they are contiguous. 

In the tetrabranchiate Cephalopoda which live in our present seas 
and in all those which swarmed by thousands in the ancient seas, 
the presence of an ovisac has never been detected. In Nautilus and 
Aturia the siphon originates upon the inner walls of the first 
chamber. It is completely closed at its posterior extremity by a 
part of the calcareous prolongation of the septum which assists in its 
formation. The external transverse cicatrix observed by Mr. Hyatt 
can never have been in communication with the siphon; its purpose 
is still completely unknown. It has been indicated by M. Barrande 
upon a great number of Silurian Tetrabranchiata. 

Thus it results from these observations that at the Silurian epoch 
the tetrabranchiate Cephalopoda were as clearly separated from the 
dibranchiate as at the present day. The only modifications that 
we can recognize are of generic rank; in fact the Ammonites 
which, when young, have septa like those of Deroceras and Goniatites, 
appear to be derived from one of those types.—Comptes Rendus, 
December 29, 1873, pp. 1557-1559. 


On the Endomycict. By the Rev. H. S. Gorman. 
To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 


GenTLEMEN,—My attention has been called to a brief notice you 
have given of my descriptive catalogue of the Endomycici. The 
question of classification, I venture to submit, is rather an experi- 
mental than a logical one, and must be influenced by the amount of 
knowledge possessed of the objects to be classified ; so that a group 
of genera which fifteen years ago were united into a family may 
now, by the addition of fresh genera, require subdividing into a group 
of families; and yet it may be convenient to retain as nearly as 
possible the original title for the whole group, though of course the 
patronymic termination must be altered. 

Had the reviewer, however, been acquainted with Gerstiicker’s 
‘Entomographien,’ he would have known that that author recognized 
two ‘groups, “zwei sehr ungleiche Gruppen ”—I. Endomychide 
genuini, I]. Endomychide adsciti. 

Whether it is illogical to attempt the union of these, or unne- 
cessary to reconstruct the latter (which is a heterogeneous mis- 
cellany), I will leave to those who follow me to determine. 

As your reviewer is so hard to please in the selection of names, he 
should at least have quoted correctly the one he terms awkward. 
I have no family “ Paussidoide,” but one Paussoideide. 

The only genus in this family is T’rochoideus, Westw. Would 
he have thought Trochoideide less awkward or more expressive ? 

I am, Gentlemen, yours truly, 


H. S. Gornam. 
Shipley, January 19, 1874. 


186 Miscellaneous. 


On the Bermuda Humpbacked Whale of Dudley (Balena nodosa, 
Bonnaterre, Megaptera americana, Gray, and Megaptera bel- 
licosa, Cope). By Dr. J. KE. Gray, F.R.S. &c. 


In the ‘ Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc.,’ October 1870, Mr. Cope describes 
the skeleton of a humpbacked whale as Megaptera bellicosa, sent 
from St. Bartholomew, West Indies, to Philadelphia, and figures the 
upper part of the skull and various parts of the skeleton. It agrees 
with the northern Megaptera longimana in having a scapula without 
any processes ; but differs in the form of the atlas vertebra, the 
nasals, and other parts of the skeleton. It is evidently a very 
distinct species. 

The American whalers are now in the habit of catching hump- 
backed whales off the coast of San Domingo and in other parts of 
the Caribbean seas. “ Dr. A. Goés, of St. Bartholomew, says that the 
whales appear about the island of St. Bartholomew about the 
beginning of March, or even in February, and remain until the end 
of May. In April and May it is said that they are seen in pairs 
standing vertically in the water. When they return they often come 
in a family of three, male, female, and young (the calf one or two 
years old). The bull is wild and more difficult to take than the 
female, and he has on two occasions smashed the boat of his pursuers 
to pieces. In June they are said to go further into the Mexican 
Gulf, and return eastward in the autumn; but they do not appear 
among the smaller Antilles at that time. Dr. Goés supposes that 
they pass the Straits of Florida, or follow the shores of the 
south main. He says that the whalers think they pass the 
middle of winter on the African coast; but this will require con- 
firmation.” 

This whale is no doubt the same as the “‘ Bunch or Humpbacked 
Whale ” of Dudley (noticed, with an account of the method of taking 
it, in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions’ for 1665), from Bermuda 
(where it livesfrom March to the end of May), on which Bonnaterre 
established Balena nodosa, and is the Megaptera americana of 
Gray, ‘Zool. Erebus and Terror, pp. 17 & 52, of which Megaptera 
bellicosa, Cope, will be a synonym. 

By a curious perversity Mr. Cope refers to the Bahia finner, but 
makes no reference to or comparison with the Bermuda humpback, 
though Dudley and Dr. Goés say that they inhabit the Caribbean 
seas at the same period of the year. 


On some recent eemarks by Mr. Meldola* upon Iphiclides Ajax 
(Papilio Ajax auct.). By Mr. 8. H. Scuppmr. 


These remarks were made in connexion with investigations “on 
the amount of substance-waste undergone by insects in the pupal 


* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. xii. pp. 301-307 (Oct. 1873). 


Miscellaneous. 187 
state.” It was presumed @ priori that, as there was gain of matter in 
the larval state and loss during the pupal, the size of an individual 
of any species “would be, ceteris paribus, inversely proportional to 
the ratio of the pupal to the larval period, or directly proportional 
to the ratio of the larval to the pupal period.” 

Mr. Meldola attempted to test this theory by tabulating the state- 
ments of Mr. Edwards concerning the duration of the stages in the 
different polymorphic forms of Ajax ; and he found “ that there was 
a relationship, but exactly the reverse of that which would be anti- 
cipated from the conclusions previously set forth.” 

The three forms of Ajax have been called by Mr. Edwards Walshii, 
Telamonides, and Marcellus; and these increase in size in regular 
ratio and succeed each other in season in this order. The following 
table represents the duration of the several stages, and is taken by 
Mr. Meldola from Mr. Edwards’s work :— 


Eggs. Larva. 


Chrysalis. Total. 
Walshitt cess. 7-8 days. 22-29 days. 14 days. 43-51 days. 
Telamonides .... 4-5 ,, 15-18 _,, 1j-l4 , 30-36 ,, 
Marcellus ...... 45 ,, 12-19 ,, ll-1l4 ,, 27-88 ,, 


The next table is Mr. Meldola’s attempted tabulation of the facts 
by which he comes to the above conclusion :— 


! 
| | } 
| | Ratio of mean Ratio of mean 

Name of variety. pupal to larval to Mean expanse, ¢. | 
pane | mean laryal period. | mean pupal period. 
| 1 (are | inches. 
Walshit.......| ee OBAGI ee oo - BO 2-70) 
| 25°5 1 
} 12°5 ayo | 16°5 
Telamonides ...) 2 =0-757 =~ = 1-°320 300 
165 12°5 
12°5 15°5 5) 9.9% 
| Marcellus a =0-806 Ds5= 1-240 ooo 


‘<Tt is here seen,” 


says Mr. Meldola, ‘‘ that the size of the variety 


is directly instead of inversely proportional to the ratio of the pupal 
to the larval period, and vice versd.” Unfortunately for this con- 
clusion the figures given by Mr. Edwards, or their reduction by Mr. 
Meldola, refer in each case to the progeny of Walsh, Telamonides, 
and Marcellus, and do not bear upon the question ; in every instance 
given in the tables the progeny or resultant is Marcellus ; Walshii 
and Telamonides are the produce of wintering chrysalids, and there- 
fore by Mr. Meldola’s rule should be, as they are, smaller than 
Marcellus, which, on the other hand, is always the result of short- 
lived summering chrysalids. Unless, however, some unknown factor 
plays a part, Zelamonides should be smaller than Walshii, because 
produced later in the season from wintering chrysalids ; but here 
the opposite is the truth. 


Mr. Edwards apparently overlooked the fact that Walshi and 


188 . Miscellaneous. 


Telamonides belonged to the same brood; the former consists of 
earlier, the latter of later individuals from wintering chrysalids ; 
the second brood of the species (the first from short-lived chrysalids) 
is Marcellus, and made up of the mingled progeny of both Walshi 
and Telamonides.—From an advance proof of the Proceedings of 
the Boston Society of Natural History, October 22, 1873. 


The Habitat of Labaria hemispheerica. 
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. 


In reply to Dr. Meyer’s communication at p. 66, I see I am 
wrong in not giving Cebu as the habitat of these sponges; but as I 
received the box of sponges some time after I received the letter 
containing their habitat, although he said I should receive the two 
together, I had forgotten that the one referred to the other. Iam 
astonished to observe that Dr. Meyer says, “ I obtained these sponges 
from the reefs in the sea near the village Talisay,” because the spe- 
cimen of Labaria we received had, when dried, separated into two 
parts—a hemispherical sponge and a long tuft of broken spicules of 
Euplectella, tied at one end by a strip of a spotted silk handkerchief, 
which had been affixed into the base of the hemisphere! Dr. Meyer, 
in a letter of November 6th, 1873, says, “I wondered to hear that 
the largest one proved to be artificially made up; if I am not 
mistaken, I got still some specimens of the same kind, but they did 
not yet arrive in Europe.” In a note just received (Jan. 21st) Dr. 
Meyer says :—‘I looked through those bottles and dried several 
sponges. My Malay boy from Ternate was charged with this 
business, and perhaps he may have tied something together or done 
another mischief with them ; or this may have been made by those 
fishermen at Talisay, I having overlooked it before I started, as I 
said, in a hurry.” 


On the Steppe-Cat of Bokhara (Chaus caudatus). 
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. 


The Zoological Department of the British Museum has lately re- 
ceived the skin and skull of a Chaus from the steppes of Bokhara. 
It is very lke the common jungle-cat (Felis chaus) from more 
southern Asia in the thickness and softness of the fur, in the general 
colouring, and in the tufts of the ears; but it differs from it in 
having a considerably longer tail, reaching nearly to the ground— 
hence its name Chaus caudatus in the description of it which has 
been read at the Zoological Society, illustrated by a beautiful figure 
by Mr. Wolf. 


THE ANNALS 


AND 


MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. 


| FOURTH SERIES. ] 


No. 75. MARCH 1874. 


XXVII.—On the Structure called Eozoon canadense in the 
Laurentian Limestone of Canada. By H. J. CARTER, F.R.S. 
&e. (A letter to Professor W. Kina, Sc.D., Galway.) 


My peEArR Srr,—On the 13th instant I had the pleasure to send 
you a‘ Card ”’ acknowledging the safe arrival of your letter of 
the 10th inst. and specimen of Laurentian Limestone contain- 
ing the so-called Hozoon canadense, intimating at the same time 
that after a few days I would answer you more at length. 
I now proceed to do so. 

With the copy of your Papers* on the mineral origin of 
this formation (received on the 9th August last) and your 
present letter under reply, together with the decalcified slice 
of Laurentian Limestone (about 2x2x2 inch in size), 
which you state to be from Canada and to have been forwarded 
to your colleague Professor Rowney by Dr. Carpenter as a 
“typical specimen of Hozoon canadense,” I also possess in 
my own cabinet perhaps some of the most perfectly fossilized 
foraminiferous structure in existence; so that, for the purpose 
of comparing the two, I could not be more satisfactorily pro- 
vided. 

That I should feel interested in the question at issue as to 
the identity of the Laurentian Limestone with that of fora- 
miniferous structure may be easily conceived by the accom- 

* “Proceedings of the Royal Irish Academy,’ vol. x. pp. 506-551, 


and 2nd series, vol. i. 1871. 
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 14 


190 Mr. H. J. Carter on “‘ Eozoon canadense.”’ 


panying copy of my paper on the “Form and Structure of 
Operculina arabica,” read before the Bombay Branch of the 
Royal Asiatic Society so far back as May 1852, and pub- 
lished in their Journal and in the ‘ Annals and Magazine of 
Natural History’ of the followiug year, together with many 
other papers subsequently published in the latter, from time 
to time, on the structure and adult forms of several fossilized 
Foraminifera, including new species. You may also thus 
fully understand how grateful I feel to you for having been 
the first to send me a specimen of the Laurentian rock, and 
to bring the subject of its structure and composition before me 
under the mineralogical point of view detailed in the papers 
published conjointly by yourself and Prof. Rowney, to which 
I have alluded. 

You will also observe, by the figures in the plate attached 
to my paper on Operculina, that, at a very early period, I 
demonstrated the system of foraminiferous structure in a recent 
Operculina and identified it with the structure of a fossil Num- 
mulite. How much more completely than others, a comparison 
of our descriptions and illustrations respectively will show, it 
not being my business here to lay claim to any thing beyond 
a position to be able to compare genuine foraminiferous struc- 
ture, both living and fossilized, with the so-called Hozoon cana- 
dense. 

Previously, however, to stating my observations in this 
respect, I would say a word or two on the law of form in 
organized beings; for this bears upon the subject. 

That the “law” exists in the mineralogical as well 
as in the organic kingdom may be seen in the common 
mineral growth termed “dendrites.” But, besides this 
familiar example, it may be observed in what are called 
‘“‘ moss-agates,’ coming from the geodes of trap—that is, 
from a volcanic rock. Of the latter I possess a polished and 
mounted specimen, composed of opalescent chalcedony, in 
which there is a growth of glauconite that, when viewed under 
an inch compound power, would, by any one not acquainted 
with the geological facts, be termed a “ branched Conferva.” 

Again, I possess a similarly polished and mounted specimen 
of green calespar (that designated by Prof. Haughton “ Hislo- 
pite ”’), also from a trappean geode of Western India, in which 
there is a growth of glauconite so like the remains of dead 
incrusted Conferva from a dirty pond that, without being 
acquainted with its geological position, this would also be pro- 
nounced to be Conferva in such a state fossilized. 

So far the ‘law of form” is the same in both kingdoms, 
and hence the necessity of knowing this before we state confi- 


Mr. H. J. Carter on “ Eozoon canadense.”’ 191 


dently that such and such forms are or are not organic. 
The mistake of identifying dendrites &c. with fossilized plants 
has often occurred, but not with acknowledged competent au- 
thorities. 

Lastly, I possess a similar specimen of green Heulandite 
from the trap of Western India, in which the green colour is 
owing to the presence of a granular growth of glauconite 
among the translucent zeolithic mineral; and this brings me 
to the so-called Hozoon canadense, which you and your col- 
league Prof. Rowney conclude to be of a like nature, viz. 
granular serpentine in calespar. 

With your mineralogical view I have nothing to do, as it 
would be presumption in me to even praise such high author- 
ities; but, from the fossilization point of view, I may be per- 
mitted to state facts which I feel able to appreciate in con- 
nexion with the subject. 

Before, however, going to adult foraminiferous structure for 
comparison, it is desirable to premise its primary, which is 
its elementary, form. 

Thus the assumed ovum of a foraminiferous animal is soft, 
spherical, filled with granuliferous sarcode, and nucleated 
while in the chambers of the adult living animal. After this, 
on approaching the embryonal state, the capsule becomes cal- 
careous and pierced all round with minute apertures, save at 
one point, where there is a large one, from which issues, in 
the living and active condition, the internal sarcode in the form 
of a short cord terminated by a reticulated lash of filaments 
(pseudopodia) of different lengths, which are ever changing 
in shape (Ameba-like) as they are put forth in search of food 
&e. The calcareous covering then becomes thickened, and 
the “ apertures ” elongated into tubes which, in juxtaposition, 
descend perpendicularly through the crust thus formed, and keep 
up a connexion between the exterior and interior of the embryo. 

This is the elementary form or first chamber of a foramini 
ferous animal; and a repetition of it, produced by the sarcode 
which issues from the large aperture, thus goes on stolonifer- 
ously producing chamber after chamber, of the shape peculiar 
to the individual, until the increments thus produced at last 
arrive at the ultimate form of the species. 

The soft ovum can only be seen in the recent animal; but 
the spherical embryos, both in my specimens of recent Oper- 
culina arabica and in the fossilized Nummulites &c., may be 
seen in abundance, not only in the chambers, but in the tubes 
(that is, in the branches of the stoloniferous prolongations of 
sarcode; for they also clothe themselves with a calcareous 
layer), on their way out from the chambers sy exterior. 


192 Mr. H. J. Carter on “‘ Eozoon canadense.”’ 


In a specimen of Orbitolites which I possess the embryos 
(2 to 10 or more in most of the chambers) appear to be ellip- 
tical, almost like a Miliola! 

Thus, as stated, the foraminiferous animal, built cell over 
cell, at length arrives at the specific form, whether Nummulite 
or Orbitoides &e., and throughout is but a repetition of the em- 
bryonal chamber modified only in shape to accord with the 
species. But still there are the tubuli perpendicular to the 
plane of growth in the crusts of the chambers respectively ; 
there are the chambers; and in the intervals of the general 
structure, which are filled up with calcareous material and 
thus form the skeleton, is a reticulated system of canals pro- 
duced by the branches of the stoloniferous sarcode, communi- 
cating in all directions with the chambers through their walls 
and with one another, finally opening on the exterior of the 
test, and in their course, as I have before stated, often pre- 
senting the spherical embryos in their transit from the chambers 
to the exterior ; while the tubuli of the crust of the chambers, 
being developed with these crusts successively as they are 
piled upon one another, form thus a cont/nuous communication, 
through the cavities of the chambers, between the exterior 
and very centre of the test. 

Hence, if a section of a fossilized form be made just above 
or just below the chamber (that is, owés¢de it), the tubuli of the 
upper or lower part of the crust must be seen; while if it be 
made through the chamber, then the plane of the openings 
inside must be seen. Indeed it is impossible to make a section 
in which they do not come into view, or to examine a piece 
not larger than a small pin’s head without seeing them; so 
that to pretend to identify the acicular structure sometimes 
observed to be standing perpendicularly on, but much more 
frequently parallel with, the surface of the grains of serpen- 
tine in the Laurentian Limestone (which grains have been 
viewed as the casts of the chambers of a foraminiferous animal) 
with these tubuli, that always run directly to the chamber, and 
should be thus seen in almost every atom of foraminiferous 
structure, seems to me to be nonsense*. 

Nothing can be clearer than all that I have above stated of 
foraminiferous structure, as seen under an inch-focus com- 
pound power in my infiltrated specimens of Nummulites, 
- Orbitoides, &c. from the Eocene formation of Western India. 

But in vain do we seek in the so-called Hozoon canadense 
for the unvarying perpendicular tubuli, the s¢ne qué non of 


* For good figures of this acicular structure,see Prof. King and Rowney’s 
paper, read 12th July, 1869, Transactions of Royal Irish Academy, vol. 
x. p. 506, pls. i. to iv. figs, 1 to 6 & 10a z respectively. 


Mr. H. J. Carter on ‘‘ Eozoon canadense.” 193 


foraminiferous structure. In vain do we look for that regularity 
of chamber-formation which, in the amorphous growth assigned 
to the so-called Hozoon, might be equally well assumed to be 
identical with the heterogeneous mass of chambers on each 
side of the central plane of Orbitoides dispansa, accompanied 
by the transverse bars of stoloniferous structure uniting one 
chamber to the other. In short, in vain do we look for the 
casts of true foraminiferous chambers at all in the grains of 
serpentine ; they, for the most part, are not subglobular, but 
subprismatic. 

With such deficiencies I am at a loss to conceive how the 
so-called Hozoon canadense can be identified with foramini- 
ferous structure, except by the wildest conjecture; and then 
such identification no longer becomes of any scientific value. 

Having examined the slice of Laurentian Limestone which 
you have so courteously submitted to me in thick and thin 
polished sections mounted in Canada balsam, by transmitted 
and also by reflected light, also the surface of the “‘ decalcified ” 
slice as it came from you, in all directions with 3- and 1-inch 
focus compound powers respectively, I must unhesitatingly 
declare that it presents no foraminiferous structure anywhere. 
Nor does its structure bear so much resemblance to that of a 
foraminiferous test as the legs of a table to those of a quadruped ; 
while if such be the grounds on which geological inferences 
are established, the sooner they are abandoned the better for 
geology, the worse for sensationalism ! 

The contents of this letter are open to no controversy. My 
knowledge of foraminiferous structure has been obtained step 
by step, beginning with the recent and then going to the 
fossilized forms, making and mounting my own sections, from 
which afterwards my illustrations and descriptions have been 
taken. If others who have pursued a similar course of in- 
struction differ from me in what I have above stated, the ques- 
tion can only be decided by a third party, not on verbal 
arguments alone, but on a comparison of the actual specimens, 
as prolonged disputation, in matters of opinion, soon disgusts 
every body but the combatants, and can end in nothing but a 
fearful waste of time that might be better employed. The 
accompanying slide I must ask you kindly to return at your 
convenience, as, you will admit, such specimens of foraminife- 
rous structure are not so plentiful as Laurentian Limestone ! 

I am, dear Sir, 
“The Cottage,” Yours very truly, 


Budleigh-Salterton, Devon, H. J. Carrer. 
29th December 1873. 


194 Mr. R. Etheridge on Cheetetes tumidus. 


XX VIIL.— Observations on Cheetetes tumidus, Phillips. 
By R. Eruerrpce, Jun., F.G.S. 


[Plate XI, figs, 1-3.] 


CHZTETES TUMIDUS was first described by Prof. Phillips in 
1836 under the name of Calamopora tumida* ; but although 
several figures were given, a very limited description was 
appended. As Favosites tumida both Portlock t and M‘Coy} 
noticed this coral and gave short descriptions of it. It 
was also recorded under the same name in the early edition 
of Morris’s ‘Catalogue’§. In his great work the ‘British 
Paleozoic Fossils’ M‘Coy added to and more clearly defined 
the characters of this coral as Stenopora tumida||; he there 
notices the characters of the tubes or calices, the nature of the 
diaphragms or tabule, and indicates the presence of a con- 
cave diaphragm nearly closing each of the tubular openings. 
Messrs. Milne-Edwards and Haime appear to have been the 
first to refer the Calamopora tumida of Phillips to the genus 
Cheetetes 4]. Although they do not mention the existence of 
tabule in their description, yet such appear to be plainly in- 
dicated in figure 3a, plate xlv., of their ‘ British Fossil Corals.’ 
Lastly Prof. De Koninck, in a recently issued work **, has 
given an interesting recapitulation of the principal points in 
the structure and history of this species, under the name of 
Monticulipora tumida. 

The majority of specimens obtained from Scotch carbonife- 
rous beds, in some of which the species is very plentiful, have 
the margins of the calices apparently more thickened than is 
generally represented, although this character is variable even 
on the same specimen. ‘The calices are in places very un- 
equally developed, giving rise to spaces every here and there 
more or less free from openings, or where the latter are much 
smaller than the generality of those on the same specimen, 
thus forming spots which to the naked eye appear like plain 
patches (Pl. XI. fig. 1,a). The smaller tubes are about one 
fourth the size of the larger. On the base of attachment of 
Cheetetes tumidus the tube-openings are often of a more irregular 
form than on the branches, becoming oval, and the walls not 


* Geol. Yorksh. vol. ii. t. 1. f. 49-57. 

+ Geol. Report, 1843, p. 326, pl. xxii. f. 4. 

t Synop. Carb. Foss. Ireland, 1844, p. 193. 

§ Cat. Brit. Foss. 1845, p. 37. | p. 82. 

q| Polyp. Foss. Terr. Pal. 1851, p. 270 ; also Monog. Brit. Foss. Corals, 
1852, p. 159. 

** Nouv. Rech. Anim. Foss. Terr. Carb. 1872, pt. i. pp. 143-146. 


Mr. R. Etheridge on Chetetes tumidus. 195 


so thickened. This is probably the fossil figured by Ure in 
his ‘ History of Rutherglen and E. Kilbride’*, and described 
by Fleming as Cellepora Uriit. If this is so, Ure was the first 
to figure Chetetes tumidus; and it, like many of his figures, 
is very faithfully drawn. 

When decorticated the tube-walls of C. tumidus are con- 
siderably reduced in thickness, when compared with the 
thickened external surfaces. 

Fig. 2 represents a vertical microscopic section of a portion 
of a branch, where in the central portion, as has been pointed 
out by M‘Coy f, the tubes are vertical and abruptly diverge 
to the surface, where they open at right angles. ‘The internal 
wall of each is circular, the external hexagonal or polygonal, 
becoming thinner towards the imaginary axis of the coral. 
The vertical portion of the tubes in a transverse section 
presents the appearance of an axis of cellular tissue (fig. 3). 

Both M‘Coy and Edwards and Haime indicate the existence 
of tabule. The former says, “ diaphragms about the diameter 
of the tubes apart’’§; the latter do not mention these structures, 
but they distinctly figure them ||. On the other hand, Prof. 
De Koninck, in his description of Monticulipora tumida, states 
that although he had examined numerous Irish and Belgian 
specimens, yet he had failed to discover any trace of tabul 
(planchers). In fig. 3, which is a transverse section of fig. 2, 
the tabule may be distinctly seen as delicate lines in that por- 
tion of the tubes at right angles to the general axis, at which 
point the walls in some specimens appear to be more or less 
constricted. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI. figs. 1-3. 


Fig. 1. Portion of Chetetes tumidus, Phil., somewhat enlarged. 
Fig, 2. Vertical section of portion of another specimen, showing the 
central vertical and lateral horizontal portions of the tubes. 
Fig. 3. Transverse section of the same, showing the tabule passing across 
the horizontal portion of the tubes, and also the central vertical 
tubes. Figs. 2 & 3 are considerably enlarged. 
{I have to thank my friend Mr. H. M. Skae for the very careful 
drawings accompanying these notes. | 


* Plate xx. fig. 1. 

+ Brit. Animals, 1828, p. 533. 

{ Brit. Pal. Foss. p. 82. 

§ L. ec. p. 83. 

|| Monog. Brit. Foss, Corals, pl. xlv. fig. 3 ¢, 


196 Prof. C. Mobius on the Mollusca &e. of the 


XXIX.—Mollusca, Vermes, and Coelenterata of the Second 
German North-Polar Voyage. By Cari Mosius*. 


[Plate XI. figs. 4-14. ] 


THE region in which the invertebrate marine animals cited in 
the following Catalogue were collected by Dr. Pansch, between 
the shore line and a depth of 30 fathoms, extends from 73° 50! 
to 75° 15' N. lat. Here the animals live in a temperature which 
varies but little throughout the year. According to the log- 
book of the ‘ Germania,’ Captain Koldeway, the daily average 
of the surface-temperature from the 9th of July to the 13th of 
September 1869, from 70° 44’ to 75° 30! N. lat., only oscillated 
between 1°62 and 1°29 R. (=35°-64 and 34°9 F.). Then ice 
was produced, beneath which, from the 3rd of October 1869 to 
the 21st of May 1870, a temperature of 1°5-2° R. (=35°4 
-36°°5 F.) prevailed. Measurements of temperature down to 
220 fathoms within the same latitudes between the 13th of 
July and the 3rd of August 1869 gave 0°4-1°3 R. 
( =32°:9-34°-92 F.). 

In the year 1870 the surface temperature between 71° 20! 
and 75°26’ N. lat. from the 11th of July to the 28th of 
September was found to be 0°:02—4°'62 R. (=32°-045-42°'4 F.). 
Between 73° 11! and 71°30! from the 12th of August to the 
27th of September, at depths of 20-300 fathoms, 0°-7—2°°6 R. 
( =33°°57-37°°85 F.) were observed. 

According to the log-book of the ‘ Hansa,’ Captain Hege- 
mann, 1°-0°°6 R. (=34°:25-33°°35 F.) were found at 20-75 
fathoms, on the 14th and 15th of July, in N. lat. 74°37! and 
74° 57’; and 1°R. (34°25 F.) at 100 fathoms in N. lat. 73° 5’. 

In his address upon the scientific results of the first German 
North-Polar voyage of 1868, M. von Freeden says (p. 4) :— 
“ Beyond the parallel of Jan Mayen (71° N. lat.) as far as 77° 
we find a great sea-surface which, from the 1st of June to the 
ist of September, possesses a temperature oscillating between 
0° and 2° R. (=32° and 36°°5 F.), and which is more and more 
filled with melting masses of ice the further west we go.” 

Thus, with regard to the oscillations of temperature in their 
medium, the marine animals of Greenland are in just as favour- 
able a position as the animals of the tropical seas. 

According to Dana’s ‘Classification and Geographical Distri- 
bution of the Crustacea,’ 1853, p. 1483, the mean surface- 
temperatures of the thirty coldest and the thirty warmest con- 
secutive days are as follows :—near 


* Translated and abridged by W. 8. Dallas, F.L.S., from the Report 
of the Voyage, vol. ii. 1873, pp. 246-261. 


Second German North-Polar Voyage. 197 


Venezuela and Surinam . 18°66 & 21°32 R. (=73°-98 & 79°-97 F.), 
Bahia and Pernambuco . 18°66 & 22°-64 R. (=73°-98 & 82°-94 F.), 


Singapore........ +... 18°66 & 23°-08 R. (=73°-98 & 83°-93 F.), 
Uy DS NT 18°-66 & 23°52 R. (=73°-98 & 84°-92 F.), 
Bale cs. - 18°66 & 22°-64 R. ( = 73°-98 & 82°-94 F.), 
EE red a: « 20°88 & 23°-52 R. (=78°-98 & 84°-92 F.). 


From the temperature-observations made by Prof. Carl 
Semper in the sea surrounding the Philippines, which he has 
been kind enough to place at my disposal for these com- 
parisons, I extract the following :-— 

On the 26th of June 1861, near Anhuplate, between 10 
o'clock in the morning and 10 o’clock in the evening, 


the temperature of the air varied between 20°°6 & 22°-9 R. (=78°35 
& 83°°5 F.), 
the temperature of the surface varied between 21°3 & 21°8 R. 
(=79°-9 & 81°-05 F.). 
At the same place on the same day the temperature at 
5 fathoms was 21°-5 R. (=80°4 F.) at 10 a.m. 


17 3 21°-4 R. (=80°15 F.) at 2:30 p.m. 
22 5 "21°-4 R. (= 80°15 F.) at 3 pm. 
5 3 21°°5 R (=80°4 FE.) at 5 p.m. 


Thus, at the depths here cited, the temperature differs very 
little from that of the surface, just as in the northern icy sea. 

I suppose that the nearly uniform temperature in which the 
high-northern marine animals live is one of the chief causes of 
the considerable size by which, according to numerous observa- 
tions, they are distinguished from individuals of the same 
species in temperate regions ; for, at the bottom of the icy sea, 
species which from their nature can thrive in a low tempera- 
ture are but little if at all exposed to those disturbances which 
the greater oscillations of temperature produce in the vital con- 
ditions of the animals of more temperate seas. ‘The organs can 
consequently perform their functions in a more uniform manner 
(so far as these are dependent on temperature) than in indi- 
viduals of the same species which inhabit, for example, the 
middle and higher regions of the North Sea and the Baltic, 
where the differences between the lowest and highest tempera- 
tures of the water amount to 10°-15° R. (=22°-5-33°75 F.), 
or sometimes even more, as has been ascertained by H. A. 
Meyer * for various points in the western basin of the Baltie, 
and by myself for two places in the North Sea off the German 
coast T. 

* ‘Untersuchungen iiber physikalische Verhaltnisse des westlichen 
Theils der Ostsee’ (Kiel, 1871), § 27. 

+ Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie, Band xxi. 1871, pp. 301, 302, 


198 Prof. C. Mébius on the Mollusca ce. of the 


iD 


io) 


MOLLUSCA. 
GASTEROPODA. 


Chiton albus, Linn. Length 15, breadth 8 millims. 
Distr. Spitzbergen to the Cattegat and Britain, Massa- 
chusetts (Gould, Binney). Down to 550 fathoms. 


. Lepeta ceca, Mill. Length 11, breadth 8, height 5 millims. 


Walrus Island, 25 fathoms. 
Distr. Circumpolar; Sitka, North Japan (Schrenck), 
Spitzbergen to the Cattegat and Britain. 


. Trochus grenlandicus, Chemn. Length 13, breadth 15 


millims. 

Sabine Island, Jackson Island, North Shannon Island, 
Germania Harbour; 2-30 fathoms. 

Distr. Labrador to Massachusetts; White Sea to the 
Cattegat and Dritain. 


. Trochus helicinus, Fab. Length 15, breadth 20 millims. 


Sabine Island, Jackson Island, North Shannon Island ; 
Walrus Island ; 4-27 fathoms. 

Distr. Circumpolar; Massachusetts, Japanese seas, Nor- 
way to the Cattegat and Britain. 


. Pleurotoma pyramidalis, Strém. Length 12, breadth 6 


millims. 

Sabine Island, Jackson Island, Shannon Island; 4-30 
fathoms. 

Distr. Greenland to Massachusetts, Spitzbergen to Nor- 
way (Bergen). 


. Fusus propinquus, Alder. Length 72, breadth 33 millims. 


Sabine Island, Clavermg Island, Germania Harbour ; 
2-20 fathoms. 
Distr. Russian arctic coast to the Cattegat and Ireland. 


. Buccinum undatum, Linn, Length 42, breadth 30 millims. 


Jackson Island, Clavering Island; 4 fathoms. 

Distr. Circumpolar; European and North-American 
coasts of the North Atlantic, Mediterranean, Sea of 
Ochotsk. 

Scalaria grenlandica, Chemn. Length 30 millims. 

North Shannon Island, 30 fathoms. 

Distr. Arctic Ocean, Norway to Bergen. 


. Naticaclausa, Brod. & Sow. Length 29, breadth 20 millims. 


North Shannon Island, Sabine Island, Jackson Island, 
Clavering shore ; 30 fathoms. 
Distr. Circumpolar ; Japanese sea, Finmark. 


10. Cylichna cylindracea, Penn. Length 19, breadth 4:5 
. millims. 


Second German North-Polar Voyage. 199 


Jackson Island, 4 fathoms. 

Distr. Finmark, Canaries, Mediterranean ; 3-160 fathoms. 
11. Chone limacina, Phips. ‘Length 36 millims. 

Distr. West Greenland, Massachusetts. 


LAMELLIBRANCHIA. 


1. Modiolaria discors, Linn. Length 26, height 16, breadth 
11 millims. 
Shannon, Sabine, Clavering, and Jackson islands ; 4-30 
fathoms. 
Distr. Circumpolar; North-east of America, north 
Japanese sea, Mediterranean, North Sea, Western Baltic. 
2. Cardium grenlandicum, Chemn. Length 70 millims. 
Distr. West Greenland, Massachusetts, Behring’s Straits. 
3. Astarte borealis, Chemn. (A. arctica, ” Gould). Length 
33-35, height 27, breadth 7-10 millims. 
Shannon, Sabine, Clavering, and Jackson islands ; 4-10 
fathoms. 
Distr. Arctic seas, from Behring’s Straits to Lapland, 
Norway, Baltic to Bornholm. 
4, Astarte ‘sulcata, Da Costa. Length 25, height 18, breadth 
10 millims. 
Distr. Circumpolar; Sea of Ochotsk, Canaries, North- 
eastern America, bays of Kiel and Flensburg. 
5. Astarte compressa, Mont. Length 14, height 12, breadth 
7°5 millims. 
Jackson Island. 
Distr. Arctic seas, North-eastern America, Spitzbergen, 
Norway, Britain, Kiel Bay. 
6. Astarte crebricostata, Forbes. Length 28, height 22, 
breadth 13 millims. 
Shannon Island, 30 fathoms. 
Distr. West Greenland, Norway, North-eastern America. 
7. Venus astartoides, Beck. Length 16, height 12, breadth 7 
millims. 
Shannon Island, Jackson Island ; 4-30 fathoms. 
Distr. West Greenland, Massachusetts, seas of Ochotsk 
and Japan. 
8. Mya truncata, Linn. 
Sabine Island, 10-20 fathoms. 
Distr. Circumpolar; Sea of Ochotsk, North-eastern 
America, Britain, Bay of Biscay, Norway, Western Baltic. 
9. Saxicava rugosa, Linn. Length 43, height 22 millims. 
Shannon Island, 30 fathoms. 
Distr. Circumpolar ; Japanese and Chinese seas, North- 


200 Prof. C. Mobius on the Mollusca kc. of the 


eastern America, Sitka, Mediterranean, Canaries, North Sea, 
Western Baltic. 
BRACHIOPODA. 


1. Terebratula psittacea, Gmel. Length 21, breadth 22, height 
15 millims. 
Jackson Island. 
Distr. West Greenland, Massachusetts, Spitzbergen, 
Finmark. 
2. Terebratula cranium, Mill. Length 16, breadth 11, height 
11 millims. 
Shannon Island, 30 fathoms. 
Distr. Norway, Shetland Isles, Finmark to the Cattegat. 


VERMES. 


ANNELIDES. 


1. Polynoé cirrosa, Pall. Length 47, breadth 10 millims. 
Sabine Island. 
Distr. Finmark to the Cattegat, Britain, West Greenland, 
Spitzbergen ; 3-120 fathoms. 
. Polynoé cirrata, Pall. Length 33, breadth 10 millims. 
Sabine Island, Clavering Straits; 4-12 fathoms. 
Distr, Circumpolar; Baltic to Sitka. 
3. Nereds diversicolor, Miill. 
Shannon Island. 
Distr. Norway, North Sea, Baltic. 
. Nereis pelagica, Linn. Length 75, breadth in front 65 
millims. 
Distr. Western Baltic to Finmark, Spitzbergen, Iceland, 
West Greenland. 


5. LEIPOCERAS, g. n. 


no 


a 


va 


Head without tentacles and tentacular cirri; fifth body- 
segment longer than the preceding and following segments, 
bearing on each side a comb-like series of thick sete (Pl. XI. 
fig. 11); branchize linguliform, on both sides of the back of 
the segments. 


Leipoceras uviferum, sp.n. Pl. XI. figs. 4-14. 


A spirally rolled worm, 38 millims. long, 1°5 millim. broad 
in front and 1:2 millim. behind. Seventy segments, the 
posterior extremity injured. Fore body concave above, arched 
beneath ; from the eleventh segment onwards the concavity 
disappears and the back also is arched, so that the body then 


Second German North-Polar Voyage. 201 


becomes nearly cylindrical. Head somewhat narrowed in 
front (Pl. XI. fig. 4). In front, on the cephalic lobes, there are 
two small round projections. ‘I'wo eyes, on two flat cushions, 
which become fused together behind and run out into a single 
flat and narrow cushion, extending as far as the fourth body- 
segment. 

Buccal orifice bounded to the right and left by pad-like lips, 
which unite below at an acute angle (fig. 5). 

The first body-segment bears two tufts of sete, which are 
smaller than those on the three following segments. The sete 
of the upper tufts of the fore body (in front of the fifth segment) 
are subulate, those of the lower tufts narrowly lanceolate 
(figs. 9& 10). On the fifth segment there is, both above and 
below the thick sete, a small tuft of fine sete (figs. 11 & 12). 

From the sixth segment onwards there are on the ventral 
surface uncini, five or six in each row; they are slightly 
sigmoid and two-pointed (fig. 8). The sete of the dorsal 
surface stand upon the anterior surface of small tubercles ; and 
behind these are the branchiz, which only become long enough 
to be called linguliform from the tenth segment onwards. 
They are longest on the seventeenth segment. In front of 
the longer branchie the setigerous tubercles are smaller than 
before the shorter ones. Each branchia contains a simple 
vascular loop without anastomoses. 

From the eighteenth segment onwards there are on the sides 
of the body, lower down than the branchiz, and at the boundary 
between each two segments, some tubercles, which posteriorly 
become racemose. ‘These are egg-racemes or external ovaries 
(figs. 6& 7), with ova not yet fully developed (fig. 14). On 
the imner surface of the body-wall there are elongated ova 
(fig. 13) in the same segments of the body which bear external 
ovaries. 

Unfortunately only one example of this worm was found. 
It is brownish yellow (in spirit), and has on the middle of the 
hinder part of the back two brown longitudinal lines, which 
are thickened parts of the cuticle. 

I place this new genus among the Spioide’. It has no 
cephalic appendages like Prionospio, Malmgr., possesses lingu- 
liform branchiz with a simple vascular loop, like Spzo, Fab., 
and has a comb-like series of thick setee in the fifth body- 
segment, like Polydora, Busk (Leucodore, Johnst.). 

The formation of the ova in external ovaries is a phenomenon 
not previously observed among the Annelides. 


6. Scoloplos armiger, Miill. 
Sabine Island. 
Distr. Spitzbergen to the Baltic, north of France. 


202 Prof. C. Mibius on the Mollusca &e. of the 


7. Travisia Forbesti, Johnst. Length 40 millims., thickness 
6 millims. in the middle. 
Sabine Island. 
Distr. West Greenland, Spitzbergen to the Western 
Baltic, Scotland. 
8. Scolibregma inflatum, Rathke. Length 50 millims. 
Distr. Cattegat to Spitzbergen, Scotland, West Green- 
land ; 5-280 fathoms. 
9. Thelepus circinatus, Fab. 
Sabine Island, 20 fathoms. 
Distr. Mediterranean, Britain, Cattegat to Finmark, 
Iceland, Spitzbergen, West Greenland. 
10. Protula media, Stimps. 
Sabine Island, 20 fathoms. (Prof. Mobius gives a descrip- 
tion and figures of this species.) 
Distr. Grand Manan (45° N. lat.). 
11. Serpula spirorbis, Mill. Diameter 3 millims. 
Shannon Island. 
Distr. West Greenland, North Sea, Baltic. 
12. Chione infundibuliformis, Kroy. 
Sabine Island, 23 fathoms. 
Distr. Finmark, Spitzbergen, West Greenland; 15-40 
fathoms. 


GEPHYREA. 


Priapulus caudatus, Lamk. 


TURBELLARIA. 


Polystemma roseum, Mill. Length 50-538, breadth 8, height 
4 millims. (in spirit). 
Clavering Straits, 15 fathoms. 
Distr. Norway, the Sound, Western Baltic. 


NEMATODES. 


Ascaris mystax, Rud. (From the intestine of Canis lagopus.) 


CESTODES. 


1. Tetrabothrium anthocephalum, Rud. (From the intestine 
of Cystophora cristata.) 
2. Tenia expansa, Rud. (From the intestine of Ovibos 


moschatus.) 
3. Tenia cenurus, Kuch. (From the intestine of Canis 


lagopus ; described.) 


Second German North-Polar Voyage. 203 


ECHINODERMATA. 
HOLOTHURIOIDEA. 


Myriotrochus Rinkii, Steenstr. Length 45, thickness 8 millims. 
Germania Harbour, 2 fathoms. 
Distr. West Greenland, down to 10 fathoms. 


ECHINOIDEA. 


Echinus dribachiensis, Mill. 
Clavering Island, 15 fathoms. 
Distr. Circumpolar; Newfoundland, Bay of Georgia, 
White Sea, Kamtschatka, Sea of Ochotsk, North Cape to 
the Sound, Britain. 


ASTEROIDEA. 
1. Asteracanthion albulus, Stimps. 


Sabine Island. 

Distr. West Greenland, Grand Manan. 
2. Ophioglypha robusta, Ayres. 27 fathoms. 

Distr. West Greenland, Massachusetts, Iceland, Spitz- 

bergen, Norway to the Sound, Britain. 

3. Ophiocten sericeum, Forbes. 26 fathoms. 

Distr. East Greenland, West Greenland, Spitzbergen. 
4. Asterophyton eucnemis, Mill. & Tr. 

Distr. West Greenland, down to 1000 fathoms. 


CQLENTERATA. 


1. Actinia nodosa, Fab. 
2. Briareum grandiflorum, Sars. 


Distr. Oxfjord in Finmark, Arendal. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI. figs. 4-14. 


Leipoceras uviferum. 
. Head and fore body from above (2). 
- Head from below (%). 


4 
5 
Fig. 6. Nineteenth and twentieth segments, right side, with the com- 
mencement of the external ovaries. 
7. Forty-second and forty-third segments, with the external ovaries 
further developed. 
8. Uncini of the fifteenth segment, from below (q): 


Fig. 9. Seta of an upper tuft in the fore body. 

Fig. 10. Seta of a lower tuft in the fore body. 

Fig. 11. Thick set of the fifth segment. 

Fig. 12. Inferior fine sete of the fifth segment. 

Fig. 13. Ovum from the body-cavity of the hinder body (). 


Fig. 14. Ovum from an external ovary (**). 


204 Dr. W.C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 


XXX.—On the Invertebrate Marine Fauna and Fishes of St. 
Andrews. By W. C. M‘Intosu. 


[Continued from p. 145. | 
Subkingdom C@LENTERATA. 


Class HY DROZOA. 


The Hydroid Zoophytes of St. Andrews are chiefly pro- 
cured from the deep water of the bay, though a few appear 
between tide-marks. Many are found in great profusion. 
Contrasted with the southern shores, as at Devon and Corn- 
wall *, the majority of the Hydroids are equally common in 
both localities ; some occur more frequently in the one than 
in the other, while a third series is more characteristic of 
each area. Thus Sertularella rugosa, Sertularia cupressina, 
Thuiaria thuja, and Halecitum muricatum appear to be more 
abundant at St. Andrews than in the south; on the other 
hand, Sertularia argentea and Obelia dichotoma are probably 
more plentiful in the latter, together with the appearance of 
Tubularia at the extreme margin of low water. The cha- 
racteristic forms in the south are Corymorpha nutans, Aglao- 
phenia pluma, A. pennatula, Ophiodes mirabilis, Diphasia 
pinnata, and an abundance of the species of Plumularia. At 
St. Andrews Sertularia filicula, S. fusca, Tubularia coronata, 
Cuspidella humilis, and Halecium labrosum afford distin- 
guishing features. Moreover, instead of the tufted Clava 
squamata, so common on the littoral Fuci of the western coast, 
we have OC. multicornis at St. Andrews on the under surface 
of stones ; the splendid Corymorpha nutans of the sandy voes, 
and the rich tufts of littoral Corynide and G'onothyrwe of the 
Zetlandic region, are likewise wholly absent. Amongst the 
Hydromeduse, Sarsia prolifera, Forbes, occurs occasionally, 
and Thaumantias pilosella, Forbes, in great abundance on the 
surface of the bay in autumn. 

The habit of the zoophytes affords many interesting facts, 
especially in regard to the profusion of parasitic structures. 
The roots of the polyparies spring from diverse shells, stones, 
crabs, submerged sticks and branches. One of the most 
curious examples found by the fishermen in the bay consisted 
of a stout branch of a thorn-tree, about four feet in height, 
which had large specimens of Balanus Hameri and Ascidians 
clustered like living fruit on the main trunk and branches, 

* J. & R. Q. Couch, in their ‘ Cornish Fauna ;’ the elaborate catalogue 
of the Rey. T. Hincks in the ‘Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.’ 1861-62; and 
Mr. Parfitt’s Devonshire Catalogue published in 1866. 


Dr. W.C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 205 


and lobulated and club-shaped masses of A/eyonium coating the 
more slender twigs and overrunning the neighbouring Cirri- 
pedes; while Obelia fringed most of the branches, here and 
there giving place to the shorter coating of Sertularia, stunted 
Tubularia, or the downy Clytia. Hosts of other animals 
occurred on the congenial site—tubes of Thelepus and Serpula, 
Anomia, Saxicava, Xylophaga, Lepralia, Cellepora, and Tubu- 
lipora representing the sedentary forms, sessile-eyed Crusta- 
ceans and Starfishes the free. Indeed the production tormed 
a compendium of marine zoology that took much time and 
trouble to investigate. The rapidity of growth of the larger 
specimens (the Balani being as large as walnuts) was shown 
by the condition of the wood and bark, and the presence of 
many delicate twigs. ‘This is also seen in the case of slender 
branches of the common currant-bushes, which are brought to 
land in good preservation yet densely fringed with Obelia 
longissima and studded with large ascidians. The zoophytes 
themselves are subject to many parasitic inroads from sponges, 
Foraminifera, other zoophytes, various Polyzoa, Ascidians, 
Nudibranchs and their ova, young mussels and Anomie, the 
ova of Pycnogonum, Annelids and their tubes (hyaline, gritty, 
and calcareous), and minute Cirripedes. 

In the following list the arrangement and nomenclature of 
the Rey. T. Hincks in his recent beautiful work on the 
Hydroida is adopted, 


Order I. HyprorIpa, 
Suborder I. ATHECATA. 
Fam. 1. Clavide. 


Genus CLAVA, Gmelin. 
Clava multicornis, Forskal ; Hincks, Brit. Hydroid 
Zoophytes, vol. i. p. 2. 

Frequent under stones in pools near low-water mark, and 
growing on Cynthia grossularia under the cavern roofs ; but 
it is not seen on the littoral seaweeds, as is Clava squamata 
on the shores of the Hebrides and the western and other coasts 
of Scotland. The tentacles show a slightly enlarged sucker- 
tip. 

Fam. 2. Hydractiniide. 


Genus Hypractinia, Van Beneden. 
Hydractinia echinata, Fleming ; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. 
vol.i. p. 23. 

Abundant on Fusus islandicus, Natica, and other univalve 
Ann. & Mag. N. H. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 15 


206 Dr. W.C. M'Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 


shells cast on shore after storms. The outer lip in the shells 
inhabited by hermit crabs is frequently prolonged into a horny 
membrane, as mentioned by Dr. Johnston. 


Fam. 9. Eudendriide. 
Genus EupENprIvUM, Ehrenberg. 
Eudendrium rameum, Pallas ; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. 
vol. 1. p. 80. 
Plentiful in the deep water of the bay, attached to shells and 
masses of Balani and Serpule. A fine specimen measured 


9 inches high, and the breadth of the branched portion was 
8 inches. 


Eudendrium capillare, Alder; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. 
vol. 1. p. 84. 

Fine tufts are occasionally found on the stems of Anten- 
nularia ramosa, interwoven with other zoophytes, from deep 
water. The specimens had no short branches ; all were much 
elongated, and the polyps terminal. Some slight rings existed 
here and there on the main stems at the base; those at the 
origin of each branch are very distinct. 


Fam. 11. Tubulariide. 
Genus TuBULARIA, Linneus. 
Tubularia indivisa, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. 
Vol-1..p.. 115. 


Common in deep water. One of the largest specimens 
springs from an agglutinated basis of the valves of Pecten 
opercularis and gravel, eight inches in diameter, and the 
gigantic tuft had tubes 11 inchesin height. It also sometimes 
fixes the valves of a living Mytilus modiolus so as almost to 
prevent motion. 


Tubularia coronata, Abildgaard ; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. 
vol. i. p. 119. 
Abundant in deep water. I am obliged to Prof. Allman for 
discriminating wrinkled specimens of this species, in 1863. 
Suborder I]. THECAPHORA. 
Fam. 1. Campanulariide. 
Genus CrytrA, Lamouroux. 
Clytia Johnston, Alder; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 143. 


Abundant on Alcyonidium hirsutum and seaweeds in the 


Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 207 


pools near low-water mark, as well as coating the stems of 
Laminarie with a hairy fringe fully half an inch in height. 
In a fine example of the latter many of the stems possess one 
or two branches, and the gonothece here and there have a 
stalk composed of several rings. 


Genus OBELIA, Péron & Lesueur. 


Obelia geniculata, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 149. 


Common on laminarian blades thrown on the West Sands 
after storms, forming a miniature cover amidst which many 
Nudibranchs find food and shelter. It occurs plentifully also 
on Halidrys siliquosa and other seaweeds near low-water 
mark, and on crabs. Inthe interior of many of the gonothece 
are the young of a Pycnogonidian. 


Obelia longissima, Pallas ; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. 1. p. 154. 


Abundant in deep water. It bristles on every branch or 
fragment of wood which has been submerged for some weeks, 
It appears also in a very interesting condition in the peculiar 
rounded balls formed by the rolling action of the waves on 
the beach; these zoophytic masses are either spherical or 
rounded-oblong, and the fibres are firmly felted together *. In 
this state the present species is stripped of its minute branches, 
and feels bristly and crisp. The same rolled masses (also 
chiefly composed of an Odelia allied to the present form) were 
brought from the shore of a New-Zealand bay by Dr. Lauder 
Lindsay, who kindly sent them to me. They are formed in a 
similar manner as the well-known balls in Loch Tay, where 
the rolling action of the waves produces perfectly round masses, 
often as large asa spherical shot of thirty or forty pounds, com- 
posed of the linear leaves of the larches and pines which shade 
its margin. Miss M‘Leod, of Paible, brought me spherical 
masses of a similar description from a freshwater lake in 
South Uist, the species in this case, according to Prof. Dickie, 
being Cladophora glomerata. O. longissima affords a favourite 
site for young mussels. 


Obelia dichotoma, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 156. 


Not common ; parasitical upon a piece of seaweed from the 
laminarian region, and reaching about 3 inches high. 


* One of these masses so closely resembled the chignon lately in vogue 
that it was secretly used by a patient for this purpose, and I learned that 
it was only the disagreeable abundance of maid in its tissue that saved it 
from further duty in this respect. _ 

15 


208 Dr. W.C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 


Genus CAMPANULARIA, Lamarck. 


Campanularia volubilis, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. 
p. 160. 


Common; on crabs, the stems of Sertularia argentea and 
other zoophytes from deep water. It is a smaller and more 
delicate species than C. verticillata. The shape of the cup 
and the very distinct “spherical ring” below distinguish it 
when the gonothece are absent. 


Campanularia Hincksii, Alder ; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. 
vol.i.p. 162. 


Occasionally found on the stems of Antennularia antennina 
from the deep water of the bay. This species presents certain 
variations. In some the stem is nearly smooth from the base 
to the cup, where there are only a few slight twists ; in others 
there are several distinct though irregular rings or twists at 
the base, a few about the middle of the stem, and others at 
the base of the calycle; in almost all there is one very distinct 
ring at the base of the latter, as Mr. Alder shows in his 
figure *. There is also a peculiar hollow at the base of the 
calycle ; but this cannot be called a ring. 


Campanularia verticillata, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. 1. 
Dealowe 


Common in deep water. Many specimens were also found 
in the stomach of Echinus esculentus from the laminarian 
zone. 


Campanularia flexuosa, Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. 1. p. 168. 


Not uncommon on the under surfaces of stones near low- 
water mark. The peculiar zigzag form of the stem, with the 
arms of the forks tending in opposite directions, together with 
the short, broad, and smooth-edged hydrothecz, are character- 
istic. The long pedicels of the hydrothece had their central 
smooth portions peculiarly flattened out, so as almost to 
assume a fusiform aspect. 


Campanularia raridentata, Alder; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. 
vol. 1. p. 176. 


Occasionally found on Antennularia antennina and other 
zoophytes from the coralline ground. The form agrees in most 
respects with the published description. The calycle is very 
narrow and deep, with six to eight large teeth on the margin ; 


* Catalogue of the Zoophytes of Northumberland and Durham, pl. ii. 
fig. 9. 


Dr. W.C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 209 


stalk rather slender (much more so than in Clytia Johnston‘), 
with several distinct rings below the cup, and many less distinct 
towards the base. The peculiar slenderness of the stalk, the 
length of the cup, and the small number of teeth are the 
characteristic features. Specimens which resemble Clytia 
Johnstoni occasionally grow in proximity ; and some interme- 
diate forms occur. 


Genus GONOTHYR&A, Allman. 


Gonothyrea Lovént, Allman; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. 
wol.i.cp. 188. 

Abundant on Sertularia abietina and Diphasia rosacea from 
deep water. The exceeding delicacy of the free margins of 
the hydrothece, even in good spirit-preparations, renders it 
difficult to say whether they are (or were) notched or smooth. 
It was only by a comparison of observations on many examples 
that the peculiar crenations were understood, as none showed 
more than a few, and the majority none at all. The appear- 
ance of the gonothecz, however, is characteristic. 


Gonothyrea gracilis, Sars; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 183. 

Plentiful on Tubularia indivisa, from deep water, amongst 
Clytia Johnstoni, on the tests of Ascidia sordida, on Scalpellum 
vulgare, Stenorhynchus rostratus, and Cellepora pumicosa. 
The capsules are large, translucent, and borne on a ringed 
stalk. Growing as this did amongst C. Johnstont, it at first 
seemed to be a branched variety of the latter ; but the peculiar 
nature of the branching and the structure of the gonothece, 
which were chiefly borne on the stems, distinguished it on closer 
scrutiny. Moreover the hydrothece of this species, contrasted 
with C. Johnstont, are much larger and deeper. 


Fam, 2. Campanulinide. 


Genus OPERCULARELLA, Hincks. 


Opercularella lacerata, Johnston; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. 
vol.i. p. 194. 

Abundant on the stems of Plumularia pinnata, Obelia lon- 
gissima, and other zoophytes, and amongst Clytia Johnstoni 
on the stems of Laminarve; Prof. John Reid also found it on 
Scrupocellaria scruposa. This species presents two well- 
marked varieties, which occur together on the same stem: 
(a) hydrothece on simple stalks of variable length, viz. from 
three to nine rings; and (4) branched stems of some height, 
with the alternate stalks of the hydrothece composed of from 


210 Dr. W.C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 


six to more than a dozen rings. Moreover, in these branched 
forms it is not uncommon to see more than one pedicel arise 
at the same fork, so as to cause the observer to fancy he is 
viewing the Campanulina turrita of Prof. Wyville Thomson ; 
only the hydrothecee are much shorter in proportion to the 
length of the teeth. Some examples on a laminarian stalk 
had very long stems. The hydrothece in all very closely 
resembled those on Dr. Allman’s Campanulina repens (Hincks, 
Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 189, pl. xxxviii. fig. 1).. No gonothece 
were observed. 


Fam. 4. Lafoeide. 


Genus Laroza, Lamouroux. 


Lafoéa dumosa, Fleming ; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. 1. p. 200. 


Common on various zoophytes from deep water. Some 
varieties of this species have short stalks of one or two whorls 
supporting the hydrothece ; but they are not quite so long as 
those described under L. fruticosa, Sars, and the intermediate 
forms show that they are to be referred to the present species. 


Lafoéa fruticosa, Sars; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 203. 


Occasionally on zoophytes from deep water, especially Ser- 
tularia filicula. The pedicels of the hydrothece have from 
three to five rings. 


Besides the above there are several microscopic forms closely 
allied, which creep along the stems of various zoophytes. A 
sessile form is common on Crista eburnea, and astalked species 
on Scrupocellaria scruposa. 


Genus CALYCELLA, Hincks. 
Calycella syringa, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 206. 


Abundant on the stems of Hydrallmania falcata and other 
zoophytes from deep water. 


Genus CuspIpELLA, Hincks. 
Cuspidella humilis, Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 209. 


Not uncommon on the tests of Ascidia sordida, and on the 
valves of Psammobia and other shells, from deep water. The 
tests of Ascidians are the seat of a reticulated growth with 
numerous minute club-shaped processes rising from the creeping 
stem which is associated with C. humilis. 


Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 211 


Genus FILELLUM, Hincks. 


Filellum serpens, Hassall; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. 1. p. 214. 


Abundant on the stems of Sertularia abietina and H. falcata 
from deep water. 


Fam. 6. Coppiniide. 
Genus CopprniA, Hassall. 
Coppinia arcta, Dalyell; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol.1. p. 218. 


Common on the stems and branches of Sertularia abietina 
and Hydrallmania falcata. 


Fam. 7. Haleciide. 
Genus HAtecium, Oken. 


Halecium halecinum, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 221. 


Plentiful in deep water, though somewhat less common than 
the next species. Young specimens under an inch in height 
sometimes occur, which in spirit quite agree with the Rey. A. 
M. Norman’s description of H. sess¢le (Hincks, 1. c. p. 229, 
pl. xliv. fig. 2), with, of course, the exception of the polyps. 
In these cases the hydrothecze do not seem to be fully developed; 
but they show the row otf dots below the margin. Specimens 
are also seen in which one or two of the hydrothece are better 
developed at the base of the stem, while all the rest are in the 
condition described by Mr. Norman. It would appear to be 
doubtful if the mere elongation of the polyps would constitute 
specific distinction, any more than the fact that the branches 
are not in the same plane. Some are slightly ringed. 


Halecium muricatum, Ellis and Solander; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. 
vol. 1. p. 223. 
This is the common Haleciwm from the deep water of the 
bay. Most of the specimens show a ring or two on the stem 
above the calycles. 


Halecium Beanii, Johnston ; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 224. 


Not uncommon in the coralline region, attached to other 
zoophytes and to the tests of Ascidians. Young examples have 
piles of little cups on the hydrothecee like those on the beautiful 
southern H. tenellum, Hincks. 


Halecium labrosum, Alder; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 225. 


From the deep-sea lines of the fishermen. Mather rare. 


212 Dr. W.C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 


Fam. 8. Sertulariide. 
Genus SERTULARELLA, Gray. 


Sertularella polyzonias, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. 
p- 235. 


Abundant in the deep water of the bay, generally attached 
to the roots of other corallines. All the specimens seem true 
to the description of the species; at least there is no tendency 
to wrinkles in the hydrothece so far as examined. 


Sertularella rugosa, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 241. 


Common; under stones near low-water mark, and thence to 
deep water, on seaweeds, Flustra foliacea, &c. 


Sertularella tenella, Alder; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 242. 


In profusion on Sertularia abietina and other zoophytes from 
the coralline ground. 


Genus DipHAsIA, Agassiz. 


Diphasia rosacea, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 245. 


Abundant in deep water on other corallines, such as Hydr- 
allmania falcata, Thuiaria thuja, Halecium, &c. The speci- 
mens are large and luxuriant. Mr. Hincks is right in stating 
that the male gonothece have eight longitudinal ridges, and 
not six as Dr. Allman says. 


Diphasia tamarisca, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 254. 
Not uncommon in deep water attached to shells and stones. 


Genus SERTULARIA, Linn. 


Sertularia pumila, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 260. 


This is the common Sertularian under stones in rock-pools 
at and near low-water mark at St. Andrews; but it is less 
luxuriant than on the Fuci of the western coasts. It forms 
a miniature forest on the under surface of the stones in quiet 
places, and is a favourite haunt of Holds viridis and other 
Nudibranchs. It presents the peculiarity in such situations 
that the stem is not always contracted above the hydrothece, 
but not unfrequently these follow each other without the con- 
striction. In some preserved specimens the hydrothece con- 
tained a number of large nucleated cells, having apparently a 
thickened. and regularly crenated cell-wall ; these cells varied 
in size; and some also occurred in the centre of the stem. 


Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 213 


Sertularia operculata, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 263. 


Not uncommon; on seaweeds at and beyond low-water 
mark, but chiefly procured on the West Sands after storms. 
Its comparative scarcity is in marked contrast with its profu- 
sion on our western coasts, where almost every laminarian root 
and stalk are clothed with dense tufts. 


Sertularia filicula, Ellis and Solander; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. 
vol. i. p. 264. 


This, perhaps, is the most abundant Sertularian next to 
S. abietina from deep water. Dried specimens, when carefully 
laid out, show a somewhat rectangular arrangement of their 
terminal branches. Good examples have also been procured 
from the stomach of the cod. 


Sertularia abietina, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 266. 


Very common; and occasionally reaching the height of 
9 inches ; fine tufts occur on Mytilus modiolus. This species 
is a favourite seat of many parasites, such as other hydroid 
zoophytes, calcareous corallines, Spirorbis, Alcyonidium, 
Coppinia, &e. Fyrom its attachment to living mollusca 
(Anomia and others) it is not unfrequently swallowed by the 
cod. 


Sertularia argentea, Ellis and Solander; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. 
vol. i. p. 268. 


Not common; from the deep-sea lines of the fishermen. 
This seems to be a form more characteristic of our southern 
shores. 


Sertularia cupressina, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 270. 


Very plentiful in the coralline region, and sometimes reaching 
the length of 18 inches. Besides the ordinary form there are 
two branched varieties. In the first, numerous secondary poly- 
paries spring from the ordinary dichotomous branches, each 
twig so burdened being very little thicker than the ordinary 
forms, and bearing in the usual manner for some distance the 
hydrothecee, which gradually become obsolete ; this secondary 
trunk assumes considerable dimensions, with jointed stem and 
dichotomous branches, like an independent specimen. In the 
other variety the main stem itself splits into two divisions, or 
the secondary trunks throughout are directly connected there- 
with. 


Sertularia fusca, Johnst.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 272. 
A single fine specimen only has yet been procured, in the 


214 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 


deep water of the bay. Mr. Alder correctly observes that this 
form leads us to Thucaria. 


Genus HypRALLMANIA, Hincks. 


Hydrallmania falcata, Li. ; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 278. 


One of the most abundant hydroid zoophytes from the coral- 
line ground. Its form varies from the elongated spiral to the 
broadly branched condition, and it is frequently loaded with 
parasitic zoophytes, both horny and calcareous. It is also a 
favourite site for Nudibranchiate Mollusca and their ova, and 
minute Annelids construct their tubes on every convenient 
bough. Young specimens are plentiful also under stones 
between tide-marks, where their habit differs considerably from 
the foregoing, having the form of a simple straight pinna, 
generally coated with parasitic structures, both animal and 
vegetable. 

Genus THurARIA, I'leming. 
Thutaria thuja, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 275. 

Common; chiefly frequenting dead valves of Cyprina, 
Pecten, and Tapes, as well as stones, shooting its long stems 
upwards (occasionally to the length of 14 inches) amidst 
masses of the tubes of Serpula, Thelepus, and other Annelids, 
and patches of Aleyonium. In some examples a short secondary 
stem branches from the main trunk near the base. Parasitic 
upon the stems are numerous other corallines, such as Diphasia 
rosacea, Which clothes anew the bare zigzag trunk with a more 
silky fringe than nature originally provided ; rough crusts of 
Cellepora or the spreading Alcyonium and Alcyonidium entirely 
surround it; while occasionally a long tunnel of Thelepus is 
glued from the base to the branching portion. Now and then 
it occurs in the stomach of the cod. 


Fam. 9. Plumulariide. 
Genus ANTENNULARIA, Lamarck. 
Antennularia antennina, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. p. 280. 


From the deep water of the bay ; common, but less so than 
the next species. Fine tufts reach a height of fully 11 inches. 
In a curious example a number of simple straight stems pro- 
ceed from the upper edge of a fragment of an old trunk. 


Antennularia ramosa, Lamarck; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. 
vol. 1. p. 282. 
Common in deep water, whence it is usually brought by the 
fishermen’s lines. 


Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 215 


Genus PLuMULARIA, Lamarck. 


Plumularia pinnata, L.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. vol. i. 
p. 295. 


Frequent in deep water, and often reaching the height of 
7 inches. A tall variety is found in which no spines are present 
on the gonothece. It sometimes occurs on Stenorhynchus 
rostratus between tide-marks. 


Plumularia catharina, Johnst.; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. 
vol. i. p. 299. 


Common on Ascidians, tubes of Thelepus, and the roots of 
other corallines in deep water. 


Plumularia frutescens, Ellis & Solander; Hincks, Brit. H. Z. 
vol. 1. p. 307. 


Occasionally thrown on the West Sands after storms, and 
also brought in on the deep-sea lines of the fishermen. The 
smaller specimens are pale. One example is 6 inches in 


height, and broadly branched. 


Order MEDUSID&. 


The Meduside abound chiefly in autumn in the bay, the 
most conspicuous amongst the larger forms being Awrelia and 
Cyanea, the former often occurring in such numbers as to form 
a closely packed layer on the surface of the sea over considerable 
areas; and though not in the dense party-coloured masses of 
various species occasionally seen in the Hebrides, still they form 
an interesting feature. At certain points the bay in quiet 
weather is quite purplish with thousands, many of which are 
loaded with ova; and through the transparent umbrellas the 
abdominal feet of the parasitic Hyperide are observed in con- 
stant vibration. Occasionally, whether from accident or de- 
sign, one specimen is found adhering to the umbrella of another, 
and is thus.carried through the water. Moreover,on many of 
the stones at the East and West Rocks, near low-water mark, 
a “Hydra tuba” is found, which may be the hydroid condition 
of the foregoing. This pretty little white structure, developed 
from the ova of Awrelia and its allies, can be observed in all 
stages not only throwing out lateral buds like a Hydra, but 
by transverse fission dividing into a series of saucer-shaped 
bodies which ultimately assume the form of the adult Aurelia. 
This form, it is well known, formed the subject of valuable 
observations by the late Prof. M. Sars, and afterwards, amongst 


216 Dr. W.C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 


others, ‘by the late Dr. John Reid, who obtained his examples 
at St. Andrews. 

On the whole we lack at St. Andrews the splendid profusion 
of the swimming jellies occasionally met with on our western 
shores, and especially in the Outer Hebrides, to which a 
favouring wind and tide sweep them from the warmer area of 
the Gulf-stream beyond, in company with Janthina and the 
Pteropods. Amongst these the strange and beautifully tinted 
Diphyes is seen darting hither and thither amongst the brillant 
blues of its brethren with its trailing fringes of bright orange 
polypites ; and on the lonely western shores, as at Monach, 
countless myriads of the little Vele//a are tossed in autumn on 
the sand. 

Mr. Darwin *, referring to the colours of certain Invertebrate 
animals, thinks that itis doubtful if such serve as a protection ; 
but he goes on to observe that the perfect transparency of the 
Meduse, ‘‘ many floating mollusca, crustacea, and even small 
oceanic fishes partake of this same glass-like structure,” and 
that ‘‘ we can hardly doubt that they thus escape the notice 
of pelagic birds and other enemies.’ It seems to me somewhat 
difficult to say what will escape the eye of a pelagic bird, such 
as gull, guillemot, or hawk-like tern. ‘Their keen eyes 
distinguish very indistinct objects—for instance, the nucleus 
of Salpa runcinata, and the minute and almost transparent 
bodies of the young fishes that flit amongst the splendid masses 
of swimming jellies (Molluscan and Ccelenterate) which some- 
times throng our western shores. The mere tremor of the 
water is almost sufficient to attract such acute and skilful 
marauders. Moreover, the statement of the great naturalist 
is incomplete without the appendix that many of the Meduse 
and Hydromeduse are brilliantly coloured and, in addition, 
phosphorescent, the latter property likewise characterizing the 
translucent Pyrosoma, and that my distinguished friend Prof. 
Wyville Thomson regards the luminosity of marine animals 
as a provision of nature for attracting their enemies in the 
abysses of the ocean, or for throwing a flood of light on their 
own prey. I have already t shown my reasons for believing 
that the theory of the latter author is open to doubt, and shall 
make a few further remarks on the subject under the Annelida. 
If the notion had been promulgated that the sexes in the 
abysses of the ocean used their light to attract each other, and 
thus had a better chance of continuing the race, perhaps more 
might have been said in its favour. 

* Descent of Man, &e. 
+ Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. ix. 1872, p. 2. 


Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 217 


Genus AURELIA, Pér. & Les. 
Aurelia aurita, O. Fabr. 


Abundant in autumn and often so late as November. 


Genus CyANEA, Pér. & Les. 


Cyanea capillata, Eschsch. 
Common in autumn. 


Order LUCERNARIIDA 
(Calycozoa, R. Leuck.). 


Genus LucernartiA, O. F. Miiller. 


Lucernaria auricula, O. Fabr. 


Frequent on Fuci near the commencement of the East 
Rocks, and occasionally at the West Rocks. It is as common 
as in the south. 


Class CTENOPHORE. 


Two representatives only are found at St. Andrews, viz. a 
species of Beroid and a Pleurobrachia. 'The former occurs in 
vast swarms in July, indeed almost as plentifully as im the 
Zetlandic seas, and is easily procured by the hand-net from 
the rocks or at sea. The latter is equally abundant from 
August to the end of autumn, and even in winter, occasionally 
filling the towing-net or the dredge in the bay, and thrown 
ashore after storms on the West Sands. Few objects are more 
engaging than one of these spherical jellies in a clear glass 
vessel of sufficient size to exhibit the matchless mechanism of 
of its complex tentacles and the splendid iridescence of its 
locomotive rows. 


Order SAccaTs#, Agassiz. 
Genus PLEUROBRACHIA, Flem. 


Pleurobrachia pileus, Eschsch. 


Abundant. It eagerly devours Carcinus maenas in the 
zoéa-stage. 


Order BEROID&, Ggbr. 
Genus Ipy1A, Fréminville. 


Idyia cucumis, O. Fabr. 
Occasionally in large numbers in July and August. 


218 Dr. W.C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 


Class ACTINOZOA. 


Though the total number of species of this class at St. 
Andrews is small, many occur in great abundance, and espe- 
cially such cosmopolitan forms as Actinia mesembryanthemum, 
Tealia crassicornis, and Actinoloba dianthus. The frequent 
occurrence of Sagartia troglodytes, again, at St. Andrews, 
distinguishes it from the shores of the extreme south, as at 
Guernsey. We have not, moreover, the fine Anthea cereus 
of the west and south, which, for instance, in the quiet creeks 
of the Outer Hebrides studs the stems and blades of the 
tangles at the border of the littoral zone, the beautiful greenish 
purple tentacles gently waving with every swell of the tide ; 
neither is the gaudily tinted Sagartia parasitica, so character- 
istic of some of our southern shores, to be found between tide- 
marks, nor Adamsia palliata in deep water. Corynactis, the 
stony corals, Zoanthus, and the northern free-swimming 
Arachnactis albida axe entirely absent. The places of these 
are filled by swarms of the common forms above mentioned, 
and by some of the rarer types, e. g. EHdwardsia, Cerianthus, 
and Peachia, which seem to be characteristic of sandy beaches. 
A remarkable example * of the latter turned inside out occurs 
in my collection. It was mistaken for a curious polyp with 
beautifully arranged longitudinal and transverse muscular 
bundles, and was found inserted in a tunnel in the sand in 
this condition in Cobo Bay, Guernsey. It is simply a large 
Peachia everted. 

Amongst the Aleyonarians the phosphorescent Pennatula 
occurs in great beauty, and replaces the Pavonarva of the west, 
while with Virgularva it also affords a diagnostic mark from 
the south. ‘The fine Gorgoniide of the latter region, again, 
have no representatives at St. Andrews. 


Order I. ZOANTHARIA. 
Suborder ACTINARIA. 
Fam. 2. Sagartiade, Gosse. 
Genus 1. AcrinoLosA, Blainville. 


Actinoloba dianthus, Ellis; Gosse, Brit. Anem. p. 12, 


10) ed Is sree IF 
Common in the débris of the fishing-boats, and thrown 
ashore after storms attached to sticks and shells. Young spe- 


* IT am indebted to Dr. Cooper, of St. Peter le Port, for the specimen, 


Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 219 


cimens occasionally appear on stones at extreme low water, 
and when very hungry greedily swallow green seaweeds. 
Some expand the disk like a Dorts or Lamellaria, and float 
on the surface of the water. 


Genus 2. SAGARTIA. 


Sagartia troglodytes, Johnston; Gosse, Brit. Anem. p. 88, 
pl. 1. fig. 3, pl. 2. fig. 5, &e. 


Everywhere abundant under stones, and attached to rocks 
near low-water mark. In regard to the physiology of the 
digestive sac, Mr. Gosse * states that the walls of this chamber 
are only separated for the reception of food; but in this species 
the mouth often expands, and the digestive cavity dilates, so 
as to be readily viewed as an open and empty sac. The 
ciliary currents course over the lip and into the stomach; so 
that minute particles of nutriment might be available, though 
by no means necessary. 


Fam. 4. Actiniade. 
Genus 1. ActintrA, L. 


Actinia mesembryanthemum, Ellis & Sol. ; Gosse, Brit. Anem. 
p- 175, pl. 6. figs. 1-7. 


Very common on stones and rocky ledges between tide- 
marks. 


Fam. 9. Bunodide. 


Genus 3. 'TEALIA, Gosse. 


Tealia crassicornis, O. F. Miiller; Gosse, Brit. Anem. 
p- 209, pl. 4. fig. 1. 


The variety coriacea (Actinia cortiacea, Cuvier) is extremely 
abundant along the West Rocks at low water, while the other 
comes in great profusion and of large size from the deep water 
of the bay. A bifid specimen occurred at the Castle rocks. 
This species is also found in the stomach of the cod. 


Genus 5. STOMPHIA, Gosse. 
Stomphia Churchie, Gosse, Brit. Anem. p. 222, pl. 8. fig. 5. 
Occasionally from deep water. 


* Brit. Anem., Introd. p. xvi. 


220 Dr. W.C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 


Fam. 6. Ilyanthide. 
Genus 2. PEACHTA, Gosse. 
Peachia hastata, Gosse, Brit. Anem. p. 235, pl. 8. fig. 3. 


Thrown ashore on the West Sands after storms in great 
numbers, and was thus first found in Britain by Dr. John 
Reid, of St. Andrews, who published a description of his 
single example in 1848 (Physiological, Anat., and Pathol. 
Observations, p. 656, pl. 5. f. 21 & 22): his title (A. cylin- 
drica) has therefore a prior claim to that of Mr. Gosse. It 
occurs also in the stomach of the cod. 


Genus 4. EpwarpstA, De Quatrefages. 


Edwardsia callimorpha, Gosse, Brit. Anem. p. 255, 
pl. We fee <2 
A variety was found on the West Sands after a storm in 
March, with brown instead of the usual whitish specks. It is 
an elongated form inhabiting sand. 


Edwardsia Allmannt, M‘I., Proc. Roy. Soc. Ed. 1864-5. 


From a shallow pool on the West Sands after a storm in 
October. It inhabits a distinct case, and can retract its ten- 
tacles and cover them by the external border of the disk. The 
latter is marked by eight aleyonarian divisions or radii, and 
has always a ragged border of the investing sheath. The 
disk has a pale brownish colour. 

The tentacles are simple, rather blunt, pale and translucent, 
with a white streak in the centre; the rim of the mouth is 
occasionally protruded as a conical process. 

This form exhibited none of the ‘‘ remarkably vigorous and 
spasmodic contractility ”’ ascribed by Mr. Gosse to the family ; 
for it was comparatively inert. 


Edwardsia Goodsiri, M‘I., Proc. Roy. Soc. Ed. 1864-5. 


Found at the same time and place with the former. Ten- 
tacles 15, translucent, longer than the diameter of the oral 
disk, and not much tapered. A whitish ring occurs at the 
tip of each, and from the base a white spear-head with a 
transparent centre reaches more than halfway up. Oral disk 
streaked with white and brown. It is somewhat allied to Z. 
Beautempsti, De Quatref.*, but is distinguished by the marks 
on the tentacles, which in the latter only have the tip 
‘“‘d’un beau jaune rougeatre.’’ The posterior end of the ex- 


* Ann. des Sc. Nat. 2° sér., Zool. xviii. 1842, p. 69, pl. 1. fig. 1. 


eee ee 


Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the Zoophytes of St. Andrews. 221 


ample was often fixed to the glass by its ectoderm, which ap- 
parently had very minute or granular suckers. 
Swarms of an Hdwardsia occur in the stomach of the 
flounder. 
Genus 6. CERIanTHUus, Delle Chiaje. 


Cerianthus Lloydii, Gosse, Brit. Anem. p. 268, pl. 7. fig. 8, 
and woodcut, p. 269. 

Procured at low water from the margin of the East Rocks, 
and occasionally thrown on the West Sands after storms. A 
splendid specimen from the latter (measuring 74 inches long 
and as thick as a finger) in February discharged a vast num- 
ber of ova after a week’s confinement. The majority of these 
bodies were rather coarsely granular, ovoid in form; and some 
had minute papille at one end. No cilia were present, so 
that in all probability they were dead. Both examples had 
the first series of tentacles of the usual brown colour, with 
about four faintly marked whitish specks on the inner surface. 
The second series were uniformly brown. 


Order II. ALCYONARIA. 
Fam. Pennatulide. 
Genus PENNATULA, L. 


Pennatula phosphorea, L.; Johnst. Brit. Zooph. 
p- 157, fig. 35. 
Abundant on muddy ground in deep water, and often 
brought up on the lines of the fishermen. 


Genus VirRGULARIA, Lamck. 


Virgularia mirabilis, L.; Johnst. Brit. Zooph. p. 161, pl. 30. 
Occasionally in the stomach of the cod. 


Fam. Alcyoniade. 
Genus ALcyonium, L. 
Alcyonium digitatum, L.; Johnst. Brit. Zooph. 
p- 174, pl. 34. 


Abundant in deep water as well as in small patches on 
rocks and stones between tide-marks. Often thrown in large 
quantities on the West Sands after storms, attached to various 
submarine structures. 

[To be continued. } 


Ann. & Mag. N. H. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 16 


222 Mr. H. B. Brady on a 


XXXI.—On a true Carboniferous Nummulite. 
By Henry B. Brapy, F.L.S., F.G.S. 


[Plate XII.] 


THERE are few time-marks in the geological record that have 
been regarded as better established or more definite than the 
first appearance of the Nummulite at or near the commence- 
ment of the Tertiary epoch; and any indications of an earlier 
history which would throw back the origin of this well-known 
genus to a Mesozoic or Paleozoic age can hardly be without 
interest to the student of those genealogical problems, the bases 
of which are found in the revelations of paleontology. 

Dr. Carpenter, in his ‘ Introduction to the Study of the 
Foraminifera’ (p. 276), says, “there is no fact in paleeonto- 
logy more striking than the sudden and enormous development 
of the Nummulitic type in the early part of the Tertiary pe- 
riod and its almost equally sudden diminution, bordering on 
complete extinction. The precise position of the immense 
beds of ‘ Nummulitic limestone,’ the vast geographical extent 
of which has been already sketched, has been a subject of much 
discussion ; but the researches of M. d’Archiac, Sir R. Mur- 
chison, Sir Charles Lyell, and others leave no further doubt 
that these beds belong to the earlier part of the Tertiary period, 
and that they correspond in position with the ‘ Caleaire Gros- 
sier’ of the Paris basin, and with the ‘ Bracklesham’ and 
‘ Bagshot’ beds of the London and Hampshire basins, in which 
deposits alone are Nummulites found im the British Islands. 
Although Nummulites have been described as existing at 
periods anterior to this, it seems probable that such descrip- 
tions have been founded on the occurrence of other helicoid 
Foraminifera bearing an incomplete resemblance to them.” 

The late Professor von Reuss, in his ‘ Entwurf einer systema- 
tischen Zusammenstellung der Foraminiferen’*, is scarcely less 
emphatic. He gives the distribution of the genus Nummulites 
as follows :—“ Fossil (Tertiary, especially Eocene). N. anti- 

* Sitzungsb. k. k. Akad. Wissen. Wien (1861), vol. xliv. p. 391. 

It is not the object of the present paper to demonstrate the continu- 
ance of the genus through the later Tertiary to recent times; but, lest I 
should be supposed to agree with the latter part of this quotation, I may 
just state that, as far back as 1803, Fichtel and Moll figured two recent 
Nummulites from the Red Sea, under the names of Nautilus radiatus and 
N. venosus (Test. Micr. p. 59, pl. 8); and Messrs. Parker and Jones, in their 
essay on Fichtel and Moll’s contributions to the Nomenclature of the 
Foraminifera, published a year or more before the above passage from 
Von Reuss, not only set this fact in a clear light, but instanced speci- 
mens in their collection of true recent Nummuline from Davis's Straits 
and from the Australian coral-reefs. I can only add that my own cabinet 
presents confirmatory evidence in abundance. 


true Carboniferous Nummulite. 223 


quior, Rouillier, from the Carboniferous limestone of Miatsch- 
kovo ( Orobias antiquior, dV’ Kichwald), would form a remarkable 
exception if its complete agreement with Nuwmmulites should 
be confirmed. I have not hitherto discerned any important 
distinction. The often-quoted living forms belong in part to 
Amphistegina, in part to Operculina.” 

Professor Seguenza, in a table of the geological range of 
the various genera of fossil Foramininifera* published almost 
simultaneously with the two works already quoted, gives with 
even greater decision the Eocene as the age of the appear- 
ance, the Miocene as that of the extinction of the true Num- 
mulite. 

It would be easy to add quotations of exactly similar im- 
port from the works of other paleontologists ; but it is scarcely 
worth while to cite individual authorities for what, by its ge- 
neral acceptance, had come to be looked upon almost in the 
light of a geological dogma. 

Giimbel’s Researches.—Doubts as to the entire accuracy of 
this view have been raised from time to time, but they have 
not, until quite recently, been based on evidence sufficiently 
circumstantial to obtain much credence. ‘T'wo years ago, 
however, Dr. C. W. Giimbel of Munich, in the preface to his 
memoir on certain “ Jurassic precursors of the genera Nuwm- 
mulites and Orbitulites” +, reviewed the whole question of the 
existence of pretertiary Nummulites as it then appeared to 
stand. In his analysis the various published notices of Num- 
mulites supposed to be of earlier geological age than the be- 
ginning of the Tertiary epoch are recounted, the circum- 
stances on which they are founded criticised, and in some 
instances the results of a reexamination of the original speci- 
mens detailed. I propose to summarize the conclusions arrived 
at by Dr. Giimbel on this head, rather than venture upon an 
independent commentary, for which I should have but insufti- 
cient data. 

Turning first to the Russian Carboniferous specimens al- 
ready alluded to, Dr. Giimbel accepts Prof. Reuss’s estimate 
of Rouillier’s Nwmmulina antiquior {—that is, that it may be 
a Nummulite, but that there is no sufficient evidence to prove 
the fact. 

D’Eichwald’s adoption of Rouillier’s species, and his de- 

* Foram. Monotal. di Messina, parte seconda (1862), p. 25. 

+ “Ueber zwei jurassische Vorlaiufer des Foraminiferen-Geschlechtes 
Nummulina und Orbitulites,” von Herrn Oberbergrath Dr. C. W. Giimbel. 
Neues Jahrbuch fiir Min., Jahrg. 1872, p. 241, pls. 7 & 8. 

{ Rouillier and Vosinsky, “ Etudes progressive sur la Géologie de Mos- 
cou,” Quatriéme Etude. Bulletin Soc. Imp. des Naturalistes de Moscou, 
1849, vol. xxii. p. 337. i 

3 


224 Mr. H. B. Brady on a 


scription of an allied symmetrical form*, the two being placed 
together as representatives of a new genus ‘“ Orobias”’ (O. an- 
tiquior and O. equalis), is dismissed in the same way as afford- 
ing no evidence of value, owing to the absence of any details 
of microscopical structure. Indeed D’Eichwald’s separation 
of these two forms from the genus Nummulina is grounded 
on the non-tubulation of the shell and the lack of any indica- 
tion of a canal-system in the specimens he had examined. 

Buvigniert described and figured an Upper Jurassic Num- 
mulite (N. Humbertina) from the Astarte-marl containing 
Exogyra virgula; but here, again, Dr. Giimbel regards the 
representation as insufficient to set its Nummuline affinity be- 
yond dispute, though lending probability to the assumption. 

More recently Fraas}{ obtained from the Cretaceous forma- 
tion of Palestine certain fossils which he assigned to the 
genus Nummulina, describing them under three specific 
heads. With regard to the first of them, N. vartolaria, var. 
prima, Dr. Giimbel supposes that the traveller has mistaken 
the age of the bed from which it was derived, but does not 
give any very clear ground for this conclusion. The N. cre- 
tacea, Fraas, after careful examination of the specimens, is 
assigned to the genus Alveolina; and, lastly, N. arbiensis, 
Conrad, though certainly a Nummulina, differs so little from 
N. biarritzensis and N. variolaria that it is set down as pro- 
bably of Tertiary age. 

Nummulina jurassica.—The author then proceeds to de- 
monstrate the existence of the Nummulite im strata of the 
Jurassic period, and describes, under the name N. jurassica, 
certain minute fossils collected by the Geological Surveyors 
in Franconia. The precise horizon at which the specimens 
were found was a sponge-bed of the Ammonites-tenuilobatus 
zone § anda portion of the A.-dentatus zone; the locality, 
Schaflohe near Amberg. The specimens are stated to be 


* Lethea Rossica, par Edouard d’Eichwald (1855-1861), vol. i. p. 352, 
1, 22. fig. 16. 
Pe ciciak Geoloew daDe ico lla ences 1852, p. 338; Atlas, p. 47, pl. 80. 
figs. 382-55. 

ai Geol. Beobacht. am Nil, auf der Sinai-Halbinsel u. in Syrien, 1867, 
S. 82-84, Taf. 1. fig. 8. 

§ The “zone of Ammonites tenuilobatus” is one of Oppel’s original 
divisions of the Jurassic strata, and is well marked in the south of the 
Grand-duchy of Baden. My friend G. A. Lebour, F.R.G.S., of the 
Geological Survey, sends me the following note, extracted from Dr. 
Waagen’s ‘Essai d’une Classification générale du Jura supérieur’ 
(Munich, 1865):—“The zone of Amm. tenuilobatus and Rhynchonella 
inconstans is equivalent to the ‘Lower Kimmeridge Clay’ of England, 
the ‘Corallien’ of La Rochelle, the ‘ Astartien ’ of Switzerland, and the 
‘Scyphia Limestone ’ of Swabia and Franconia.” 


true Carboniferous Nummulite. 225 


regular, lenticular, convex bodies 5 to 7 millimetres (} to 4 
inch) in diameter and 1 to 1} millim. (.4 to 3; inch) in 
thickness, margin obtusely rounded rather than sharp, sur- 
face polished and without visible perforations; some speci- 
mens not quite flat, but twisted. A section parallel to the 
surface shows six or seven rather broad convolutions, each con- 
sisting of numerous segments, the primordial chamber being 
large, and the spiral widest near the centre. The tubulation 
of the shell is most distinct at its thickest part. 

Another Nummuline fossil of Upper Jurassic age, from 
Mésskirch in Baden, is partially described in the same paper. 
This is stated to be similar in size to the foregoing, but 
distinguished from it by its numerous convolutions of equal 
size and its much larger primordial chamber. ‘The specimens, 
which are in the Baden Geological Collection, appear to be 
too imperfect to admit of more accurate description. 

Summary.—Accepting Dr. Giimbel’s facts and, in the main, 
his analysis of the labours of previous authors, the scattered 
record ot evidence as to the appearance of the Nummulite at 
periods anterior to the commencement of the Tertiary epoch 
may be summed up, in a few words, as follows :— 

So far as relates to the Cretaceous system, some of the 
reported specimens are not Nummulites at all, and there is 
reason to doubt the geological origin of those which are*. 

With respect to the Jurassic epoch, Buvignier probably, and 
Dr. Giimbel certainly, have obtained veritable members of the 
genus from undoubted Oolitic beds. 

Lastly, although the researches of Rouillier and D’Eichwald 
on the fossils of the white limestones of Russia indicate a 
a possibility of the existence of the Nummulite in rocks of 
Carboniferous age, their figures and descriptions are such as 
no subsequent author has been able to accept as definite or 
entirely reliable evidence on the subject. 


NUMMULINA PRISTINA, nov. sp. 
Introductory—At the British Association Meeting in 


* Prof. Zeuschner (Verhandl. Russ.-kaiserl. min. Gesellschaft, St. Peters- 
burg, Jahrg. 1847, p. 105) mentions the occurrence of Nummulites in large 
numbers in a dolomite of Neocomian age immediately overlying Liassic 
beds in the Carpathian Mountains. The paper is mainly geological, and 
the fossils are not minutely described ; but the Nummuline character of 
the organisms in question is apparently sanctioned and approved by Von 
Keyserling ina short paper at p. 17 of the same volume. Reference to the 
notices of Lower Cretaceous Nummulites would be incomplete without 
some allusion to Zeuschner’s memoir, although the evidence it affords 
may not be deemed conclusive; and it may have been omitted by Dr. 
Giimbel on this account. 


226 Mr. H. B. Brady on a 


September last I described a minute fossil, Archediscus 
Karrert, the chief interest of which lay in two facts :—first, 
that whilst strikingly Nummuline in its essential features, it 
presented a wide divergence in some not unimportant points 
of structure from the typical Nummulite; and, secondly, that 
a fossil with such generic affinities occurred low down in the 
Carboniferous series at localities far apart. The description 
of Archediscus had scarcely appeared * when I received from 
my friend M. Ernest Vanden Broeck, of Brussels, a couple of 
packets of calcareous material, which had been forwarded with 
the idea that it might be of service to me in investigating the 
Foraminifera of the Carboniferous period. 

The total number of Foraminifera which accrued from a 
patient search through the contents of the two packets was 
exceedingly small. Not more, perhaps, than three species 
were represented. One of them is a familiar Carboniterous 
form ; and another, of which only a single specimen was found, 
may turn out to be new. Neither of these need be noticed at 
present, as my object is with the third, which even cursory 
examination showed to be a true and most characteristic little 
Nummulite. Happily im the present instance no doubt need 
exist as to geological origin; for both locality and horizon are 
very accurately stated by M. Vanden Broeck; and though I 
hope at a future time, when I may havea larger supply of spe- 
cimens to work upon, to be able to elucidate further some minor 
details of structure, the material at hand has been sufficient to 
serve for the demonstration of all essential characters. 

Zoological Characters and Structure.—IExternally these 
little fossils are convex disks ; the larger specimens are about 
5 inch in diameter and ; inch thick ; the periphery is usually 
blunt and rounded rather than acute. ‘They are bilaterally 
symmetrical or nearly so, white and smooth as to surface, 
the uniformity being broken only by radial lines more trans- 
parent in texture than the rest of the shell. A section on the 
median plane reveals a spiral of three or four convolutions, the 
whorls being nearly equal in width or only increasing slightly 
towards the periphery, a primordial chamber relatively rather 
large, the ordinary chambers few in number for a Nummulite, 
and bounded by curved septa. 

_ The characters thus broadly stated may now be examined 
in detail. 

With respect to the exterior but little more need be said. 
The relation between the diameter and thickness is apparently 
tolerably constant—that is, about as 2} to 1; larger examples, 
however, exhibit some tendency to spread out and grow thinner 

* Vide Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. October 1873, p. 286. 


true Carboniferous Nummulite. 227 


at the periphery. When the surface of the test is not worn, the 
radiation is either very indistinct or appears in the form of 
curved lines of somewhat darker colour, but without sensible 
limbation ; but in weathered specimens not only are the lines 
more or less elevated, but the centre from which they proceed 
is thickened and the test becomes to some extent umbonate also. 

An accidentally split specimen (Pl. XII. fig. 4) will serve the 
purpose of a horizontal section. It consists of three convolu- 
tions, the outermost having sixteen chambers, and the second 
twelve or thirteen. Another, somewhat larger individual has 
precisely similar septation ; so that, without assigning any great 
importance to it, the drawing may be assumed to represent a 
specimen with about the normal number of chambers for the 
adult. condition. 

The primordial chamber has been measured in three ex- 
amples, and the diameter found to be ‘004, -003, and -0027 of 
an inch, being respectively from + to +1; of the entire diameter 
of the test. 

The minute tubulation of the shell is perfectly preserved, 
and may be easily seen in the transverse section under a 
magnifying-power of 100 diameters, as in Pl. XII. fig. 3. 

The canal-system of the septa and marginal cord may be 
traced here and there, though only imperfectly. The trans- 
verse section (fig. 3) gives distinct evidence of the existence 
of the marginal cord; but the details of the structure are 
obliterated ; and in the more highly magnified drawing (fig. 5) 
indications are not wanting of canals traversing the septa as 
well as the supplementary skeleton. 

Such is a detailed account, as far as can be furnished from 
the materials available, of the finer specimens of this Carbo- 
niferous Nummulite; and in the absence of larger individuals 
or of fragments indicating their existence, they may fairly be 
supposed to be adults and fully developed examples of the 
species. But, in addition to these, a number of smaller indi- 
viduals have been found apparently belonging to the same 
form, though neither so uniform in external appearance nor 
so unmistakably nummuline in character. One or two are 
somewhat explanate in their mode of growth, and if mature 
may pertain to an “Assiline” variety. Others, smaller still, not 
much more than a hundredth of an inch in diameter, are 
unsymmetrical, the convexity of the two faces being unequal 
and irregular. They probably represent either one of the 
early stages of the organi8m or perhaps an arrested condition 
of growth. Their precise relation to the fully developed form 
must be left for future determination, in the lack of sufficient 
specimens to work the question fully out. 


228 Mr. H. B. Brady on a 


A ffinities—The Nummulina antiquior of Rouillier and Vo- 
sinsky, judging from the figures accompanying their memoir, 
is esseritially unsymmetrical. Not only are the two faces very 
unequal in their convexity, but there seems also a tendency 
to irregularity 1 in the contour of the periphery. The Orobias 
equalis of D’Kichwald much more nearly resembles the speci- 
mens before us in external characters. Its separation by the 
author from the genus Nummulina, on the ground of the 

minute structure of the shell (resting, as it apparently does, on 
negative data), need not be insisted upon. The absence of 
evidence of tubulation or canals may be dependent upon the 
process of mineralization; and their detection in fossils so 
minute, taken from a compact calcareous rock of such an age, 
must always be attended with difficulty. Nevertheless some 
doubt must rest upon this species until further specimens 
from the same locality, or at least from a similar horizon, have 
been minutely examined ; and as it differs materially in size * 
and septation from the organism just described, it appears 
undesirable to associate them under the same specific name. 
I propose therefore for the Belgian specimens the name Num- 
mulina pristina. 

Referring to D’ Archiac and Haime’s monograph, the figures 
most closely resembling the new N. pristina_are those of 
N. variolaria, Sowerby, which represent a Nummulite of 
somewhat larger dimensions but remarkably similar in general 
external characters and septation. ‘Thus the nearest allies, 
zoologically speaking, of the Carboniferous form are the 
small thick members of the “ radiate”’ group regarded by 
Messrs. Parker and Jones as the western moditications of 
N. planulatat. N. variolaria especially is a poor and variable 
form whose descent may be easily traced. 

It is not a little singular that in the Carboniferous precursor 
of the Nummulitic group we should have an organism so 
exactly corresponding in minutest features with its most 
modern representatives. This cannot be a mere coincidence. 
Is it not rather a curious exemplification of persistence of 
essential characters through innumerable ages, whilst modifi- 
cations of the original, forming collateral ‘“ species,” have, 
under favourable cir cumstances, exhibited an extraordinary 
development in size and complexity of structure and a cor- 
responding increase in geological importance? ‘Then, as ex- 
ternal conditions have become less favourable, little by little, 

* The diameter, as given by D’ Eichwald, i is five times as great as the 
largest of the Belgian specimens. 

i Deser. des Anim. foss. du groupe Nummulitique de l’Inde, p. 146, 
pl. ix. fig. 15, a-g. 


t See Messrs. Parker and Jones on the nomenclature of the genus, 
Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 3 ser. vol. viii. p. 231. 


true Carboniferous Nummulite. 229 


the type has reverted to its primitive state, gradually dwindling 
in size, and losing by degrees those minor characters which 
were the easily recognized evidence of higher organization, 
and in its later history suggesting the lingering stages which 
precede complete extinction. 

It has been already stated that one of the Nummulites de- 
scribed by Fraas from the Cretaceous beds of Palestine is 
named N. variolaria, var. prima, and that Dr. Giimbel’s ob- 
jection to its being accepted as a Cretaceous representative of 
the genus*appears to be grounded solely on its supposed 
zoological affinity. The discovery of a form so similar, in 
rocks of a still earlier period, appears to render such an ob- 
jection untenable unless otherwise supported. 

Locality and Geological Position.—The locality whence the 
material containing the specimens above described was ob- 
tained is a Carboniferous-Limestone quarry near Namur— 
“la Carriére du Fond d’ Arquet’’—the exact geological rela- 
tions of which will be best understood by a brief abstract of 
particulars, furnished to me by M. Vanden Broeck. 

The Carboniferous Limestone of Belgium is divided by 
M. Dupont into six sets of beds, which have been named from 
the localities in which they are respectively best developed. 
They are as follows, beginning at the lowest :—des Hcaussines, 
de Dinant, d Anseremme, de Vaulsor, de Namur, and de Visé. 
The section at the Carriere du Fond d’Arquet belongs to the 
top but one of these divisions, which is described as a black 
dolomitic limestone with large Hwomphali—black and compact 
at the base, and dolomitic in the upper portion, the charac- 
teristic fossils being Hwomphalus cequalis and E. acutus. 
The material collected was from three distinct bands of marly 
calcareous shale near the base of the section. Two out of 
the three contained examples of the Nummulite, though the 
number of specimens was exceedingly small in proportion to 
the quantity of material, and, owing to the nature of the matrix, 
almost all of them were more or less broken. 

It may be well to mention that a single Nummulite of the 
same species has been found in a packet of greyish limestone 
débris from Flémalle near Liége, which, geologically, pertains 
to the uppermost of the divisions above quoted—that of 
“ Visé;” but until further specimens have been obtained from 
the same horizon, this second locality must be regarded as 
requiring confirmation. 

It only remains for me to express my grateful acknowledg- 
ments to M. Ernest Vanden Broeck of Prussels, to whom I 
am indebted for the material in which this interesting little 
Nummulite has been found. To the pains he has taken to 
verify every particular as to the exact position of the beds in 


230 Dr. A. Giinther on some new 


which it occurs, sparing no labour to ensure complete accuracy, 
the reliability of the geological portion of the present paper is 
entirely due. 

To the kindly criticism of my friend and colleague Professor 
T. Rupert Jones, F.R.S., during the course of my work, I owe 
a good deal; and it is no small thing that in the results, as 
detailed in the foregoing pages, I have the entire concurrence 
of one who has contributed so much to place the classification 
and nomenclature of the genus Nummulina on an intelligible 


basis. 
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XII. 


Fig. 1 represents the lateral aspect, fig. 2 the periphero-lateral aspect of 
Nummulina pristina, magnified 50 diameters. Except a very 
trifling portion of the last convolution (which is broken away), 
this specimen is quite perfect. 

Fig. 3 is a very accurate drawing of a transverse section, almost entire, 
magnified 100 diameters. It shows the somewhat large primor- 
dial chamber, the investing character of the alar lobes of the 
chambers of the spire, and the lamination of the test arising 
therefrom. The general tubulation of the shell is well seen; and 
at the lower end of the drawing indications of the marginal cord 
may be distinctly traced, though wanting in definition. 

Fig. 4 is from a specimen accidentally split at the median plane, magnified 
50 diameters ; one of several, more or less perfect, found in this 
condition. The tendency to split horizontally at the median 
line is of itself a Nummuline peculiarity of some significance. 

Fig. 5 shows a small portion of a horizontal section, much more highly 
magnified (200 diameters), the object being to demonstrate the 
existence of a canal-system in the septa and peripheral region. 
More difficulty has been experienced in obtaining good horizontal 
sections than transverse ; this, however, has been sufficient to 
yield to Mr. Hollick (who has drawn direct from the object) very 
characteristic details of structure at one point in the peripheral 
convolution. 


XXXII.—Notice of some new Species of Fishes from Morocco. 
By Dr. Aubert GUNTHER, F'.R.S., Foreign Member of the 
Senckenberg Society of Frankfort. 


[Plates XIII. & XIV.] 


A SMALL collection of marine and freshwater fishes, made by 
Dr. Rein and Dr. C. von Fritsch during their journey in 
Morocco, was placed by the former gentleman in my hands 
for examination. It contained four new species, which may 
be characterized as follows :— 
Serranus atricauda. 
Dien Aad) (la lat..115. 


8 
I am unable to identify a specimen from Mogador with any 


Species of Fishes from Morocco. 231 


of the species described as being allied to Serranus cabrilla or 
Serranus scriba, the scales being considerably smaller than in 
any of those species. ‘There are eleven scales in a transverse 
series between the dorsal fin and the lateral line. The height 
of the body is two sevenths of the total length (without caudal), 
the length of the head one third. Snout scaleless, pointed, 
with the lower jaw slightly prominent, the maxillary extending 
beyond the vertical from the middle of the eye. ‘The diameter 
of the eye is two ninths of the length of the head and two 
thirds of that of the snout. Interorbital space flat, much less 
than the diameter of the eye. The serrature round the angle 
of the preoperculum is much coarser than on the remainder 
of the bone. The fourth, fifth, and sixth dorsal spines are the 
longest. Ventral fin terminating at a great distance from the 
vent ; caudal truncated. Reddish olive (in spirit), with several 
dark cross bands, most distinct in the middle of the side of 
the body ; two of them are darker and broader than the rest, 
and occupy the middle of the body. An oblique dark streak 
from the eye to the angle of the preoperculum. The soft 
vertical fins with numerous very small bluish ocelli. Corners 
of the caudal fin deep black. 

I find that the specimen from Mogador is identical with 
others in the British Museum from the Azores, Madeira, and 
the Canary Islands (Teneriffe) which I have hitherto confounded 
with S. cabrilla. 


Barbus Reintt. Pl. XII. 


D.11. A.8. L. lat. 32. L. transv. 5/6. 


The osseous dorsal ray is strong, smooth, its stiff portion 
being two thirds as long as the head. There are two and a 
half or three series of scales between the lateral line and the 
root of the ventral fin. The height of the body is a little more 
than the length of the head, which is one fourth of the total 
(without caudal). Snout moderately produced, obtusely conical. 
Mouth inferior; lips not thickened ; barbels longer than the 
eye. The origin of the dorsal fm is distinctly in front of the 
root of the ventral, and nearly midway between the end of the 
snout and the root of the caudal. Caudal fin deeply forked. 
Coloration uniform. 

This species inhabits the river Tensift. The largest of the 
three specimens examined is 8} inches long. 


Barbus Fritschit. Pl. XIV. fig. A. 
D.11. A.9. L. lat. 32-33. L. transv. 53/5. 


The osseous dorsal ray is feeble, not much stronger than the 


232 On some new Species of Fishes from Morocco. 


others, and not serrated. There are two and a half longitudinal 
series of scales between the lateral line and the root of the 
ventral. The height of the body is contained thrice and one 
fourth in the total length (without caudal), the length of the 
head four times. Snout short and obtuse, with the mouth 
inferior, broad, short, and crescent-shaped ; the lower jaw with 
rather a sharp margin. Barbels four, short. The diameter 
of the eye equals the length of the snout, and is two sevenths 
of that of the head. Origin of the dorsal fin nearly midway 
between the end of the snout and the root of the caudal, opposite 
to the base of the ventral. Anterior anal rays very long, ex- 
tending beyond the root of the caudal. A more or less distinct 
narrow greyish longitudinal band runs from the back part of 
the eye above the lateral line to the middle of the caudal fin, 
and separates the darker coloration of the back from the silvery 
of the belly. 

This is a small species, apparently abundant in the streams 
near Morocco (Oued Ksib). The largest specimen is only 
43 inches long. 


Barbus nasus. Pl. XIV. fig. B. 
Di As. datyAa.) 1i.transyaohoe 


Osseous dorsal ray strong, strongly serrated. There are five 
longitudinal series of scales between the lateral line and the 
ventral fin. The length of the head is rather more than the 
height of the body, and one fourth of the total (without caudal). 
Snout very long, much pointed, as long as the postorbital 
portion of the head; lips very thick, the lower with the fold 
interrupted in the middle ; mouth interior; barbels very fleshy 
and much longer than the eye, which is small. The base of 
the ventral fin is conspicuously in advance of the origin of the 
dorsal fin, which is nearly equidistant between the end of the 
snout and the root of the caudal. Anal fin not very narrow, 
none of the rays extending to the caudal. Caudal deeply 
forked. Coloration uniform. 

The larger of the two specimens sent is 5} inches long. 
They bear the number 39; and on referring to the corresponding 
number in the list of localities I find that the specimens are 
said to have been obtained, with other marine fish, on the sea- 
shore near Mogador ; I cannot help thinking that some mistake 
has taken place, and that these specimens were obtained from 
fresh water, like the other species of this genus. 


On the Geodephagous Coleoptera of New Zealand. 233 


XXXITI—On the Geodephagous Coleoptera of New Zealand. 
By H. W. Bares, F.L.S. 


Ir has been stated that the insect-fauna of New Zealand is 
extremely poor, and that the Coleoptera at least show great 
affinity with those of north temperate regions. With regard 
to the former statement, although some weight ought to be 
attached to the unanimous complaint of collectors of the general 
scarcity of insects, it is premature to arrive at a definite conclu- 
sion so long as the islands have not been thoroughly worked. 
At present we know scarcely any thing of the productions of 
the central and western portions of the Northern Island, or of 
the mountainous districts of the Canterbury Province in the 
Southern. Although insular and, especially, oceanic faunas 
are known to be poor, it remains to be seen whether the large 
area, varied surface, and lofty mountain-ranges of New Zea- 
land have not operated to check the process of extinction 
without repopulation which has impoverished other insular 
areas. At present the total number of species of Geodephagous 
Coleoptera known from the islands is 89; the British Isles 
have 311, and Japan 244. 

The belief that the New-Zealand Coleopterous fauna is 
related to that of the north temperate zone is certainly ill- 
founded ; but it was excusable so long as describers, without 
attempting to study the characters of the new species before 
them, referred them recklessly to familiar northern genera, 
such as (to cite cases from the present group) Dromius, Cy- 
mindis, Calathus, Lebia, Harpalus, &c., the species so referred 
having no near affinity whatever to those genera, but belonging 
to purely Australian or Antarctic forms. Our material, as 
far as it goes, shows a great specialization of the New-Zealand 
fauna. ‘Thus, out of the total number of 37 New-Zealand 
genera of Geodephaga, no fewer than 14 are peculiar to the 
islands ; of the remainder, 8 are Australian and 2 are Chilian: - 
7 genera only are common to New Zealand and the north tem- 
perate zone; and these are genera of universal distribution. 
There remain 6 genera, described as Argutor, Feronia, &e. 
which I have not yet seen, and therefore class as doubtful. 

Many of the species described or enumerated in the following 
paper have been communicated by Messrs. Wakefield and 
Fereday, of Christchurch, and Mr. Lawson, of Auckland; 
and it 1s at the desire of these gentlemen and other local natu- 
ralists, who are labouring to gather together the scattered 
materials of the New-Zealand fauna, that I have undertaken 
this task. 


234 Mr. H. W. Bates on the Geodephagous 


COLEOPTERA GEODEPHAGA. 
Family Cicindelida. 
Cicindela tuberculata, Fab. Syst. Entom. p. 225. 
Northern and Southern Islands. Auckland; Christchurch. 


Cicindela latecincta, White, Voy. Ereb. & Terr., Ins. p. 1, 
Fea be gdb 

Southern Island. Canterbury. 

This form is generally considered a variety of C. tuberculata. 
The differences, however, are considerable; for besides the 
width of the lateral white stripe, which reaches throughout 
the lateral rim of the elytra, it is a broader insect, with the 
elytral surface more uniform in colour and, particularly, the 
rows of punctures much less marked and with smaller green 
spots. It must rest with local entomologists to decide, by 
observing the forms 7” s¢tw, whether they are distinct or not. 


Cicindela Wakefieldi, n. sp. 


C. tuberculate similis, at multo minor et angustior; fascia alba 
mediana elytrorum postice oblique prolongata. Long. 4 lin. ¢ 9. 


Very similar to C. tuberculata in sculpture, colours, and 
markings, but certainly distinct. It is always much smaller 
and narrower; and although the lateral white stripe of the 
elytra is very similar in form and direction, the median fascia 
is prolonged as a curved streak some distance down the disk 
of the elytron. There is also a structural difference in the 
apex of the elytra, which may better be expressed by a tabular 
formula :— 


Cicindela tuberculata. Cicindela Wakefieldi. 
Elytrorum apicibus Elytrorum apicibus 

d conjunctim prolongatis, sutura do conjunctim late rotundatis, 
longe spinosa, sutura breyiter spinosa, 

© conjunctim rotundatis, sutura ? singulatim abrupte rotundatis 

acute spinosa. (vel ad suturam fortiter con- 


junctim emarginatis), sutura 
reviter spinosa. 
Very local, near Chrjstchurch. Sent in some numbers by 
C. M. Wakefield, Esq., but first discovered by Mr. Fereday, 
of Christchurch. 


Cicindela Douet, Chenu; Guér. Mag. de Zool. 1840, pl. xlv. 


The figure represents an elongate species evidently of the 
tuberculata group, a little shorter than C. tuberculata (11 
millims.=5 lines). It is distinguished at once by the apical 


Coleoptera of New Zealand. 235 


white lunule of the elytra being represented by a subapical 
spot. 

The locality ‘‘ New Zealand” given to this species rests on 
the assurance of a dealer, who was told by the surgeon of a 
whaling-ship that it was taken there. I have seen no speci- 
men of it. 


Cicindela Parryt, White, Voy. Ereb. & Terr., Ins. p. 1, 
ais Bar 


Port Nicholson ; Christchurch. 


Cicindela dunedensis, Castelnau, Trans. R. Soc. Victoria, 
pt. 1, vol. vii. p. 35. 

Dunedin. 

The author compares it to C. Parryi, from which it differs 
by being narrower. It is “light brown, the elytra covered 
with spots of a green copper-colour.” In this respect it differs 
much trom C. Wakefieldi. 


Cicindela Fereday?, Bates, Entom. Monthly Mag. 
vol. iv. p. 53 (1867). 


Mr. Wakefield has recently met with this species in numbers 
on the sandy bed of the Rakaia near Christchurch. It is 
distinct from all the members of the tuberculata group, in its 
finely granulated elytra without traces of green foveoles. 


Family Carabidae. 


Section A. Mesothoracic epimera reaching the middle cove. 


Subfamily Mreaporrvz. 


Amarotypus Edwardsii, Bates, Entom. Monthly Mag. 
vol. ix. p. 51 (1872). 
I have only seen of this curious insect the specimens sent 
me by Mr. H. Edwards, who took it in New Zealand *. 


Subfamily Scarrrmz. 


Clivina rugithorax, Putzeys, Stett. Zeit. 1866, p. 37. 


A large species (nearly 5 lines), closely allied to a common 
Australian species, C. australasie, Boh. I have not yet seen 
it. 

* Heterodactylus nebrioides, Guér. (Pristancylus castaneus, Blanch.), from 
the Auckland Islands, is another member of this very interesting ant- 
arctic group of Carabide. Pristancylus brevis, Blanch., from the same 
locality, is doubtful. 


236 Mr. H. W. Bates on the Geodephagous 


Section B. Mesothoracic epimera not reaching the middle coxe. 
Subfamily Broscrvz. 
Mecodema sculpturatum, Blanchard, Voy. au Péle Sud, Zool. 
vol. iv. p. 34, t. u. f. 14. 


Mecodema Howittii, Casteln. Trans. R. Soc. Victoria, pt. 1. 
vol. vill. p. 159 (=vrectolineatum, Putz. Stett. Zeit. 1868, 
p- 317). 


Mecodema rectolineatum, Casteln. 1. c. p. 160; Putz. Annali 
del Mus. Civ. di Genova, vol. iv. p. 4. 
Mecodema impressum, Casteln. /. c. p.161; Putz. /.c. p. 4. 


Mecodema lucidum, Casteln. 1. c. p. 160; Putz. /. ¢. p. 5. 
“ Dunedin.” 

Mecodema crenicolle, Casteln. 1. c. p. 160; Putz. 7. c. p. 6. 
“ Auckland.” 


Mecodema simplex, Casteln. 1. c. p. 160; Putz. 2. ¢. p. 7. 
* Auckland.” 


Mecodema alternans, Casteln. /. c. p. 161. 


Mecodema crenaticolle, Redtenbacher, Reise d. Novara, Coleopt. 
jose al 
I have not yet seen any species of Mecodema from the 
neighbourhood of Christchurch. 
Metaglymma tibiale. 
Maoria tibialis, Casteln. 1. c. p. 163. 
*¢ Molyneux River ; in the mountains.”’ 
Metaglymma monilifer, Bates, Entom. Monthly Mag. vol. iv. 
p- 79 (1867). 
Near Christchurch. Discovered by Mr. Fereday. 


Metaglymma punctatum, Putz. 1. c. p. 8. 
Maoria punctata, Casteln. l. c. p. 164, 
* Dunedin; in the mountains.” 
Metaglymma morio, Putz. 1. c. p. 9. 
Maoria morio, Casteln. 1. c. p. 164. 
Otago. 


Metaglymma elongatum, Putz. l. c. p. 9. 
Mecodema elongatum, Casteln. /. c. p. 162. 


Coleoptera of New Zealand. 237 
Metaglymma aberrans, Putz. Stett. Zeit. 1868, p. 320, 


Metaglymma clivinoides. 
Maoria clivinoides, Casteln. 1. c. p. 164. 


“ Wellington.” 


Metaglymma dyschirioides. 
Maoria dyschirioides, Casteln. /. c. p. 164. 
“Crooked River.” 


Oregus cereus. 
Promecoderus @reus, White, Voy. Ereb. & Terr., Ins. p. 5, t. 1. £8. 
Oregus ereus, Putz. Stett. Zeit. 1868, p. 327. 


Port Nicholson ( Whzte). 


Oregus tnequalis. 
Mecodema inequalis, Casteln. /. c. p. 162. 
“ Dunedin.” 


Brullea antarctica, Casteln. 1. c. p. 166. 
“ Auckland.” 


Obs. Percosoma carenoides (Broscus), White, Voy. Ereb. 
& Terr. p. 4 (Tasmania), and Promecoderus Lottini, Brullé, 
Hist. Nat. Ins. iv. p. 450 (Swan River), have been erroneously 
given as New-Zealand insects. 


Subfamily Lroriz. 


Rembus zeelandicus, Redtenb. Reise Novara, Coleop. p. 10, 
t. 1. f, 5. 

“ Auckland.” 

A large species (94 lines), of which I have seen no specimens 
from New Zealand. The description and figure agree pretty 
well with a Chinese species ; and there may be an error in the 
locality. 


Dicrochile subopaca, n. sp. 


D. oblongo-ovata, subdepressa, nigra, palpis et tarsis rufo-piceis ; 
elytris alutaceis, subopacis; capite parvo; thorace quadrato, 
postice modice angustato. Long. 43-5 lin. 


Shorter in form than the common Australian D. G'ory7, and 
the elytra more ovate; distinguished also by the alutaceous 
and subopaque surface of the elytra. The head is relatively 
small, as in D. Goryt. The thorax is quadrate, moderately 
narrowed behind, with explanated and reflexed margins; the 
hind angles obtuse and rounded at the tip, the middle of the 

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xii. 17 


238 Mr. H. W. Bates on the Greodephagous 


base broadly sinuated. The elytra are elliptical-ovate, obliquely 

and strongly sinuate near the tip, with the suture produced ; 

the lateral margins are somewhat explanated and reflexed, the 

strie sharply impressed, the interstices scarcely convex. 
Apparently abundant near Christchurch. 


Dicrochile aterrima, n. sp. 

D. oblonga, nigra, nitida; capite majore; thorace breviore, trans- 
verso, quadrato, postice paulo angustato, angulis posticis obtusis, 
apice rotundatis, margine vix reflexo; elytris oblongis, nitidis, 
fortiter punctulato-striatis, interstitiis alternis magis elevatis. 
Long. 5 lin. 


Same size as D. subopaca, but distinguished at once by its 
deeper black colour and shining surface, by its larger head 
(owing chiefly to the much more prominent eyes), and much 
shorter, more transverse thorax. The palpi and tarsi are also 
shining black. ‘The elytra are much less sinuate truncate, 
and the sutural apex less produced ; the striz are punctulate, 
and the interstices more convex, especially the third, fifth, and 
seventh. 

Taken by Mr. C. M. Wakefield in some numbers at Lake 


Coleridge, under stones in a dry lagoon. 


Dicrochile ovicollis, Motschulsky, Bull. Mosc. 1864, iv. p. 316. 


By its elytra “ paulo opacis,” this may possibly be our D. 
subopaca; but the description of the thorax cannot possibly be 
intended for that species (‘ capite fere duplo latiore, ovali”’). 
There is not the faintest approach to the oval form in the thorax 
of D. subopaca. 


Obs. Dicrochile Fabret and D. anchomenoides, cited by au- 
thors as described by Guérin (Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. 1846, 
Bull. p. 103), must be erased from the list of this genus, as 
the species’ are merely named in the place quoted, not 


described. 


Subfamily Awcnouenrv2. 
Calathus zeelandicus, Redtenb. Reise Novara, Col. p. 17. 


Auckland. 

It is doubtful if this belongs really to the genus Calathus. 
C. rubromarginatus, Blanch., from the Auckland Islands, is 
decidedly not a Calathus, having, according to Chaudoir, 
four joints of the male anterior tarsi dilated and brush-like 
beneath. 


Coleoptera of New Zealand. 239 


Platynus deplanatus. 
Anchomenus deplanatus, White, Voy. Erebus and Terror, p. 3 (1846). 
A. atratus, Blanch. Voy. Pole Sud, Zool. iv. p. 21, t. 1. f. 15 (1853). 
Blanchard’s description is so vague that it is difficult to de- 
termine to which of the New-Zealand species of the same size 
(12 to 14 millims.) it applies. Judging from the figure and 
the expressions ‘ater, obscurus” and “ Elytres obscures, 
planes,” I refer to it a slender, subopaque species existing in 
some of the London collections, and remarkable for the very 
sharp furrows and ridges of all the tarsi, and for the uneven 
slightly rugose thorax, which is subcordate in form, but with 
produced and rather acute hind angles. The head and eyes 
are very similar in form to those of P. scrobiculatus of Europe. 
White’s description of A. deplanatus agrees pretty well with 
the same insect ; and [ have little hesitation in adopting the 
name, although I have not seen his type. 


Platynus Colensonis. 
Anchomenus Colensonis, White, /. ¢. p. 5. 


The type in the British Museum is a slender insect, with 
very elongate thorax, sinuate-angustate behind, and with pro- 
duced hind angles; the antenne, palpi, and legs testaceous 
yellow. 

The size is 52 lines; but I refer to the same species two 
specimens collected by Mr. Henry Edwards, 43 and 5 lines in 
length respectively. 


Platynus Edwardsii, n. sp. 

P. elongatus, modice convexus, niger nitidus, palpis, antennis (ar- 
ticulis 1.-3. exceptis) et tarsis rufo-piceis; capite ovato, pone 
oculos subconstricto, supra levi; thorace angusto, quadrato-cor- 
dato, post medium fortiter sinuato, angulis posticis productis, 
acutis ; elytris elongato-ovatis, apice fortiter sinuatis, convexis, 
profunde subpunctulato-striatis, interstitio tertio tripunctato. 
Long 5-53 lin. ¢ 9. 

Allied to P. Colensonis, especially in the form of the thorax, 
with produced acute hind angles, but legs constantly pitchy 
black ; palpi and antennz dull pitchy red, with the greater 
part of the three basal joints of the latter black. ‘The thorax, 
as in P. deplanatus and P. Colensonis, has a deep central 
groove, and on each side a curved, shallow, impressed line 


proceeding from the basal fovea and nearly reaching the ante- . 


rior angles. he lateral explanated margin is narrow and re- 
flexed. All the tarsi (except the dilated joints of the male) are 
sharply ridged and grooved, as in P. deplanatus. 


Lie 


240 Mr. H. W. Bates on the Geodephagous 


Anchomenus elevatus, White, 1. c. p. 3. 


A large, shining black species (64 lines), with large ovate 
thorax, much larger in proportion to the elytra than in any 
other described species. ‘The hind angles of the thorax are 
very obtuse, almost rounded; and the lateral margins are widely 
explanated and strongly reflexed, of the same width from 
the anterior to the posterior angle. The elytra are ovate, 
rather rounded at the shoulders, and strongly sinuate near the 
apex. ‘The tarsi are grooved only on the sides. 

Auckland. Sent in some numbers by Mr. Lawson. 


Anchomenus Feredayi, n. sp. 

A, oblongus, subgracilis, nigro-zneus nitidus, thoracis margine late- 
rali, elytrorum margine deflexo, tibiis tarsisque obscure piceo- 
rufis ; thorace transversim quadrato, angulis posticis distinctis sed 
obtusis; elytris striatis, interstitiis planis, tertio tripunctato. 
Long. 33 lin. ¢ @. 


_ Asmall “Agonum,” having much resemblance to the British 
A. micans, but distinguished, among other characters, by the 
shorter thorax, scarcely more narrowed behind than in front, 
with distinct hind angles and pitchy and explanated lateral 
margins; the anterior angles are rather rounded, not promi- 
nent as in A. éristis, De]. The eyes are much more prominent 
than in A. micans, and the palpi shorter and more robust. 
The frontal foveole are deep and well defined. The elytra 
are very obliquely and rather strongly sinuate at the apex, 
with the suture strongly produced ; the strize are sharp and 
fine, equally impressed from base to apex, and finely punctu- 
late or crenulated ; the interstices quite plane, with three large 
punctures on the third; the deflexed margins and extreme 
edge of the lateral rims rufo-piceous. The antenne are robust 
from the fourth joint, black, with rufous bases to the joints. 
The palpi and femora shining black ; the trochanters reddish 
testaceous ; the tibiz: and tarsi pitchy red. The tarsi are finely 
grooved on the sides only. 

Christchurch. Sent first by Mr. Fereday, and afterwards 
by Mr. C. M. Wakefield. 


Anchomenus Lawsont, n. sp. 


A. oblongus, gracilis, nigro-piceus eeneo-tinctus, nitidus; partibus 
oris, antennis, pedibus (femoribus exceptis), thoracis elytrorumque 
marginibus lateralibus piceo-rufis; capite convexo; thorace 
paule transverso, subquadrato, lateribus rotundatis, postice plus 
quam antice angustato, angulis posticis obtusis sed distinctis ; 


Coleoptera of New Zealand. 241 


elytris fortiter striatis, interstitiis subconvexis, tertio tripunctato. 

Long 4 lin. ¢ Q. 

Longer and proportionally narrower than A. Lereday?. 
Thorax conspicuously longer, the posterior narrowing more 
gradual, and slightly incurved before the hind angle ; strie of 
the elytra deeper, and interstices more convex. ‘The antenne, 
parts of the mouth, and legs also differ in being wholly dull 
rufous, except the femora, which are blackish. The anterior 
angles of the thorax are not at all advanced and are rounded off. 


Auckland. Collected by Mr. Lawson. 


Anchomenus submetallicus. 
Colpodes submetallicus, White, 1. ¢. p. 2. 


According to the type in the British Museum, this is a 
species closely allied to the common Australian A. marginellus 
(Erichson) ; it differs in being less shining, and in the much 
shorter thorax, the sides of which narrow much more abruptly 
to the front angles. It is common and generally distributed 
in New Zealand; and [I have compared a long series with 
an equal number of the Australian species. 

The species has none of the distinguishing characters of 
Colpodes ; the fourth joint of the tarsi, however, is rather 
more distinctly triangular and emarginate than is usual in 
Anchomenus. It is closely allied to our A. Lereday?, but is 
much larger, more brassy, and with clearer yellow margins to 
the thorax and elytra, besides having yellow legs. 


Tropopterus sulcicollis, n. sp. 

T. ellipticus, niger, nitidus ; antennis, palpis et pedibus piceo-rufis ; 
capite spatio inter sulcos laterales haud carinato; thorace 
quadrato, vix transverso, medio rotundato, antice plus quam 
postice angustato, angulis posticis productis rectis, basi utrinque 
fovea sulciformi; elytris convexis, striato-punctatis. Long. 34 
laa?) 

Resembles the genus Odpterus, but distinguished by the 
pubescence of the antenne not beginning before the fourth 
Joint, and by thé labial palpi having their terminal joint 
obtuse-ovate, instead of acuminate, Aeyees in all essential 
points with the Chilian genus Z’ropopterus ; allied to Colpodes, 
in which the forehead has on each side two grooves with a 
carinate interval between them. The eighth and ninth striz 
of the elytra are sunk in a broad groove near the apex ; and 
the seventh at that part is bordered by a sharp carina. The 
sixth and seventh striz are nearly obsolete. 

One example, female, sent by Mr. Fereday from Christ- 
church, 


242 Mr. H. W. Bates on the Greodephagous 


Tropopterus servatoporus, DQ. sp. 

T. ovatus, elytris gibbosis ; castaneo-rufus, nitidus; thorace basi 
grosse punctato ; elytris grosse seriatim punctatis. Long. 23 lin. 
OTF 
The labial palpi are obtuse ; the maxillaries taper to a point 

almost asin Oépterus. The posterior narrowing of the thorax 

is strongly sinuated and the hind angles produced ; the whole 
base is very coarsely punctured; the dorsal line and long 
basal fovez are deeply impressed. The sutural rows of punc- 
tures are impressed in striz, the rest are superficial ; the form 
of the lateral striz is as in 7’, sulcicollis. 

Mr. H. Edwards; one example. 


Cyclothorax insularis. 

Olisthopus insularis, Motschulsky, Bull. Mose. 1864, iv. p. 325, 

Drimostoma striatopunctata, Casteln, /. c. p. 199 (?). 

Differs scarcely from the common Australian Anchomenus 
ambiguus, Exichs. (Cyclothorax id., W. M‘Leay), the only 
difference observable being its more zneous colouring. 

Auckland and Canterbury. 


Drimostoma antarctica, Casteln. /. c. p. 199. 


M. de Chaudoir suspects this to be an Abacetus. I have 
seen at present no species of either genus from New Zealand. 


Subfamily Prerosricuiva. 


Prosopogmus impressifrons, Chaudoir, Bull. Mose. 1865, 
p- 28 (separata). 

A large species, about 8 lines long, which I have not 
seen. It is similar in form to Pt. (Trichosternus) australasie, 
but much flatter and of a brilliant brassy coppery hue, with 
flattened tarsi, having their upper surface finely reticulated. 


Trichosternus antarcticus, Chaudoir, Bull. Mose. 1865, ii. 
p. 73. 
Megadromus viridilimbatus, Motsch, Bull. Mosc. 1865, iv. p. 251. 


_ This fine insect was sent home in some numbers, from 
Christchurch, by Mr. Fereday. The colour is not always 
cupreous, but some specimens are black, with the green 
margins occasionally scarcely perceptible. It may always be 
distinguished from the obscure-coloured 7. rectangulus by 
its larger and broader shape, more protuberant cheeks behind 
the eyes, and by the thorax being more dilated in front. 


Coleoptera of New Zealand. 243 


Trichosternus rectangulus, Chaud. Bull. Mose. 1865, iii. p. 74. 
Christchurch. Sent both by Mr. Fereday and Mr. Wake- 
field. 
Trichosternus capito, White, 1. c. p. 4. 


Closely allied to 7. rectangulus ; but I have seen no spe- 
cimens from Christchurch exactly resembling White’s types 
in the British Museum. 


Trichosternus Guerinti, Chaud. Bull. Mosc. 1865, iii. p. 75. 
Platysma australasig, Guér. Rey. Zool. 1841, p. 121. 
Northern Island ? 


Trichosternus planiusculus, White, U. c. p. 3, t. 1. f. 7. 
Northern Island. 


Holcaspis angustula, Chaud. Bull. Mose. 1865, i. p. 99. 
Omaseus elongatus, Blanch. Voy. Pole Sud, Zool. iv. p. 28, t. 2. f. 4 
(specific name preoccupied). 
Christchurch. One example sent by Mr. Fereday. Found 
also at Akaroa. 


Holcaspis sylvatica, Chaud. 1. c. p. 100. 
Omaseus sylvaticus, Blanch. 1. c. p. 29, t. 2. f. 5. 


Akaroa. I have three examples from Mr. Henry Edwards, 
but do not know their exact locality. 


Holcaspis subenea. 


Platysma subenea, Guérin, Rey. Zool. 1841, p. 122. 

Feronia (Pterostichus) vagepunctata, White, 1. c. p. 4. 

Port Nicholson ; also Christchurch. 

I obtained an example from M. Doué’s collection named 
Platysma subenea, which is evidently authentic, agreeing with 


the author’s description and the types of vagepunctata of 
White. 


Holcaspis edicnema, n. sp. 


H. subcnee proxime affinis, sed maris femoribus posticis subtus 
medio valde dilatatis et dentatis. Subseneo-nigra, nitida; thorace 
magno, quadrato, postice perparum angustato, ante basin yix 
sinuato, angulis posticis paulo productis; elytris brevibus pro- 
funde striatis, striis punctatis et passim (precipue postice) subin- 
terruptis. Long. 8 lin. ¢. 


Much resembling ZH. subenea; but the elytra are much 


244 Mr. H. W. Bates on the Geodephagous 


shorter and the thorax rather longer than in that species. The 
thorax is very nearly as long as broad, and is somewhat re- 
gularly and slightly rounded on the sides, the greatest width 
being in the middle ; behind it is very much less sinuate, and 
the hind angles are less produced than in subenea; the basal 
fovea also is larger, and offers on its outer slope a distinct second 
smaller fovea; but some trace of this is visible in well-deve- 
loped examples of subenea. The hind legs are remarkably 
short, and the femora are widely dilated beneath, forming a 
tooth, between which and the base is lodged the elongated tro- 
chanter. 

One example ; in my own collection. Exact locality un- 
known. 


Holcaspis elongella, White, 1. c. p. 4. 
Christchurch. Several examples from Mr. Fereday. 


Holcaspis ovatella, Chaud. Bull. Mosc. 1865, ii. p. 103. 


Distinguished by its three punctures on the third interstice 
of the elytra; otherwise similar to HH. elongella. 

The precise locality of this distinct species (9 lines long) is 
not known. Ihave one example obtained from a New-Zealand 
collection, probably from the Southern Island. 

The genus Holcaspis resembles in general form the parallel 
species of Pterostichus, having, like them, very short metatho- 
racic episterna and the marginal stria of the elytra duplicated 
towards the apex. It is distinguished by the base of the 
scutellum being scored by a number of short fine lines; this 
character, however, is seen in some European species of the 
Feronia group—e. g. Haptoderus abaxoides, De}., Tapinopterus 
cephalotes, Gaut., and others. 


Haptoderus maorinus, n. sp. 

H. oblongus, nigro-piceus, ¢ nitidus, 9 elytris sericeo-subopacis ; 
palpis, pedibus, antennisque plus minusve piceo-rufis; capite 
foveis frontalibus vix impressis; thorace quadrato, lateribus an- 
tice paulo rotundatis, post medium leviter sinuato-angustatis, 
angulis posticis paulo productis reetis, fovea basali utrinque unica 

_ profunda, toto impunctato ; elytris postice paulo angustatis, apice 
haud sinuatis, striis profundis simplicibus, interstitio tertio bipune- 
tato. Long. 33-32 lin. ¢ @. 

Christchurch (C. M. Wakefield, Esq.). 

Similar in form to Holcaspis sylvatica, but wanting the 
essential character of the group—the striated base of the scu- 
tellum. In all essential characters it agrees with the Huropean 


Coleoptera of New Zealand. 245 


Haptodert. The palpi have the terminal joints narrowed to 
the tip and very briefly (the maxillaries in the male not at all) 
truncated. The head is rather small, and shows scarcely any 
trace of the usual frontal foveze; the thorax has on each side 
of the base a single deep, almost sulciform, fovea, and its 
whole surface isimpunctate. The elytra have a well-developed 
scutellar striole between the suture and the first stria; the in- 
terstices are plane in the subopaque female and a little more 
convex in the shining male, but in both sexes they become 
narrow and convex at the apex, and the first stria is continued 
round the apex to the marginal stria. 

Argutor erythropus, Blanch., as far as the very insuffi- 
cient description goes, agrees with this species ; but no mention 
is made of the two punctures on the third interstice. 


Argutor pantomelas, Blanch. Voy. au Péle Sud, Zool. iv. 
Piz2i,, ts 1L, 4. 6. 


8-9 millims. Rather broad, black; elytra nearly plane ; 
palpi clear red; thorax with two lineiform foveze on each 
side. 

The description almost applies to the O. (Holcaspis) sylvaticus 
of the same author; and the species probably belongs to [{ol- 
caspis. 

Argutor erythropus, Blanch. 1. ¢. p. 27, t. ii. f. 7. 

Probably a Haptoderus. 


Argutor piceus, Blanch. J. c. p. 28, t. 11. f. 8. 


The head is described as having two large rugose fovez, and 
the elytra as ovate. 


Feronia (Platysma) vigil, White, /. c. p. 3. 
Nothing can be made of the superficial description given. 


Feronia (Platysma) politissima, White, /. c. p. 4. 
Port Nicholson. 
The same remark as above applies to this species. 
Molopsida polita, White, /. c. p. 6. 

Waikouaiti. 

I have not succeeded in finding the type of this insufficiently 
described genus and species in the British Museum. 

Alogus monachicus, Motsch. Bull. Mose. 1865, iv. p. 245. 

74 lines. Similar to Omaseus in form, but broader and 


246 Bibliographical Notice. 


without scutellar striole. Metathoracic episterna a little longer 
than broad. Thorax nearly twice the width of the head, 
transverse, cordate, base on each side bisulcate ; sides arcuated ; 
hind angles prominent, acute. Elytra with one puncture on 
the third interstice. 

I have seen no species agreeing with Motschulsky’s descrip- 
tion. 


Cerabilia maori, Castelnau, .¢. p. 202. 

Dunedin, 

Belongs to the Feronta group, according to the author; but 
the mentum is described as without tooth, and the palpi as 
pointed. The species is 44 lines long, brown, and elyira feebly 
striated. 


Rhabdotus reflecus, Chaud. Bull. Mose. 1865, ii. p. 94. 


Notwithstanding the almost invariable accuracy of M. de 
Chaudoir, I suspect an error in the locality he gives to this 
species. The specimens I have seen are all from ‘Tasmania. 


[To be continued. | 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE. 


The Naturalist in Nicaragua. By THomas Betz, F.G.S. 
London: Murray. 


Tuts is another addition to that pleasant class of books of travel the 
type of which is Darwin’s ‘ Journal of a Naturalist,’ and which have 
acquired increased interest since the appearance of the ‘Origin of 
Species.’ Mr. Belt’s special line of study appears to be mining 
geology, his mission in Nicaragua being the management of the 
gold-mines of Chontales, situated about midway between the Atlantic 
and Pacific sea-boards ; but his observations range over other de- 
partments of geology and physical geography, and a taste for natural 
history, especially its philosophical side, led him to devote much of 
his leisure time to collecting and observing the plants and animals 
of the districts he visited. The result is a volume full of original 
observation and vigorous reasoning. Some of the reasoning, in fact, 
is likely to be considered too bold ; but it displays the working of an 
original mind, well stored with accurate knowledge, and endeavouring 
to explain some of the knottiest problems in physical science. Asa, 
narrative of travel the book is agreeable reading, without, perhaps, 
having that fascination which other works of the same class, con- 
taining more exciting personal experience and dealing with regions 
of more intrinsic interest, are found to possess. There are not 


Bibliographical Notice. 247 


wanting, however, descriptive passages of considerable power and 
truthfulness ; and many of the general observations and reflections 
scattered throughout the work are instructive and sound. 

The mode in which Mr. Belt handles the subject of the glacial 
epoch, and the influence it had upon the distribution of plants and 
animals, may be selected as an illustration of the above remarks. 
In the course of a journey he took to the mountainous district near 
Ocotal, on the northern frontier of Nicaragua, he discovered an ex- 
tensive deposit of unstratified gravel with boulders, which, he had 
no doubt, formed the moraine of a huge glacier, at an altitude of not 
more than 2000 to 3000 feet above the present sea-level. The 
deposit had been worn through by streams, in some places to the 
depth of 200 feet, exposing numerous vertical sections; and, with 
the single exception of striated surfaces, he observed all the same 
signs of glacial action which he had studied in Wales, Scotland, and 
Nova Scotia. Reasoning from this and other evidence which he 
adduces, he first states the grounds on which he thinks it must be 
concluded that the phenomena were due to glacier ice and not to 
icebergs; and he then draws the inference that the whole of the 
high land between the tropics must have been, during the glacial 
epoch, covered with snow and ice. A similar conclusion, as is well 
known, had been arrived at before by other writers; but no one had 
hitherto offered a satisfactory explanation of the non-extinction, in 
that state of things, of the vast host of peculiar forms of plants and 
animals still existing in the equatorial lowlands. Mr. Belt, in 
accounting for this, adopts and extends an hypothesis of Mr. Alfred 
Tylor, to the effect that the quantity of water locked up in the 
polar ice-cap lowered the level of the sea to the extent of 600 feet. 
He believes the depression would exceed 1000 feet, and that 
the tracts of sea-bottom thereby laid bare would form a refuge 
for the equatorial fauna and flora. The hypothesis is not fully 
worked out; and it would be necessary, before it can be seriously 
dealt with, to explain the climatal conditions of the lowlands between 
the tropics at a time when all the elevated land was subject to arctic 
rigour. One obyious consideration he has certainly omitted to note, 
viz. that a lowering of the sea by 1000 feet would act on climate 
chiefly by making all the land virtually 1000 feet higher, as the 
atmosphere, being constant in total amount, would descend with the 
lowering of the sea-level. This would produce a train of conse- 
quences in a high degree favourable to the state of things Mr. Belt 
supposes to have existed. 

With regard to its other effects on the distribution of plants and 
animals, he ingeniously points out how the laying bare of shallow 
seas, such as those separating Borneo and the neighbouring islands 
from continental Asia, would account for the present existence of 
so many species and genera of terrestrial animals in lands now 
separated from each other. He goes, however, too far in reviving 
the fabled Atlantis. Whatever we may think of this hypothesis in 
the form too briefly sketched out by Mr. Belt, there can be no doubt 
of its great suggestiveness, and of the justness of his view in requiring 


248 Bibliographical Notice. 


that any such theory shall fit the known facts of biology as well as 
those of geology and physics. 

Some of the most interesting of Mr. Belt’s zoological observations 
relate to ants, of whose habits he was evidently a close observer. 
Thus with regard to the @codome, or leaf-cutting ants, he is the 
first to record any thing of the internal economy of their vast sub- 
terranean dwellings. He had to do battle with these fearful depre- 
dators in his attempts to cultivate various useful and ornamental 
plants in his garden, and gives an amusing description of his en- 
deavours to extirpate them by pouring buckets-full of diluted car- 
bolic acid down the broad passages which lead to their cavernous 
abodes. But the most extraordinary thing he relates of them is 
that their habitual food is a fungus, which they sedulously grow in 
their underground chambers. In fact, it is for this purpose, he 
found, that they require the vast quantity of pieces of leaves which 
the workers spend nearly all their lives in cutting from young trees 
and carrying to their abodes—the leaves not being used as food, nor 
as a thatch for their nests, as had been surmised by other writers, 
but being stored in chambers, where, in decaying, they produce a mi- 
nute fungus, on which the larve and small workers seem to feed. 
He gives also many interesting details regarding the various species 
of Eciton, or foraging ant, which hunt through the Tropical- American 
forests in large armies, and states a fact which is entirely new, viz. 
that they construct no formicarium, but have only temporary abodes. 
The facts cited in illustration of the reasoning-powers of ants are 
numerous throughout the volume ; it is a subject on which he tried 
many experiments with curious results. ‘The best case he gives is 
that of a marauding procession of Gicodome tunnelling under the 
rails of a tramway to avoid being crushed by the passing waggons. 
One day when the waggons were not running, Mr. Belt stopped up 
their tunnel with stones; but although great numbers were thus cut 
off from their nest, they would not cross the rails, but set to work 
making fresh tunnels underneath them. It is impossible to do more 
than allude to the vast store of suggestive facts and reasoning on this 
subject contained in the volume. 

The relations of insects to flowers in regard to cross-fertilization 
form the subject of many original observations, recorded and argued 
out to definite conclusions with great keenness and circumspection. 
The same may be said with reference to another less-worked phase 
of insect- and plant-relationship, viz. the special adaptations of leaves 
to attract pugnacious ants as defenders of the plants against defoli- 
ation by leaf-cutting ants, caterpillars, and other phytophagous ani- 
mals. This subject is dealt with in a series of observations on the 
bull’s-horn-thorn Acacia, on species of Melastoma haying glandular 
swellings at the bases of their leaves containing a sweet fluid to 
attract ants, and on the Cecropia trees, which invite protecting ants 
to dwell in their hollow chambered stems. The ants thus attracted 
form, as Mr. Belt expresses it, a most efficient standing army for the 

lant. 
; Mimetic resemblances come in for a large share of Mr. Belt’s 


' > 


Royal Society. 249 


attention. He had commenced his observations in Nicaragua with 
the advantage of some previous knowledge of the subject, and was 
therefore prepared to direct his inquiries to many points that required 
elucidation before the Darwinian explanation of these phenomena can 
be said to be established. Thus we find recorded his experiments on 
living insects which are the objects of mimicry by other forms, as to 
their distastefulness as food to insectivorous animals. Whenever he 
observes an instance of mimetic resemblance, he reasons out its causes 
and conditions instead of merely stating it. One of the most striking 
cases he mentions is that of a green leaf-like locust, which almost alone 
of all other living things stood its ground amid a destroying host of 
foraging ants. It stood immovable whilst the ants ran over its legs, 
and allowed him to pick it up and replace it amongst the ants 
without making an effort to escape. It might easily have flown 
away; but it would then only have fallen into as great a danger ; 
for the numerous birds that accompany the army-ants are ever on 
the outlook for any insect that may fly up. Another case is that of 
a Longicorn beetle, belonging to a genus the species of which re- 
semble various other objects: those members of the genus which 
live on dead wood are coloured so as to resemble lichen-stained 
bark ; but one species (Desmiphora fasciculata) resembles a brown 
hairy caterpillar; and this he found only on leaves. 

Mr. Belt’s numerous observations on birds, as well as those on the 
few mammals he met with, are marked by the same originality and 
suggestiveness. His charming descriptions of the habits and haunts 
of humming-birds will attract many readers besides ornithologists. 
The use of the expanded white tail of the Florisuga mellivora in 
courtship (p. 112), which he fortunately had opportunities of ob- 
serving, will be a welcome fact to the partisans of the Sexual Selee- 
tion hypothesis. The volume, besides, contains abundant contribu- 
tions to the general physical geography of the country (his remarks 
on the retrocession of the frontier of the virgin forest being especi- 
ally worthy of attention) and to the ethnology of Nicaragua and 
neighbouring countries. 


PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES. 
ROYAL SOCIETY. 


June 19, 1873.—William Spottiswoode, M.A., Treasurer and Vice- 
President, in the Chair. 


“On the Structure and Development of the Skull in the Pig 
(Sus scrofa).” By W. K. Parker, F.RS. 


I haye for some years past determined to concentrate my atten- 
tion on some one type of Mammalian Skull, so as to be able to 
present to the Royal Society a paper similar to those which have 


250 Royal Society :— 


already appeared on other Vertebrate Skulls. I was led to work 
out this MEDIUM TYPE, and not a more generalized form, such as the 
Guinea-pig (see “‘On the Development of the Frog’s Skull,” Phil. 
Trans. 1871, p. 203), through the circumstance of an offer from nry 
friend Mr. Charles Stewart to put some seventy embryos of the 
Common Pig into my possession. In the present communication 1 
have had the invaluable help of advice and oversight from Pro- 
fessor Huxley; whilst the labour of my hands has been lightened 
by my son, Mr. T. J. Parker, who prepared for me all the more 
delicate sections. The embryos ranged in size from two thirds, 
or less, of an inch in length, with the head only equal in size to 
a sweet pea, whilst the head of the largest specimen was the size 
of that of the Common Squirrel. To these I have added young 
pigs at birth, and have taken as the last stage the skull of a half- 
grown individual. 

The most important results of the present investigation may be 
stated as follows :— 

1. In a pig-embryo, in which the length of the body did not 
exceed two thirds of an inch, and four postoral clefts were present, 
the cranio-facial skeleton was found to consist of :—(a) the noto- 
chord, terminating by a rounded end immediately behind the pitui- 
tary body. 

(5) On each side of the notochord, but below it, there is a cartila- 
ginous plate, which in front ends by a rounded extremity on a 
level with the apex of the notochord, while behind it widens out 
and ends at the free lower margin of the occipital foramen. These 
two plates, taken together, constitute the “investing mass” of 
Rathke. In this stage they send up no prolongations around the 
occipital foramen; in other words, the rudiment of the basioc- 
cipital exists, but not of the exoccipital or superoccipital. 

(c) The large oval auditory capsules lie on each side of the 
anterior half of the investing mass, with which they are but imper- 
fectly united: there is no indication of the stapes at this stage. 

(d) The trabecular or first pair of preoral visceral arches in- 
close a lyre-shaped pituitary space; they are closely applied to- 
gether in front of this space, and, coalescing, give rise to an 
azygous preenasal rostrum. ‘They are distinct from one another 
and the investing mass. 

(e) The pterygo-palatine or second pair of visceral arches lie 
in the maxillo-palatine processes, and are therefore subocular in 
position. Hach is a sigmoid bar of nascent cartilage, the incurved 
anterior end of which lies behind the internal nasal aperture, while 
the posterior extremity is curved outwards about the level of the 
angle of the mouth. The pterygo-palatine cartilages are perfectly free 
and distinct from the first preeoral and from the first postoral arch. 

(f) The mandibular or first pair of postoral visceral arches are 
stout continuous rods of cartilage which lie in the first visceral 
arch behind the mouth. The ventral or distal ends of these arches 
are not yet in contact; the dorsal or proximal end of each is 
somewhat pointed and sharply incurved, pushing inwards the 


Mr. W. K. Parker on the Skull of the Pig. 251 


membrane which closes the first visceral cleft and is the rudiment 
of the membrana tympani. 

(g) The hyoid or second pair of postoral arches are in this 
stage extremely similar to the first pair, with which they are 
parallel. They are stout sigmoid rods of cartilage, which are sepa- 
rated at their distal ends, present an incurved process at their 
opposite extremities, and are not segmented. 

(h) The thyro-hyal or third postoral arches, which correspond 
with the first branchial of the branchiate vertebrata, are repre- 
sented by two short cartilaginous rods which lie on each side of 
the larynx. 

(i) The olfactory sacs are surrounded by a cartilaginous capsule, 
which has coalesced below with the trabecula of its side; while, 
within, the mucous membrane lining the capsule presents eleva- 
tions which indicate the position of the future turbinal outgrowth 
of the capsule. 

In this stage the posterior nares are situated at the anterior 
part of the oral cavity, as in the Amphibia, and the roof of the 
mouth is formed by the floor of the skull, the palatal plate of the 
maxille and palatine bones being foreshadowed by mere folds. The 
outer end of the cleft between the first and second preoral arches 
is the rudiment of the lachrymal duct, while its inner end is the 
hinder nasal aperture. The gape of the mouth is the cleft be- 
tween the second proral and first postoral arch. The auditory 
passage, representing the Eustachian tube, tympanum, and ex- 
ternal auditory meatus, is the cleft between the first and second 
postoral arches. The proximal end of the mandibular arch, there- 
fore, lies in the front wall, and the hyoid in the hinder wall of 
the auditory passage. 

2. In an embryo pig, an inch in length, (a) the notochord is 
still visible ; (4) the investing mass, the halves of which are com- 
pletely confluent, has become thoroughly chondrified, and is con- 
tinued upwards at each side of the occipital foramen to form an 
arch over it. 

*(c) The auditory capsules are still distinct from the investing 
mass, and a plug on the outer cartilaginous wall of each has be- 
come marked off as the stapes. 

(d) The hinder ends of the trabecular arches have coalesced in 
front of the pituitary body, but they are not yet confluent with the 
investing mass. 

(e) The pterygo-palatine rods have increased in size ; they have 
not become hyaline cartilage, but are beginning to ossify in their 
centre. 

(f) In the mandibular arch the proximal end has become some- 
what bulbous, and is recognizable as the head of the malleus, 
whilst the incurved process, still more prominent than before, is 
the manubrium mallet. The rest of the arch is Meckel’s cartilage ; 
outside this a mass of tissue appears, which is converted into car- 
tilage, rapidly ossifies, and eventually becomes the ramus of the 
mandible. 


252 Royal Society :— 


(g) The proximal end of the hyoidean arch, similarly enlarging 
and articulating with the corresponding part of the mandibular 
arch, becomes the incus, the incurved process attaching itself to 
the outer surface of the stapes and becoming the long process of 
the incus. The incus, thus formed out of the proximal end of the 
hyoidean arch, becomes separated from the rest of the arch by con- 
version of part of the arch into fibrous tissue, and by the moving 
downwards and backwards of the proper hyoid portion of the arch. 
A nodule of cartilage left in the fibrous connecting band becomes a 
styliform interhyal cartilage, while the proximal end of the detached 
arch becomes the stylo-hyal. 

(h) The thyro-hyals have merely increased in size and density ; 
they closely embrace the larynx by their upper ends. 

(¢) The olfactory capsules are well chondrified ; their descending 
inner edges have coalesced with each other and, below, with the 
trabecule to form the great median septum: the turbinal out- 
growths are apparent. 

In this stage, the alisphenoids and orbito-sphenoids appear as 
chondrifications of the walls of the skull, quite separate from the 
investing mass and from the trabecule. 

The floor of the pituitary space chondrifies independently of the 
trabecule and investing mass, but serves to unite these four cartila- 
ginous tracts. 

3. In an embryo pig, 14 inch in length, (a, 6, ¢) the primordial 
cranium is completely constituted as a cartilaginous whole, formed 
by the coalescence of the investing mass and its exoccipital and 
superoccipital prolongations, the modified trabeculae, the subpitui- 
tary cartilage, the auditory capsules, and alisphenoidal and orbito- 
sphenoidal cartilages, and the olfactory capsules. The notochord is 
yet to be seen extending in the middle line from the hinder wall of 
the pituitary fossa (now the “ dorsum selle”) to the posterior edge 
of the occipital region. 

(d) The trabecular arches form the sides of the sella turcica, 
the presphenoid, and the base of the septum between the olfactory 
capsules ; in front, where they form the azygous “ preenasal,” they 
are developed backwards as “ recurrent bands,” elongations of their 
free recurved “ cornua.” 

(e) The pterygo-palatine arches, still increasing in size, but not 
chondrifying, are rapidly ossifying; they are half-coiled lamin 
bounding the posterior nasal passages. 

(f) The mandibular arch and the rudimental ramus have become 
solid cartilage, and the latter is ossifying as the dentary; the 
distal part of each mandibular rod unites with its fellow for some 
distance. 

(g) The hyoid arches are each fully segmented as incus, with 
its *‘ orbicular” head, interhyal, stylo-hyal, and cerato-hyal. 

(h) The thyro-hyals are merely larger and denser. 

(7) The olfactory capsules have the turbinal outgrowths all 
marked out as alinasal, nasal, and upper, middle, and lower tur- 
binals. - 


Mr. W. K. Parker on the Skull of the Pig. 253 


4. In pigs of larger size the form and proportions of the parts 
of the cranium become greatly altered, and ossification takes place 
on an extensive scale, but no new structure is added. 

5. It follows from these facts that the mammalian skull, in an 
early embryonic condition, is strictly comparable with that of an 
Osseous Fish, a Frog, or a Bird at a like period of development, 
consisting as it does of 

(a) A cartilaginous basicranial plate embracing the notochord, 
and, like it, stopping behind the pituitary body. 

(6) Paired cartilaginous arches, of which two are preoral, while 
the rest are postoral. 

(c) A pair of cartilaginous auditory capsules. 

(¢) A pair of cartilaginous nasal capusles. 

Further, that in the Mammal, as in the other Vertebrata the deve- 
lopment of the skull of which has been examined, the basicranial 
plate grows up as an arch over the occipital region of the skull, 
and coalesces with the auditory capsules, laterally, to give rise to 
the primordial skeleton of the occipital, periotic, and basisphenoidal 
regions of the skull. The trabecule become fused together, and, 
uniting with the olfactory capsules, give rise to the presphenoidal 
and ethmoidal parts of the cranium; and the moieties of the 
skull thus resulting from the metamorphosis of totally different 
morphological elements become united and give rise to the pri- 
mordial cranium. 

As in the Salmon and Fowl, the second pair of preoral arches 
give rise to the pterygo-palatine apparatus; in the Frog this arch 
is late in appearance, and is never distinct from the trabecular 
and mandibular bars, serving as a conjugational band between them. 
The mandibular arch, which in the Salmon becomes converted into 
Meckel’s cartilage, the os articulare, the os quadratum, and the 
os metapterygoideum, in the Frog into Meckel’s cartilage and the 
quadrate cartilage (which early becomes confluent with the periotic 
capsule), in the Bird into Meckel’s cartilage, the os articulare, and 
the os quadratum (which articulates movably with the periotic cap- 
sule), in the Pig is metamorphosed into Meckel’s cartilage and the 
malleus, which is loosely connected with the tegmen tympani, an 
outgrowth of the periotic capsule. 

Meckel’s cartilage persists in the Fish and in the Amphibia, but 
disappears early in the Bird, and still earlierin the Mammal. The 
permanent ossifications of the mandible are all membrane-bones in 
Fish, Frog, and Fowl, but in the Mammal (exceptionally) the 
ramus has a cartilaginous foundation. The hyoidean becomes 
closely united with the mandibular arch, and then segmented, in 
the Fish, into the hyo-mandibular, the stylo-hyal, cerato-hyal, and. 
hypohyal—the hyo-mandibular, or proximal segment, articulating 
with the outer wall of the periotic, and many of the segments of 
the arch becoming dislocated. 

In the Frog, the hyoid also becomes segmented, but only after 
extensive coalescence with the mandibular arch. The proximal 
segment becomes the suprastapedial (hyo-mandibular) with its ex- 


Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 18 


254 Royal Society. 


trastapedial process, and, extending inwards as mediostapedial and 
interstapedial, articulates with the stapes, developed by segmen- 
tation from the outer wall of the auditory capsule. The stylo-hyal 
is dislocated and becomes connected with the auditory capsule 
below the stapes (opisthotie region). 

In the Bird, the hyoidean arch remains distinct from the man- 
dibular. Whilst in its primordial condition it coalesces by its 
incurved apex with the auditory capsule in front of the promon- 
tory, before the stapedial plug is segmented. It then chondrifies 
as three distinct cartilages—an incudal, a stylo-hyal, and, distally, 
a cerato-hyal. The stapes becomes free from the auditory capsule, 
but remains united with the cartilaginous part of the incus (medio- 
stapedial); the ascending part is largely fibrous (suprastapedial), 
and the part loosely attached to the mandibular arch is the elon- 
gated extrastapedial. The short stylo-hyal afterwards coalesces 
with the body of the upper or incudal segment by an after- 
growth of cartilage (the interhyal tract) ; a long membranous space 
intervenes between it and the glossal piece (cerato-hyal.) Thus 
the “columella” of the Bird is formed of one periotic and three 
hyoidean segments. 

In the Pig, the hyoidean arch is distinct, but articulates closely 
with the mandibular; its upper segment (hyo-mandibular) is con- 
verted into the incus, and becomes connected with the stapes. The 
stylo-hyal is dislocated and coalesces with the opisthotic region of 
the auditory capsule. 


December 18, 1873.—Joseph Dalton Hooker, C.B., President, in 
the Chair. 


“On the Nervous System of Actinia.”—Part I. By Professor P. 
Martin Duncan, M.B. Lond., F.R.S., &e. 


After noticing the investigations of previous anatomists in 
the histology of the chromatophores, the work of Schneider and 
Rotteken on these supposed organs of special sense is examined 
and criticised. 

Agreeing with Rotteken in his description, some further in- 
formation is given respecting the nature of the bacillary layer and 
the minute anatomy of the elongated cells called “cones” by that 
author. ‘The position and nature of the pigment-cells is pointed 
out, and also the peculiarities of the tissues they environ. It is 
shown that the large refractile cells, which, according to Rét- 
teken, are situated between the bacilli and the cones, are not 
‘invariably in that position, but that bacilli, cones, and cells are 
often found separate. They are parts of the ectothelium, and 
when conjoined enable light to affect the nervous system more 
readily than when they are separate. Further information is 
given respecting the fusiform nerve-cells and small fibres noticed 
by Rotteken in the tissue beneath the cones ; and the discovery of 
united ganglion-like cells and a diffused plexiform arrangement 


Miscellaneous. 255 


of nerve is asserted. The probability of a continuous plexus 
round the Actinia and beneath each chromatophore is suggested, 
and the physiological action of the structures in relation to light 
is explained. 

The minute structure of the muscular fibres and their attached 
fibrous tissue in the base of Actinia is noticed; and the nervous 
system in that region is asserted to consist of a plexus beneath 
the endothelium, in which are fusiform cells and fibres like sym- 
pathetic nerve-fibrils. Moreover, between the muscular layers 
there is a continuation of this plexus, whose ultimate fibrils pass 
obliquely over the muscular fibres, and either dip between or are 
lost on them. 

The other parts of the Actinia are under the examination 
of the author, but their details are not sufficiently advanced 
for publication. The nervous system, so far as it is examined, 
consists of isolated fusiform cells with small ends (Rétteken), 
and of fusiform and spherical cells which communicate with each 
other and with a diffused plexus. The plexus at the base is 
areolar; and its ultimate fibres are swollen here and there, the 


whole being of a pale grey colour. 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


Occurrence of Gigantic Cuttlefishes on the Coast of Newfoundland. 
By A. E. VreRRILt. 


ConsIDERABLE popular interest has been excited by several articles 
that have recently been published and extensively circulated in the 
newspapers of Canada and the United States, in regard to the ap- 
pearance of gigantic “ squids ” on the Newfoundland coast. Having 
been so fortunate as to obtain, through the kindness of Professor 
8. F. Baird, the jaws and other parts of two of these creatures, and, 
through the courtesy of Dr. J. W. Dawson, photographs of portions 
of two other specimens, I have thought it worth while to bring 
together, at this time, the main facts respecting the several speci- 
mens that have been seen or captured recently, so far as I have 
been able to collate them, reserving for a future article the full de- 
scriptions and figures of the jaws and other portions now in my 
possession. 

We now have reliable information concerning five different ex- 
amples of these monsters that have appeared within a short period 
at Newfoundland. 

1. A specimen found floating at the surface, at the Grand Banks, 
in October 1871, by Captain Campbell, of the schooner ‘ B. D. Haskins,’ 
of Gloucester, Mass. It was taken on board, and part of it used for 
bait. Dr. A. 8. Packard has given, in the ‘ American Naturalist,’ 


18% 


256 Miscellaneous. 


vol. vii. p. 91, Feb. 1873, all the facts that have been published in 
regard to this individual. But its jaws have since been sent to the 
Smithsonian Institution, and are now in my hands to be described 
and figured. They were thought by Professor Steenstrup, who saw 
a photograph of them, to belong to his Architeuthis monachus, which 
inhabits the northern coasts of Europe, but is still very imperfectly 
known. The horny jaw or beak from this specimen is thick and 
strong, nearly black; it is acute at the apex, with a decided notch 
or angle on the inside, about ‘75 of an inch from the point; and 
beyond the notch is a large prominent angular lobe. The body of 
the specimen from which this jaw was taken is stated to have 
measured 15 feet in length and 4 feet 8 inches in circumference. 
The arms were mutilated ; but the portions remaining were estimated 
to be 9 or 10 feet long, and 22 inches in circumference, two being 
shorter than the rest. It was estimated to weigh 2000 pounds. 

2. A large individual attacked two men, who were in a small 
boat, in Conception Bay ; and two of the arms which it threw across 
the boat were cut off with a hatchet and brought ashore. Full ac- 
counts of this adventure, written by Mr. M. Harvey, have been 
published in many of the newspapers*. One of the severed arms, 
or a part of it, was preserved in the museum at St. John’s; and a pho- 
tograph of it isnow before me. ‘This fragment represents the distal 
half of one of the long tentacular arms, with its expanded terminal 
portion covered with suckers, 24 of which are larger, in two rows, 
with the border not serrate, but 1-25 inch in diameter; the others 
are smaller, very numerous, with the edge supported by a serrated 
calcareous ring. The part of the arm preserved measured 19 feet in 
length, and 3°5 inches in circumference, but wider, “like an oar,” 
and 6 inches in circumference, near the end where the suckers are 
situated ; but its length, when entire, was estimated at 42 feet. 
The other arm was destroyed, and no description was made; but it 
was said to have been 6 feet long and 10 inches in diameter ; it was 
evidently one of the eight shorter sessile arms. The estimate given 
for the length of the ‘‘ body” of this creature (60 feet) was probably 
intended for the entire length, including the arms. 

3. A specimen was found alive in shallow water, at Coomb’s 
Cove, and captured. Concerning this one I have seen only news- 
paper accounts. It isstated that its body measured 10 feet in length 
and was ‘nearly as large round as a hogshead” (10 to 12 feet) ; 
its two long arms (of which only one remained) were 42 feet in 
length and “as large as a man’s wrist ;” its short arms were 6 feet 
in length, but about 9 inches in diameter, “ very stout and strong ;” 
the suckers had a serrated edge. The colour was reddish. The loss 
of one long arm and the correspondence of the other in size to the 
one amputated from No. 2, justifies a suspicion that this was actually 


* Also in the ‘Annals and Magazine of Natural History,’ January 1874, 
with a woodcut of the arm. 

+ Doubtless these long arms are very contractile and changeable in 
length, like those of the ordinary squids. 


Miscellaneous. 257 


the same individual that attacked the boat. But if not, it was pro- 
bably one of the same species and of about the same size. 

4, A pair of jaws and two of the suckers were recently forwarded 
to me from the Smithsonian Institution. These were received from 
Rey. A. Munn, who writes that they were taken from a specimen 
that came ashore at Bonavista Bay, that it measured 32 feet in 
length (probably the entire length, including more or less of the 
arms), and about 6 feet in circumference. This jaw is large and 
broad, but much thinner than that of No. 1, and without the deep 
notch and angular lobe seen in that specimen. It probably belongs 
to the Architeuthis dux of Steenstrup, or at least to the same species 
as the jaw figured by Dr. Packard. 

5. A smaller specimen, captured in December, in Logic Bay, about 
3 miles from St. John’s, in herring-nets. Of this I have a description 
in a letter to Dr. Dawson from the Rev. M. Harvey, who has also 
’ published a brief account of it in the ‘ Morning Chronicle’ of 
St. John’s. The letter is accompanied by two photographs of the 
specimen—one showing the entire body, somewhat mutilated ante- 
riorly, the other showing the head with the ten arms attached. 
The body of this specimen was over 7 feet long, and between 5 and 
6 feet in circumference; the caudal fin was 22 inches broad, but 
short, thick, and emarginate posteriorly on each side, the end of the 
body being acute; the two long tentacular arms were 24 feet in 
length, and 25 inches in circumference, except at the broader part 
near the end, the tips slender and acute; the largest suckers 1-25 
inch in diameter, with serrated edges; the eight short arms were 
each 6 feet long; the two largest were 10 inches in circumference 
at base, the others were 9,8, and 7 inches. These short arms 
taper to slender acute tips; and each bears about 100 large, bell- 
shaped suckers with serrated margins. Each of the long arms 
bears about 160 suckers on the broad terminal portion, all of which 
are denticulated ; the largest ones, which form two regular alter- 
nating rows of twelve each, are about an inch in diameter. There 
is also an outer row of much smaller suckers, alternating with the 
large ones, on each margin; the terminal part of these arms is 
thickly covered with small suckers; and numerous similar small 
suckers are crowded on that portion of the arms where the enlarge- 
ment begins, before the commencement of the rows of large suckers. 
The arrangement of the suckers is nearly the same as on the long 
arm of No. 2; but in the latter the terminal portion of the arm, be- 
yond the large suckers, as shown in the photographs, is not so long, 
tapering, and acute; but this may be due to the different conditions 
of the two specimens. It is probable that this was a young speci- 
men of the same species as No. 2. 

From the facts known at present, it appears probable that all 
these specimens, and several others that have been reported at va- 
rious times from the same region, are referable to}two species—one 
(probably Architeuthis monachus) represented only by the first of 
those enumerated above, and having a more elongated form of body 
and stouter jaws; the second (probably A. dux) represented by 


258 Miscellaneous. 


Nos. 2 to 5, above described, having a short, thick, massive body, 
and broad, but comparatively thin jaws, which are also different in 
form. Some of the differences in size and proportions, and in the 
suckers, observed among the four specimens referred to the latter 
species may be due to sex ; for the sexes differ considerably in these 
characters in all known cuttlefishes.— American Journal of Science 
and Arts, Feb. 1874. 


Umbellula from Greenland. By Josuva Linpant. 


Mr. Lindahl has written a paper on the two specimens of Umbel- 
lula taken on the coast of Greenland. It will appear in the next 
volume of the ‘ Kongl. Vetenskaps-Akad. Handlingar’ of Stockholm, 
illustrated with three quarto plates, each containing several figures. 

Mr. Lindahl considers the two specimens different from one 
another and from the Umbellula encrinus of Linneeus figured by 
Mylius and Ellis. He observes he must confess that the difference 
may depend upon the difference of age, and as for U. encrinus upon 
imperfection in the figure and description. At all events, he thinks 
it better to describe his two specimens as two different and new 
species in order to call attention to the differences, observing “ that 
when new investigations of the deep sea have brought together richer 
materials, as no doubt they will, if I have committed a mistake in 
this respect it will be easily corrected.” He considers that Umbel- 
luda and Crinillum form one group, as Dr. Gray has pointed out. 
He regards them as true Pennatulids, and puts them among the 
“Zunft” Pennatulide as the fifth family, Umbellule, close to the 
family Bathyptilee (Kolliker, ‘Die Pennatuliden,’ p. 380). The 
rachis, or pars polypifera, is about one fortieth of the length of the 
stem ; polypes not retractile, without calycles, the lateral ones large 
and the dorsal small; the zooids are crowded in lateral and ventral 
shields (“‘ Wilste,” Koll.) ; the axis square, with one deep groove on 
each side; uo spicula in any part of body. 


On the Bos pumilus of Sir Victor Brooke. 
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. 


Sir Victor Brooke’s paper in the last number of the ‘Annals’ shows 
that he does not understand the question between us, and it contains 


many erroneous statements. I will therefore state the question as - 


shortly as I can. 

Sir Victor Brooke states at p. 159 :—‘ Turton, having founded 
the name Bos pumilus upon Pennant’s ‘ Dwarf,’ it follows that the 
horns spoken of and figured by Pennant are typical specimens of 
‘Bos pumilus.’”” The statement that the fragment of the forehead 
and horns are typical of Pennant’s “ Dwarf,” and therefore of the 
B. pumilus of Turton, who never refers to the specimen, is entirely 
inaccurate, as the following statement will prove. 

Columna figured a buffalo from Morocco. Pennant and Turton 
abbreviated his description and called it the dwarf buffalo and Bos 


ee eee 


Miscellaneous. 259 


pumilus, thus making it the type of their species. The forehead and 
horns of a young ox were in the Museum of the Royal Society. 
Pennant thought that they belonged to his dwarf buffalo, but in his 
second edition said that he now found that they belonged to the 
Cape ox. Turton, in his account of Bos pumilus, made no reference 
to these horns, which Sir Victor Brooke says (but I do not think 
he has proved it) are the horns of a young Bos brachyceros of Western 
Africa, and proposes to change the name of this ox to Bos pumilus 
of Turton, established on an animal from Morocco, and not, as Sir 
Victor Brooke asserts in his paper, on the forehead and horns in the 
Museum of the Royal Society, the existence of which Turton does 
not notice. The animal from Morocco he named B. pumilus is 
supposed to be a young or dwarf variety of the common buffalo, and 
is certainly not the West-African bush-ox (Bos brachyceros). 

If Sir Victor Brooke cannot see the mistake he has made, I have 
done my best to enable him to doso; andit is this non-appreciation 
of such questions that renders his prolix synonymy in various 
cases useless and misleading. 


On Felis colocolo, Hamilton Smith, F. Cuvier, and Geoffroy. 
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. 


Major Hamilton Smith made a figure of an animal “ said to have 
been shot in the interior of Guiana by an officer of Lewenstein’s 
Riflemen, and by him stuffed and sent to England, but which probably 
never reached its destination.” It is represented as a white cat, with 
various-sized longitudinal brown dashes on its neck and body, with 
slate-coloured legs and feet, and a slender black tail with numerous 
white rings. 

Of this drawing an account was published in Griffith’s ‘ Animal 
Kingdom,’ in Geoffroy and Cuvier’s ‘ Histoire Naturelle des Mammi- 
féres’ (where the animal is said to come from Surinam), and in 
Jardine’s ‘ Naturalist’s Library,’ iil. p. 256, pl. xxvi., where the legs 
are erroneously left pale-coloured, though said to be blackish in the 
description. 

I have never seen this cat, and I am not aware of its ever haying 
been seen or of its being in any museum in Europe. It certainly 
is not the Felis colocolo of Molina, from Chil, figured by Philippi, 
Wiegmann’s ‘Archiv,’ 1870, p. 41, t. 1. fig. 7, and t. i. figs. 1 & 2. 

My late friend and teacher, Colonel Hamilton Smith, drew animals 
most beautifully and with great facility, and made a very large col- 
lection of sketches and drawings of them and of antiquities and 
costumes, which he collected from museums that he visited, and 
books, and even ‘fragments of skins. Unfortunately, instead of 
drawing the specimen or the figure of the animal which he examined 
as it was, he had the habit of improving its attitude, and even 
of making a beautiful drawing from a bad specimen, or from a 
fragment of a skin, or from a rough sketch, or from a woodcut or 
other figure which he found in some old book; and he very often 
did not mark his drawings whence or how they were obtained ; so 


260 Miscellaneous. 


that it was difficult to tell their anthority. He seldom finished or 
coloured his sketches at the time he made them, but would mark 
on the parts of the drawing with the colour that they ought to be 
(as “red,” “white,” “ black”) without indicating the shade. This 
explains why the figures which are taken from his sketches in the 
first volume of Jardine’s ‘ Naturalist’s Library ’ (1842) were so erro- 
neously coloured, and makes the determination of some of his figures 
doubtful. It was this defect that rendered his beautiful and exten- 
sive series of sketches of so little value to the zoological student. 


On some Remarkable Egq-sacs on an Annelid from the North Sea. 
By Prof. Karu Mostrvs. 


Several specimens of Scolecolepis cirrata, Sars, were captured in 
the expedition of the ‘ Pommerania’ on the 6th August, 1872, at a 
depth of 69 fathoms, to the north-east of Scotland. This worm 
belongs to the family Spioidei. The body-segments are 2-4 millims. 
broad and 4 millims. deep; they have on each side a foot composed of 
a large upper and a smaller lower lamina. On the 28 segments of 
the fore body linguliform branchiz with long vibratile cilia are placed 
at the inner border of the upper foot-lamine. The hinder segments 
have no branchiz. All the segments bear long pointed sete both on the 
upper andlower foot-plates; on the lower lamin of the hinder segments 
there arealso uncini; and below and between themsomesmall pouches, 
having the form of a swallow’s nest, are attached. Many of these 
pouches contain a round mass of eggs, which often projects far beyond 
the orifice of the pouch. The eggs protruding from the pouches are 
held together by a net with quadrangular meshes, formed of cords of 
extremely fine threads. Before the pouches are filled with eggs this 
net lies in part like a lining within its pouch, and in part on the skin 
of the worm between the foot-laminz. As the latter contain many 
mucus-glands with fine orifices opening externally, we may assume 
that these glands form the net. The eggs are produced in the body- 
cavity of the worm, and issue through apertures which traverse the 
body-wall between the lower foot-lamine ; they then lift the ready 
prepared net from the skin, and are retained by it upon the body of 
the worm. The young animals which are developed from the eggs 
can slip out into the water through the meshes of the net. 

We know of many Polychzetous Annelids which bear their eggs 
and young in a sac attached to the ventral surface (e. g. Autolytus 
prolifer, Miill.), one which carries them on the shorter dorsal fila- 
ments of its feet (Syllis pulligera, Krohn), and one which conceals 
them beneath folds of skin, developed on the peduncle of the oper- 
culum with which it closes its tube (Spzrorbis spirillum, Pagenst.) ; 
but the peculiar arrangement for the protection of the progeny seen 
in Scolecolepis cirrata was previously unknown.—WSchriften des 
naturwiss. Vereins fir Schleswig-Holstein, Band i., February 2, 
1874. 


THE ANNALS 


AND 


MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. 


[FOURTH SERIES. } 


No. 76. APRIL 1874. 


XXXIV.—On the Annelida of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, 
Canada. By W. C. M‘Intosu. 


Family 1. EupHROSYNID&, #0 Family 6. SIGALIONIDA. 
[Plates IX. & X.] 


THE following remarks are due to collections made by Mr. J. 
F. Whiteaves of Montreal during three dredging-expeditions 
(1871, 1872*, and 1873) in the Gulf of St. Lawrence; and I 
am much indebted to him for his courtesy in forwarding the 
specimens for examination. 

No example of the first two families, viz. the Euphrosynide 
and Amphinomide, occurs. The Aphroditide are represented 
by several young examples of Aphrodita aculeata, L., which 
are of a somewhat ferruginous hue, like some Zetlandic spe- 
eimens. The ventral bristles of these young forms resemble 
those of A. alta, Kinberg. One or two examples of Letmonice 
filicornis, Kbg., a species very abundant in certain parts of the 
British seas, are also present. The Polynoide are more 
numerous, and the majority of comparatively large size. 
Lepidonotus squamatus, L., is abundant; and the same may 


* Vide Ann. Nat. Hist. 4th ser. vol. x. p. 341, 1872. Also ‘ Report on 
a second Deep-sea Dredging,’ &c., by J. F. Whiteaves, Montreal, 14th 
January, 1873, pp. 22. 

+ Prof. Verrill mentions “ Hermione hystrix (?)’’ from the coast of New 
Ragland, but notthis form. Americ. Journ. Sci. & Arts, vol. v. Feb, 1878. 

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xii. 19 


262 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the Annelida 


be said of Nychia cirrosa, Pall. The specimens of the latter 
have somewhat rougher scales, and a tendency to a longer and 
more slender tip in the ventral bristles than the British forms. 
The latter feature is carried to a characteristic degree in Nychia 
Amondseni, Mgrn., a northern species (not yet discovered in 
British waters) rather plentiful in the collections. In this 
form the head differs from that of N. cérrosa chiefly in the 
smaller size of the eyes, especially the posterior pair. The 
dorsal cirri are longer; but the dorsal bristles are similar, ex- 
cept, perhaps, that the contrast between the shortest and the 
most elongated is better marked. The ventral bristles are 
much more attenuated at the tips throughout ; and the smooth 
portion, while little longer in the superior series (though, of 
course, much more slender), becomes remarkably elongated in 
the central and lower groups. A specimen of Selenium poly- 
noés, Kroyer, was attached to the ventral aspect of a foot. 


Eunoa Girstedi, Mgrn., 


occurred on Orphan Bank, and is distinguished roughly 
from the more common L. nodosa, Sars, likewise in the collec- 
tion, by the brighter brownish coloration in spirit, by the much 
rougher scales, and the greater length of the dorsal bristles. 
Malmgren’s figures are much in need of amendment, especially 
his representation of the dorsal bristles. 


Lagisca rarispina, Sars, var. occidentalis *. 

At first sight, and with an imperfect specimen without 
scales, the form was considered closely allied to Polynoé floc- 
cosa, Say. ; but further examination of more perfect examples 
showed the true character of the annelid. ‘The scales are 
distinguished by the remarkably long, brownish, soft papille 
posteriorly, and have many parasitic Lowosome and other 
structures. The cilia on the dorsal cirri are much less nume- 
rous and shorter than on the species from the ‘ Porcupine’ 
(Lagisca Jeffreysii) ; and the ventral cirri have a few short 
papille: the latter are stated by Malmgren to be subglabrous. 
The dorsal bristles (Pl. IX. fig. 1) are rather long, tapered 
towards the point, and with somewhat fine rows of spikes. 
The smooth part at the tip is of moderate length ; but it often 
seems longer than it really is, since the rows of spikes pass 
far up; in certain views it is also slightly dilated, so as to 
give a character to the bristles. The superior ventral bristles 


* The generic names in this paper are merely provisional, as very con- 
siderable changes will be necessary throughout the whole series of the 
Annelida in this respect. 


of the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 263 


(Pl. IX. fig. 2) have elongated tips with a trace of a secon- 
dary process ; and the spiniferous region is long. The smooth 
tip becomes more boldly marked inferiorly (PI. LX. fig. 3) ; 
but the secondary process is always a mere rudiment, except, 
perhaps, in some of the young bristles inferiorly, or in those 
specially protected (e.g. Pl. LX. fig. 4). The general cha- 
racters of the form agree with LZ. rarispina; but the bristles 
differ considerably from Malmgren’s representations. ‘The 
young forms do not show the cilia on the ventral cirri—an 
absence which may have been due ocgasionally to position ; 
but the want of the characteristic elongated processes on the 
scales of such is peculiar. 


Malmgrenia Whiteavesii *, n. sp. 


A single small specimen about } inch long occurred between 
Anticosti and the Gaspé peninsula in 110 to 221 fathoms. 
The segments are about twenty in number, and the feet deeply 
eut; scales absent. The head is apparently eyeless. Antenne, 
palpi, and cirri smooth and much tapered. The dorsal cirri 
do not extend beyond the tips of the bristles ; the ventral reach 
the bases of the latter. The dorsal branch of the foot bears a 
series of rather slender, elongated, translucent bristles with 
fine serrations and a characteristic tip (Pl. IX. fig. 5); a few 
next the body are short and more boldly serrated. ‘The vén- 
tral form two sets,—a superior and larger group of delicate 
elongated bristles with tapering tips, minutely bifid at the 
extremity (Pl. IX. fig. 6); the tips gradually diminish to- 
wards the inferior border of the series, the whole, however, 
being bifid. At the ventral edge another, small group of 
stouter bristles exists, the number being variable, generally 
from six to eight: the enlarged tips of these are serrated for 
the lower half; then the smooth tip diminishes to a hooked 
point (Pl. IX. fig. 7). 


Antinoé Sarsi, Kinb. 


This species is not uncommon in the gulf. The scales have 
cilia on their posterior and outer borders, and small conical 
spines. The much elongated and tapered dorsal cirri have 
rather short clavate papilla continued almost to the tip of the 
organ. The ventral cirrus has shorter cilia of a similar shape. 
The dorsal bristles are distinctly curved, and have somewhat 
wide and prominent rows of spines, so that in some positions 
the more slender forms resemble stems of the common gut- 
setum. The superior ventral series of bristles have capillary 


* The genus is a new one lately formed for certain British species. 
The specific name is explained in the first paragraph of the paper. 
19* 


264 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the Annelida 


tips of extreme delicacy; a few in the centre of the foot are 
stouter, while the shorter ventral forms have again a capillary 
termination. <A parasitic Loxosoma occurs on the bristles. 


Eupolynoé occidentalis, n. sp. 


A fragment of the anterior end was procured in 110 fathoms 
between Cape Rosier and Cape Gaspé, so that only an im- 
perfect description is at present attainable. It is a large form, 
with comparatively short feet and slender bristles. 

The head is dull purplish, two eyes being placed at the 
posterior and outer part, and two larger in front on the lateral 
prominence. ‘Tentacle absent ; antenne slender, subulate, and 
furnished with clavate papille. Palpi brownish, with minute 
though rather elongated papille. Tentacular cirri tapered, 
with numerous large clavate papille. A single dorsal cirrus 
only was found loose on the dorsum; it was filiform, gently 
tapered from the base to the point at which the more rapid nar- 
rowing of the tip occurs. ‘The base is covered with a dense 
series of long papillee, which exceed the diameter of the organ ; 
they are shorter towards the tip. The long papille are re- 
markably slender, uniformly cylindrical, with a slightly bulb- 
ous tip. The ventral cirrus tapers from base to apex, and is 
nearly smooth; a few short papille, however, are visible in 
some. ‘The ventral papilla is well marked and nearly 
cylindrical. 

The dorsal bristles are rather small, not much tapered to- 
wards the tip, which is somewhat blunt and peculiarly curved 
(Pl. [X. fig. 8, one of the longer forms). The rows of spikes 
continue nearly to the tip. One of the stouter forms is given 
in fig. 9. 

The ventral bristles are brownish rather than yellow, and 
are grouped in three series. ‘The upper are rather slender, 
have elongated, tapered, spinous tips, which terminate in a 
slender fork, a modification of the normal structure (PI. IX. 
fic. 10). Some have the fork even more slender and elongated 
than represented in the figure; others, again, have a shorter 
and stouter fork (Pl. IX. fig. 11). The next series have 
shorter tips and somewhat stouter shafts, the tips generally 
being evidently bifid (Plate IX. fig. 12). The latter repre- 
sents an average example, some having a more elongated, 
others a shorter and less distinct fork. The inferior series, 
again (fig. 13), all have stout shafts and simple tips, the 
curves of these and their general contour showing progressive 
changes from series to series. This and the next approach 
the Lepidasthenia elegans of Grube from the Mediterranean. 


of the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 265 


Eupolynoé anticostiensts, n. sp. 


Dredged rather abundantly in various parts of the Gulf of 
St. Lawrence in 1873. Distinguished under the naked eye 
by the somewhat elongated and flattened cylindrical body, 
covered with curiously mottled brownish scales with a distinct 
median spot. 

Head with two eyes situated near the posterior border, and 
two under the outer margin of the somewhat pointed anterior 
lobes, so that they are not seen from the dorsum. The tentacle 
has a filiform tip, and the tentacular and dorsal curi are fur- 
nished with rather short but very characteristic clavate papille. 
The palpi likewise terminate in a filiform tip, and have minute 
papille sparsely distributed. The ventral cirri are short, 
scarcely reaching the base of the bristles, and with a few short 
clavate papille. The tips of the dorsal cirri also scarcely reach 
the tips of the bristles. The caudal styles are somewhat 
short. 

There are fifteen pairs of scales, covering the body completely 
from head to tail; they are small in front, and increase in size 
posteriorly, the last pair being the largest as well as the most 
ovoid. From the brownish spot in the centre a curved brown- 
ish band, minutely speckled, proceeds inwards, sweeps round 
the posterior border, and terminates at the outer edge. This 
gives the dorsum of the perfect animal the characteristic ap- 
pearance formerly noted. They are nearly smooth, with the 
exception of a few short papille on the surface. 

The dorsal branch of the foot has finely tapered and boldly 
serrated bristles, somewhat like those in Nychia (Pl. X. fig. 1). 
Some shorter forms occur next the body (Pl. X. fig. 2). 
The ventral division has superiorly a group with extremely 
elongated tips, some of which, however, are minutely forked 
if careful investigation is made (Pl. X. fig. 3). The tips gra- 
dually diminish in length and increase in stoutness, the bifid 
end having a broad and rather blunt terminal hook and a well- 
marked secondary process inferiorly (Pl. X. fig. 4). 

There are considerable differences between this and the for- 
mer species ; but in the present state of the Annelida complica- 
tion in names is to be avoided. 


Nemidia (?) canadensis, n. sp. 


Body somewhat elongated, consisting of about forty-eight 
segments exclusive of head and tail. The head has four eyes, 
which hold a somewhat median position—that is, leave a con- 
siderable space in front and behind the pairs. he anterior 
pair, as usual, are larger. The palpi are smooth; tentacle and 


266 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the Annelida 


cirri short, the latter having small and sparsely distributed 
papille. The dorsal cirri do not quite reach the tip of the 
bristles, while the ventral do not extend beyond the base of 
the lowest bristles. A conspicuous row of brownish papille 
runs along the centre of the dorsum. 

The scales are small, occupying only the lateral region of 
the body, and leave seventeen segments uncovered posteriorly. 
Their number seems to be fifteen pairs ; but in none were they 
complete. They are more or less circular throughout, and 
have only a very few short papille on the posterior and outer 
edge. 

The dorsal branch of the foot bears a series of rather short 
slender translucent bristles, very finely serrated (Pl. X. fig. 5). 
The superior series of the ventral group have elongated tips ter- 
minating in a fine point (PI. X. fig. 6). The spiniferous rows 
are elevated on scale-like processes, as im certain forms de- 
scribed in the ‘ Porcupine’ collection, with the free edges 
finely pectinated. The shaft of these bristles is quite smooth, 
while the dilated terminal portion is marked by fine longitu- 
dinal lines. The foregoing are succeeded by a stouter series 
with shorter tips (Pl. X. figs. 7 & 8), with only five or six 
conspicuous rows of spines, while the tip ends in a stout 
slightly hooked point. The first of the series has a more 
slender point, and with the others distinguish the species from 
Malmgren’s N. Torelli. At the extreme ventral edge, again, 
a few slender bristles with finely tapered tips occur. 


Nemidia (?) Lawrencit, n. sp. - 


In this form the scales are tolerably large and cover the back 
entirely, except anteriorly in the region of the fourth and fifth 
pairs. ‘The segments number about 38. 

The head is elongated from before backwards, and the 
pointed anterior lobes diverge in a characteristic manner. The 
eyes are small—a pair situated near the posterior border, and 
a larger pair on the lateral region in front of the middle line. 
Tentacle somewhat slender. Palpi furnished with distinct 
clavate papille. Tentacular and dorsal cirri with short cla- 
vate papille. The short and tapering dorsal cirri scarcely 
reach the tip of the bristles. The ventral cirri seem to be 
smooth. 

The scales are somewhat ovoid, and nearly reach the poste- 
rior extremity of the animal, which has two long tapering 
caudal styles. They are almost smooth, a very few minute 
papilla only occurring at wide intervals. Their number 
appears to be about fifteen pairs. Four bristled segments 


te ds, 


of the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 267 


exist between the posterior border of the last scale and the 
tail. 
The superior branch of the foot has a series of pellucid 
bristles, somewhat stouter on the whole than in N. canadensis, 
and with bolder characters (Pl. X. fig. 9). They are finely 
serrated towards the tip, a feature which attains much more 
development in the shorter and stouter forms than in N. cana- 
densis. The superior ventral bristles have long tips with 
somewhat less prominent rows than in NV. canadensis ; and the 
end is less capillary, though it is finely pointed (Pl. X. fig. 10). 
The larger size of the bristles also in the specimens brings out 
thé smooth portion at the tip more distinctly. The tips in the 
succeeding forms are stout and sharply pointed, and the spined 
portion shorter and less prominent (Pl. X. fig. 11). The 
sabre-shaped tips of the latter are prominent features. This 
and the foregoing agree in certain respects both with Enipo 
and Nemidia, Malmgren. In regard to length of body they 
approach the latter, which, however, he describes as eyeless. 
The dorsal cirri, again, in Enzpo are smooth. In British spe- 
cimens which I have referred to the latter there are a few 
peculiarly bifid bristles besides the forms mentioned by Malm- 
gren in the ventral group. In the foregoing Canadian examples 
the tips of all the bristles are simple. 


Polynoé gaspéensis, n. sp. 

Dredged in 100 to 212 fathoms off Anticosti and in various 
parts in 1872. A long and highly characteristic form, with 
fifteen pairs of smooth scales, the first pair only touching 
each other in the median line, the others being separated by a 
considerable bare portion of the dorsum; they are translucent, 
and slightly tinged of a brownish colour in spirit towards the 
inner border. ‘The first pair are larger, and have their pigment 
more diffused though not more dense. In shape the first pair 
are ovoid ; and the rest maintain a similar outline, but gradually 
diminish in size. ‘The fifteen scales occupy thirty-one bristled 
segments, the last occurring on the thirty-first. In a large 
specimen there are thirty-seven segments behind the last 
scale, each bearing a dorsal cirrus as in the case of those in 
front without scales. 

The head is furnished with two eyes placed some distance 
in front of the posterior border, and two (as usual, somewhat 
larger and wider apart) at the anterior border. ‘Tentacle long, 
brownish, the colour being deepest just below the tapering tip, 
which is pale; a very few slender papillz occur on this organ. 
Palpi also brownish, with pale tips, densely covered with 
short clavate papilla. Antenne short, brownish, with pale 


268 Dr. W.C. M‘Intosh on the Annelida 


tapering tips, sparsely furnished with short clavate papille. 
The tentacular and dorsal cirri have similar clavate processes ; 
and the latter extend rather beyond the extremity of the 
bristles. The ventral cirri have also a few small clavate 
papille. The papilla at the inner end of the foot 1s some- 
what elongated. 

The feet are well marked, though somewhat thick and short. 
The bristles of the dorsal tuft are short (Pl. IX. figs. 14 & 15). 
The ventral series consist of one kind, with a stout shaft and 
a simple tip (Pl. X. figs. 12 & 13). There are comparatively 
few rows of spikes. The former figure is from the middle of 
the group, the latter from the superior border. The spine 
at the base of the smooth tip is well marked in the last 
mentioned. 


The family of the Accetidee has no representative ; but four 
examples of the next, the Sigalionide, occur. The first is 
Sthenelais limicola, Ehlers, a northern species having avery wide 
distribution. ‘The second is Leantra tetragona, Cirst., which 
was met with in 1872 off Cape Rosier in 110 fathoms on 
coarse sand and stones, and in 110 to 221 fathoms between 
Anticosti and the Gaspé peninsula in 1873. The form is 
distinguished by its Sigalion-like appearance ; but the bristles 
of the feet have simple tapering tips. ‘The antenneze are repre- 
sented by short processes at the side of the tentacle; and no 
eyes are visible in spirit-preparations. The scales are pellucid, 
reniform, and furnished with rather long and nearly cylindrical 
papille, the tips of some of which are obscurely bifid ; the rest 
of the margin is smooth. The superior lobe of the foot bears 
long bristles with wide rows of spikes, while the basal portion 
is smooth. A group of long papille project from the upper 
margin of the foot, and occasionally a few are obscurely bifid. 
Similar organs occur on the inferior lobe. The whole of the 
bristles of the latter have taperig filiform tips, with appa- 
rently a spiral series of markings. The shafts and tips of the 
superior ventral series are, as usual, stouter than the inferior ; 
but the diminution is not quite uniform, as a strong group 
occurs just above the most delicate ventral series. ‘The ven- 
tral cirrus is well developed, but does not quite reach the tip 
of the foot. There are three ciliated pads on the dorsal edge 
below the branchial process. Another Leanira, apparently 
differing from any yet described, though allied to L. Yhlend, 
Mern., was procured in 1875 in 210 fathoms off the S.W. 
point of Anticosti. None of the examples are complete; but 
it seems to attain a length of 2 or 3 inches. 

The head is at once distinguished from Z. levis of the ‘ Por- 


of the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 269 


cupine’ expedition (a species also having smooth scales) by 
the condition of the median tentacle, which with the other 
parts conform to the arrangement in L. tetragona. The scales 
are delicate, translucent, irregularly rounded in front, reniform 
posteriorly, and perfectly smooth round the margin. The 
dorsal bristles have, perhaps, more closely arranged rows of 
spikes than in L. levis. The inferior bristles (Pl. X. fig. 14) 
have delicately tapered tips, with faint spiral indications in- 
ternally. The latter differ, of course, according to the position 
in which they are viewed. The ventral cirrus is considerably 
longer than in L. tetragona or L. levis; and the digitate ap- 
pendages of the lobes of the feet also differ from both. Dr. 
Malmgren states that his LZ. Yhleni has distinct eyes, and 
adds that (with the exception of the smooth scales) it agrees 
with L. tetragona. His notice is so very brief that it is impos- 
sible to distinguish forms so closely related to each other. 
The fourth species of the group is the common Pholoé minuta, 
Fabr., which has a wide range. 

Several remarks on the Annelida of the neighbouring 
shores of the United States have been made. Amongst others 
Dr. Stimpson, in his ‘ Synopsis of the Fauna of Grand Manan 
in the Bay of Fundy,’ mentions Huphrosyne borealis, CErst., 
Cryptonota citrina, n. sp., Lepidonota cirrata, CErst., L. punc- 
tata, (irst., and L. scabra, Cirst. The second is probably a 
Spinther ; the next two are doubtful ; and the third is Nychia 
cirrosa, Pallas. Dr. Leidy *, again, considers L. punctata of 
the former author to be another species, which he terms Z. ar- 
madillo, Bosc; it has dilated cirri, with a black ring, but differs 
from L. clava, Mont., in having cilia on its scales. He also 
states that Sigalion mathilde, Aud. & Edw., is found on these 
shores ; but the figure of the head given (fig. 53, pl. xi.) shows 
the prominent median tentacle of a Sthenelais; so that some 
other form is meant. In his recent paper Prof. Verrill indi- 
cates “ Hermione hystrix(?)” as formerly noted, and “‘Antinoé 


Sars,” Kbg. 


EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES tf. 
PLATE EX; 


Fig. 1. Terminal portion of a dorsal bristle of Lagisca rarispina, var. occi- 
dentalis, X 210 diam. 
Fig. 2, Superior ventral bristle of the same species. X 90 diam. 


* Contrib. &c. Marine Invert. Fauna of Rhode Island, 1855. 
+ Unfortunately the details in certain of the figures deviate from the 
originals, 


270 Mr. H. W. Bates on the Geodephagous 


Fig. 3. Inferior ventral bristle. x 90 diam. 

Fig. 4. Developing bristle of the same form. X 210 diam. 

Fig. 5. Dorsal bristle of Malmgrenia Whiteavesti. x 700 diam. 

Fig. 6. Superior ventral bristle. x 700 diam. 

Fig. 7. Inferior ventral bristle in chloride of calcium. Xx 700 diam. 

Fig. 8. One of the longer dorsal bristles of Zupolynoé occidentalis, x 350 
diam. 

Fig. 9. One of the shorter dorsal bristles. x 350 diam. 

Fig. 10. Superior ventral bristle of the same species. x 350 diam. 

Fig. 11. Tip of another example. x 700 diam. 

Fig. 12. Tip of one of the next series. x 350 diam. 

Fig. 13. Tip of one of the inferior ventral bristles. x 350 diam. 

Fig. 14. Dorsal bristle of Polynoé gaspéensis. x 350 diam. 

Fig. 15. Tip of another, showing the blunt termination. X 850 diam. 


PLATE X. 
Fig. 1. Dorsal bristle of Eupolynoé anticostiensis. X 210 diam. 
Fig. 2. One of the shorter forms. x 210 diam. 
Fig. 3. Superior ventral bristle. > 210 diam. 
Fig. 4. Inferior ventral bristle. x 210 diam. 
Fig. 5. Dorsal bristle of Nemidia (?) canadensis. x 350 diam. 
Fig. 6. Superior ventral bristle. x 350 diam. 
Fxg. 7. Tip of inferior ventral bristle. x 350 diam. 
Fig. 8. One of the same seen from behind. x 360 diam. 
Fig. 9. Dorsal bristle of Nemidia (?) Lawrencit. x 350 diam. 


Fig. 10. Superior ventral bristle. 350 diam. 

Fig. 11. One of the lower ventral bristles. x 350 diam. 

Fig. 12. Ventral bristle of Polynoé gaspéensis. x 350 diam. 

Fig. 13. Tip of another, with slightly different characters. x 350 diam. 
Fig. 14. Ventral bristle of Leanira Yhleni(?). x 350 diam. 


XXXV.—On the Geodephagous Coleoptera of New Zealand. 
By H. W. Bares, F.L.S. 


{Concluded from p. 246. ] 


Family Carabide. 


Subfamily Awzrsopacrrzinz. 


'TRIPLOSARUS, nov. gen. 


Corpus breviter oblongum, subdepressum. Caput pone oculos haud 
angustatum, Mandibule edentate, basi late, apice angustate et 
curvate. Labrum medio leviter emarginatum, angulis rotundatis. 
Mentuwm medio dente forti, acuto; lobis extus valde rotundatis, 
apice intus acutis; epilobiis haud conspicuis. Ligula oblonga, 
apice libera, recte truncata; paraglossis apice sque truncatis, 
longitudine et latitudine ligule squalibus. Thorax transversim 
quadratus. Hlytra apice obtuse rotundata, paulo sinuata; striola 


Coleoptera of New Zealand. 271 


scutellaris longa, inter strias primam et secundam posita. Tibie 
setos ; anticee extus 5-spinose. 

¢. Tarsi quatuor anteriores articulis secundo ad quartum dilatatis, 
pedum anteriorum brevissimi, intermediorum longiores cordati; 
articulo quarto nullomodo lobato ; palmis ut in Anisodactylo dense 
breviter setosis, planis ; articulo primo triangulari, subtus nudo. 


This genus differs from the other Anisodactyline in the 
form of its head and mandibles, which resemble those of Phor- 
ticosomus, Cratacanthus, &c.; but the eyes are rather promi- 
nent; the suture separating the epistome from the forehead is 
very sharply impressed, and has a short deep frontal foveole 
near each end. The paraglosse are lateral, and not placed 
behind the ligula, as in other genera of the group. 


Triplosarus fulvescens, n. sp. 

7’. ochraceo-fulvus, subnitidus, capite thoraceque interdum seneo 
tinctus; thorace antice rotundato, postice modice angustato, 
angulis posticis obtusis, basi utrinque fovea lata, indistincte 
punctulata ; elytris in utroque sexu sericeis ; interstitiis planis, 
tertio postice unipunctato. Long. 4-43 lin. ¢ 9. 
ao ore alone Castelnau, Trans. R. Soc. Vict. pt. ii. vol. viii. 

p. 1945 

Castelnau’s description applies to the species as far as it 
goes, except the size (5 lines). My specimens came from 
Mr. Henry Edwards (from Auckland?) and Mr. Fereday of 
Christchurch. 

Lecanomerus latimanus, n. sp. 

L. ovatus, piceo-fuscus, modice nitidus; partibus oris, antennis, 
pedibus, elytrorumque marginibus (postice dilatatis) fulvo- 
testaceis; thorace transversim quadrato, yix postice angustato, 
angulis posticis rotundatis, supra basi levi haud foveato ; elytris 
ovatis, convexis. 

¢. Tarsi quatuor anteriores articulis secundo et tertio magnis, max- 
ime dilatatis ; secundo semicirculari ; tertio paulo breviore, haud 
angustiore; primo breyiter triangulari; quarto brevissimo, lato, 
quam tertio paulo angustiore, nullomodo lobato. 

Long. 23 lin. ¢. 

The form of this curious insect is that of an Odpterus, the 
elytra being ovate (much broader than the thorax) and convex ; 
but the broad patelliform anterior and middle tarsi of the 
male, with their even, smooth brush-soles, show that it belongs 
to the Australian genus Lecanomerus (Chaud.). It agrees in 
all other generic characters with L. ¢nsidiosus ; but the second 
tarsal joint is shorter and more semicircular, and the fourth is 
much broader. The elytra in the unique specimen are dark 
pitchy brown with fulvous lateral margins, not very well 


272 Mr. H. W. Bates on the Geodephagous 


defined, but widening much at the apex; there is no puncture 
on the third interstice, and there is a short scutellar striole 
between the first and second striz. The margins of the ventral 
segments are more or less fulvous. 

One example, from New Zealand. Obtained from the late 
Rey. Hamlet Clark’s collection. 


Hypharpax antarcticus. 

Harpalus antarcticus, Castelnau, /. e. p. 198. 

Christchurch (Mr. Fereday). 

Scarcely belongs to Hypharpax, the hind tibie of the male 
not being arcuated; in facies and in the long fine bristles on 
the innerside of the tibie, with a row of shorter spines on the 
outer side, it resembles that genus. Four joints of the four 
anterior tarsi of the male are dilated, and smooth, brush-like, 
beneath. 


Hypharpax australasie. 
Harpalus australasie, De}. Sp. Gén. iv. p. 386. 


Hypharpax australis. 
Harpalus australis, De}. 1. c. p. 385. 


Both these species are found in New Zealand, according to 
Redtenbacher. 

Although only the female in each case was described by 
Dejean, I think they belong to the genus Hypharpax. 


Subfamily Harpsriz. 


EUTHENARUS, nov. gen. 


Gen. Tachycello similis. Palpi robusti, glabri; articulo terminali 
fusiformi, versus apicem attenuato, apice leviter truncato. 
Antenne robuste; articulo undecimo multo longiore, crasso. 
Mentum parvum, emarginatione semicirculari, dente mediano pro- 
minulo acuto. Ligula cornea, oblonga, apice libera bisetosa; para- 
glossis ipsa duplo latioribus et multo longioribus, apice late 
rotundatis. 

¢. Tarsi quatuor anteriores articulis quatuor valde dilatatis : primo 
triangulari ; secundo ad quartum brevissimis et latissimis ; quarto 
bilobo ; omnibus laciniis argenteis longissimis vestitis. 

. The insects on which this distinct new genus is founded 
resemble the Bradycelli and small Stenolophi of the northern 
hemisphere, but are widely different in the clothing of the 
four dilated palms of the male. This is unlike either the 
squame arranged in pairs of the true Harpalide, or the even 
brush of short vertical hairs of the Anisodactyline, but con- 


Coleoptera of New Zealand. 273 


sists of a few very long linear hair-scales set obliquely on the 
broad palms and forming a broad fringe to the feet. The 
paraglosse also differ from those of the Harpali in being very 
broad, not tapering to the apex, but broadly rounded. The 
frontal foveee of the head form short strize curving to the inner 
margin of the eye. The thorax is quadrate. The elytra are 
obtuse at the apex, with a strong sinuation; the scutellar 
striole is rudimentary between the first and second strie ; the 
third interstice has one puncture. The males have a hairy 
fovea in the middle of the first ventral segment, like the 
Tachycelli. 


Euthenarus brevicollis, n. sp. 


E. oblongus, fusco-zeneus ; elytris subcupreis ; antennis basi, palpis 
apice, genibusque piceo-rufis; thorace postice paululum angustato, 
angulis posticis obtusis fere rotundatis, fovea utrinque lata sparsim 
punctulata ; elytris acute striatis, interstitiis planis. Long. 23 
im S92 
Lake Coleridge; under stones in dry lagoon (C. M. Wake- 

jfield, Esq.). 

Immature specimens have testaceous-yellow legs and pale 
under surface of body ; but the dark brassy colour of the head 
and thorax and cupreous elytra remain in all the numerous 
individuals sent. ‘The hind angles of the thorax are distinct 
in some examples and perfectly rounded off in others; the 
basal fovex also vary in the amount of punctuation, which is 
always rather coarse. 


Euthenarus puncticollis, n. sp. 


E. oblongus, fusco-piceus seneo tinctus vel cupreo-sneus; antennis 
basi, palpis basi et apice, pedibus (femoribus interdum exceptis) 
rufo-piceis ; thorace longiore, postice subsinuatim paulo angustato, 
angulis posticis fere rectis, fovea basali grosse punctata; elytris 
apice fortiter sinuatis, subtruncatis. Long. 23 lin. ¢g 9. 
Apparently distinct from /. brevicollis, although similar 

in size and coloration. It is decidedly slenderer, with longer 

thorax, the posterior narrowing of which is slightly incurved 
and the hind angles more distinct. The general colour is less 
metallic; and the side rims of the thorax are pale, which is 
sometimes the case with £. brevicollis. A better distinction 
is the more transverse and stronger sinuation of the apex of 
the elytra, the edges external to the sinuation being more 
flattened out; they are finely and sharply striated in the same 
manner. 

Auckland. Several examples from Mr. Lawson and Mr. 


H. Edwards. 


274 Mr. H. W. Bates on the Geodephagous 


Subfamily Trecninx. 


Oupterus rotundicollis, White, Voy. Ereb. & Terr., Ins. p. 6. 
Bay of Islands. 


Oupterus levicollis, Bates, Entom. Monthly Mag. vol. vii. 
ESL pale 


New Zealand ; precise locality unknown. 


Two other species of this genus are described from the 
Falkland Islands. 

It is very easy to confound this genus with Trepopterus, 
belonging to a quite different subfamily, the resemblance 
inegeneral form between the two being very great. 


Subfamily Bemsrpiuw2. 


Tachys antarcticus, i. sp. 


T'. oblongo-ovatus, convexus, testaceo-rufus, nitidus, palpis pedibus- 
que flavo-testaceis ; capite foveis frontalibus magnis, profundis, 
interspatio elongato, convexo : thorace subcordato, lateribus antice 
valde rotundatis, post medium sinuatim angustato, angulis posticis 
productis acutis ; supra antice convexo, postice transversim de- 
presso, utrinque foveolato, levi: elytris ovatis, humeris rotundatis 
utrinque striis 3 prope suturam, fortiter impressis, subpunctatis ; 
interstitio tertio bipunctato. Long. ? lin. 


Tn form intermediate between 7. hemorrhoidalis, Dj., and 
T. globulus, Dj. As convex as the latter, but much more 
slender, the thorax especially being narrower (much narrower 
than the elytra), more cordiform, and the elytra more ovate 
and rounded at the shoulders. The antenne are wanting in 
both my specimens. 

Auckland ? (H. Edwards, Esq.). 


Bembidium (Peryphus) maorinum, Bates, Entom. Monthly 
Mag. iv. p. 56 (1867). 


Christchurch (Mr. Fereday). 


Bembidium (Peryphus) charile, Bates, l. c. p. 79. 


Christchurch (Mr. Fereday). 

I have not again received either of the above species. They 
form a distinct section, near Peryphus, distinguished by the 
setiferous punctures of the fifth as well as the third interstice 
of the elytra. Jn form they closely resemble the European 


Coleoptera of New Zealand. 275 


B. eques; but the thorax is smaller and still more cordate 
(similar to that of the Lopha section). The frontal furrows 
are deep, and reach to the level of the hind margin of the eyes. 
The fovea of the hind angles of the thorax has no carina 
exterior to it. The anterior tarsi of the male have only the 
basal joint dilated, parallelogrammical, as in Peryphus eques. 


Bembidium rotundicolle, n. sp. 

B. nilotico similis, cupreo-zneum, nitidum ; antennis basi pedibus- 
que piceo-rufis; elytris utrinque versus apicem, ipsoque apice 
flavyo-testaceis ; thorace fortiter rotundato, basi angusta, margini- 
bus angustis, postice nullomodo explanatis, angulis posticis vix 
conspicuis, fovea parva juxta angulum levi; elytris punctato- 
striatis, extus et apice minus impressis, interstitiis paulo convexis, 
tertio bipunctato. Long. 13-2 lin. ¢. 

é. Tarsi antici articulis duobus dilatatis, apice obliquis et fortiter 
intus productis. 


Differs from the section to which B. niloticum belongs by 
the very narrow margins to the thorax, not explanated behind, 
and with obtuse hind angles ; the sides of the thorax are very 
strongly rounded, but the base is much narrower than the 
apex ; the apical angles are not at all conspicuous. 

Lake Coleridge ; under stones in a dry lagoon (C. MZ. Wake- 
field, Esq.). 


Subfamily Acrenorrcuinz. | 


Actenonyx bembidioides, White, 1. c. p. 2 (1846). 
Sphallax peryphoides, Bates, Ent. Monthly Mag. iv. p. 56 (1867). 
Christchurch (?. W. Fereday, Esq.). 

White’s description omits all the essential characters of 
this curious Carabid, and is so vague that there are no means 
of identifying it without reference to the type. I have seen a 
specimen so named in the British Museum, which quite agrees 
with Sphallax peryphoides. ‘The extraordinary form of the 
ligula, and other characters, necessitate the formation of a new 
subfamily for the imsect, which will range near the Oda- 
canthine. 


Subfamily Scoropryz. 


Scopodes fossulatus. 


Dromius (!) fossulatus, Blanch. Voy. Pole Sud, iv. p. 9, t. iii. f. 16. 
Poticiee Vreie: Redtenb. Reise Novara, Col. p. 21, t. i. f. 9. 


Blanchard’s description accords exceedingly well with a 
species apparently common at Auckland, with the exception 


276 On the Geodephagous Coleoptera of New Zealand. 


that no mention is made of the prominent eyes; this omis- 
sion, however, is supplied to some extent by his figure. 
Auckland. Both from Mr. H. Edwards and Mr. Lawson. 
A well-preserved specimen, rather larger than usual, agrees 
exactly with Redtenbacher’s description. 


Scopodes elaphroides. 
Heleotrechus elaphroides, White, l. c. p. 5, t. 1. £. 5. 


Larger than the preceding (24 lines), and differing besides 
in being “deep black,” S. fossulatus being silky eneous; the 
legs are “ yellow, with middle of femora and the tips with a 
brownish band.” 


Scopodes aterrimus, ni. sp. 

S. magis elongatus, gracilior, toto insecto sericeo-niger; thorace 
angustiore, ab angulo anteriore usque basin recte angustato, supra 
subtiliter strigoso sed nitido; elytris striis latis paulo undulatis, 
impunctatis, foveis tribus magnis prope suturam alterisque irregu- 
laribus versus apicem. Long. 2—2} lin. 


Distinguished from S. fossulatus and from all the Australian 
species known to me (nine in number) by the form of the 
thorax—rather narrow, with slightly prominent antero-lateral 
angles, and without trace of posterior angle, the lateral margin 
being rounded off to the base; the surface is rather faintly 
transversely strigose and shining. 

Two examples from Mr. H. Edwards (Auckland), and one 
from Christchurch (Mr. Fereday). 


Subfamily Coproprrin 2. 


Agonochila binotata. 


Lebia binotata, White, /. ¢. p. 2. 

Gomelina binotata, Blanch. Voy. Pole Sud, iv. p. 12 (1853). 

Agonochila binotata, Chaud. Bull. Mose. (1848). 

Coptodera (Agonochila) antipodum, Bates, Ent. Monthly Mag. iv. (1867), 
p- 78. 

Sarothrocrepis binotata, Redtenb. Reise Novara, Coleop. p. 7. 

Christchurch. 


Subfamily Cazzerprvz. 


Demetrida lineella, White, Zool. Ereb. & Terr., Ins. 
pe 2et. sie ds 
Port Nicholson. 


Demetrida nasuta, White, l. c. p. 2. 
Auckland (H. Edwards, Esq.). 


Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Eozoon canadense. 277 


Demetrida picea. 


Demetrida picea, Chaud. Bull. Mose. 1848, i. p. 77; Ann. Soc. Ent. 
Belg. tome xv. p. 195 (1872). 

Cymindis austrahs, Hombr. & Jacq. Voy. Péle Sud, Zool. t. i. f. 7 (1842 ?). 

Cymindis Dieffenbachii, White, Dieffenb. New Zeal. vol. ii. p. 278 
(1843); Blanch. Voy. Pole Sud, Zool. iv. (1853). 

Christchurch (Mr. Fereday). 

Chaudoir’s name must remain for this species, according to 
the rule that the first unoccupied name accompanied by a 
description takes the priority. The figure in the ‘ Voyage au 
Pole Sud’ was published eleven years before the description, 
and was erroneously lettered C. australis, not beimg the C. 
australis of Dejean. Blanchard himself corrected this error in 
1853; but long before that date Chaudoir’s excellent description 
had appeared. White’s name was simply given (without 
description) to the above-mentioned figure, in place of the 
erroneous C. australis. 


Species of doubtful position. 
Pedalopia nove zelandic, Castelnau, 1. c. p. 154. 


XXXVI.—Remarks on Mr. H. J. Carter’s Letter to Prof. King 
on the Structure of the so-called Kozoon canadense. By 
Wituram B. Carpenter, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., Corre- 
sponding Member of the Institute of France. 


Tue well-merited reputation which Mr. Carter has gained by 
his researches on Sponges and Foraminifera will doubtless 
give to his decided expression of opinion against the Forami- 
niferal character of the (so-called) Hozoon canadense a very 
considerable weight with those naturalists who regard the 
question as still sub judice. 

Had Mr. Carter (whose additions to our knowledge of the 
minute structure of certain types of Foraminifera are estimated 
by no one more highly than by myself) pronounced this 
opinion after a careful study of what has been written cn 
javour of the Foraminiferal character of Hozoon, and after an 
examination of the pieces justificatives therein referred to, I 
should have respected it, however different from my own, as 
that of an able investigator who has the fullest right both to 
form and to publish his judgment, and should not have troubled 
the scientific public with any further discussion of the ques- 
tion at issue. 

Ann. & Mag. N. Hl. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 20 


278 Dr. W. B. Carpenter on the 


But that the readers of Mr. Carter’s letter may form a right 
estimate of the value of his pronunctamento, they ought to be 
aware of the following facts :— 

1. Mr. Carter, as I learn from himself, has not read any 
thing that has been written upon the opposite side of the 
question. 

2. Mr. Carter’s ideas of Foraminiferal structure are based, 
not upon a comprehensive survey of the entire group, but upon 
that of the small number of types he has himself examined. 
This is clear from the fact that his definitions (pp. 191, 192) 
apply only to a certain section of the Vitreous or ‘ perforate” 
Order, and exclude the Porcellanous and the Arenaceous 
Orders—the first of them uniformly “ imperforate,” the second 
generally so. 

3. Mr. Carter’s knowledge of Hozoon is avowedly confined 
to that which he has derived from the examination of the spe- 
cimens sent to him by Prof. King. If he had asked me to 
show him the chief results I obtained from a study of the large 
mass of material put into my hands by Sir Wm. Logan, 
which occupied nearly my whole time (during slow conva- 
lescence from a severe illness) for a space of two months, I 
should have most gladly done so; and I feel sure that I should 
at any rate have demonstrated to him that there is a great 
deal more to be said in favour of the Foraminiferal nature of 
Eozoon than he has at present any idea of. 

Hence Mr. Carter’s affirmation, that the opinion of those 
from whom he differs on this question has no other basis than 
“the wildest conjecture,” and his imputation to them of inca- 
pacity to distinguish things as different from each other “as 
the legs of a table are from the legs of a quadruped,” are to 
be considered simply as specimens of a new method and lan- 
guage, which, after Prof. Huxley *, I may term Carterese. 
Whether its general adoption will be good for the progress of 
Science, may be an open question: I will give an example of 
its application. 

Geologists who have worked over the Greensand near Cam- 
bridge, have met with spherical bodies varying from the size 
of a marble to that of a small cricket-ball ; which, I learn from 
Prof. Ramsay, they were accustomed to kick about as inor- 
ganic concretions, without the smallest idea of their organic 
origin. ‘The discovery by Prof. Morris, however, of a non- 
infiltrated specimen, led me to examine the internal structure 
of these solid balls; and this examination brought me to the 
knowledge of the entirely new and, in many particulars, ano- 


* “To call a man an Atheist, in Recordese, simply means that you 
don’t agree with him.” 


Structure of Eozoon canadense. 279 


malous type of Foraminiferal structure, formed by the cemen- 
tation of sand-grains in concentric spheres, which I have de- 
scribed under the name Parkeriva (Phil. Trans. 1869). But 
as this type does not happen to conform to Mr. Carter’s pre- 
conception of a Foraminifer, and as he might examine one or 
more of the silicified balls without finding any indication of 
organic structure, the principle on which he has acted in re- 
gard to Hozoon would justify him in asserting that nothing 
but the “wildest conjecture” could make it out to be Fora- 
miniferal, for that “its structure does not bear so much resem- 
blance to that of a foraminiferous test as the legs of a table to 
those of a quadruped.”’ Now it so happens that every con- 
clusion I had drawn from the careful study of the best-pre- 
served specimens of Parkeria has been fully confirmed, and 
its anomalies explained, by the discovery, in our Deep-sea 
dredgings, of a living Arenaceous Foraminifer (with the 
animal in it), whose structure conforms, in all essential par- 
ticulars, to that of Parkerta. I may fairly, then, apply Mr. 
Carter’s words to his own method, and say that, “if such be the 
grounds on which geological inferences are established, the 
sooner they are abandoned the better for geology, the worse 
for sensationalism.” 

Those whose knowledge of Foraminifera ranges over the 
entire group as at present known, have the most unlimited 
belief in its “‘ possibilities ;”’ and it has thus come to pass that 
they accept the Foraminiferal character of the Hozoon, on the 
basis of the large number of parallelisms which its structure 
presents to that of existing types, notwithstanding some dif 
Jerences, which they regard as comparatively non-essential. 

To say nothing of my collaborateurs, Mr. W. K. Parker, 
Prof. 1. Rupert Jones, and Mr. H. B. Brady, whose opinions 
may be thought to have been personally influenced by my 
own, I may cite the judgment recently given by the late Prof. 
Max Schultze not long before his lamented death, as that of 
an entirely unprejudiced and fully competent “ third party,” 
whose opinion even Mr. Carter is bound to respect, on account 
not only of his well-known profound mastery of Zoology 
generally, but of his special knowledge of Foraminifera—his 
admirable Treatise ‘ Ueber den Organismus der Polythalamien ’ 
having been referred to in my ‘ Introduction to the Study of 
the Foraminifera’ (1862) as “among the most important of 
recent contributions to our knowledge of the organizdtion and 
life-history” of the group. In the spring of last year, Prof. 
Schultze requested me to send him some specimens of Hozoon, 
in order that he might form his own judgment of its nature, 


at the same time stating the general opinion among German 
20* 


280 Dr. W. B. Carpenter on the 


geologists to be adverse to its organic character. In response, 
I forwarded to him two specimens—one a transparent section 
taken from the same block as that which furnished the section 
examined by Mr. Carter, the other a decalcified slice. Sub- 
sequently, at his request, I sent him the largest specimen of 
Eozoon I could spare en bloc, that he might make preparations 
for himself. The result of his examination of these specimens 
was to satisfy him completely of the Foraminiferal character of 
Eozoon*. This conclusion was formed without any “ verbal 
arguments ”’ or ‘ prolonged disputations,” but on the basis of 
Prof. Schultze’s own “actual comparison of specimens”’ of 
Eozoon with specimens of recent Foraminifera—the former 
showing the very structures which Mr. Carter could not find in 
the specimens he examined, and the latter exhibiting those 
precise parallelisms which the recent types referred to by Mr. 
Carter do not furnish. 


I shall now briefly state what these parallelisms are. 

1. Large masses of rock occur in the Laurentians of 
Canada, in which there isa very regular alternation of lamellee 
of Carbonate of Lime (sometimes replaced by Dolomite) with 
lamellee of Serpentine or some other Magnesian Silicate, often 
to the number of fifty or more. For this alternation, such 
eminent Petrologists as Dr. Sterry Hunt and Mr. Sorby have 
expressed their inability to account on any known principles 
of Mineralogical formation; on the other hand, it becomes 
perfectly intelligible when we view the calcareous lamellz as 
having been successively formed by the growth of a Foramini- 
feral shell, and the serpentinous lamelle as having been sub- 
sequently produced by the replacement of the sarcodic body 
which occupied its cavities by a deposit of serpentine or some 
other silicate; for such replacement ¢s going on at the present 
time, so as to furnish us with internal casts of various Horami- 
nifera brought up by dredging from the ordinary sea-bottom— 
these internal casts giving us (when the calcareous shell is 
dissolved away by dilute acid) the perfect models, not merely 
of the segments of the sarcodie body, but also of the sarcodic 
ramifications of the canal-system, and even, in some instances, 
of the sarcodic threads filling the minute tubuli of the shell- 

wall. Even so, when the calcareous lamelle of Hozoon 


* Referying to the sections I had sent him, Prof. Max Schultze said, in 
a letter dated Aug. 16, 1875, “‘Some points are very difficult to settle ; 
but the organic structure cannot be doubtful.” And after making his 
own investigation on the piece I had subsequently sent to him, he said, 
in a letter dated Noy. 15, 1875, “In the last number of the ‘Comptes 
Rendus’ of the Association of Wiesbaden, I gave a short extract of my 
researches on Eozoon, quite accordant with yours.’ A translation of this 
report will be found in p. 524. 


Structure of EKozoon canadense. 281 


have been dissolved away, we have such a Serpentinous 
fabric as is represented in fig. 1 ; in which we recognize those 
general features of conformity to the foraminiferal type which 


Fig. 1. 


Structure of Hozoon canadense. 


were first pointed out by Professor Ehrenberg as exhibited in 
the Green-sands of various Geological periods, with details 
which accord most remarkably with those of particular types. 

2. Although, in its indefinite zoophytic mode of growth, 
Eozoon differed from the Nummulites and Orbitoides to which 
Mr. Carter refers, yet it agrees with Polytrema*, a type which 
was formerly described as a Millepore, but which I have 
shown to be a wildly-growing Rotalian. Further, in its im- 
perfect segmentation, only interrupted occasionally by a com- 
plete chamber-partition, it agrees with Carpenteriat, another 
Rotalian ; my description of which, as of the preceding, and 
my references to them in my account of Hozoon, it is of course 
only consistent in Mr. Carter to ignore, on his principle of not 
reading any thing on the other side. 

3. The general plan of the Calcareous fabric, as we should 
see it if we could dissolve out the Serpentine, is shown in 
fig. 2, which was constructed from sections in my possession 
by the conscientious and intelligent draughtsman Mr. George 
West, to whom I was indebted for those admirable constructive 
representations of various types of recent Koraminifera whose 
accuracy no one has ever challenged{. ‘This shows the suc- 


* Introduction to the Study of Foraminifera, p. 255. 

+ Op. cit. p. 186. 

{ A most remarkable proof of this accuracy was afforded by the fact 
that Mr. G, West’s reconstruction of the complicated canal-system of 
Polystomella (‘Introduction to the Study of the Foraminifera,’ pl. xvi. 
fiz. 1) was made four years before I obtained the internal cast (fig. 9), 
which verified it to the minutest particular. 


282 Dr. W. B. Carpenter on the 


cessive stories of chambers (A’ A’, A* A”), the chambers of 
one story usually opening into one another like apartments 
en suite, but being occasionally divided by complete septa 
traversed by passages, as at b 6. Each chamber is enclosed 
in a chamber-wall, BB, which, when well preserved, alike 
in sections and in internal casts, exhibits a fine nummuline 
tubulation, generally perpendicular in its direction, but fre- 
quently presenting exactly those varieties which I have figured 
and described in the tubulation of the recent Operculina. I 
freely admit that there are two anomalies in the arrangement 
of this tubulated chamber-wall :—first, that it covers the floor, 
resting on the preformed intermediate skeleton, as well as 
- forms the ceiling ; and, second, that its tubulation is sometimes 
horizontal. But looking to the wonderful variability of the 
Foraminiferal type, and the number of the parallelisms exhi- 
bited in the calcareous structure here represented to the known 


Structure of Hozoon canadense. 


forms of Foraminiferal organization, I ask whether, in the 
face of the continual discovery of far more strange anomalies 
(as in the case of Parkeria), these entitle any one to affirm 
that this structure is a mere pseudomorph. If the accuracy 
of that representation is questioned or denied, I have simply 
to say that I can prove it to any one who will examine the 
_ preparations in my possession. 

4, The “intermediate skeleton” (fig. 2, C C) precisely 
corresponds in its disposition, and in the distribution of the 
canal-system (E) which traverses its thicker layers, with the 
intermediate skeleton of Calcarina, another type fully eluci- 
dated by me, to which Mr. Carter makes no. reference ; and 
there is this further very curious correspondence—that the 


Structure of EKozoon canadense. 283 


canal-system originates, not directly from the chambers, but, 
as in Calcarina, trom a set of sinuses outside the tubulated 
chamber-wall. Now Mr. Carter seems to suppose that Dr. 
Dawson, and all those who agree with him in this identifi- 
cation (which Dr. Dawson first made by comparison with 
specimens of Calcarina he had received trom myself), have 
been so “ green” as never to have thought of the probability 
that the so-called canal-system may be nothing else than 
dendrites of glauconite. This hypothesis has from the first 
‘been present to our minds, as Mr. Carter would have seen if 
he had read the memoirs which he has thought fit to ignore. 
And, not to mention other reasons, I may state two, which 
perfectly satisfy Mr. Sorby (the most eminent authority on 
micro-mineralogy) that they cannot be thus accounted for. 
First, these dendrites usually pass directly across the cleavage- 
planes of the calcareous shell, between which, if they were 
infiltrations, they would be almost certain to spread. Second 
(and this is, to my mind, still more conclusive), that minuter 
part of the canalicular system which is only to be discerned 
in the very transparent calcite by a careful management of the 
light (and which Mr. Carter has obviously not recognized), is 
not infiltrated with any foreign mineral at all; but is simply 
filled up with calcite, disposed in the same crystalline axis 
with that of the shell itself, as is the case in the consolidated 
calcareous network of the fossil spines of Echinida, the stems 
of Crinoidea, and the like. An experience of thirty-five 
years, extending over a wide range of Micro-paleontological 
inquiry, has given me, I venture to think, some special apti- 
tude for recognizing Organic structure when I see it; and I 
never saw, in any fossil whatever, more distinct evidences of 
organic structure, than are to be seen in these finer ramifica- 
tions of the canal-system of Hozoon, which are far more distinct 
than is the tubulation of any but the best-preserved fossil 
Nummulites. 


I do not pretend to affirm that the doctrine of the Forami- 
niferal nature of Hozoon can be proved in the demonstrative 
sense. But Ido affirm that the convergence of a number of 
separate and independent probabilities, all accordant with that 
hypothesis, while a separate explanation must be invented for 
each of them on any other hypothesis, gives it that high pro- 
bability on which we rest in the ordinary affairs of life, in the 
verdicts of juries, and in the interpretation of Geological 
phenomena generally. 

To any one who calls in question the evidentiary facts I 
have adduced, I simply say ‘Come and see.’”’ I cannot be 


284 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Arrangement of Sponges. 


expected to trust out of my possession valuable preparations, 
which, if lost or injured, I might never be able to replace. 
But I am quite willmg to give time and trouble to enable 
those who wish to make the “ comparison of the actual speci- 
mens’ for themselves, to do so, without any ‘ verbal argu- 
ments ” or “ prolonged disputations.” 

If the so-called Hozoon be really an Organic structure, 
whether Foraminiferal or any thing else, it is time that it should 
be generally acknowledged as such. But if it can be shown to 
be a Mineral pseudomorph, I quite agree with Mr. Carter that 
the sooner it is exploded as a sham, the better it will be for 
Geology. I trust that my scientific career has given suflicient 
evidence of my having “loved truth better than system,” to 
justify my assertion that I shall be quite ready to surrender 
it, if I can be proved to be mistaken (as I have been before 
now) by the examination of my own specimens, and that I 
shall even thank any one who will set me right. No one, 
however, of the many eminent scientific men who have ex- 
amined and compared these specimens, has as yet pointed out 
to me any error In my interpretation of the appearances they 
present; and nearly all of them have expressed their unreserved 
acceptance of it. 


XXXVII.—On the Arrangement of Sponges. 
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. 


I PROPOSED an arrangement of sponges in the ‘ Proc. Zool. 

Soe.’ 1867, p. 502, of which I suggested a modification in the 

‘Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.’ 1868, i. p. 165, and 1872, ix. p. 440, 

and especially in a paper which I wrote on the division of the 

, spicules of sponges into types (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1873, 
xu. p. 203). 

The continued study of the structure of sponges and of their 
spicules has induced me to propose an alteration in their 
arrangement, as a sequel to the last quoted paper, which I 
believe will make it more natural and facilitate their study. 

I would divide the Porifera, or sponges, into four 
orders :— 


Order I. Arenosponera (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1872, ix. 
p- 448, enlarged). The sponges strengthened by particles 
of sand, fragments of spicules, and other siliceous bodies, 
which they collect from the sea. 

Order II. THALAssosponaiA (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1872, 


Dr. J. E. Gray on the Arrangement of Sponges. 285 


ix. p. 446). The sponge olive, formed of a fleshy or 
horny skeleton, and strengthened by regular siliceous 
spicules which are secreted by it; ovisacs membranaceous, 
scattered in the substance of the sponge. 

Order [1]. Poramosponeta (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1872, 
ix. p. 461). The sponge green; skeleton’ strengthened 
by regular siliceous spicules; ovisacs cartilaginous, 
strengthened by fusiform or birotate siliceous spicules. 
(See the divisions proposed in the ‘Annals’ above quoted, 
». 461.) 

Gact IV. CaucisponciA. The sponge strengthened by 
regular calcareous, generally three-rayed, spicules. 


Order I. ARENOSPONGIA. 


The sponges of this order, which vary in shape from being 
discoidal, massive, to dendroidal, are peculiar for collecting 
together the sand or fragments of spicules, which are abundant 
at the bottom of the sea, for the purpose of giving strength 
and consistence to their structure ; and these answer the same 
purpose as the siliceous or calcareous spicules which are 
secreted by the other marine and freshwater sponges. The 
quantity of horny matter covering the sand, and the quantity 
of sand enclosed by it, are very different in the different species 
of these sponges. It sometimes forms a thick, fibrous, horny 
skeleton, with only a single layer of sand in the centre of the 
fibre; and in some species this sand is only found in the 
thicker part of the horny skeleton. In other species the sponge 
seems entirely formed of sand merely kept together by a thin 
coat of horny matter. 

In the arrangement I proposed in 1867 I placed the sponges 
of this group in two families, Dysideidee and Xenospongiade, 
placing the latter family in a subsection which I called sand 
sponges (Arenospongiade), and the other family with the 
Ceratospongia. But more mature consideration has induced 
me to increase the suborder Arenospongia and put them 
together ; for it is a very important element in the ceconomy of 
the animal that one family collects together the ready formed 
siliceous bodies, and the other secretes the siliceous or cal- 
careous spicula by which the body of the sponge is strength- 
ened. 

This order consists of two families :— 


1. Xenospongiade. 


Sponges discoidal, strengthened with irregularly placed sand 
and fragments of spicules. 


286 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Arrangement of Sponges. 


2. Dysideide. 


Sponges massive or dendroidal, formed of fibres constituting 
a more or less thick coat to the more or less abundant sand or 
fragments of spicules contained in their centre. 

Dysidea and Halispongia, Bowerbank, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1872, 
t. vi. 


The Xenospongiade are peculiar for having a series of very 
slender diverging filiform spicules on the circumference, and 
pencils of similar spicules on the mouth of the oscules on the 
upper surface of the disk, which appear very different from 
the spicules of other sponges both in structure and position ; 
and I am not aware that they have been observed in Dysideide. 
Some of the calcareous sponges have the oscule similarly 
fringed or bearded. 


Order I]. THALASSOSPONGIA. 


This is a very large and numerous group of sponges, cha- 
racterized by their secreting the siliceous spicules by which 
their body is almost universally strengthened ; but the number 
and form of the spicules very greatly vary in the different 
kinds. In some, as in the coral-sponges, the body is almost 
entirely formed of spicules which are united together by a 
deposit of siliceous matter on their surface, forming the whole 
into a hard siliceous coralloid body ; in others the sponges 
merely form a horny skeleton, containing one or more series 
of spicules in its central line. I am inclined to place the 
genus Spongia, which is formed entirely of a horny skeleton 
without any spicules, as an aberrant or abnormal form of this 
order, though perhaps we may find, when the habit and 
structure of these bodies are more known, that some species of 
true sponges (Spongia) are aberrant sand-sponges which do 
not collect sand, and other species are aberrant spicular sponges 
that do not secrete spicules. 

The Thalassospongia may be divided into various suborders 
according to the spicules which they secrete, and whether they 
secrete spicules of all, of one, or of two or more of the types 
of spicules which I described in the ‘Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.’ 
1873, xi. p. 203. 

The sponges are all provided with more or less abundant 
simple subcylindrical spicules, which may be regarded as the 
basis of their skeleton; but some have spicules of one or more 
of the other types added to them ; and I am inclined to divide 
them into suborders according to the various types of spicules 
by which their body is strengthened ; and they often have free 


Dr. J. E. Gray on the Arrangement of Sponges. 287 


spicules scattered in the sarcode, which are generally of a small 
size and uniform shape, and are characteristic of each suborder. 
Thus they are hamate unilateral in the Hamispongia, sex- 
radiate in the Sexradiatospongia, and stellate multiradiate, in 
the form of spicular spherules, in the Quingueradiate group. 

In the division of the marine sponges, like other natural 
bodies, into suborders or types the characters of the orders 
given are those of the general mass of species belonging to it ; 
but there occur genera or families that have most of the 
characters of the suborder or family but want the essential 
character of the group—as the genus Spongia, which belongs 
to the order Thalassospongia, but wants the characteristic 
siliceous spicules. In the same manner Placospongia has the 
spherical spicules of the quinqueradiate sponges, but appears to 
be without the quinqueradiate spicules; and the Chondrillade 
have the many-rayed spicules of the same suborder, but also 
want the five-rayed spicules—these groups being what Mr. 
MacLeay called “ aberrant types.” 


Suborder I. LEIOSPONGIA. 


The sponges only strengthened by simple, elongate, sub- 
cylindrical, fusiform spicules, tapering at each end, or enlarged, 
club-shaped, or capitate at one or bothends. This suborder is 
without spicules of the sexradiate or quinqueradiate types, or 
the free spicules peculiar to each. 

This suborder contains many species, and requires much 
study to make out its structure, which I am glad to say 
Mr. Carter is bestowing upon it. 

It contains :— 


1. The Suberispongia, which are massive, with inosculating 
areolar cavities terminating in a vent on the surface—as 
Suberitide and Raphiophoride (‘ Annals,’ l. c. p. 447). 

2. The Keratospongia, with a skeleton formed of reticulated 
horny fibres having one or more series of spicules in the 
central line—as Chalinide, Phakelliade, Halichondriade, 
and Polymastide. 

3. The Ophistospongia, with a skeleton like the Keratospongia, 
but with diverging spicules on its outer surface—as 
Ophistospongiade (‘ Annals,’ /. c. p. 447). 


Suborder II. Hamisponera (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 
1872, ix. p. 448). 


Sponges with unilateral spicules, which are curved at each 
end, and either subcylindrical or more or less expanded, in 


288 Dr. J. EH. Gray on the Arrangement of Sponges. 


addition to the fusiform, clavate, or capitate spicules of the 
former suborder. 

This suborder consists of the family Esperiade (Proc. Zool. 
Soc. 1867, pp. 502, 532), except the genus Carteria, which 
proves to be a sexradiate sponge. Some genera have only 
the bihamate spicules ; but in general they have bihamate and 
contorted spicules. 

In the ‘Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.’ (7. c.) I divided this sub- 
order into four families—Esperiade, Desmacidonide, Hama- 
canthide, and Gelliadee. 


Suborder III. SexRADIATOSPONGIA. 


Sponges with spicules of the sexradiate type, m combination 
with the simple spicules of the Leiospongia. 

This suborder agrees with the Hexactinellide of Mr. Carter, 
so well described in the ‘Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.’ 1873, xi. 
p. 857, excluding the genus Hyalonema, and adding to it the 
genus Carteria, which Mr. Carter partly describes and figures 
under the name of Hyalonema. 

In the paper in the ‘ Proc. Zool. Soc.’ for 1867 I formed the 
order Coralliospongia, and in the ‘Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.’ 
1872, ix. p. 447, I considered “the hexaradiate spicules the 
essential character of the order” (see p. 449). It has since 
been found to contain a series of sponges which belong to the 
quinqueradiate type and are placed separate by Mr. Carter, a 
correction which I gladly acknowledge and adopt. 

The radiating spicules which form the skeleton of the body 
are frequently of large size, and are modified in form accord- 
ing to the position which they occupy in the body. The lateral 
rays in perfectly developed spicules are generally equal ; but 
at other times one or more of the rays are only partially de- 
veloped. The shaft or central axis is frequently elongate, 
much longer than the lateral rays; but when the spicules are 
on the surface of the sponge the outer end of the shaft is more 
or less imperfectly developed, sometimes reduced to a single 
tubercle, and the other end of the shaft on the inside of the 
sponge is frequently much lengthened. The two ends of the 
shaft are almost always simple ; but the lateral rays, especially 
of the quinqueradiate type, are frequently forked. 

The sexradiate spicules which are scattered in the sar- 
code, and consequently free from each other, are always of a 
much smaller size than the skeleton-spicules, and of uniform 
structure, and nearly all of the same size. Mr. Carter has 
named them rosettes. They differ in the form of their six 
rays—which are always equal, sometimes simple, ending in a 


Dr. J. EK. Gray on the Arrangement of Sponges. 289 


crenated disk, and at others are simple, subulate, with a more 
or less spinulose surface, or each divided at the end into two, 
three, or more linear branches, which are frequently dilated 
at the end. 

In the paper in the ‘Annals’ above referred to I divided 
the sponges of this suborder according to their external form ; 
but in the ‘Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.’ 1872, x. p. 184, I pro- 
posed to divide them into two groups according to the form 
of the free spicules; and since then Mr. Carter has shown 
the importance of the study of the minute free spicules, or 
rosettes. 

They may be divided into three sections, as proposed in the 
‘Annals,’ 1872, x. p. 134:— . 


1. The rosettes with the ends of the six rays divided into two, 
three, four, five, or many branches. Including Harreadw, 
Dactylocalycide, Aphrocallistide, Euplectellade, Corbi- 
tellade, Askonematide, and Crateromorphade (Ann. & 
Mag. Nat. Hist. 1872, x. p. 134), and Rossella, Carter. 

2. The rosettes with six rays ending in a radiating circular 
disk. Carteriade, Pieronemade, and Meyerinade (Ann. 
& Mag. Nat. Hist. 1872, x. p. 134). 

Mr. Carter figures many of the rosettes of these genera 
(Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1873, xii. t. 13 & 15). 

3. The rosettes subcubical, the rays with three lobes at the 

end. Azide. 


I gave the name of Axos Cliftont to Bowerbank’s figure 
(B. 8. fig. 197) of the spicule of this sponge; and when Mr. 
Clifton gave me a fragment of the sponge I described it (Ann. 
& Mag. Nat. Hist. 1870, vi. p. 272) under the name of Hehino- 
spongia australis; but at p. 346 of the same volume I showed 
that Azxos Cliftoni should be adopted. Dr. Bowerbank has 
since figured the specimen from which the fragment was taken 
by Mr. Clifton under the name of Dictyocylindrus dentatus 
(Proc. Zool. Soc. 1873, p. 321, t. xxix.), without referring to 
his figure in his work on British sponges. 


Suborder IIT. QUINQUERADIATOSPONGIA. 


Sponges with spicules of the quinqueradiate type in com- 
bination with the simple spicules of Leiospongia, and frequently 
having multiradiate spicules and spicular spherules in combi- 
nation with them, either scattered free in the flesh of the sponge 
or forming an external bark to it. 

The sponges of this suborder present very numerous com- 
binations of spicules ; and the five-rayed spicules which form 
the skeleton of the sponge frequently want the outer end of 


290 = Dr. J. E. Gray on the Arrangement of Sponges. 


the shaft, and the lower end is generally much elongated ; and 
for this reason they have been called four-rayed, trifurcate, or 
nail-like spicules. They frequently have free, but more or 
less abundant, regular-shaped many-rayed spicules, or spicular 
spherules, scattered in their flesk, which are always of a small 
size, and more or less regular in their shape. 

This order consists of the Spherospongia and the family 
MacAndrewiade of the ‘Annals,’ 1872, ix. p. 456. 


Section I. Five-rayed or skeleton-spicules often united by 
siliceous matter; flesh-spicules fusiform, cylindrical, 
more or less spinose. Lithistide, Carter (Ann. & Mag. 
Nat. Hist. 1873, xii. p. 437); MacAndrewiade, Gray 
(Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1872, ix. p. 456. 


The sponge formed of superficial sexradiate spicules, which 
are held together by an amorphous siliceous coat. 

Mr. Carter gives an arrangement of the species of the 
various genera of this group, to which the genera Mac- 
Andrewia and Theonella, Gray, Corallistes and Leiodermttium 
of Schmidt, and Azorica and Lithospongitis, Carter, are re- 
ferable. In the ‘Annals’ I placed MacAndrewiade with the 
Coralloid sponges having sexradiate spicules; but the ex- 
amination of more spicules has proved that they belong to the 
quinqueradiate type, with the habit of the coral-sponges. 


Section II. The skeleton-spicules elongate, free from one 
another, generally forming the circumference of the 
sponge, sometimes projecting beyond it. 

a. The free flesh-spicules many-rayed, stellate, on the outer 
surface or inner part of the sarcode. Tethyade, Dona- 
tiade, Theneade, Lophurellade,Casulade. (See Ecio- 
nemia acervus, and H. densa, Bowerbank, Proc. Zool. 
Soc. 1873, t. xxx. figs. 1-14.) 

b. With spicular spherules forming the outer surface of the 
sponge. Geodiade. 

c. The spicular spherules crowded together, and forming 
the axis and plates on the outer surface of the coral- 
like sponge, with the sarcode and spicules between the 
two. Placospongiade. 

d. Without any many-rayed stellate spicules or spicular 
spherules. Ancorinade. 

e. Aberrant family, Chondrillade, with many-rayed stellate 
flesh-spicules, but without any elongate five-rayed 
spicules. See Chondrilla australiensis, Ann. & Mag. 


Nat. Hist. 1873, xu. pl. 1. figs. 14-16. 


On a new Species of Arcturus. 291 


XXXVIJI.—On a new Species of Arcturus (A. damnoniensis). 
By the Rev. THomas R. R. Srespine, M.A. 


{Plate XV. ] 


ARCTURUS DAMNONIENSIS has three conical tubercles on the 
head—one medio-frontal, with the other two side by side behind 
it. Hach of the body-segments has a similar elevation—that on 
the elongated fourth segment, not quite so far back as the centre 
of its dorsal surface, being the most considerable and conspic- 
uous. ‘T’o this almost central tubercle the dorsal surface of the 
segment slopes rather steeply up and then rather steeply down to 
a second tubercle, truncated at the top and standing over the 
posterior margin. The tubercles of the other segments are 
less important in size and more sharply pointed than those of 
the head and the fourth body-segment, that on the second 
segment being the most diminutive. 

Of the pleon or tail three segments are clearly defined :—the 
first very short ; the second less so, and dorsally raised above 
both the first and the last, the long terminal piece having also 
a small dorsal elevation in close proximity to that of the 
second segment. The terminal piece has also at the base a 
lobe on each side running out into a sharp angle. Further 
back the lateral margin is again produced into a similar angle ; 
between this and the rather obtuse apex there is a slight in- 
dentation in the margin on either side, the two being connected 
by a small dorsal furrow. 

The upper antenne are about as long as the head; they 
have a large basal joint, followed by three slender almost trans- 
parent articulations and a short seta, the last articulation being 
longer than the two which precede it both together. 

The lower antenne are as long as the body ; four joints are 
visible and a stiff little-divided flagellum. The first of the 
four joints is short and thick with a deep external notch; the 
second is long, clubbed at the distal end; the third is longer 
again; the fourth is about the same length as the second, but 
slender and uniform in thickness. All the joints have short 
outstanding hairs or bristles. The third joint is longer in the 
male than the female, and in each about corresponds in length 
with the fourth body-segment. = 

The female is altogether more strongly tuberculated than 
the male; and the lateral dilatations over the insertions of the 
legs are also more pronounced in the female than in the male. 
The most striking difference, however, between the two sexes 
is in the fourth body-segment; for this segment in the female, 
besides carrying the brood-pouch, is dilated at its origin into 
a large triangular lobe on either side, while in the male there 


292 Prof. E. Ehlers on the new or little-known 


is a decided contraction of the body in the front part of the 
fourth segment. ‘This difference is very noticeable when the 
two specimens are viewed from above instead of in profile. 

The total length of each specimen is about half an inch. 

The male it fell to my lot to discover in January of this 
present year, 1874. It was clinging to a small stalk of sea- 
weed which had been dredged up in the neighbourhood of 
Babbacombe beach. The following day the meshes of the 
dredge, which had been plied off Hope’s Nose, at a distance of 
a mile or more from the site of our previous search, yielded 
the female. This time Mr. W. Wilson Saunders, my companion 
on both occasions, was the successful discoverer. The dredging 
off Babbacombe had given us nothing of interest besides the 
Arcturus and Crangon trispinosus; that off Hope’s Nose, in 
water of more than 10 fathoms depth, supplied many scores 
of specimens of Antedon rosaceus (Comatula), the feather-star, 
besides several crustaceans of more or less rarity, both stalk- 
eyed and gessile-eyed—including of the former Hurynome 
aspera and Pennant’s Hbalia, and of the latter Ampelisca Gai- 
mardii, Cerapus abditus, Anthura gracilis, Anceus maxillaris, 
and Idotea linearis. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE XV. 


Fig. 1. Arcturus damnoniensis, male, enlarged, 

Fig. 1 a. The same, seen from above, the tail curved over the body and 
showing the underside. 

Fig. 2. Arcturus damnoniensis, female, enlarged. 

Fig. 2 a. The same, seen from above, the tail and part of the body fore- 
shortened. 


XXXIX.—Annulata nova vel minus cognita in Eaxpeditione 
‘Porcupine’ capta. Recensuit EK. Kuiers, M.D. 


To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 


GENTLEMEN, 

You would greatly oblige me by giving, as soon as possible, 
a place in your most valuable Journal to the enclosed paper, 
containing the diagnoses of new or little-known annelids col- 
lected in the ‘ Porcupine’ expedition, and lately examined by 


me. I am, Gentlemen, 
Yours truly, 
Erlangen, March 11, 1874. EK. Enuers, M.D., P.P.O. 


Leanira hystricis, n. sp.” 
Corpus lineare depressum post paulo attenuatum ; segmentis 50-60. 


f 


Annelids of the ‘Porcupine’ Expedition. 293 


Lobus cephalicus latior quam longior, rotundatus, caecus, tentaculo 
lobo duplo longiore in articulo hasali e suleo parvo fere centrali 
lobi cephalici oriente, apicem versus subarticulato gracillimo ; 
palpis longissimis usque ad segmentum octayum decimum pro- 
tentis, validis, glabris. Cirri tentaculares in pinna setigera simplici 
magna sub margine anteriore lobi cephalici antrorsum vergentes 
utrinque tres: in apice pinnee externus in articulo basali simplex 
pinna ter longior, internus pinnze longitudine fere eequalis subu- 
latus ; in parte pinne interna singulus subarticulatus pinna paullo 
longior. Laminz buccales cirris tentacularibus minoribus longiores. 
Segmentorum pinnee dimidiam corporis latitudinem equantes, an- 
tice medizeque ab latere, posticee antrorsum vergentes, ramis fere 
wqualibus parum sejunctis: superiore simplici papilla terminali 
setis capillaribus simplicibus et serrulatis, inferiore crassiore bi- 
labiato papillas 2 terminales setasque compositas gerente ; cirro 
ventrali ramo inferiore, excepto primo, breviore apicem versus 
subarticulato ; elytris dorsum haud perfecte tegentibus levibus 
orbicularibus in segmentorum L., 3.,4., 6... . 25., 26. elytrophoro 
aramo superiore pinne longe remoto dorsali ; branchiis a segmento 
26. conspicue obviis postice versus accrescentibus uncinatis de- 
orsum ex elytrophori margine vergentibus. Longitudo 19 m.m. ; 
latitudo cum pinnis 2 m.m. 


Hab. (1) 56° 9’ lat. bor., 14° 10! long. occid., fundo 664 
orgyiarum ; (2) 59° 35! lat. bor., 9°11’ long. occid., fundo 767 
orgyiarum ; (8) 51° 22! lat. bor., 12° 26’ long. occid., fundo 808 
orgyiarum; (4) 55° 11' lat. bor., 11° 31! long. occid., fundo 1443 


orgylarum ° 


Nephthys pansa, n. sp. 


Corpus longum, crassum, lateribus in parte postica profunde incisis. 


Lobus cephalicus latior quam longior, tentaculis anticis 4 minutis. 
Rami pinnarum spatio ipsis multo majore distantes, labiis posticis 
minutis, anticis obsoletis; branchia in laminam magnam undu- 
latam utrinque dilatata; cirro dorsuali ventralique parvo crasso, 
setis anterioribus brevibus crenatis, posterioribus numerosis lon- 
gissimis flexuosis subtilissime denticulatis. Proboscis exserta 
magna crassa, antice labiorum papillis bifidis coronata et ordinibus 
22 longitudinalibus papillarum 38-4 antrorsum  accrescentium 
triangularium foliacearum cincta. 


Hab. 51° 1' lat. bor., 11° 21' long. occid., fundo 126 orgyi- 


arum. 


Nephthys Johnstoni (m.). 


Corpus procerum et in lateribus partis postice sensim attenuate pro- 
fundius incisum, segmentis 120. Lobus cephalicus longior quam 
latior; tentacula postica majora quam antica. Rami pinnarum, 
in parte postica corporis elongatarum, spatio ipsis minore sejuncti ; 


Ann. & Mag. N, Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xii. 21 


294 Prof. E. Ehlers on the new or little-known 


superior labio anteriore humili, labio posteriore in laminam superi- 
orem majorem rotundatam minoremque inferiorem diviso; branchia 
magna curvata, cirro dorsuali mediocri; inferior labio anteriore 
obsoleto, posteriore ipso ramo majore ovato-elongato protento, cirro 
ventrali brevi conico; uterque setis anterioribus brevibus cre- 
natis, posterioribus numerosis longissimis flexuosis in parte media 
dilatata denticulatis. Proboscis antice labioram papillis bitidis 
coronata, ordinibus 22 longitudinalibus papillarum 5-6 filiformium 
antrorsum valde elongatarum cincta. Longit. 70 m.m.; latit. 
4-5 m.m. 


Hab. prope Belfast, fundo 75 orgyiarum. 


Verisimiliter eadem species, que acel. Johnston (‘Catalogue 
of the British non-parasitical Worms,’ p. 172) nomine N. 
longisetose descripta est. 


Eulalia imbricata, un. sp. 


Corpus lineare depressum in postica parte magis quam in antica 
attenuatum, pallidum, segmentis 70. Lobus cephalicus sub- 
ovatus, postice productus, cxecus ; tentacula 5, anteriora utrinque 
2 fere eequalia subulata, posticum singulum verticale minimum. 
Cirri tentaculares utrinque 4 elongati; prior segmenti primi, 
secundus et tertius cum pinna parva setigera segmenti secundi ; 
quartus cum pinna setigera cirroque ventrali segmenti tertii. 
Pinne simplices longze setarum compositarum articulo longissimo 
terminali cuspidato fasciculo flabelliformi ; cirri dorsuales foliacei, 
parte antica et postica corporis excepta, dorsum imbricatim tegentes 
brevi-ovati ; cirri ventrales foliacei ovato-lanceolati, pinnam fere 
eequantes; cirri anales 2 crassi cylindrato-ovati. Long. 13°5 m.m. ; 
latitudo cum pinnis c. 2 m.m, 


Hab. 56° 9! lat. bor., 14° 10! long. occid., fundo 664 orgyi- 


arum. 


Eteone ceca, n. sp. 


Lobus cephalicus conicus in basi subannulata parum latior quam 
longior, margine antico indistincte crenato, subpellucido; tentacula 
infera subsequalia lobo cephalico dimidium fere latitudinis breviora. 
Cirri tentaculares in segmento primo utrinque 2, inferior supe- 
riore paullum longior latitudinem segmenti non equans ; in seg- 
mento secundo utrinque singulus subulatus, anterioribus dimidium 
brevior. Segmentorum ceterorum pinne simplices breves, setis 
cuspidatis; cirri dorsuales a pinna remoti crassi foliacei rotundato- 
ovati, imbricatim pinnas tegentes ; cirri ventrales foliacei semi- 
lunares sursum erecti. Proboscis vagina in parte aborali papillas 
paucas seriatim ferente obducta. Long. 11 m.m.; latitud. cum 
pinnis 2 m.m. 


Hab. prope Galway, fundo 15-20 orgyiarum. 


Annelids of the ‘Porcupine’ Expedition. 295 


Syllis brevicollis, n. sp. 

Corpus lineare antice et postice paullum angustius, dorso convexo 
ventre plano, segmentis c. 70. Lobus cephalicus latior quam 
longior, antice attenuatus, fere sexangularis; oculi utrinque 2 
appropinquati, anteriores majores magisque distantes quam 
posteriores ; tentacula 3 longa moniliformia, quorum medium 
articulis 44 duplo longius lateralibus ; palpi separati validi lebo 
cephalico longiores. Cirri tentaculares utrinque 2 moniliformes 
tentaculis breviores; superior longior quam inferior. Pinne sat 
magne setis compositis articulo terminali parum elongato lineari 
apice bidentato; cirris dorsualibus longissimis moniliformibus 
articulis 40-50 ; cirris ventralibus conicis pinna vix longioribus 
vel zequantibus. Proboscis dente brevi crasso armata in segmentis 
12 anticis, ventriculus in Seige 8. Color in spiritu ful- 
vidus. Longitudo 18 m.m.; latitudo 15 m.m. 


Hab. 59° 34° lat. bor., 7° 18! long. occid., fundo 650 orgyi- 


arum. 
Syllis abyssicola, n. sp. 

Corpus lineare dorso conyexo. Lobus cepbalicus triangularis latior 
quam longior, czcus ; tentacula moniliformia, medium articulis 17 
parum longius quam lateralia 14-articulata ; palpi distantes validi 
lobo cephalico longiores. Segmentum I. in dorso vix conspicuum 
cirris tentacularibus, tentaculis brevioribus ceterum similibus. 
Pinne magne setis compositis, quarum superiores articulo termi- 
nali valde elongato lineari, inferiores articulo breviore, nusquam 
apice bidentato. Cirrus dorsualis moniliformis dimidiam segmenti 
latitudinem parum superans articulis 9-11; cirrus ventralis 
anguste lanceolatus pinnam valde superans. Proboscis in seg- 
mentis 9 papillis 10 cincta, dente conico obtuso; ventriculus 
in segmentis sequentibus 7. 


Hab. 56° 14! lat. bor., 11° 37' long. occid., fundo 1380 or- 


gylarum. 

Diopatra brevibranchiata, n. sp. 

Corpus in parte antica subteres, in postica parte depressum. Lobus 
cephalicus czecus ; tentaculis 5 in articulo basali annulato brevibus 
subulatis, 2 marginalibus subglobosis; palpis parum prominulis, 
Segmentum I. breve cirris tentacularibus pedunculatis. Pinne 
segmentorum 3 sequentium maxim adpressee complanate an- 
trorsum vergentes cirris tentaculiformibus labiisque incisis ; cetera 
humiles labiis cirrisque ventralibus evanescentibus, cirro dorsuali 
in anterioribus subfoliaceo in posticis subulato, in media corporis 
parte branchiferze ; branchiee cirris longiores pectiniformes parum 
dentate ; sete pinnarum anteriorum et simplices limbate et com- 
posite cultriformes, posteriorum capillares simplices et tener 
scalprate pectinate ; acicule hamate. 


Hab, 48° 50! lat. bor., 11° 7’ long. occid., fundo 725 orgyi- 
arum. 
21# 


296 Prof. E. Ehlers on the new or little-known 


Diopatra soctalis, n. sp. 

Corpus in parte antica subteres, in postica valde depressum ; seg- 
mentis 110, posterioribus brevibus. Lobus cephalicus czcus, 
tentaculis 5 in articulo basali annulato longissimis levibus filifor- 
mibus ; marginalibus anticis obtusis, palpis valde prominentibus 
clavatis. Segmentum buccale magnum, cirris tentacularibus gra- 
cilibus filiformibus. Pinne segmentorum anteriorum magne, 
labio et cirris gracilibus elongatis; posteriorum sensim de- 
crescentes, labiis cirrisque ventralibus evanescentibus ; branchie 
valde diverse, in omnibus pinnis filiformes simplices, vel in 
posterioribus solum et filiformes et parum dentate vel omnino 
nulle. Sete pinnarum anteriorum composite, posteriorum sim- 
plices limbatze et scalpratz. subtiliter dentate ; acicule bidentate. 
Longit. 55 m.m. ; latit. 2m.m. Tubus longissimus limo obductus. 


Hab. (1) 51° 1' lat. bor., 11° 21! long. occid., fundo 426 


orgylarum ; (2) 49° 1! lat. bor., 11° 56’ long. occid., fundo 557 
orgyiarum ; (3) 59° 34! lat. hor., COP 18! long. oceid., fundo 650 
orgyiarum ; (4) 48°50! lat. bor, Lec long. occid., fundo 725 
orgyiarum ; (5) 51° 22! lat. bor., 12° 26' long. occid., fundo 808 


org eylar ulm. 


Aricia Kupfferi, a. sp. 

Corpus antice acuminatum, postice sensim attenuatum, dorso fere 
plano in segmentis anterioribus nigro maculato. Lobus cephalicus 
conicus, nudus, segmentum I. nudum. Pinne segmentorum 
sequentium 14, in ramo superiore cirro filiformi, setis tenuissimis 
linearibus subtilissime crenatis et simplicibus apice dilatato bi- 
furcato, in ramo inferiore labio postice majore semilunari crenu- 
lato, setis seriatim collocatis simplicibus subtiliter crenulatis, 
paucis validioribus ; pinne posterioris partis corporis in ramo 
superiore cirro filiformi, setis longissimis sub apicem fortiter cre- 
natis, ramo inferiore Ralinceosianeccines elongato apice bipartito, 
setis eadem, que est in ramo superiore, mee cirro ventrali 
parvo conico, postice prorsus evanescente ; branchize a segmento V. 
imcipientes foliaceo-lanceolate in dorso a linea mediana remote. 


Hab. (1) 48° 50! lat. bor,, 11° 7' long. occid., fundo 725 or- 
gyiarum ; (2) 54° 54! lat. bor., 10° 59! long. occid., fundo 1366 
orgylarum. 

Verisimiliter eadem est species, quee a cel. Kupffer in libro 
adscripto ‘ Bericht iiber die Expedition zur physikalisch- 
chemischen und biologischen Untersuchung der Ostsee,’ p. 151, 
est commemorata, 


Heterospio longissima, nu. gen. et sp. 
Corpus animalis e 2 partibus valde diversis constans, quarum ante- 


lad 


rior depressa 7 segmentis brevibus branchiferis, posterior teres 


Annelids of the ‘Porcupine’ Expedition. 297 


segmentis paucis perlongissimis nudis constituta. Lobus cephali- 
cus conicus czecus nudus (?) ; sete in segmentis omnibus, segmento 
buceali excepto, in 2 fasciculis collocatwe long sericez capillares 
arcte limbate; branchiz segmentorum anteriorum in articulo 
basali longissime. Long. animalis, cujus pars postrema corporis 
deest, 25 m.m. ; longitudo Betray partis 7 segmentis constitute 


2 m.m.; sequentium 4 segmentorurfi longissimorum 23 m.m.; 
latitudo 0-8 m.m. 


Hab. 51° 1' lat. bor., 11° 21! long. occid., fundo 426 orgyi- 


arum. 


Praxilla nigrita, n. sp. 

Lobus cephalicus brevis conico-acuminatus, non limbatus, cum seg- 
mento buccali nudo connatus ; segmenta anteriora breviora quam 
posteriora valde elongata quinquies longiora quam lata, in parte 
brevi setigera annulata; set superiores simplices limbate, in 
segmentis posticis apice subito acuminate; sete inferiores in 
segmentis setigeris anticis 4 seta unica conica valida, in ceteris 
uncini apice 4 dentati. Longit. 17 m.m.; latit. 0° m.m.; seg- 
menta postica desunt. Colorin spiritu fulvidus, in parte segmen- 
torum incrassata nigritus. Tubus crassus limo et arenulis con- 
fectus. 


Hab. 59° 34! lat. bor., 7° 18" long. occid., fundo 650 orgyi- 


arum. 


Sabellides fulva, n. sp. 


Corpus in parte anteriore inflatum, in postica valde attenuatum, seg- 
mentis setigeris 45. Lobus cephalicus cum parte tentaculifera sub 
labio dorsali segmentorum priorum conditus ; tentacula numerosa 
versus apicem incrassata levia; palmule nulle. Branchie in 
articulo basali filiformes subulate, latitudinem corporis plus duplo 
superantes, utrinque 3 in dorso segmenti tertii et quarti ordinem 
transversum medio interruptum formantes. Tubercula setigera 
subconica in segmentis 15 obvyia a segmento quarto incipientia ; 
sete capillares limbate. Uncinorum ventralium ordinum in 
segmentis 35 obviorum prior sub pinna setigera quarta in toro 
parum elevato, dein a pinna undecima in pinnulis longis segmen- 
torum omnium sequentium ; uncini 5-dentati. Cirri anales nulli. 
Longit. animalis 42 m.m.; latit. max. 2 m.m. 


Hab. 49° 1' lat. bor., 11° 56! long. occid., fundo 557 orgyi- 


arum., 


Grymea brachiata, n. sp. 


Corpus cylindratum in parte postica parum depressum ; lobus cepha- 
licus brevis; tentacula ?; branchiz simplices subulate in seg- 
mento primo setigero utrinque 4 seriem transversam formantes, 
in secundo et tertio utrinque 2. Scuta ventralia simplicia latis- 


298 Mr. A. W. E. O’Shaughnessy on 


sima in segmentis I.-XI., in prioribus usque ad dorsum protenta. 
Pinne fasciculos setarum capillarium gerentes a segmento secundo 
per totum corpus obyic, in segmentis anterioribus compress in 
dorso collocatz supino vergentes, deinde subconice in lateribus 
segmentorum collocatz postice versus spectantes; sete longe, 
sericeee, limbate ; uncinorum ventralium ordo prior sub pinna 
setigera quinta, in segméntis sequentibus in pinnula parva ad- 
pressa; uncini minutissimi 3-dentati uniseriales. 


Hab. 59° 34! lat. bor., 7° 18! long. occid., fundo 650 orgyi- 
arum. 
Erlange, d, I. m. Martii MDCCCLXXIV. 


XL.—Descriptions of new Species of Scincidee in the Collection 
of the British Museum. By A. W. E. O'SHAUGHNESSY, 


Assistant in the Zoological Department. 


Mocoa lichenigera, n. sp. 


Body cylindrical; lower eyelid with transparent disk; 
scales smooth, small, in 41 longitudinal series, those of the 
inferior surface being exceedingly numerous, considerably 
over 80 in a longitudinal series, the scales between the chest 
and chin being smailer than those on the belly; nasals 
and fronto-nasals not contiguous; internasal almost circular ; 
frontal widened anteriorly and tapering posteriorly ; fronto- 
parietals separate; supralabials six, subequal; ear-opening 
moderate. 

Somewhat resembling Mocoa Smithit. 

Colour: above olive or bronzed greenish brown, dotted with 
dark brown; sides with dark brown variegations, forming a 
wavy line along the margin of the back on each side, and 
extending on to the tail; lower surface pale yellowish. 

Tail rather broad ; scales small, uniform ; limbs moderate, 
fore and hind ones meeting in the middle of the side. 

Lord Howe’s Island. Im the collection of the British 
Museum. Collected by Mr. M‘Gillivray. 


Mocoa pretiosa, nu. sp. 


Resembles J. Entrecasteauxii, but differs in the much 
greater number of scales; in the latter there are 56-59 in a 
longitudinal ventral series, while in the present there are not 
less than 80. Fronto-parietals united; scales striated or 
minutely ridged. Colour: bright brown, with median black 


new Species of Scincide. 299 


stripe and numerous small yellowish ocelli; sides deep brown, 
with a bright yellowish wavy streak above and below. 

The British’ Museum has ‘received this species from ‘T'as- 
mania. Collected by R. Gunn, Esq. 


Mocoa mustelina, n. sp. 


Elongate and slender in form ; head small; limbs short and 
weak. Superficial resemblance to Hinulia ornata in coloration ; 
but, besides being distinctly a Mocoa, it has much larger and 
fewer scales: there are 22-24 longitudinal rows as counted 
round the body, and 52 ina longitudinal ventral series; while in 
Hinulia ornata these numbers are respectively 30 and 62. 
Colour: bright yellowish brown above, with small mottlings 
and wavy lines and variegations along the sides, extending in 
regular streaks on the tail; lower surface pure white; chin 
dotted with brown; a pure white oblong spot immediately 
behind the eye. 

The British Museum possesses three specimens from New 


South Wales. 


Mocoa microlepidota, n. sp. 


Body somewhat depressed. Scales small, those on the back 
distinctly three-ridged. Lower eyelid tr ansparent. Nasals 
and fronto-nasals not contiguous ; internasal broad, saddle- 
shaped ; fronto-parictal single: - no supranasals ; 38 longi- 
tudinal series of scales as counted round the body, 83 in a 
longitudinal ventral series. Dorsal surface closely speckled 
with black and olive, a marginal olive stripe along upper edge 
of sides ; sides with a deep band of dark brown, speckled and 
breaking into the eneous bluish green of the lower surface, 
which is also very minutely speckled with brown on the chin. 
Tail with small uniform scales ; when reproduced, a single very 
broad series inferiorly. 

In the collection of the British Museum, from Van Diemen’s 
Land. From the Sydney Museum. 


Mocoa metallica, n. sp. 


Lower eyelid transparent; supranasals none. Scales di- 
stinetly four- or five-keeled, the projections being well defined 
but not sharp. Body stout, tetragonal; limbs rather short ; 
ear-opening large. Nasals and fronto-nasals not contiguous ; 
frontal short, triang ular, of the same size as or smaller than the 
single fronto- -parietal, which it joms with its truncated point. 
Supralabials six, the four anterior subequal, that under the 
eye more prolonged. Scales in 28 longitudinal series, the 


300 Mr. A. W. E. O'Shaughnessy on 


two median dorsal being very broad ; in a longitudinal ventral 
row there are 60, and these latter are smaller than the dorsal 
scales. Colours: above bright bronzed green, with a median 
dark brown stripe and lateral variegations more or less irre- 
gular; sides dark brown, broken up into irregular variegations ; 
beneath greenish, dotted on chin. 

In the British Museum, from Van Diemen’s Land. Col- 
lected by R. Gunn, Esq. 

In several other specimens (Dr. Millingen’s collection) the 
ground-colour is much darker, and may be described as 
greenish brown, the pattern, however, being the same. 


Mocoa pseudocarinata, n. sp. 


Two small black skinks from Tasmania, also from Mr.Gunn’s 
collection, present curiously ridged, or rather perhaps in- 
dented scales, three or four indentations being distinct to- 
wards the margin of all the scales, both dorsal and ventral. 
Lower eyelid transparent ; no supranasals. Scales rather con- 
vex, distinct grooves between the series the whole length of the 
body. Fronto-parietals united in one specimen, in the other 
apparently separated by an irregular suture. Shining black 
above, with two narrow light stripes from head along the upper 


5 


and lower margins of the sides. Scales in 28 longitudinal 


series, and 62 in ventral series. 


Mabouya punctatissima, n. sp. 


Supranasals narrow, oblique, contiguous ; internasal broad, 
saddle-shaped; fronto-nasals contiguous, broad; fronto-parietals 
separate ; supralabials seven, the five anterior subequal, that 
under the eye longer; ear-opening large. Scales moderate, 
rounded, smooth, equal all over the body; in 42 longitudinal 
series, 69 in a longitudinal ventral series. Hind legs not quite 
as long as the side, fore legs reaching to end of muzzle. ‘Tail 
somewhat longer than head and body. Colour greenish brown, 
punctulated all over the upper surface with dark brown and 
occasional white dots; lower parts pale greenish. 

The British Museum possesses one specimen of this form, 
which was purchased of M. Parzudaki, who gave the Cape of 
Good Hope as its locality, which we must consider very 
doubtful. 


Euprepes fogoensis, D. & B. 


Superficially resembling £. Stangerz, but with much smaller 


new Species of Scincide. 301 


scales, there being 56-60 longitudinal series, and 100 in a 
longitudinal ventral series. Scales two-keeled, uniform in 
size allover the body. Supranasals contiguous ; fronto-nasals 
contiguous ; fronto-parietals separate; supralabials six; ear- 
opening moderate, rounded, with small scales anteriorly. 
Limbs moderate. Tail somewhat longer than head and body. 
Colour olive-brown ; two series of strie, consisting of 
minute ocellations of dark brown intersprinkled with whitish, 
forming almost two long stripes on each side of the back ; 
sides brown, similarly variegated and mottled; belly pale ; 
chin and chest variegated with brown. 

Cape-Verde Islands. Many specimens, adult and young, 
from the islands of Fogo and St. Vincent’s in the Cape-Verde 
group, from the collection of the Rev. R. T. Lowe. 

By its two-keeled scales this species is allied to Macro- 
scincus Coctec; but the teeth are not serrated. 


Diploglossus millepunctatus. 


Head elongate, flattened, broadening posteriorly ; supra- 
nasals two pair, large, contiguous; nostrils in nasal shield, 
above suture between first and second labials, with a curved 
groove behind them; three large plates between eye and 
nasal; internasal broad, tapering posteriorly, separating the 
two long semirhomboidal fronto-nasals. Frontal a broad and 
long shield meeting by an obtuse point the narrow inter- 
parietal and separating two fronto-parietals ; large rounded 
parietal plates. Supraorbitals four, with inner supraoculars ; 
supralabials ten. Ear of moderate size, open. Scales of 
body and tail small, rounded, smooth or with strize obso- 
lete; in about 56 longitudinal series, and 64 in a median 
dorsal series from shoulder to groin, and 116 scales in 
a longitudinal ventral series. Colour dark brown, with an 
infinite number of minute white specks, one, two, or three 
on every scale. Fore limbs, laid forwards, not reaching 
tip of snout, hind limbs reaching halfway along sides of 
body. 

Length of specimen 9 inches from tip of snout to root of 
tail. 

From the north-west coast of America. 


302 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


XLI.—On the Invertebrate Marine Fauna and Fishes of St. 
Andrews. By W. C. M‘Inrosu. 


{Continued from p. 221. } 


Subkingdom MOLLUSC. 


Section I. MOLLUSCOIDA. 
Class I. POLYZOA. 


The majority of the Polyzoa come from the deep water of 
the bay; and, indeed, there are comparatively few to be met 
with between tide-marks that do not also occur in the former. 
The minute animals of the calcareous masses so characteristic 
of many of this group, perform none of those alterations on 
the surface of the earth which the equally tiny coral-polyps 
daily effect ; yet their workmanship in our northern waters is 
as regular and beautiful as that fashioned by the latter in the 
tropical seas. The patterns of the Lepralie, for instance, 
excite admiration; and though the apparent resemblance in 
growth, superficial aspect, and position may suggest to some 
an analogy between them and the lichens of our rocks 
and trees, yet it is remote and unable to bear close criti- 
cism. It is true it is difficult to assign an exact function to 
these organisms; but in some cases the calcareous crust of 
the Lepralic affords a better hold to many stationary marine 
animals than the rock itself. Moreover, after heavy-coated 
forms (like the Balan?) have reared themselves on this basis, 
it frequently happens that the original crust is loosened from 
its attachment, and both fall off together. The coating of 
Lepralie, also, may prevent to some extent the disintegration 
of soft rocks and stones. By removing a portion of bark with - 
an adherent Balanus from a submerged thorn-tree, and care- 
fully detaching the former, a fine network of Lepralia is found 
lowest, then the calcareous coating of the Balanus; and if 
the latter has perished, a rough layer of Cellepora pumicosa 
obliterates all trace of it from without. 

- The Cheilostomatous Polyzoa are fairly represented ; and 
several, e. g. Flustra and Gemellaria, occur in vast quantities 
attached to stones, shells, and corallines on the West Sands 
after storms. ‘The majority are common to the eastern shores, 
the west, and the extreme north and south, as shown in the 
valuable catalogues of Messrs. Alder, Couch, Hincks, and 
Norman. Many species will doubtless yet be found at St. 


Molluscoida of St. Andrews. 303 


Andrews—though at present they appear to be confined to the 
other areas, which have been more thoroughly investigated by 
observers specially skilled in this department.  Bicellaria 
ciliata and Bugula purpurotincta seem to be more common at 
St. Andrews than in Shetland, the latter form being especially 
abundant and fine, and apparently taking the place of the 
BL. plumosa of the southern shores; Menipea ternata and 
Bugula Murrayana are likewise in considerable profusion and 
in fine condition; while the southern Flustra chartacea is 
wholly absent. The species of the Membraniporide, perhaps, 
are more abundant in Shetland; and the Lepralie are decidedly 
more numerous there and in the extreme south. Amongst the 
more conspicuous forms we notice the entire absence of Lepralia 
Pallasiana, so common in the extreme west and south, and 
of the characteristic LZ. ernominata and L. figularis of the 
latter. The Celleporide are abundant, but the species are 
few. Cellepora avicularis is exceptionally rich, according to 
Mr. Hincks; and the same high authority in this department 
states that the sole specimen of Hschara Skene? is fine. 

The Cyclostomatous forms are not numerous; but all the 
examples are abundant; and the same may be said of the 
Ctenostomata. The late Dr. John Reid mentions Vestcularia 
spinosa as growing near low-water mark ; but I have not been 
successful in finding it. The Zetlandic Hornera and the rich 
tufts of Amathia lendigera, so plentiful in the south, are 
altogether absent. 

On the whole it would appear that the Hebridean, Zetlandic, 
and southern waters furnish a richer field for the Polyzoa than 
our eastern shores, not only as regards the number of species, 
but the condition and size of the specimens. I need only 
allude, for instance, to the luxuriance of the branching 
Celleporidee and Retepore of the Hebrides and Shetland, and 
the extraordinary beauty and profusion of the Escharidz and 
Lepraliz, and indeed of the whole group, in the extreme south 
and in the Channel Islands, both between tide-marks and on 
the shell-banks around. 

The arrangement followed is that of Mr. Busk in his 
accurate and well-known and_ beautifully-illustrated ‘Cata- 
logue ;’ and I have further derived great assistance from the 
valuable Catalogue of the Zoophytes of Northumberland and 
Durham by the lamented Joshua Alder, and the extensive 
Zetlandic lists by the Rev. A. M. Norman. I have also to 
thank Mr. Hincks for his kindness in revising the list and 
making several additions, and to acknowledge the information 
derived from his careful and original Catalogue of the southern 
forms. 


304 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


Order GYMNOLAMATA. 
Suborder CHEILOSTOMATA. 


Family Salicornariade. 
Genus CELLARIA, Lamarck. 
Cellaria farciminoides, Ellis & Solander ; Busk, Catal. p. 16, 
pl. 64. f. 1-3, pl. 65 (bis). f. 5. 


Attached to the roots of Flustra foliacea and other corallines ; 
abundant in deep water. 


Family Cellulariade. 
Genus Menipea, Lamx. 
Menipea ternata, Ellis & Solander; Busk, Catal. p. 21, 
pl. 20. f. 3-5. 


Fine tufts on Sertularia filicula and other corallines from 
the deep water of the bay. 


Genus SCRUPOCELLARIA, Van Beneden. 
Scrupocellaria scruposa, L.; Busk, Catal. p. 25, pl. 22. 
£3 &4. 


C 


Abundant under stones between tide-marks, and ranging to 
deep water. In October many are marked with the reddish 
orange ova; there are also many brownish black specks on 
these specimens. 

Genus Canpa, Lamx. 


Canda reptans, Pallas; Busk, Catal. p. 26, pl. 21. f.3 &4. 


Found by Dr. John Reid near low-water mark (Anat. and 
Pathol. Observat. p. 602). 


Family Scrupariade. 
Genus Scruparia, Oken. 
Scruparia chelata, L.; Busk, Catal. p. 29, pl. 17. f. 2. 
Common on Ceramium rubrum, Sertularia pumila, and 
other alge and zoophytes between tide-marks. 
Genus HiprotHoa, Lamx. 


Hippothoa catenularia, Jameson ; Busk, Catal. p. 29, 
plLAs.f Lc 2. 
On stones and shells from deep water; less common than 
the following species. 


Molluscoida of St. Andrews. 305 


Ihippothoa divaricata, Lamx.; Busk, Catal. p. 30, 
pl. 18. f.3 & 4. 


On stones and shells from deep water ; abundant. . 


Family Gemellariade. 
Genus GEMELLARIA, Sav. 


Gemellaria loricata, L.; Busk, Catal. p. 34, pl. 45. f.5 & 6. 


Abundant in deep water, and thrown on shore in masses 
after storms. 


Family Bicellariade. 
Genus BiceLLARta, De Blainville. 


Bicellaria ciliata. L.; Busk, Catal. p. 41, pl. 34. 
Frequent on stones and shells from the coralline ground. 


Genus BuGcuta, Oken. 


Bugula flabellata (J. V. Thompson, MS.), Gray ; Busk, Catal. 
p. 44, pls. 51 & 52. 


On Flustra foliacea from deep water; rather rare. 


Bugula avicularia, Pallas; Busk, Catal. p. 45, pl. 53. 


From the coralline ground, on Flustra truncata; not 
common. 


Bugula purpurotincta, Norman, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. 


n.s. vol. vil. p. 219. 
Abundant on the same ground, attached to shells. 


Bugula Murrayana, Bean; Busk, Catal. p. 46, pl. 59. 


Plentiful on the beach after storms, and at all times from 
the coralline ground. 


Family Flustride. 
Genus Fiustra, L. 


Flustra foliacea, L.; Busk, Catal. p. 47, pl. 55. f. 4 & 5, 
pl. 56. f. 5. 


Very abundant on the sands after storms. 


Flustra truncata, L.; Busk, Catal. p. 48, pl. 56. f. 1 & 2, 
Picoo. ft. 1 a, 2. 


Common in the laminarian and coralline zones. 


306 Dr. W. GC. M‘Intosh on the 


Genus CARBASEA, Gray. 


Carbasea papyrea, Pallas; Busk, Catal. p. 50, pl. 50. f. 1-3. 
After storms, and from the fishing-boats ; not abundant. 


Family Membraniporidz. 
Genus Mempranipora, De Blainville. 


Membranipora membranacea, L.; Busk, Catal. p. 56, pl. 68. f.2. 
Abundant on the fronds of Laminaria digitata and other 
algee. 


Membranipora pilosa, L.; Busk, Catal. p. 56, pl. 71. 


Very common on the stems and fronds of Delesseric, Lam- 
narie, and other seaweeds between and beyond tide-marks, 
and on shells and stones from the coralline ground. 


Membranipora Flemingt’, Busk ; Catal. p. 58, pl. 61. f. 2, 
pl. 84. f. 4-6, pl. 104. f. 2-4. 


Common on stones and shells from the coralline ground. 


Membranipora Lacroixti, Sav.; Busk, Catal. p. 60, pl. 69, 
pl. 104. f. 1. 


On the inner surface of a valve of Cyprina islandica from 
deep water. 


Membranipora spinifera, Johnst. ; Alder, Catal. Zooph. p. 53, 
pl. 8. f. 2, 2a. 


Abundant on the under surface of stones between tide- 
marks. 


Membranipora Dumerillit, Aud. ; Alder, Catal. Zooph. p. 56, 
pl. 8. to. 

Not uncommon on bivalves from deep water. As Mr. Alder 
observes, it may occasionally be seen in company with JZ. 
Flemingii. 

Membranipora unicornis, Flem.; Alder, Catal. Zooph. p. 56, 


pl .Ss1.6 
On bivalves from deep water; not very common. 


Membranipora craticula, Alder; Catal. Zooph. p. 54, pl. 8. f. 3. 
Occasionally in deep water. 


Molluscoida of St. Andrews. 307 


Genus FLUSTRELLA, Gray. 
Flustrella hispida, Fab.; Johnst. Brit. Zooph. p. 363, 
pl. 6 66. f. 5. 


Abundant on the stems of Fuci and other seaweeds, and on 
stones between tide-marks. 


Genus Lepratta, Johnst. 


Lepralia Brongniarttii, Aud.; Busk, Catal. p. 65, 
pl. 81. f. 1-5. 
Rather plentiful on laminarian roots thrown on shore after 
storms. Often forms a basis for other growths, and may be 


seen on their under surface when detached from seaweed or 
rock. 


Lepralia reticulata, J. Macgillivray ; Busk, Catal. p. 66, 
pl. 90. f. 1, pl. 93. f. 1 & 2, pl. 102. f. 1. 


Not uncommon in the siphons and inside the mouth of 
Fusus antiquus, and also on Cardium echinatum from deep 
water. 

Lepralia concinna, Busk, Catal. p. 67, pl. 99. 


Very abundant on stones and shells from the coralline 
ground. A well-marked variety, with perforations round the 
cells, is not uncommon. 


Lepralia verrucosa, Esper; Busk, Catal. p. 68, pl. 87. £.3&4, 
pi 94. £6. 


Occurs rather abundantly on the roots of Laminaria digitata 
and on stones near low-water mark. 


Lepralia unicornis, Johnst.; Brit. Zooph. p. 320, pl. 57. f. 1. 


A common littoral etal everywhere abundant, and in 
large patches on the under surface of stones. The colours 
vary, probably in some cases from the ova. 


Lepralia spinifera, Johnst. ; Busk, Catal. p. 69, pl. 76. f. 2&3. 


Very common on the under surface of stones near low- 
water mark, 


Lepralia trispinosa, Johnst.; Busk, Catal. p. 70, 
pl. 85. f. 1 & 2, pl. 98, pl. 102. f. 2. 


Abundant on stones and shells from the coralline zone. 


308 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


Lepralia coccinea, Abildgaard ; Busk, Catal. p. 70, pl. 88. 

On sandstone, shale, and laminarian roots from the Hast 
Rocks, and on shells from deep water. Also found by Prof. 
J. Reid. Rare as contrasted with its profusion on our south- 
ern shores. ; 


Lepralia linearis, Hassall; Busk, Catal. p. 71, pl. 89. f. 1-3. 
Common on shells and stones from deep water. 


Lepralia ciliata, Pallas ; Busk, Catal. p. 73, pl. 74. f. 1 & 2, 
pl. 77. f.3, 4, 5. 
Occasionally on the under surface of stones near low-water 
mark ; more frequently on stones and shells from the coralline 
ground. 


Lepralia variolosa, Johnst.; Busk, Catal. p. 75, pl. 74. 
f. 3, 4, 5, pl. 75. 


On shells and stones from deep water ; not uncommon. 


Lepralia nitida, Fab. ; Busk, Catal. p. 76, pl. 76. f. 1. 
Abundant both between: tide-marks and in deep water, on 
stones and shells. The spines are in general less developed 
than in those from the Channel Islands. 


Lepralia annulata, Fab.; Busk, Catal. p. 76, pl. 77. f. 1. 

Instead of being partial to the laminarian blades, as on the 
west coast, this species is not uncommon on the under surface 
of stones between tide-marks, generally in small patches ; 
and also occurs on shells and stones from deep water. Some 
dried specimens are of a pinkish colour. 


Lepralia Peachti, Johnst.; Busk, Catal. p. 77, pl. 82. f. 4, 
pl. 97. 
Common on stones near low-water mark, and on stones and 
shells from deep water. 


Lepralia ventricosa, Hassall; Busk, Catal. p. 78, pl. 82.f. 5 & 6, 
pl. 83.f. 5, pl. 91.£.5.&6. 
Not uncommon on stones and shells from deep water. 
Lepralia punctata, Hassall ; Busk, Catal. pl. 90. f.5 & 6, 
pl. 92. f. 4, pl. 96. f. 3. 


Everywhere abundant on the under surface of stones in 
pools and elsewhere near low-water mark, and also on shells 
and stones from deep water. 


Molluscoida of St. Andrews. 309 


Lepralia Malusti, Aud.; Busk, Catal. p. 83, pl. 103. f. 1-4. 


Not uncommon on shells and stones from deep water. 


Lepralia granifera, Jobnst.; Busk, Catal. p. 83, pl. 77. f. 2, 
pl. 95. f. 6 & 7. 

Abundant on the under surface of stones near low-water 
mark in considerable patches. The aspects of the old and 
new cells differ much. The new cells glisten like those of 
L. hyalina, have a number of opaque white granules, a D- 
shaped aperture, and a distinct mucro ; the transverse wrinkles 
of the cells are also apparent; and in some very new ones the 
granules are also glistening and hyaline, and show the per- 
forations. In the old cells the walls are opaque, whitish, or 
yellowish, the granules still more opaque, perhaps larger, but 
less defined and beautiful. 


Lepralia hyalina, L.; Busk, Catal. p. 84, pl. 82. f. 1-3, 
pl. 95. f. 3-5, pl. 101. f. 1 & 2. 


Common on laminarian roots and stems, on Delesseria and 
other alge, and on stones near and beyond low-water mark. 


Family Celleporida. 
Genus CELLEPORA, Fab. 
Section A. Jnecrusting, adnate. 


Cellepora pumicosa, L.; Busk, Catal. p. 86, pl. 110. f. 4-6. 


Very abundant on stones, shells, zoophytes, and seaweeds— 
generally from deep water. 


Cellepora avicularis, Hincks ; Catal. Zooph. Devon, 
Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 3rd ser. ix. p. 304. 


Occasionally on zoophytes. 


Section B. Erect, branching. 


Cellepora ramulosa, L.; Busk, Catal. p. 87, pl. 109. f. 1-3. 


Attached to the stems of zoophytes &c. in deep water; 
common. 


Cellepora dichotoma, Hincks, Catal. Zooph., Joc. cit. p. 305. 


On zoophytes ; abundant and fine. 
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. xiii. 22 


310 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


Family Escharide. 
Genus Escnara, Ray. 


Eschara Skenet, Ellis & Sol. ; Busk, Catal. p. 88, pl. 122. 


A remarkably beautiful specimen on Cyprina islandica from 
the coralline ground. 


Suborder CYCLOSTOMATA, Busk. 
Family Tubuliporide, Johnst. 
Genus TuspuLipora, Lamarck. 


Tubulipora serpens, L.; Johnst. Brit. Zooph. p. 275, 
pl. 47. f. 4-6. 


On zoophytes and shells from deep water; very abundant 
and characteristic. 


Genus ALECTO, Lamx. 


Alecto granulata, M.-Ed.; Johnst. Brit. Zooph. p. 280, 
pl. 49. f. 1 & 2. 


On stones and shells from deep water; not rare. 


Family Diastoporide, Busk. 


Genus Drastropora, Lamx. 


Diastopora obelia, Flem.; Johnst. Brit. Zooph. p. 277, 
pl. 47. f. 7& 8. 


On shells and stones from deep water. 
Genus PATINELLA, Gray. 


Patinella patina, Lamarck ; Hincks, Catal. Zooph., 
loc. cit. p. 468. 


Abundant on corallines and shells from deep water, especially 
on Mytilus modiolus. 


Genus HETEROPORELLA, Busk. 


Heteroporella hispida, Flem.; Hincks, loc. cit. p. 469. 
On stones and shells from deep water; rather rare. 


Family Crisiade. 


Genus Crista, Lamx. 
Crista eburnea, L.; Johnst. Brit. Zooph. p. 283, pl. 50. f. 3 & 4. 


On the under surface of stones between tide-marks, often 


Molluscoida of St. Andrews. 311 


with many parasitic hydroids and Confervz, and on zoophytes 
and seaweeds from deep water. Abundant. 


Suborder CTENOSTOMATA, Busk. 
Family Alcyonidiade. 
Genus ALcyonipium, Lamx. 


Alcyonidium gelatinosum, Pallas; Johnst. Brit. Zooph. 
p- 358, pl. 68. f. 1-3. 


On stones and bivalve shells from deep water ; common. 
Alcyonidium hirsutum, Flem.; Johnst. Brit. Zooph. p. 360, 
pl. 69. f..1 & 2. 

Abundant on seaweeds near and beyond low-water mark. 
Alcyonidium parasiticum, Flem.; Johnst. Brit. Zooph. 

p- 362, pl. 68. f. 4 & 5. 

Frequent on the stems of zoophytes from deep water ; very 
characteristic. 


Genus ARACHNIDIA, Hincks. 
Arachnidia hippothooides, Hincks; Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 
3rd ser. ix. p. 471, pl. 16. f. 2. 
On Ascidia sordida from deep water; in abundance. 


Family Vesiculariade. 


Genus VESICULARIA, J. V. Thompson. 


Vesicularia spinosa, L.; Johnst. Brit. Zooph. p. 370, 
pl. 72. f. 1-4. 
Found near low-water mark by the late Prof. John 
Reid. 


Genus BoWERBANKIA, Farre. 


Bowerbankia imbricata, Adams; Johnst. Brit. Zooph. 
p- 377, pl. 72. f. 5 & 6. 


Abounds on the under surface of stones, on the stems and 
branches of littoral zoophytes, and on the tests of Cynthia 
grossularta under shelving rocks. Also found by Prof. J. 
Reid. 


22* 


312 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


Order PHYLACTOLEMATA. 
Suborder PEDICELLINEA. 
Family Pedicellinide. 
Genus PEDICELLINA, Sars. 


Pedicellina echinata, Sars ; Johnst. Brit. Zooph. p. 382, 
plen7Olt sa: 


On the branches of Ceramium rubrum and other littoral 
algee and zoophytes; abundant. 


Class II. TUNICATA. 


Comparatively few Ascidians have been procured ; indeed 
the department is in such a condition at present (as to specific 
identification) that a much greater amount of time would have 
been required for their elucidation than was available. The 
late Mr. Joshua Alder most kindly looked over the collection, 
and named those requiring identification in his usual con- 
scientious manner; and it is to be hoped that the work on 
these forms by him and the late Mr. Hancock (one of the 
best minute anatomists this country has produced) will soon 
be published. The most abundant simple form is the Ascédia 
sordida of Alder and Hancock, which is thrown by storms 
on the West Sands in large numbers, attached to sea- 
weeds, sticks, shells, and other objects. A. ¢ntest/nalis is also 
procured in this manner as well as between tide-marks ; 
Pelonaia corrugata and Molgula arenosa, A. & H., affect deep 
water only, and rarely occur during storms. The compound 
forms are common under stones between tide-marks and in 
the laminarian region: but much yet remains to be done in 
this respect at St. Andrews. Though Ascidians on the ex- 
posed parts of the east coast of Scotland are for the most part 
rare in the laminarian region and between tide-marks, they 
are common in still muddy waters on the west coast and in the 
Hebrides, and in water which cannot but be slightly brackish, 
as at the head of Loch Portan near Lochmaddy, where they 
are both abundant and large; they are also numerous and 
large between tide-marks at Herm and in the rich waters 
around the Channel Islands, as well as in the Zetlandic 
voes, 


Molluscoida of St. Andrews. 313 


Family Botryllide. 
Genus Leprociinum, M. Edwards. 
Leptoclinum durum, M. Ed.; Forbes & Hanley, Brit. Mollusca, 
i. p. 17 (as L. aurewm, a misprint). 
Common under stones in rock-pools between tide-marks. 


Dull yellowish white, with white specks from stellate cal- 
careous crystals. 


Leptoclinum punctatum, Forbes; F. & H. Brit. Moll. 1. 
p- 18. 


Not uncommon under stones between tide-marks. 


/ Genus Borry us, Gertner. 
Botryllus Schlossert, Pallas; F. & H. Brit. Moll. 1. 
Peto, pe A. ie. 7, pl. DB. 1s, f. 
Occasionally under stones between tide-marks. The red 
spot in the centre is not very visible in these specimens. On 
tearing, a dark brownish digestive system appears. 


Botryllus polycyclus, Sav.; F. & H. Brit. Moll. i. p. 21. 


Frequent near low-water mark on the under surface of 
stones, on Fuci and Corallina officinalis. 


Genus Botry.uoipes, M. Edwards. 
Botrylloides Leachii, Sav.; F. & H. Brit. Moll. 1. p. 23. 


Common in the laminarian region attached to seaweeds. 


Numerous other species of Botrylloides and a Didemnum are 
common under stones in the rock-pools. 


Genus Parascrp1A, Alder. 


Parascidia Flemingii, Alder, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 
1863, xi. p. 172. 


Occasionally on laminarian roots near low water. Mr. 
Alder was of opinion that the drawing represented a young 
form of this species. It consisted of Poreaneal animals with 
a transparent investment. On the summit of each are several 
long, ovate, reddish orange structures marked with aaa 
white grains, showing at the free extremity an oral aperture 


surrounded by eight small papille. 


314 On the Molluscoida of St. Andrews. 
Family Clavelinide. 


Genus CLAVELINA, Sav. 
Clavelina lepadiformis, O. F. Miller; F. & H. Brit. 
Moll. i. p. 26. 
Occasionally between tide-marks. 


Family Ascidiade. 


Genus AscrpiA, Baster. 


Ascidia intestinalis, L.; F. & H. Brit. Moll. i. p. 31. 
Abundant on the roots of tangles thrown on the West Sands 
after storms, and also under stones between tide-marks. 

Evinces considerable and spasmodic muscular contractions. 


Ascidia sordida, Ald. & Hane. 

Very plentiful in the deeper water attached to stones, shells, 
sticks, and seaweeds. One has placed itself on the anterior 
end of an empty tube of Pectinaria belgica and quite filled it up. 
An elongated (club-shaped) variety is not uncommon. 


Ascidia depressa, Ald. & Hane. 


Not uncommon on the under surfaces of large stones in tide- 
pools. In November specimens are often loaded with a 
pinkish-white creamy fluid, which appears to be made up chiefly 
of ova. The cellular border of each ovum is faintly greenish 
by transmitted light. 


Genus Moieuta, E. Forbes. 
Molgula arenosa, Ald. & Hanc.; Alder, op. cit. p. 160. 
Abundant in deep water, and in the stomach of the cod and 
haddock. 
Genus CYNTHIA, Sav. 
Cynthia, n. sp. 
A nodulated Ascidian like a raspberry or small bramble 


occurred on the West Sands after a storm. Mr. Alder stated 
that it was not C. morus, but a species unknown to him. 


Cynthia grossularia, Van Beneden; F. & H. Brit. Moll. 
i. p. 40. 
Very common on the roofs of rocky ledges, between tide- 


marks, where it becomes incrusted by many parasites. ‘The 
development of this species is easily observed. 


On the Spongozoa of Ualisarea Dujardinii. 315 


Genus PetonarA, Forbes & Goodsir. 


Pelonaia corrugata, Forbes & Goodsir; F. & H, Brit. Moll. 
1. p. 43, pl. E. f. 4. 


Frequent in deep water, and occasionally in the stomachs 
of the cod and haddock. 


[To be continued. | 


XLII.—On the Spongozoa of Halisarca Dujardinii. 
By H. J. Carter, F.R.S. &e. 


Ty the ‘Annals’ for last year (vol. xii. p. 17) I published a 
paper on two new species of Gumminee, with special and 
general observations. I had not then seen Halisarca Dujardinit 
of our shores, but have since met with it several times, always 
small, never more than from a quarter to three quarters of an 
inch in diameter. 

I have also stated somewhere lately, with reference to the 
spongozoa, that what I claim is not to have shown that they 
were ciliated, but that they took in crude food and threw off 
the undigested portions like Ameba. This I have now also 
proved to be the case in Halisarca Dujardinit, in the following 
manner :— 

Yesterday (March 19th) I went to the rocks here (Budleigh- 
Salterton), and found a specimen of Halisarca Dujardinii, 
about a quarter of an inch in diameter, on a bit of dead stick 
about the size of a tobacco-pipe. The stick was cut off to a 
convenient length and placed in sea-water; and thus, the 
following morning, it was brought under an inch compound 
power, when, seeing the particles of refuse matter actively 
issuing from the vent, I rubbed up a little indigo also in sea- 
water and, with a camel-hair brush, dropped it on the speci- 
men, leaving it there about an hour, until I saw particles of 
the indigo itself issuing from the vent. 

The water was then agitated so as to float away the super- 
incumbent indigo, when it was observed that some of the Hali- 
sarca had become deeply coloured by it. 

Now, taking off a portion of the coloured part, and tearing 
it to pieces with needles on a slide in sea-water, this was covered 
with a bit of thin glass, and placed under a 4-inch compound 
power. 

Thus the spongozoa of the Hulisarca were brought into 
view. Some were isolated, others still remaining in their 


316 Dr. J. E. Gray on a New-Zealand Whale. 


natural groups. ‘The isolated ones, which contained the indigo, 
were more or less globular, from 1 to 14 6000th of an inch 
in diameter; provided with a short, pointed beak supporting 
a single cilium, about five times the diameter in length, and 
throwing out and retracting ray-like pseudopodia from their 
circumference, which was thus ever changing its form. 

The “groups” consisted of an aggregation of such spongo- 
zoa charged with the indigo, and altogether formed round or 
elliptical dark blue masses, with a hollow interior and a cir- 
cumference not only fringed with cilia, which were motionless, 
but also with a number of shorter ray-like pseudopodia. 

The interiors appeared to be in direct communication with the 
branched system of excretory canals; but how the particles of 
indigo get from the pores to the canals I am ignorant. Possibly 
the pores and the canals may also be in direet communication, 
and cilia not only take the particles of food into the spongozoa, 
but, by reverse action, bring out the undigested parts by the 
same course. 

Thus, however, in Halisarca Dujardinii the same kind of 
spongozoa exist as probably in all the other sponges, aggre- 
gated into similar groups, communicating respectively with 
the excretory system of canals. 

I need hardly add that Halisarca Dujardinii is void of 
spicules, as Dujardin and Johnston have described it (‘Annals,’ 
loc. eit.), and not the spiculiferous sponge described by Dr. 
Bowerbank under this name. It is, menus the spicules, of 
the same structure as the Gumminee ; and therefore all these 
gelatinous sponges may be assumed to possess the same kind 
of spongozoa (vide ‘Annals,’ loc. cit.). 


XLUI.—On a New-Zealand Whale (Physalus antarcticus, 
Hutton), with Notes. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. 


[Plate XVI.] 


Pror. F. W. Hutton, keeper of the Otago Museum, Dunedin, 
New Zealand, has sent the skeleton of a whale taken off 
Otago Head in October, 1873. He has also sent a slight ac- 
count accompanied by a drawing of the whale, and the measure- 
ments of it when fresh, as follows :— 

“Whale dark grey above, shading off gradually into 
yellowish white below. Baleen yellow with a narrow black 
margin, 


Dr. J. E. Gray on a New-Zealand Whale. 317 


fi>) Sins 
Length along curve of back from end of 
caudal flipper to snout.........-...2+. 16 2} 
(TU EDIEEL ar 1 SR ee ee Se ee 15 6 
From snout fo blowhole ................ ae 
RRrSERERMOU UUOLGYE! face oh. nyc) 0 ays op oe 2% 510,5 « « 3 0 
From end of caudal to dorsal ............ 4 9 
Prine peeroral sy oe te See ee ee ess ne 10 0 
Anterior margin of dorsal .............. 1 3 
Heirht-ch dorsal: (FN HO oe ay 
Breadth Fa chee ROO RRO Ee aE jean 
Peckoralnipper, lOnetA=.. es ee eee ee AIRS 
A BEGAGEB ice). GOO ets: 0 8 
Caudal flipper, length :. 2). 2: 5 ...068 0% «3 16 
a PECAAG Dog i: air xscape tstve'ehs, aS 4 8 
WiGICNit. s . .tysistyay te cubis ares att. te 3a0 4s 27 ewt.” 


Mr. Hutton has considered this whale to be my Physalus 
antarcticus, noticed in the ‘ Zoology of the Erebus and Terror,’ 
from a quantity of yellowish white baleen sold as New- 
Zealand whalebone. But the small size of the whale, only 
16 feet long, and the baleen being described as yellow with a 
narrow black margin, makes me think it probable that the 
animal is the one which yields the long slender whalebone on 
which I established the pigmy whale (Balena marginata), 
which, we know, inhabits New-Zealand, because Governor 
Grey found its skull on the island of Kawau; it was figured 
by Dr. Hector, and was constituted by me a genus, Neobalena 
(see Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1870, v. p. 221,-vi. p. 155, 
figs. 1 & 2). 

If this should prove to be the case, it will be a very 
important discovery ; for it will prove that the genus Neobalena 
forms a group intermediate between the true whales and the 
finners (Physalide). The animal, though it has the throat and 
front part of chest plaited like the finners, has the large head 
and short body of the whales, the head being one fourth the 
entire length, and the caudal fin in breadth rather more than one 
fourth the entire length from end of tail. 

It is to be regretted that Mr. Hutton did not describe the 
shape of the baleen—if it was short and broad like that of the 
finners, or long and slender like that of the Balenide. 

The baleen on which I established Physalus antarcticus is 
short and broad, like that of a true Physalus, and evidently 
belonged to a much larger whale than the one from Otago 
Head. 

Neobalena, although it has the whalebone of the true 
Balenide, has a very peculiar kind of skull and ear-bone ; and 
I should not be at all astonished to find that it has the plaited 


318 Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Epicharis. 


throat and dorsal fin of a finner, combined with the short body 
and large head of a true whale (Balenide). The ear-bone 
is somewhat intermediate in form between the two groups, 
and fully justifies my opinion that when the entire animal and 
skeleton are known it may prove to be the type of a new 
family of whales (Suppl. Cat. Seals & Whales, p. 41). 

I will describe the skeleton as soon as it arrives ; for there is. 
no doubt, from the proportion and size of the head and body, 
it is a new form of whale, if it is not Neobalena. 


XLIV.—A Revision of the Genera Epicharis, Centris, Eulema, 
and Kuglossa, belonging to the Family Apidee, Section Sco- 
pulipedes. By FRepERIcK SMITH, Assistant in the Zoolo- 
gical Department of the British Museum. 


Generic Characters of Epicharis, Klug. 


Head not so wide as the thorax: eyes elongate-ovate ; ocelli 
three, placed in a slight curve on the vertex: antenne genicu- 
late; the flagellum filiform, the first joint narrowed to its 
base: the labial palpi four-jointed, the two basal joints elongate, 
the first one third longer than the second, both flattened and 
membranaceous within; the third and fourth minute, attached 
near the apex of the second joint: the maxillary palpi two- 
jointed ; the basal joint large, barrel-shaped, with its apex 
truncate, the second joint pear-shaped and minute : mandibles 
stout, with three blunt teeth at their apex. Thorax: the 
anterior and intermediate tibiz with a single spine at their 
apex ; the posterior tibize with two spines, the inner one pecti- 
nated: the anterior wings with one inarginal cell, pointed at 
the base and rounded at its apex, having three submarginal 
cells, the first and second of nearly equal length, the second 
narrowed towards the marginal cell, receiving the first recurrent 
nervure a little beyond the middle ; the third submarginal cell 
about two thirds of the length of the second submarginal, and 
receiving the second recurrent nervure near its apex. 

The characters are drawn from Hpicharis rustica. 

An asterisk is prefixed to the descriptions of such new 
species as are in the collection of the British Museum, 


1. Epicharis rustica. 


Epicharis rustica, Latr. Encye. Méth. x. (1825) p. 580; St.-Farg. Hym. 
ii. p. 170,92 ¢. : 

Apis rustica, Oliv. Encye. Méth. iii. p. 8, 2 (1792). 

A. hirtipes, Fab. Ent. Syst. 11. p. 325 (1793). 

Epicharis dasypus, Klug, Illig. Mag. vi.; Blanch. Hist. Nat. des Ins. 
iii. p. 405; Schomb. Faun, Flor. Brit, Guiana, p. 591. 


Hab. Cayenne ; Para; Catagallo; Venezuela. 


Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Epicharis. 319 


2. Epicharis Dejeanit. 
Epicharis Dejeanii, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 171,92. 
E. fasciata, St.-Farg. ibid. p. 172, $ (and type in coll. Westw.). 


Hab. Amazons ; Cayenne. 


3. Epicharis fasciata. 
Epicharis fasciata, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 172,92 (nec). 
Hab. Rio Janeiro. 


4, Epicharis analis. 
Epicharis analis, 8t.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 173, 2. 
Hab. ? 


5. Epicharis umbraculata. 


Epicharis umbraculata, Klug, Dlig. Mag. vi. p. 226. 

Centris umbraculata, Fab. Syst. Piez. p. 355, 2. 

Epicharis cajenne, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 172, 2 var. Type in coll. 

Westw. 

Male: differs in having the basal joint of the antennz white 
in front, a minute transverse spot above the clypeus, a line on 
each side of the clypeus, the labrum, and a spot at the base of 
the mandibles white; the posterior tibiz are also yellowish 
white: in other respects the male resembles the female. 

The £. cajenne is certainly a variety of this species; I have 
compared the type specimens with others, which have the 
abdomen black and yellow. I have also seen intermediate 
examples. 

Hab. Cayenne; Santarem. 


6. Epicharis bicolor. 
Fpicharis bicolor, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins, Apide, ii. p. 368, 3. 
Hab. Brazil. 

7. Epicharis zonata. 
Epicharis zonata, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins, Apide, ii. p. 3869, 3. 
Hab. Brazil. 

8. Epicharis elegans. 
Epicharis elegans, Smith, Journ. Entom., i, p. 152, 
Hab, Mexico. 


The female has the head, thorax, and legs black, the posterior 
tibiz: and basal joint of the tarsi with a dense brush of fulvous 
pubescence; the thorax is clothed with black pubescence. 
The male has the thorax covered with griseous pubescence, 
tinged with yellow above, and the clypeus, scape of the an- 
tennz in front, base of the mandibles, base of the tibia, and 
apex of the posterior femora yellow ; wings subhyaline. 


320 Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Epicharis. 


*9,. Kpicharis maculata. 


Female. Length 7 lines. Black; the labrum, a spot at the an- 
terior lateral angles of the clypeus, a line at the inner orbits of 
the eyes terminating opposite the insertion of the antennz, and 
a minute spot at the base of the mandibles yellow; the labrum 
with a narrow rufous margin, and fringed with hairs of the 
same colour. Thorax: a minute spot on each side of the 
collar, two on the tegulee, one at the extreme base of the wing, 
and two on the scutellum yellow ; a yellow spot at the base 
of the posterior tibiz above; the posterior tibize and tarsi fer- 
ruginous, and densely clothed with fulvous pubescence ; wings 
subhyaline, faintly clouded at their apex, the nervures fusco- 
ferruginous. Abdomen: the basal segment rufo-fuscous, the 
three following yellow ; the second and third segments have 
on their apical margins a broad black fascia, which is widest 
in the middle, narrowing abruptly towards the lateral margins, 
to which they do not extend ; the apical segments more or less 
ferruginous. 


Hab. Mexico (Oajaca). 


*10. Epicharis scutellata. 


Female. Length 9 lines. Black ; head shining, the clypeus 
prominent, a transverse minute pale yellow spot on each side 
of its anterior margin, a similar spot above it; a line at the 
inner margin of the eyes, not extending above the insertion of 
the antenne, and the sides of the labrum yellow ; the tips of the 
mandibles testaceous. Thorax clothed with short cinereous 
pubescence; the legs rufo-piceous beneath ; a minute white 
spot at the base of the anterior and intermediate tibiz outside ; 
the posterior tibize and basal joint of the tarsi densely clothed 
with fulvous pubescence; the scutellum naked, flattened, 
deeply notched behind, and forming two horse-shoe shapes ; 
wings dark fuscous. Abdomen slightly shining, and having 
an interrupted yellow fascia at its basal margin; the three 
following segments with an oblong oblique yellow macula, 
pointed at its apex within, the first much larger than either of 
the following, the third sometimes obsolete ; the fourth and 
fifth segments with their apical margins more or less testa- 
ceous ; the sixth, as well as the apical margins of the segments 
beneath, rufo-testaceous and fringed with pale fulvous pu- 
bescence. 

Hab. Brazil (Tunantins, Amazon). 


*11. Epicharis affinis. 


Female. Length 9 lines. Black; head slightly shining ; 
the clypeus and labrum strongly punctured. The insect 


Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Epicharis. 321 


otherwise closely resembling Z. scutellata, from which it differs 
in having the scutellum rounded behind; the legs dark rufo- 
piceous ; the tibiz have no spots at their apex; the abdomen 
is black-brown, and the basal segment of the abdomen is im- 
maculate, the apical segment has no pale pubescence, and the 
fringe on the segments beneath is dark brown. 

Hab. Brazil (‘Tunantins, Amazon) ; Bahia. 


A specimen from Bahia has the lateral macule on the second 
segment larger, and has a narrow fascia at the basal margin 
of the third segment. 


*12. Epicharis conica. 
Female. Length 9-103 lines. Head and thorax black, the 


abdomen ferruginous, the flagellum of the antenne obscurely 
ferruginous beneath. Thorax shining and impunctate, the 
sides and the metathorax posteriorly clothed with sooty-black 
pubescence ; all the femora ferruginous beneath ; the posterior 
tibie and the first joint of the tarsi ferruginous, and clothed 
exteriorly with dense pale fulvous pubescence ; wings fusco- 
hyaline. Abdomen conical, ferruginous, the posterior margins 
of the segments usually more or less fuscous ; palest beneath, 
and with the apical margins of the segments fringed with 
bright fulvous pubescence. 

Male. A little smaller than the female; the labrum, and 
scape of the antenne white in front; the first jomt of the 
intermediate tarsi above, the posterior tibia, and first joint of 
the tarsi fringed above with fulvous pubescence ; the posterior 
tibie in front pale ferruginous; the tarsi bright yellow in 
front, and the first joint terminating at its apex in a sharp 
spine; the claw-joint elongate. Otherwise like the female. 


Hab. Brazil (Villa Nova, Para). 


*13. Epicharis albofasciata. 


Male. Length 53 lines. Black; the labrum, an interrupted 
transverse line on the clypeus at its apical margin, its sides, 
and a line on the mandibles yellow; the scape of the antennz 
in front white, the flagellum fulvous beneath. ‘Thorax: an 
abbreviated line on each side of the collar, a spot on the 
tegule (which are testaceous) in front, another behind, and 
the posterior half of the scutellum yellow ; wings subhyaline ; 
legs ferruginous, and more or less fuscous above ; the posterior 
tibie and first joint of the tarsi fringed above with sooty-black 
pubescence; the claws of the tarsi black. Abdomen black 
above and rufo-testaceous beneath ; above, the second segment 
with a narrow white fascia near its basal margin, the fourth 


322 Bibliographical Notice. 


segment with a narrow yellow fascia at its basal margin, 
usually more or less interrupted in the middle; the fitth 
segment has a similar fascia; the apical segments are reddish 
yellow; the fascia on the fourth segment is frequently ob- 
solete. 


Hab. Brazil (St. Paulo, Para). 
[To be continued. | 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE. 


Synopsis of the Acridide of North America. By Cyrus Tomas, 
Ph.D. Being Part I. of the Fifth Volume of the ‘ Report of the 
United-States Geological Survey of the Territories, issued by the 
Department of the Interior. 4to: Washington, 1873. 


THERE is one particular in which the Government of the United 
States puts those of European countries to utter shame. This is the 
liberality shown in America in the promotion of scientific research, 
both by the central Government and by the Legislatures of the 
various States. All over the States geological surveyors are hard at 
work; and the results of their labours are given to the world in a 
constantly increasing series of valuable yolumes, which are most 
liberally circulated gratuitously in other countries. With a breadth 
of view which deserves all praise, the geological surveyors do not 
confine themselves to mapping the geological formations of various 
districts, and describing the fossils obtained from them, but they de- 
vote a good deal of attention to the recent productions of the regions 
traversed by them; and the results of their investigations are pub- 
lished from time to time at the public cost, and as an integral part 
of the work properly belonging to the surveys. 

Dr. Thomas’s “ Synopsis of the Acridide of North America ” is 
one of these publications, and it forms the first part of a volume 
which is to be devoted exclusively to the recent zoology and botany 
of the United States. After giving a list of works on the Ortho- 
ptera referred to in his monograph, the author describes, in consider- 
able detail, the external and internal structure of the insects belong- 
ing to the family the American species of which form its subject- 
matter. This introduction, which is illustrated with two outline 
wood-engravings, furnishes a guide to the terminology of the parts 
in these insects. 

With regard to the oviposition of the Acridide, Dr. Thomas states 
that the destructive migratory species of the West (Caloptenus 
spretus), like the migratory locusts of Europe, deposits its eggs, to 
the number of 50 or 100, in a cocoon-like mass, covered with a 
tough glutinous secretion, but that this method is by no means 
followed by all other American species. Even the red-legged locust 
(Caloptenus femur-rubrum) was found by him to lay its eggs loosely 
in rotten wood. 


Bibliographical Notice. 323 


Dr. Thomas enters at great length into the question of the clas- 
sification of the Orthoptera, and gives a complete revision of all the 
more important systems which have been proposed by various 
authors, from Linnzus downwards. His final result is an adoption 
of Burmeister’s classification of the families, except that he includes 
the Forficulide, placed by Burmeister as a distinct tribe. He 
divides his Acridide into two subfamilies, the Acridine and the 
Tettiginee, and the former again into seven groups, as shown in the 
following Table (p. 40) :— 


I, Anterior margin of the prosternum truncate, not 
elevated ; claws furnished with pulvilli; pro- 
notum shorter than the abdomen ............++ Subfam. 1. Acripinz. 
A. Antennx 6-8-jointed, not longer than the head Group 1. Proscopini. 
AA. Antennz multiarticulate, longer than the 
head. 
a, Head produced in front in the form of a 
cone or pyramid; face very oblique; an- 
tenn ensiform, triquetrous. 
Dp. Wlytra Harrow ............6ecesssesenccsssscees Group 2. Tryxalini. 
bb. Elytra very broad. ...............0.0seseeseee Group 3. Trigonopterygini. 
aa. Face suboblique or vertical. 
b. Antennz filiform, subdepressed, or cla- 
vate ; joints indistinct. 
ce. Prosternum unarmed ............:6ceeeees Group 4. Cdipodini. 
cc. Prosternum spimed).................-..---- Group 5. Aecridini. 
bb. Antennze acuminate; joints distinct; 
front more or less advanced between 
the antenns, in the form of a blunt 


cone. 
c.. Joints of antennee flat ............c0ccees.- Group 6. Xiphocerini. 
ce. Joints of antennz terete..............448 Group 7. Phymatint. 


II. Anterior margin of the prosternum elevated ; 
claws without pulvilli; pronotum extending to 
the tip of the abdomen..,.............csscessessesens Subfam. 2, Terrien. 
FAS ELOSterNUM UNATMNCH cos. .-.2c0sccesemesesscoscnsor Group 8. Tettigini. 


Mr. Walker’s Pamphagide are included in the group Xiphocerini. 
Five of the above groups have representatives in the fauna of the 
United States, the first, third, and seventh being deficient. In the 
present work, however, Dr. Thomas works out the genera and species 
only of four groups, the Tettiginze being described chiefly from the 
writings of previous entomologists. 

The author tells us that the number of species of Acrididz (ex- 
clusive of Tettigine) known to occur in the United States is about 
120, belonging to 25 genera. The number described in Fischer’s 
‘Orthoptera Europea’ (1853) was 77, belonging to 20 genera. 
The total number of species (including 20 Tettigine) found in the 
North-American region (taking in British America, Mexico and 
Central America, and the West Indies) is 227; these belong to 46 
genera, 4 of which are Tettigine. Characters of these, principally 
compiled from the writings of other authors, are given as a sort of 
appendix to the body of the ‘‘ Synopsis.’ Of the 120 species in- 
habiting the United States, 40 have been described as new by the 
author in this and former memoirs; and he tells us that many of 
these have been figured by Professor Townend Glover in a lately 


324 Miscellaneous. 


published work, entitled ‘Illustrations of North-American Ento- 
mology,’ which we have not seen. 

Of course any special criticism of this work is quite out of the 
question, unless one were prepared to go through nearly the same 
amount of labour that the author has bestowed upon it. The genera 
and species are most carefully characterized, tables are freely intro- 
duced to facilitate their determination, and the whole book bears 
the impress of most conscientious work. Here and there we seem 
to see indications of a desire to draw the line of specific distinction 
too tightly ; but without a knowledge of the species it is of course 
impossible to pronounce a decided opinion upon such matters; and 
we can only welcome Dr. Thomas’s memoir as a most important 
contribution to our knowledge of American entomology. It 1s illus- 
trated with a nicely executed plate of outline figures, designed to 
show the general characters of a few of the genera referred to. 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


Eozoon canadense. By Prof. Max Scuvtrze. 


Tue discovery of the American geologists Sir William Logan and 
Prof. Dawson with regard to a peculiar fossil in the primeeval lime- 
stones of the oldest formation of Canada, which they thought must 
be referred to the Foraminifera, and named Hozoon canadense, has ob- 
tained a provisional settlement by the investigations of Dr. W. B.Car- 
penter, of London, whose extensive works upon the Foraminifera are 
recognized as occupying the first rank. Carpenter considers there 
is no doubt that the discoidal masses, about a foot in diameter and 
several inches thick, composed of alternate layers of greenish sili- 
cates (serpentine or augite) and carbonate of lime (or magnesia), 
which, caked together into irregular nests, occur in the Laurentian 
deposits of Canada hitherto regarded as perfectly azoic, represent 
the remains of a many-chambered Foraminifer of the habit of the 
Acervuline, M. Schultze. Like the glauconitic filling of more recent 
Foraminifera, the serpentinous mass of the Hozoon has penetrated 
into the interior of the chambers, while the intervening calcareous 
bands represent the original calcareous walls of the chambers. In 
these, in well-preserved specimens, there is a complex, ramified 
canal-system, connected with the original cavities of the chambers, 
and filled, like these, with a silicate which is insoluble in acids. 
Carpenter compares them to the canals detected in various fossil 
and recent Foraminifera, which occur arranged in bundles, as, for 
- example, in Calcarina or Siderolites calcitrapoides from the chalk of 
Maestricht. 

The statements of the above-mentioned. English and American 
observers have been received with much mistrust, especially in Ger- 
many. In fact there can be no doubt that much of what has been 
given out as Hozoon shows no kind of organic structure when ex- 
amined under sufficiently high powers. The author therefore 


Miscellaneous. 320 


thought it important to make a fresh examination of admitted ori- 
ginal specimens. Such a specimen, transmitted directly by Dawson, 
was placed at his disposal by Professors Schimper and Benecke, on 
the occasion of his visiting the museum at Strasburg. From his 
investigation of this specimen and of some received from Carpenter, 
the author confirmed, and showed in numerous drawings, the pre- 
sence of a highly developed canal-system in many of the calcareous 
bands, especially the broader ones. The form and arrangement of 
these canals is often beautifully preserved, even though their in- 
terior is filled with a crystalline silicate. Here and there the struc- 
ture has the greatest resemblance to that of the dentine of the 
teeth, which is also traversed by canals. But for many reasons 
there can be no question of dentine in this case. The application 
of stronger powers shows that in the finer structure of the canals 
there is so great an agreement with that of Polytrema among the 
living Acervuline, that, weighing all the other conditions of struc- 
ture which come into consideration, there can be no serious doubt 
as to the foraminiferous nature of Hozoon canadense.—From a report 
of the Meeting of the Niederrheinische Gesellschaft fur Natur- und 
Heilkunde at Bonn, July 7, 1873, in the ‘Kélner Zeitung,’ August 
14, 1873. 


Notes on the Skulls of two undescribed Species of Sea-lions (Otaria). 
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c. 


The British Museum has a series of fourteen skulls of the common 
sea-lion, from the largest size (16 inches long) to that of the pups, 
and of both sexes. 

They are all characterized by their short, broad lower jaws, the 
space between the under part of the two sides being bowed out, and 
the lower margin, from the gonyx to the angle of the jaw, being of 
the,same length as the space between the two jaws at the angle. 

Phe lower jaws are swollen on the sides and broad infront. The 
scar of the temporal muscle on the hinder part of the lower jaw is 
broad, rounded in front. There are specimens in the Museum from 
various parts of South America, as Peru, Chili, the Falkland Islands, 
and the Coast of Patagonia. 

The skulls of the young and of some of the older ones have the 
sixth upper grinder behind the back edge of the front of the zygo- 
matic arch; but in the skulls of the aged animals the zygoma is dila- 
ted, and the tooth comes to be partially or entirely before the hinder 
edge of the zygoma, sometimes differing on the two sides of the 
same skull. 

In the British Museum there are two skulls of adult animals 
which differ in having the lower jaws straight, not bowed on the 
side, and elongate, the lower margin from the angle to the gonyx 
being cousiderably longer than the space between the two sides of 
the jaw at the angle, and the front of the lower jaw flattened on the 
sides, and the scar of the temporal muscle is elongate, narrow in 
front. I propose to name them 


Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 23 


326 Miscellaneous. 


Otaria minor. The Smaller Sea-lion. 

Skull of an adult male 113 inches long, and 64 inches wide at the 
condyles; the nose dilated in front; the palate very deep, wide, 
broad in front, contracted behind, with the lateral processes rather 
contracted, the sixth upper grinder behind the edge of the front of 
the zygomatic arch ; the lower jaw 83 inches long, wide and strong, 
contracted and flat on the sides in front, and with an elongated scar 
behind left by the temporal muscle. 

Hab. Unknown. Received from Mr. E. Cross, 1854. 


This skull may be the same as Otaria Godeffroyi, Peters, described 
and figured from a specimen in the museum at Hamburg, which is 
about the same size; but the lower jaw is not of the same shape 
as the lower jaw of the skull in the Museum, the scar of the 
large temporal muscle is broad and rounded at the end, as in the 
jaws of the common sea-lion, and the sixth upper grinder is before 
the back edge of the front of the zygoma; so that I am inclined to 
think that the Hamburg skull belongs to a small species allied to, or 
is a small variety of, the common sea-lion (Otaria jubata). 


Otaria pygmea. The Pigmy Sea-lion. 

The skull of an adult (female) 9} inches long, and 5} broad at 
the condyles. 

The palate is very narrow, deep, scarcely wider behind; the 
sixth upper grinder is behind the hinder edge of the front of the 
zygomatic arch. The lower jaw is comparatively slender, 63 inches 
long, compressed and flat in front. 

Hab. Unknown. The specimen was received from the Zoologi- 
eal Society in 1858. 


This skull is partly broken behind, and wants all the grinders 
and the greater part of the cutting-teeth. The canines are com- 
paratively small, which makes me think thatit belongs to a female ; 
indeed I might regard it as the female belonging to the same species 
as the skull before described, but for the peculiar form and narrow- 
ness of the palate. 

The palates of the two sexes of the common sea-lion are of the 
same form, though they become deep with age and those of the males 
more contracted behind; so that they give no authority for believing 
that the palates of the two sexes of an allied species are so different. 


The Succession of Life in North America. By Epwarp D. Corr, 


The United States east of the Missouri river and the plains have 
been free from changes of level for a much longer period than that 
portion which lies to the west of such an imaginary line. It was 
alternately dry and submerged during a long period in the infancy 
of geological time, but became finally so established as to permit of 
no further descent of level, or, at most, of slight ones only. The 
last stages of this process of creation were witnessed at the close of 
the Carboniferous period, when the elevations of land were wide- 
spread, inclosing tracts of water within bars or in depressions, 


Miscellaneous. ont 


These water areas were of course at first salt; but, as they had no 
communication with the sea and received abundant supplies of pure 
water from streams and rains, they soon became fresh. They then 
became the centres of rank vegetation, which either as moss filled 
them up with its dense growth, or as large trees formed forests on 
the shores. Later submergences covered all this material with a 
heavy coating of mud-deposit, which now appears to us in the form 
of strata of clay and sandstone rock. Thus was produced the coal, 
which has played so important a part in human progress. So fre- 
quent were the alternations of level that at one place in Nova Scotia 
as many as seventy-six beds of coal separate as many strata of other 
materials, and the whole amount of deposit amounts to fifteen 
thousand five hundred feet. As the elevating force became more 
powerful, the amount of dry land increased, until the lifting of the 
Alleghany Mountains to a height of twenty thousand feet con- 
cluded the process. 

Previous to this time vertebrated animals had been inhabitants 
of water only, so far as the preserved remains have been discovered ; 
but now air-breathers were introduced, which, instead of fins, 
possessed limbs adapted for walking on dry land. These creatures 
were all salamanders, and related to the frogs, beginning life in the 
water and passing through a metamorphosis before reaching the 
perfect state. 

The western regions were during this time occupied by a bound- 
less ocean, whose western limit has not yet been ascertained ; and 
such it continued for many ages, while the east was bringing forth 
plant and animal each afterits kind. The strata deposited in the 
bottom of the western sea covered each other successively, so that 
it is only the later chapters of the history that are now revealed to 
us in the exposed beds of the upper formations. But the history of 
the east was repeated. Its eastern coast-line rose and fell gradually 
and islands appeared in the far west, heralding the birth of 
another continent. Slowly the land areas extended, the western 
growing from islands to a long narrow continent, honeycombed 
with lagoons and lakes. The great central sea (now Kansas, Dakota, 
&c.) contracted and finally lost its connexion with the ocean alto- 
gether. The water areas, however, were for a long period brackish, 
and brought forth oysters and other shell-fish of dubious proclivities, 
capable of living in either salt or fresh water, but thriving in a 
mixture of both. The land was covered with a rich and dense forest 
vegetation, and the bog-moss again encroached on the lakes; but 
the forest was in great contrast to that of the carboniferous period. 
Instead of huge ferns and tree mosses we have the more highly 
organized and beautiful forms represented by the existing deciduous 
trees. Oaks, sassafras, magnolia, and poplar shaded a dense under- 
growth of shrubs, while palms and some other tropical families di- 
stinguished the general effect from the familiar one of to-day. But 
the moss performed its old function of coal-maker. Humblest 
among plants, its existence has been more important in world- 
building than that of all the lords of the forest. Its masses died, 

23* 


328 Miscellaneous. 


and new layers of the living plant grew upon them, until the descent of 
the land and encroachment of waters deposited the stone lid upon 
their treasury of carbon, not to be unsealed until the long future 
day of human empire. The alternations of land and water were 
numerous. At one point on the Union Pacifie railroad a section 
displays one hundred and seventy-three distinct strata, of which 
thirty-six are either coal or mingled with vegetable matter, while 
the others are frequently composed almost exclusively of fresh- and 
brackish-water shells. The elevation, however, exceeded the de- 
pressions, the brackish estuaries and lagoons were transformed into 
freshwater lakes, and at length the noble ranges of the Rocky 
Mountains bounded the horizon in many directions. 

The salt ocean has not only been the dwelling-place of gill- 
breathing fishes, but also of many forms of air-breathing vertebrates. 
These were reptiles, and exhibited a great superiority of structure 
over the air-breathers that peopled the swamps and land of the coal 
period. When the land and the fresh waters claimed the great 
west, the sea saurians perished; for their limbs were not fitted for 
the changed circumstances, Smaller races held the land, and, with 
a few monsters that never had been ocean-dwellers, represented the 
swarming reptilian life of the past. 

But a new dynasty was to rule the earth; the mammal, with hot 
blood and active brain, was to use the rich stores of the newer vege- 
table world ; and life was to be exhibited on a higher platform. 

The lakes of the west were gradually dried by the cutting of their 
discharging streams down to the level of their bottoms. This was 
of course soonest accomplished in lakes of the greatest elevation— 
for instance, those within the highest range of the mountain-chains. 
Others continued for a longer period, and others to a comparatively 
still more recent date, Their deposits contain a faithful record of 
the life of the surrounding land, doubtless embracing many species 
that ranged to the Atlantic ocean. We have thus the means of 
studying the character of five successive periods, which must be to 
us a mine of interesting inquiry, and a source of evidence as to the 
nature of that life and the thoughts of its great Author. 

The names of the beds, with the regions where chiefly found, are 
the following:—(1) The Lignite series or Upper Cretaceous (Mon- 
tana, Dakota, Wyoming, Colorado); (2) Eocene Lake (Wyoming, 
West Colorado); (8) Miocene (Nebraska, Oregon, E. Colorado) ; 
(4) Pliocene (Nebraska, Idaho, Oregon, E. Colorado); (5) Post- 
pliocene (caves of the east), The quadrupeds begin in full blast in 
the Eocene; and none whatever are known from beds of the prece- 
ding or cretaceous agea—a remarkable circumstance, and not easy to 
account for, especially as it is the case all over the world, so far as 
known ; yet there were a few of this high division during a period. 
that preceded the cretaceous. In Wyoming, therefore, we find life 
first in the form with which it has pleased Divine power to invest 
ourselves, but in no case presenting any close resemblance to the 
human species. The predominant styles were those resembling the 
tapir, the opossum, the bat, the mole, and the squirrel. There were 


Miscellaneous. 329 


no cloven-footed animals that chew the cud (ruminants), no horses, 
no elephants, no rhinoceros or hippopotamus, and, it is thought, no 
true cat- or dog-like flesh-eaters. To take their places were strange 
creatures that combine the characteristics of these divisions now so 
widely separated. Thus there were forms between the horse and 
tapir, between the elephant and tapir, and between the rhinoceros 
and tapir. There were numerous monkeys which resembled nearly 
as much the raccoon and the coati. The land carnivora resembled 
in many ways the seals ; and the division of the opossum and the 
kangaroo had sundry representatives. A more curious and, to some, 
unexpected faunal combination, constituting a homogeneous whole, 
does not exist in any known formation. 

In the next period (Miocene) a great addition to the living types 
of animals took place; so that the contrast between this formation 
and the Eocene is very great. <A portion of almost any part of the 
skeleton of a quadruped would thus enable the paleontologist to de- 
termine the age of the formation from which it had been procured. 
Thus ruminating animals exist in the greatest profusion, a few 
horses appear, two species of elephants (mastodon) are known, and 
there are a great many species of rhinoceros. The peculiar inter- 
mediate divisions of the Wyoming beds no longer peopled the land ; 
the strange beings compounded with the tapir have abandoned the 
earth in favour of more decided types. One or two tapirs hold over, 
and one of the anomalous monkeys. The snakes and lizards are 
nearly the same ; but the crocodiles that swarmed during the Eocene 
have entirely disappeared. 

If we examine the character of the representatives of living 
orders in greater detail, we shall find the phenomenon observed in 
the structure of the Eocene quadrupeds repeated, but within a nar- 
rower limit of variation. Thus the modern ruminants may be 
roughly stated as belonging to the families of the hogs, camels, 
musk-deer, and oxen. In the Miocene there are neither oxen nor 
deer, while many species in enormous droves present structure of 
hog, camel, and deer combined, or camel plus musk and hog. 
The horses had three toes and were more or less like tapirs ; and 
some of the rhinoceroses shared similar peculiarities. One strange 
set of creatures combined characters of tapir and rhinoceros with 
those of those Eocene beasts that combined the elephant and tapir. 
The latter have been called Hobasileus, the former Symborodon. 
The Hobasileus had three pairs of long horns—the first at the snout, 
the last on the back of the skull ; the feet were like the elephant’s ; 
and it carried a pair of knife-like tusks. It probably had a short 
trunk. The Symborodon had feet more like the rhinoceros, but it 
stood high on the legs like the elephant ; the tusks were reduced 
to a small size, while one pair of horns stood upon the top of the 
head. They represented the front pair of the Hobasileus, and either 
stood on the nose or over the eyes. Their shape differed in the 
different species: in some they were long and round, in others flat ; 
in others they were three-sided and turned outward. One species 
had enormously expanded cheek-bones, and was nearly as large as 


330 Miscellaneous. 


an elephant; it has been called Symborodon bucco. The long- 
horned species was as large as the Indian rhinoceros, and is called 
Symborodon acer. The species with three-cornered horns is inter- 
mediate in size. 

Besides these larger quadrupeds there were myriads of the small 
ones, whose evident adaptation for insect- and seed-eating habits 
indicate the abundance of such supplies. ‘Thus there were moles, 
mice, squirrels, and not less than seven species of rabbits. Areas 
exist where the beds of the formation laid bare by the weather are 
found to be covered with the delicate remains of these animals. 
They cover the surface in such profusion as to resemble the loose 
grain on the farmer’s barn-floor in harvest time. 

The Pliocene stratum, above the Miocene, is usually present in 
the regions where the latter occurs, though not invariably. It has 
a more sandy character, while the older beds are more clayey. 
The life they disclose is quite distinct from that we have just passed 
in review, differing from it much in the same way that it differs 
from that below it, 7. e. the Eocene. In other words, it is still 
more like the life of the present time, and the curious intermediate 
or (to speak inaccurately) the mixed divisions have nearly disap- 
peared. We have now true dogs and weasels, true elephants, and a 
few true deers and antelopes. The camels are almost like those 
now living; and while the horses have three toes, the side toes are 
much reduced, and the teeth are much more nearly like those of 
living horses. Rhinoceroses still abound; but all their mixed tapi- 
roid and elephantine kindred have utterly disappeared. 

A curious feature in the dentition of the horses and camels of 
this period has been observed. The temporary or milk-teeth of 
the horses were very much like the permanent or second series of 
the horses of the preceding or Miocene formation. The second or 
permanent teeth differed from them, and resembled exactly in type 
the temporary or milk-teeth of the living horses. The case of the 
camels is similar. Like the hogs they possessed a full set of upper 
teeth in front, which they soon shed, thus taking on one of their 
true camel characters; but their permanent series all round after 
this shedding was like that of the milk-dentition of the existing 
camels and llamas. In the latter animals the number of the perma- 
nent teeth is less than that of the first series in one part of the 
mouth, thus producing another type. 

In the fifth and last period we observe another marked change 
in the life. Most of the Mammalia are nearly related to those now 
living in this and other continents, while a great many forms of the 
past are lost. The monkeys did not reach into the Pliocene, so far 
~ as we know ; now the rhinoceros leaves us. A few remnants only 
survive of the camels and horses. Oxen first appear either as the 
giant bison or the southern musk-oxen ; deer of great size exist. 
The loss is replaced by South-American types, especially gigantic 
sloths, in great abundance, with droves of tapirs and pecearies. For 
the first time we have the raccoons and bears, the latter of the 
same character as those found with the fossil sloths in Buenos Ayres. 


Miscellaneous. 331 


True cats, like the jaguar and the tiger, roam the forests; and wea- 
sels and otters inhabit the banks of the streams. 

The modern time has come, so far as the patterns of the animals 
are concerned ; but their habitations are still different from those 
which their representatives preserve at the present day. But nearly 
all the post-pliocene quadrupeds belong to different species from 
those now living. 

The present appearance of the mammalian family in North Ame- 
rica is due to the following changes :—The llamas, sloths, tapirs, 
and peccaries have all been banished to Mexico and South America ; 
so also most of the large cats. The horses, mastodons, and ele- 
phants were extinguished. The deer type seems to have expanded, 
while one ox (the bison) and an antelope remain. The wild dogs, 
weasels, &c. number about as many species now as in the past, while 
the variety of bears seems to have increased; on the other hand 
only one of the large cats (the puma) remains. That strange crea- 
ture the opossum still holds his own far away from his Australian 
kindred. The smaller rodent quadrupeds are almost as much 
varied as ever. Many of these changes have evidently been 
wrought by the glacial period. That frozen epoch brought down 
the arctic life, and either destroyed those forms that could not resist 
its rigours, or drove them into a more southern climate. The musk- 
ox then roamed through the southern States; the walrus haunted 
the coasts of Virginia ; and the reindeer peopled New Jersey. With 
the return of the milder period these again sought the north. 

But a small proportion of the actual number of the species which 
lived during these successive ages is yet known, and the field offers 
many returns for exploration. As an illustration of the manner in 
which opinions respecting the history of life may be corrected by 
discovery, I cite two examples. The bony gar-fishes have been 
often pointed to as exhibiting a remarkable break in the times of 
appearance in geological history. Their latest fossil relatives were 
known to have existed during the ancient period called the jurassic ; 
they did not recur until the present, and now only in the fresh 
waters of North America. This break of at least one third of all 
geological time has been recently much reduced by the discovery of 
gars in great abundance in the Miocene and Eocene periods on this 
continent. The second case is that of the serpents. They were 
only known for a long time in the Eocene of New Jersey, then in 
the same epoch of Wyoming, and lately in the Miocene of Colorado. 

Until recently no fossil monkeys, bats, or opossums were known 
to exist in American formations; and the curious intermediate 
divisions above described as related to elephant, rhinoceros, tapir, 
hog, camel, horse, monkey, &c. are all recent American discoveries. 
—The Penn Monthly, Feb. 1874. 


On Xenelaphus, Furcifer, and Coassus peruvianus of the Peruvian 
Alps. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. 
Mr. Whitely has sent to the British Museum the skins and skulls 
of a male and female Peruvian deer from Ceuchupate, Peru, at an 
elevation of 11000 feet. 


332 Miscellaneous. 


The male, which he calls “Oieidos,” is evidently the same animal 
as I described (from specimens which he had previously collected) 
as Xenelaphus chilensis (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1873, xii. p. 161), 
and as the male of the young animal which MM. Gay and Gervais had 
described in the ‘Ann. Sci. Nat.’ 1846, p. 21, and figured with the 
skull in the Atlas to Gay’s ‘Chili.’ They live in large troops. 

Mr. Whitely’s specimen shows that the horns of the animal which 
I described as Xenelaphus are probably a malformation both in form 
and surface ; for they were covered with beads, whereas the horns of 
the specimen just received have a simple, subulate, slightly grooved 
beam 9 inches long, with a brow-antler of the same form 6 inches 
long, curved upwards and inwards at the tip. 

The colouring of the face and shape of the horns of Mr. Whitely’s 
specimen agree with the figure of Cervus antisiensis given in the 
‘Atlas’ to D’Orbigny’s ‘ Voyage dans l’Amérique méridionale,’ t. xx., 
published in 1847. The skull of this animal does not seem to have 
been observed ; but it probably represents the same species as Cervus 
chilensis of Gay and Gervais. 

As the genus Furcifer of Sundevall was established for the Cervus 
antisiensis of D’Orbigny, and restricted by me to the guemul, it 
will have the priority and take the place of the genus Xenelaphus, 
established on an animal that probably has anomalous horns. 

MM. Gay and Gervais published the account of Cervus chilensis in 
1846; and Gay afterwards figured the skull, which leaves no doubt 
about the identity of the species. Their specific name will have 
priority, and the animal will have to be called Furcifer chilensis. 

The female specimen, which is named “ Venados,” is much smaller 
and has a softer fur; they live always in pairs, and never mix 
with the Oieidos. It has the general colouring of the “Oieidos ” 
(Furcifer chilensis), but the top of the face is blackish. This speci- 
men is accompanied by its skull, and is evidently the same species 
as the skull of a female obtained from Mr. Whitely in 1873 from 
Peru, which is figured in the ‘ Hand-list of Ruminants,’ t. xxxy. 
fig. 2, and as the skull of a male with deformed horns, received from 
the Zoological Society under the name of Cervus antisiensis, and 
figured in the ‘Hand-list,’ t. xxxv. fig. 1,—both as Furcifer anti- 
siensis. These skulls differ from Xenelaphus chilensis and Huamela 
leucotis in having only a small shallow tear-pit, whereas those 
animals have a large deep one. , 

There is no doubt that the ‘Venados ” of Peru is quite distinct 
from all the other South-American deer or skulls of deer that we 
have in the Museum. The skulls agree with those of Coassus in the 
small size of the tear-pit; but I do not venture to decide to 
what genus the only male skull that we have with deformed hérns 
is to be referred, but will denominate it Cervus (Coassus) peruvi- 
anus, distinguished from all the other species of Coassus by its large 
size, of which Furcifer antisiensis, Gray (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 
1873, xii. p. 162, Hand-list of Ruminants, t. xxxv. figs. 1 & 2), will 
be asynonym. It is quite distinct from the Coassus Whitelyi, Gray 
(Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1873, xii. p. 163, Hand-list of Ruminants, 
t. xxxil. fig. 2), also from Peru. 


THE ANNALS 


AND 


MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. 


{FOURTH SERIES. } 


No. 77. MAY 1874. 


XLV.—On Duncanella, a new Genus of Paleozoic Corals. 
By H. AtLteyne Nicuoxson, M.D., D.Sc., F.R.S.E., &c., 
Professor of Natural History in University College, To- 
ronto. 


My friend Mr. U. P. James, of Cincinnati, well known 
amongst American paleontologists by his ‘ Catalogue of the 
Lower Silurian Fossils of Ohio,’ has recently placed in my 
hands several specimens of a curious little coral from the 
Niagara group of Indiana, which appears to me to form the 
type of a new genus, and which I propose to call Duncanella, 
in honour of Professor P. M. Duncan, one of the highest of 
living authorities on the fossil Actinozoa. The characters of 
the genus are as follows :— 

Corallum simple, conical, free, and non-adherent. Calice 
deep, circular, very slightly expanded above. Septa included 
within the calice, apparently in multiples of six, extending to 
the centre of the theca. A columella wanting, or at any rate 
non-determinable. Epitheca well developed, with vertical 
and encircling strize extending to the margin of the calice, but 
deficient at the base, where it leaves a circular aperture from 
which the septa protrude in the form of a small cone. No 
tabulze or dissepiments. 

The affinities of Duncanella would appear to be with the 
Turbinolide; but it cannot be placed under any recorded 
genus of this family, nor does it even show any decided rela- 
tionship with any type of the Aporosa. I should have been 

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xin. 4 


354 On a new Genus of Paleozoic Corals. 


disposed to place these corals under the genus Petraia but 
for two facts. In the first place, the septa appear to be 
clearly arranged in multiples of six, being twelve at the base 
and eighteen in number at the calice; whilst, in the second 
place, there is the anomalous character that the extreme base 
of the corallum is destitute of an epitheca. The visceral 
chamber is thus open below as well as above, the inferior 
aperture being distinctly circumscribed, circular in form, and 
exposing to view the slightly exsert septa. At first sight I 
thought this aperture might perhaps be accidental ; but it is 
present in all the specimens I have examined, with the excep- 
tion of one large example, in which it appears to have been 
cicatrized, and is only obscurely and with difficulty recog- 
nizable. From the cyathophylloid corals Duncanella is 


Duncanella borealis, Nich.: a, side view of an average specimen, of the 
natural size; 6, vertical section, showing the very deep cylindroid 
calice; c, transverse section, enlarged; d, side view of the base, en- 
larged, showing the inferior aperture and slightly exsert septa; e, the 
base viewed from below, much enlarged, showing the absence of the 
epitheca and the septa meeting in a central point. 


distinguished by not having the septa in multiples of four, 
and by the total absence of tabule or dissepiments. From 
Cyathaxonia, lastly, the present genus is distinguished by its 
want of a columella and septal fossette, the number of the 
septa, and the characters of the base. 

The following is the only species of the genus that has come 
under my notice :— 


Duncanella borealis (Nicholson). 


Corallum simple, free, cylindro-conic, from 7 to 10 lines in 
length, and 2 lines in diameter at the calice. The base is 
truncated, destitute of an epitheca, and exhibiting a circular 
opening about half a line in diameter. Within this opening 
are seen twelve septa which extend from the circumference to 
the centre, and usually project slightly in the form of a little 
cone. The rest of the coral is covered with a well-developed 
epitheca, which exhibits well-marked longitudinal ridges, 
together with a few shallow annulations of growth, between 


On a new Genus of Carboniferous Polyzoa. 335 


which are fine encircling strie. The calice is extremely deep, 
occupying about one third of the total length of the corallum, 
ceylindroid, and only slightly expanded towards its margin. 
Eighteen equally developed septa appear in transverse sec- 
tions of the ccral immediately below the bottom of the cup; 
and these meet in the centre of the visceral chamber, appa- 
rently without the intervention of any columella, though 
seemingly somewhat elevated centrally. There are no traces 
of either tabule or dissepiments, and the interseptal loculi 
appear to extend uninterruptedly from the base to the calice. 
Towards the margins of the calice the septa appear to become 
obsolete ; but their free edges are unknown. 

Locality and Formation.—Niagara Group (Upper Silurian), 
Indiana, U.S.A. Collected by Mr. U. P. James. 


XLVI.—On a new Genus of Carboniferous Polyzoa. By 
Professor JoHN Younc, M.D., and Mr. JoHn Youne, 
Hunterian Museum, University of Glasgow. 


[Plate XVI. B. figs. 1-6.] 


AFTER a careful examination of the literature of Ceriopora 
gracilis, Phillips, sp., the only conclusion we can come to is 
that a polyzoon and a coral have been confused. With the 
coral we have not at present to do; but to make clear our 
position, we ‘shall quote the generic and specific descriptions. 


“ CeRIOPORA (pars), Goldfuss, 1826; Blainville, 1834 ; 
D’Orbigny, 1847. 

* Colony fixed by the base, from which cylindrical dichoto- 
mous branches proceed, giving a dendroid aspect. Hach 
branch is provided with several superposed layers, enveloping 
each other, the cells being simply round pores on the surface. 

“ Goldfuss, in 1826, placed under Ceriopora a multitude of 
diverse Bryozoa. In 1834 Blainville considerably restricted 
the characters of the genus, and only placed in it species pro- 
vided with several layers of superposed cells, whether the 
colony is branching or bulbous. Now, in accordance with the 
plan we have adopted with all the Bryozoa, we think the 
name Ceriopora ought to be reserved more specially for the 
branching dendroid species, the globular non-dendroid species 
forming the genus Reptomulticava. Hence it will be necessary 
to change the names of several of the Certopore admitted in 
1847 into our ‘ Prodrome de Paléontologie Stratigraphique ;’ 

24* 


336 Messrs. Young on a new Genus 


for at that time we had not recognized the differences based 
on the presence of one or more layers of cells.” —D’OrBIGNY, 
Paléontologie Frangaise, v. p. 1029 (1850-52). 


“ CERIOPORA, nobis. (Alveolite species, Lam.) 


“ Polypary stony, sessile or affixed, composed of several 
concentric layers of cells enveloping each other; cellules 
tubular or subprismatic, subcontiguous, parallel or divergent.” 
—Go.pruss, Petrefacta Germanie, p. 32. 

At page 244 the polyp-cells of these corals are described as 
round short tubes which have neither transverse nor vertical 
lamellz, neither a siphon nor lateral connecting tubules. They 
sometimes lie parallel and immediately in contact with each 
other, and press on each other so as to appear obscurely pris- 
matic; sometimes they diverge. Their apertures are equal 
in diameter to the tubes, and are seldom constricted or dilated. 
The polypary enlarges by the concentric superposition of new 
layers. The branches of this mass are likewise made up of 
several layers. 

Pictet (‘Traité de Paléontologie,’ 1857, iv. p. 154) places 
Ceriopora under the family Tubuliporides, tribe Foraminés— 
among those, therefore, which have the cells pierced in the 
common calcareous mass, and not salient. He considers this 
genus one which should rather be abolished than restricted. 
His definition is, “they form colonies composed of equal or 
nearly equal cells united by their margins, and not prolonged 
into tubes.” > 


“ Certopora, Goldfuss. 


“ Polypidom tuberose, composed of numerous thin concentric 
layers ; pores round, unequally placed. 

“This genus was intended by Goldfuss to include several 
fossil forms now referred to Alveolites, Chrysaora, &c. The 
above definition is of the genus as now restricted.” —M‘Coy, 
Paleozoic Fossils, p. 194. 

“ Millepora.— Pores very minute, perpendicular to the 
surface ; cells without lamella.”—Jbid. p. 195. 

Phillips places Milepora, along with Fenestella, Glauconome, 
&ce., among the Polypiaria, along with Favosites and the other 
true corals. 

Morris (‘ Catalogue of British Fossils,’ edit. 1854) puts Ce- 
riopora, Goldfuss, 1826, in the Bryozoa, and gives C. gracilis 
and C. interporosa under that generic heading, Millepora being 
among the Zoophytes. 

Amid this confusion it is apparent that Pictet’s suggestion 


of Carboniferous Polyzoa. 337 


to set aside Certopora has much to commend it; for the con- 
fusion of Corals and Bryozoa commenced with Goldfuss. His 
definition, therefore, is not precise enough, though it is obvious 
that he founded the genus on a coral. M‘Coy’s restricted 
genus also belongs to the Corals ; while Morris, by his transfer 
of the name Cerdopora to a Bryozoon, has left the species under 
consideration without a generic name to which it has a legiti- 
mate title. This question of nomenclature is one of great 
difficulty ; as, however, the essential character of the fossil we 
are about to describe separates it from all other known Carbo- 
niferous forms, we would suggest Rhabdomeson as the generic 
name, the axis being central, not lateral as in Allman’s 


Rhabdopleura. 


Rhabdomeson gracile (nov. gen.). 

Millepora gracilis, Phillips, Pal. Foss. 

Ceriopora gracilis, Morris, Catalogue. 

The stem is slender, cylindrical, branching, the branches 
coming off at right angles to the stem and never less than an 
inch apart, and consists of a hollow axis formed by a thin 
ealcareous tube, and of a series of cells ranged round the axis, 
There are 100 cell-apertures in a linear inch; the apertures 
are oval, with simple outlines, the funnel-shaped depressions 
at the bottom of which they are placed sloping down from the 
erests of the dividing ridges. These ridges are tuberculated, a 
large tubercle, which well-preserved specimens show to be a blunt 
spine, being placed at the upper and lower angles of each aper- 
ture. Hence the periphery of a single cell usually presents 
four such tubercles, while smaller tubercles occur between each 
larger pair. But the aperture of the cell does not occupy the 
whole area of the pore-depression ; a thin lamina reduces the 
orifice, hymen-like, to one fourth of the area of the pit; and 
this restricted orifice is at the upper end of the depression 
(Pl. XVI. B. fig. 4). The cells are conical, the inner extremity 
being in contact with the axis, the cell turning upwards and out- 
wards so that the plane of its aperture is parallel to the axis, 
The apex of the curved cone terminates two cells and a half 
below its orifice. Towards their apices the cells are separated by 
a very thin common wall, which thickens outwards so that the 
orifices are separated by a partition whose thickness is one 
third of the cei of the cell-cavity at its widest part. 
When the cells have been removed so as to expose the hollow 
axis, the wall of the latter is seen to be marked by minute 
round spots, which at first suggested the possibility of a com- 
munication existing between the cavity of the cell and that of 


338 Messrs. Young on a new Genus 


the axis. But careful examination has satisfied us that not 
merely is the cylinder imperforate, but the cones do not even 
abut on it; they run out alongside of it. Both axis and cells 
are filled sometimes with amorphous calcareous matter or with 
clay sediments. In the latter case the casts obtained by dis- 
solving away the skeleton with acid (fig. 3) show a notch on 
the lower side of their widest part corresponding to the thin 
lamina already mentioned, while the mass lying beyond the 
notch is the mass of sediment that filled up the pit or vestibule 
already described. ‘There is no trace of septa in the cell or 
in the axis; there are no tubules putting adjacent cells in com- 
munication ; and there is no sign of avicularia or other external 
processes. ‘The spines are solid; but the worn ones show 
something like a central pit. We have not found the free 
ends of any of the branches; but the equality of all the cells 
forbids the supposition that they are multiplied by intercalation. 
The central tubular axis has a thin wall, which is distinct from 
that of the cells in contact with it (fig. 6). In fact, the line of 
separation between these calcareous layers is everywhere 
recognizable, and is prolonged into the tubercle or spine 
(fig. 6,c). The bounding ridge and tubercle are, in fact, 
shared by adjacent cells, and the calcareous matter is deposited 
in lamine, as shown roughly in figs. 4, 5, & 6, whereas the 
walls of the cells as far as the oral lamella are homogeneous. 
We have not ascertained what is the condition of the calcareous 
matter in these layers, our chief object being to show that a 
central pit in these, as in other similar structures, neither implies 
a central canal nor an articulated appendage. ach cell has, 
in short, its own proper wall. ‘The cells are throughout equal 
or nearly so—the differences seen in fig. 2 being of very rare 
occurrence, though when they exist the regularity of the quin- 
cunx is impaired. But the equality is such as to forbid the 
idea that the cells are intercalated, an important point in the 
definition of Certopora. 

Assuming the hydroid character of the Graptolites, Rhabdo- 
pleura is the only polyzoon hitherto known in which a solid 
axis is found; and in it the cells terminate the nodes of the 
axis. The form just described rather resembles a sclerobasic 
coral in having the axis wholly within the circlet of cells. 
What may be the true affinities of Rhabdomeson, it would be 
rash on our part to attempt to determine. The novelty of the 
type has induced us to publish it at once, reserving the generic 
definition till we complete our investigations into other species 
referred erroneously to Ceriopora. We should be glad if collec- 
tors who may possess forms similar to that here figured would 
lend us specimens for comparison—and would suggest the 


of Carboniferous Polyzoa. 339 


propriety of a reexamination of Websterta crisioides, Edw. & 
Haime, the description having some points of resemblance to 
that of Rhabdomeson. 

Distribution.—Rhabdomeson (Certopora) gracile is common 
in all the limestones and shales which yield Polyzoa through- 
out the west of Scotland. It ranges from the lower to the 
upper members of the Carboniferous Limestone. In some of 
the harder shales specimens occur two or three inches in 
length; while by washing the soft and weathered shales, 
numerous well preserved fragments are easily obtained. In 
some localities it is associated with species ot Certopora, 
viz. C. interporosa, Phill., C. rhombifera, Phill., and C, 
similis, Phill. ; while in other localities it is the only species 
met with. The white limestone of Trearne, near Beith, 
Ayrshire, has yielded numerous natural sections. The stone 
splits in most cases parallel with the axis of the stem, and 
shows the central hollow tube, bare of cells for considerable 
lengths. The tube in these specimens never shows more than 
a fine layer of minute crystals of calcite lining its interior. 
Those from other localities have the tube more or less filled 
with amorphous calcite or clay, or both, If the identification 
with Phillips’s species is correct, this species descends to the 
Pilton group. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVI. B. figs. 1-6. 


Fig. 1. Rhabdomeson gracile (noy. gen.). Fragment, natural size. This 
and the other figures, except fig. 4, were drawn with the camera 
lucida. 

Fig. 2. Ditto, enlarged, to show character of tubercles. 

Fig. 3. Ditto, polished and slightly etched with acid, to show the mesial 
axis, d, and casts of cells: a and ¢ show casts which reach the 
surface in the plane of section; the notch in the lower surface 


of each cast shows the position of the oral lamella, the matter | 


external to the notch being matrix, which fills up the vestibule 
shown in fig. 2. Opposite 6, a fragment of a cell is seen lying 
on the axis; and at e the apices of several cells are seen 
surrounding the axis. 

Fig. 4. Ditto. Diagram of cell, to show conical form, position of lamella, 
and shape of vestibule. 

Fig. 5. Ditto. Transverse section, showing hollow axis and reece | 
cells cut across at various points, and the angular form cayse 
by mutual pressure. 

Fig. 6. Ditto. Two tubercles, greatly enlarged to show structure, as seen 
by transmitted light; a, cell-aperture ; }, central axis; ¢, c’, 
tubercles. 


—— 


340 Mr. J. Blackwall on certain Peculiarities in the 


XLVII.—A Concise Notice of Observations on certain Pecu- 
liarities in the Structure and Functions of the Araneidea. 
By Joun Buackwa Lt, F.L.8. 


Mucu diversity of opinion being entertained by eminent zoo- 
tomists and physiologists with regard to the structure and 
function of certain organs common to spiders belonging to 
several genera, which are situated near the extremity of the 
inferior surface of the abdomen, immediately before the spin- 
ning-mammule, I availed myself of recent visits of a friend, 
Mr. William Statham, to inspect under his excellent binocular 
microscope the parts in question, carefully prepared for the 
purpose by himself. When efficiently illuminated and viewed 
with a magnifying-power of about 125 diameters, they were 
distinctly perceived to be provided with very numerous and 
exceedingly delicate spinning-tubes, completely establishing 
the accuracy of the conclusion at which I had previously 
arrived by minute investigation, namely that the parts consti- 
tute an additional or fourth pair of spinners united throughout 
their entire length*. 

The spiders submitted to examination were Ciniflo atroz, 
C. similis, and Ergatis viridissima. Between the proximate 
extremities of the fourth pair of spinners in the first two spe- 
cies there is a distinct septum; but in Hrgatis viridisstma, 
Mithras paradoxus, and some other small spiders provided 
with the additional spinners no septum is apparent, the entire 
area formed by their contiguous extremities being amply sup- 
plied with spinning-tubes. 

The conjoined spinners composing the fourth pair are moy- 
able, and, when in action, present their extremities to the 
calamistra, which in passing over them draw out and card the 
excessively fine filaments proceeding from the spinning-tubes 
into the two delicate pale blue bands that enter into the com- 
position of every flocculus in the complex snares of Cintflo 
atrox, C. similis, and C. ferox. 

The small spiders, the proximate extremities of whose addi- 
tional spinners are without any definite mark of distinction, 
have the calamistrum (situated upon a ridge on the abdominal 
side of the upper surface of the metatarsal joint of each poste- 
_ rior leg) usually composed of a single row of curved movable 
bristles ; but the calamistrum of the larger species of Cindflo 
commonly consists of two parallel rows of fine spines. 

I may here remark that the calamistra are frequently much 


* Transactions of the Linnean Society of London, vol. xviii. p. 223 
et seq. 


Structure and Functions of the Araneidea. 341 


less conspicuous on male than on female spiders, the occasions 
for their employment being fewer and of minor importance in 
the former than in the latter sex. 

The prevalent opinion, that the very remarkable snare of 
Mithras paradoxus does not afford any evidence in its con- 
struction of the action of the fourth pair of spinners and the 
calamistra with which this spider is provided, is probably erro- 
neous; for I have reason to believe that the transverse lines 
attached to the four radii in the snare of this species are formed 
by the agency of the calamistra in passing over the extremities 
of its spinners ; and this agency is undoubtedly exercised in 
forming the external convex covering of its cocoon. A species 
of Mithras which inhabits the United States of North America 
evidently employs its fourth pair of spinners and calamistra in 
the fabrication of its cell. 

Now, as I am disposed to attach much importance to the 
habits and economy of spiders with reference to their system- 
atic arrangement, the fact that species provided with calamistra 
are always found to possess the additional spinners, and that 
these parts constantly cooperate to produce results affecting 
their economy in a very obvious manner, has not, [ apprehend, 
had that consideration bestowed upon it by arachnologists to 
which it appears to be entitled. 


The late Mr. Richard Beck communicated to the Microsco- 
pical Society of London, in the year 1861, some remarks on 
the formation of the viscid spiral line in the snare of Epeira 
,diadema, commonly denominated the garden spider. In this 
paper, of which I have merely seen an abstract, the following 
statement occurs :—‘‘ With only a pocket-lens I could distinctly 
see that the viscid lines, as first drawn from the abdomen, were 
not dotted. On a careful examination with the microscope, 
the thread at first appeared only slightly thicker than an un- 
gummed line ; but after a very short time undulations appeared, 
and subsequently, at the most regular distances, the viscid 
matter formed into alternating large and small globules. The 
whole process is a beautiful illustration of molecular attraction.” 
Without questioning the accuracy of Mr. Beck’s observa- 
tions, several difficulties present themselves in connexion with 
his explanation of this curious subject, that carefully conducted 
investigation alone can dispel. ‘To some of these difficulties I 
shall now direct attention. 

The fine elastic line on which the viscid globules are distri- 
buted is consolidated; but it is perplexing even to conjecture 
how this consolidation is effected, since, according to Mr. Beck, 
the line is surrounded by a viscid fluid as it is drawn from the 


oes Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


abdomen ; the importance, therefore, of ascertaining by close 
inspection whether the line and the viscid fluid in which it is 
enveloped proceed from the same spinning-tube or not will be 
immediately apparent. It is evident, from the materials of 
which they are composed possessing such widely different pro- 
perties, that they cannot be produced by the same organ of 
secretion. 

There is a difficulty also in comprehending how a cylindrical 
body of viscid fluid can be resolved by molecular attraction 
into a series of large and small globules disposed on the line 
alternately at minute and most regular distances from one 
another. 

Had Mr. Beck been spared to continue his researches, he 
might perhaps have been enabled, by his well-known skill as 
a microscopist and by the advantage he possessed in having 
superior optical instruments at his command, to throw some 
light on the obscure phenomena here submitted to the consi- 
deration of arachnologists, which remain as problems yet 
waiting a solution. 


XLVIII.—On the Invertebrate Marine Fauna and Fishes of 
St. Andrews. By W. C. M‘Intosu. 


[Continued from p. 315. | 


Section II. MOLLUSCA (PROPER). 


The Mollusca are chiefly procured by dredging, examina- 
tion between tide-marks, or the deep-sea lines of the fisher- 
men, though certain storms sometimes strew the sands with 
many species in great profusion. Not a few of the rarer forms 
are found in the stomachs of fishes, such as the cod, haddock, 
and flounder. The remarks on the class may be arranged in 
three divisions, founded on the economical value, peculiar 
habits, and rarity. 

By far the most important species in the first group is the 
common mussel (Mytilus edulis), which occurs in vast numbers 
in the form of mussel-‘ beds”’ on muddy flats, chiefly situated 
on the right bank of the estuary of the river Eden. Attached 
to stones, sticks, and to each other, these shell-fish luxuriate 
in abundance of Diatomacez, Infusoria, and other minute 
forms of animal and vegetable life. From their special value 
as bait the city derives a considerable annual revenue ; and if 
the wise protection only lately enforced were supplemented by 


Mollusca of St. Andrews. 343 


skilful mussel-farming, great increase in revenue might be 
anticipated. Shell-fish, like other animals in civilized parts, 
cannot survive constant inroads without special restrictions. 
Multitudes of the young mollusks, moreover, are found in- 
crusting the poles for the salmon-nets on the West Sands, and 
the rocks, stones, and tangle-roots elsewhere ; but they do not 
attain a large size, apparently from overcrowding and the want 
of congenial food, which the purer water seems incapable of 
supplying. ‘This species takes the place of the horse-mussel 
(““yoags’’) of the Zetlandic fishermen, and the worms of those 
in the Channel Islands. It is seldom eaten by the natives. The 
edible cockles, again, abound on the sandy flats near the 
entrance of the Hden into the sea, and are occasionally sold as 
food, though of late years their scarcity has rendered their 
appearance less frequent in the market. Periwinkles and 
limpets are constantly gathered for similar purposes. The 
only uses to which some of the other mollusks are applied are 
in the amateur manufacture of ornaments, such as shell pin- 
cushions from various univalves and bivalves, bracelets from 
Nassa incrassata and Trochus cinerartus, after the latter has 
had its nacreous layer exposed by an acid. 

The rock-boring shell-tish are five in number, though only 
one exercises any great influence on the disintegration of the 
rocks—viz. Pholas crispata, which often swarms in the shale 
and sandstone, and takes the place of the Pholas dactylus of 
the chalk rocks of the south. Lholas candida occurs too rarely 
to require special mention in this respect; and the same may 
be said of Saxicava rugosa. The excavations of Patella vul- 
gata and Chiton fascicularis in sandstone show that no special 
boring-organ is necessary for this purpose. The latter species 
sometimes scoops out considerable cavities in sandstone, in 
which it reposes. The only wood-borer is Xylophaga dorsalis. 

In taking, under this head, a general survey of the boring 
forms, it is found that they belong to at least three invertebrate 
subkingdoms, viz. the Protozoa, Mollusea, and Annulosa. In 
the first are boring sponges ; in the second, Bryozoa and various 
mollusks; in the third, sea-urchins, gephyreans, annelids, and 
cirripedes. 

The sponges appear to bore only into calcareous substances, 
such as shells and limestone. The Bryozoa perforate shells ; 
the mollusks proper, limestone, sandstone, aluminous shale, 
gneiss and other rocks, wood, wax, shells, &c.; the annelids 
tunnel shells and rocks of various kinds; the sea-urchins cal- 
careous rocks, gneiss, granite, and other rocks ; the gephyreans 
and cirripedes shells and limestone. Good opportunities are 
afforded at St. Andrews for studying the boring-action of the 


344 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


mollusks and annelids. Pholas crispata and Leucodore ciliata 
are equally abundant, and must exercise as much influence 
on the disintegration of the sandstone and shale between tide- 
marks as the boring sponges amongst the shells in deep water ; 
while Patella, Chiton, Saxicava, and Dodecaceria are also 
frequent. 

The theories which have been promulgated to explain the 
mode by which these various creatures perforate materials so 
diverse may be ranged round two great centres, viz. the 
chemical and the mechanical*, The advocates of the former 
seem to take for granted that the borings occur chiefly in 
calcareous substances ; and with propriety, therefore, they make 
their solvent an acid. It is clear, however, that this agency 
is unable to account for the abundant perforations in media 
totally impervious to such action. Moreover no trace of acid 
is found in many borers; and though present in some, as in 
Sabella saxicava and Pholas, it is likewise characteristic of 
other marine animals which do not bore; and it is purely 
hypothetical at present to bring in the aid of the carbonic 
dioxide derived from sea-water, for the same reason. 

The mechanical theory, again, supposes that the animals 
perforate by means of shells or gritty particles m the case of 
mollusks, teeth in the sea-urchins, bristles in the annelids, 
horny processes in certain cirripedes and gephyreans; but we 
are left in doubt concerning the extensive and wonderful per- 
forations of the sponges, those of the Bryozoa, and the rest of 
the cirripedes. If, however, we regard the ‘ macerating ” 
theory as a modification of this, certain of the difficulties will 
be overcome. The grains of wood, however, found in the 
stomachs of Teredo, are interesting in this respect. 

The whole subject of the boring of marine animals, indeed, 
is much in want of further elucidation ; and it is hard to believe 
that the same modus operandi exists in all. In conclusion, 
the theories may be arranged under the following heads (for 
all the subkingdoms), after Forbes and Hanley and Gwyn 
Jeffreys :— 


I. That in the shell-fish the perforations are made by rotations 

of the valves, like augers (Bonanni, Adanson, Born, 

J. E. Gray, Dr. Fleming, Osler, Forbes and Hanley, 

Cailliaud, Robertson, &c.) ; in the sea-urchins, by the 
teeth (Cailliaud). 

This theory is not supported by an examination of the 

perforations of the sponges, Bryozoa, those of the annelids, 


* We do not here allude to the boring by jaws or tongue (e. g, in Lim- 
norta and Trochus). 


Mollusca of St. Andrews. 345 


gephyreans, and cirripedes, nor by a comparison of the 
shells and tunnels of the mollusks themselves. The 
epidermis of the latter in each case would likewise suffer. 


II. That the holes are made by rasping effected by siliceous 
particles on the foot of the mollusk (Hancock), by grains 
of silex from the exterior (Bryson), by the foot in some 
way (Dr. Fischer), and by chitine in the cirripedes 
(Darwin) and gephyreans and the bristles of the annelids. 

This explanation is not borne out by the case of the 
sponges, by that of the Bryozoa, and certain cirripedes ; 
moreover such siliceous particles are rare in boring 
mollusks. 


III. That the excavations are due to ciliary currents, aided 
by rasping (Garner). 
The currents may assist, but seem to be insufficient to 
account for the borings in any group. 


IV. That the perforations are produced by a chemical solvent : 
Gray, Osler (for Saxtcava), Drummond, Cailliaud, Mantell, 
Thorent, Reeve, Bouchard-Chantereaux, Spence Bate, 
Darwin (for Verruca), E. R. Lankester, and Parfitt. 

This will not explain the borings in wood, aluminous 
shale, gneiss, granite, sandstone, and wax. It is interest- 
ing, however, as my friend Mr. Ray Lankester has spe- 
cially shown, that shells and calcareous rocks are much 
affected by burrowing marine animals. 


V. That the borings are the result of a secreted solvent and 
rasping action (Thompson and Necker). 
It seems improbable that the solvent should vary with 
the nature of the rocks attacked. 


VI. That the perforations are caused by a macerating or simple 
solvent action of the foot in mollusks (Sellius, Deshayes, 
and Gwyn Jeffreys). 

It is doubtful if this would be supported by the action 
in the sponges, Bryozoa, annelids, gephyreans, and cirri- 
pedes. The striz in certain of the tunnels of the shell- 
fish are also somewhat at variance with this notion. 


The most interesting species in regard to rarity are Lima 
subauriculata and L. Loscombii, which come from deep water, 
the characteristic Lima hians of our southern and western 
shores being,absent. A worn valve of Jsocardia cor found on 
the West Sands is purely accidental. TZellina pusilla and 
Psammobia tellinella are uncommon at St. Andrews. Amongst 
univalves, Trichotropis borealis, Plewrotoma Trevelyana, 


346 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


Aplysia punctata, and Philine pruinosa are noteworthy. 
The smaller univalves, such as Rissow and their allies, are 
much less numerous in species than on the southern and west- 
ern shores, the absence of Trochus umbilicatus being especially 
diagnostic when contrasted with the latter. The Nudibranchs 
are well represented at all seasons; and the individuals in the 
majority of the species are numerous. Ommatostrephes and 
Loligo amongst the cuttles often occur in great profusion on 
the West Sands after storms. 

On the whole the species are northern, and stand in strong 
contrast to the molluscan fauna of the western shores, where 
Thracia convexa, Tapes decussatus, Pecten varius, var. nivea, 
Teredo megotara and T. norvegica, Fissurella, Trochus umbili- 
catus and T. zizyphinus in the littoral zone, and the abund- 
ance of 7. magus and 7. tumidus in the laminarian, Phasianella, 
Akera bullata, Elysia, swarms of large and small Rissow, and 
the pelagic Janthina torm conspicuous features of the marine 
fauna, just as the hosts of Bulimus acutus do on the sandy 
fields of Killipheder and other parts of the extreme west. 
Still more evident is the contrast with the rich southern species 
that cluster round the Channel Islands—such as the finely 
developed pectens, oysters, and Anomie, and the appearance of 
the former between tide-marks (P. varius), besides Mytilus 
barbatus (which takes the place of the bearded varieties of our 
Mytilus modiolus) in obscure crevices in the littoral zone, the 
frequency of Arca tetragona in fissures of the rocks, Galeomma 
on the under surface of stones in tide-pools at Herm, the boring 
Gastrochena in shells, and the abundance of Haliotis, Pandora, 
Venus verrucosa and V. ovata, Mactra glauca, the Psammobie, 
and the “angel’s wings” (Zima), which when disturbed flit 
with their brilliant orange fringes so nimbly in the tide-pools. 
Amongst univalves, again, the large size and abundance of 
Chiton discrepans, Fissurella, Emarginula, Murex erinaceus, 
Aplysia punctata, Eulima polita, Trochus lineatus, Cerithium 
and Certthiopsis, and the predatory and cunning cuttles 
(Octopus) between tide-marks are noteworthy ; while in the 
surrounding water are the rare prizes Triton nodifer, T. 
cutaceus, Cardium papillosum, Argiope decollata, and other 
forms which, with the foregoing, are thrown in such profusion 
on the shell-beach at Herm—e. g. Calyptrea chinensis, Trochus 
~ Montacuti, and Murex aciculatus. ‘The fine Pinna rudis of 
South England is also entirely absent at St. Andrews. Neither 
dowe find the swarms of Trochus helicinus and T. grenlandicus, 
Trichotropis borealis, and their allies amongst the tangle- 
roots, as in Shetland, nor the Terebratulw, Lyonsia, Lepeta, 
Puncturella, Trochus amabilis, the Jeffreysie, Columbella ha- 
lieet?, Pleurotoma nivalis, P. carinata, Scaphander librarius, 


Mollusca of St. Andrews. 347 


Philine angulata and P. nitida, Rossia papillifera, the Clios, 
and the half hundred new British forms discovered by Mr. 
Gwyn Jeffreys in his frequent cruises in the surrounding 
waters. The great beds, also, of Mytilus modiolus (called 
“‘yoags ”), which occur in from 3 to 15 fathoms near the shore 
in many parts of the Zetlandic seas, present an interesting 
contrast. It is this mussel (esteemed but a coarse bait at St. 
Andrews) which is extensively employed by the Shetlanders ; 
and in its collection many rare invertebrates are found amongst 
the roots of the tangles and stones, which with the mussels 
form huge muddy masses. The old ten-toothed “dreg” 
noticed by the accomplished Prof. Edward Forbes is still the 
chief instrument in procuring the 
shell-fish, and is much more service- 
able to the zoologist on such ground 
than the dredge. In the figure given 
by the facile pencil of the great 
naturalist the rope is attached to 
the eye of the dreg; but in modern 
times the fishermen more correctly 
attach it to the head of the instru- 
ment (after the mannerof the ordinary 
dredge), and fix the rope at the eye 
of the dreg by a piece of spun yarn; ¢ 
so that if the dreg gets entangled { 
the spun yarn gives way, and the 
rope pulls the head of the dreg back- 
wards, and disengages the teeth from 
the tangles and stones. In trans- 
verse section the teeth form a trun- 
cated ellipse round the central iron rod. 

The nomenclature adopted is that of Mr. Gwyn Jeffreys in 
his valuable work on the British Mollusca ; and I am specially 
indebted to him for his great courtesy in frequently aiding me 
in doubtful cases, and also carefully investigating shell-débris 
containing minute species, which otherwise might have been 
overlooked. 


Class CONCHIFERA. 
Order LAMELLIBRANCHIATA. 
Fam. 1. Anomiide, Gray. 


Genus ANomIA, L. 


Anomia ephippium, L. Jeffreys, Brit. Moll. ii. p. 31, 
ve pl..20, f.:1; 1 a-Le, 
Not uncommon in the débris of the fishing-boats. 


348 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


Anomia patelliformis, L. Op. cit. 11. p.84, v. pl. 20. f. 2,2a—2e. 
Common in the same region, as well as between tide-marks 


Fam. 2. Ostreide, Broderip. 
Genus OstrEA, L. 
Ostrea edulis, L. Op. cit. i. p. 38, v. pl. 21. 


Living examples are rare. The “rock” variety with 
purplish streaks, however, is occasionally found at the East 
Rocks on the under surface of stones in pools near low water. 


Fam. 35. Pectinide, Lamarck. 
Genus 1. PecTEN, Pliny. 
Pecten pusio, L. Op. cit. 11. p. 51, v. pl. 22. f. 1 & 1a. 


Common; the living specimens come from the deep water 
of the bay, chiefly attached to bivalves. Worn valves are 
abundant in the gravel at the East Rocks. 


Pecten opercularis, L. Op. cit. 1. p. 59, v. pl. 22.f.3 & 3 a. 


Frequently brought by the fishing-boats, and thrown on the 
beach after storms. 


Pecten tigrinus, O. F. Miiller. Op. cit. i. p. 65, v. pl. 23. 
f. 2 & 2a. 


Perfect specimens from the coralline ground and the 
stomachs of haddocks and flounders; single valves on the 
beach in gravel and after storms. 


Pecten similis, Laskey. Op. cit. 11. p. 71, v. pl. 23. f. 5. 
Frequent in the stomachs of flounders and haddocks; more 
rarely procured from the coralline ground. 


Pecten maximus, L. Op. cit. ii. p. 73, v. pl. 24. 


Occasionally brought up on the deep-sea lines of the fisher- 
men. 


Genus 2. Lima, Bruguiére. 
Lima subauriculata, Mont. Op. cit. i. p. 82, v. pl. 25. f. 3. 


Not common ; from the deep water of the bay. 


Mollusca of St. Andrews. 349 


Lima Loscombii, G. B. Sowerby. Op. ctt. ii. p. 85, 
v. pl. 25. f. 4. 


Single valves occasionally appear in the fishing-boats ; 
perfect specimens are found in the stomach of the cod. 


Fam. 5. Mytilide, Fleming. 


Genus 1. Myriuus, L. 
Mytilus edulis, L. Op. cit. ii. p. 104, v. pl. 27. f. 1. 


Forming by their vast numbers a most important mussel- 
bed at the estuary of the river Eden. Multitudes of the young 
animals, besides, form a coating to the posts of the salmon- 
nets, to rocks, stones, and tangle-roots in various places. 


Mytilus modiolus, L. Op. cit. ii. p. 111, v. pl. 27. f. 2. 


Frequently thrown ashore after storms, and brought by the 
fishermen from deep water. Monstrosities and varieties are 
common ; and there is no shell so prolific in parasitic or com- 
mensalistic growths; pea-crabs and pearls are common in 
their interior. Young forms (bearded) occur in chinks of 
the rocks between tide-marks. 


Genus 2. Mopronartia, Beck. 
Modiolaria marmorata, Forbes. Op. cit. ii. p.122, v. pl. 28. f.1. 
Abundant in the tests of Ascidia sordida, and sometimes 
found in a free condition on the West Sands after storms. 
Modiolaria discors, L. Op. cit. ii. p. 126, v. pl. 28. f. 3. 
Occasionally attached to the roots of Fuci near low water, 
and to the top-shaped fronds of Himanthalia lorea. 
Modiolaria nigra, Gray. Op. cit. ii. p. 128, v. pl. 28. f. 4. 


Fine specimens occur in the deep water of the bay, and also 
in the stomachs of cod. 


Genus 3. CRENELLA, Brown. 


Crenella decussata, Montagu. Op. cit. 11. p. 133, v. pl. 28. f. 6. 


Not rare in the stomachs of cod and haddocks, though 
perhaps swallowed in the first instance by other fishes. 
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 25 


350 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


Fam. 6. Arcide, Lowe. 
Genus 1. Nucuna, Lamarck. 
Nucula nucleus, L. Op. cit. ii. p. 143, v. pl. 29. f. 2. 
Common in the bay; brought in by the fishing-boats, and 
frequent in the stomachs of cod and haddocks. 


Nucula nitida, G. B. Sowerby. Op. cit. ii. p. 149, v. pl. 29. 
f£.3 & 3a. 


Not rare off the East Rocks in sandy gravel between the 
rocky ridges, and in the stomachs of haddocks and cod. 
Nucula tenuis, Mont. Op. cit. 11. p. 151, v. pl. 29. f. 4. 
From deep water and the stomachs of cod and haddocks. 


Genus 2. Lepa, Schumacher. 
Leda minuta, Miller. Op. cit. ii. p. 155, v. pl. 29. f. 6. 


Common in deep water and the stomachs of flounders. 


Genus 4. PecruncuLus, Lamarck. 


Pectunculus glycymeris, L. Op. cit. ii. p. 166, v. pl. 30. f. 2. 


Abundant in the bay ; generally brought in by the fishing- 
boats. 


Genus 5. ARCA, L. 
Arca tetragona, Poli. Op. cit. ii. p. 180, v. pl. 30. f. 6. 


Instead of the clusters in which it appears in the chinks of 
the rocks in the Channel Islands, solitary examples only are 
dredged off the bay in deep water. 


Fam. 8. Kelliide, Forbes & Hanley. 
Genus 2. Monracuta, Turton. 


Montacuta bidentata, Mont. Op. cit. ii. p. 208, v. pl. 31. f. 8. 
Abundant in shell-débris on the West Sands. 


Montacuta ferruginosa, Mont. Op. cit. ii. p. 210, v. pl. 31. f. 9. 


Common in the deep water of the bay and in the stomachs 
of cod, haddocks, and flounders; also in the shell-débris on 
the West Sands after storms. 


Mollusca of St. Andrews. 351 


Genus 3. Lasma, Leach. 
Lasea rubra, Mont. Op. cit. ii. p. 219, v. pl. 82. f. 1. 
Abundant amongst alge, in crevices under stones in rock- 
pools, and in the cavities of shells between tide-marks. 
Genus 4. Keira, Turton. 


Kellia suborbicularis, Mont. Op. cit. ii. p. 225, v. pl. 32. f. 2. 


Common under stones in rock-pools, and in the cavities of 
old limpet- and other shells. 


Fam. 9. Lucinidr, D’Orbigny. 


Genus 2. Luctna, Bruguiére. 


Lucina borealis, L. Op. cit. ii. p. 242, v. pl. 32. f. 7. 
Frequently brought in by the fishing-boats, though the 


majority of the specimens are imperfect (single valves). 
Genus 3. AXxINUuS, J. Sowerby. . 


Axinus flexuosus, Mont. Op. cit. ii. p. 247, v. pl. 33. f. 1. 
Single valves occasionally from the fishing-boats, and on 
the West Sands after storms. 


Fam. 10. Carditide, Gray. 


Genus Cyamivum, Philippi. 


Cyamium minutum, Fabricius. Op. cit. 11. p. 260, v. pl. 33. f. 5. 
Common in shell-débris on the West Sands. 


Fam. 11. Cardiide, Broderip. 
Genus CARDIUM, L. 
Cardium echinatum, L. Op. cit. ii. p. 270, v. pl. 34. f. 2. 
Very abundant on the West Sands after storms, and in the 
débris of the fishing-boats. 
Cardium fasciatum, Mont. Op. cit. ii. p. 281, v. pl. 35. f. 3. 


Not uncommon on the West Sands after storms, and in the 
stomachs of cod, haddocks, and flounders. 
25* 


352 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


Cardium nodosum, Turton. Op. cit. 11. p. 283, v. pl. 35. f. 4. 
Dead valves occasionally dredged off the East Rocks in 


3 to 4 fathoms. 
Cardium edule, L. Op. cit. ii. p. 286, v. pl. 35. f. 5. 


Abundant in the muddy sand at the mouth of the river 
Eden. Cockle-gathering forms the occupation of some of the 


fisherwomen. 


Cardium norvegicum, Spengler. Op.cit. ii. p.294, v. pl.35. f.7. 


Not uncommon ; generally brought by the fishermen from 
deep water. 


Fam. 12. Cyprinidae, Geinitz. 
Genus 2. Cyprina, Lamk. 


Cyprina islandica, L. Op. cit. 11. p. 804, v. pl. 36. f. 2. 


_ Common in deep water, and thrown ashore after storms. 
Some have rows of small adherent pearls. 


Genus 3. ASTARTE, J. Sowerby. 


Astarte sulcata, Da Costa. Op. cit. 1. p. 311, v. pl. 37. f. 1 & 2. 


Frequently brought up by the deep-sea lines of the fisher- 
men. Semifossil valves of A. Jorealis are also not uncommon. 


Astarte compressa, Mont. Op. cit, 1. p. 315, v. pl. 37. £.3 & 4. 
Frequent in deep water. 


Genus 4. Crrce, Schumacher. 
Circe minima, Mont. Op. cit. 11. p. 322, v. pl. 37. f. 6. 
Not uncommon in deep water, and in the stomachs of cod, 


haddocks, and flounders. 
Fam. 13. Veneridz, Leach. 
Genus 1. Venus, L. 
Venus exoleta, L. Op. cit. il. p. 827, v. pl. 38. f. 1. 


Abundant in deep water, and on the beach after storms. 


Venus lincta, Pulteney. Op. cit. ii. p. 330, v. pl. 38. f. 2. 


Common in deep water, and thrown plentifully on the West 
Sands after storms. 


Mollusca of St. Andrews. 353 


Venus fasciata, Da Costa. Op. cit. ii. p. 334, v. pl. 38. f. 4. 


In 3 to 4 fathoms off the East Rocks, and from the deep- 
sea lines of the fishermen. Dead valves are common amongst 
the gravel at the East Rocks. 


Venus casina, L. Op. cit. il. p. 337, v. pl. 38. f. 5. 


Occasionally procured in a perfect state from the deep-sea 
lines of the fishermen. Single valves are most abundant. 


Venus ovata, Pennant. Op. cit. 1. p. 342, v. pl. 39. f. 1. 


Common in deep water ; generally procured from the fishing- 
boats. 


Venus gallina, L. -Op. cit. i. p. 344, v. pl. 39. f. 2 & 3. 


Abundant on the West Sands after storms, and in a few 
fathoms water on a sandy bottom all round. 


Genus 2. Tapes, Miihlfeldt. 
Tapes virgineus, L. Op. cit. ii. p. 352, v. pl. 39. f. 5. 
Common in deep water and in the fishing-boats. 


Tapes pullastra, Mont. Op. cit. i. p. 355, v. pl. 39. f. 6. 


Abundant between tide-marks amongst the muddy sand, 
and occasionally in cavities bored by Pholas crispata. 


Genus 3. Lucrnopsis, Forbes & Hanley. 


Lucinopsis undata, Pennant. Op. cit. il. p. 363, v. pl. 40. f. 1. 


Common on the sandy ground, and thrown in vast numbers 
on the West Sands after storms. 


Fam. 14. Tellinide, Latreille. 
Genus 2. TELLINA, L. 
Tellina crassa, Gmelin. Op. cit. 11. p. 373, v. pl. 40. f. 4. 
Single valves of good size are not uncommon in the débris 
of the fishing-boats. 


Tellina balthica, L. Op. cit. ii. p. 375, v. pl. 40. f. 5. 


Abundant on the sandy beach at the mouths of the Eden 
and Tay, and on the West Sands after storms. 


354 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


Tellina tenuis, Da Costa. Op. cit. ii. p. 379, v. pl. 41. f. 1. 
Very common on the sandy ground everywhere; and dead 


valves occur on the West Sands throughout the year. 


Tellina fabula, Gronovius. Op. cit. ii. p. 382, vapl. 41. f. 2. 
Only less common than the last species on the same ground. 


Tellina pusilla, Philippi. Op. cit. ii. p. 388, v. pl. 41. f. 5. 


Rather frequent in deep water, and in the stomachs of 
haddocks and flounders. 


Genus 3. PsAmmostiA, Lamarck. | 
Psammobia tellinella, Lamk. Op. cit. ii. p. 392, v. pl. 42. f. 1. 
Worn valves occasionally found amongst the deep-sea lines 
of the fishermen. 


Psammobia ferréensis, Chemnitz. Op. cit. u. p. 396, 
v. p, 187; pl 42sd.3: 


Abundant and in fine condition on a sandy bottom off the 
West Sands. Often thrown ashore in large numbers near 
the estuary of the Eden. 


Genus 4. Donax, L. 
Donazx vittatus, Da Costa. Op. cit. i. p. 402, v. pl. 42. f. 5. 


Very abundant on the West Sands after storms, and on sandy 
ground in a few fathoms. 


Fam. 15. Mactride, Fleming. 
Genus 2. Macrra, L. 


Mactra solida, L. Op. cit. ii. p. 415, v. pl. 43. f. 2. 


Abundant on the sandy ground off the West Sands, and 
thrown in great numbers on the beach after storms. 
Var. elliptica is common. 


Mactra subtruncata, Da Costa. Op. cit. ii. p. 419, v. pl. 43. f. 3. 
Equally common with the last species, and from the same 
ground, 


Mactra stultorum, L. Op. cit. ii. p. 422, v. pl. 43. f. 4. 


Very abundant on the same ground as the. last two species. 
Var. cénerea is common. 


a — 


Mollusca of St. Andrews. 355 


Genus 3. LuTrarta, Lamarck. 
Lutraria elliptica, Lamk. Op. cit. ii. p. 428, v. pl. 44. f. 1. 


Common on the West Sands after storms, and in muddy 
sand at the mouth of the river Eden. 


Genus 4. ScropicuLARIA, Schumacher. 


Scrobicularia prismatica, Mont. Op. cit. ii. p. 435, 
v. pl. 45. f. 1. 


Not rare in deep water; on the West Sands after storms, 
and in the stomachs of cod and haddocks. 


Scrobicularia alba, Miiller. Op. cit. 11. p. 438, v. pl. 45. f. 3. 


Less common than the foregoing, from the same ground, 
and in the stomachs of the same fishes. 


Scrobicularia piperata, Bellonius. Op. cit. ii. p. 444, 
v. pl. 45. f. 5. 


Common amongst the muddy sand at the mouth of the 
Tay, and frequently thrown on the West Sands after storms ; 
also procured from the fishing-boats. 


Fam. 16. Solenide, Latreille. 
Genus 3. SOLEN, L. 
Solen pellucidus, Pennant. Op. cit. ii. p. 14, v. pl. 46. f. 4. 


Common on the sandy ground, and thrown ashore in large 
numbers after storms ; occasionally in the stomachs of cod and 


haddocks. 


Solen ensis, L. Op. cit. iii. p. 16, v. pl. 47. f. 1. 


Frequent on the sandy ground, and after storms on the 
West Sands. 


Solen siliqua, L. Op. cit. ii. p. 18, v. pl. 47. f. 2. 


Abundant amongst the sand uncovered by the low tides. 
The fishermen collect them for bait ; and the children use them 
as scoops for digging in the sand. 


— ee a 


356 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the Mollusca of St. Andrews. 


Fam. 18. Anatinide, D’Orbigny. 
Genus TuractA, Leach. 
Thracia papyracea, Poli. Op. cit. iii. p. 36, v. pl. 48. f.4 & 4a. 


Common on the sandy ground off the West Sands, and 
cast ashore plentifully after storms. 


Fam. 19. Corbulide, Fleming. 
Genus 3. CorBULA, Bruguiére. 
Corbula gibba, Olivi. Op. cit. iii. p. 56, v. pl. 49. f. 6. 


Off the East Rocks in a few fathoms, and on the beach after 


storms ; good specimens are also procured from the fishing- 
boats. 


Fam. 20. Myide, Fleming. 
Genus Mya, L. 


Mya arenaria, L. Op. cit. 11. p. 64, v. pl. 50. f. 1. 


Frequent in the muddy sand at the mouth of the Eden. 
Distorted valves are common. 


Mya truncata, L. Op. cit. 11. p. 66, v. pl. 50. f. 2. 


Abundant off the mouth of the Eden, and on the beach 
after storms. 


Fam. 21. Saxicavide, Swainson. 
Genus 2. Saxicava, Fleurian de Bellevue. 


Saxicava rugosa, L. Op. cit. ii. p. 81, v. pl. 51. f. 3 & 4. 


Common. at low-water mark amongst the rocks in crevices 
and holes in sandstone and shale, as well as inside empty 
limpet-shells and Balanz. Often firmly adherent to its cavity 
by a byssus. 


Fam. 23. Pholadide, Gray. 
Genus 1. Puotas, Lister. 


Pholas candida, L. Op. cit. iii. p. 107, v. pl. 52. f. 2. 


Rarely found in shale at the Castle Rocks ; commonly met 
with on the beach after storms, sometimes in a perfect con- 
dition. 


= 


——————<x eee ee 


Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Centris. 357 


Pholas crispata, L. Op. cit. iii. p. 112, v. pl. 58. f. 1. 


Abundant in the soft shale and sandstone at East and West 
Rocks, and especially opposite the castle. Sometimes the 
siphons are observed protruding through sand which coats 
some of the ledges. aie specimens are often cast ashore 
on the West Sands in water-logged and decayed wood, whence 
they are extracted by the sea-fowl. 


Genus 3. XYLOPHAGA, Turton. 


Xylophaga dorsalis, Turton. Op. cit. iii. p. 120, v. pl. 58. f. 4. 


Not common; several living specimens occurred in the 
wood of a submerged thorn tree. 


Order SOLENOCONCHIA. 
2 


Fam. Dentalide, H. & A. Adams. 
Genus DenTatium, L. 


Dentalium entalis, L. Op. cit. iii. p. 191, v. pl. 55. f. 1. 


Occurs on the West Sands in a living state after some 
storms. ‘The specimens procured from the fishing-boats are 
generally tenanted by Stpuncul’. Common. 


[To be continued. } 


XLIX.—A Revision of the Genera Epicharis, Centris, Eulema, 
and Kuglossa, belonging to the Family Apide, Section Sco- 
pulipedes. By FREDERICK SMITH, Assistant in the Zoolo- 
gical Department of the British Museum. 


[Continued from p, 322, ] 


Genus CENTRIS. 


Centris (pt.), Fab. Syst. Piez. p. 354 (1804). 
Trachina, Klug, Illig. Mag. vi. p. 226 (1807). 
Hemisia, Klug, ibid. p. 227 (1807). 
Ptilotopus, Klug, Berlin Mag. p. 32 (1810). 


Generic characters. 


Head not so wide as the thorax ; eyes large, lateral, elongate- 
ovate ; ocelli placed in a curve on the vertex; antenne,geni- 


358 Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Centris. 


culate, the flagellum filiform, the first joint gradually narrowed 
to its base; the labial palpi four-jointed, the two basal joints 
elongate and flattened, the first longer than the second, the 
third and fourth minute and attached to the second joint near 
its apex; the maxillary palpi four-jointed, the first and fourth 
joints shorter than the intermediate ones ; the mandibles stout, 
and with four blunt teeth in the females. Thorax : the anterior 
and intermediate tibize with a single spine at their apex; the 
posterior pair with two spines, the inner one pectinated: the 
anterior wings with one marginal and three submarginal cells ; 
the marginal cell oblong, nearly as long as the three sub- 
marginals united, widest in the middle, truncate at the base, 
and more or less rounded at the apex, from which an appendi- 
cular nervure is emitted, which sometimes runs nearly to the 
anterior margin of the wing; the first submarginal cell is 
divided by a more or less distinct transverse, perpendicular, 
false nervure; the second cell is wider than the first, and 
narrowed towards the discoidal cells, receiving the first re- 
current nervure towards the first submarginal ; the third sub- 
marginal much narrowed towards the marginal cell. 

Note. The mandibles tridentate in the males of many species. 


1. Centris furcata. 


Centris furcata, St.-Farg. Hym. 11. p. 151, 9. 
Bombus furcatus, Fab. Syst. Piez. p. 350. 


Hab. Brazil; Demerara. 
The male only differs in having the scape of the antenne 
in front, the clypeus, the face on each side of it, and the labrum 


yellowish white. 
2. Centris denudans. 


Centris denudans, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 150, pl. xx. fig. 1, 9. 
Trachina denudans, Laty., Schomb. Faun. et Flor. Brit. Guiana, p. 591. 


Hab. Brazil (Tapajos, Ega) ; Kceuador. 

The male differs from the female in having the clypeus and 
labrum yellow, and in having the anterior tibie and tarsi 
clothed with ferruginous pubescence. 

3. Centris thoracica. 

Centris thoracica, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 158, 2. 

Hab. Brazil; Rio Grande. 


4. Centris pulverata. 
Centris pulverata, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 161, 2. 
Hab. St. Paulo (Brazil). 
I have seen the type specimen of this species. It is 1 inch 


ee 


Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Centris. 359 


long. It is black, with the pubescence on the head black, 
that on the thorax a mixture of very short black and griseous, 
with a tuft of pale fulvous pubescence on each side of the 
metathorax; the first segment of the abdomen naked, the 
second and following segments covered with very fine, short, 
griseo-fulvous pubescence ; the second segment more or less 
naked at the base and in the middle ; the posterior legs densely 
clothed with ferruginous pubescence; wings dark fuscous, 
with a violet iridescence. 


5. Centris derasa. 
Centris derasa, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 150, pl. xx. fig. 2,9. 
Hab. Cayenne. 


6. Centris emarginata. 
Centris emarginata, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 157,92 (C. derasa, var. ?). 


Hab. Cayenne. : 


7. Centris americanorum. 


Ptilotopus americanorum, Klug, Berl. Mag. p. 32, tab. i. fig. 1, 9 (1810). 
Centris Langsdorfii, Blanch. Hist. Nat. des Ins, iii. p. 405, tab. vii. 
fig. 7, 2 (1840). 


Hab. Brazil (Tapajos and Para). 


8. Centris decorata. 

Centris decorata, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins. Apide, ii. p. 372, 3. 

Hab. Pernambuco. 

This species closely resembles C. americanorum, of which it 
may possibly be a local variety,—the differences being that 
the thorax in C. decorata is clothed with bright yellow 
pubescence, the sides of the basal segment of the abdomen 
have a pale yellow, and the second, third, and fourth segments 
are covered with olive-green pubescence ; in C. americanorum 
the thorax is clothed with fulvous, and only the second and 
third segments have a covering of olive pubescence. Both 
examples described are in fine condition. 


9. Centris insignis. 
Centris insignis, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins, Apide, ii. p. 875, 9. 
Hab. Columbia. 

10. Centris festiva. 
Centris festiva, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins. Apida, ii. p. 375, 2. 
Hab. Columbia. 


hi 
i 
4 
is 


meses Fe eae 


—— 
a 


ee 
Ze a — 


SE Ie 


—_— 
"2 SLA Ss: 


SA 


ee 69g His 


360 Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Centris. 


#11. Centris discolor. 


Female. Length 11 lines. Black ; the thorax clothed with 
fulvous pubescence above, beneath and on the legs it is black ; 
the wings dark fuscous, with a violet iridescence ; the abdomen 
has the sides of the second segment, and the third, fourth, and 


fifth segments with a grey sericeous pile. 
Hab. Catagallo (Brazil). 


12. Centris rubella. 
Centris rubella, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins. Apide, ii. p. 372,92. 
Hab. Brazil (Tapajos) ; Archidona ; Napo. 


Specimens from the latter localities have the clypeus yellow | 


anteriorly, as well as the labrum. 


13. Centris obsoleta. 
Centris obsoleta, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 158, 2. 
Hab. Cayenne ; Tapajos. 


14. Centris violacea. 
Centris violacea, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 151, 9. 
Hab. Brazil. 

15. Centris nobilis. 


Centris nobilis, Westw. Nat. Libr. xxxviii. p. 263, tab. xx. fig. 1. 
C. analis, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 152. 


Hab. Peru (Tabatinga) ; Brazil (St. Paulo). 


16. Centris ephippium. 
Centris ephippium, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins. Apidae, ii. p. 378, 3. 
Hab. Venezuela. 


17. Centris modesta. 
Centris modesta, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins. Apde, ii. p. 371, ds 
Hab. Santarem (Brazil). 


#18. Centris melanchlena. 


Male. Length 10 lines. Black, clothed with black pubes- 
cence; the apical margin of the third segment of the abdomen 
laterally with a narrow fascia of cinereous pubescence, a 
broader fascia on the margin of the fourth segment inclining 
to ferruginous, and the two apical segments covered with 
ferruginous pubescence; the clypeus and labrum yellowish 
white, the former has two minute black dots at its base; the 


Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Centris. 361 


labrum covered with black pubescence; wings dark brown, 
palest at the apical margins, and with a violet iridescence. 
Hab. Mexico; Vera Cruz. 


*19. Centris agilis. 


Male. Length 93 lines. Black, with the abdomen ferru- 
ginous. The thorax densely clothed with short sooty-black 


pubescence; that on the anterior and intermediate legs is of - 


the same colour, as well as that on the posterior femora; on 
the tibize and tarsi of the posterior legs it is fulvous, the joints 
themselves being rufo-piceous; the claws of the tarsi black ; 
the wings fuscous, darkest at their base; the labrum and 
clypeus yellow, and a yellow spot on the mandibles near their 
apex; the first segment of the abdomen black, sometimes the 
base of the second also. 
Hab. Vera Cruz. 


20. Centris rufa. 
Centris rufa, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 153, 2. 
Hab. Santarem (Brazil). 


21. Centris ferruginea. 
Centris ferruginea, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 156, 9. 
Hab, Para; 'Tapajos (Brazil). 


22. Centris plumipes. 
Centris plumipes, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins. Apida, ii. p. 378,? ¢. 
Hab. Tapajos (Brazil). 


23. Centris flavifrons. 


Centris flavifrons, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 152, 9. 
Anthophora flavifrons, Fab, Syst. Piez. p. 875,¢. In coll. Banks in 
Brit. Mus. 


Hab. Ega, Santarem, &c. (Brazil). 


24. Centris (Xylocopa) merens. 
Centris (Xylocopa) merens, Perty, Del. Anim. Artic. Bras, p. 150, pl. 28. 
fig. 11, 
Hab. Minas Geraes. 
This species is black, and has the two basal segments sul- 
phur-yellow ; the wings dark fuscous. It is 14 lines long. 


<a ee 


ee Se 


Sy 


362 Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Centris. 


25. Centris (Xylocopa) xanthocnemis. 
Centris (Xylocopa) xanthocnemis, Perty, Del. Anim. Artic. Bras. p. 150, 
pl. 28. fig. 12. 

This insect is black; the pubescence on the thorax is 
yellow anteriorly and black posteriorly ; the abdomen densely 
covered with olivaceous pubescence ; wings of an iridescent 
blue; the posterior tibiee and tarsi densely clothed with ferru- 
ginous pubescence. Length 114 lines. 


Hab. 'The province of Piauhi. 


*26. Centris personata. 


Male. Length 10 lines. Head and thorax black ; abdomen 
ferruginous. The cheeks have a fine short white pubescence 
at the margins of the eyes, and a longer pale fulvous pubes- 
cence beyond. The pubescence on the thorax is sooty black 
above; beneath it is more or less tinged with fulvous; the 
prothorax has a little white pubescence on each side anteriorly, 
close to the head; the tarsi rufo-piceous, with the claws black ; 
wings fusco-hyaline, the nervures fusco-ferruginous ; the pos- 
terior legs with black pubescence. The abdomen with fulvous 
pubescence; at the apex, and also beneath, it is dense and 
bright. The clypeus and labrum reddish yellow; the front of 
the scape of the antenne and the mandibles yellow, the latter 
have a black space a little before their apex ; the clypeus has 
a large black spot at its base divided in the centre by a nar- 
row yellow line; the labrum covered with short fulvous 
pubescence. 

Hab. 'Tapajos, Ega (Brazil). 


*27. Centris ignita. 


Black, with the apex of the abdomen ferruginous. The 
head and thorax with black pubescence, that on the posterior 
tibiz: and first joint of the tarsi fulvous outside and ferruginous 
within, the joints are also ferruginous; the mandibles with a 
yellow spot near their apex; the wings dark fuscous, with a. 
purple iridescence. Abdomen shining: the basal segment 
naked; the other segments have a thin sericeous hoary pile, 
which is observable in certain lights; the apical margin of the 
third segment ferruginous, the fascia is widest in the middle 
and at the sides of the abdomen; the fourth and following 
segments entirely ferruginous ; beneath ferruginous, with more 
or less of fuscous spots or bands at the basal margins of the 


segments. 


Hab, Orizaba (Mexico). 


My. F. Smith on the Genus Ceuntris. 363 


*28. Centris semicerulea. 


Male. Length 83 lines. Head and thorax black, abdomen 
blue. The pubescence on the face and vertex black, that on 
the cheeks and thorax above cinereous; the anterior and in- 
termediate legs have a black pubescence, that on the posterior 
tibie and basal joint of the tarsi fulvous. The basal segment 
of the abdomen, and the apical margins of the following seg- 
ments, with a fascia of pale fulvous pubescence; the wings 
fusco-hyaline ; the clypeus and labrum yellow, the former with 
a minute black triangular spot at its anterior margin; a pale 
testaceous spot near the apex of the mandibles. 

Hab. Venezuela. 


29. Centris flavopicta. 
Centris flavopicta, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins. Apida, ii. p. 373, ¢. 
Hab. Ega (Brazil). 


30. Centris mexicana. 
Centris mexicana, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins. Apidae, ii. p. 378, 9. 
Hab. Mexico. 
31. Centris dentata. 
Centris dentata, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins. Apide, ii. p. 374, 3. 
Hab. Tapajos (Brazil). 


32. Centris maculifrons. 
Centris maculifrons, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins. Apide, ii. p. 372, ?. 
Hab. Brazil; Mexico. 


33. Centris bombiformis (Hemesia). 
Centris bombiformis (Hemesia), Spin. Ann. Soc. Ent. France, x. 
p- 148, Q. 
Hab. Cayenne. 
34. Centris nitens. 

Centris nitens, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 163, 2. 
Hab. Brazil. 

35. Centris lineolata. 
Centris lineolata, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 158, ?. 
Hab. Ega, Tapajos (Brazil) ; Cayenne. 


36. Centris fasciata. 
Centris fasciata, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins. Apide, p. 377,92 ¢d. 
Hab, Jamaica. 


364 Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Centris. 


37. Centris difformis. 

Centris difformis, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins. Apede, ii. p. 74,2. 
Hab. Tapajos (Brazil) ; Mexico. 

38. Centris longimana. 
Centris longimana, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 164, 2 ; Fabr. Syst. Piez. 

p. 356? 
Hab. Cayenne; Ega; Tapajos; Para (Brazil). 
39. Centris picea. 

Centris picea, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 166, 2. 
Hab. ? 


40. Centris versicolor. 


Centris versicolor, Fabr. Syst. Piez. p.359; St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 154, 9. 
Apis versicolor, Fabr. Ent. Syst. ii. p. 340. 


Hab. Vera Cruz; Oajaca (Mexico) ; I. Guadeloupe. 


41. Centris pecila. 
Centris pecila, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 154, 2. 
Hab. Havanna. 


42. Centris hemorrhoidalis. 


Centris hemorrhoidalis, Fabr. Syst. Piez. p. 359, ; St.-Farg. Hym. ii. 
p- 155, 2. 7 


Hab. St. Domingo; Jamaica. 


43. Centris americanorum. 

Centris americanorum, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 156, dg. 
Hab. Cayenne. 

44. Centris clypeata. 
Centris clypeata, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 157, 3. 
Hab, Cayenne. 

45. Centris lineolata. 
Centris lineolata, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 158, 9. 


Hab. Cayenne. 

46. Centris scapulata. 
Centris scapulata, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 159, 2. 
Hab. Cayenne; Columbia. 


47. Centris decolorata. 

Centris decolorata, St.-Farg. Hym. i. p. 160, 3. 
Note.—The type has only an interrupted line at the base 
of the second segment and a spot at the base of the third and 


fourth on each side. 
Hab. Brazil; Mexico; St. Domingo. 


Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Centris. 


48. Centris maculata. 
Centris maculata, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 160, 2. 
’ Hab. ? 


49. Centris punctata. 
Centris punctata, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 169, 2. 


This species is allied to C. lanipes. 
Hab, Catagallo; St. Paulo (Brazil). 


50. Centris dorsata. 
Centris dorsata, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 161, 2. 
Hab. ? 


51. Centris chrysitis. 
Centris chrysitis, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 162, 9. 
Hab. St. Paulo. 

52. Centris collaris. 
Centris collaris, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 162, 9. 
Hab. St. Paulo. 

53. Centris bicolor. 
Centris bicolor, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 163,92. 
Hab. Goyanna (Brazil). 


54, Centris anea. 
Centris enea, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 163, 9. 
Hab. Brazil. 


55. Centris lanipes. 


3645 


Centris lanipes, Faby. Syst. Piez. p. 860, 9; St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 165, 9. 


Apis lanipes, Fabr. Ent. Syst. ii. p. 340. 


Hab. Brazil; Cayenne. 


56. Centris testacea. 
Centris testacea, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 165, 9. 
Hab. St. Domingo. 


57. Centris picea. 
Centris picea, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 166, 2. 
Hab. South America. 
58. Centris nigrescens. 
Centris nigrescens, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 166, ¢. 


Hab, Cayenne. 
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xin. 


26 


366 Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Centris. 


59. Centris trigonotdes. 
Centris trigonoides, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 167,¢3. 
Hab. Brazil. 


60. Centris fuscata. 
Centris fuscata, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 167, 3- 
Hab. South America. 


61. Centris vittata. 
Centris vittata, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 168, 5 2. 
Hab. Brazil. 


62. Centris bimaculata. 
Centris bimaculata, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 168, 9. 
Hab. St. Paulo. 


63. Centris punctata. 
Centris punctata, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 169, 2. 
Hab. South Brazil. 


64, Centris dentipes, 

Male. Length 5 lines. Head and thorax black, the abdo- 
men ferruginous; the labrum, mandibles, and clypeus pale 
yellow, the latter black at the extreme base; tips of the man- 
dibles rufo-piceous ; the flagellum of the antenne testaceous 
beneath, except the two apical joints, which are black ; a tuft 
of pale pubescence above the clypeus, that on the vertex fus- 
cous, and that on the cheeks white. Thorax: above the. 
pubescence is fulyous, palest on the metathorax ; beneath it is 
pale, inclining to white; legs ferruginous; the anterior and 
intermediate pairs fringed with whitish pubescence ; on the 
posterior legs it is fuscous, except that on the femora and 
tibie above, which is pale fulvous ; the posterior femora are 
incrassate, the coxee with an acute spine at their apex; the 
wings hyaline and faintly clouded towards their apex. Abdo- 
men with pale fulvous pubescence at its apex; the basal 
segment of the abdomen sometimes fusco-ferruginous. 

Hab. Ega; Santarem ; Tapajos; Para (Brazil) ; W. Indies, 
Mexico. , 

Specimens from Hga have the legs nearly black and the 
apical margins of the segments more or less fuscous. This 
species may possibly be that described by St.-Fargeau as 
Centris trigonoides ; but he makes no mention of the spine. 
on the coxa, . The species is allied to CO. lanipes. 


Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Ceutris. 367 


#65. Centris ardens, 


_ Female. Length 7 lines. Head and thorax black, legs and 
abdomen ferruginous; the clypeus, labrum, mandibles, and 
scape of the antenne in front pale yellow; a narrow fascia on 
the anterior margin of the clypeus, and two large subquadrate 
spots at its base, black; the mandibles ferruginous at their 
apex; the face covered with short pale downy pubescence, that 
on the vertex fuscous; the cheeks have a white pubescence. 
Thorax clothed above with dull ferrugmous pubescence ; or. 
the sides and beneath it is pale and glittering; the legs with 
fulvo-ferruginous pubescence ; wings subhyaline. Abdomen: 
a little pale fulvous pubescence at the base; the apical margin 
of the fifth segment. and the sides of the sixth with bright 
fulvous pubescence ; the first segment, and the apical margins 
of the second and third, with a band that is widest in the 
middle, abruptly narrowed toward the lateral margins, to which 
it does not extend, black; a waved black line in the middle 
of the fourth segment, and sometimes an indistinct one on the 
fifth, the two latter frequently wanting. 

Hab. ga (Brazil). 


*66. Centris apicalis. 


Female. Length 734 lines. Head and thorax black; the 
three basal segments of the abdomen blue- or green-black ; the 
three apical ones, the abdomen beneath, and the legs ferrugi- 
nous; the apical segments, in some examples, more or less 
yellow ; the scape of the antenne in front ; the clypeus, labrum, 
and mandibles yellow; the anterior margin of the clypeus 
narrowly black or nigro-piceous, the dark margin angulated in 
the middle, also a large black spot on each side at its base ; 
the pubescence on the cheeks and face whitish, and fulvous 
on the vertex. Thorax clothed above with fulvo-ochraceous 
pubescence, paler on the sides and beneath ; the pubescence 
on the legs fulvous ; the wings hyaline. On the third segment 
of the abdomen there is usually a narrow abbreviated yellow 
line. The male differs only in having the clypeus entirely 
yellow, and in sometimes having a yellow line also on the 
second segment. 

Hab. Saint Bartholomew. 


*67. Centris insularis. 
Female. Length 7 lines. Black ; the abdomen nigro-eneous 
above, with the apical margins of the fourth and the following 
segments ferruginous. Head: the mandibles, labrum, clypeus, 


and scape of the antenne in front yellow ; a large ovate black 
26* 


368 Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Centris. 


spot on each side of the clypeus at its base ; its anterior mar- 
gin narrowly rufo-piceous, the middle of the margin with an 
angulated black shape; the inner orbits of the eyes, as high 
as the insertion of the antenne, yellow. ‘The thorax clothed 
above with short yellowish-grey pubescence, pale yellow at 
the sides and whitish beneath; the legs ferruginous; the pu- 
bescence on the posterior tibia and basal joint of the tarsi 
pale fulvous; the inner side of the tarsal joint clothed with 
blackish pubescence; wings subhyaline, the nervures fusco- 
ferruginous. Abdomen: the basal segment with short pale 
yellowish pubescence ; the apical margins of the two following 
segments rufo-piceous ;-beneath ferruginous ; two lunate black 
spots at the base of the third and fourth segments ; the second 
and two following segments have their apical margins fringed 
with pale pubescence. 


Hab. San Domingo. 


*68. Centris aptformis. 


Length 7 lines. Head and thorax black, abdomen nigro- 
eneous. Head: labrum, clypeus, mandibles, and scape of 
the antenne in front yellow; the clypeus with a broad black 
line on each side, and the mandibles with their inferior mar- 
gins rufo-piceous; the flagellum, except the two basal joints, 
rufo-testaceous beneath; the cheeks with white pubescence, a 
tuft of the same between the antenne, and another on the ver- 
tex, both usually more or less tinged with fulvous. Thorax 
clothed above with fulvous pubescence; on the sides, meta- 
thorax posteriorly, and beneath it is very pale fulvous; the 
legs rufo-piceous, the femora darkest; the anterior and inter- 
mediate tibize with a paler line outside; the base of the poste- 
rior pair also pale yellow; all the tibie and tarsi fringed 
behind with pale fulvous pubescence; wings subhyaline, 
Abdomen: a transverse nigro-eeneous fascia on the second and 
third segments, and the basal margin of the fourth of the 
same colour; the apical segment rufo-testaceous, as well as 
the apical margins of the third and fourth segments, which are 
also thickly fringed with fulvous pubescence. 

Hab. Santarem (Brazil). 


*69. Centris nitida. 


Female. Length 63 lines. Black; the abdomen very smooth 
and shining; the thorax clothed above with pale yellow pu- 
bescence. Head: the mandibles and labrum yellow ; an in- 
terrupted arched transverse band on the clypeus, and a line at 
the inner orbits of the eyes, which does not extend above the 


insertion of the antenne, yellow; the flagellum of the antenne 


Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Centris. 369 


beneath, except the two basal joints, rufo-testaceous ; the cheeks 
with white pubescence. Thorax: the pubescence at the sides 
and beneath very pale yellow; the anterior legs have a pale 
fringe on the femora and tibizw behind, and the tarsi have a 
fulvous pubescence ; the pubescence on the other legs is black ; 
the wings subhyaline, their tegule white. Abdomen; the 
apical segment with fusco-ferruginous pubescence. 
Hab. Honduras. 


*70. Centris nigro-cerulea. 


Female. Length 7 lines. Obscure blue-black ; the entire 
pubescence black ; the claw-joint of the tarsi fusco-ferruginous ; 
the mandibles reddish yellow at their apex, with the tips of 
es teeth black; the wings fusco-hyaline, darkest at their 

ase. 

Male. Resembles the female, but has the labrum and clypeus 
white. 

Hab. Mexico. 

This species closely resembles the Hemesia nigerrima ot 
Spinola from Chili, from which it differs in having the apex 
of the mandibles pale; its wings are darker, and its abdomen 
is more obscurely blue. The male of the Chilian species has 
the labrum and clypeus white: the clypeus is semicircular ; 
in C, nigro-cerulea it is semioyate. 


71. Centris laticincta. 
Hemesia laticincta, Spin. Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. x. p. 148, 2 (1841). 
Hab, Cayenne. 


72. Centris pyropyga. 
Hemesia pyropyga, Spin. Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. x. p. 148 (1841). 
Hab, Cayenne. 


73. Centris cineraria. 
Centris cineraria, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins. Apida, ii. p, 878, 9. 
Hab. Chili. 


74. Centris chiliensis. 
Hemesia chiliensis, Spin. Faun. Chile, vi. p. 167, 2. 
Hab. Chili. 

75. Centris nigerrima. 
Hemesia nigerrima, Spin. Faun, Chile, vi. p. 167, 9. 
Hab, Chili. 


370 Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Centris. 


#76. Centris thoracica. 


Female. Length 7 lines. Black; the thorax above clothed 
with bright rich fulvous pubescence; that on the head, legs, 
thorax beneath, and on the abdomen black; the legs obscure 
nigro-piceous ; the flagellum of the antenne, except the two 
basal joints, testaceous. 

Hab. San Domingo. 


*77. Centris concinna. 


Female, Tength 7 lines. Head and thorax black ; the legs 
and abdomen ferruginous, the latter black at the base above. 
The clypeus, face on each side of it, the labrum, mandibles, 
and scape in front yellow; a large subovate black spot 
at the base of the clypeus that terminates in a point in front, 
and which has a narrow yellow line down the centre; the 
pubescence on the cheeks white, that on the face and vertex 
fulvous. ‘Thorax clothed with fulvous pubescence above, on 
the sides and beneath it is paler, on the legs it is fulvo- 
ferruginous; wings subhyaline; the tegule pale testaceous. 
Abdomen: the basal segment with pale fulvous pubescence ; 
on the apical margin of the second and following segments 
it is fulvous. 

Male. Smaller than the female, in all respects closely re- 
sembling it; the clypeus has a black line at its lateral margins ; 
the abdomen has the second and third segments more or less 
ferruginons laterally. 


Hab, 'Tapajos (Brazil). 


*78. Centris simillima. 

Female. Length 5lines. Head and thorax black; legs and 
abdomen ferruginous. Head: the labrum, mandibles, clypeus, 
and face on each side of it yellow ; the basal margin of the 
clypeus narrowly black, also an angulated black spot at. its 
anterior margin. Thorax clothed above with pale fulvous, and 
beneath with whitish pubescence; on the tarsi, intermediate 
and posterior tibiz the pubescence is fulyous; wings sub- 
hyaline ; the tegule white. 


Hab. San Domingo. 


This species resembles C. lanipes; but the marking of the 
clypeus alone will distinguish it. 


*79. Centris perforator. 
Female. Length 6 lines. Head and thorax black, legs and 


Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Centris. 371 


abdomen ferruginous. Head: the clypeus, labrum, mandibles, 
face on each side of the clypeus, and the scape in front yellow ; 
two semicircular black spots on the clypeus; the flagellum of 
the antennz, except the two basal joints, obscurely ferruginous 
beneath. Thorax clothed above with ochraceous pubescence, 
on the sides and beneath it is paler; the pubescence on the 
legs is pale fulyous ; the posterior femora have a small tooth 
near their base beneath; wings subhyaline, their nervures 
fuscous. Abdomen: the basal segment with pale ochraceous 
pubescence, the three apical segments fringed at the sides with 
tulvous pubescence, 
Hab, Pernambuco, 


=80. Centris terminata. 


Male. Length 54 lines. Black, with the terminal joints of 
the tarsi rufo-piceous. Head: the clypeus, labrum, and 
mandibles pale yellow, the latter have sometimes only a yellow 
spot at the base ; the flagellum of the antenne, except the two 
basal and two apical joints, rufo-testaceous beneath ; the pu- 
bescence on the cheeks and a tuft between the antenne white ; 
that on the vertex is dark fuscous. Thorax clothed above 
with fulvous pubescence ; at the sides and also beneath it is 
griseous ; the anterior and intermediate legs fringed behind 
with pale pubescence, that on the posterior pair is black, some- 
times mixed with brown or obscure fulvous ; wings subhyaline, 
the nervures brown. Abdomen with fulvous pubescence at 
the base and white at the apex ; beneath thickly clothed with 
griseous pubescence, occasionally mixed with fulvous at. the 
apex. 

Hab, Para; Santarem ; Catagallo (Brazil). 

This is a variable insect in the coloration of its pubescence. 
Specimens from Catagallo ‘have bright fulvons pubescence. on 
the thorax ; those from Para have it pale fulvous; the legs 
are black in the specimens from Catagallo, whilst in those from 
Para and Santarem they are usually more or less rufo-piceous. 


#81. Centris tarsata. 


Male. Length 44 lines. Head and thorax black, legs and 
abdomen ferruginons. Head: the clypeus, labrum, and man- 
dibles yellowish white, the tips of the latter ferruginous ; the 
pubescence on the cheeks white, on the face and vertex it is 
yellowish, the latter has a mixture of fuscous; the flagellum 
of the antenna, except the two apical and two basal joints, 
rufo-testaceous. Thorax clothed above with yellow pubescence, 
on the sides, beneath, and on the legs it is paler; the posterior 


3Te Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Centris. 


tarsi fringed with black pubescence; wings subhyaline, the 

nervures dark fuscous. Abdomen: the basal segment with 

yellow pubescence, the fringe on the apical segments whitish. 
Hab. Santarem (Brazil). 


82. Centris elegans. 


Female. Length 83 lines. Head, thorax, and legs black ; 
the abdomen dark blue. Head: a longitudinal line on the 
clypeus and on each side of the anterior margin a transverse, 
oblong, pear-shaped spot, pointed within and almost uniting 
with the longitudinal line, a line at the inner margin of the 
eyes not extending above the base of the clypeus, two ovate 
spots on the labrum, and a spot at the base of the mandibles 
white, the tips of the latter also white; the pubescence on the 
head, thorax, and legs black; wings fuscous, palest at their 
apical margins. The abdomen obscurely testaceous beneath, 
its apical segments fringed with black pubescence. 

Hab. Island of St. Vincent. 


83. Centris crassipes. 


Male. Length 54 lines. Black; the clypeus, labrum, and 
mandibles white. The pubescence on the cheeks, a tuft at 
the base of the antennz, and the fringe on the anterior femora 
behind white; the thorax clothed with mouse-coloured pu- 
bescence, behind the scutellum and at the base of the abdomen 
it is paler ; the wings hyaline; the posterior femora and tibie 
incrassate; the pubescence on the posterior legs black. 
Abdomen shining black, with a blue tinge. 

Hab, Jamaica. 


84. Centris picta. 


Female. Length 7 lines. Black, variegated with yellow 
spots and fascie. Head: the labrum, sides of the face as 
high as the insertion of the antennee, a spot at each lateral 
anterior angle of the clypeus, and a minute spot at the base 
of each mandible yellow ; the cheeks have a thin griseous 
pubescence, that on the vertex is fuscous. Thorax: a spot 
on each side of the collar, two on the tegule, and also two 
ovate ones on the scutellum yellow; the pubescence on the 
sides and beneath the thorax fuscous ; the anterior and inter- 
mediate legs with black pubescence, except that on the tarsi 
beneath, which is ferruginous, the claw-joint being also ferru- 
ginous ; the posterior legs more or less obscure ferruginous ; 
the tibiz and basal joint of the tarsi with long, dense, fulvous 
pubescence, the tarsal jomt very broadly expanded, its pu- 
bescence on the inner side ferruginous. Abdomen: the 


On the Small Spotted Eagle of Northern Germany. 373 


second, third, and fourth segments have at their basal margins 

a bright yellow fascia, the second being narrowest; the apical 

segments yellow ; the fascia on the second segment expands 

laterally into an irregular ovate spot ; beneath rufo-testaceous. 
Hab. South Brazil. 


This species is in the possession of Dr. Hermann Miller, 
of Lippstadt. 
85. Centris lanosa. 
Centris lanosa, Cresson, Hym. Texana, p. 284, ¢. 
Hab. Texas. 
[ To be continued. | 


L.—Notes on the Small Spotted Eagle of Northern Germany, 
Aquila maculata (Gm.). By H. E. Dresser, F.Z.S. 


For some time I have been carefully working at the most 
difficult group amongst the eagles, that comprising those usu- 
ally known by the name of “ Spotted”? Kagles, and have by 
no means yet been able to elucidate matters to my satisfaction. 
A day or two ago, however, my friend and late colleague, Mr. 
R. B. Sharpe, showed me the proof-sheets of a portion of his 
Museum catalogue, now in the process of publication; and | 
observed that he therein uses the name of Aquila nevia for 
the small Pomeranian and North-German Spotted Eagle. 
Although this species, in common with the larger Spotted 
Eagle which is found in Europe and Asia, has so long borne 
this name, I convinced myselt, some months ago, that it cer- 
tainly does not belong to it, though I am by no means sure to 
which species Gmelin’s name of nwvia should apply. I have, 
however, never published any information I have acquired on 
this subject ; but as Mr. Sharpe, to whom I communicated some 
portion of it, wishes to refer to my notes in his catalogue, I have 
arranged with him to publish a short notice, giving the rea- 
sons why I refuse to accept the title of Aguila nevia for the 
smaller Spotted Eagle. They are as follows :—J. F. Gmelin, 
who first referred to an eagle under the name of Falco nevius 
(Syst. Nat. i. p. 258. no. 49), which has generally been looked 
on as being the Small Spotted Eagle, bases his description on 
that of Brisson’s Aigle tacheté (Orn. i. p. 425. no. 4, 1760). 
Brisson, however, does not describe the bird from a specimen 
in his own possession, but refers to other authors, some of 
whose works (as, for instance, the one first mentioned, that of 
Schwenckfeld) are not to be had for reference. He refers, 


374. On the Small Spotted Eagle of Northern Germany. 


however, to a plate in Frisch’s ‘ Vogel Deutschlands’ as giving 
an accurate representation of his “ Aigle tacheté,”’ in the fol- 
lowing words :—“Buteo. Frisch. hujus icon accurata tab. 71.” 
I possess a copy of Frisch’s work ; and on reference to the 
plate I found that the bird there represented is any thing but 
the Spotted Eagle, and might, I think, except for the partially 
feathered tarsi, possibly be meant to represent the Golden 
Eagle, though it does not agree with any stage of plumage 
of that bird which I have seen. It represents a large blackish 
brown eagle, regularly though indistinctly marked (so far 
as can be ascertained), by the centres of the feathers being 
darker than the outer portions; and the feathering on_ the 
tarsus only extends down to within about one third of the 
base of the claws, this latter portion being bare. Frisch, 
in his letterpress, speaks of it as the Stecn-Adler or Génse- 
Aar (the former being the German appellation for the Golden 
Eagle), and says that it is somewhat smaller than the Sea- 
Eagle. He further states that it has the tarsi only partly 
feathered, and is blackish brown in colour, like his Aquila 
melanaétus, which is evidently the young of the Sea-Eagle. 
He speaks of having kept one for some time in captivity ; 
and, so far as I can judge, the bird he had was a young 
Golden Eagle, more especially as he says that it inhabits 
rocky places and high mountains. _ He further writes that he 
thinks it may be a buzzard (“ich halte nicht ohne Grund dafiir, 
es sey dieses der rechte Busaar oder Bushard”’). The above, 
I think, clearly shows that the bird figured by Frisch, to 
which Brisson refers as being an accurate representation of 
his “‘Aigle tacheté,” cannot possibly be the Spotted Eagle. 

To return to Brisson, I may point out several reasons why 
his description cannot possibly refer to the small Spotted 
Eagle. He gives its total length as being 2 feet 7 inches and 
6 lines, or, in our English measure, 33°7 inches, which utterly 
precludes its being this species, as an old and large female 
only measures in the skin 25 inches in length. He further 
speaks of the throat being dirty white, the waderparts of the 
wings spotted, the underparts of the body generally dull fer- 
ruginous, the legs covered with dull ferrugimous feathers and 
spotted with white, and the tail-feathers white at the base 
and the end, and otherwise dark ferruginous marked with large 
transverse brown spots, none of which characters agrees with 
young spotted specimens of this bird which I possess. I 
must confess that I am utterly unable to discover what species 
it is to which Brisson refers, but am quite convinced that it 
is not the small Spotted Eagle, which I hold must bear the 
name of Aguila maculata (Gm.), ex Lath. 


On a new Species of Humming-bird. B75 


J. F. Gmelin (Syst. Nat. i. p. 258. no 50) describes this 
eagle as follows :—‘ Longitudo bipedalis. Rostrum magnum 
et ungues nigri; irides cinerez ; penn scapularum et tectrices 
alarum apice macula ovali albicante insignite ; dorsi maculis 
coloris bubalini; venter similibus lineis striatus,’ which deserip- 
tion agrees well with a specimen in my collection from Silesia. 
He further refers to Latham, of whose description (Synopsis, 
i. p. 38. no. 15, 1781) he has evidently made use in giving 
the above characters. Latham’s description is most clear, and 
certainly refers to the small North-German Spotted Eagle ; 
and the only measurement he gives (the total length), which 
he says is 2 feet, agrees precisely with specimens of this bird 
in my possession. He states that his description was taken 
from a specimen in good condition in the British Museum, 
but he does not say where it was obtained. 

I may add that on showing Mr. Sharpe my reasons for 
using the name of maculata instead of nevia for the present 
species, he quite agrees with me in the propriety of so doing. 


LI.—Description of an apparently new Species of Humming- 
bird of the Genus Eriocnemis. By D. G. Exxior, F.L.S., 
| ups det BM ao 


Eriocnemis chrysorama. 


Top of head, back, flanks, breast, and abdomen brillant me- 
tallic fiery red, darkest on the head; chin and throat metallic 
golden yellow ; upper tail-coverts, extending half the length 
of tail, metallic yellowish green ; under tail-coverts, basal half 
white, remainder metallic blue; wings purplish brown; tail 
much forked, steel-black ; tufts on tarsi large, pure white; 
bill black ; small spot on base of mandible, next to the chin, 
yellow, perhaps red in life. Total length 4} inches, wing 23, 
tail 14, bill 4. 

This very brilliant and handsome bird approaches closest to 
the EZ. mosquera, and resembles it somewhat in the colour of 
the lower parts, but is more brilliant and fiery. It is, how- 
ever, smaller in all its measurements except the bill. The 
throat-mark is very broad, and extends quite down to the 
breast. 

I do not know the habitat of this species ; but the specimen 
was stated to have come from Ecuador. 


376 Mr. H. J. Carter on the 


LII.—On the Structure called Kozoon canadense in the Lau- 
rentian Limestone of Canada. By H. J. Carter, F.R.S. 
&e. 


I seg by Dr. Carpenter’s ‘ Remarks” in the last number of 
the ‘ Annals’ that, in my letter to Prof. King on the so-called 
““ Hozoon canadense”’ (‘ Annals,’ March 1874, xii. p. 189), 
I did not lay sufficient stress on the parallelism of the acicular 
structure with the grains of serpentine. ‘This is particularly 
well shown in the illustrations 1, 2,3, 5, 6,9, and 10 of Profs. 
King and Rowney’s paper in the ‘Transactions of the Royal 
Trish Academy, vol. x. p. 506, from which I have taken 
the liberty of causing to be copied fig. 1, pl. 1, which is repro- 
duced in the following woodcut. 

From the “description”? of 
this figure, I learn that it 
represents ‘fa portion of a 
‘chamber-cast’ from a_ trans- 
parent section of ‘ eozoonal’ 
ophite from Canada, presented 
to Dr. Rowney by Dr. Car- 
penter, as seen by reflected light with a power magnifying 
120 diameters.” 

a is the portion of a ‘ chamber-cast,’ ¢ d the acicular struc- 
ture or so-called “ tubuli,” ‘ nummuline layer,” or “ nummu- 
line tubulation,” and 6 the serpentine seen through the latter. 

Now I can testify to this, as well as to all the other illus- 
trations of the kind given in this paper, as being correct 
instances of the parallelism of the acicule with the serpentine. 

Hence this character is wtterly incompatible with foramini- 
feral structure ; for the tubuli of the chambers of the testaceous 
Foraminifera forming in juxtaposition a crust of columnar 
tubes which keep up a direct communication between the 
cavity of the chamber and the outer world, necessarily take 
the shortest course to produce this ; and that course is therefore 
perpendicular to the surface or confines of the chamber and not 
parallel to it—in other words, a “‘ straight line.” 

If there be any inclination, it is exceptional and not the rule ; 
for Nature here, as in all other instances, is ever economic of 

her means. 

Now what do we find in the so-called ‘‘ eozoonal limestone”’? 
that the acicular structure, which has been stated to represent 
the tubuli, is almost always parallel to the serpentine, after the 
manner shown in the illustration. 

Thus, if there be even only one instance where the parallel- 
tsm can be demonstrated, it would show that the acicule could 


Structure called Eozoon canadense. Eh 


not have been the tubuli of a foraminiferal chamber ; while its 
general occurrence makes the case conclusive. 

It is instructive, if not amusing, to compare the facsimile 
illustrations of the eozoonal limestone given by the Galway 
mineralogists with the ‘ constructed” figure of the same given 
by Dr. Carpenter’s artist in the last number of the ‘ Annals ;’ 
and thus it may be understood why I stated to Dr. Carpenter 
that I had not read any thing that had been written on the 
opposite side of the question, or words to this effect (/. c. p. 278). 

Beyond this structure it is not necessary to go for conviction. 
Of course the tubuli may not be seen in the arenaceous Fora- 
minifera, where sand supplies the place of a calcareous test, but 
undoubtedly in the larger testaceous Foraminifera, where the 
test is formed of lime ; and it so happens that to the structure 
of these I have heretofore chiefly directed my attention. 

Before Schultze’s or Carpenter’s books were published, I 
had deseribed and illustrated, in the ‘ Annals,’ the canal-system, 
‘“‘nummuline”’ tubulation, and general structure of the Fora- 
minifera, both in the recent Operculina and in the fossilized 
Nummulite (‘ Annals,’ 1852, vol. x. p. 161, pl. iv.). Even 
Schultze in his book, as well as I can remember (for I have 
not the work by me to refer to), gives me the credit of having 
discovered the “ canal-system,” which at least proves the 
priority of my publications ; and since then up to the present 
time I have more or less occupied myself with the structure 
of Foraminifera, as my papers in the ‘ Annals’ will show. 

Even during the last four years that I have been engaged 
in the general and microscopical examination of the British- 
Museum collection of sponges, for the purpose of bringing 
them into some kind of order and arrangement in that insti- 
tution, this study has not been neglected; for, besides a variety 
of minute Foraminifera which I have found adhermg to 
these sponges, that have come from various parts of the world, 
[I have also had ample means of studying on them the beautiful 
little roseate Polytrema; so that I am able to speak decidedly 
of the great resemblance which the late Prof. Schultze is re- 
ported in the last number of the ‘Annals’ to have stated to 
exist between “ Polytrema and Hozoon canadense.” 

As regards the “ canal-system ” in Polytrema, my mounted 
sections do not show any ; nor do I think it should be expected 
that a foraminiferous structure merely consisting of cells 
heaped upon one another with wide intercommunications, 
finally terminated above in more or less erect branches, each 
of which presents several large trumpet-shaped openings for 
the exit of the body-sarcode, should require this ‘“‘ system.”’ 
However it is stated by Schultze to exist; that is, the “ Re- 


378 Mr. H. J. Carter on EKozoon canadense. 


port” states that “the application of stronger powers shows 
that in the finer structure of the canals [of the eozoonal lime- 
stone ?] there is so great an agreement with that of Polytrema 
among the living Acervuline, that, weighing all the other con- 
ditions of structure which come into consideration, there can 
be no serious doubt as to the foraminiferous nature of Hozoon 
canadense.”’ 

What ‘ canals” are here meant in the translated ‘“ Re- 
port ” it is difficult for me to see—that is, whether they be the 
‘‘tubuli’’? or the ‘canal-system.” The term ‘ramified 
canal-system ’’ is mentioned in the former part of the “ Report,”’ 
but never the words “ nummuline tubulation”’ or ‘ tubuli.”’ 
Still, as the position of the latter with respect to the chambers 
is the sine qué non here, the ‘ ramified canal-system”’ is, so 
far, of no consequence. 

Thus we come to the identification of the tubuli of Polytrema 
with the aciculz of the eozoonal structure ; and here we have 
again a repetition of the fact before stated, viz. that in a mounted 
section of a thin slice of Polytrema wherein the tubuli can 
be best seen, they are in all places observed to pass directly 
across the walls of the chambers—that is, to be perpendicular 
to the surface or confines of the latter ; while in the ‘‘ eozoonal 
structure ”’ the acicule, which have been stated to be identical 
with the tubuli, are observed to be parallel or tangential to the 
grains of serpentine. 

That is to say, in the section of eozoonal limestone their 
ends, for the most part, may be seen around the grains of 
serpentine, while in the wad/s of the chambers in the section 
of Polytrema they are always seen to be stdewise. 

In short the tubuli of the calcareous foraminiferous test are as 
perpendicular to the confines of the chambers as the lines of 
enamel to the dentine of a tooth. Now no one, under any cir- 
cumstances, could make a section of a tooth in which the lines 
of the enamel would appear otherwise than perpendicular to 
the dentine; neither could he do the like with a foraminiferal 
chamber. 

How is it, then, that the “ acicule”’ to which J have alluded 
are seen endwise (vide woodcut) around and not perpendicular 
to the confines of the grains of serpentine, if the latter be the 
cast of a foraminiferous chamber ? 

Hither the foraminiferous chambers and their tubuli of the 
species possessing calcareous tests (for we have nothing to do 
with arenaceous ones here) belie themselves, which is not likely, 
or the so-called Hozoon canadense in the Laurentian Limestone 
is not a fossilized foraminiferous structure. 

That Schultze should have failed to realize this is not extra- 
ordinary under the circumstances. 


Prof. Max Schultze on Eozoon canadense. 379 


LIL.—Latest Observations on Kozoon canadense by 
Prof. Max SCHULTZE. 


To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 


2 Hume Street, Dublin. 

GENTLEMEN, April 15th, 1874. 

I have been requested to allow some extracts from letters 
received by me from my late much-lamented teacher Professor 
Max Schultze to be published, as bearing upon a subject which 
has lately been discussed in the ‘Annals.’ Perhaps if you 
will kindly publish these few remarks they may serve te 
throw some Jight upon the /atest views entertained by that 
great authority on Hozoon canadense. 

I have made no observations myself on Hozoon, and am in 
no way personally interested in the debate which is now 
going on as regards its true nature. The letters from which 
I translate extracts, as nearly verbatim as possible, were re- 
quests to me to procure for Professor Schultze some speci- 
mens of the stones from Drs. King and Rowney, from the 
examination of which they had drawn their conclusions as 
printed in the ‘ Proceedings of the Royal Irish Academy’ 
for July 1869, which I had sent to him at his request a few 
days before the date of the letter which I now translate almost 
in full, 


‘Bonn, the 27th Dec. 1873.” 


DEAR FRIEND,—I have received Drs. King and Rowney’s 
paper, and have to thank you most heartily for obtaining it for 
meso soon. Having read it, you must now let me trouble you 
again with another request. These gentlemen, with whom I 
agree on many important points, supported by my own inyes- 
tigations on J4ozoon canadense, and whose treatise has made a 
very great impression upon me, would no doubt do me the kind- 
ness to let me have some specimens of the stones which they 
characterize as especially important, which it is very difficult for 
me to procure. It will give you but little trouble to acquaint 
them with the fact that | am engaged in the study of Hozoon, 
and am most desirous to obtain some pieces of ‘ Connemara 
ophites’ and other ophites which I cannot procure in Germany, 
Perhaps you would undertake this for me, dear friend, and 
torward me the specimens as soon as possible by ‘ Parcel De- 
livery ’ or any other way known to you. 

Tell Messrs. King and Rowney that, with respect to the 
‘proper wall’ of Carpenter, I am entirely of their opimion, 
that it is of inorganic origin, but would like to push my inyes- 


380 Mr. W. C. Hewitson on Butterflies 


tigations further as regards the ‘ arborescent canal-system,’ 
and desire very much, therefore, to have some pieces of Ho- 
zoon canadense in which the ‘canal-system’ is very distinctly 
developed. Forgive me if I give you a great deal of trouble ; 
puis. <2 Me: . 
‘“¢ Hoping to be able to return your kindness some time or 
other, “* Yours in friendship, 
“MAX SCHULTZE.” 


In another letter, dated Dec. 18th, 1873, he regrets not 
having yet received Drs. King and Rowney’s paper, where- 
upon I immediately sent it to him; and he acknowledged the 
receipt of it in the above. 

I may state that through the kindness of Dr. King I was 
enabled to send Professor Schultze some beautiful specimens 
of the stones he desired, and was expecting from him a letter of 
acknowledgment when I received the sad news of his death. 
I have, however, lately written to his widow begging her not 
to let any of his most recent papers be lost to science, but to 
have them published, and especially any remarks he may have 
written on the subject of Hozoon. She has not yet replied. 

I have the honour to be, Gentlemen, 
Yours faithfully, 
ARTHUR E. BARKER, 
Surgeon to the City-of-Dublin Hospital 


and Demonstrator of Anatomy in 
Roy. Coll. Surg. Ireland. 


LIV.—A List of Butterflies taken on the March to Coomassie 
by Lieutenant Alwin S. Bell, of the 2nd West-India Regi- 
ment, between Mansu and the River Prah, with Descriptions 


of new Species. By W. C. Hewrrson, F.L.S. 


FORTUNATELY for natural history as well as for my collection, 
Lieutenant Bell, to whom I am greatly indebted for butterflies 
taken under circumstances of so much interest, is a naturalist 
as well as a soldier ; he most unfortunately, however, became so 
ill that he had to be sent back in a hammock to the coast and 
put on board the ‘ Victor Emmanuel’ before he had penetrated 
further than the Prah. Lieutenant Bell, who is nowin England 
slowly recovering from fever, speaks of the difficulty of proeu- 
ring butterflies as great, from the narrowness of the pathways 
and the density of the bush. Many of them flew only high 
over head, and never came within his reach. 


_ 


taken on the March to Coomassie. 381 


The list I send is remarkable for the number of species in a 
collection of less than one hundred specimens. 


Papilio Leonides. 
Policenes. 
—— Nireus. 
— Cynorta. 
Zenobius. 
Pieris Theona. 
Pontia Xiphia. 
Eronia thalassina. 
Terias Brenda. 
Acrza Cidonia. 
serena. 

, 0. sp. 
Atella Phalanta. 
Junonia Terea. 
Salamis Anacardii. 
—— Cytora. 
Danais Niavius. 
Limniace. 
Eurema Delius. 


Diadema Anthedon. 
Charaxes Lucretius. 


Ephira. 
Euriphene Sophus. 
Mandinga. 
Phantasia. 
Aterica Cupavia. 
Jaeris ccenobita, 
crithea. 


Harma Iodutta. 

—— Theobene. 
Fumana. 

Neptis Melicerta. 
Nicomedes. 
Kallima Rumia. 
Mycalesis Xeneas.. 

, 0. sp. 

Eurytela Hiarbas. 

ie gains, 

Ergolis Corita. 
Enothrea. 
Libithea Labdaca. 
Epitola, n. ee 

Loxura Alcides. 
Liptena Libyssa. 
Milca. 

Pentila, three new species. 
Lycznesthes Larydas. 
Ligures. 
Hypolyczena Antifaunus. 
Faunus. 

Lebona. 

Lyczena Telicanus. 
Jesous. 

—— Hippocrates. 
—— Lingeus. 


Acrea acerata. 


Upperside orange. Both wings with the outer margins 
broad, dark brown. Anterior wing with the base and two 
large triangular spots on the costal margin dark brown, 

Underside paler. Both wings with the outer margins as 
above, marked on the margin by a series of triangular rufous 
spots. Anterior wing with a lunular black spot at the end of 
the cell, and a large triangular brown spot on the costal margin 
as above. Posterior wing with eleven or twelve black spots 
near the base. 

Exp. 14 inch. 

Belongs to the group which contains A. serena and A. Epo- 
nina, of which group I have another new species from Angola. 


Mycalesis Madetes. 


Upperside. Male dark brown. Anterior wing with a tuft 
of hair near the inner margin below its middle. 

Underside rufous brown. Both wings crossed at the middle 
by a dark brown linear band bordered outwardly with lilae : 

Ann, & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. xiii. 27 


382 On Butterflies taken on the March to Coomassie. 


both with a zigzag band near the outer margin: the margin 
and a submarginal line black : both ornamented by a series of 
black ocelli, the pupils white, the iris orange: on the anterior 
wing three, the third large; on the posterior wing seven, the 
fifth large. Anterior wing crossed in the cell by two dark 
brown lines. Posterior wing crossed near the base by a line 
of the same colour. 


Exp. 1,8; inch. 
Mr. Rogers has sent me this species from the Gaboon. 


Epitola Belli. 


Upperside. Male brilliant morpho-blue. Anterior wing with 
the costal margin, which is broad and marked at its middle 
by a trifid blue spot, and the apical half black. Posterior 
wing with the costal margin brown; the outer margin black, 
intersecting the blue at the nervures. 

Underside. Anterior wing dark brown, brassy at the apex: 
two white spots (one minute) within the cell, a blue line at 
the end of the cell, and an angular band of six white spots 
near the middle. Posterior wing brassy brown. 

Exp. 2-45 inch. 

This species is the most beautiful of the genus, and is of the 
same form as /. Hla’s. I have named it after my friend, and 
in memory of a time which he will not easily forget. 


Pentila Picena. 


Upperside white, slightly tinted with yellow. Both wings 
with a round black spot at the end of the cell. Anterior wing 
with the costal margin and apex, which is broad, brown. 

Underside with the black spots as above. Anterior wing 
white, with the costal margin and apex yellow, the outer mar- 
gin marked by a series of small black spots. Posterior wing 
yellow. 

Exp. 143, inch. : 


Pentila Petreia. 


Upperside rufous orange. Anterior wing with the costal 
margin, the apex, and outer margin broadly dark brown: a 
round spot in the cell and a second at the end of the cell black. 
Posterior wing with the outer margin brown, broad: a minute 
black spot on the costal margin before its middle, and a larger 
spot of the same colour at the end of the cell. 

Underside as above, except that there are no dark brown 
margins, the space which they occupy above being thickly 
undulated with brown, that there are two small brown spots 


ee Ae ee 


” ce ee ep ee 


On Additions to the Australian Curculionide. 383 


at the anal angle of the anterior wing, and that the whole of 
the posterior wing is undulated with brown. 

Exp. 1,4, inch. 

This species is nearly allied to P. Amenaida, but is smaller 
and much more sparsely spotted. 


Pentila Phidia. 


Upperside white. Both wings marked near the centre by 
three round black spots in the form of a triangle. Anterior 
wing with the costal margin and apex broadly orange: the 
outer margin dark brown, divided into spots towards the anal 
angle. Posterior wing with a series of dark brown spots on 
the outer margin. 

Underside as above. 

Exp. 1,3; inch. 

This is probably a variety of Pentila Abraxas of the 
‘Genera.’ 


LYV.—Additions to the Australian Curculionide. Part VI. 
By Francis P. Pascog, F.L.S. &c. 


OTIORHYNCHIN 2. AMALACTIN2. 
Timareta crinita. Tranes insularis. 
CLEONINE. x 
- - APIONIN2, 
Lixus Breweri. 1 
Mastersii. Apion comosum. 
pulicare. 
ERIRHININ2. argutulum. 
Glaucopela, n. g. 
unicolor. RHINOMACERIN2. 
Pheodica, n. g. : J 
— fulvicornis. : Auletes filirostris. 
scutellaris. calceatus. 
Empira, n. g. —— turbidus. 
—— variegata. —— nigritarsis. 


Timareta crintta. 


T. ferruginea, squamulis albis adpressis, plurimis majoribus sub- 
-erectis, lateribus setulosis, sat dense vestita ; capite inter oculos 
depresso, paulo incurvato ; rostro brevi ; scrobibus triangularibus, 
ampliatis ; funiculo gracili, articulo primo quam secundo longiore ; 
prothorace latitudine paulo breviore, squamis majoribus irrorato ; 
elytris leviter striato-punctatis, interstitiis umiserlatim squamis 
majusculis instructis; corpore infra sparse, sate con- 

27 


384 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to 


fertim et longe pilosis ; tibiis posticis in mare ad apicem valde 
curvatis. Long. 2 lin. 


Hab. Fremantle. 


This species has a mottled appearance to the naked eye, 
owing to the uncovered derm around each of the larger scales 
on the prothorax and the baldness in parts of the striz on the 
elytra. ‘The scape is more than half as long again, and pro- 
portionally more slender than in 7. figurata. 


Lixus Brewert. 

L. niger, subnitidus, squamulis piliformibus  silaceis, plurimis 
elongatis maculatim condensatis, vestitus; rostro crassiusculo, 
prothorace breviore, parum arcuato, irregulariter punctulato, haud 
carinato ; antennis subferrugineis, clava oblongo-elliptica ; pro- 
thorace subconico, longitudine latitudini equali, confertim 
punctato, lateribus silaceis ; elytris striato-punctatis, interstitiis 
convexis, apicibus acuminatis ; corpore infra pedibusque tenuiter 
griseo-pilosis, illo flavo-pollinoso. Long. 6 lin. 


Hab. Albany. 


In size and outline resembling L. Myagri, but, inter alva, 
the rostrum not carinate. The spotted appearance is due to 
patches of longish, erect, hair-like scales; and this character 
will at once distinguish it from L. tasmanicus, Germ. Of the 
latter [ have specimens from Victoria, West Australia, and 
Queensland. It is unaccountable to me why Germar, who 
described it from an admittedly Adelaide specimen (or speci- 
mens), should have so named it, as it is not known to occur 
in Tasmania. Lixus australis, Boisd. (I rely on the identifi- 
cation from a specimen out of a Paris collection), has an 
elongate conical prothorax, and closely resembles the Javan 
L. binodulus. Dedicated to Mr. Brewer, who has now for 
some years been collecting the insects of West Australia. 


Lixus Mastersit. 


L. niger, subnitidus, squamis piliformibus griseis omnino leviter 
yestitus; capite inter oculos fovea profunda impresso ; rostro 
crassiusculo, brevi, vix arcuato, disperse piloso; antennis nigris, 
pubescentibus ; scapo brevi; prothorace conico, latitudine paulo 
longiore, confertim punctato ; elytris cylindricis, sulcato-punctatis, 
punctis majusculis, approximatis, interstitiis parum conyvexis, 
apicibus rotundatis. Long. 5 lin, 


Hab. New South Wales (Rope’s Creek). 


This species is remarkable for its comparatively very short 
rostrum ; a more sparsely distributed pubescence just behind 


the Australian Curculionide. 385 


the middle of each elytron gives them a slightly patchy ap- 
pearance. L. tmmundus, also with a short rostrum, has, tnter 
alia, ferruginous antenne and the prothorax canaliculate. 


GLAUCOPELA. 


Rostrum subulatum, arcuatum, basi ampliatum, haud striolatum ; 
scrobes postmediane, oblique. Scapus brevis ; funiculus 7-articu- 
latus, articulo primo majusculo, ceteris gradatim brevioribus ; 
clava distincta, subglobosa. Oculi ovati, subtenuiter granulati. 
Prothorax transyersus, utrinque ampliato-rotundatus, apice an- 
gustissimus, basi paulo bisinuatus, lobis ocularibus nullis. E/ytra 
subcordata, prothorace multo latiora. Cowe intermedi sub- 
approximate. Femora crassa, mutica; téhiw intus bisinuate, 
antic apice submucronate; tars: modice dilatati. Abdomen 
segmentis duobus basalibus valde amplatis. 


This genus is differentiated trom EHrytenna by its subulate 
rostrum and the basal position of the scrobes, accompanied by 
a corresponding shortness of the scape. Cydmaa has the 
prothorax more rounded at the base, or, in other words, not 
lobed opposite the scutellum, and the rostrum striated at the 
base and cylindrical throughout. 


Glaucopela unicolor. 


G. fusca, squamis viridi-griseis dense induta; rostro prothorace 
paulo breviore, nitide fusco; antennis nigris; prothorace apice 
tubulato, quam basi fere triplo angustiore ; elytris sulcatis, inter- 
stitiis modice convexis, in medio squamis linearibus elongatis. 
uniseriatim dispositis, humeris callosis, apicibus rotundatis ; 
corpore infra pedibusque squamis viridi-opalescentibus dense 
tectis ; tarsis articulo ultimo testaceo, Long. 2 lin. 


Hab, Champion Bay. 


PHAODICA. 


Rostrum arcuatum, subulatum, apice cylindricum; scrobes pre- 
mediane, oblique, infra rostrum currentes. Scapus longiusculus, 
oculum haud attingens; funiculus 7-articulatus, articulo primo 
ampliato, secundo obconico, ceteris brevibus; clava ovata, distincta. 
Prothorax subtransversus, basi rotundatus, lobis ocularibus ob- 
soletis. Scutellum triangulare. Elytra oblongo-cordata, pro- 
thorace latiora. Cow@ intermediz subremote. /emora crassa, 
mutica ; tibie intus bisinuate, antice mucronate ; tarsi articulo 
penultimo fortiter bilobo. Abdomen segmentis duobus basalibus 
amplatis. 


The intermediate cox are wider apart than in Olancea, in 
which they may be said to be approximate, but less so than in 
Dicomada and Cydmea; from these two, with which this 


386 My. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to 


genus agrees in habit and in the rounded base of the prothorax, 

it may be at once distinguished by the scrobes running beneath 

the rostrum. 
Pheodica fulvicornis. 

P. nigra, supra squamis griseo-albis sejunctim vestita ; rostro nigro, 
squamoso, apice nudo fulvescente excepto; antennis fulvescen- 
tibus; prothorace utrinque rotundato, basi quam apice duplo 
latiore; scutello squamoso; elytris leviter sulcatis, interstitiis 
planatis, irregulariter squamosis, humeris obliquis; corpore infra 
pedibusque argenteo-squamosis. Long. 13 lin. 


Hab. West Australia. 


Pheodica scutellaris. 


P. nigra, supra squamis roseo-griseis sejunctim vestita; rostro 
magis tenuato, nigro, apicem versus aliquando fulvescente ; an- 
tennis fulvescentibus, vel paulo infuscatis; prothorace latitudine 
vix breviore, apice quam basi fere duplo angustiore; scutello 
esquamoso, nigro; elytris leviter sulcatis, interstitiis planatis, 
squamis seriatim dispositis, humeris subrotundatis ; corpore infra 
pedibusque argenteo-squamosis. Long. 1j lin. 


Hab. Swan River. 


The elytra in nearly all my specimens are more or less 
varied with blackish patches, in part but not invariably owing 
toslight abrasions. The rosy tint is sometimes scarcely notice- 


able. 


EMPIRA. 


Rostrum prothorace paulo brevius, subrobustum, arcuatum ; serobes 
premediane, paulo oblique, ad partem inferiorem oculi antice 
currentes, basin versus ampliati. Ocul transversi, ovati, fortiter 
granulati. Scapus oculum haud attingens, apice clavatus ; funi- 
culus 7-articulatus, articulo basali amplo, duobus sequentibus 
longiore, ceteris subobconicis, ultimis transversis ; clava elongata, 
distincta. Prothorax transversus, utrinque parum rotundatus, 
basi subbisinuatus, lobis ocularibus obsoletis. Scutellum parvum. 
Elytra prothorace paulo latiora, subcylindrica. Pectus antice 
profunde emarginatum. Pedes mediocres; femora valida, mutica ; 
tibie subcylindrice, intus bisinuate, apice mucronate ; tarsi lati, 
breviusculi, articulo ultimo valido ; wnguiculis divaricatis. -Abdo- 
men segmentis duobus basalibus ampliatis. 


The rostrum is intermediate in thickness between the general 
run of the Hyperine and of the Erirhinine ; but in habit it 
seems more akin to the former. The stout claw-joint and its 
divaricate claws, however, are foreign to the group ; but there 
is an approach to these characters in some of the Erirhinine, 
in which I have therefore placed it. 


the Australian Curculionide. 387 


Empira variegata. 


#. ferruginea, supra squamulis lutescentibus variegata ; capite 
rostroque nigris, hoc sejunctim punctulato; antennis subferru- 
gineis, rarissime albo-pilosis; prothorace sat dense squamoso ; x 
elytris striato-punctatis, interstitiis latis, parum convexis, quarta 
parte apicali basique sat dense, intermedia magis sparse, vel sub- 
plagiatim, squamulosis; pedibus clare ferrugineis, squamulis 
piliformibus parvis valde adspersis ; corpore infra nigro, niveo- 
squamoso. Long. 1} lin. 


Hab. Swan ae 


Tranes insularis. 

T. niger, nitidus, squamulis angustis silaceis, in fasciam pone 
medium elytrorum condensatis, adspersus ; oculis supra approxi- 
matis ; rostro prothorace fere sesquilongiore, tenuiter punctulato ; 
antennis ante medium rostri insertis; scapo quam funiculo 
longiore, articulis duobus basalibus elongatis, equalibus ; pro- 
thorace transyerso, utrinque ampliato-rotundato, tenuiter confertim 
punctulato; scutelio parvo; elytris prothorace manifeste latio- 
ribus, apice obtuse rotundatis, striato-punctatis, punctis sub- 
quadratis, interstitiis parum convexis, vage subtiliter punctulatis ; 
corpore infra pedibusque squamis piliformibus parvis parcius 
adspersis ; apice tibiarum tarsisque magis dense silaceo-pilosis. 
Long. 63 lin. 

Hab, Lord-Howe Island. 


This fine species most resembles 7. Roe in outline. It 
differs, however, from all other species known to me in the 
length of the scape and of the first two joints of the funicle, 
the remainder being rather shortly obconic, and in the eyes 
approximating above. ‘The anterior coxe are absolutely con- 
tiguous, as in 7. monopticus. 


Apion comosum. 


A, rufo-testaceum, leviter griseo-pubescens ; rostro tenuato, cylin- 
drico, modice arcuato, subtiliter punctulato, in mare capite pro- 
thoraceque conjunctim paulo longiore; antennis ad quartam 
partem a basi insertis; oculis nigris, mediocribus ; prothorace 
basi longitudine paulo latiore ; elytris fortiter sulcatis, interstitiis 
convexis ; coxis intermediis modice approximatis; unguiculis 
nigris. Long. 1 lin. 


Hab. Swan River ; Queensland. 


Much like A. Mehie but unicolorous, and with a con- 
siderably more slender rostrum. ‘The sculpture of the elytra 
is only seen when the rather coarse pubescence is rubbed 
away. Mr. Masters sends me two specimens (gand ¢ ) from 


388 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to 


Queensland, which I cannot distinguish, except by their dark 
underpart, from others from Swan River; the female in the 
former, however, has a much shorter rostrum. 


Apion pulicare. 

A. rufescens, leviter griseo-pubescens ; rostro valido, sat fortiter 
arcuato, prothorace multo breviore; antennis basin versus rostri 
insertis; oculis nigris, ampliatis ; prothorace subtransverso, basi 
fortiter bisinuato; scutello conspicuo; elytris basi prothorace 
multo latioribus, punctato-suleatis, interstitiis latis convexis ; 
coxis intermediis approximatis ; unguiculis nigris. Long. 1 lin. 


Hab. Swan River. 


A stouter species than the preceding, with a proportionally 
stouter as well as shorter rostrum. 


Apion argutulum. 


A. nitide atrum; capite elongato, inter oculos bisulcato, collo levi- 
gato; rostro prothorace fere duplo longiore, modice arcuato, sub- 
punctato, apicem versus subulato; antennis pone medium rostri 
insertis ; oculis modice ampliatis; prothorace cylindrico, sparse 
punctato, latitudine longiore ; scutello elongato ; elytris brevibus, 
pone medium prothorace duplo latioribus, punctato-sulcatis, 
sulcis basin versus approximatis, interstitiis modice conyexis, 
fere obsolete punctulatis, humeris prominulis ; pedibus elongatis. 
Long. 1 lin. 


Hab. Queensland. 


In habit like A. nigritarsis, but, inter alia, with more 
globose elytra and stouter legs. Of this cosmopolitan genus 
of between 300 and 400 species the above are the only species 
hitherto described from Australia. 


Auletes filirostris. 


A, testaceus vel lutescens, sparse albo-pubescens ; capite prothorace- 
que rude punctatis; rostro tenuato, elongato, apicem versus 
crassiore ; antennis longis, prope basin rostri insertis ; clava nigra ; 
prothorace capite latiore, utrinque fortiter rotundato, apice 
quam basi manifeste angustiore; scutello nitido; elytris modice 
elongatis, tenuiter punctatis, pone scutellum transverse leviter 
impressis ; pedibus sparse setulosis. Long. 13 lin. 


Hab. Albany. 


A well-marked species; the rostrum, nearly twice as long 
as the prothorax, far exceeds that of any other species. 


the Australian Curculionide. 389 


Auletes calceatus. 


A, subnitidus, lutescens, obsolete pubescens ; ecapite rostro (apice 
excepto) articulisque duobus ultimis tarsorum nigris; capite 
minus transverso, sat rude punctato ; rostro capite duplo longiore, 
sparse punctulato; antennis versus basin rostri insertis; clava 
nigra; prothorace subtransverso, rugoso-punctato, basi apiceque 
equal; scutello fusco; elytris subovatis, prothorace multo lati- 
oribus, subseriatim fortiter punctulatis, humeris prominulis, sutura 
fusca ; corpore infra nigro. Long. 14 lin. 


Hab. Champion Bay. 


A comparatively robust, coarsely punctured species. 


Auletes turbidus. 


A, nitide fulvus, subtiliter pubescens ; capite transverso, infuscato ; 
oculis ampliatis, prominulis; rostro capite prothoraceque con- 
junctim breviore, impunctato, apicem versus ampliato; antennis 
basin versus rostri insertis, articulo primo clavaque infuscatis; pro- 
thorace transverso, utrinque fortiter rotundato, et basin versus 
tumidulo, parce mediocriter punctulato; scutello parvo ; elytris 
parum elongatis, tenuiter parce punctulatis, stria suturali 
distineta, sutura fusca; corpore infra articulisque duobus ultimis 
tarsorum fuscis. Long. 1 lin. 


Hab. South Australia (Gawler). 


Allied to the preceding, but less robust and with finely 
punctured elytra. 


Auletes nigritarsis. 

A, nigro-piceus ; capite valde transyerso; oculis ampliatis, pro- 
minulis; rostro a basi ad apicem gradatim incrassato, parum 
arcuato, capiti prothoracique conjunctim longitudine squali ; 
antennis prope basin rostri insertis, flavidis, articulo primo clava- 
que fuscis; prothorace subtransverso, parce punctato, pone 
medium fortiter rotundato ; scutello inconspicuo; elytris brevi- 
usculis, tenuiter sat sparse punctulatis, stria suturali distincta ; 
abdomine metasternoque nigris ; pedibus flavidis, tarsis nigris. 


Long. 3 lin. 
Hab. South Australia; West Australia. 


Like the European A. tubicen, but head, rostrum, eyes, Ke. 
different. 


390 Professors King and Rowney on 


LVI.—Remarks on the Subject of “ Eozoon.” 
By Prof. Kine, D.Sc., and Prof. Rowney, D.Ph. 


WE have no intention of entering on the discussion opened up 
by Mr. Carter, F.R.S. &c., in his letter to one of us, and the 
reply to it by Dr. Carpenter, that have lately appeared in the 
‘Annals;’ feeling satisfied that the constructors of tie so-called 
Eozoon canadense have quite sufficient to attend to in answer- 
ing the evidences and arguments already brought forward in 
the papers we have published against its presumed organic 
origin. Hitherto, and we regret to say it advisedly, no proper 
attempt has been made to do so. 

In our early investigations, and after having fully satisfied 
ourselves that the various eozoonal structures could not be the 
remains of an organism, we felt it to be our duty to make an 
attempt at explaining their mineral origin. They looked 
much like dendromorphs and acicular crystallizations ; but we 
soon found that they were not productions of these kinds, nor 
concretions, nor infiltrations: instead of being incremental, 
they were obviously decremental. Consisting for the most 
part of serpentine (an amorphous hydro-silicate of magnesia), 
this mineral was seen to be affected by an irregular septarian 
and a subparallel divisional structure, accompanied by some 
remarkable changes, one fibrous (known to mineralogists as 
chrysotile), another arborescent (? metaxite), and another floe- 
culent—all usually of a white colour. Very frequently calcite 
prevails in the divisional interspaces in association with the 
latter allomorphs. In such cases the serpentine is broken up 
into irregularly lobulated or segmented grains, lumps, and 
plates, separated by the calcitic interspaces ; in which are im- 
bedded examples of the three allomorphs: the chrysotile is 
generally an integral portion of the grains and plates of serpen- 
tine, forming patches of asbestiform coating. ‘The plates of 
serpentine and their calcitic interspaces occasionally give rise to 
remarkable interlaminations, while the grains (usually at- 
tached to one another, but occasionally isolated) occur irregu- 
larly scattered amongst the calcite. Not unfrequently the 
serpentine assumes the condition of chrysotile without any cal- 
cite being present. A close investigation enabled us to see not 
only the serpentine passing insensibly into compact or true 
chrysotile and flocculite (as, for the sake of brevity, it may be 
called), but that the one often became separately acicular, 
and the other changing from rudely shaped masses into simple 
and complex arborescences (like those in metaxite), simu- 
lating, in the most remarkable manner, sponge-structures and 
dendritic crystallizations. The evidences were so clear and 


the Subject of ‘‘ Kozoon.”’ 391 


complete as to prevent our coming to any other conclusion 
than that they were residual bodies, and not concretions, infil- 
trations, or crystallizations. As to their being portions of 
an organism, the idea would not bear any serious considera- 
tion. Wherever the changes had taken place, a carbacid 
mineral (calcite, or dolomite) had replaced the chrysotile, 
flocculite, and metaxite; so that it became evident that we 
had before us the results of chemical changes analogous to 
certain kinds of pseudomorphosis occurring among minerals. 

Not only does serpentine present unmistakable evidences of 
the above changes, but certain of them have occurred to us in 
other silacid minerals, as malacolite and Wollastonite. Agglo- 
merations of minute crystals of these minerals are common in 
certain so-called primary limestones (notably at Aker in Sweden, 
Amity in New York, and in Ceylon), so reduced by solvent or 
chemical action (the component crystals still retaining in many 
eases their original angles, edges, and planes) as to assume the 
exact forms of the “ eozoonal canal-system” in its typical 
condition, and showing clearly their residual character, also 
the replacement of their lost or eroded portions by the calcite 
or dolomite in which they are imbedded. 

A more important discovery we had not anticipated. It 
opens out a wide field of research in chemical geology, an 
insight into which, however, has been afforded by the illus- 
trious Bischof. Of late the subject has been frequently under 
our consideration. It is well known that certain rocks are 
not in their original chemical condition: the changes in 
serpentine render it extremely probable that ophite (a silo- 
earbacid rock) is a chemically changed or methylotic product, 
that the Tyree, Aker, and other crystalline marbles were ori- 
ginally silacid masses, and possibly that much of the so-called 
“‘ limestones ”’ occurring in the Laurentians of Canada were, 
in Archean periods, silacid members of true gneisses, didrites, 
and other related rocks*. We need not dwell any longer on 
this subject; suffice it to say that we are pursuing a number 
of researches in connexion with it. We have been favoured 
with specimens by Mr. F. R. Mallet, of the Indian Geological 
Survey, discovered by himself in dolomitic bands intersecting 
transversely beds of gneiss at South Mirzapury, showing typi- 
cal eozoonal structures beautifully developed through methy- 
lotic action; and last summer one of us obtained at the 
Lizard, Cornwall, aided by the kindness of Mr. Symons, 
manager of the Poltesco marble-works, a number of speci- 

* See a paper by one of the writers in the ‘Geological Magazine’ 


for January 1872. 
+ Records of the Geological Survey of India, No, 1, 1872. 


392 Professors King and Rowney on 


mens out of apparently a most unpromising rock (serpen- 
tinite, rarely including any carbacid members), showing its 
characteristic mineral not only changing as “ eozoon”’ into 
calcite, but also as a pseudomorph after augite, &c. A de- 
scription of these cases 1s in preparation for publication. 

Our view is that the changes referred to have resulted from 
the action of heated water holding a carbonate in solution. 

But to return to ‘Hozoon.” Dr. Carpenter has kindly 
offered “to give time and trouble to enable those who wish to 
make the comparison of actual specimens for themselves.” We 
would strongly urge on them to take advantage of this offer. 
We may be permitted, however, to supplement it by suggesting 
their careful perusal of the memoirs that have been published 
by us descriptive of similar specimens*, not forgetting those 
published by Dr. Carpenter and others on his side. 

Attention may next be called to the following summary of 
the arguments and evidences contained in the memoirs re- 
ferred to :— 

1st. The serpentine in ophitic rocks (consisting essentially 
of serpentine and calcite, with which various other minerals, 
chiefly silacids and carbacids, are often associated) we have 
shown to present appearances which can only be explained on 
the view that it has undergone structural and chemical (me- 
thylotic) changes :—the former causing it to pass into different 
subdivided states; and the latter etching out the resulting 
solids into a variety of forms—grains and plates with lobu- 
lated or segmented surfaces (“ chamber-casts,” see Dr. Car- 
penter’s fig. 1), fibres and acicule (‘‘ nummuline chamber- 
wall”), simple and branching configurations (“ canal-system”), 
Crystals of malacolite and other silacid minerals (often occurring 
in ophite and other silo-carbacid rocks) manifest some of these 
changes in a remarkable degree. 

2nd. The “‘intermediate skeleton” of ‘ Hozoon”’ (which 
often appears as the calcitic matrix of the above lobulated 
grains&c.T) is completely paralleled in various crystalline rocks, 
notably marble containing grains of coccolite (Aker and Tyree), 
pargasite (Finland), chondrodite (New Jersey), &c. 

drd. The “chamber-casts” in the granular (acervuline) 
variety of ‘‘Hozoon”’ are more or less paralleled by the grains 
of the silacid minerals in the precited marbles. 


* Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, vol. xxii.; ‘ Proceed- 
ings of the Royal Irish Academy,’ vol. x.; cbrd. new series, vol. i. ; 
‘ Geological Magazine,’ January 1875. 

+ This part is dissolved out (artificially) in fig. 1. Dr. Carpenter’s 
fig. 2, oxhebiting the various eozoonal features, must be taken merely as 
an illustration, it being a constructed representation. 


the Subject of ‘ Kozcon.” 393 


4th. The “ chamber-casts ’’ being composed occasionally of 
Loganite and malacolite (besides serpentine) is a fact which, 
instead of favouring their organic origin as supposed, must be 
held as a proof of their having been produced by mineral 
agencies, inasmuch as the three silacid minerals named have 
a close pseudomorphic relationship, and may therefore replace 
one another. 

5th. Dr. Giimbel, observing rounded, cylindrical, and tuber- 
culated grains of coccolite and pargasite in crystalline calci- 
tic marbles, considered them to be ‘‘ chamber-casts,” or of 
organic origin. We have shown that such grains often pre- 
sent crystalline planes, angles, and edges—a fact clearly pro- 
ving that they were originally aggregations of simple or 
compound crystals that have undergone external decretion by 
chemical or solvent action. 

6th. We have adduced evidences to show that the ‘‘ num- 
muline chamber-wall”’* in its typical condition (that is, con- 
sisting of cylindrical acicule separated by interspaces filled 
with calcite) has originated directly from closely packed fibres, 
these from chrysotile or asbestiform serpentine, this from in- 
cipiently fibrous serpentine, and the latter from the same 
mineral in its amorphous or structureless condition T. 

7th. The “ nummuline wall,” in its typical condition, un- 
mistakably occurs in cracks or fissures, both in Canadian, 
Connemara, and other ophites f. 

8th. The “‘nummuline wall” is paralleled by the fibrous 
coat which is occasionally present on the surface of grains of 
chondrodite§. 

9th. We have shown that the relative position of two super- 

osed acicular layers (an wpper and an under ‘ nummuline 

wall’), and the admitted fact of their component acicule often 
passing continuously and without interruption from one “ cham- 
ber-cast’’ to another, to the exclusion of the “ intermediate 
skeleton,” are totally incompatible with the idea of the said 


* Quart, Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxii. pl. xiv. figs. 1 & 2; Proceedings 
Royal Ivish Acad. vol. x. pl. xli. figs. 1 & 2. Few figures of the “cham- 
ber-wall,” published by the constructors of “Zozoon,’ afford a proper idea 
of its structure. We were the first to represent it in its typical condition. 

+ The so-called “nummuline wall” (asbestiform coat) in Dr. Car- 
penter’s constructed representation, fig. 2, ought not to be represented in 
the way it is—bounded by two continuous lines—as it is an integral portion 
of the grains and plates of serpentine (the so-called ‘chamber casts”’), 
and not a chemically differentiated part like the true (calcareous) wall of 
certain Foraminifers. 

¢ Quarterly Journal Geological Society, vol. xxii. pl. xiv, fig. 4, p. 196; 
Proc. Royal Irish Academy, vol. x. pl. xlii. figs. 5, 6. t 

§ Quarterly Journal Geological Society, vol, xxii. pl. xiv. figs. 5 & 6, 
pp. 196 & 197. 


Fe ee Re ee ee 


394 Professors King and Rowney on 


‘“‘nummuline layers’ having resulted from pseudopodial tubu- 
lation*. 

10th. The so-called “ stolons” and “ passages of communi- 
cation exactly corresponding with those described in Cyclo- 
clypeus”’ (fig. 2, 6 6) have been shown to be tabular crystals 
and variously formed bodies belonging to different silacid 
minerals, wedged crossways or obliquely in the calcitic inter- 
spaces between the grains and plates of serpentine. 

11th. The “ canal-system ” is composed of serpentine, mala- 
eolite, and other silacid minerals. Its typical kinds in serpen- 
tine may be traced in all stages of formation out of plates, 
prisms, and other solids undergoing a process of superficial 
decretion {. In malacolite &c. they are made up of crystals 
(single or aggregated together) that have had their planes, 
angles, and edges rounded off, or have become further reduced 
by some solvent. 

12th. The ‘“canal-system,” in its remarkable branching 
varieties, is completely paralleled by crystalline configura- 
tions in the coccolite marble of Aker, in Sweden, in the cre- 
vices of a crystal of spinel imbedded in a calcitic matrix from 
Amity, New York, and in a gemmiferous calcitic rock oecur- 
ring in Ceylon§. 

13th. The configurations, presumed to represent the “ canal- 
system,” are totally without any regularity 1m their form, rela- 
tive size, or arrangement; and they occur independently of, 
and apart from, other “ eozoonal features” (Amity, Boden, 
&c.),—facts not only demonstrating them to be purely mineral 

* Ihd. vol, xxii. p. 191; Proc. Royal Irish Academy, vol. x. p. 517. 

t Quarterly Journal Geological Society, vol. xxii. pl. xiv. figs. 10 & 11, 
pl. xv. fig. 15, pp. 207 & 208. 

t Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. vol. x. pl. xliil. figs. 7 & 8, pp. 527 & 528. 
Speaking of the “ arborescent structure” of the “ canal-system,” Dr. 
Carpenter assumes that we “ maintain it to consist of mere mineral infil- 
trations”! And hence, by adopting the following mode of reasoning, he 
evidently feels that a decisive case has been made out against us. As 
the “ ramifications pass across the planes of cleavage, every mineralogist 
will at once say that this is perfectly conclusive—against their being, by 
any probability, mere inorganic infiltration; that nothing but organic 
structures could in this manner produce a ramification of one mineral in 
the interior of another, a ramification of serpentine in the interior of car- 
bonate of lime passing against its crystalline planes” (‘ Pharmaceutical 
Journal,’ Feb. 11, 1871, p. 649). If this were the case, it would necessa- 
rily follow that imbedded minerals which produce “ ramifications ” in the 
“interior of calcite and passing against its crystalline planes ” (as is com- 
mon with native silver, prismatic pyrites, glauconite arborescences in 
calcite or the so-called Hislopite, the latter as made known by Mr. Carter) 
can be “nothing but organic structures”! It is to be regretted that Dr. 
Carpenter still makes use of this argument in his last communication. 


§ Geological Magazine, January 1873. We have lately detected typical 


“canal system’ in a chondrodite rock from the United States. 


— 


the Subject of “ Kozoon.”’ 395 


products, but which strike at the root of the idea that they are 
of organic origin. 

14th. In answer to the argument that, as all the “ eozoonal 
features’ are occasionally found together in ophite, the com- 
bination must be considered a conclusive evidence of their 
organic origin, we have shown, from the composition, phy- 
sical characters, and circumstances of occurrence and asso- 
ciation of their component serpentine, that they represent 
the structural and chemical changes which are eminently and 
peculiarly characteristic of this mineral*. It has also been 
shown that the combination is parallel to a remarkable extent 
in chondrodite and its calcitic matrix fF. 

15th. The “regular alternation of lamelle of calcareous and 
siliceous minerals ’’ (respectively representing the “ interme- 
diate skeleton’ and “ chamber-casts ’’) occasionally seen in 
ophite, and considered to be a “ fundamental fact ’’ evidencing 
an organic arrangement, is proved to be a mineralogical phe- 
nomenon by the fact that a similar alternation occurs in 
amphiboline-calcitic marbles and gneissose rocks f. 

16th. In order to account for certain untoward difficulties 
presented by the configurations forming the “ canal-system”’ 
and the acicule of the ‘‘nummuline layer ’’—that is, when oc- 
eurring as ‘ solid bundles,’ or when they are ‘ closely packed,” 
or “appear to be glued together,’—Dr. Carpenter has proposed 
the theory that the sarcodic extensions which they are presumed 
to represent have been “ turned into stone”’ (a ‘siliceous mine- 
ral”’) “ by Nature’s cunning”’ (“just as the sarcodic layer on 
the surface of the shell of living Foraminifers is formed by the 
spreading out of coalesced bundles of the pseudopodia that have 
emerged from the chamber-wall ”)—“ by a process of chemical 
substitution before their destruction by ordinary decomposi- 
tion’’§. We showed this quasi-alchymical theory to be alto- 
gether unscientific ||. 

17th. The “siliceous mineral”’ (serpentine) has been ana- 
logued with those (generalized as glauconite) forming the 
variously produced casts of recent and fossil Foraminifers. 
We have shown that the mineral silicates of ‘‘Hozoon”’ have 
no relation whatever to the substances composing such casts. 

18th. Dr. Sterry Hunt, in order to account for the serpentine, 


* Proc. Royal Irish Academy, vol. x. pp. 533, 534, 535. 
+ Quarterly Journal Geological Society, vol. xxii. pl. xiv. figs. 5 & 6, 


{ Quarterly Journal Geological Society, vol. xxii, p. 210; Proc. Royal 
Trish Academy, vol. x. p, 528. 

§ Intellectual Observer, vol. vii. uncoloured plate, fig. 2, a, pp. 292, 294, 
290; Quarterly Journal Geological Society, vol. xxii. p. 222. 

|| Quarterly Journal Geological Society, vol. xxii. p, 202; Proc, Royal 
Irish Academy, vol. x. pp. 587 & 538, i 


396 On the Subject of “ Eozoon.”’ 


Loganite, and malacolite being the presumed in-filling sub- 
stances of ‘‘Hozoon,” has propounded the “novel doctrine”’ 
that such minerals were directly deposited in the ocean-waters 
in which this “ fossil’ lived. We have gone over all his evi- 
dences and arguments without finding one to be substantiated. 

19th. Having investigated the alleged cases of “ cham- 
bers” and “ tubes”’ occurring “ filled with calcite,” and pre- 
sumed to be ‘fa conclusive answer to’’ our “ objections,” we 
have shown that there are the strongest grounds for remo- 
ving them from the category of reliable evidences on the 
side of the organic doctrine*. ‘The Tudor specimen has been 
shown to be equally unavailable. 

20th. The occurrence of the best-preserved specimens of 
* Kozoon canadense”’ in rocks that are in a “ highly crystalline 
condition ’’ (Dawson) must be accepted as a fact utterly fatal 
to its organic origin T. 

21st. The occurrence of “eozoonal features”’ solely in 
crystalline or metamorphosed rocks belonging to the Lauren- 
tian, the Lower Silurian, and the Liassic systems{ (never 
in ordinary unaltered deposits of these and the intermediate 
systems) must be assumed as completely demonstrating their 
purely mineral origin. 


It is understood that a communication from Mr. Arthur 
Barker will appear, showing that, whatever opinion the late 
Professor Schultze might hold in the autumn of last year 
respecting ‘‘Hozoon,” he subsequently changed it after reading 
our papers. Ashe expressed a wish to become fully acquainted 
with the ‘ canal system,” we were careful in sending him some 
instructive specimens exhibiting it in various stages of forma- 
tion. 


* Proceedings of the Royal Irish Academy, vol. x. pp. 582, 548; zbid. 
new ser. vol. i. p. 10. Dr. Carpenter (also Dr. Dawson) still adduces 
these unreliable cases, and ignores altogether the grounds on which we 
have considered them such. 

+ Dr. Carpenter, replying to the objection, as put by Mr. T. Mellard 
Reade, F.G.S., that “ EKozoon” only occurs in metamorphosed rocks 
(‘ Nature,’ No. 60), asserts that its “calcareous lamelle”’ (‘intermediate 
skeleton’) ‘show less departure from the shelly texture than do the 
great majority of undoubted shells, corals, &c. contained in the least- 
altered rocks of any geological period” (‘ Nature,’ No. 62)—forgetting 
that as the substance of such fossils has undergone so much change, 
the fact demands a vast amount of metamorphism to convert the rocks 
containing them (“least altered” as they may be) into the “highly 
crystalline condition” of ‘‘eozoonal” ophite. But Dr. Carpenter seems 
to misunderstand the objection altogether, as it is not based so much on 
the mineral structure of the “ eozoonal features ” as on the fact that they 
occur best preserved in “ highly crystalline ” or metamorphosed rocks. 

{ Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. vol. x., “ Geological Considerations ”; 7bid. 
new ser, vol. 1., “Isle of Skye Ophite.”’ 


en ee 


Miscellaneous. 397 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


Notice of new Equine Mammals from the Tertiary Formation. 
By Professor O. C. Marsu. 


Iy this paper Prof. Marsh describes a very interesting series of 
remains of equine animals from the Tertiary deposits of the Western 
Territories, the fruit of the explorations of a party sent out by Yale 
College. 

The American Eocene mammals of this group belong to a genus 
lately established by Prof. Marsh under the name of Orohippus ; it 
is nearly allied to Anchitherium, but differs by “having four 
functional digits in the manus” and by the absence of the ante- 
orbital fossa. The dentition is very like that of Anchitheriwm, and 
its formula is as follows :— 

Incisors 3, canines +, premolars +, molars 3. 

There is a long diastema; and the canine is large. The known 
species are Orohippus gracilis, Marsh, O. pumilus, Marsh, O. agilis, 
Marsh, and O. major, sp. n., all from the Eocene of Wyoming and 
Utah. 0. major was about the size of a fox. 

A form intermediate between Orohippus and Anchitherium is 
described as constituting a new genus under the name of Miohippus 
annectens. It has no anteorbital fossa; but there are only three 
digits in the manus. The dental formula is the same as that of 
Orohippus ; and the intermediate lobes of the upper molars are more 
completely separated than in Anchitherium. Miohippus annectens 
is from the Miocene of Oregon. It was rather larger than a sheep. 

Anchitherium anceps and A. celer are two new species. The 
former, about as large as a sheep, is from the Miocene of Oregon ; 
the latter, a small species, about two thirds the size of A. Batrdi, is 
from the Miocene of Nebraska. 

Equus parvulus, Marsh (Sill. Journ. xlvi. p. 374), is now referred 
by the author to Protohippus, Leidy. It is from the Pliocene 
deposits of Nebraska; and its remains indicate an animal about 
23 feet in height. Another species, Protohippus avus, sp. n., from 
the Pliocene of Oregon, is represented only by teeth; but these 
indicate such differences from the dentition of other species that 
the animal will probably prove to be generically distinct. 

Pliohippus is a new genus allied to Hquus and having only 
splint bones in place of the lateral hoofs, but closely resembling 
Protohippus in its dentition, and possessing a large anteorbital fossa. 
Its dental formula is as follows :— 

Incisors #, canines 1, premolars 4, molars 4. 

Pliohippus pernix, sp. n., of which a considerable part of the 
skeleton has been exhumed from the Pliocene sands of the Niobrara 
river, Nebraska, was about the size of an ass. A second, and 
apparently somewhat larger species, P. robustus, sp. n., Was obtained 
from the same locality. 

The teeth of a new species of the supposed Miocene genus An- 


Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xt. 28 


398 Miscellaneous. 


chippus, A. brevidens, were obtained from Pliocene deposits in 
Oregon. Prof. Marsh thinks that Leidy’s genera Anchippus and 
Hyohippus will probably prove to be identical. 

Prof. Marsh concludes his paper with the following general 
remarks :— 

The large number of equine mammals now known from the 
Tertiary deposits of this country, and their regular distribution 
through the subdivisions of this formation, afford a good oppor- 
tunity to ascertain the probable lineal descent of the modern horse. 
The American representative of the latter is the extinct Hquus 
fraternus, Leidy, a species almost, if not entirely, identical with 
the Old-World Equus caballus, Linn., to which our recent horse 
belongs. Huxley has traced successfully the later genealogy of 
the horse through European extinct forms* ; but the line in America 
was probably a more direct one, and the record is more complete. 
Taking, then, as the extremes of a series, Orohippus agilis, Marsh, 
from the Eocene, and Equus fraternus, Leidy, from the Quaternary, 
intermediate forms may be intercalated with considerable certainty 
from the thirty or more well-marked species that lived in the 
intervening periods. The natural line of descent would seem to 
be through the following genera :—Orohippus of the Eocene; 
Miohippus and Anchitheriwm of the Miocene; <Anchippus, Hip- 
parion, Protohippus, and Pliohippus of the Pliocene; and Equus, 
Quaternary and recent. 

The most marked changes undergone by the successive equine 
genera are as follows:—Lst, increase in size; 2nd, increase in speed, 
through concentration of limb-bones; 3rd, elongation of head and 
neck, and modifications of skull. The increase in size is remarkable. 
The Eocene Orohippus was about the size of a fox; Miohippus and 
Anchitherium, from the Miocene, were about as large as a sheep; 
Hipparion and Pliohippus, of the Pliocene, equalled the ass in 
height; while the size of the Quaternary Hquus was fully up to 
that of the modern horse. 

The increase of speed was equally marked, and was a direct 
result of the gradual modification of the limbs. The latter were 
slowly concentrated, by the reduction of their lateral elements and 
enlargement of the axial one, until the force exerted by each limb 
came to act directly through its axis, in the line of motion. This 
concentration is well seen ¢. g. in the fore limb. There was, Ist, 
a change in the scapula and humerus, especially in the latter, which 
facilitated motion in one line only; 2nd, an expansion of the radius 
and reduction of the ulna, until the former alone remained entire 
and effective; 3rd, a shortening of all the carpal bones and en- 
largement of the median ones, ensuring a firmer wrist; 4th, an 
increase in size of the third digit, at the expense of those on each 
side, until the former alone supported the limb. The latter change 
is clearly shown in the following diagram, which represents the 
fore feet of four typical genera in the equine series, taken in 


* Anniversary Address, Geological Society of London, 1870, 


a 


_” 


eA ee 


St lO ee ee 


Miscellaneous. 399 


succession from each of the geological periods in which this group 
of mammals is known to have lived :— 


a 


a. Orohippus (Kocene) ; 6. Miohippus (Miocene); ce. Hipparion (Pliocene) ; 
d, Equus (Quaternary). 


The ancient Orohippus had all four digits of the manus well 
developed. In Miohippus, of the next period, the fifth toe has 
disappeared, or is only represented by a rudiment, and the limb is 
supported by the second, third, and fourth, the middle one being 
the largest. Hipparion, of the later Tertiary, still has three digits ; 
but the third is much stouter, and the outer ones have ceased to be 
of use, as they do not touch the ground. In Equus, the last of the 
series, the lateral hoofs are gone, and the digits themselves are 
represented only by the rudimentary splint bones*. The middle, 
or third, digit supports the limb; and its size has increased accord- 
ingly. The corresponding changes in the posterior limb of these 
genera are very similar, but not so manifest, as the oldest type 
(Orohippus) had but three toes behind. An earlier ancestor of the 
group, perhaps in the lowest Eocene, probably had four toes on this 
foot, and five in front. Such a predecessor is as clearly indicated 
by the feet of Orohippus, as the latter is by its Miocene relative. 
A still older ancestor, possibly in the Cretaceous, doubtless had 
five toes in each foot, the typical number in mammals. This 
reduction in the number of toes may perhaps have been due to 
elevation of the region inhabited, which gradually led the animals 
to live on higher grounds, instead of the soft lowlands where a 
polydactyle foot would be an advantage. 

The gradual elongation of the head and neck, which took place 
in the successive genera of this group during the Tertiary period, 
was a less fundamental change than that which resulted in the 
reduction of the limbs. The process may be said to have already 
begun in Orohippus, if we compare that form with other most 
nearly allied mammals. The diastema, or “place for the bit,” 
was well developed in both jaws even then, but increased materially 


* The modern horse occasionally has one of the ancestral hooflets de- 
veloped, usually on the fore foot. 
28* 


400 Miscellaneous. 


in succeeding genera. The number of the teeth remained the 
same until the Pliocene, when the front lower premolar was 
lost; and subsequently the corresponding upper tooth ceased to 
be functionally developed. The next upper premolar, which in 
Orohippus was the smallest of the six posterior teeth, rapidly 
increased in size, and soon became, as in the horse, the largest of 
the series. The grinding-teeth at first had very short crowns, 
without cement, and were inserted by distinct roots. In Pliocene 
species the molars became longer, and were more or less coated 
with cement. The modern horse has extremely long grinders, 
without true roots, and covered with a thick external layer of 
cement. The canine teeth were very large in Orohippus, and in 
this genus, as well as those from the Middle Tertiary, appear to 
have been well developed in both sexes. In later forms these 
teeth declined in size, especially as the changes in the limbs 
afforded other facilities for defence or escape from danger. The 
incisors in the early forms were small, and without the character- 
istic pit of the modern horse. In the genera from the American 
Eocene and Miocene the orbit was not enclosed behind by an 
entire bridge of bone; and this first makes its appearance in this 
country in Pliocene forms. ‘The depression in front of the orbit 
so characteristic of Anchitherium and some of the Pliocene genera 
is, strange to say, not seen in Orohippus or the later Miohippus, 
and is wanting, likewise, in existing horses. It is an interesting 
fact that the peculiarly equine features acquired by Orohippus are 
retained persistently throughout the entire series of succeeding 
forms. Such, ¢. g., is the form of the symphysial part of the lower 
jaw, and also the characteristic astragalus, with its narrow, oblique, 
superior ridges, and its small articular facet for the cuboid. 

Such is, in brief, a general outline of the more marked changes 
that seem to have produced in America the highly specialized 
modern Aguus from his diminutive, four-toed predecessor, the 
Eocene Orohippus. ‘The line of descent appears to have been 
direct; and the remains now known supply every important inter- 
mediate form. It is, of course, impossible to say with certainty 
through which of the three-toed genera of the Pliocene that lived 
together the succession came. It is not impossible that the later 
species, which appear generically identical, are the descendants 
of more distinct Pliocene types, as the persistent tendency in all 
the earlier forms was in the same direction. Considering the 
remarkable development of the group throughout the entire Tertiary 
period, and its existence even later, it seems very strange that none 

of the species should have survived, and that we are indebted for 
- our present horse to the Old World, 


Yale College, New Haven, Feb, 20th, 1874, 


The young Asiatic Tapir (Rhinochcerus sumatranus), 
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. 


The British Museum has had for many years a specimen of a young 


Miscellaneous. 401 


Kuda (2thinocherus), received from Leyden under the name of 
Tapirus malayanus ; and the Museum has recently received the skin 
of a much younger animal, which was brought to this country 
with the skin of an adult animal which is in the Museum. They 
are both said to have come from Sumatra. 

These two young skins differ considerably in the markings; and 
as I have lately observed the same thing in the American tapirs 
and figured them (P. Z. 8. 1872, p. 489, t. xxi. & xxii. and p. 624, 
t. xlv.), I have thought it desirable to describe the two specimens to 
draw attention to the differences, so as to learn if the young 
animals vary in this respect or indicate two species distinguished 
by the different colouring of the young. 

Both specimens agree with the young West-Indian and the Peru- 
vian tapirs in haying their legs and feet with large, white, unequal- 
sized spots. 

The larger specimen received from Leyden is more or less bleached 
to a brown colour. The back and sides are marked with elongate 
white spots placed in lines; but the spots frequently do not meet— 
the ends being above or below the spots behind them, and often pro- 
duced beyond them. Above and below the upper lateral stripe 
there is also a series of very small white elongated spots on the 
hinder part of one side ; and on the other side there are some small 
spots in a similar place near the shoulder. The two streaks placed 
on the middle of the sides of the body are broader and more continu- 
ous than the other spots ; thus on one side the upper one is continuous 
from the shoulder to over the rump, whereas on the other side it 
is broken in several places. The series of spots on the middle of the 
back and sides of the belly are broken into numerous elongate spots of 
unequal length. The fore and hind legs and feet are marked with 
rings of roundish white spots. 

The younger specimen just received very much agrees with the 
larger one received from Holland, but is of a blacker colour, being 
fresh ; and it has nearly the same white streaks, but is destitute of 
the small spots between the streaks on the hinder parts of the sides. 
They both have the upper part of the headdestitute of spots, and the 
lower part, including the cheeks and throat, with a number of 
similar-sized round white spots. 

I am inclined to believe that the spotting or stripes of the young 
Sumatran tapir is liable to variation, because I observe that, although 
they have a similar character, their distribution varies considerably 
on the two sides of the same specimen. 


The Habitat of Pelargopsis gigantea. 
By Dr. Avot Bernnarp Meyer. 

On page 123 of the present volume of the ‘Annals’ the habitat 
of Pelargopsis gigantea is stated as “ Salok, Sulu Islands.” It must 
be ‘Sulu, Sulu Islands,” if the name be written after the German 
manner; and the neighbourhood of the town of Sulu is meant, on 
the island of Sulu, of the group of the Sulu Islands. The Spaniards 
always pronounce and write “Tol6,” the Dutch chiefly “Sdlog” or 


402 Miscellaneous. 


« Sdlok,” the English “‘Sooloo,” sometimes “Sulo” &e., the Germans 
chiefly “Sulu;” and the name has been written in still half a dozen 
other ways. As the natives on the spot say ‘“Sdlog,” with a soft “s,” 
it may perhaps be recommended to write the word in this manner. 


Vienna, April 4, 1874. 


Contributions towards the Natural History of the Termites. 
By Dr. Frirz MULLER. 


In 1856 C. Lespés discovered that both the soldiers and the workers 
of Termes lucifugus of the Landes were represented by male and 
female individuals with incompletely developed sexual organs. This 
statement was received with some hesitation by certain naturalists, 
and especially by Hagen, who sought in vain for these organs in the 
soldiers of various species of Termes and Hodotermes. M. Fritz 
Miiller’s observations have dispelled the apparent contradictions 
which rendered this question obscure, and they reveal to us new 
facts of the highest interest in the history of the Termites. 

At first M. Fritz Miiller was no more fortunate than Hagen in 
dissecting workers or soldiers belonging to several different groups 
of the genus Termes proper. But in the workers and soldiers of the 
genus Calotermes he found the organization indicated by Lespés ; 
and he even ascertained that in the soldiers of this group the repro- 
ductive organs are much less atrophied than in those of Termes 
lucifugus, and they acquire nearly the same development as in the 
winged individuals. 

In the soldiers of Calotermes canelle scarcely any external sexual 
differences are to be found; the ventral plates of the abdomen in 
the male and female soldiers are constructed as in the winged males. 
The reproductive organs of the female soldiers are scarcely distin- 
guishable from those of the winged females, except by their slightly 
smaller size and the absence of the seminal receptacle. The con- 
tents of the tubes present some differences when compared with 
what is seen in the females. The reproductive organs of the male 
soldiers are exactly like those of the winged males, the testes alone 
being a little more slender in form. 

In Calotermes nodulosus and rugosus, Hagen, the male are at 
once distinguished from the female soldiers by the structure of the 
eighth ventral arch. In the small number of female soldiers of 
CO. nodulosus that he has dissected, the author did not find well 
characterized ova filling the whole calibre of the ovarian tubes; but 
he saw them in nearly all the female soldiers of C. rugosus. 

As regards the organization of the workers of Calotermes, M. 
Miller can say nothing, for the very sufficient reason that in the 
five or six species of that genus which he has observed in Brazil 
there are no workers at all. 

Two forms of nymph had often been observed in the colonies of 
Termites ; but Lespés was the first to study and describe them care- 
fully in Termes lucifugus. His “nymphs of the first form,” larger 
than the workers and larve, are recognizable particularly by their 


Miscellaneous. 403 


large, thick wing-sheaths, marked with lines representing veins ; 
in these the female organs are well developed, the male organs very 
slightly. Lespés saw these nymphs change into perfect insects 
from the 15th to the 20th May. The “nymphs of the second form,” 
less numerous than the preceding, become larger, owing to the con- 
siderable increase of the abdomen. In these the male and female 
organs acquire an enormous volume. Lespés supposed that these 
nymphs change in August into winged males and females; but he 
had made no direct observations upon this point. 

* M. F. Miller has been led to form a different conception of the 
functions of these different nymphs. According to him, male and 
female reproductive individuals exist under two different forms ; 
some, originating from the “nymphs of the first form,” acquire 
wings and quit the nest, a small number of them surviving and 
becoming kings and queens: the others, which correspond to the 
“nymphs of the second form,” are destined never to see the light ; 
they remain apterous, and neyer quit the nest where they were born. 
The correctness of this hypothesis, which was put forward some 
time ago, has been proved by this clever naturalist by direct obser- 
vation. In examining the central part of the nest of a Hutermes, 
he found it surrounded by a mass of eggs, and ascertained that it 
did not contain a great royal chamber, but was formed by a sponge- 
like combination of irregular passages. In these passages were col- 
lected, in little groups, thirty-one females with short wing-sheaths, 
from 6 to 8 millims. in length, in the midst of which a male, of 
nearly the same size, was walking about. This male was a true 
king, with large eyes; his wings had been detached, leaving only 
their basal portions. ‘“ Instead of a palace containing a king, living 
chastely with a mate of his own condition,” says the author, “I had 
before me a harem in which a sultan was throned in the midst of 
numerous mistresses.” 

These females, whose abdomens were agitated by undulatory con- 
tractions, like those observed in the queens, laid a great number of 
eggs in the course of a day; and M. Miler several times witnessed 
the act of oviposition. 

The complemental females (Hrsatzweibchen), as M. Miiller calls 
them, resemble the workers in their general appearance, but they 
are twice as large. Their rudimentary wings are so small as not to 
be perceived in most of them at the first glance. In a small number 
of individuals these organs acquire larger dimensions, coinciding 
with a greater development of the mesothorax and metathorax ; 
they then attain the middle of the second dorsal arch of the abdomen. 
The head closely resembles that of the workers; as in the latter, 
the antenne are of fourteen joints, whilst the soldiers have thirteen 
and the winged individuals fifteen. The only difference between 
the head in these females and in the workers consists in the presence 
of small rounded eyes, which scarcely project. The abdomen is 
only moderately inflated. Each ovary, composed of about a dozen 
ovarian tubes, contains about six mature ova. Fifteen complemen- 
tal females together did not weigh more than a single queen; the 


404 Miscellaneous. 


ovaries of the thirty-one females were not more than equal in weight 
to those of a queen, and contained scarcely as many ova. 

Many questions still remain to be solved with regard to the com- 
plemental males, the nature of the descendants produced by the 
different forms of sexual individuals, the causes which induce the 
development of one or other of these forms, &. Numerous obser- 
vations and researches will be necessary to enable us to understand 
thoroughly the working of these complicated societies. Neverthe- 
less one point seems to be gained, namely the knowledge of the 
different forms which may be met with in a colony of Termites. 
M. Fritz Miiller gives the following table of them :— 


1. Larvee of the first age. 


2. Larvee of forms unfit for 3. Larvee of forms fit for 
reproduction. reproduction. 
a. = “ ——\ 
4, Larvee of 5. Larvee of 
soldiers, workers. 
—— OO oF 
6. Soldiers. 7. Workers. 8. Nymphs of | 9. Nymphs of 


the first form. the second form. 


| 
10. Winged 
individuals. 


11. King and 12, Complemen- 
queen. tal males and 
females. 


The author has made numerous observations on the structure of 
the nests of Termites, and gives a great number of figures which 
are indispensable for the proper comprehension of these construc- 
tions. We must content ourselves with mentioning the curious 
fact that the excrements of the Termites seem to be the materials 
most employed by these insects, or at least by those which burrow 
into trees and construct nests in the form of excrescences. If a 
fragment of the nest be removed, the workers come one after the 
other to the breach and repair it by depositing their excrements, to 
which certain individuals add small fragments of the broken wall. 
Sometimes, also, those which have nothing in the rectum disgorge 
the food which they have not yet digested. This latter method, 
probably, is not employed in time of peace; the insects, no doubt, 
only have recourse to it when it is necessary to repair quickly a 

nest broken open by some enemy. 

Termes Lespesii, F. Miller, which builds upon the ground, does 
not exclusively employ its excrements, although these constitute 
the greater part of the material of the nest; its constructions con- 
sist partly of a clayey earth. The two substances usually form suc- 
cessive layers, which vary in thickness and arrangement in different 
parts of the nest.—Jenaische Zeitschrift, vol. vil. (1873) pp. 333— 
358 & 451-463 ; abstract in Bibl. Univ., Arch. des Sci. Phys. et Nat., 
March 15, 1874, pp. 254-259. 


| 
| 


Miscellaneous. 405 


Carcinus menas, Pennant. 


Mr. Wood Mason exhibited a specimen of Carcinus menas, 
Pennant, taken in 1866 or 1867 at Point de Galle, Ceylon, by Dr. 
J. Anderson. Comparison of this specimen with those from the 
Mediterranean lately received from Prof. Cornalia, of Milan, had en- 
abled him to be sure of the correctness of his previous identification 
from the published figures and descriptions. The species appeared 
to have an exceedingly wide distribution, being found in abundance 
on the shores of the British Isles and of the United States, whence 
it extends to the Arctic Sea, and on all the Mediterranean coasts ; it 
has also been recorded by Heller from Rio Janeiro; and specimens 
will doubtless ultimately be met with in the Red Sea.—Proceedings 
of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, November 1873. 


Cetacea of the North Sea and the Baltic. 


Professor Malm, in his ‘ Zoological Observations,’ gives a compara- 
tive account of fifteen specimens of the common porpoise (Phocena 
Linnei) occurring in the Baltic. He describes and figures a gravid 
female, and young, and mentions the peculiarities of each specimen. 
He observes that the small tubercles on the front edge of the dorsal 
fin, on which Dr. Gray has established Phocena tuberculifera, occur 
very rarely among these animals ; he only found it in one specimen 
(no. 13) out of the whole of the male and female specimens which 
he examined; and therefore he thinks this species is still doubtful. 

Professor Mébius gives an account of a male and female grey 
grampus (Grampus griseus), which were taken on the 17th and 19th 
of February 1871 on the west coast of Holstein, between the Elbe 
and Eider. I believe this is the first time that this southern species, 
which sometimes visits the south coast of England, has been recorded 
as found so far north. 

Professor Mobius records the occurrence of the following species 
in the Little Belt :— 

Phocena communis, F. Cuvier. 
Pseudorea crassidens, Gray. November 24, 1861. 
Delphinus tursio, Otho Fabricius. June 1870. 
Lagenorhynchus albirostris, Gray. Winter 1851-52. 
Hyperoodon rostratum, Pontop. December 3, 1807.. 

J. E. Gray. 


On some Extinct Types of Horned Perissodactyles. By Epwarp D. 
Corr, of Philadelphia, Penn. 


It is well known that the type of Mammalia of the present period, 
which is preeminently characterized by the presence of osseous horns, 
is that of the Artiodactyla Ruminantia. At the meeting of the As- 
sociation of last year, held at Dubuque, I announced that the horned 
mammals of our Eocene period were most nearly allied to the Pro- 
boscidians. I now wish to record the fact (as I believe, for the first 
time) that the Perissodactyles of the intermediate formation of the 

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xii. 29 


406 Miscellaneous. 


Miocene embraced several genera and species of horned giants not 
very unlike the Hobasileus and Uintatherium in their armature. 

While exploring, in connexion with the United States Geolo- 
gical Survey of the Territories, I discovered a deposit of the remains 
of numerous individuals of the above character, which included, 
among other portions, crania in a good state of preservation. Most 
of these skulls are nearly or quite 3 feet in length, and mostly 
deprived of their mandibular portions ; these are quite abundant in 
a separated condition. The crania represent at least six species, 
while the mandible represents a condition distinct from that of 7%- 
tanotherium or any allied genus, viz. 1. 0, C.1, P.M. 3, M. 3. 
The teeth diminish rapidly in size anteriorly ; and there is no dia- 
stema behind the canines, whose conic crowns do not exceed those of 
the premolars in length. To the genus and species thus charac- 
terized I have elsewhere given the name of Symborodon torvus. 

One of the crania, referred to under the name of Miobasileus 
ophryas, is characterized by its strong and convex nasal bones and 
concave superior outline posteriorly, and by the presence of a 
massive horn-core on each side of the front, whose outer face is con- 
tinuous with the inner wall of the orbit, as in the Loawolophodon 
cornutus. Itstood above the eye in life, and diverged from its fellow 
so as to overhang it. In the specimen which was fully adult 
they were worn obtuse by use—length about 8 inches, thickness 
3 inches. The molar teeth differ from those of T%tanotherium 
Proutii in having cross crests extending inward from the apices of 
the outer chevrons, each of which dilates into a T-shape near the 
cones. 

The third species is referred to the new genus Symborodon, under 
the name of S. acer. It has overhanging eyebrows and the vertex 
little concave ; but the nasal bones are greatly strengthened, and 
support on each side near the apex a large curved horn-core 10 
inches in length with sharply compressed apex. These horns 
diverge with an outward and backward curve, and when covered 
with their sheaths must have considerably exceeded a foot in length. 
This was a truly formidable monster, considerably exceeding the 
Indian rhinoceros in size. 

The fourth species is allied to the last, and has well developed 
superciliary crests without horns. The latter are situated well 
anteriorly, and are short tubercles not more than 3 inches in 
height. They are directed outward, and have a truncate extremity. 
The type individual is of rather larger size than those of the other 
species. There are several crania referable to the three now named. 
The present one has been named Symborodon helocerus. 

Other species, based upon crania without mandibles, were referred 
to the genus Symborodon. 

These animals show true characters of the Perissodactyla in their 
deeply excavated palate, solid odontoid process, third trochanter of 
femur (which has also a pit for the round ligament), the divided 
superior ginglymus of the astragalus, &e.—Read before the American 
Association for the Advancement of Science, Portland Meeting, 
August 20, 1873. 


Miscellaneous. 407 


On new Parasitic Crustacea from the N.W. Coast of America. 
By W. H. Dart, U.S. Coast Survey. 


More than a year ago I submitted to the Academy descriptions of 
three new species of Cyami from as many species of Pacific Cetacea. 
On examination of a small collection of parasites in the collec- 
tion of the Academy (presented by Captain C. M. Scammon, and 
reported to have been procured from a Pacific right whale near the 
island of Kadiak, Alaska, in 1873), I find that it contains two 
species, both apparently undescribed. It is to be presumed that 
each species of whale has parasites peculiar to itself; and those who 
have the opportunity of collecting these interesting animals should 
lose no opportunity of examining the rarer Cetacea, and should pre- 
serve the parasites of each species carefully by themselves. As there 
are many species from which no parasites have yet been collected, 
there are doubtless as many kinds of Cyami which are still un- 
known. 

The species described on pp. 281-283, vol. iv. of the Academy’s 
‘ Proceedings’ (‘ Annals,’ 1873, vol. xi. pp. 157, 158), have been 
well figured on plate x. of Captain Scammon’s ‘ Marine Mammals of 
the N.W. Coast of America;’ and, in default of a figure of the 
present species, I have preferred to give a comparative diagnosis 
by which they may be more readily distinguished from the figured 
and other described species. 


Cyamus tentator, n. sp. 


Species in size and general form resembling C. Scammoni, Dall 
(Scammon, Joc. cit. pl. x. fig. 2), of a pale waxy yellow, with the tips 
of the branchiw purplish. It differs from C. Scammoni in the fol- 
lowing particulars:—Head proportionally smaller, not constricted 
behind the eyes, terminating in a point in the median line behind, 
which point overlaps a median channel in the body-segment. Second 
pair of antenne proportionally much longer, equalling twice the 
length of the head. Second pair of hands with two sharp spike-like 
tubercles in place of the two rather short and blunt tubercles of C. 
Scammoni; hands otherwise very similar. Second segment witha 
broad channel in the median line, widening backward from the 
head and rather shallow; third segment not rounded at its outer 
ends, but furnished with very prominent knobs at the anterior and 
posterior corners on each side ; the outer edges of the fourth seg- 
ment are also knobbed before and behind, but the anterior knobs are 
less prominent. The branchie are not spirally twisted, but are 
straight, laterally extended cylinders, nearly as long as the width of 
the segment to which they are attached. There are two pairs on 
each side of the third and fourth segments in the male. The upper 
pair on each side are not of equal length, as in C. Scammonz, but the 
inferior branchia of this pair is much shorter than the other ; both 
are straight or slightly curved upward and forward. The lower pair 
exist only in the males ; they are very slender and filiform, and quite 
short ; in the female they seem to be changed into pouches for the 


ee 


—S ~~ ee 


Se 


atta 


eine ee ee i oe Or eee eR a hs eee en 


— 


-. 


408 Miscellaneous. 


development of the ova. Posterior part of the body as in C. Scam- 
moni, but there are no serrations on the anterior edge of the seventh 
segment. Length of largest specimen 0-8 inch. 

Domicile on Balena Sieboldii, Gray ; North Pacifie Ocean. 

This is readily distinguished from C. mysticeti, Dall, by its spiked 
“hands” and knobby branchial segments, and from OC. Scammoni 
by its straight unequal branchie, long antenne, knobs, and the shape 
of the head. 


Cyamus gracilis, n. sp. 


This species is of a pale waxen yellow, of elongated and slender 
form, and small and slender limbs. It more nearly resembles C. 
suffusus, Dall (Scammon, loc. cit. pl. x. fig. 3), than any of the other 
described species. It differs from that species in the following par- 
ticulars :—It is smaller, the largest specimen measuring only 0°5 of 
an inch in length. It wants the purple colour, and is more compact 
and solid. The second pair of antenne are much shorter, being only 
equal to the first segment and half of the next segment of the cor- 
responding members in C. suffusus. The branchiz, though similar, 
are proportionally one third shorter. The posterior limbs are 
shorter and much more weak and slender than in C. suffusus. The 
first pair of “hands” are slenderly pyriform instead of quadrate ; 
the second pair are simple, without the tubercles between the 
articulation of the limb and the “ finger ;” or, at most, in the largest 
specimens the termination of the hand under the articulation of the 
hook or finger is slightly produced into a point. The head is shorter, 
subtriangular, instead of elongated. Lastly the segments of the body 
are more or less closely appressed against each other before and be- 
hind, instead of being laterally attenuated and separated as in C. 
suffusus ; they are also proportionally less wide from side to side 
than in C. suffusus. 

Habitat, with the last. 

The prominent features of this species are its slender and compact 
form, short antennee, and weak and inconspicuous posterior limbs. 

Captain T. W. Williams brought down from the Arctic Ocean in 
1873 some parasites from the walrus, which he presented to the 
Academy. ‘These parasites are of a very dark brown colour, almost 
perfectly round in shape, with an indistinctly segmented abdomen 
somewhat roughened with short hairs, three pairs of short bristly 


legs, a distinct but small throat, and very small and short head. - 


There is one pair of short stout antennee with four joints; the mouth 
is suctorial, There are no other appendages to the abdomen or head. 
The want of books of reference prevents my being able to refer these 
creatures to their proper generic position ; andit would be, in any 
case, unadvisable to describe them as new, as parasites from the 
walrus of the North Sea have recently been described by a Swedish 
naturalist, and they may be identical with the present form.—Pro- 
ceedings of the California Academy of Sciences, March 3, 1874. 


— 


; 
q 


THE ANNALS 


MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. 
[FOURTH SERIES.) 


No. 78. JUNE 1874. 


LVII.—On a Land-Nemertean found in the Bermudas. By 
R. v. WILLEMOES-SuuM, Ph.D., Naturalist to the ‘Chal- 
lenger’ Expedition. 

[Plate XVII.} 


DuRInG our stay in the Bermudas I frequently visited the 
mangrove-swamps in Hungry Bay, Bermuda Island, in order 
to observe and collect the land-crabs. I then also turned over 
the stones which are scattered on drier land, where the cedar 
trees begin to dry, and looked out for worms. Lumbricus was 
very common there; but in the moist earth in which I found 
them I soon also observed long slimy animals, which were 
evidently not annelids : having brought them on board, I found 
them to be Nemerteans. I then returned to the spot and col- 
lected a good many more of them, which I kept in a bottle 
with moist earth, and was then able to observe at leisure 
during our cruise to the Azores. 

The largest of these worms have a length of 35 millims. by 
2 millims. in width. They are of a milky white colour. Their 
movements are slow, and sometimes caterpillar-like; they 
shoot out their long proboscis, fix it at some distant point, to 
which it adheres by means of its papillae, and draw their body 
after them. Their skin is filled with rod-like bodies, as de- 
scribed by Max Schultze and others, and is covered on the 
outside all over with cilia. In the front we find two pairs of 
eyes, one of them near the entrance of the proboscis, the other 
smaller one further out; they consist of a fine granulated 
pigment imbedded in a colourless substance, which holds these 

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. xiii. 30 


410 Dr. R. v. Willemoes-Suhm on a 


granules together, in which, however, a regular lens could not 
be observed. Underneath these eyes is seen the prominent 
centre of the nervous system (Pl. XVII. fig. 1, 7): it consists 
of two lobes, and a ring which connects them and encircles 
the proboscis. From these lobes depart the two lateral nerves 
(fig. 1,2), and some other cephalic nerves, which were not 
quite clearly visible. In most genera of the Tremacephalide 
the cephalic fissures or ciliated sacs are easily to be seen; here 
they are either very small or wanting entirely. Sometimes a 
folding of the skin seemed to indicate their presence; but in 
the contractile bodies of these worms it is very difficult to say 
whether you have a small cephalic fissure or a folding of the 
skin before you. 

Underneath the ganglion, on the under surface is the semi- 
circular opening of the mouth (fig. 1,0), leading into an in- 
testinal tube (fig. 1,7), which runs through the whole length 
of the animal without showing any thing particular, and is 
terminated by an anus (fig. 1,a). It is covered above by a 
long proboscis (fig. 1, pr’—pr*), which opens at the front and 
ends in the posterior part of the body, where its thin termina- 
tion is attached to its walls. This proboscis is divided into 
two portions—the papilligerous part, and the glandular part. 
At the bottom of the former we find a peculiar spine, the top 
of which is supposed to be renewed from the smaller spines 
which are in store in two vesicles on each side of it. This 
spine is remarkable, because it differs in form according 
to the sex of its owner. In the male it has a rounded base 
and is pear-shaped (fig. 2, pr*), while in the female the base 
has sharpened angles (fig. 3, pr*). Ido not think that such 
sexual differences have hitherto been observed in Nemerteans. 

The ovaries and testes are, as usual, situated between the 
intestine and the walls of the body. They did not present 
any thing peculiar, and are not represented in the diagram- 
matic figure [ have often referred to. Probably the animal is 
viviparous, as is Tetrastemma obscurum from the Baltic ; but 
on this subject nothing has been observed. 

Though I have not been able to demonstrate the cephalic 
sacs, which are peculiar to most of the Tremacephalide 
hitherto described, I think there can be hardly any doubt that 
this worm belongs to that family ; for some marine species of 
the genus Tetrastemma bear a most close resemblance to it. 
I therefore think I can safely call it by this latter generic 
name, and establish for it the specific name of agricola, as there 
is probably no described marine species of Tetrastemma with 
which it could be identified. 

I, however, do not attach much importance to this point, as 


Land-Nemertean from the Bermudas. 411 


the object of these lines is only to show that in America also 
land-Nemerteans exist. Hitherto they were only known from 
the Pelew Islands, where Semper has found another Trema- 
cephalid, to which he has given the name of Geonemertes 
peleensis. I think it is highly probable that land-Nemerteans 
exist to a greater extent in tropical countries than has hitherto 
been supposed, and that, from their hidden life and the im- 
possibility of preserving them, they have hitherto escaped the 
attention of travelling naturalists. Especially in such islands 
as the Bermudas, where the earth of the lower grounds contains 
a great deal of salt, it may easily be imagined how marine 
animals have taken to terrestrial habits; and it was interesting 
for me to see that our Tetrastemma when put into salt water 
would live there for twenty-four hours, but when put into fresh 
water died after a few hours time. Fresh water, however, 
poured over the earth which contained them did not damage 
them in the least. 

I may here also add that on our cruise from the Bermudas to 
the Azores I found parasitical Nemerteans on Nautilograpsus 
minutus, one of the gulf-weed crabs. They were small brownish 
animals, and occupied especially the underside of the crab, 
under the abdomen of which I found most of them. They did 
not exceed the length of 2 millims. ; and in none of them could 
I see genital organs. In fig. 4 I have figured one of these 
small parasites, which probably also belong to the genus 
Tetrastemma, though the second pair of eyes is only puncti- 
form, situated on both sides of the proboscis. Nervous system 
and digestive apparatus do not present any thing particular ; 
the proboscis (fig. 4, pr’—pr*) is remarkable for its shortness. 

I do not think that these worms attain their full size on the 
crab ; but believe them to be young parasitical stages of some 
Nemertean which possibly lives on the gulf-weed. In this 
group of worms no case of parasitism has, as far as I know, 
been mentioned before. 


H.M.S, ‘Challenger,’ Cape Town, 
November 1873. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVII. 


Fig. 1. Young male of Tetrastemma agricola. Low power. pr'—pr', suc- 
cessive portions of the proboscis—pr' entrance, pr? papillar por- 
tion, pr* pouch of stylets, prt glandular portion; ca, muscular 
entrance of the glandular portion; 0, mouth; 7, intestine; 
a, anus; g, ganglion; x, lateral nerves. 

Fig. 2. Part of the male’s proboscis. The same letters as above. High 

ower. 

Fig. 3. Part of the female’s proboscis. High power. 

Fig. 4. Noung parasitical Tetrastemma from Nautilograpsus minutus. 
High power. Letters as above. 

30* 


412 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to 


LVIII1.—Additions to the Australian Curculionide. Part VII. 
By Francis P. Pascoe, F.L.S. &e. 


CRrYPTORHYNCHINZE, Acalles distans. 

: cribricollis, 
sth epee bisignatus. 
Poropterus tetricus. Perditne. 
Scolyphrus, n. g. aT iene 

Aspe oraminosus. 
Petosiris annulipes. E — expletus. 
Drassicus infaustus. alkene 8: 
Imaliodes scrofa. Emb ar Ace 
Acalles delirus. ap Aid ae n. g- 

nucleatus. Be ES ie 


PSYDESTIS. 


Rostrum breviusculum, cylindricum, validum, subarcuatum ; scrobes 
submediane, ad oculos currentes. Oculi rotundati, tenuiter gra- 
nulati, antice modice approximati. Scapus oculum attingens; 
funiculus 7-articulatus, articulis duobus basalibus longiusculis, 
ceteris brevibus ; clava distincta. Prothoraw transversus, utrinque 
ampliatus, basi bisinuatus, lobis ocularibus obsoletis. Elytra 
cordata, convexa. Cow antice haud contigue ; femora crassa, 
dentata; tibue breves, compress, intus bisinuate, extus rectee ; 
tarsi articulo ultimo tenuato. Mesosternum depressum, valde 
transversum. Abdomen segmento secundo brevi. 


Allied to Melanterius ; but differs in its short stout rostrum, 
absence of ocular lobes, and short second segment of the abdo- 
men. There is also an evident affinity between this genus 
and Diethusa, Enide, and Lybeba—genera referred by me to 
the Krirhinine, from their apparent connexion with Grerynassa, 
Erytenna, &c. ; but I think now that they will be better placed 
in the neighbourhood of Melantertus. 


Psydestis affluens. 


P. obovata, valde convexa, fusca, sat dense fulvo-squamosa, cinna- 
momeo plagiatim vel maculatim varia ; rostro capite sesquilongiore, 
apice rufescenti et leviter punctulato; antennis piceo-testaceis, 
clava infuscata; prothorace apice quam basi triplo angustiore, 
dorso bi- vel trinotato; elytris sulcatis, interstitiis carinatis, 
humeris obliquis, apicibus rotundatis. Long. 24 lin, 


Hab. West Australia. 


Poropterus tetricus. 


P. sat late ovatus, niger, fusco-squamosus ; capite inter oculos trans- 
verse depresso; rostro subbrevi, valido, punctis magnis raris 
(apice solo excepto) rude impresso ; funiculo articulis duobus 
basalibus fere equalibus; prothorace transverso, supra paulo de- 
presso, apice integro, in medio canaliculato, utrinque angulato- 


. 


— 


ii. — 


a i it na i 


the Australian Curculionide. 413 


producto, basi profunde bisinuato ; elytris modice convexis, am- 
pliatis, apicem versus sat fortiter constrictis, apice ipso rotundato, 
supra irregulariter nigro-fasciculatis, squamis erectis claviformibus 
adspersis ; abdomine segmentis duobus basalibus peramplis ; tarsis 
posticis articulo penultimo minus bilobo, Long. 6 lin. 


Hab. Gayndah. 


In outline like P. tnnominatus (ante, vol. xi. p. 197), but 
proportionally broader, the prothorax strongly and angularly 
expanded at the sides, the rostrum stout, comparatively short, 
and roughly punctured, and the two basal joints of the funicle 
of nearly equal size, the second perhaps a trifle longer. The 
fascicles on the elytra are disposed nearly as in P. snnominatus, 
but are less distinctly limited. 


ScOLYPHRUS. 


Rostrum subrobustum, arcuatum; scrobes submediane, oblique, 
ampliate. Scapus in medio rostri insertus; funiculus 7-articu- 
latus, articulis duobus basalibus longioribus, ultimo in clavam 
continuato. Prothorax ad latera compressus, supra parum con- 
vexus, apice productus. Zlytraampla. Femora parum incrassata, 
mutica; tbie recte ; tarsi lineares, infra haud spongiosi. Abdo- 
men segmentis duobus basalibus peramplis. 


Differentiated from Poropterus by its narrow tarsi, the third 
joint not being bilobed, canaliculate beneath, with the edges 
fringed with silky hairs. Agenopus, also having linear tarsi, 
has the three intermediate segments of the abdomen equal or 
nearly so. The species described below is a rough-looking 
insect, with a deep prothorax, the sides below the line of the 
back compressed and nearly vertical. 


Scolyphrus obesus. 


S. niger, opacus, squamulis crassis griseis adspersus; rostro pro- 
thorace breviore, sat sparse punctulato; oculis infra sensim 
angustioribus; funiculo articulo secundo quam primo longiore ; 
clava parva; prothorace longitudine latitudini cequali, dorso in 
medio longitudinaliter depresso, apice angusto, ante medium 
fortiter rotundato, dein ad basin parum angustiore ; elytris per- 
amplis, late ovatis, sat fortiter convexis, basi grosse, versus medium 
sensim minus punctatis, apice rotundatis. Long, 8 lin. 


Hab. Queensland (Port Denison). 


Petosiris annulipes. 


P. subovalis, supra modice convexus, fuscus, squamis erectis con- 
coloribus vage adspersus ; capite inter oculos longitudinaliter ex- 
cavato ; rostro modice elongato ; antennis subferrugineis ; funiculo 
articulis duobus basalibus «qualibus, quatuor sequentibus brevi- 
usculis, ultimo valde ampliato ; prothorace transyerso, lateribus a 


414 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to 


medio parallelis, supra tuberculis quatuor mediocribus transversim 
sitis; elytris subcordiformibus, humeris obliquis, tune ad 
medium parallelis, postice cito angustioribus, apice rotundatis, 
subseriatim fortiter punctato-impressis, interstitiis 3°, 5°, 7° tuber- 
culato-fasciculatis, basi utrinque callosis; femoribus tibiisque 
subalbido-annulatis, his minus elongatis. Long. 4 lin. 


Hab. New South Wales (Armadale). 


The elytra are longer and somewhat differently formed than 
in P. cordipennis, having coarsely impressed punctures, and 
with a marked callosity on each side at the base. The femora 
have two and the tibize one well-defined whitish ring on each 
of them respectively. 


Drassicus infaustus. 


D. sat late ovatus, niger, opacus, squamis concoloribus rude vestitus ; 
rostro rugoso-punctato ; antennis ferrugineis, apicem versus in- 
fuscatis; scapo brevi, pone medium rostri inserto; funiculo 
articulis duobus basalibus longitudine equalibus ; prothorace 
subtransyerso, apice paulo producto, pone apicem vix constricto, 
in medio utrinque rotundato, modice confertim punctato ; elytris 
subgloboso-cordatis, basi prothorace haud latioribus, sulcato- 
punctatis, interstitiis convexis, indistincte griseo-maculatis ; 
femoribus infra mediocriter dentatis; tibiis brevibus. Long. 
23 lin. 


Hab. Queensland (Wide Bay). 


In the two normal species of Drassicus the apex of the pro- 
thorax forms a sort of hood over the head; in the above it is 
of the ordinary character; but although this and some minor 
points leave a sort of gap between them, there seems nothing 
of structural importance to show that they are not congeneric. 


Imaliodes scrofa. 


T. late ovatus, fuscus, omnino dense griseo-squamosus, supra squamis 
majoribus parce, infra pedibusque minus adspersus; rostro pro- 
thorace paulo breviore, apicem versus sensim minus squamoso ; 
antennis subferrugineis ; funiculo articulis duobus basalibus longi- 
usculis, 3° 4° gradatim brevioribus, tribus ultimis turbinatis ; clava 
distincta ; prothorace subtransverso, basi quam apice duplo latiore, 
bisinuato, in medio rotundato; elytris utrinque rotundatis, postice 
declivibus, sulcato-punctatis, insterstitiis alternis magis elevyatis ; 
femoribus tibiisque modice incrassatis. Long. 4 lin. 


Hab. Albany. 


Differs from the normal forms in its longer rostrum, the 
pectoral canal terminating a little more between the inter- 
mediate cox, the club not closely connected to the funicle, 
and the legs less robust. In habit they are much alike. 


Xk ————L ss le ee ee ee ee ee ee a 


the Australian Curculionide. 415 


Acalles delirus. 

A, ovalis, niger, opacus, supra squamis erectis adspersus ; rostro 
antice puuctis magnis in seriebus quatuor dispositis; antennis 
ferrugineis ; clava ovata, obtusa; prothorace longitudine latitudini 
zequali, utrinque fortiter rotundato, pone apicem haud constricto, 
apice ipso angustissimo, supra rude foyeato, interspatiis nitide 
granulatis, in medio linea elevata nitida instructo; elytris pro- 
thorace haud latioribus, subseriatim rugoso-punctatis, interstitiis 
convexis, granulis nitidis, plurimis squamam albam emittentibus, 
obsitis ; tibiis auticis haud, czeteris paulo compressis. Long. 23 lin. 


Hab. Rockhampton. 


The species here referred to Acalles appear to me to differ 
in no respect generically from such of the European species as 
I have examined. They are all dark brown or black, with 
few scales; and these, arising singly from punctures, are fre- 
quently more or less erect and claviform or spatulate—common 
characters among the Cryptorhynchine. The rostrum is com- 
paratively stout, as a rule perhaps a little shorter than the 
prothorax, and always very perceptibly broader towards the 
apex ; the first two abdominal segments are large and pitted 
with very coarse punctures, each bearing a broad flat, or some- 
times a narrow curved, scale. Curculio stupidus, Fab. (Ent. 
Syst. i. p. 432), from the type in the British Museum, appears 
to be referable to Acalles ; but its tibiee are much longer than 
usual, and its posterior femora are toothed beneath; in other 
respects it is like A. bisignatus, but considerably larger. 
Curculio luridus, Fab. (Ent. Syst. 11. p. 431), placed in Acalles 
in the Munich Catalogue, is a Poropterus. <Acalles obesus, 
Boisd. (Astrol. i. p. 438, Tylodes), is probably not Australian : 
Boisduval gives no habitat; but I have it from Gagie and 
Ceram, where it was found by Mr. Wallace. 

The following table will give an idea of the diagnostic 
characters of the species here described :— 


Elytra granulate. 


ostrum punctured in four rowS ............seeeeees delirus. 
Rostrum irregularly punctured. 
Funicle scarcely longer than the scape .............. bisignatus. 
Funicle twice as long as the scape .............4-- ertbricollis. 
Elytra not granulate. 


Prothorax contracted behind the apex. 
Base of elytra not or scarcely broader than the prothorax. 
Rostrum more or less closely and coarsely punctured. 
Rostrum less closely punctured towards the apex. 


Prothorax finely punctured ................ perditus. 
Prothorax coarsely punctured.............654 Jforaminosus. 

Rostrum very closely punctured throughout .... nucleatus. 
Rostrum not closely or coarsely punctured ........ memnonius. 


Base of the elytra manifestly broader than the prothorax distans, 
Prothorax not contracted behind the apex ............ expletus. 


Se a 


416 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to 
Acalles nucleatus. 


A. ovatus, niger, opacus, squamis albidis adspersus; rostro valido, 
punctis majusculis, singulis squaama minuta instructis, creberrime 
impresso; fronte capitis leviter punctata; antennis nitide ferru- 
gineis ; funiculo in clavam continuato ; prothorace modice trans- 
verso, ante medium magis rotundato, confertim fortiter punctato ; 
elytris subcordatis, sulcato-punctatis, punctis foverformibus, ap- 
proximatis, interstitiis convexis, subangustis, leviter punctatis ; 
tibiis brevibus, posticis vix longioribus. Long. 23 lin. 


Hab. Adelaide. 


The rostrum is very closely and coarsely punctured even to | 


the apex. 


Acalles distans. 

A. sat late ovatus, niger, subnitidus ; rostro punctis magnis irregu- 
lariter adsperso ; antennis nitide ferrugineis ; clava ovata, obtusa ; 
prothorace transverso, utrinque ampliato-rotundato, punctis medio- 
cribus sat erebre impresso; elytris substriato-foveatis, foveis 
magnis, remotis, interstitiis subplanatis, granulis parvis depressis 
instructis; pedibus piceis; tibiis brevibus, compressis. Long. 
2-23 lin. 

Hab. Swan River. 


A broad species, almost elliptic in outline, with the elytra 
very obviously broader at the base than the prothorax. The 
rostrum in one of my specimens, owing to the irregularity of 
the punctuation at about the middle of its length, has three 
smooth oblong patches. 


Acalles cribricollis. 

A, ovatus, niger, subnitidus; rostro sublineatim sulcato-punctato, 
punctis oblongis, nonnullis confluentibus; antennis subferrugineis ; 
funiculo quam scapo duplo longiore; prothorace subtransverso, 
crebre fortiter punctato, in singulis punctis squama elongata ; 
elytris cordatis, fortiter sulcato-punctatis, punctis ampliatis, 
singulis squama alba rotundata instructis, interstitiis modice 
convexis, granulis parvis uniseriatim obsitis; pedibus castaneis, 
sat vage punctatis ; tibiis breviusculis. Long. 23 lin. 

Hab, Champion Bay. 


The granules on the elytra are very small, but under a 
powerful lens very distinct; the punctures on the rostrum are 
mostly placed in grooves having smooth, slightly irregular 
lines between them. 


Acalles bisignatus. 


A, late ovalis, niger, opacus, squamulis griseis parvis adspersus ; 


ee eeEeEEEeEeEeE—EeeeEeEeEEe— 


the Australian Curculionide. 417 


rostro punctis magnis sat crebre irrorato; antennis subferrugineis, 
nitidis ; clava elongata acuminata ; prothorace transverso, utrinque 
valde ampliato-rotundato, apice fortiter constricto, subreticulato- 
punctato, in medio dorsi foveis duabus, transversim sitis, squa- 
mulis minutis albis repletis; elytris subcordatis, basi truncatis, 
ad angulos humerales dentato-projectis, sulcato-foveatis, interstitiis 
irregulariter granulatis; abdomine segmentis duobus basalibus 
punctis permagnis, squamositate griseis indutis, notatis; tibiis 
vix compressis, magis, presertim posticis, elongatis. Long. 32 
lin. 


Hab. Gayndah. 


Easily known from the other species here described by its 
prothorax marked with two shallow impressions or fover 
filled with white scales. 


Acalles perditus. 


A, ovatus, niger, vix nitidus, squamis albidis rarissime adspersus ; 
capitis fronte tenuiter vage punctata; rostro sat grosse crebre, 
apicem versus subconfertim punctato; antennis subferrugineis, 
nitidis ; funiculo scapo fere longitudine sequali; clava breviter 
ovata ; prothorace transyerso, utrinque ante medium rotundato, 
apice constricto, fortiter creberrime punctato; elytris oblongo- 
cordatis, in medio quam prothorace latioribus, sulcato-foveatis, 
foveis modice approximatis, interstitiis convexis, leviter punctatis, 
maculis paucis albis, e squamis condensatis formatis, quarum 
duabus basalibus conspicue notatis, adspersis; tibiis, presertim 
anticis intermediisque perbrevibus. Long. 2-23 lin. 


Hab. Melbourne ; Albany. 
The spots will probably be only found in fresh specimens. 


Acalles memnontus. 


A. ovatus, niger, subnitidus, rostro pedibusque castaneis, squamis 
albis rarissime adspersus; rostro breviusculo, modice punctato, 
in medio levigato; antennis subferrugineis; funiculo articulis 
ultimis valde transversis; clava ovata; prothorace longitudine 
latitudini quali, pone apicem utrinque modice rotundato, grosse 
reticulato-punctato ; elytris cordiformibus, suleato-foveatis, foveis 
majusculis, subquadratis, singulatim squama parva albida in- 
structis ; corpore infra pedibusque squamulis albis adspersis ; tibiis 
brevibus, haud compressis. Long. 23-23 lin. 


Hab. King George’s Sound. 
This species is clearly differentiated by its rostrum, with 
oblong scattered punctures of intermediate size. 


Acalles foraminosus. 
A, ovatus, niger, nitidus, rostro basi capiteque grosse reticulato- 


\- til ee 


418 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to 


punctatis, punctis versus apicem magis adsperso; antennis sub- 
ferrugineis; funiculo quam scapo sesquilongiore; prothorace 
subtransverso fortissime crebre punctato, ad apicem punctis mi- 
noribus; elytris cordatis, fortiter sulcato-punctatis, punctis mag- 
nis subquadratis, interstitiis convexis, squamulis albis adpressis 
irroratis; corpore infra pedibusque squamulis albis elongatis ad- 
sperso; tibiis brevibus. Long. 2} lin. 

Hab. Albany. 


Remarkable for the large, deep, and closely ranged punc- 
tuation of the prothorax. 


Acalles expletus. 

A, ovatus, fusco-piceus, griseo-squamosus ; rostro longiore, sat sparse 
punctulato, in medio levigato; antennis subferrugineis, funiculo 
articulis longioribus; prothorace longitudine latitudini squali, 
utrinque rotundato, apice haud constricto, grosse reticulato- 
punctato, in medio linea elevata instructo; elytris subcordatis, 
basi prothorace haud latioribus, squamis griseis adpressis sejunctim 
vestitis, suleato-punctatis, interstitiis latis, convexis; tibiis bre- 
vibus. Long. 24 lin. 


Hab. Rockhampton. 


This species has a prothorax without any trace of the con- 
striction behind the apex which is a character of most of the 
species of this extensive genus. 


Evororis. 
Ab Acalle differt tibcvis extus prope basin dente angulato instructis. 


This character of the tibiz is seen also in Hmpleurus and 
one or two other allied genera. It is perhaps of no great im- 
portance ; but in a large genus like Acalles it is very desirable 
not to admit any species having a structural peculiarity at 
variance with its normal forms. The type of the genus is in 
habit like some of the preceding ; but the sculpture is some- 
what different :—small deep punctures on the prothorax, each 
filled with a white scale not rising above the surrounding 
level; and on the elytra fine punctured strie, with flat, broad 
interstices, having only very fine traces of punctures. 


Euoropis castanea. 


E. ovata, subnitida, fusca, albo-squamosa, elytris pedibusque cas- 
taneis; capite crebre punctulato ; rostro castaneo, basi longitudi- 
naliter gibboso, sat dense squamoso, versus apicem vage punctu- 
lato; antennis subferrugineis; scapo fere in medio rostri inserto ; 
funiculo articulis duobus basalibus ceeteris conjunctim paulo lon- 


a 


the Australian Curculionide. 419 


gioribus ; prothorace subconico, utrinque rotundato, punctis par- 
vis, singulis squama repletis, confertim impresso; elytris sub- 
ovatis, prothorace manifeste latioribus, basi fortiter bisinuatis, 
apice obtuse rotundatis, anguste striato-punctatis, striis squamulis 
piliformibus albis uniseriatim adpressis, interstitiis latis planatis, 
obsolete punctulatis; corpore infra, femoribus subtus tibiisque 
sat dense albo-squamosis, his brevibus, haud compressis, posticis 
paulo longioribus. Long. 3 lin. 


Hab. Swan River. 


E,-MBAPHIODES. 


Rostrum tenuatum, paulo depressum, arcuatum; scrobes postme- 
diane, ad oculum currentes. Oculi rotundati, subtenuiter granu- 
lati. Scapus oculum attingens; funiculus 7-articulatus, articulis 
quatuor primis elongatis, ceteris brevibus; clava oblonga, di- 
stincta. Prothorax subconicus, supra depressus, apice productus, 
lobis ocularibus prominulis. Scutellum parvum. Elytra cunei- 
formia, prothorace haud latiora, supra planata, margine exteriore 
carinata, epipleuris distinctis, verticalibus. ima pectoralis inter 
coxas intermedias extensa, apice cavernosa. Pedes mediocres ; 
femora postica elongata, subtus dentato-angulata, antica et inter- 
media mutica, sublinearia; tebie flexuosz, compresse ; tarsi arti- 
culo basali modice elongato, penultimo fortiter bilobo. Abdomen 
segmentis duobus basalibus ampliatis. 


A singular genus belonging to the Tylodes group, but, like 
its neighbours Plagiocorynus and Glochinorhinus, with no 
obvious allies. The upper surface of the narrow wedge-shaped 
elytra is slightly concave and bounded at the side, except 
towards the apex, by a very strong carina, from which the 
epipleura descends almost vertically; that it is not quite ver- 
tical is owing to a marked concavity below the carina; the 
epipleura itself constitutes the largest part of each elytron. 

Ithough this style is common among the Tenebrionide, I do 
not recollect any other instance of it among the Curculionide, 
except, to a certain extent, in Hybomorphus and a few others. 


Embaphiodes pyxidatus. 


E. fuscus, sordide griseo-squamosus ; rostro quam capite prothorace- 
que conjunctim longiore, nitide castaneo, (basi excepta) esquamoso; 
antennis nitidis, funiculo articulo secundo quam primo sesqui- 
longiore ; prothorace pone apicem lunato-impresso, utrinque ro- 
tundato, crebre punctato, punctis singulis squamam gerentibus ; 
elytris sejunctim squamosis, punctis squamigeris instructis, in dorso 
singulorum seriebus quatuor dispositis; corpore infra pedibusque 
dense squamulosis, squamis majoribus dispersis. Long. 4 lin, 


Hab. Lord Howe Island. 


ep vo yt. ee ee Oe 


» b> 


, Se ee oe 


420 Dr! WiC Maintosonee 


LIX.—On the Invertebrate Marine Fauna and Fishes of 
St. Andrews. By W. C. M‘InTosuH. 


[Continued from p. 357. } 


Class GASTEROPODA. 
Order I. CyCLOBRANCHIATA. 
Fam. Chitonide, Guilding. 
Genus CuiTon, L. 


Chiton fascicularis, L. jeer Brit. Moll. i. p. 211, 
v. pl. 55. f. 3. 


Abundant under stones between tide-marks. This species, 
like the limpet, forms considerable cavities in sandstone, so 
that specimens become almost immersed. 


Chiton cinereus, L. Op. cit. i. p. 218, v. pl. 55. f. 2. 


Common in deep water, and in the stomachs of the cod, 
haddock, and flounder. 


Chiton marginatus, Pennant. Op. cit. il. p. 221, v. pl. 56. f. 5. 
Frequent under stones between tide-marks. 


Chiton ruber, Lowe. Op. cit. i. p. 224, v. pl. 56. f. 4. 
Occasionally between tide-marks at the East Rocks. 


Chiton levis (Pennant), Mont. Op. cit. 11. p. 226, v. pl. 56. f. 6. 


Under stones at the verge of extreme low water during 
spring tides. Rare; but the examples are large. 


Order II. PECTINIBRANCHIATA. 


Fam. 1. Patellide, Guilding. 
Genus 1. PATELLA, Lister. 


Patella vulgata, L., and var. depressa. Op. cit. iii. p. 236, 
v. pl. 57. 
Common everywhere; occasionally eaten. The soft shale 
and sandstone are extensively pitted by this form. 


Genus 2. Hetcion, De Montfort. 


Helcion pellucidum, L. Op. cit. iil. p. 242, v. pl. 58. f.1 & 2. 


Abundant on the blades of the tangles; while var. levis 
occurs in hollows at the bases of the stems. 


Mollusca of 8t. Andrews. 421 


Genus 3. TecturA, Cuvier. 


Tectura testudinalis, Miiller. Op. cit. iii. p. 246, v. pl. 58. f. 3. 
Common under stones near low-water mark. 


Tectura virginea, Miller. Op. cit. i. p. 248, v. pl. 58. f. 4. 
Under stones near low-water mark; nearly as common as 
the foregoing. 
Tectura fulva, Miller. Op. cit. ili. p. 250, v. pl. 58. f. 5. 
A single specimen on the West Sands after a storm. 


Fam. 2. Fissurellide, Fleming. 


Genus 2. EMARGINULA, Lamarck. 
Emarginula fissura, L. Op. cit. iii. p. 259, v. pl. 59. f. 2. 


Not uncommon in deep water ; and worn specimens amongst 
the shell-débris on sands. 


Fam. 3. Capulide, Fleming. 
Genus Caputus, De Montfort. 


Capulus ungaricus, L. Op. cit. 11. p. 269, v. pl. 59. f. 6. 


Frequent in deep water, and often brought in by the fishing- 
boats. 


Fam. 7. Trochide, D’Orbigny. 
Genus 2. Trocuus, Rondeletius. 


Trochus tumidus, Mont. Op. cit. iii. p. 307, v. pl. 62. f. 2. 


Common on hard ground in the bay, in the stomach of the 
cod and haddock, and on the West Sands after storms. 


Trochus cinerarius, L. Op. cit. ii. p. 309, v. pl. 62. f. 3. 


In great abundance on stones and rocks between and beyond 
tide-marks. 


Trochus zizyphinus, L. Op. cit. iii. p. 330, v. pl. 63. f. 6. 

Not uncommon in deep water and on the beach after storms ; 
rarely met with at extreme low water at the East Rocks. 
Var. Lyonsii is occasionally seen. 


422 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


Fam. 9. Littorinide, Gray. 
Genus 1. Lacuna, Turton. 


Lacuna crassior, Mont. Op. cit. iii. p. 344, v. pl. 64. f. 2. 


From tangle-roots and in old shells in the laminarian region, 
and from deep water; not rare. 


Lacuna divaricata, Fab. Op. cit. iil. p. 346, v. pl. 64. f. 3. 


On Fuci and laminarian blades at and beyond low-water 
mark. The colourless variety is not uncommon ; and the same 
may be said of var. guadrifasciata. 


Lacuna puteolus, Turton. Op. cit. iii. p. 348, v. pl. 64. f. 4. 

With the former at low-water mark ; less common than the 
foregoing. 

Lacuna pallidula, Da Costa. Op. cit. ii. p. 351, 
v. pl. 64.£.5 & 5a. 

On the West Sands after storms, and from the laminarian 

region. 
Genus 2. Lirrorina, Férussac. 

Littorina obtusata, L. Op. cit. iii. p. 356, v. pl. 65. f.1 & 1a. 

Very common (with varieties) on stones and rocks be- 
tween tide-marks. 

Littorina rudis, Maton. Op. cit. i. p. 364, v. pl. 65. 
£.3,3a, & 306. 
Abundant on the rocks near high-water mark. 


Littorina litorea, L. Op. cit. iii. p. 368, v. pl. 65. £.5 & 5 a. 


Between tide-marks in vast numbers. Often eaten. 


Genus 3. Rissoa, Fréminville. 


Rissoa parva, Da Costa. Op. cit. iv. p. 23, v. pl, 67. f.3 & 4. 


In great numbers on the seaweeds in the laminarian region 
all round, especially off the Hast Rocks. Var. interrupta is 
also common in shell-sand. 


Rissoa striata, Adams. Op. cit. iv. p. 37, v. pl. 68. f. 2. 


Common under stones between tide-marks. The var. arctica 
is the prevailing form. 


Mollusca of St. Andrews. 423 


Rissoa soluta, Philippi. Op. cit. iv. p. 45, v. pl. 68. f. 7. 
Occasionally in deep water and in shell-sand. 


Rissoa semistriata, Mont. Op. cit. iv. p. 46, v. pl. 68. f. 8. 
From deep water and in shell-sand ; not common. 


Genus 4. Hypropia, Hartmann. 


Hydrobia ulve, Pennant. Op. cit. iv. p. 52, v. pl. 69. f. 1. 


In great abundance in the brackish pools near the mouth of 
the river Eden. 


Fam. 11. Skeneide, Clark. 
Genus 1. SKENEA, Fleming. 


Skenea planorbis, Fab. Op. cit. iv. p. 65, v. pl. 70. f. 1. 
Common in rock-pools amongst Ceramium and other alge. 


Genus 2. HoMALOGYRA, Jeffreys. 


Homalogyra rota, Forbes & Hanley. Op. cit. iv. p. 71, 
sim ow Alina 


In shell-débris from the West Sands. Dead. 


Fam. 13. Turritellidz, Clark. 
Genus TURRITELLA, Lamarck. 


Turritella terebra, Li. Op. cit. iv. p. 80, v. pl. 70. f. 6. 


Common in deep water. Var. nivea is also not rare. A 
favourite food of the codfish, probably in many cases on 
account of its tenant the hermit crab. 


Fam. 15. Scalariide, Broderip. 
Genus ScaLAriA, Lamk. 


Scalaria Trevelyana, Leach. Op. cit. iv. p. 93, v. pl. 71. f. 4. 
From the fishing-boats, and on the West Sands after storms. 
Rather rare. 
Fam. 16. Pyramidellide, Gray. 
Genus 2. Opostom1A, Fleming. 
Odostomia rissoides, Hanley. Op. cit. iv. p. 122, v. pl. 73. f. 4. 
Common in shell-sand. 


424 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


Odostomia clathrata, Jeffreys. Op. cit. iv. p. 148, v. pl. 74. f. 9. 


Worn specimens not uncommon in shell-débris from the 
West Sands. 


Odostomia indistincta, Montagu. Op. cit. iv. p. 149, 
Wi plo. teak 


Occasionally in shell-sand from the West Sands. 


Odostomia interstincta, Montagu. Op. cit. iv. p. 151, 
Vi pl. Janke 2: 
In shell-sand from the same locality. 


Odostomia nitidissima, Montagu. Op. cit. iv. p. 173, 
We pl-0G,180c. 
In débris from the West Sands. 


Fam. 19. Eulimide, H. & A. Adams. 
Genus Eu.imA, Risso. 


Eulima bilineata, Alder. Op. cit. iv. p. 210, v. pl. 77. f. 8. 
In muddy débris on old shells from deep water. 


Fam. 20. Naticide, Swainson. 
Genus Natica, Adanson. 


Natica islandica, Gmelin. Op. cit. iv. p. 214, v. pl. 78. f. 1. 
A single specimen from the fishing-boats. 


Natica catena, Da Costa. Op. cit. iv. p. 220, v. pl. 78. f. 4. 


Common on the sandy bottom off the West Sands. The 
ova occur abundantly in July and August. 


Natica Alderi, Forbes. Op. cit. iv. p. 224, v. pl. 78. f. 5. 


Less abundant than the foregoing, on the same ground. 


Fam. 22. Velutinide, Gray. 
Genus 1. LAMELLARIA, Mont. 


Lamellaria perspicua, L. Op. cit. iv. p. 235, pl. 3. f. 6, 
v. pl. 79. f. 2 & 2a. 


Common under stones between tide-marks, especially in 


ioliusca of St. Andrews. 425 


rock-pools. The figure of the living specimen in Mr. Gwyn 
Jeffreys’s work (iv. pl. 3. f. 6) was copied from a coloured 
drawing of my sister’s. The colours of this species vary in a 
remarkable manner. 

Genus 2. VELUTINA, Fleming. 
Velutina levigata, Pennant. Op. cit. iv. p. 240, v. pl. 79. f. 4. 


Frequent in the laminarian region, and on the West Sands 
after storms; occasionally under stones at the verge of low 
water. 


Fam. 23. Cancellariide, Forbes & Hanley. 

Genus 2. TricHorropis, Broderip & Sowerby. 
Trichotropis borealis, Brod. & Sowerb. Op. cit. iv. p. 245, 
v. pl. 79. f. 6. 

A single specimen from the stomach of a cod. 


Fam. 24. Aporrhaide, Troschel. 


Genus AporrHAIS, Da Costa. 
Aporrhais pes-pelecani, L, Op. cit. iv. p. 250, v. pl. 80, f. 1. 


Abundant on the West Sands after storms, and frequent in 
the débris of the fishing-boats. 


Fam. 27. Buccinide, Fleming. 


Genus 1. Purpura, Bruguitre. 
Purpura lapillus, L. Op. cit. iv. p. 276, v. pl. 82. f. 1. 


Very abundant between tide-marks on rocks and stones. 
Varieties are common. 


Genus 2. Buccinum, L. 
Buccinum undatum, L. Op. cit. iv. p. 285, v. pl. 82. f. 2-5. 

Common in the living state (var. /ittoralis) in pools at the 
East Rocks, especially where a stream of salt water rushes 
through the seaweeds. This species spawns in October, 
November, and the following months; the young are found 
in swarms on the egg-cases in May. Frequent on the West 
Sands after storms. 


Genus 5. TropHon, De Montfort. 
Trophon truncatus, Strém. Op. cit. iv. p. 319, v. pl. 84. f. 6. 


Not uncommon in the fishing-boats, and from the stomachs 
of the cod, haddock, and flounder. 
Ann, & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 31 


ed 
rm 


Te Pa Be re Re aa a es Pals Bee 


Aaa te Me 


we 


etic 


ee ee eet Oe ee ee ee ee errs 


426 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


Genus 6. Fusus, Bruguiére. 
Fusus antiquus, L. Op. cit. iv. p. 323, v. pl. 85. f. 1 & 2. 


Abundant in the coralline zone, and frequently thrown on 
shore after storms. 


Fusus gracilis, Da Costa. Op. cit. iv. p. 335, v. pl. 86. f. 2. 


Common on the West Sands after storms, and often brought 
in by the fishing-boats. 


Fusus propinquus, Alder. Op. cit. iv. p. 338, v. p. 219, 
pl. 86 


Occasionally procured from the deep-sea lines of the fisher- 
men. 
Fam. 29. Nasside, Stimpson. 
Genus 1. Nassa, Lamk. 


Nassa incrassata, Strém. Op. cit. iv. p. 351, v. pl. 88. f. 1. 
Common in the laminarian region and under stones between 
tide-marks ; while worn shells are abundant in débris at the 
East Rocks. 
Fam. 30. Pleurotomidz, Lovén. 
Genus 1. DerranciA, Millet. 


Defrancia linearis, Mont. Op. cit. iv. p. 368, v. pl. 89. f. 2. 
From deep water ; rather rare. 


Genus 2. PLevroTromA, Lamk. 


Pleurotoma costata, Donovan. Op. cit. iv. p. 379, v. pl. 90. f. 3. 


Occasionally in shell-débris from the West Sands. 


Pleurotoma rufa, Montagu. Op. cit. iv. p. 392, v. pl. 91. f. 6. 


Common on the West Sands after storms. 


Pleurotoma turricula, Montagu. Op. cit.iv. p. 895, 
Ve ple Oiete ad 


Abundant under the same circumstances. 
Pleurotoma Trevelyana, Turton. Op. cit. iv. p. 398, 
v. pl. 91. f. 8. 
Not uncommon in the stomachs of cod and haddock. 


Mollusca of St. Andrews. 427 


Fam. 31. Cypreide, Fleming. 
Genus 2. Cyprma, L. 
Cyprea europea, Mont. Op. cit. iv. p. 403, pl. 7. f. 4, 
We Pls 2.4.12. 


Not uncommon at extreme low water, under stones in 
pools in the same region at the East Rocks, and generally in 
the laminarian region. The living animal represented in Mr. 


Gwyn Jeffreys’s work is from a coloured drawing by my sister. 


Order IV. PLEUROBRANCHIATA, Gray. 


Fam. 1. Bullide, Clark. 
Genus 1. Cyiicuna, Lovén. 
Cylichna cylindracea, Pennant. Op. cit. iv. p. 415, 
v. pl. 93. f. 4. 


Abundant in deep water; generally thrown on the West 
Sands after storms. 


Genus 2. UtricuLus, Brown. 
Utriculus truncatulus, Bruguiére. Op. cit. iv. p. 421, 
v. pl. 94. f. 2 
Occasionally from deep water, and in débris on sands. 


Utriculus obtusus, Mont. Op. cit.iv. p. 423, v. pl. 94. f. 3. 


Not uncommon in deep water. A variety with a more ex- 
tended spire is often met with in shell-débris from the West 
Sands. 


Genus 4. Acton, De Montfort. 


Acteon tornatilis, L. Op. cit. iv. p. 433, v. pl. 95. f. 2. 


Frequent off the West Sands, and thrown ashore after 
storms. 


Genus 6. SCAPHANDER, De Montfort. 


Scaphander ligniarius, L. Op. cit. iv. p. 443, v. pl. 95. f. 5. 


Not uncommon in deep water, and thrown ashore alive 


after storms. 
31* 


— 


ee ee es 


428 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


Genus 7. PHILINE, Ascanius. 


Philine scabra, Miller. Op. cit. iv. p. 447, v. pl. 96. f. 1. 


Abundant in deep water, and in the stomachs of cod, 
haddock, and flounders. The shells occur on the West Sands 


after storms. 


Philine pruinosa, Clark. Op. cit. iv. p. 454, v. pl. 96. f. 6. 
From the stomach of a haddock; rare. 


Philine aperta, L. Op. cit. iv. p. 457, v. pl. 96. f. 8. 


Occasionally from deep water; shells thrown on the West 
Sands after storms. 


Fam. 2. Aplysiide, D’Orbigny. 
Genus ApLysIA, L. 


Aplysia punctata, Cuvier. Op. cit. v. p. 5, pl. 97. f. 1. 


A single specimen was found in autumn amongst the sea- 
weeds of a large pool at extreme low water. No spots or 
other markings were present on the dull olive hue of the body. 


Order V. NUDIBRANCHIATA, Cuvier. 


Suborder 1. PELLIBRANCHIATA. 


Fam. 1. Limapontiide, Alder & Hancock. 
Genus 1. LimApontt1A, Johnston. 


Limapontia nigra, Johnston. Op. cit. v. p. 28, pl. 1.f. 5. 


Not uncommon amongst the seaweeds under stones in rock- 
pools. 


Suborder IJ. POLYBRANCHIATA. 
Fam. 3. Eolidide, D’Orbigny. 
Genus 2. Eouts, Cuvier. 


Eolis papillosa, L.; Alder & Hancock, Brit. Nud. Moll. 
fam. 3, pl. 9. 


Abundant in early spring (February) amongst the rocks 
near low water, and occasionally at other times. 


Mollusca of St. Andrews. 429 


Eolis coronata, Forbes; A. & H. B. Nud. M. fam. 3, pl. 12. 


Common in February and the spring months in the same 
localities. 


Holis rufibranchialis, Johnston; A. & H. B. Nud. M. 
fam. 3, pl. 16. 


With the foregoing ; common. 


Eolis olivacea, Alder & Hancock; A. & H. B. Nud. M. 
fam. 3, pl. 26. 


Not uncommon under stones in pools at all seasons. 


Kolis viridis, Forbes; A. & H. B. Nud. M. fam. 3, pl. 32. 


Abounds on the small hydroid zoophytes under stones in 
rock-pools. 


Eolis Farrani, Alder & Hancock; A. & H. B. Nud. M. 
fam. 3, pl. 35. 


Occasionally occurs under stones at low-water mark at the 
East Rocks. The fine purple variety has been found more 
than once. A specimen shows the abnormality of a clavate 
median process between the oral and dorsal tentacles. 


Elis Adelaide, Thompson; Jeffreys, Brit. Moll. v. p. 55. 
A single specimen was found in a sandy pool in August. 


Eolis exigua, Alder & Hancock; A. & H. B. Nud. M. 
fam. 3, pl. 37. 


Not uncommon on laminarian blades thrown on the West 
Sands after storms. 


Fam. 5. Dotonide. 


Genus Doro, Oken. 
Doto fragilis, Forbes; A. & H. B. Nud. M. fam. 3, pl. 5. 
Occasionally on zoophytes brought in by the fishing-boats. 


Doto coronata, Gmelin; A.& H. B. Nud. M. fam. 3, pl. 6. 


Common in the débris of the fishing-boats ; small specimens 
are frequently found in groups on Sertularia pumila under 
stones in rock-pools near low-water mark ; also on laminarian 
blades after storms. One example has an abnormal left 
tentacle. 


430 Dr. W. C. M‘Intosh on the 


Fam. 6. Dendronotide. 


Genus 1. Denpronotus, Alder & Hancock. 
Dendronotus arborescens, Miller; A. & H. B. Nud. M. 
fam. 3, pl. 3. 


Not uncommon amongst zoophytes from deep water, on 
laminarian blades thrown on the West Sands, and occasionally 
at extreme low water. A white variety is sometimes seen. 


Fam. 8. Tritoniide, H. & A. Adams. 
Genus TRITONIA, Cuvier. 


Tritonia Hombergi, Cuv.; A. & H. B. Nud. M. fam. 2, pl. 2. 
From deep water. Both pale and, deep reddish-brown 

varieties are found on the zoophytes in the fishing-boats. 

Occasionally in the stomach of the cod. 

Tritonia plebeia, Johnston; A. & H. B. Nud. M. fam. 2, pl. 3. 


In vast numbers amongst the zoophytes from deep water, 
in the crevices of Alcyonium digitatum and on Halecium 
tossed ashore after storms. One specimen showed the abnorm- 
ality of a bifid tail. 


Suborder III. ACANTHOBRANCHIATA. 


Fam. 1. Polyceridz. 
Genus 1. Aairus, Lovén. 
Aigirus punctilucens, D’Orbigny; A. & H. B. Nud. M. 
fam. 1, pl. 21. 


Not uncommon under stones in rock-pools between tide- 
marks at the East Rocks. 


Genus 2. Tropa, Johnston. 
Triopa claviger, Miller; A. & H. B. Nud. M. fam. 1, pl. 20. 


Fine specimens are occasionally found under stones near 
low-water mark. The same Ergasilus is parasitic on this as 
on Doris. 

Genus 5. PoLycera, Cuvier. 
Polycera quadrilineata, Miiller; A. & H. B. Nud. M. 
fam. 1, pl. 22. 

Not uncommon near low-water mark and in the laminarian 

region, 


Mollusca of St. Andrews. 431 


Polycera ocellata, Alder & Hancock; A. & H. B. Nud. M. 
fam. 1, pl. 23. 


Gregarious under stones between tide-marks, but not com- 
mon. ‘They chiefly occur at the West Rocks. 


Polycera Lesson, D’Orbigny; A. & H. B. Nud. M. fam. 1, 
pl. 24. 
On a laminarian blade after an October storm; one spe- 
cimen. 


Genus 6. AncuLA, Lovén. 


Ancula cristata, Alder; A. & H. B. Nud. M. fam. 1, pl. 25. 
Not rare under stones in rock-pools, chiefly at the East 
Rocks. 
Genus 8. Gonroporis, Forbes. 


Goniodoris nodosa, Mont.; A. & H. B. Nud. M. fam. 1, 


pl. 18 
Abundant between tide-marks under stones in rock-pools 
and elsewhere, throughout the year. 


Fam. 2. Doridide. 


Genus Doris, L. 


Doris tuberculata, Cuvier; A. & H. B. Nud. M. fam. 1, pl. 3. 


Abundant under rocky ledges and under stones in pools. 
Its parasite, Hrgasilus, is common. 


Doris Johnstoni, Alder & Hancock; A. & H. B. Nud. M. 
fam. 1, pl. 5. 


Occasionally under stones in pools between tide-marks at 
the East Rocks. The same Hrgast/us occurs on this species. 


Doris repanda, Alder & Hancock; A. & H. B. Nud. M. 
fam. 1, pl. 6. 


Abundant at all seasons amongst the rocks between tide- 
marks. 


Doris aspera, Alder & Hancock; A. & H. B. Nud. M. fam. 1, 
pl. 9. f. 1-9. 


Common under stones in pools near low-water mark. 


432 On the Mollusca of St. Andrews. 


Doris bilamellata, L.; A. & H. B. Nud. M. fam. 1, pl. 11. 


Abundant between tide-marks at all seasons; in swarms in 


March. 


Doris pilosa, Miller; A. & H. B. Nud. M. fam. 1, pl. 15. 
Common at all seasons between tide-marks. 


Class CEPHALOPODA. 


Order DIBRANCHIATA, Owen. 


Fam. 1. Teuthide, Owen. 
Genus 1. OMMATOSTREPHES, D’Orbigny. 
Ommatostrephes todarus, Delle Chiaje, Mem. An. s. Vert. 
Nap. iv. Mem. i. tav. 60. 


Frequently thrown in numbers on the West Sands, especially 
after April storms. 


Genus 2. Loiico, Schneider. 
Loligo vulgaris, Lamarck. Jeffreys, Brit. Moll. v. p. 130, 
je) Es 


The shells are sometimes found in the stomachs of codfish. 
The spawn of this species is frequent. 


Genus 4. SepIoLa, Rondelet. 


Sepiola Rondeletii, Leach. Op. cit. v. p. 136, pl. 6. f. 2. 
The sole specimen occurred in the stomach of a flounder. 


Fam. 3. Octopide, D’Orbigny. 
Genus 2. ELEponsg, Leach. 


Eledone cirrosa, Lamk. Op. cit. v. p. 146, pl. 7. f. 2. 


Occasionally in pools between tide-marks, and on the West 
Sands after storms; common in the stomachs of cod and 
haddock. 

[To be continued. | 


SS eee 


Mr. H. J. Carter on Halisarca lobularis. 433 


LX.—On Halisarea lobularis, Schmidt, off the South Coast of 
Devon, with Observations on the Relationship of the SPONGES 
to the ASCIDIANS, and Hints for Microscopy. By H. J. 
CarTER, F.R.S. &e. 


REFERRING to my account of Halisarca Dujardinii given in 
the number of the ‘ Annals’ for April, 1874, p. 315, I (taking 
advantage of the low tide on the 17th April) again visited the 
“rocks” here, for the purpose, if possible, of finding out the 
habitat of this sponge, and, when the tide was at its lowest 
ebb, observed it plentifully on short bits of Chondrus crispus 
and other small flat-fronded seaweeds of the same kind. But 
it may grow here and there on almost any and every thing, 
even to the bare rock itself, although, to the best of my know- 
ledge, never anywhere where it is likely to be uncovered long 
by the sea-water. 

Tn his ‘ Adriatic Sponges’ of 1862, p. 80, Schmidt states, 
with reference to what Johnston said in England of this 
sponge, and Lieberkiihn in Heligoland, that it was “‘ white” 
(weiss). But if we are to take as “ white” sponges Grantia 
nivea and the like, which look like so much snow, then the term 
“white” is not applicable to Halisarca Dujardinit. 

Dujardin, who found it on the coast of Normandy and first 
described it, uses the term “ blanchatre;” Johnston, who 
found it on the coast of Northumberland, called it “ straw- or 
ochre-yellow-coloured, mottled ;” and Lieberkiihn, who studied 
it in Heligoland, uses the words “ weisslich grau;”’ while my 
own observations in this respect accord with those of Johnston, 
to which it might be added that when transferred to spirit and 
water, it becomes opaque and more yellow from the coagulating 
power of the alcohol over the translucent albumen of which 
the sponge is chiefly composed. 

While engaged in looking after the habitat of Halisarca 
Dujardinii, I observed a pinkish lobulated substance growing 
on the rock amongst as well as over other sponges, and, 
having knocked off the bit of rock on which it was growing, 
without much injuring the sponge itself, put the whole into 
sea-water immediately, and thus took it home; where on closer 
examination I found it to be a specimen of Schmidt’s Hali- 
sarca lobularis, of the Adriatic Sea, hitherto, I think, not 
enumerated among the sponges of the British coasts. 

The diagnosis of this sponge given in Latin by Schmidt 
(7. c.) is short and conclusive, viz.:—‘ Halisarca obscure 
violacea irregulariter plicata et lobata.”’ 

On the following day I fed this specimen of Halisarca 
lobularis with indigo; and although it only took in this par- 


434 Mr. H. J. Carter on Halisarca lobularis. 


tially, so as to become deeply coloured here and there, it was 
quite sufficient for me to be able to distinguish the spongozoa 
from the other parts of the structure &c., as will be seen here- 
after. Meanwhile, as Schmidt’s description is rather meagre, 
and the sponge would appear not to have been noticed on our 
coasts before, it may not be unacceptable to some to have the 
following description of the specimen that I have just found 
on the south coast of Devon. 


Halisarca lobularis, Schmidt. 


General form.—Sponge lobate, consisting of irregularly 
lobed ridges about a line high, extending themselves in 
branched digitations over the rock and adjoining sponges. 
Lobes ficoid, agglomerated, divided into minute lobuli with 
angular pits or intervals, between them where they cannot, 
from their rounded form, come into contact. Surface smooth, 
sleek, and of a pink colour on the prominent portions, passing 
into ight brown-yellow below. Vents sparse, situated here 
and there on the lobes, not raised above the surface, and 
sufficiently large to be visible to the naked eye. Pores 
minute and numerous, each consisting of a round aperture 
situated in the centre of a papilliform rimg—which rings being 
in juxtaposition, thus form the dermal surface of the lobule. 

Internal structure composed of spongozoa, aggregated into 
sac-like forms of various shapes and sizes, some of which are 
distinctly conical elongate, and have their narrow ends 
respectively in connexion with a canal leading inwards from 
the pore, imbedded in a kind of trama consisting of sarcode 
(filamentous ?) and granuliferous cells, but with their confines 
neatly defined by a translucent linear interval; also of pore- 
canals forming a network extending inwards from the surface, 
and of a branched system of excretory canals terminating in 
the vents. No spicules of any kind, but here and there small 
globular masses of minute uniform granules possessing a nucleus 
(nuclear utricle), and small spherical opaque nucleus (nuc- 
leolus), with germinal spot or vesicle, no doubt ova. Pink 
colour confined to the spongozoa in the prominent parts of 
the lobes, whereby their sac-like aggregations here become 
more distinctly differentiated. 

Size of specimen about 14 inch long by 1 inch wide and 
1 line high. Pores of the specimen in spirit 1-1660th inch 
in diameter; papilliform circles surrounding them from 13- 
2-830ths inch in diameter. Vents variable in size, but large 
enough to be seen by the unassisted eye. 

Hab. New Red Sandstone rocks, lower surface; between tides. 

Loc. South coast of Devon, Budleigh-Salterton. 


Mr. H. J. Carter on Halisarca lobularis. 435 


Obs. This specimen of Halisarca lobularis, of which the 
type was originally found by Schmidt in the Adriatic Sea at 
Subanico, does not differ from his description in any essential 

oint. The pink colour on the prominent parts (stated by 
Schmidt to be “ dark violet’ in the Adriatic) goes very soon 
after immersion in spirit and water, where its original 
translucence is replaced by whitish yellow opacity. 

The deep triangular puncta or interspaces between the 
lobules appear to be caused in the way above mentioned, and 
therefore lead to nothing ; while the surface of the lobules is 
formed of the papilliform openings of the pores, which are far 
too small to be seen with the naked eye, or even any thing 
below an inch compound power. 

The most remarkable points about the pink colour are:—first, 
that it is exclusively confined to the spongozoa, whereby it 
would appear that the colour of sponges generally is seated in 
the spongozoa, as in Halisarca lobularis ; and, second, that by 
this pink colour in the living state the form of the sac-like 
aggregations of the spongozoa can be as distinctly seen as if 
the latter had been fed with indigo. Lower down, however, 
the absence of the pink colour renders this differentiation less 
evident ; while the presence of the indigo here, after the sponge 
has been fed with it, causes the differentiation to be more 
striking even than in the pink portions, where the latter colour 
somewhat obscures it. 

Halisarca lobularis differs from H. Dujardinii in the follow- 
ing particulars, viz. :—H. lobularis, in the fresh state, is lobed 
and lobulated, tinted pink on the prominent parts, sleek on 
the surface, and provided with sparse vents on a level with the 
surface. H. Dujardinii, on the other hand, in the living 
state, is uniformly flat and even, of a yellowish grey colour, 
sleek on the surface, and sparsely provided with vents, which 
are projected above the level of the sponge by a short tubular 
prolongation of the dermal sarcode. Both may be charged 
with ova after the manner of sponges generally, as some spe- 
cimens of the latter from the Isle of Man (lately sent to me by 
my friend Mr. Higgin, of Liverpool) testify. 

Having already found two specimens of ZH. lobularis, and 
knowing now what to look for, viz. a pink colour, lobulated 
form, and sleek shining surface, I dare to say that I shall 
often meet with it. 

Of course Schmidt’s diagnosis of Halisarca, viz. that it 
possesses neither siliceous nor calcareous spicules, obtains with 
Halisarca lobularis. 


436 Mr. H. J. Carter on the 


Ampullaceous Sacs and Spongozoa. 
(Hackel’s ‘‘Gastrula” when developed zn situ ?) 


In the ‘ Annals’ of 1857, vol. xx. p. 21, I published a 
description of the ‘‘ Ultimate Structure of Spongilla,” which 
appears to me, so far, to be typical of every other sponge, 
both marine and freshwater, that I have examined. 

It was there that I first described and figured the “ ampul- 
laceous sac,” after having fed the Spongilla with carmine, and 
showed that this sac was composed of a pavement-layer of 
-monociliated cells (spongozoa) with a distinct and common 
aperture ; also that each spongozoon took in fragments of car- 
mine, while its cilium might be seen to vibrate in the cavity 
of the ampullaceous sac (/.c. pl. 1. fig. 5, &e.). The terms 
“sac” and “cell” involve the idea of a sac- and cell-wall 
respectively, which here must be maintained on inference 
rather than demonstration. There must be a “ vanishing-point”’ 
in early development; and to assume that a tissue cannot 
exist in such a subtile state as not to be appreciable by our 
senses, seems to me to be an untenable position. In this sense, 
therefore, I use the terms ‘‘ sac” and “ cell” for these sarcodal 
bodies respectively. 

At p. 28 (/.¢.) it is stated (with reference to the undigested 
portions) that, ‘‘ after a certain time, the particles of carmine 
which have accumulated round the inner surface of the sac 
are gradually thrown off from its circumference, and falling 
into the efferent system of canals, are thus carried away and 
finally ejected.” It will be for us to consider, by-and-by, 
whether this takes place through the pavement-layer of the 
spongozoa generally, or at one particular point of the sac. 

Lastly, in the ‘Annals’ of 1873, vol. xii., in my paper 
on the Gumminee, it is stated at p. 27:—“ I cannot help 
thinking that there are more species than Halisarca Du- 
jardinit to be found on our coasts ; so I hope to meet with not 
only this, but other species of the family here in a living state, 
through which I may, by experiment, be able to add some- 
thing more satisfactory to our knowledge of their intimate 
structure than we at present possess.”’ 

My anticipation in this respect will have been seen to have 
_ been realized in the discovery of Halisarca Dujardinti and 
H. lobularis on this coast ; while it so happens that by having 
fed the latter with indigo, still more precise information of 
the nature of the ampullaceous sac has been obtained. 

By the above description of H. lobularis it will also have 
been seen that the ampullaceous sac is not only rendered 
more distinct by the presence of the indigo in the spongozoa, 


Ampullaceous Sacs and Spongozoa. 437 


but that it is rendered almost equally so in the most prominent 
parts by the pink colour of the spongozoa in the living con- 
dition of the sponge. Hence we have thus a distinct organ 
presented to us for consideration, viz. the ampullaceous sac. 

And first, as regards its form in H. lobularis, this is irregu- 
larly round, but, in many instances, distinctly conical elongate ; 
for all these sacs are neatly defined, as before stated, by a 
translucent linear interval, which may thus be compared to the 
crystalline calespar that surrounds the brecciated fragments of 
a marble rock. To this translucent linear interval we shall 
return presently. 

Meanwhile, taking the “ conical elongate ” sac, we thus have 
a fundus andaneck. The former, from its rounded contour, is 
clearly detined by the translucent linear interval; while the 
latter, from the presence of the indigo, shows (where the sac 
is close to the surface) that it is in direct continuation with 
the pore by a short tubular prolongation. 

Further, it might be observed that the pore-canals branch 
off internally so as to form a reticulation, which, following the 
translucent linear intervals just mentioned, thus reaches the 
oral apertures, as they may be termed, of the more deep-seated 
ampullaceous sacs respectively. 

From the pore on the surface to the ampullaceous sac we 
can thus trace the indigo and thence into the bodies of the 
spongozoa. And that the spongozoa are the only bodies 
which take in the indigo, may be inferred from its absence in 
all other bodies or cells of a like kind in the structure of the 
sponge. 

Here the indigo remains, and hence the easiness with which 
we can make the demonstration. Not so, however, when the 
undigested portions are transferred to the excretory canal ; 
for here they are instantly discharged. Hence the difficulty 
of following their course from the interior of the ampullaceous 
sac to the excretory canal. In Spongilla, as before stated, I 
have seen this take place, but have never yet been able to 
pronounce whether the undigested particles of colouring- 
matter are transferred through the pavement-layer of spongo- 
zoa generally or at one specialized point of the ampullaceous 
sac. 

If the former, it necessitates our assuming that the whole 
of the ampullaceous sac up to its neck is enclosed in a dilated 
extremity of a branch of the excretory canal-system; if the 
latter, that there is a specialized point in the ampullaceous sac, 
tantamount to an anal orifice, continuous with the branch of 
the excretory canal, 

I incline to the latter, as being the most probable conjecture ; 


438 On Ampullaceous Sacs and Spongozoa. 


and if right, then we see the resemblance of the ampullaceous 
sac to the Ascidian, more especially of the compound Tunicata, 
in so far that each has an oral and an anal aperture. 

““ Very good,” it may be stated ; ‘‘ but what have you in the 
Ascidian to compare to your individualized spongozoa, each of 
which appears to be a distinct animal?” 

In reply to this I would observe that if among the com- 
pound Tunicata (which, being of the same habitat as Halisarca, 
grow plentifully together) we select a species that, by its 
translucence, permits of the young or embryonal Ascidians of 
the group being viewed under a microscope throughout their 
development, we may see that, at one stage, the young Ascidian 
is almost identical in appearance with the ampullaceous sac— 
that is, that it is composed of a pavement of cells aggregated 
into a sac-like form. Finally the internal organs of the 
Ascidian are developed, and the sac acquires an oral and an anal 
aperture. But in the sponge—that is, in Halisarca (as we are 
now more particularly engaged with this sponge) —the cells of the 
pavement-layer pass into individualized animals, each of which 
takes in its proper nutriment, and probably possesses indi- 
vidually or conjointly its proper generative function ; for to 
assume that they do not possess the latter would be to assume 
that the isolated forms described and figured by the late Prof. 
James-Clark (‘ Annals,’ 1868, vol. i. p. 133, pl. v.) do not 
possess this power. 

Thus the development of the ampullaceous sac is arrested, 
and the cells adapt themselves to that condition which ends in 
the evolution of a sponge ; while the sac and its cells in the 
development of the Ascidian go on to the evolution of a 
compound tunicated group. 

To make this more intelligible it might be stated that if, 
by the theory of evolution, the monad passes up to man, the 
monadine cell could not, at the time of reproduction, have 
been identical with the human ovum, because it must have 
possessed specialized powers of self-nutrition and immediate 
generation. 

At the same time the differentiation that takes place in the 
evolution of the variously formed cells composing respectively 
the organs of the human body, from the simple cell-form of 
the human ovum, points out differences almost as great if 
not as numerous as those in the animals between man and the 
monad. 

Hence we see that an organic cell may be at one time one 
thing and at another another, arising simply from adaptation 
to the functions required. Thus the cell or spongozoon of 
the ampullaceous sac becomes an individualized animal, 


Hints for Microscopy. 439 


and the whole sac, with its oral and anal apertures, so far like 
an Ascidian ; while the sac with its pavement-lining of cells 
in the compound tunicated animal goes on unarrested to pro- 
duce an Ascidian. It is on this account that I have stated 
that there is a greater relation between the Sponges and the 
Ascidians than between the Sponges and the Corals, whose 
polypes have but one aperture for both purposes. 

To produce the “adaptation”’ there must be, of course, a 
creative or directing power, which, being infinite, we can 
never comprehend, 


I would here add, for the information of those who care to 
experimentalize on the living sponges by feeding them with 
indigo or carmine (magenta will not do, for it dyes all alike), 
that the portion of sponge must be taken from its habitat 
without injury, put in sea-water directly, kept there until 
the following day (forenoon); the water then changed, and 
the indigo or carmine added by having been rubbed off a 
cake of one or other of these substances in sea-water, and 
dropped upon the sponges, where it should be allowed to re- 
main about an hour, always remembering that the experiment 
will be unsuccessful if it be not previously ascertained, by the 
ejection of particles from the vents (which can be seen under a 
1-inch compound power), that the sponge is living and active. 
Portions may then be examined microscopically, after which 
the sponge should be placed in spirit and water for doing this 
at convenience. 

A priori it might be considered desirable to have the sponge 
as fresh as possible; but experiment has taught me otherwise, 
viz. that to get the cilia retained with the indigo still in the 
body of the spongozoon, the sponge should be kept for a day 
first, in the way above stated, whereby, being weakened and 
hungry perhaps, the experiment is more likely to succeed. 

Then, of course, the best plan is to examine a portion while 
the sponge is yet alive; after which it may be placed, as 
above noticed, in spirit and water for more deliberate obser- 
vation. In this state, too, a portion may be torn to pieces 
on the slide, dried and mounted in balsam, when, in many 
instances, the general form of the body and cilium will still 
be retained; or the fragments may be dyed with magenta, 
when the cilium will become still more evident; but, of 
course, what will render the transparent sarcode visible, 
will be likely to obscure the particles of indigo. Lastly a 
fragment having been torn to pieces on the slide in water, it 
may be simply dried, when the cilium will become more 
evident than in the wet state. 


440 Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Eulema. 


In examining minute objects, it is very desirable to acquire 
the power of holding a lens with the eye after the manner of 
a watchmaker; this, besides giving as it were a third hand, 
enables the operator, by means of a very high power, to pick 
out objects from material spread over the slide, through the 
aid of a subjacent mirror or black ground, and thus turn them 
over and over so as to obtain a view, under a compound power, 
of all parts of the object, such as it might be difficult, if not 
impossible, to get under any other circumstances. 

Again, the microscopist should also endeavour, when he has 
got the focus of the “ fine adjustment,” to render it still. finer 
by gently pressing down the tube, whose resiliency, up and 
down, will thus give the observer a better idea of a minute 
object than any other means. Indeed it is absolutely neces- 
sary with very minute objects. 


LXI—A Revision of the Genera Epicharis, Centris, Eulema, 
and Eugilossa, belonging to the Family Apide, Section Sco- 
pulipedes. By FRepERICcK SaMitu, Assistant in the Zoolo- 
gical Department of the British Museum. 


[Concluded from p. 373. ] 


Section CORBICULIPEDES. 
Genus EvuLeMA, St.-Farg. 


Generic Characters. 


Head narrower than the thorax; the clypeus produced an- 
teriorly ; the labrum subquadrate, convex, its anterior margin 
slightly curved ; mandibles subdentate, having on their inner 
margin three blunt teeth; the tongue elongate, nearly as long as 
the body: the maxillary palpi two-jointed, the first joint shorter 
than the second, its apex truncate ; the second joint twice the 
length of the basal one, pear-shaped, and with a long stiff 
bristle near its apex: the labial palpi elongate, setiform, two- 
jointed, the division of the joints obscure. Thorax: wings 
with one elongate marginal cell and three submarginal cells, 
the first and second of nearly equal length, the third as long 
as the first and second united ; the first recurrent nervure re- 
ceived by the second submarginal cell near its apex, the 
second recurrent uniting with the third transverse nervure. 
The posterior tibiz of the females much flattened, concave ex- 
teriorly : in the male the tibiz are convex, and concave above, 
two thirds of their length from their apex towards their base. 


ae ee eee 


Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Eulema. 441 


The above characters are those of the type of the genus, 
Eulema dimidiata. This genus can only be separated from 
that of Zuglossa by an examination of the oral organs. I have 
failed to observe more than two joints in the labial palpi; and 
upon this circumstance alone have I kept it separated from 
Euglossa. The characters given by St.-Fargeau are not 
reliable ; and the difference which he alludes to in the neuration 
of the wings has no existence; in both genera the neuration 
is the same. The labrum varies slightly in the species, being 
sometimes square, sometimes slightly narrowed anteriorly ; 
the males in both genera have the posterior tibie thickened, 
being convex outwardly. The scutellum is sometimes flat, 
sometimes a little convex; it has frequently a fossulet at its 
posterior margin, or a depression, the sides of which are 
elevated so as to become bituberculate. 

The insects belonging to this genus, Mr. Bates informs us, 
are solitary in their habits. In the second volume of the 
‘Naturalist on the River Amazons’ he observes of Ewlema 
surinamensis :— This species builds its solitary nest in 
crevices of walls or trees; but it closes up the chink with 
fragments of dried leaves and sticks cemented together, instead 
of clay. It visits the cajti-trees, and gathers with its hind 
legs a small quantity of the gum which exudes from their 
trunks ; to this it adds the other materials required from the 
neighbouring bushes, and when laden flies off to its nest.” 
The dilated posterior tibie, fringed at the sides, and thus 
forming a basket (similar to that on the legs of the hive-bee), 
has led to the supposition of the insects of this genus being 
social; but direct observation proves the contrary. These 
bees are furnished with two spines at the apex of the pos- 
terior tibiz, which none of the permanently social genera pos- 
sess. The genus Bombus, which is temporarily social, has 
spines similar to the genera Hulema and Euglossa, and has 
also the posterior tibia expanded and fringed at the sides in 
the same manner as those genera. Thus we have a gradation 
in structure, as well as in habit, from Hulema to Euglossa, 
and thence on to Bombus and the genera Melipona, Trigona, 
up to the genus Apis. 


1. Eulema dimidiata. 
Eulema dimidiata, St.-Farg. Hym, ii. p. 12,d 9. 
Apis dimidiata, Fab. Ent. Syst. ii. p. 316. 
Centris dimidiata, Fab, Syst. Piez. p. 354; Schomb. Faun, Flor. Brit. 
Guiana, p. 519. 
Euglossa dimidiata, Perty, Del. An. Art. p. 151, tab. xxviii. f. 14, 2. 
Hab. Cayenne; Para; Rio de Janeiro; Bahia; St. Paulo; 
Chontales; British Guiana. 
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xiii. 32 


oe ce Le ne ee ee ke 


ee 


—— 


a 


eee 


442 Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Eulema. 


This species varies not only in colouring but also in size. 
The three apical segments are usually covered with ferruginous 
pubescence ; but specimens from Rio and others from Chontales 
have the segments clothed with pale yellowish white. In 
size it varies from 14 to 9 lines in both sexes. 

This insect is figured in Madame Merian’s ‘ Insects of 
Surinam,’ plate 48. 

2. Hulema cajennensis. 

Eulema cajennensis, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 14, ¢. 

E. fasciata, St.-Farg. ibid. p. 12,9 3. 

Hab. Cayenne; Para; Honduras; Mexico. 


I have seen the type of the species named “fasciata”’ by 
St.-Fargeau; the male is a rather worn specimen: that 
described as “‘cajennensis” is certainly the same species m 
good condition. 

3. Hulema elegans. 

Edema elegans, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 13, 2. 

Hab. Cayenne; Santarem ; Chontales. 


I have examined St.-Fargeau’s type specimen of this 
species, and have seen examples from the above localities. 
The male has the face of a metallic green, with more or less 
of a coppery tinge; the thorax, anteriorly, has also a metallic 
lustre, as well as the tegulee ; the posterior tibie are convex. 
The species is closely allied to E. cajennensis. | 


4. Hulema terminata. 


Male. Length 13 lines. Head and thorax black, the abdo- 
men obscurely eeneous ; the pubescence black, excepting that 
on the fifth and sixth segments of the abdomen, which is 
pale fulvous ; the apical segment pale testaceous ; the wings 
dark fuscous from the tegule to the base of the marginal cell, 
beyond which they are pale flavo-hyaline; the posterior tibia 
with the longitudinal excavation above terminating in an 
acute spine on each side at its apex. The spines are more 
acute than in the male of EL. dimidiata. 

Hab. Trinidad. 

5. Hulema surinamensis. 

Eulema surinamensis, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 18. 

Apis surinamensis, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. p. 961; Drury, Exot. Ins. iii. 
tab. xliii. fig. 4; De Geer, iii. p. 45, fig. 4; Fab. Ent. Syst. ii. p. 318. 

Centris surinamensis, Fab, Syst. Piez. p. 355; Schomb, Faun. Flor. 
Brit. Guiana, p. 592. 

Euglossa surinamensis, Westw. Nat. Libr. xxxviii. p. 261, pl. xix. fig. 1; 
Humb. et Bonp. p. 592, pl. xvii. fig. 12. 

Hab. Surinam ; Para; Rio de Janeiro; Columbia; British 
Guiana ; Mexico. 


toe 


Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Euglossa. 443 


6. Eulema fallax. 
Eulema fallax, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins, Apeda, ii. p. 381, 3. 
Hab. Paya. 


This species is very closely allied to “ swrinamensis,” of 
which it may possibly be a variety. It has, however, no 
yellow markings on the face, as in the male of that species, 
which has a narrow longitudinal line down the middle of the 
clypeus, two spots at its anterior margin, and usually a minute 
spot on each side about the middle of its margin; there is also 
a spot on the face opposite the insertion of the antenne: the 
male of £. fallax has the face, the thorax anteriorly, and the 
tegule bright green, and the abdomen is entirely clothed with 
fulvo-ochraceous pubescence; in “ swrinamensis” the basal 
segment is covered with black pubescence. 


Genus Euauossa, Latr. 
Generic Characters. 


The maxillary palpi two-jointed, the basal joint hidden in 
a cavity ; the second spindle-shaped, with a long bristle at its 
apex. ‘The labial palpi four-jointed; the two basal joints 
elongate, the third and fourth minute, attached to the second 
joint near its apex. The labrum quadrate, with the anterior 
angles rounded. The mandibles tridentate. Wings and legs 
as in the genus Hulema. ‘The body in some species entirely 
naked. 


1. Euglossa cordata. 


Euglossa cordata, Latr. Hist. Nat. Crust. et Ins, iii. p. 884; Fabr. Syst. 
Piez. p. 363; St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 9,¢ 9; Schomb. Faun. Flor. 
Brit. Guiana, p. 592. 

Apis cordata, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. p. 955. 

Cnemidium viride, Perty, Del. An. Art. p. 149, tab. xxviii. fig. 9. 

Euglossa analis, Westw. Nat. Libr. xxxviii. p. 262, pl. xix. fig. 2 (1840). 

Hab. Cayenne; Santarem; Para; Ega; Catagallo; Jamaica ; 

Mexico. 


Having examined avery large number of examples, I have 
come to the conclusion that it is a species that runs into great 
variety of coloration, the majority being of a vivid green ; 
others have a golden lustre; then others are blue, or blue 
with shades of purple; some have the head and thorax blue, 
with the abdomen purple; the most beautiful variety is 
that with the head and thorax purple, and the abdomen bril- 
liant carmine: these and other mixtures of coloration occur. 
E. analis of Westwood is a beautiful variety: the head and 

32* 


444 My. F. Smith on the Genus Euglossa. 


thorax blue, clypeus at the sides, the labrum, and mandibles 
white; thorax green beneath ; abdomen purple, terminal seg- 
ments golden green. 


2. Euglossa piliventris. 
Euglossa piliventris, Guér. Icon. Régne Anim. p. 458, 5 2. 
Hab. Para; West Indies. 


3. EHuglossa ignita. 


Male. Length 64 lines. Head and thorax green, the abdo- 
men green, with more or less of a bright carmine lustre. 
Labrum, mandibles, and the scape in front white ; the flagellum 
of the antenne, except the two basal joints, fulvous beneath ; 
the clypeus with a central longitudinal carina; the labrum 
has a central carina and one on each side, which emanates 
from a small tubercle near the base; the cheeks have a pale 
pubescence, as has also the thorax beneath, the sides and in 
front above, as well as the anterior and intermediate tarsi ; 
the scutellum with a deep central depression ; the posterior 
tibie and tarsi of a brilliant coppery lustre; the thorax and 
abdomen closely and finely punctured, the latter of a brilliant 
coppery lustre beneath ; the wings subhyaline. 

Hab. Jamaica. 


The most highly coloured specimen is described; others 
have the abdomen green, with a faint coppery tinge towards 
the apex: intermediate states of coloration also occur. 


*4, Huglossa decorata. 


Female. Length 54 lines. Head and thorax green, legs and 
abdomen ferruginous. Head strongly and closely punctured ; 
the clypeus with a central and two lateral longitudinal carine ; 
the labrum and mandibles yellowish white, the latter with 
their margins and apex rufo-piceous ; the antenne ferruginous, 
with the flagellum dusky above ; beneath, thinly clothed with 
hoary pubescence; the vertex with a little erect fulvous pu- 
bescence. Thorax closely and finely punctured above, and 
clothed with fulvous pubescence, beneath it is hoary; the 
scutellum, tegule, and nervures of the wings ferruginous ; 
the latter flavo-hyaline and iridescent; the basal joint of the 
tarsi and margins of the posterior tibiz dark purple; the legs 
have a thin pale pubescence. Abdomen ferruginous at the 
base, becoming dark fuscous at the apex; the fourth and 
fifth segments have their apical margins fasciated with white 


EEE 


Mr. F. Smith on the Genus Euglossa. 445 


pubescence ; pale ferruginous beneath, the segments fringed 
with white pubescence. 
Hab. St. Paulo (Brazil). 


" 3. Huglossa Brullet. 
Euglossa Brullei, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p, 10,2. 
Hab. St. Paulo (Amazon). 


The male has not been described : it is of the same colour 
as the female. The only example I have seen has the thorax 
tinged with green anteriorly ; the tegule are also green, as is 
also the upper margin of the posterior tibiz ; the anterior tarsi 
have the usual pubescent fringe on their inner margin; the 
face has no pale markings. 


6. Euglossa smaragdina. 
Centris smaragdina, Perty, Del. An, Art. p, 150, tab. xxviii. fig. 13, ¢. 
Hab. Minas Geraes. 
This species is described as having the head, prothorax, 


and abdomen at the base of a golden emerald-green, the 
posterior tibiee ferruginous and much thickened, 


7. Euglossa pulchra, 

Euglossa pulchra, Smith, Cat. Hym. Ins. Apide, ii. p. 381, 9. 

Hab. St. Paulo (Amazon) ; Tapajos. 

The male of this species exactly resembles the female in 
colour; it was taken by Mr. H. W. Bates. Its head is bright 
golden green, the clypeus tinged with coppery lustre, the 
thorax, legs, and two basal segments of the abdomen purple- 
black, the wings subhyaline, the third and four following 
segments of the abdomen golden green. 


8. Euglossa violacea. 
Euglossa violacea, Blanch. Hist. Nat. Ins. iii. p. 405,92. 
Hab. Brazil. 


9. Huglossa cerulescens. 
Euglossa cerulescens, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 11,3. 
Hab. Mexico. 


This species has been received from Mexico; St.-Fargeau 
only describes the male, and did not know the locality of the 
species. It varies in colour: males, which I have seen, are 
in some instances green with the abdomen purple, others en- 
tirely green with violet-coloured legs; the thorax is thinly 


ee SN i Oe ee a ee a ot 


i Se eee 


= --* 


Se 


<—— 


446 Mr. R. Collett on two new Species 


covered anteriorly with fulvous pubescence. The female, of 
which sex I have only seen a single example, has the face 
dark blue, the vertex black ; the clypeus with a longitudinal 
sharp carina; the thorax black above, with an obscure purple 
tint on the scutellum, the legs obscure purple ; the abdomen 
has the first and second segments obscurely purple, the follow- 
ing segments green and covered with short pale fulvous pu- 
bescence, the pubescence extends up the sides of the second 
segment. 


10. Euglossa nigrita. 


Euglossa nigrita, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 14, 9. 
Euglossa analis, St.-Farg. Hym. ii. p. 14, 5, nee Westw. (1841). 


Hab. Cayenne; Para; Santarem; Rio Janeiro. 


The female is totally black ; the male has the apex of the 
abdomen covered with ferruginous or fulvous hair. 


11. Euglossa Romandiv. 
. Euglossa Romandit, Guér. Icon. Rég. Anim. p. 458, 3. 
Hab. Para; Santarem. 


The female is coloured like the male, having the head and 
abdomen golden-green, the thorax and legs purple-black. 


LXII.—On two apparently new Species of Gobius from 
Norway. By Ropert Cou.ert, of Christiania. 


Gobius orca, n. sp. 
DG | 11. A. 10. WV. 6S R18 eros [Se ee tees 


Body much compressed, the greatest depth being more than 
half of the length of the head, which is contained thrice and one 
half in the total (without caudal). Head depressed, broader 
than high ; snout shorter than the eye ; lower jaw projecting 
beyond the upper. yes large, very close together, and partly 
directed upwards, the diameter of the orbits being nearly four 
tenths of the length of the head. Head and throat scaleless, 
the scales of the body large. Anal papilla indistinct. The 
fins elongated ; the origin of the anterior dorsal is in the ver- 
tical from the root of the pectoral. ‘The interspace between 
the two dorsal fins is equal to the length of the eye; the first 
and second spine of the anterior dorsal produced into filaments ; 


ee 


of Gobius from Norway. 447 


both dorsals much higher than the body; the last rays of the 
posterior dorsal do not extend to the root of the caudal. The 
pectoral and ventral fins reach equally far backwards to the 
vent. The ventral fins have the basal membrane apparently 
not developed. Body uniform greyish, with numberless brown 
points, darker between the anal and posterior dorsal and at the 
root of the caudal; the fins dark brownish grey, an indistinct 
whitish band at the outer half of the posterior dorsal. 

A single specimen was brought up in a dredge by Professor 
Sars, jun., at Espevar, in the mouth of the Hardangerfjord 
(59° 35'), from a depth of 80-100 fathoms, in July 1873. 
Total length 32 millims., to the root of the caudal 26, length 
of the head 74, depth of the body 43. 


Gobius scorpioides, n. sp. 
Pen. Ane 2 VG. F. 20415). ) °C. 6 | £2 PG: ls. lat. 28: 


Body compressed, its depth is contained six times in the 
total (without caudal). Head depressed, broader than high ; 
snout shorter than the eye; lower jaw projecting beyond the 
upper. The length of the head is contained thrice and one 
third in the total. Hyes large, close together, the diameter of 
the orbits being nearly four tenths of the length of the head. 
Head and throat scaleless; the scales of the body large, de- 
ciduous. Teeth inthe outer series enlarged. The dorsal fins 
higher than the body; the last rays of the posterior do not 
extend to the root of the caudal; the interspace between the 
dorsals is equal to the length of the eye. The ventral fins 


have the basal membrane little or not developed. Body with 


four or five blackish brown cross bands, two extending from 
the anterior dorsal to the belly, one from the posterior dorsal 
to the lateral line, the fourth behind the last mentioned fin, 
and the fifth (less conspicuous) at the root of the caudal. 
Belly yellowish; head with three or four blackish spots or 
cross bands ; fins blackish, the posterior dorsal with indistinct 
bands. 

Two specimens were brought up in the dredge by Professor 
Sars, jun., 1872 and 1873, in the fjords of Hardanger and 
Stavanger (59° 35’), from a depth of 20-60 fathoms. Length 
of the first 37 millims., to the root of the caudal 30, length of 
the head 9, depth of the body 53; length of the second 28. 


Christiania, May 10, 1874. 


Sh ee ee 


Ee ae Se OPPs s © ok © Ey ee ee oe PR en ee 


| 
' 
: 
4 
; 
t 
; 
; 


448 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Skeleton of 


LXIUI.—On a new Species of Megapode. By R. BOwDLER 
Suarpe, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e., Senior Assistant, Zoological 
Department, British Museum. 


THe Museum is indebted to Dr. Sharpey, F.R.S., for a speci- 
men of a Megapode which was shot by Henry David Cooper, 
Esq., on the island of Trinkut, in the Nicobar group. I 
propose to call it 


Megapodius trinkutensis, sp. 0. 

Above olive-brown, many of the feathers rather inclining 
to clearer and more rufous brown on their margins ; wings 
uniform with back externally, the inner webs of coverts and 
quills deep brown, the primaries very pale fulvous brown on 
their outer webs; tail uniform with back; crown of head 
light bay; lores, cheeks, and region of the eye bare; ear- 
coverts, throat, sides of neck, and hinder part of latter forming 
a collar pale creamy fulvous; under surface of body rather 
lighter olive-brown than the back, greyish on the abdomen, 
thighs, and under tail-coverts; under wing-coverts olive- 
brown like the breast, except the greater series, which are 
greyish like the inner lining of the wing. Total length 15°5 
inches, culmen 1:1, wing 9°7, tail 3°5, tarsus 2°45. 

Hab. Trinkut Island, Nicobars. 

This new species is closely allied to I. nicobariensis, as 
might have been expected; but on examining the excellent 
account of the latter bird lately published by Mr. Hume 
(‘Stray Feathers,’ ii. p. 276), it is evident that the Trinkut 
bird is distinct. It has none of the “ French-grey” tinge on 
the throat and sides of neck, but, on the contrary, has these 
a a pale fulvous colour, forming a collar round the hind 
neck. 


LXIV.—On the Skeleton of the New-Zealand Pike Whale, 
Balenoptera Huttoni (Physalus antarcticus, Hutton). By 
Dr. J. Hi. Gray, F.R.S. &e. 


{Plate XVIII. ] 


THE skeleton of the whale of which Professor Hutton’s account 
and figure are given in the ‘ Annals’ (ante, p. 316, Pl. XVI. a), 
from Otago Head, has arrived at the British Museum. It is in 
a very perfect state and beautiful condition, wanting only one 
ear-bone, which Professor Hutton says he will send at the 
next opportunity. 


the New-Zealand Pike Whale. 449 


It proves to be a species of the Pike Whale (Balenoptera), 
the Australian representative of the Pike Whale of Northern 
Europe, but perfectly distinct from it, and probably smaller 
than the European species ; for though the skeleton is that of 
a young whale, the bones of the specimen sent are generally 
well knit, the epiphyses of only a few of the cervical vertebrae 
are free; the lateral wings of the atlas and the edge of the 
scapula are imperfectly developed. It differs from the Euro- 
pean species in the larger size of the head, the fewer vertebra, 
and the longer fingers compared with the length of the fore- 
arm. 

Professor Hutton gave the name of Physalus antarcticus, 
Gray, to this species, thereby intending the Balenoptera ant- 
arctica mentioned by me in the ‘ Zoology of the Erebus and 
Terror,’ p. 51, and founded on some yellowish-white Finner- 
baleen imported from New Zealand. But this baleen must come 
from a very much larger species of true Finner; for it is much 
broader compared with its length. The New-Zealand Finner 
is not to be confounded with the Balenoptera antarctica, 
Van Beneden (Ostéog. Cét. p. 234), which name he gave 
to the gigantic Sibbaldius antarcticus described by Bur- 
meister from Buenos Ayres (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 713, 
figs. 1 & 2; Gray, Cat. Seals and Whales, p. 381, fig. 87), 
which Malm has named Physalus antarcticus. The bladebone 
of this species is 6 feet broad and 3 feet high. The bladebone 
of the Otago Pike Whale is only 15 inches broad and 9 inches 
high; and it differs from that figured by Burmeister not 
only in size, but in the glenoid being much more oblong, 
and in the shape and direction of the coracoid and glenoid 
processes. 

It is necessary to refer this species to the genus Balenoptera 
and give it a new specific name, as Balenoptera antarctica is 
already used by Van Beneden. I therefore propose to call it 
Balenoptera Huttont. 


The genus Balenoptera may be divided into two sections, 
thus :-— 


* BALANOPTERA, Vertebre fifty; cervical vertebree some- 
times ankylosed, with the neural canal broad, trigonal ; 
fingers scarcely the length of the forearm-bone. J. 
rostrata: northern seas. 

*® DactyLmna. Vertebre forty-eight; cervical vertebree 
quite free, with the neural canal broad, oblong, low ; 
fingers the length of the forearm-bone. B. (D.) Huttond: 
Antarctic seas. 


ee ee ee ee ee 


450 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Skeleton of 


Balenoptera Huttoni. 


Dorsal fin erect, compressed, about two thirds the entire 
length from the nose. Skull about one fourth the entire 
length. Baleen elongate, triangular, much longer than broad. 
Vertebre forty-eight; neural canal of cervical vertebree broad 
and low, transverse; ribs 11 . 11, first simple-headed. Pectoral 
fin moderate, the middle finger as long as the forearm-bone. 

Physalus antarcticus, Hutton, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1874, xiii. p. 316, 

t, xvi. A (not Gray, ‘ Voy. Erebus and Terror’). 

Hab. Southern New Zealand, Otago Head. 

The skull is elongate, 46 inches long, 50 inches over the 
curve, and 22 inches wide in front of the orbits. The back 
of the brain-cavity slopes forwards from the foramen magnum 
nearly to the nasal bones. The beak is 82 inches long from 
the back edge of the nasal bones, slightly arched, and gradually 
tapers from the front of the orbit to the tip; the sides of the 
maxillary bones are nearly straight or very slightly concave. 
The intermaxillaries are narrow, rather broader in the middle 
of their length, flat on the front part, and concave on the sides 
of the blower. 

The skull greatly resembles that of Balenoptera rostrata, 
especially in the form of the intermaxillaries and the concavity 
at the hinder part of them. 

The nasal bones solid; the pair above elongate, triangular, 
nearly twice as long as broad, flat at top behind, and shelving 
off on each side in front, leaving an angular keeled central 
ridge, which is square at the top, broader below, 43 inches 
long and 34 inches wide. 

The lower jaw is strong, curved, 44 inches long, and has 
a distinct conical tapering coronoid process. 

The palatine bones at the end of the underside of the upper 
jaw are oblong, four-sided, longer than broad; they are 
truncated, but rounded on the outer side of the front edge, 
and united by a straight median suture ; they are attached by 
a large broad laminar suture to the pterygoid bones behind. 
These bones are much larger and broader than those of the 
Rorqual du Cap, Cuvier, ‘Oss. Foss.’ v. p. 370, t. xxvi. fig. 3d; 
and they are much broader and larger than those of Balenoptera 
Schlegelii figured by Van Beneden, ‘Ostéogr. Cétacés,’ t. xiv. 
fig. 2. 

“The palatine bones are generally large in the Mysticetes, 
and the pterygoid bones are very small and widely separate ; 
but in the New-Zealand Pike Whale they are larger than 
usual. The development of the palatine bones is one of the 
characters which separate the whalebone-whales from the 


the New-Zealand Pike Whale. 451 


toothed Cetacea (Denticetes). In the porpoise the palatines 
merely form a band between the maxille and the pterygoid 
bones; but they vary in size in the different genera, being 
larger in some, as Platanista; they are very small, and the 
pterygoids large in Hyperoodon (Cuvier, Oss. Foss. v. t. xxiv. 
fig. 19,g &h); and they are large in Catodon (Cuvier, Oss. 
Foss. v. t. xxiv. fig. 1,m & n), where they approach nearer to 
the shape of those of the whalebone-whales. 

One (the left) ear-bone is attached to the skull, and appears 
to differ from the ear-bones of Balenoptera rostrata figured in 
the ‘Catalogue of Seals and Whales in the British Museum,’ 
p- 191, fig. 56, in being shorter ; but it cannot well be seen, 
as I do not wish to detach it from the skull. 

The baleen is elongate, triangular, longer than broad at the 
base—when dry, horn-coloured, blackish on the straight edge, 
whitish on the inner hairy margin and at the tips. A blade is 
15 inches long, and 2 inches wide at the base; but there are 
some rather larger. 

The vertebree are 48—cervical 7, dorsal 12 (with eleven 
pairs of ribs), lumbar 13 (with lateral processes, without any 
perforation at the base), caudal 16 (with only rudimentary 
lateral processes or none, and a perforation at base). There 
are seven chevron bones ; but it is not quite certain that they 
are perfect. 

Ribs eleven pairs. The first rib with a single head, and a 
broad sternal end; the other ribs slender, curved, all similar. 

The cervical vertebre are seven, all free. The atlas with 
a blunt broad process on each side; the axis thicker, with a 
keeled, wide, hood-like process above, the lateral processes 
abbreviated, leaving a broad rounded notch, most probably 
elongate when complete. The second, third, fourth, and fifth 
cervical vertebree have a process from each lower side of the 
body. The processes of the second, third, and fourth are com- 
pressed, rather dilated at the ends, and rather produced at the 
upper margins of the end; those of the fifth are cylindrical, 
rather swollen at the ends ; and there are only rudimentary ones 
on the sixth and seventh. ‘The bodies of the vertebra are 
oblong, four-sided, broader than high. The neural canals 
oblong, transverse ; of the axis smaller, more rounded ; of the 
other cervical vertebrae wider and lower, nearly as broad as the 
bodies of the vertebree, and in this respect very different from 
the canal of the fifth cervical vertebra of B. rostrata, figured in 
the ‘Catalogue of Seals and Whales in the British Museum,’ 
fig. 51. 

“iPhe sternum broad and expanded in front, and with a 
short stem behind; the front edge rounded, with a slight 


452 On the Skeleton of the New-Zealand Pike Whale. 


notch in the middle, and with rounded ends. The sternum is 
61 inches broad, 5 inches long; the hinder part thick, cylin- 
drical, about 23 inches long, very different from that ot 
Balenoptera rostrata figured in the ‘Catalogue of Seals and 
Whales in the British Museum,’ p. 110, fig. 12, c, more like the 
sternum of Balenoptera musculus, Van Beneden (Ostéogr. 
Cét. t. xii. fig. 14) ; but the upper part is more expanded, the 
central notch rudimentary, and the stem longer and more 
slender. 

The os hyoides is 8} inches wide and 3 inches long, dilated 
in the middle, with a notch in the front edge somewhat as in 
Balenoptera rostrata (Ostéogr. Cét. t. xu. fig. 4), but more 
dilated in the middle, and with a process on each side of the 
notch, to which is attached a flattened bone. M. van Beneden 
does not figure any processes to the os hyoides of any of his 
species in the ‘ Ostéographie’ similar to those found in the 
skeleton from Otago. 

The scapula broad and low, the upper edge being about 
one third of a circle, with well developed acromion and coracoid 
processes. The glenoid cavity large, oblong; the coracoid 
blunt; the acromion process coming from a ridge which 
extends up the upper margin, elongate and broad. ‘The width 
15 inches, the height 9 inches; the glenoid cavity 4} by 
28 inches. The scapula is rather broader and lower, and has 
a smaller acromion process than that of B. rostrata figured by 
Van Beneden (Ostéogr. Cét. t. xii. fig. 6). 

The bones of the fore fin are 28 inches long; the humerus 
6 inches, the ulna and radius 10 inches, the longest finger 
10 inches. The first finger with three bony joints and one 
cartilaginous one, the second with seven, the third (longest) 
with eight, the fourth with four joints. 


There were sent with the skeleton a pair of ear-bones of 
another Finner; but they cannot belong to this skeleton, as 
the skull has the left one attached, and Professor Hutton in- 
forms me that one was unfortunately left behind, but it is on 
its way to the Museum. ‘The pair of ear-bones sent are very 
like those of Megaptera nove-zelandie, ‘Catalogue of Seals 
and Whales,’ p. 128, fig. 20. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVII 
Fig. 1. Nasal bone. Fig. 4. Sternum, 


Fig. 2. Cervical vertebree. Fig. 5. Scapula. 
Fig. 3. Os hyoides. Fig. 6. Arm- and finger-bones, 


Mr. W. T. Blanford on new Lizards. 453 


LXV.—Descriptions of new Lizards from Persia and 
Baluchistén. By W.T. Buanrorp, F.Z.S. 


LACERTILIA. 
Family Agamide. 
1. Stellio liratus. 


S. supra fuscus, nigrescente transversim fasciatus, a valde affini S. 
melanura squamis supracaudalibus caude basin versus haud cari- 
natis, plica nuchali presente et forsan squamis carinatis ad me- 
dium dorsum majoribus distinguendus. A Stellio nupto differt 
squamarum carinis, ad medium dorsum in lineis parallelis dispo- 
sitis, ad Jatera postice divergentibus, ipsis squamis dorsalibus 
utrinque gradatim diminuentibus, et colli lateribus vix spinosis. 


Hab. in Gedrosia (Baluchistan) haud procul a litore. 


Only a single specimen captured, measuring 4 inches from 
snout to anus. Scales round the middle of the body 120 to 
130. 


2. Stellio microlepis. 


S. caucasico affinis sed squamis, presertim in medio dorso, inter 
humeros, minoribus, et coloribus magis fuscis distinguendus: 
squame circum medium corpus plus quam 200, eum in S. caucasico 
150-160 duntaxat numerantur. 


Hab. in montibus Persie meridionalis. 
Numerous specimens were obtained. 


Family Geckotide. 
3. Gymnodactylus brevipes. 


G. affinis Gymnodactylis geckoidi, caspio, kachhensique, dorso tu- 
berculis parvis triquetris, in 10 series longitudinales dispositis 
ornato ; cauda verticillata, annulis singulis tuberculis tribus cari- 
natis longiusculis utrinque armatis, subtus scutis majoribus (non- 
nullis diyisis) induta: squamis ventralibus in serie transversa 
circum 22; poris inguinalibus 4, femoralibus nullis, membris 
digitisque brevibus; pede anteriore vix ante oculum, posteriore 
humerum attingente. 


Hab. in Gedrosia (Baluchistdn). 


Distinguished from allied species by its much shorter limbs 
and feet, and especially by its short toes. 


4. Gymnodactylus heterocercus. 


G. depressus, capite granulis majusculis superne tecto; dorso tu- 
berculis carinatis triquetris, in series 12 longitudinales dispositis 
ornato; cauda superne verticillata, annulis singulis tuberculis 


| 
i 
| 
| 
| 
: 


——oooeeeeeerererereeeeerrrre 


454. Mr. W. T. Blanford on new Lizards 


tribus majoribus utrinque ad latus instructis, subtus squames parvis 
imbricatis carinatis mucronatis induta; cruribus supra tuberculis 
majoribus ornatis, subtus squamis parvis imbricatis carinatis 
tectis. 


Hab. ad Hamadan in Persia occidentali (Doria). 


The only two specimens of this species which I have seen 
belong to the Turin Museum, and were brought by the 
Marquis Giacomo Doria from Hamaddn. The keeled imbri- 
cate scales beneath the tail and legs serve to distinguish it 
from all allied forms. 


Bunorpvs, gen. nov. (vel subg. Gymnodactyli). 
Genus inter Gymnodactylum et Stenodactylum fere medium, cum 


illo digitis ad latera haud denticulato-fimbriatis, cum hoc scutellis 
infradigitalibus verrucosis concordat. 


5. Bunopus tuberculatus. 


B. griseus, fusco maculatus atque transfasciatus, tuberculis dorsali- 
bus confertis triquetris, meatum auditorium magnitudine fere 
eequantibus ornatus; poris inguinalibus circa 7 preeditus, scutellis 
post et inter nares vix majoribus, supralabialibus 10-12; cauda 
annulata, annulis tuberculatis. 


Hab. in Gedrosia Persiaque meridionali frequens. 


A Gymnodactylus with the transverse scutella beneath the 
toes studded with tubercles, as in Stenodactylus. It, however, 
wants the fringes to the toes, which are characteristic of the 
latter genus, and is evidently more nearly allied to the former. 
It inhabits houses. 


6. Pristurus rupestris. 


P. parvus, dorso squamis eequalibus induto, sine crista ; cauda com- 
pressa, supra (haud infra) cristata; pupilla rotunda. A P. flavi- 
punctato, Riipp., differt dorso non cristato, cruribus longioribus, 
scutis infralabialibus 3, nec 5. 


Hab. in rupibus insule Kharg vel Karrack in sinu Persico, 
etiam haud procul a Maskat in littore Arabico frequens. 


A small species; an adult is only 1-9 inch long. 


CERAMODACTYLUS, gen. nov. 


Digiti ad latera fimbriati, subtus squamis parvis imbricatis in series 
obliquas ordinatis obtecti; caput corpusque squamis parvulis 
undique induta ; crura longiuscula ; palpebra inferior nulla. 


7. Ceramodactylus Doric. 
C. squamis capitis, corporis atque caudee omnibus, supra subtusque, 


From Persia and Baluchistdn. 455 


parvis, fere sequalibus; cauda corpore breviore; capite magno, 
parum depresso, oculis magnis, pupilla verticali, meatu auditorio 
parvo; pede anteriore fere femur, posteriore axillam attingente ; 
poris inguinalibus duobus distantibus: superne fulvus, albo con- 
fertim maculatus. 


Hab. haud procul a Bandar Abbas juxta litus sinus Persici 
(Doria). 

A single specimen was obtained near Bandar Abbas by the 
Marquis Giacomo Doria, who informs me that it was found on 
the sand of a torrent-bed. This specimen belongs to the 
Turin Museum ; and I am indebted to the kindness of Count 
Salvadori for the loan of it and of Gymnodactylus heterocercus 
for description. 

A somewhat similar arrangement of imbricate scales beneath 
the toes is found in the West-African Stenodactylus caudi- 
cinctus, C. Dum. This is a very different form, having 
affinities to Hublepharus. It is the type of Pstlodactylus, 
Gray. 

AGAMURA, gen. nov. 


Genus novum Geckotidarum propter squamas digitosque ad Gymno- 
dactylum accedens, dorso tuberculato, palpebris inferioribus nul- 
lis, pupilla verticali, dentibus numerosis equalibusque, lingua 
antice brevissime fissa ; sed membris elongatis, cauda subcylindrica, 
valde flexibili, nunquam regenita, Agame simile. 


8. Agamura cruralis. 


A, grisea fusco transversim fasciata; dorso granulato, granulis yix 
conyexis tuberculisque majoribus frequentibus instructo ; membris 
elongatis, pede posteriore oculum attingente, haud tuberculatis, 
nisi interdum supra femur; capite brevi, alto, supralabialibus 
utrinque 12-14, meatu auditorio mediocri; cauda verticillata in- 
ermi, subtus serie unica scutorum polygonalium majorum in- 
structa ; poris inguinalibus in maribus duobus. 


Hab. inter lapides in Gedrosia haud frequens. 


This is a remarkable form allied to Spatalura Carter?, Gray, 
and forming with it a distinct subfamily of Geckoes, distin- 
guished by their very different tail, which is very flexible and 
apparently never reproduced. In Spatalura the tail is com- 
pressed and fringed above and below. 

A second species of Agamura is Gymnodactylus persicus, C. 
Dum., very closely allied to A. cruralis, but distinguished by 
having rather shorter limbs, smaller ear-orifice, the upper part 
of the thigh and front of the tarsus tuberculate, and the rostral 
shield vertically divided. 


456 Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Hozoon canadense. 


LX VI.—New Observations on Eozoon canadense. 


By Wiuu1aM B. Carpenter, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S. 
[Plate XIX. ] 


Ir may be thought that Mr. Carter would have best consulted, 
not only the interests of science, but his own reputation, by 
abstaining from any further attempts to disprove the Forami- 
niferal nature of Hozoon, until he had either acquainted him- 
self with the careful descriptions and “ fac-simile ” representa- 
tions of its structure given by Dr. Dawson, Prof. T. Rupert 
Jones, and myself*, or had satisfied himself, by an examina- 
tion of the specimens which I expressed my readiness to show 
him, of the fallaciousness of my interpretation. But I make 
no complaint of his having chosen the opposite course, since 
his adoption of it has led me to a careful re-examination of 
the whole subject, with the result of not only removing a dif- 
ficulty [had myself felt, and of thus strengthening my own con- 
viction, but of enabling me (as I anticipate) to carry that 
conviction to the mind of every competent judge, who has not 
so completely made up his mind to a foregone conclusion as 
to be unable to appreciate the force of the new evidence I 
have now to produce. 

I shall first dispose of the objection which Mr. Carter ad- 
duces as fatal to the Foraminiferal doctrine, viz. that the 
supposed nummuline tubuli frequently lie parallel to the 
chamber-walls, instead of perpendicular to them—a character 
which, says Mr. Carter, “is utterly incompatible with Fora- 
miniferal structure.” This dictum, when translated from 
Carterese (p. 278) into English, merely means that it is 
incompatible with Mr. Carter's notions of Foraminiferal 
structure; to which, as I have already had occasion to show, 
Nature refuses to bind herself. I fully admit the fact as he 
states it, and now find a perfectly simple explanation of it in 
the structure of those very Nummulites which Mr. Carter knows 
so well. In the lower or “lamellar ”’ portion of the Canadian 
Eozoon, the nummuline tubulation (where preserved) always 
presents—so far as my experience extends—its normal perpen- 
dicularity to the surface of the chambers; as shown in 
Pl. XIX. figs. 1,2. The arrangement referred to by Mr. 
Carter presents itself only in that upper or “ acervuline ’’ por- 
tion, in which, as in many recent I’oraminifera, the chamber- 


* The “constructed ” figure which I introduced for mere convenience 
of reference, was built-up (as every one of my ‘‘ constructed” figures has 
been) from parts which were separately described and figured ten years 
ago from the actual specimens, for the sake of showing the relations be- 
tween them,—a method used by every Palzeontologist. 


Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Eozoon canadense. 457 


lets are irregularly piled one on the other (see p. 281, fig. 1) ; 
and the parallelism of the tubuli to the walls of the chamber- 
lets they adjoin, simply arises from the fact that they are 
passing-by these, in that perpendicular course from the cham- 
berlets in which they originate, towards the external surface, 
which Mr. Carter himself recognizes as perfectly normal. 
This is shown in the subjoined figure (a) traced from a trans- 
parent section in my possession—the precise counterpart to 
at (6) being shown in those Nummulites which have the “ alar 


Fig. 1. 


a b 
Parallel tubulation in acervuline Parallel tubulation of Nemmulites 
portion of Eozoon canadense, levigata, showing the course of 
showing the course of the tu- the tubuli between the alar pro- 
buli between the irregularly- longations of successive whorls. 
piled chamberlets. After D’Archiac and Haime. 


prolongations” of successive whorls prolonged over those 
which preceded them, so as to be piled one upon another, often 
dividing themselves into irregular chamberlets. _ For when 
these are laid open by vertical section, it continually happens 
that the tubuli coming off vertically from the chambers of an 
inferior plane, lie parallel to the sides of the chambers of the 
plane above them ; so that, if the chambers and tubuli were 
infiltrated with serpentine, and the calcareous skeleton were 
removed by acid, the appearance presented would be exactly 
that figured by Messrs. King and Rowney, which Mr. Carter, 
with all the weight of his authority, pronounces to be “ wtterly 
incompatible with Foraminiferal structure.”—That I have not 
evolved this parallelism out of my own consciousness, will be 
manifest to any one who may take the trouble to refer to the 
admirable plates of Nummuline structure given by MM. 
D’Archiac and Haime in their ‘ Animaux Fossiles du Groupe 
Nummulitique de l’Inde.’ For it is distinctly seen in every 
one of their thin vertical sections of those species in which 
the “alar prolongations” are conspicuous—as N. intermedia, 


Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. xiii. 33 


458 Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Eozoon canadense. 


pl. iil. fig. 4,e, N. garansensis, pl. i. fig. 7, g, N. levigata, 
pl. iv. fig. 1,d, and N. obtusa, pl. vi. fig. 13, c,—the figure 
given above being copied from a portion of the third of those 
just cited, that I may not be charged with having “ con- 
structed ”’ it. 

Thus, so far from Mr. Carter’s case of utter incompatibility 
proving fatal to the Foraminiferal doctrine of Hozoon, a “‘ com- 
parison of the actual specimens” (his own test) gives to that 
doctrine the additional support of @ very striking conformity. 
Speaking for once in Carterese, I might say that Mr. Carter 
has “ found a mare’s nest.” 

Professors King and Rowney, also, in their anxiety to put me 
in the wrong as regards the Foraminiferal relations of Hozoon, 
have only betrayed their own ignorance of Foraminiferal 
structure, to a degree that must (I should think) shock even 
their ally Mr. Carter. ‘ We have shown,”’ they say (p. 393), 
“that the relative position of two superposed acicular layers 
(an upper and an under ‘nummuline wall’), and the admitted 
fact of their component aciculee often passing continuously and 
without interruption from one“ chamber-cast’ to another, to 
the exclusion of the ‘intermediate skeleton,’ are totally tn- 
compatible with the idea of the said ‘nummuline layers’ 
having resulted from pseudopodial tubulation.” Now, putting 
aside the first part of this statement, which betrays the con- 
fusion existing in the minds of its writers between the true 
“ nummuline layer,” as described by me from transparent 
sections, and the “ acicular layers’ of decalcified specimens, 
which may or may not represent it (see p. 461),—what must 
be said by Mr. Carter of the second? For he, of course, 
knows perfectly well that in the superposed whorls of Nummu- 
lites, as described by me in 1849, and in the superposed layers 
of Orbitoides, as described by him- 
self in 1861, the pseudopodial tu- 
bulation normally passes on ‘ con- 
tinuously and without interruption 
from one chamber to another, to 
the exclusion of the ‘intermediate 
skeleton.” This is represented 
alike in my original figures of the 


Oi 
“Nummuline tubulation” (Quart. Vertical Section of co- 
J saan ame caa: 185 lumns of Orbitoides 
yourn. 0 cor. oelety. Sy 850), dispansa; 1, column 
in every one of D’Archiac and of chambers; 2, ver- 
Haime’s vertical sections of Num- tical tubuli of the test; 
mulites, and in Mr. Carter’s own neers 

: Cran . on etween 
sections of Orbitoides, of which one the chanibersh 2A Gees 


is here reproduced. Carter, 


ae 


Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Eozoon canadense. 459 


It was doubtless the apparent force of the argument 
whose fallacy I have thus demonstrated, which led Prof. 
Max Schultze, after reading the paper of Professors King 
and Rowney, to write to Mr. Barker that it had “made 
a very great impression” on him, and that “ with respect to 
the ‘ proper wall’ of Carpenter” he was “ entirely of their 
>a I have no reason to believe that Prof. Max 

chultze ever did see the “ proper nummuline wall,” such as 
I shall presently describe and figure it; Professors King 
and Rowney certainly have not, it they can identify it with 
a film of chrysotile or asbestiform serpentine, forming “an 
integral portion of the grains and plates of serpentine,” and 
can assert that in its typical condition it occurs in cracks or 
fissures of the serpentine (p. 393); and they misled Prof. 
Schultze into the belief that they and I were speaking of the 
same things. When I sent him the preparations he asked 
for, I expressed my regret at not being able to supply him 
with a characteristic specimen of this structure, having given 
away all the duplicates of it I could spare; and, as it is rarely 
well-preserved, it is very probable that he did not find it by 
his own examination of the larger specimens he afterwards 
received from me and from other sources. At any rate, there 
is no mention of the “nummuline wall” in his communica- 
tion to the Wiesbaden Association—his acceptance of Hozoon 
as a Foraminifer entirely resting on the “ canal-system,” 
which he had minutely studied*, and as to which there zs no 
evidence whatever that he had changed his opinion, as asserted 
by Professors King and Rowney. Had he lived to see what 
I shall presently describe, I cannot doubt that he, in common 
with the numerous Microscopists to whom I have recently 
shown it, would have accepted the “ nummuline wall” with- 
out the slightest hesitation. 

Before, however, I proceed to describe it, I find myself obliged 
to notice the following statement made by Professors King and 
Rowney in the second note to p. 393 of their last paper :— 


* Mr. Carter questions the existence of a canal-system in Polytrema, 
referred to by Prof. Schultze, because his own ‘‘ mounted specimens” do 
not show it. When he has extended his knowledge of Foraminifera by 
the careful study of my “ Introduction” and of the types minutely de- 
scribed in it, he will find that the development of the “ canal-system ” is 
correlated to that of the “intermediate skeleton,” and that varietal or 
even individual differences may occur in this particular. I had never 
myself seen it in Planorbulina (for example), until M. Munier-Chalmas 
showed it to me, a few weeks since, in a specimen in the Sorbonne Mu- 
seum. This specimen had grown so closely attached to a Coral, as to have 
shaped itself on the inequalities of the Coral-surface ; and yet its lower 
or attached side was as perfectly tubulated as its upper or free side—a fact 
which I commend to the consideration of Professors King and Rowney. 


33* 


Se ee ee eee 


ee ee ee ee ee 


460 Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Hozoon canadense. 


“The so-called ‘nummuline wall’ in Dr. Carpenter’s con- 
structed representation, fig. 2, ought not to be represented in 
the way it is—bounded by two continuous lines—as it is an 
integral portion of the grains and plates of serpentine (the 
so-called ‘ chamber-casts’), and not a chemically differentiated 
part like the true calcareous wall of certain Foraminifers.” 
I have represented nothing that my specimens do not dis- 
tinctly show ; and the only excuse for such an imputation 
can be, that those who made it have never seen the true 
‘‘“nummuline wall,” such as I figured it ten years ago, be- 
fore a question had been raised as to the organic nature of 
Eozoon (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxi. plate viii. figs. 3, 4), 
and such as I now again figure it from a still better specimen 
in Plate XIX. figs. 1, 2. Professors King and Rowney, 
merely because they have not met with what I have repre- 
sented, take upon themselves to deny its existence. 

My érue “nummuline wall” is the representative of that 
which, in recent Foraminifera, immediately surrounds the 
chambers (Pl. XIX. fig. 1, aa). It is not a layer of chry- 
sotile acicule ; but is a calcareous lamella, perforated by minute 
tubuli, which usually lie straight and parallel, but are often 
more or less curved. These tubuli, like the chambers and 
canal-system, are usually filled with serpentine, which has 
passed into them from the chambers in which they originate ; 
and thus it happens that the original tubulation is generally ob- 
scured, being only represented microscopically by the differ- 
ence in refractive index between the calcareous shelly layer 
and the serpentine which has filled its tubes,—just as in a 
specimen of fresh bone or dentine mounted in Canada balsam 
the tubuli are only represented by the different refractive in- 
dices of the matrix and the balsam. But in the specimen of 
Eozoon figured in Pl. XIX. figs. 1, 2, many of the tubuli re- 
main empty; and they can be distinguished as tubuli under 
any magnifying-power that the thickness of the covering-glass 
allows to be used. Further, they have the somewhat sinuous 
course of the tubuli of organic structures; and they present, 
at what was probably a plane of interrupted growth, the 
sharper flexures which Prof. Owen first pointed out in the 
tubuli of dentine, and which I described and figured twenty- 
seven years ago in the hard dentine-like substance of the end 
of the Crab’s claw*. 

That the matrix m which these tubules are channelled out 
is calcareous, is shown in this section by the extension into 
it of the planes of crystalline cleavage (fig. 1, ¢ c) of the ‘ cal- 


* Report of the British Association for 1847, pl. xx. fig. 81. 


Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Eozoon canadense. 461 


careous layer, representing the intermediate skeleton,’ with 
which it is continuous. And it is shown also by the effect of 
dilute acid on any true ‘“‘nummuline layer’ of which the tubules 
have been filled with serpentine ; for it is only after the removal 
of the calcareous matrix that the internal casts of its tubules, 
remaining as separate acicule, present the least resemblance 
to the chrysotile fibres to which Professors King and Rowney 
persist in likening them, notwithstanding my repeated assertions 
that the two things are altogether different. I can show a 
precisely similar arrangement of vertical aciculz on the surface 
of a chamber-cast of a recent Amphistegina, and know them 
to be the internal casts of the tubuli of its Nummuline wall. 
But Professors King and Rowney’s argument would make 
out these also to be mere products of mineralization, because 
they resemble chrysotile-fibres. I am perfectly acquainted 
with the mineral pseudomorphs to which they refer, and freely 
admit their resemblance to certain forms of the “ acicular 
layer”’ left after the decalcification of the “ nummuline layer ;” 
but I cannot believe that any microscopist who is familiar 
either with dentinal or any other form of tubulation, can 
entertain the slightest doubt that if figs. 2, 3 be correct, the 
unaltered structure they represent is organic. If it be one 
that any kind of mineralization can produce, I do not see 
why we are to call Bones and Teeth any thing else than in- 
organic concretions. The only alternative hypothesis is, that 
not only Mr. George West and I, but all the Microscopists 
who have verified our representation, are suffering under 
“tubulation on the brain;” and this the Galway Professors 
and Mr. Carter are quite welcome to assert, if they think pro- 
per, when they shall have examined the specimen itself, which 
is open to their inspection at any time. At present they are 
in the position of the opponents of Galileo, who would not 
look through the telescope which showed the Satellites of 
Jupiter. 

I now pass on to a second probative fact of at least equal 
cogency,—the relation exhibited in the same specimen be- 
tween the “ canal-system”’ and the tubuli of the ‘ nummuline 
layer.” 

we my original description of Calcarina (Phil. Trans. 
1860)—the type to which, as regards the general distribution 
of its canal-system and its relation to the intermediate skeleton, 
Eozoon has the closest resemblance—I gave the following 
account of that relation (p. 554) :—“ The proper walls of the 
chambers are uniformly perforated, like those of the chambers 
of Rotalie, by foramina of considerable size (averaging above 
1 3000th of an inch in diameter) ; with these the canals of the 


462 Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Kozoon canadense. 


supplemental [or intermediate] skeleton do not seem to be 
directly continuous, for they are of about double the diameter 
and lie further apart from one another ; but immediately round 
the proper wails of the chambers there seem to be irregular 
lacunar spaces, into which the foramina open externally, and 
from which the passages of the canal-system originate.” Now, 
in my “ Supplemental Notes on the Structure and Affinities 
of Hozoon canadense” (Proceed. Geol. Soc., Jan. 10, 1866, 
p- 222), I stated that precisely the same relation is shown to 
exist in decalcified specimens of Hozoon, by the implantation 
of the dendritic models of the chamber-casts in plates formed 
by the coalescence of the acicule that occupied the tubules of 
the “ proper wall.” Having now been fortunate enough to 
meet with a transparent section which exhibits this relation 
most unmistakably (Plate XIX. fig. 1, 6b), I fearlessly ask 
the verdict of any Biologist familiar with microscopic structure, 
whether any more exact realization could be presented of the 
structure I had described in Calcarina,—allowance being of 
course made for the different scale of the tubulation of the 
“proper wall,” which is here jine “ nummuline”’ not coarse 
* rotaline.”’ 

There is another feature in the canal-system of this speci- 
men, which, by leading me to a more careful examination of 
its ordinary distribution, has brought into view what seems to 
me a new point of difference between the typical canal-system 
and mineral dendritic ramifications. It will be observed that 
the principal trunks are here in the middle of the calcareous 
layer, the ramifications extending from them towards each of 
its surfaces. This, of course, cannot be so clearly brought 
out in any plane section, as it can be in such decalcified spe- 
cimens as are represented in figs. 3,4; in which a set of canals 
are seen to originate from the ceiling of the chamber beneath 
them, and to converge like the roots of a tree into a stem, from 
which diverging branches are given off towards the floor of 
the chamber above. Now, in all dendritic ramifications I have 
seen (I do not presume to speak with confidence of things I 
have not seen), the branches go off from a main trunk which 
originates at once from the source of the infiltration, instead of 
being formed by the coalescence of roots*. I do not lay any 
stress on the Tene but this peculiar distribution of the 
canal-system is not without its significance, in regard to the 


* As I was accustomed to see dendrites made at a Pottery in Bristol 
forty years ago, I am not quite so ignorant in regard to them as Professors 
King and Rowney seem to suppose that I must be, from the fact that I 
am a Biologist and not a Mineralogist. The process was simply this :— 
The cylindrical “ biscuit” beer-cup (sold for a penny) having been dipped 


Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Kozoon canadense. 463 


mode in which it ministered to the deposition of the inter- 
mediate skeleton. 

The third of the additional probative facts I have now to 
adduce is the existence of a canal-system in the calcareous 
lamelle, anteriorly to the intrusion of any foreign mineral ; 
as is distinctly proved by the fact stated in my previous “ Re- 
marks”’ (p. 283), that the minuter part of the canalicular system 
is often not infiltrated with any foreign mineral at all. As I 
hold this fact to be of cardinal importance, and as I cannot see 
that it has been met, either by Professors King and Rowney, or 
by Mr. Carter, in their replies to my previous Remarks, I now 
present an exact representation (Pl. XIX. fig. 5) of the aspect of 
such a portion of the canalicular system—showing by its semi- 
opacity in one part the extent to which the serpentinous in- 
filtration has proceeded, and by its transparence in the rest 
that the canalization is not the result of any foreign infiltration 
whatever. These canals (as formerly stated, p. 283) are filled 
with calcite having the same crystalline axis as that of the 
matrix—just as is the reticular structure of fossilized skeletons 
of Crinoids, spines of Cidaris, &e. It would be just as logical 
to refuse to that reticulation the character of an organic 
structure, because it possesses (even in the recent state) a crys- 
talline arrangement, as to say that this canalicular system is 
not an evidence of the organic origin of the calcareous lamelle 
in which it presents itself. ‘ Is it possible,” said one of our 
most distinguished Naturalists to me a few days since, “ that 
it is seriously maintained that these canaliculi do not pre- 
exist ?”” As I know them to be contained in the section which 
I long since forwarded to Prof. Rowney, the only conceivable 
reason for the non-recognition of them, alike by the two Galway 
Professors and by Mr. Carter, is that they have not used the 
reduced light, which, through the extreme transparence of the 
minuter canaliculi, is necessary to bring them into clear view. 

I have thus shown :—(1) that the “ utter incompatibility ” 
asserted by my opponents to exist between the arrangement of 
the supposed “nummuline tubulation”’ of Hozoon and true 
Nummuline structure, so far from having any real existence, 
really furnishes an additional point of conformity ; and (2) that 
three most striking and complete points of conformity exist be- 


in its viscid “glaze,” and held in an inclined position, a brush dipped in 
a viscid pigment was brought into contact with it at the proper point ; 
and the pigment ran down into the glaze, first forming a stem, and then 
spreading out in an arborescent ramification. The success of the opera- 
tion depends on a very nice adjustment between the viscidities of the 
two liquids. 


464 Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Eozoon canadense. 


tween the structure of the best-preserved specimens of Lozoon, 
and that of the Nummulites whose tubulation I described in 
1849, and of the Calcarina whose tubulation and canal-system 
I described in 1860. And I leave it to the judgment of those 
who know the differences between Organic structure and any 
conceivable results of Physical or Chemical action, whether the 
appearances represented in Plate XIX., to the minute accuracy 
of which representation I pledge myself, are compatible with 
the doctrine that the Canadian Ophite is nothing more than a 
product of mineralization. 


That I have not troubled myself to reply to the reiterated 
arguments in favour of that doctrine, which have been 
advanced by Professors King and Rowney on the strength of 
the occurrence of undoubted results of mineralization in the 
Canadian Ophite, and of still more marked evidences of the 
same action in other Ophites, has been simply because these 
arguments appeared to me, as I thought they must also appear 
to others, entirely destitute of logical force. Every scientific 
Palzontologist I have ever been acquainted with has taken 
the dest preserved specimens, not the worst, as the basis of his 
reconstructions ; and if he should meet with distinct evidence 
of characteristic organic structure in even a very small frag- 
ment of a doubtful form, he would consider the organic origin 
of that form to be thereby substantiated, whatever might be 
the evidence of purely mineral arrangement which the greater 
part of his specimen may present,—since he would regard 
that arrangement as a probable result of subsequent minerali- 
zation, by which the original organic structure has been more 
or less obscured. If this is not to be our rule of interpretation, 
a large part of the Paleontological work of our time must be 
be thrown aside as worthless. If, for example, Professors 
King and Rowney were to begin their study of Nummulites 
by the examination of their most mineralized forms, they 
would deem themselves justified (according to their canons of 
interpretation) in denying the existence of the tubulation and 
canalization which I described (in 1849) in the N. levigata 
preserved almost unaltered in the London Clay of Bracklesham 
Bay. 

My own notions of Hozoze structure have been formed on the 
examination of the Canadian specimens selected by the ex- 
perienced discrimination of Sir William Logan, as those in 
which there was least appearance of nietamorphism; and 
having found in these what I regarded as unmistakable evi- 
dence of an organic structure conformable to the Foraminiferal 
type, I cannot regard it as any disproof of that conformity, 


Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Eozoon canadense. 465 


either to show that the true Eozoic structure has been fre- 
quently altered by mineral metamorphism, or to adduce the 
occurrence of Ophites more or less resembling the Hozoon of 
the Canadian Laurentians at various subsequent Geological 
epochs. ‘The existence of any number or variety of purely 


mineral Ophites would not disprove the organic origin of the - 


Canadian Hozoon—unless it could be shown that some wonder- 
ful process of mineralization is competent to construct not 
only its multiplied alternating lamelle of Calcite and Serpen- 
tine, the dendritic extensions of the latter into the former, 
and the “ acicular layer ”’ of decalcified specimens, but (1) the 
pre-existing canalization of the calcareous lamelle, (2) the 
unfilled nummuline tubulation of the proper wall of the 
chambers, and (3) the peculiar calcarine relation of the canali- 
zation and tubulation, here described and figured from speci- 
mens in the highest state of preservation, showing the least 
evidence of any mineral change. 

On the other hand, Professors King and Rowney began 
their studies of Eozoic structure upon the Galway Ophite—a 
rock which Sir Roderick Murchison described to me at the 
time as having been so much “tumbled about,” that he was 
not at all sure of its geological position, and which exhibits 
such obvious evidences of mineralization, with such an entire 
absence of any vestige of organic structure, that I should never 
for a moment have thought of crediting it with an organic 
origin, but for the general resemblance of its Serpentine-grains 
to those of the “ acervuline”’ portion of the Canadian Eozoon. 
They pronounced with the most positive certainty upon the 
Mineral origin of the Canadian Eozoon, before they had sub- 
jected transparent sections of it to any of that careful compari- 
son with similar sections of recent Foraminifera, which had 
been the basis of Dr. Dawson’s original determination, and of 
my own subsequent confirmation, of its organic structure. And 
while Prof. Rowney never laid claim to any knowledge of 
Micro-Paleontology, the accuracy of Prof. King’s information 
in this department of inquiry may be estimated by the fact, 
that when (about the same time) he made his first acquaint- 
ance with the Orbulina universa brought up in the ‘ Porcu- 
pine’ soundings off the West of Ireland, he forthwith described 
them as not improbably affording the explanation of the gra- 
nular concretionary structure of Oolites.—That I did not shrink 
(as is imputed to me in Profs. King and Rowney’s last com- 
munication) from meeting them in their own selected field, 
will appear from the following statement. 

When, about five years since, the Galway Professors pre- 
sented their Memoir on LHozoon to the Royal Irish Academy, 


466 Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Eozoon canadense. 


the Secretary of that body wrote to me, stating that its 
Members were desirous of forming their own judgment on the 
subject, and requesting that I would transmit specimens for 
their examination. I immediately replied, forwarding the two 
best duplicates I had to spare, with a request that after they 
had served their immediate purpose they might be presented 
to the Museum of Trinity College, Dublin; and I further 
offered to go over to Dublin and personally exhibit my own 
selected series of specimens (which I declined to part with out 
of my hands) if I could obtain a short leave of absence from 
my official duties. Not receiving any acknowledgment, either 
of my specimens or of my proposal, I wrote a second time to 
the Secretary, and again waited in vain fora reply. I then 
wrote to the President of the Academy, stating the purport of 
my previous communications to its Secretary ; but as he, too, 
deemed me unworthy of the honour of an answer, I thought 
it unadvisable to take any further action in so thankless a 
matter. 


As the readers of these ‘Annals’ have never had placed 
before them the general evidence in favour of the organic 
origin of Hozoon, adduced by Sir Wilham Logan and Dr. Daw- 
son when they first brought their discovery before the Geolo- 
gical Society nearly ten years ago, I venture to ask their con- 
sideration of the following brief summary of the facts of this 
remarkable case, and of the ¢nferences which they seem to me 
to justify. 

1. There occurs in the Lower Laurentians of Canada a 
stratum of “ Serpentine Limestone” or “ Ophite,” extending 
over several hundred square miles, and impressing the able 
Geological Surveyors of Canada with its resemblance to a 
Coral Reef. 

2. Most Geologists now accept it as a probability, that the 
formation of Limestones generally is due, either directly or 
secondarily, to Animal growth; and the evidence of this doc- 
trine is continually accumulating. The antecedent probability 
that such was the case with the Laurentian limestone, is in- 
creased by the circumstance that beds of Graphite (which 
every Mineralogist now recognizes as of Vegetable origin) 
occur in the same formation—that many specimens of the 
Limestone give forth when struck the overpowering smell of 
carburetted hydrogen, which is well known to be given off from 
many beds of Carboniferous Limestone whose organic origin 
is most distinct—and that so strong a musky odour was 
emitted from the specimen of which I sent slices to Prof. 
Rowney and Prof. Schultze, when it was being cut in Mr. 


—— 


i ae 


Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Eozoon canadense. 467 


Cuttell’s workshop, as to be almost unbearable.—These facts 
are not advanced as probative, but simply as affording confir- 
matory probabilities. 

3. The arrangement of the two components of the Canadian 
Ophite is most remarkable, and extremely significant of some 
process of progressive construction. In the ordinary type there 
is a regular alternation of lamelle of Serpentine and Calcite, 
sometimes to the number of fifty of each—the thickness of 
the Calcareous lamelle being greater below, and progressively 
diminishing above, whilst that of the Serpentinous presents a 
singular uniformity throughout. When minutely examined, 
the Calcareous lamelle present appearances strongly sugges- 
tive to the Micro-Paleontologist of an organic origin, their 
crystalline cleavage being common to them with almost every 
calcareous fossil. On the other hand, the Serpentinous lamellee 
are seen to be formed by the coalescence of spheroidal seg- 
ments having a general uniformity of size (see fig. 1, p. 281); 
while in the upper part of every complete typical specimen, 
the arrangement of these segments in continuous lamelle gives 
place to an irregular piling of them together, the intervening 
calcareous walls being very thin. 

4. Fixing our attention in the first instance on the Calcareous 
portion of this Ophite (fig. 2, p. 282), we recognize in it a 
general conformity to the Foraminiferal type,—the lamellated 
portion showing large “‘ chambers” formed by the coalescence 
of ‘“ chamberlets ;” whilst in the “acervuline” portion the 
chamberlets are isolated, still communicating with each other, 
however, by apertures through the calcareous septa resembling 
those of ordinary Foraminifera*.—This transition from a 
regular plan of growth to the “acervuline” mode is very 
common in Foraminifera, as must be known to every one 
who has studied my “ Introduction.” On the other hand, I 
have lately come into possession, through the kindness of M. 
Munier-Chalmas of the Sorbonne Museum, of a new fossil type 
of Foraminiferal structure belonging to the Orbiculine group, 
in which a partial coalescence (or subdivision) of chamberlets, 
like that of the lamellar portion of Hozoon, is very distinctly 
marked, so as to establish precisely the link of connexion 
which was wanting between the chambers of Peneroplis and 
the completely-divided chamberlets of Orbiculina. Thus, 
then, in the general arrangement of the Calcareous component 
of the Canadian Ophite, there is a marked conformity to the 


* Mr. Carter denies the existence of these passages, simply because he 
did not find them in the one transparent specimen he examined. He can 
verify the representation of it given in fig. 2, bb (p. 282), whenever it may 
please him to come and examine my specimens. 


468 Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Eozoon canadense. 


Foraminiferal type. And this conformity is equally shown 
when (as happens in certain localities) the Calcite is replaced 
by Dolomite. I have frequently met with veins or dykes of 
the latter mineral running through the ordinary calcareous 
lamella; and there is obviously nothing wonderful in such 
conversion of the Calcite into Dolomite, either locally or gene- 
rally, when Magnesia in solution was largely present. But 
the co-existence of the same structural arrangement with a dif- 
jJerent mineral composition, strongly indicates (as Sir William 
Logan pointed out) the origin of that structure to le in some- 
thing else than a mineralizing process. 

5. Turning now to the arrangement of the Serpentinous 
lamelle, and seeking for a ratéonale of their presence, we find 
it in the fact first pointed out by Prof. Khrenberg, then con- 
firmed by Prof. Bailey (who first showed it to be true of 
existing types), and verified by Prof. Rupert Jones, Mr. W. K. 
Parker, and myself, that the cavities of Horaminifera become 
occupied, without any process that can be likened to “ infiltra- 
tion”’ (since it takes place on the ordinary sea-bottom), by 
Glaucite or other silicates ; so that when their calcareous shells 
are dissolved away by dilute acid, perfect internal casts of 
their chambers are left. That this is the origin of the green- 
sands which occur in various Geological formations, from the 
Silurian upwards, is the well-known doctrine of Prof. Ehren- 
berg, which is based on the striking conformity between the 
forms of the particles of these sands and the chambers of 
known Foraminifera. And by that fundamental rule of Geo- 
logical interpretation, which requires us to explain every thing 
that we can so explain by reference to changes now going on, 
I hold myself fully justified in contending that the same pro- 
cess—whatever may be its nature—which is filling the cavities 
of existing Foraminifera with siliceous compounds, and which 
can be traced backwards as far as the Silurian epoch, may 
fairly be accepted as the rationale of the presence of the 
regular lamelle and acervuline segments of Serpentine in the 
Canadian Ophite, its caleareous interstructure having a close 
conformity to the Foraminiferal type. And here, again, the 
probability is strengthened by the fact that the same structure 
shows itself, alike in recent and fossil Foraminifera, with 
different minerals. My own recent specimens show it with at 
least two silicates, a green and an ochreous; and so, as Sir 
William Logan tells us, the chambers of Hozoon may be occu- 
pied with pyroxene or loganite, instead of with serpentine— 
the alternation of calcareous with siliceous lamellae, however, 
being always preserved. 

6. The presence of Serpentine, however, is not limited to 


Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Eozoon canadense. 469 


the lamelle ; for it penetrates the Calcareous layers, exactly 
in the same manner that the Silicates which occupy the 
chamber-cavities of existing Foraminifera penetrate the walls 
of those cavities, extending into the canal-system of their 
“intermediate skeleton,” and even filling the minute tubuli of 
their “ proper walls,”—so as, when the calcareous skeleton 
has been dissolved away, to afford the most perfect models, 
not only of the sarcodic segments which occupied the chambers, 
but also of their extensions into the canal-system, and even of 
their minute pseudopodial threads. Now to all this I can 
show the most precise parallel in the Canadian Hozoon—even 
to those departures from the ordinary parallelism of the tubules, 
which I described in certain varieties of Operculina (Phil. 
Trans. 1859, p. 24). And I am fully justified, therefore, by 
the accepted rules of Paleontological interpretation, in assert- 
ing that whatever exercise of “ Nature’s cunning”’ dees this 
work on our present sea-bottom, was adequate to do it in the 
Laurentian period. The explanation which I suggested, that 
it is due to a process of chemical “ substitution” (the progres- 
sive decomposition of the sarcode-body producing a precipita- 
tion of silicates from sea-water, which replace the sarcode, 
particle by particle), however “ unscientific’ in the eyes of 
Professors King and Rowney, has approved itself to Chemical 
and Paleontological authorities of considerably higher stand- 
ing than the Galway Professors, as the only one by which 
the silicification of fossil wood, and the silicification of the 
animal substance of recent Corals (described by Dr. Duncan as 
even now going on), can be accounted for. On the other 
hand, Professors King and Rowney, to whom I sent, about 
three years ago, an exquisite little internal cast (in glauco- 
nite ?) of Polystomella, from Captain Spratt’s dredgings in the 
/Egean, with a request that they would give me their opinion 
of the process by which it was produced, replied that they 
considered it to be composed of mud; and though I have re- 
cently invited them to reconsider this opinion, they have not 
in any way qualified it. Now let these casts, for the sake of 
argument, be pie ay to have been formed by the infiltration 
of mud, then a like infiltration would equally account for the 
production of the deposit in the chambers, canal-system, and 
nummuline tubules of Hozoon, which is precisely paralleled by 
that of many fossil and existing Foraminifera in regard to its 
mineral condition—as my specimens show. 


My contention is, therefore, that the hypothesis of the Fora- 
miniferal origin of Eozoon canadense entirely accords with 
the features alike of the general and of the minute structure of 


470 Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Eozoon canadense. 


the best-preserved specimens of this body, and that it is the 
only hypothesis which fits all the facts of the case; whilst the 
hypothesis of subsequent metamorphic change, which has every 
probability to recommend it, fully accounts for all the appear- 
ances on which the Anti-Hozoonists rely as evidence of its 
Mineral origin, which, in the face of the new evidence I have 
now adduced, is to my own mind utterly “ unthinkable.” I 
do not attempt, however, by dint of hammering-in, to impose 
my own (doubtless) prejudiced conclusion upon the minds of 
others, but have endeavoured to place before them the facts 
of the case in such a form as may help them to form their 
own judgment in regard to them. 

Until these facts shall have been disproved by the examina- 
tion of the specimens which I am ready to submit to any or 
all of my opponents, I must claim to withdraw from a con- 
troversy which cannot be carried further to any advantage 
without a “ comparison of actual specimens.” For whilst I 
admit to the full every evidence of Mineralization adduced by 
Professors King and Rowney, neither they nor Mr. Carter 
admit the evidence of Organic structure which they have not 
seen, but which I have expressed my willingness to place 
before them, with the parallelisms presented by recent Fora- 
minifera. 

I am endeayouring to engage my Canadian associates in the 
preparation of a joint Monograph on Hozoon canadense, to be 
offered to the Paleontographical Society—with a request that 
before determining either to accept or to decline it, the Coun- 
cil will appoint a Committee of “ experts,” qualified by their 
knowledge of Micro-Paleontology and Micro-Mineralogy to 
judge whether what we hold to be Organic structure can be 
possibly regarded as the product of any kind of Physical or 
Chemical action. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIX. 


Fig. 1. Vertical Section of a portion of one of the calcareous lamellee of 
Eozoon canadense, showing the tubular “ nummuline layer ”’ a a, 
the “intermediate skeleton ” ¢c, and the relations of the origins 
of the canals, b 6, to the tubuli of the nummuline layer, the 
flexures of which are seen along the line a’ a’: 100 diameters. 

Fig. 2. Vertical Section of a portion of the “nummuline layer” a a, 
under a higher magnifying-power, showing its distinct tubula- 
tion, with sharp flexures along the line a’ a’: 250 diameters. 

Figs. 3, 4. Internal Casts of Canal-system, showing what appears to be 
its typical mode of distribution: 35 and 15 diameters. 

Fig. 5, Transparent Section of a portion of the Canal-system, showing an 
only partial filling of the canals: 100 diameters. 


— 


Miscellaneous. 471 
MISCELLANEOUS. 


Observations on the Spermatophores of the Decapod Crustacea. 
By M. Broccut. 


In 1842 M. Milne-Edwards published, in the ‘Annales des Sciences 
Naturelles’ (2° série, tome xviii. p. 331), a memoir on the singular 
bodies met with in the Cephalopoda, and noticed by Cuvier under the 
name of machines or animalcules de Needham. He demonstrated 
the true nature of these bodies, showing that they were peculiar re- 
ceptacles destined to contain the seminal fluid, and he gave them the 
name of spermatophores. 

These spermatophores have since been indicated in several Inver- 
tebrata. They have been met with, Ist, in insects, M. Lespés having 
described this mode of fecundation in the cricket; 2nd, in certain 
worms, such as Clepsine and Nephelis ; and, 3rd, in some of thelower 
Crustacea, spermatophores having been seen and figured by Jurine 
and Miiller in Cyclops Castor (Diaptomus Castor). However, the true 
nature of these bodies was only determined by M. von Siebold. Si- 
milar receptacles have been observed in others of the lower Crustacea ; 
but, as far as I know, they have never been indicated among the 
Decapods. 

Now, in investigating the anatomy of some Macrura, I have found 
very distinct tubes in the interior of the penis of the males. The 
existence of these seemed to be in relation with the state of func- 
tional activity of the male genital organs, and to coincide solely with 
the period of fecundation. 

I now believe that I am justified in regarding these tubes as true 
spermatophores. In fact, in dissecting some male lobsters, I have 
lately found, in the interior of the penis in these animals, a perfectly 
distinct tube capable of isolation from the walls of the organ. This 
tube was situated in the subterminal part of the penis and was of a 
yellowish-white colour. On placing it under the microscope I di- 
stinguished in it clearly a structureless envelope and contents formed 
by spermatic corpuscles. The latter were very distinct, perfectly 
recognizable, and in all respects conformable to the figures given by M. 
Kolhker. Here, therefore, we have in a Decapod a tube containing 
spermatic corpuscles—that is to say, a true spermatophore. 

In his ‘Lecons sur l’ Anatomie et la Physiologie comparée,’ M. Milne- 
Edwards noticed the existence of a rolled-up tube in the penis of 
the spiny lobster (Palinurus). “ In the spiny lobster,” he says (tome 
ix, p. 255), “‘ the subterminal portion of the ejaculatory canal is much 
dilated, and contains in its interior a tube very much twisted upon 
itself.” Nevertheless the learned Professor does not pronounce an 
opinion as to the nature of this tube. I may add that M. Alphonse 
Milne-Edwards was unable to detect the presence of spermatic cor- 
puscles in it. It seems to me that this tube is very probably of the 
same nature as that observed in the lobster. I must remark also 
that M. Milne-Edwards had, as it were, foreseen the existence of 
spermatophores in the higher Crustacea. Thus, in the work which 
I have already quoted (tome ix. p. 258), he says :—‘ While investi- 
gating the Crustacea of the coast of Brittany in 1827, I found a 


472 Miscellaneous. 


female Cancer pagurus which had copulated a little while before, and 
bore, buried in each of its copulatory pouches, a white, cylindrical, 
soft body, which appeared to me to be the terminal portion of the mem- 
branous penis of the male separated from the rest of the sexual 
organs of the latter. I regret that I have not had the opportunity of 
repeating this observation, since my attention has been directed to the 
spermatophores ; for it is possible that the sort of stopper in question 
left in the vulva may have been a body of that nature rather than a 
fragment of a penis.” 

In dissecting a female Maia sqyuinado, I found in its copulatory 
pouches bodies analogous to those indicated by M. Milne-Edwards. 
The histological examination of these bodies proved that they could 
not be regarded as fragments of a penis. In fact they showed no 
trace of organized tissues. It is therefore possible that they must 
be regarded as remains of the spermatophores of the male. However, 
as I have not hitherto had the opportunity of observing spermato- 
phores in the Brachyurous Crustacea, I shall not venture to speak 
decidedly upon this point.—Comptes Rendus, March 23, 1874, 
p. 850. 


On the Felis euptilura from Shanghai, in the British Museum. 
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. 


The British Museum has received from Mr. Webb, through John 
Russell Reeves, Esq., a wild cat from Shanghai. It has the colour 
and much of the spotting of the Felis rubiginosa from Western India ; 
but it is quite different from that long-headed, long-tailed cat in being 
a short-headed, short-tailed animal, and in the short skull having the 
incomplete orbits of the true cats, instead of being long and with the 
complete orbits of Viverriceps rubiginosa. 

This cat has all the characters of the smaller spotted Asiatic cats 
with short spotted tails, on which I published a paper in the ‘ Annals’ 
for January 1874 (xiil. p. 55). 

I am inclined to regard it as a perfect specimen of the Felis eupti- 
lura, described by Mr. Elliot and figured by Mr. Wolf, P. Z. 8. 1871, 
p- 761, t. Ixxvi., from a very bad skin, now in the British Museum, 
supposed to have come from Siberia. 

The possession of a perfect skin and skull of this confirms it as 
a distinct species. The specimen in the Museum chiefly differs 
from Mr. Wollt’s figure in the streaks on the crown and nape not 
being quite so wide, and in the tail being rather longer and more 
cylindrical, which is easily explained when we consider the very bad 
state in which the skin figured by Mr. Wolf was. 

The skull has very large, prominent, swollen, compressed bullee to 
the ears, and a large deep subcireular cavity at the inner side of the 
hinder part of the flesh-tooth and the small tubercular grinder. 


On the Amount of Pressure in the Sap of Plants. 
By Prof. W. 8. Crarxe, of Amherst. 


It only remains to state in a few words the results obtained by 
the application of mercurial gauges to the sugar-maple, the black 
birch, and the grape-vine. Observations were made on one or more 


Miscellaneous. 473 


gauges several times daily, and occasionally every hour of the day 
and night, from the Ist of April to the 20th of July. 

A gauge was attached to a sugar-maple, March 31st, which was 
three days after the maximum flow of sap for this species, so that 
further observations are required earlier in the season to complete 
the record and determine with certainty the maximum pressure 
which it exhibits in the spring. Of the record made, the follow- 
ing facts are specially interesting: first the mercury was subject to 
constant and singular oscillations, standing usually in the morning 
below zero, so that there was indicated a powerful suction into the 
tree, and rising rapidly with the sun until the outward pressure 
was sufficient to sustain a column of water many feet in height. 
Thus at 7 a.m., April 21st, there was a suction into the tree suf- 
ficient to raise a column of water 25:90 feet. As soon as the 
morning sun began to shine en the tree the mercury suddenly 
began to rise, so that at 9.15 a.m. the pressure outward was enough 
to sustain a column of water 18°47 feet high, a change represented 
by more than 44 feet of water. On the morning of April 22nd the 
change was still greater, requiring for its representation 47-42 feet 
of water. These extraordinary fluctuations were not attended by 
any peculiar state of the weather, and happened twelve days before 
there were any indications of growth to be detected in the buds. 
These observations are believed to be quite new, and as yet in- 
explicable, but will receive further attention another spring. 

The maximum pressure of the sap for the season was observed 
at 10 a.t., April 11th, and was equal to sustaining a column of 
water 31-73 feet high. This was an excellent sap day, considering 
the lateness of the season. ‘There was noticed a general corre- 
spondence between the flow of sap in other maples and the pressure 
on the gauge. 

After April 29th the mercury remained constantly below zero, 
day and night. During the month of May there was a uniform 
suction equal to about 8 feet of water; and the unaccountable 
feature of this fact is, that, though apparently produced by exhala- 
tion from the expanding leaves, it remained the same, day and 
night, for several weeks. In June the suction gradually lessened, 
and finally disappeared, the mercury standing steadily at zero. 

On the 20th of April two gauges were attached to a large black 
birch—one at the ground, and the other 30 feet higher. The next 
morning at six o’clock the lower gauge indicated the astonishing 
pressure of 56°65 feet of water, and the upper one of 26-74 fect. 
The difference between the indications of the two gauges was 
thus 29-91 feet, while the actual distance between them was 
30°20 feet, so that it corresponded almost exactly as if they were 
connected by a tube. In order to learn whether the same principle 
would prevail if the upper gauge was moved, it was raised 12 feet 
higher. The same correspondence continued through nearly all the 
observations of the season, notwithstanding the gauges were sepa- 
rated by 42°20 feet of close-grained birch-wood. 

At 12.30 p.m., April 21st, a hole was bored into the tree on the 
side opposite to the lower gauge, and at the same level. Both 


Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. xu. 34 


474. Miscellaneous. 


gauges at once began to show diminished pressure, while sap issued 
freely from the orifice. In fifteen minutes, one pound of sap haying 
escaped, it was found that both gauges had fallen equal to 19-27 teet 
of water. Upon elosing the hole the gauges rose in ten minutes to 
their previous level, showing that the rootlets had reabsorbed in 
that brief period the sap which had escaped from the tree, not- 
withstanding the enormous pressure already existing. 

A stopcoek haying been inserted into the hole opposite the lower 
gauge, it was found that the communication between it and the 
two gauges was almost instantaneous, which appears to prove that 
the tree was entirely filled with sap, exerting its pressure in all 
directions as freely as if standing in a eylindrical vessel more than 
60 feet in height, as indicated by the lower gauge. The sap-pressure 
continued to increase until, on the 11th day of May, it represented 
a column of water 84-77 feet in height, which is believed to be the 
highest pressure of vegetable sap ever recorded. 

The buds of the birch now began to expand, the pressure of the 
sap to diminish, and the oscillations of the mereury to become more 
decided and regular than before. The upper gauge ceased to vary 
May 14th, remaining stationary at zero. The lower one declined 
slowly and varied greatly, but did not fall below zero until May 18th. 
On May 27th it also became stationary at zero. The suction mani- 
fested by the birch was very little, never exceeding 9 feet of water, 
and continued only for a few days. 

To determine, if possible, whether any other force than the vital 
action of the roots was necessary to produee the extraordinary 
phenomena described, a gauge was attached to the root of a black 
birch tree, as follows. The tree stood in moist ground at the foot 
of the south slope of a ravine, in such a situation that the earth 
around it was shaded by the overhanging bank from the sun; a 
root was then followed from the trunk to the distance of 10 feet, 
where it was carefully cut off 1 foot below the surface, and a piece 
removed from between the cut and the tree; the end of the root 
thus entirely detached from the tree, and lying in a horizontal 
position at the depth of 1 foot, in the cold damp earth, unreached 
by the sunshine, and for the most part unaffected by the temperature 
of the atmosphere, measured about 1 inch in diameter: to this was 
carefully adjusted a mercurial gauge, April 26th. The pressure at 
once became evident, and rose constantly with very slight fluctua- 
tions, until at noon on the 30th of April it had attained the 
unequalled height of 85°80 feet of water. This wonderful result 
showed that the absorbing-power of living birch-rootlets, without 
the aid of any of the numerous helps imposed upon them by 
ingenious philosophers, such as exhalation, eapillarity, oscillation, 
dilatation, contraction, &c., was quite sufficient to account for the 
most essential of the curious phenomena connected with the cireu- 
lation of sap. Unfortunately, in an attempt to increase the capacity 
of the gauge, the bark of the root was injured, and this most in- 
teresting experiment terminated. There can be little doubt that 
future trials, carefully conducted with suitable apparatus, will achieve 
even more marvellous results. 


Miscellaneous. 475 


The original experiment of applying a mercurial gauge to the 
grape-vine, first tried by the Rev. Stephen Hales, of England, one 
hundred and fifty years ago, was repeated May 9th, and a pressure 
of 49°52 feet of water obtained May 24th. This is 64 feet higher 
than was observed by Hales. The peculiar features of the pressure 
of the vine-sap are :—its lateness in the season; its apparent inde- 
pendence of the weather; its uniform and moderate rise, day and 
night, to its maximum; its very gradual decline to zero without 
any marked oscillations ; and its constant and almost unvarying 
suction of from 4-5 to 6-5 feet of water, manifested from June 20th 
to July 20th, when the observations ceased.—/rom the Eleventh 
Annual Rzport of the Massachusetts Agricultural College, January 
1874. 


The Bogota Cat (Felis pardinoides, Gray). 
By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c. 


In the ‘ Annals’ for 1874, xiii. p. 51, I gave the reasons for differing 
from Mr. Elliot’s opinion that the cat I named Felis pardinoides 
in the British Museum, received from the Zoological Society as 
coming from India, was the same as Felis Geoffroyi. At the same 
time I observed, ‘“‘ the Indian habitat has not been confirmed ; and 
the species has a very South-American aspect.” 

The British Museum has received, from Mr. Edward Gerrard, a cat 
from Bogota that I have no doubt is the same species as the typical 
specimen of Felis pardinoides ; but it differs from it in being a nearly 
adult specimen, as is proved by the examination of the skull; and 
it has a more fulvous tint, and the fur is softer; but this may only 
depend upon the age and season in which it was killed. 

This species of South-American spotted cat has the small head and 
much the character of Felis macroura; but the tail is rather taper- 
ing and not so long; instead of having the few broad black rings of 
that species, it has a larger number of narrow black rings, which 
are interrupted on the lower side, and these rings on the hinder 
half of the tail are broader and more distinct than those of the basal 
half. The spots on the body are much more numerous ; and those 
on the hinder parts of the sides are pale, surrounded behind with 
an imperfect ring of small black spots. 


The Habitat of Pelargopsis gigantea. 


To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 

21 Opernring, 4. Stock, 
Vienna, 23/5/74. 

Dear Strs,—In the note on the “ Habitat of Pelargopsis gigantea” 
in your Journal (May 1874), line 6 of the text, is a misprint in the 
fifth word. It must be “ Joldé,” and not “ Told.” 

You will oblige me by rectifying this in your next number, as this 
misprint is disagreeable in a note wherein I correct the statement of 
another. Yours very truly, 

A. B. Meynn. 
34* 


Kk 
‘ 
i} 


4 
i 


6 


INDEX to VOL. XIII. 


ACALLES, new species of, 415. 

Acaring, observations on some, 74. 

Acaulis primarius, observations on, 
135. 

Acréea, new species of, 381. 

Actinia, on the nervous system of, 
254. 

Adelium, new species of, 110. 

Aiturina, observations on the genus, 
15. 

Agamura, characters of the new 
genus, 455, 

Anchomenus, new species of, 240. 

Animals marine, on the boring of, 344. 

Annelid, on some remarkable ege- 
sacs on an, 260. 

Annelides, contributions to the study 
of the errant, of the older palzeozoic 
rocks, 166; of the Gulf of St. 
Lawrence, on the, 261; new, 292. 

Amarygmus, new species of, 112. 

Ammonites, on the zoological rela- 
tions of the Spirule to the, 183. 

Apion, new species of, 387. 

Aquila maculata, observationson, 378. 

Araneidea, on certain peculiarities in 
the structure and functions of the, 
340. 

Arcturus, new species of, 291. 

Aricia, new species of, 296. 

Artystona, description of the new 
genus, 104. 

Ascidians, on the relationship of the 
Sponges to the, 433. 

Astathmetus, description of the new 
genus, 25. 

Asterophyllites, on the organization 
of the, 60. 

Astroides, on the embryology and 
histology of the, 42. 

Auletes, new species of, 388. 

Bacteria, on the development of, in 
organic infusions, 168. 

Balena Hectori, on the bladebone 
of, 56. 

nodosa, note on, 186. 

Balenoptera Huttoni, on the skeleton 
of, 448. 

Barbus, new species of, 231. 

Barker, A. E., on Max Schultze’s 
latest views of the nature of Eozoon 
canadense, 379. 

Bates, F., on new genera and species 


of Heteromera, with a revision of 
the genus Hypaulax, 16, 102. 

Bates, H. W., on the geodephagous 
Coleoptera of New Zealand, 233, 
270. 

Beaumont, E. B., on high-power de- 
finition, 177. 

Bees, on the sterile eggs of, 65. 

Bembidium, new species of, 275. 

Birds, on the parasitic mites of, 74; 
on the existence of certain relations 
between the mode of coloration of, 
and their geographical distribution, 
180; new, 123, 137, 160, 375, 448. 

Blackwall, J., on certain peculiarities 
in the structure and functions of 
the Araneidea, 340. 

Blanford, W.T., on new Lizards from 
Persia and Baluchistan, 453. 

Books, new :—Scott’s Mammalia, re- 
cent and extinct, 58; Van Beneden 
and Gervais’s Ostéographie des Cé- 
tacés, vivants et fossiles, 60; Belt’s 
Naturalist in Nicaragua, 246 ; 
Thomas’s Acrididze of North Ame- 
rica, 322. 

Bos pumilus, observations on, 159, 
258. 

Brady, G.S., on the Ostracoda of the 
Scilly Islands, and on the anatomy 
of Darwinella Stevensoni, 114. 

Brady, H. B., on a true Carboniferous 
Nummulite, 222. 

Brocchi, M., on the spermatophores 
of the Decapod Crustacea, 471. 
Brooke, Sir V., on the Dwarf Buffalo 

of Pennant, 159. 

Bunopus, characters of the new genus, 
454, 

Butterflies, new, 380. 

Callignathus, observations on the 
genus, 182. 

Callismilax, description of the new 
genus, 105. 

Calycella producta, note on, 134; 
new species of, 149. 

Carcinus mzenas, on the geographical 
distribution of, 405. 

Carinopora, description of the new 
genus, 81. 

Carpenter, P. P., on the generic affi- 
nities of the New-England Chitons, 
119. 


— 


. - . nama et OT Bite 
otc eae ia tr el a een 


INDEX. 477 


Carpenter, Dr. W. B., on the struc- 
ture of Eozoon canadense, 277, 456. 

Carter, H. J., on the structure called 
Eozoon canadense, 189, 376; on the 
spongozoa of Halisarca Dujardinii, 
315; on Halisarca lobularis, and on 
the relationship of the Sponges to 
the Ascidians, 433. 
Centris, revision of the genus, 357. 
Cephalopoda, on the development of 
the phragmostracum of the, 183. 
Ceramodactylus, characters of the 
new genus, 454. 

Cervus latifrons, description of, 1. 

Cetacea of the North Sea and Baltic, 
on the, 405. 

Cheetetes tumidus, observations on, 
194. 

Chaus caudatus, note on, 188. 

Chitons, on the generic affinities of 
the New-England, 119. 

Chrysophrys, new species of, 155. 

Cicindela, new species of, 234. 

Clarke, Prof. W.8., on the amount 
of pressure in the sap of plants, 472. 

Claus, C., on the sterile eggs of bees, 
65. 


Coassus peruvianus, note on, 331. 

Ccelenterata of the second North- 
German polar voyage, 196. 

Coleoptera, on the geodephagous, of 
New Zealand, 235, 270. 

Collett, R., on two new species of 
Gobius, 446. 

Cope, Prof. E. D., on the succession 
of life in North America, 326; on 
some extinct types of horned Peris- 
sodactyles, 405. 

Corals, on a new genus of palzeozoic, 
333. 

Crustacea, on new parasitic, 407; on 
the spermatophores of the Deca- 
pod, 471. 

Cryptopora, description of the new 
genus, 77. 

Curculionide, on Australian, 385, 
412. 

Cuttlefishes, on the gigantic, of New- 
foundland, 67, 255. 

Cyamus, new species of, 407. 

Cytherura, new species of, 116. 

Dall, W. H., on new parasitic Crus- 
tacea, 407. 

Darwinella Stevensoni, on the ana- 
tomy of, 117. 

Deer, on a new species of, from the 
Norfolk forest-bed, 1. 


Dermatoryctes, observations on the 
genus, 74 

Dicrochile, new species of, 237. 

Dionza muscipula, on the electrical 
phenomena which accompany irri- 
tation of the leaf of, 178. 

Pee new species of, 295, 

Diphasia, new species of, 129. 

Diploglossus, new species of, 301. 

Drassicus, new species of, 414. 

Dresser, H. E., on the small spotted 
eagle of Northern Germany, 373. 

Duncan, Dr. M., on the nervous 
system of Actinia, 254. 

Duncanella, description of the new 
genus, 335. 

Ehlers, Dr. E., on the parasitic mites 
of birds, 74; on new Annulata, 
292. 

Elliot, D. G., on a new species of 
humming-bird, 375. 

Embaphiodes, characters of the new 
genus, 419. 

Empira, characters of the genus, 386. 

Endomycici, on the, 185. 

Engraulis, new species of, 158. 

Entomostraca, contributions to the 
study of the, 114. 

Kozoon canadense, on the nature of, 
189, 277, 824, 376, 379, 390, 456. 
Epicharis, revision of the genus, 318. 

Epitola, new species of, 382. 

Equine mammals from the Tertiary 
formation, on new, 397. 

Eriocnemis, new species of, 375. 

Eteone, new species of, 294, 

Etheridge, R., jun., on Chetetes 
tumidus, 194, 

Euglossa, observations on the genus, 
443. 

Eulalia, new species of, 294. 

Eulema, on the genus, 440. 

Euoropis, characters of the genus, 418. 

Euplectella aspergillum, on the struc- 
ture of the skeleton of, 44. 

Eupolynoé, new species of, 264. 

Euthenarus, characters of the new 
genus, 272. 

Fauna of New Zealand, on the geo- 
graphical relations of the, 25, 85; 
marine, of St. Andrews, 140, 204, 
302, 342, 420. 

Felis, on the Asiatic species of, 52. 

colocolo, observations on, 259. 

guigna, notes on, 49. 

euptilura, note on, 472. 

—— pardinoides, note on, 475, 


478 INDEX. 


Fermentation, on the theory of the 
progress of, 161. 

Fishes from considerable depths in 
the North Atlantic, 138; new 
from China, 154; from Morocco, 
230; from Norway, 446. 

Flower, W. H., on Homalodotherium 
Cunninghami, 65. 

Furcifer, note on, 331. 

Gill,Dr. T., on the genera Tremarctos 
and Aflurina, 15; on the number 
of classes of Vertebrates and their 
mutual relations, 71. 

Glaucopela, characters of the genus, 
385. 

Gobius, new species of, 446. 

Godwin-Austen, Major H. H., on a 
new Sibia from Bengal, 160. 

Gorham, Rev. H. 8., on the Endo- 
mycici, 185. 

Gould, J., on Lamprotreron porphy- 
rostictus, 137. 

Gray, Dr. J. E., on Pardalina War- 
wickii, Felis guigna, and I’. Geoff- 
royi, 49; on the smaller spotted 
Cats of Asia and its islands, 52; 
on the blade-bones of Baleena Hec- 
tori and Megaptera novee-zelan- 
dize, 56; on Callignathus and Kogia 
Floweri, 182; on the Bermuda 
Hump-backed Whale, 186; on the 
habitat of Labaria hemispheerica, 
188; on the Steppe-cat of Bokhara, 
7b. ; on Bos pumilus, 258 ; on Felis 
colocolo, 259; on the arrangement 
of Sponges, 284 ; on Physalus ant- 
arcticus, 316, 448; on the skulls 
of two undescribed species of Sea- 
lions, 825; on Xenelaphus, Furci- 
fer, and Coassus peruyianus, 331 ; 
on the young Asiatic Tapir, 400 ; 
on the Cetacea of the North Sea and 
the Baltic, 405; on Felis euptilura, 
472; on Felis pardinoides, 475. 

Grymea, new species of, 297. 

Gunther, Dr. A., on Fishes obtained 
at considerable depths in the North 
Atlantic, 138; on Fishes from 
China, 154; on Fishes from Mo- 
rocco, 230. 

Gymnodactylus, new species of, 453. 

Halecium, new species of, 131, 150. 

Halichondria, new British species of, 
144. 

Halisarea Dujardinii, on the spongo- 
zoa of, 315. 

lobularis, observations on, 433. 


Haptoderus, new species of, 244. 

Harvey, M., on gigantic cuttlefishes 
in Newfoundland, 67. 

Heteromera, new genera and species 
of, 16, 102. 

Heteropyxis, new species of, 129. 

Heterospio, new species of, 296. 

Hewitson, W. C., on butterflies taken 
on the march to Coomassie, 389. 

Higgin, E., on the skeleton of Eu- 
plectella aspergillum, 44. 

Hincks, Rev. T., on Norwegian Hy- 
droida, 125; on deep-water Hy- 
droida from Iceland, 146. 

Holcaspis, new species of, 243. 

Homalodotherium Cunninghami, 
description of, 65. 

Hutton, Capt. F. W., on the geogra- 
phical relations of the New-Zealand 
fauna, 25, 85. 

Hydrodendron, characters of the 
genus, 132. 

Hydoida, on Norwegian, 125; on 
deep-water, from Iceland, 146. 

Hypaulax, revision of the genus, 16, 

Inaliodes, new species of, 414. 

Insects, on the amount of substance- 
waste undergone by, 186. 

Tphiclides Ajax, remarks on, 186. 

Johnson, R., on a new species of deer 
from the Norfolk forest-bed, 1. 

Karsten, Dr. H., on the theory of the 
process of fermentation, 161. 

King, Prof., on Eozoon, 390. 

Kogia Floweri, note on, 182. 

Labaria hemispheerica, on the habi- 
tat of, 66, 188. 

Laboulbeniz, on the mode of occur- 
rence and development of the, 76. 

Lacaze-Duthiers, H. de, on the de- 
velopment of the Polypes and of 
their polypary, 39. 

Lafoéa fruticosa, observations on, 
152 ; new species of, 148. 

Lafoéina tenuis, observations on, 134. 

Lamprotreron, new species of, 137. 

Lankester, EK. R., on the development 
of Bacteria in organic infusions, 
168. 

Leanira, new species of, 292. 

Lecanomerus, new species of, 271. 

Life, on the succession of, in North 
America, 326. 

Lindahl, J., on some specimens of 
of Umbellula from Greenland, 258. 

Lixus, new species of, 384. 

Lizards, new, 453. 


a 


INDEX. 


M‘Coy, Prof. F., on a new species of 
Parascyllium, 15. 

M‘Intosh, Dr. W. C., on the Inverte- 
brate marine fauna and fishes of 
St. Andrews, 140, 204, 302, 342, 
420; on the Annelida of the Gulf 
of St. Lawrence, 261. 

Malmgrenia, new species of, 263. 

Marratt, F. P., on new species of 
shells, 70. 

Marsh, Prof. O. C., on new equine 
mammals from the tertiary forma- 
tion, 397. 

Megapodius, new species of, 448. 

Megaptera novee-zelandiz, on the 
blade-bone of, 57. 

americana, note on, 186. 

Meyer, Dr. A. B., on the habitat of 
Psetalia globulosa and Labaria he- 
mispheerica, 66; on the habitat of 
Pelargopsis gigantea, 401, 475. 

Microscopy, hints for, 439. 

Milne-Edwards, A., on certain rela- 
tions between the mode of colora- 
tion of birds and their geographical 
distribution, 180. 

Mobius, C., on the Mollusca, Vermes, 
and Coelenterata of the second 
North-German polar voyage, 196; 
on some remarkable egg-sacs on an 
Annelid, 260, 

Mocoa, new species of, 298. 

Mollusca of the second North-German 
polar voyage, on the, 196. 

Monacanthus, new species of, 158. 

Moore, T. J., on the skeleton of Eu- 
plectella aspergillum, 44. 

Muller, Dr. F., on the natural history 
of the Termites, 402. 

Munier-Chalmas, M., on the deve- 
lopment of the phragmostracum of 
the Cephalopoda, and on the zoolo- 
gical relations of the Ammonites 
to the Spirule, 183. 

Myealesis, new species of, 381. 

Myriothela phrygia, observations on, 
136. 

Nassa, new species of, 70. 

Nemerteans on land-, from the Ber- 
mudas, 409. 

Nemidia, new species of, 265. 

Nephthys, new species of, 293. ; 

Nicholson, Prof. H. A., on the affini- 
ties of the genus Stromatopora, 
with descriptions of new species, 
4; on two new genera and species 
of Polyzoa, 77; on the Errant An- 


479 


nelides of the older palesozoic rocks, 
166; on Duncanella, 333. 

Nummulina, new species of, 225. 

Nummulite, on a carboniferous, 222. 

Ophiodes, new species of, 130. 

Ophienamas characters of the genus, 
131. 

O’Shaughnessy, A. W. E., on new 
species of Scincide, 298. 

Ostracoda of the Scilly Islands, on 
the, 114, 

Otaria, on the skulls of two unde- 
scribed species of, 325. 

Paradoxostoma, new species of, 117. 

Parascyllium, new species of, 15. 

Pardalina Warwickil, notes on, 49. 

Parker, W. K., on the structure and 
development of the skull in the 
pig, 249. 

Pascoe, F. P., on Australian Curcu- 
lionidze, 383, 412. 

Pelargopsis gigantea, on the habitat 
of 401, 475. 

Pentila, new species of, 382. 

Perissodactyles, on some extinct types 
of horned, 405. 

Petosiris, new species of, 415. 

Peyritsch, Dr. J., on the Laboul- 
beniz, 76. 

Pheeodica, characters of the genus, 
385. 

Physalus antarcticus, on, 516, 448. 

Piggott, Dr. R., on high-power de- 
tinition, 177. 

Plants, on the organization of the 
fossil, of the Coal-measures, 60; 
on the amount of pressure in the 
sap of, 472. 

Platynus, new species of, 289. 

Pode, Prof. C. C., on the develop- 
ment of Bacteria in organic infu- 
sions, 168, 

Podura-scale, on the structure of the, 
Vides 

Polynoé, new species of, 267. 

Polypes, on the development of the, 
and their polypary, 39. 

Polyzoa, on two new genera and spe- 
cies of, 77; on a new genus of 
carboniferous, 335. 

Poropterus, new species of, 412. 

Praxilla, new species of, 297. 

Pristurus, new species of, 454. 

Psetalia globulosa, on the habitat of, 
66. 

Psydestis, characters of the new ge- 
nus, 412. 


480 


Raja, new species of, 154. 

Rhabdomeson, description of the new 
genus, 337. 

Rhinochcerus sumatranus, note on, 
400. 

Robertson, D., on the Ostracoda of 
the Scilly Islands, and on the ana- 
tomy of Darwinella Stevensoni, 
114. 

Rowney, Prof., on Eozoon, 390. 

Royal Society, proceedings of the, 
60, 166, 249. 

Sabellides, new species of, 297. 

Sanderson, Dr. J. B., on the elec- 
trical phenomena which accom- 
pany irritation of the leaf of Dio- 
neea muscipula, 178. 

Sarcoptide, on the, 74. 

Sars, G. O., on Norwegian Hydroida, 
125. 

Schultze, Max, on Kozoon canadense, 
324, 379. 

Scincidee, new species of, 298. 

Scolecolepis cirrata, on the egg-sacs 
of, 260. 

Scolyphrus, characters of the new 
genus, 413. 

Scopodes, new species of, 276. 

Scudder, 8. H., on Iphiclides Ajax, 
186. 

Serranus, new species of, 250. 

Sertularella, new species of, 151. 

Sertularia, new species of, 129. 

Sharpe, R. B., on a new species of 
Megapode, 448. 

Shells, new, 70. 

Sibia, new species of, 160. 

Siebold, C. von, on the sterile eggs 
of bees, 65. ’ 
Smith, F., on the genera Epicharis, 
Centris, Eulema, and Euglossa, 

318, 857, 440. 

Sphyrzena, new species of, 157. 

Spirule, on the zoological relations 
of the Ammonites to the, 188. 

Sponges, new, 144; on the arrange- 
ment of, 284; on the relationship 
of the, to the Ascidians, 433. 

Spongozoa of Halisarca Dujardinii, 
on the, 316. 


INDEX. 


Stebbing, Rev. T. R. R., on a new 
British species of Arcturus, 291. 

Stellio, new species of, 453. 

Stromatopora, on the affinities of the 
genus, with descriptions of new 
species, 4. 

Sus scrofa, on the structure and de- 
velopment of the skull in, 249. 

Syllis, new species of, 295. 

Symborodon, new species of, 406. 

Syncoryne, new species of, 156. 

Tachys, new species of, 274, 

Techmessa, characters of the genus, 
113. 

Termites, contributions towards the 
natural history of the, 402. 

Tetrastemma, new species of, 409. 

Timareta, new species of, 383, 

Titeena, new species of, 103. 

Tranes, new species of, 387. 

Tremarctos, on the genus, 15. 

eae ee new species of, 

56. 

Triplosarus, characters of the new 
genus, 270. 

Tropopterus, new species of, 241. 

Umbellula, on specimens of, 258. 

Vermes of the second North-German 
polar voyage, 196, 

Verrill, A. E., on the occurrence of 
gigantic cuttlefishes on the coast 
of Newfoundland, 255. 

Vertebrates, on the number of classes 
of, and their mutual relations, 71. 

Walden, Viscount, on two new species 
of birds, 123. 

Whale, on the Bermuda Hump- 
backed, of Dudley, 186. 

Willemoes-Suhm, Dr. R. v., on a 
Land-Nemertean found in the 
Bermudas, 409. 

Williamson, Prof. W. C., on the 
Asterophyllites, 60. 

Wood-Mason, Mr., on the geogra- 
phical distribution of Carcinus 
meenas, 405, 

Xenelaphus, observations on, 331. 

Xestoleberis, new species of, 116. 

Young, Messrs., on a new genus of 
carboniferous Polyzoa, 339. 


END OF THE THIRTEENTH VOLUME. 


PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, 
RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET, 


duut So1g Woy UY, 


TID ELIA #8 YT My bop y ay 


AES ou 


t 
t 


yOu + 


rt 


Ay 4 “_) - : 
+ . ; Tee Set ne 
ae mM * i fie 
= 4 
} = 
a roe 
- - bd 
Pr - 4 
f) 
' 
. . 
~ 
' * 
3 F L 
* - 
t 
x, =. 
-~ = 
’ 
2 \ 
. 
. 
- 


¢{ UO PULA Oy Ute UTP] 4M 


BOER ARE ES 


ae 


Wd ELTA’ S yp ON bop y uuy 


0 ' tie 9 td 
7@ ee tee u 
: ae ae) 
5 ‘ 
‘ 
' 
>) 
/ 
ad = 
; = 
’ \ 
‘ ate 
; 
‘ 
; os = 
~ 


Ann & Hag Nat. Hist. $4 Vol. 13 PLM 


‘ Nes ame fd 
ook ot hae g iy 
bs Digs pan, & Menon 
i ep j c} Wee 
—) “ +P ‘ i ae “eC ay ue) | a kL 
7, : 3 P : ra 
j 
} H Se: 
y ; he 
i - hy ' 
< “ i wae Qn a 
‘ CONG 
+ . 
. - = yoke '¢ 
' Dy 
} 
he t 
= : . 
fr 
bike 1 
* r 
‘ 
¥ 
f ‘ 
' 
T 
sts 
‘ 
“ 
' 
~ 
a Pi f 
2 i ah 
hs Ss 
: oy * ~~, 
5 ¥ Ry 
. * 
i - 
‘ =! <5, 
7G, ‘ 
oon a a : 
} Ke 
* 
be 
* 
x 


r 


Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. I3. PLM 


Mintern Bros. imp. 


G.S.Brady del et lith. 


ie 
Peer = 
fi 
sl 
7" he ‘ 
’ 
4 . 
- 
™) . 
. 2 
A 
ay 
‘Se 
“ie 
hye 
, by ‘ay 
4 
' ' 
i a d 
‘ 
> = 
ad ‘ 
mi 
> 
; Ae 
ot 20% . lores 
Mahe Is 
l + a F 
“h 
he 
J 7 , a 
ed 
: 
> vv ' t 
2 
‘ 
or) 


es 
! = 
ae 
sy 
ie 
as 
x 
ov > 
*) 
t 
a 
SY bel 
‘, 
Ny 
, 
~ 
aco 
= 
4 


Anw.& Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. 13.PU.5. 


RL eS ees a ae | ne ke i 


, = ‘ 
J t 1 
f \ 
‘ . 
- s 1 E 
cs \ 
y 
~- te 


1 
, * 
' 
y, p 
. a 
, 4 ~ 
" 
“a0 
‘ 
i 
= ‘ 
< f 
. 
‘ 
- 
+ 
‘ H 
“ 
‘ 
ay ae 
A y 


a! 


Dd 
By 


Ann & Mag Nat Mist $1 Vol 13 Pt 


’ 


Mumtern Bros hth 


fintern Bros. lth. 


WV 


Le] 


€ 


ncks, 


Ann & Mag Nat Hist. §.4. Vol. 13. PL Vil 


= 
= 
= 
rs 
x 
—— 
es 
ce 
Cera 
as 
be 


Wantern Bs lith. 


te 


Pd 

4 
~ 
my 


, 
) 


Ann & Mag. Nat Hist. $4 Vol. 1. 


10 


Byi/, 


11 


Ann & Mag. Nat. Hist. 8.4. Vol.J3.PLXT 


ES 


. eee 


20 


re te Sot 


Bros .Lith 


Mintern 


TI. 


IL, 13. PL. 


C 


Ann. & Magq. Nat. Hist. S. 4, V 


Imfp 


mtern Bros 


M 


lick ad nat del et lith 


‘UNI .SNeuve 


fohatar Somg lomrewoan ny 
2 YOROsatscy Ty Do 


TIX 1d 'GELIA'b'S IYT TOK boyy uur 


“vF 


‘duit * soag WL PUL 


_—— 
SS 


AIX Id EI 7A bs eT PORT boyy yay 


Ann & Mag. Nat. Hist. 8.4. Vol. 13. PI. XV. 


Mmtern Bros imp 


~ — — 


* dtut * sotgp us8qUIY 


oo 


‘SNOLLOUVLNY SNIVSAHd 


TAX Id “179A B'S sy ON Bog y uuy 


Ne ale Je ee Bi ee jt ee i Yi — — oe 6 ee a 


Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. S.4.Vol.13 PLXM 


WMintern Rend + 


Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 8.4. Vol.13. PLXVIL 


Mintern Bros. imp. 


G.H Ford. 


Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.5. 4. Vol. 13. PUXEX. 


eH | 
Hi} i] iH) My 


HH ee WR } 
med oe 
Za Lait yy 
ete J | 
- Jay , | 


g j y ip 4) | ) 


Geo.West lith.ad nat 


BINDING SECT. JUN 12 We 


QOH The Annals & magazine of 
aE natural history 

M6 

ser.4 

Vuk 


Biological] 
& Medica] 
Serials 


PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE 
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET 


UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY 


wis 
oe, 


Ban 
has 
Ba 4 ee? 
Ric el ys S 


¥ 
yi